Scribd Logo
Upload

Welcome to Scribd!

  • Parameters Baseline

    Uploaded by

    Dmitriy Ignatov
    1K views333 pages
    The document describes the parameters, attributes, and their values for various MOs including Aal1TpVccTp, Aal2Ap. It provides details about the identifiers, labels, states, references to other objects, counts and other properties. Multiple blocks of text are repeated with only minor differences suggesting this is documentation for configuration of these management objects.

    Original Description:

    Copyright

    © Attribution Non-Commercial (BY-NC)

    Available Formats

    TXT, PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd

    Did you find this document useful?

    Is this content inappropriate?

    Report this Document
    The document describes the parameters, attributes, and their values for various MOs including Aal1TpVccTp, Aal2Ap. It provides details about the identifiers, labels, states, references to other objects, counts and other properties. Multiple blocks of text are repeated with only minor differences suggesting this is documentation for configuration of these management objects.

    Copyright:

    Attribution Non-Commercial (BY-NC)
    Download as TXT, PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
    Flag for inappropriate content
    1K views333 pages

    Parameters Baseline

    Uploaded by

    Dmitriy Ignatov
    The document describes the parameters, attributes, and their values for various MOs including Aal1TpVccTp, Aal2Ap. It provides details about the identifiers, labels, states, references to other objects, counts and other properties. Multiple blocks of text are repeated with only minor differences suggesting this is documentation for configuration of these management objects.

    Copyright:

    Attribution Non-Commercial (BY-NC)
    Download as TXT, PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
    Flag for inappropriate content
    of 333

    MOC_Name MO Param_Name Baseline_Value Para_Description Aal1TpVccTp Aal1TpVccTpId The value component of the RDN.

    Aal1TpVccTp userLabel Label for free use. Aal1TpVccTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Aal1TpVccTp ds0BundleId Reference to an instance of Ds0B undle MO. Aal1TpVccTp partialFill 47 Indicates how many bytes are fil led in each ATM cell. The value 47 indicates that cells are not partially filled , that is, all cells are filled completely. Partial filling of cells is used in circuit emulation, to reduce packetization delay. Refer to the Aal1TpVccTp cdvt Specifies the Cell Delay Variation Toler ance (CVDT). Refer to ATM Forum for more details. Unit: 0.001 ms, that is 1 micr osecond Aal1TpVccTp operationalState The operational state. Aal1TpVccTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VC end-to-end continuity check is active. Continuity checking means that a cell is sent downst ream when no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second. Continu ity check both enables generation of continuity check cells as Aal1TpVccTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the t ype of the performance monitoring mode used for the F5 PM OAM flow. Aal1TpVccTp nomPmBlockSize 0 Nominal block size for PM. The m inimum number of ATM cells that is sent before sending a Forward Performance Mon itoring (FPM) cell. Unit: Number of cells Aal1TpVccTp vclTpId Reference to an instance of VclTp MO. Aal1TpVccTp alarmReport 0 Specifies which type of alarms a re reported. Aal1TpVccTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM cou nters are activated for this MO instance, when MO class activation is used in th e Performance Management Service (PMS) interface. If true, this attribute activa tes all PM counters for this MO instance. This attribute setting is ign Aal1TpVccTp Aal1TpVccTpId The value component of the RDN. Aal1TpVccTp userLabel Label for free use. Aal1TpVccTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Aal1TpVccTp ds0BundleId Reference to an instance of Ds0B undle MO. Aal1TpVccTp partialFill 47 Indicates how many bytes are fil led in each ATM cell. The value 47 indicates that cells are not partially filled , that is, all cells are filled completely. Partial filling of cells is used in circuit emulation, to reduce packetization delay. Refer to the Aal1TpVccTp cdvt Specifies the Cell Delay Variation Toler ance (CVDT). Refer to ATM Forum for more details. Unit: 0.001 ms, that is 1 micr osecond Aal1TpVccTp operationalState The operational state. Aal1TpVccTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VC end-to-end continuity check is active. Continuity checking means that a cell is sent downst ream when no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second. Continu ity check both enables generation of continuity check cells as Aal1TpVccTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the t ype of the performance monitoring mode used for the F5 PM OAM flow. Aal1TpVccTp nomPmBlockSize 0 Nominal block size for PM. The m inimum number of ATM cells that is sent before sending a Forward Performance Mon itoring (FPM) cell. Unit: Number of cells Aal1TpVccTp vclTpId Reference to an instance of VclTp MO. Aal1TpVccTp alarmReport 0 Specifies which type of alarms a re reported. Aal1TpVccTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM cou nters are activated for this MO instance, when MO class activation is used in th e Performance Management Service (PMS) interface. If true, this attribute activa

    tes all PM counters for this MO instance. This attribute setting is ign Aal1TpVccTp Aal1TpVccTpId The value component of the RDN. Aal1TpVccTp userLabel Label for free use. Aal1TpVccTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Aal1TpVccTp ds0BundleId Reference to an instance of Ds0B undle MO. Aal1TpVccTp partialFill 47 Indicates how many bytes are fil led in each ATM cell. The value 47 indicates that cells are not partially filled , that is, all cells are filled completely. Partial filling of cells is used in circuit emulation, to reduce packetization delay. Refer to the Aal1TpVccTp cdvt Specifies the Cell Delay Variation Toler ance (CVDT). Refer to ATM Forum for more details. Unit: 0.001 ms, that is 1 micr osecond Aal1TpVccTp operationalState The operational state. Aal1TpVccTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VC end-to-end continuity check is active. Continuity checking means that a cell is sent downst ream when no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second. Continu ity check both enables generation of continuity check cells as Aal1TpVccTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the t ype of the performance monitoring mode used for the F5 PM OAM flow. Aal1TpVccTp nomPmBlockSize 0 Nominal block size for PM. The m inimum number of ATM cells that is sent before sending a Forward Performance Mon itoring (FPM) cell. Unit: Number of cells Aal1TpVccTp vclTpId Reference to an instance of VclTp MO. Aal1TpVccTp alarmReport 0 Specifies which type of alarms a re reported. Aal1TpVccTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM cou nters are activated for this MO instance, when MO class activation is used in th e Performance Management Service (PMS) interface. If true, this attribute activa tes all PM counters for this MO instance. This attribute setting is ign Aal2Ap Aal2ApId The value component of the RDN. Aal2Ap userLabel Label for free use. Aal2Ap reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Aal2Ap operationalState The operational state. Aal2Ap availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Aal2Ap timerErq 5000 Timer for Q.2630 establishment requests. Unit: 1 ms Aal2Ap timerRel 2000 Timer for Q.2630 release requests. Unit: 1 ms Aal2Ap sigLinkId Reference to a UniSaalTp MO or to an Mtp 3bAp MO that provides a signalling link for the Aal2Ap MO. Aal2Ap secondarySigLinkId Reference to a UniSaalTp MO that is used as a secondary signalling link. This attribute can be set only when sig LinkId is of type UniSaalTp. The reference to the secondary signalling link can be removed by setting this attribute to NULL. Aal2Ap rpuId The location of an AAL2 AP program represented b y a reference to a ReliableProgramUniter MO. When setting the rpuId, the attribu te reliableProgramLabel for the new rpuId must be the same as for the previous r puId. The rpuId must be specified when the MO i Aal2Ap aal2QoSCodePointProfileId The identity of the QoSC odePointProfile used by this MO. If this attribute is not specified, no QoS info rmation is sent in outgoing signalling messages from this AAL2 AP. If this attri bute is not specified, QoS Class A is assumed for incoming signalling m Aal2Ap nrOfConfiguredAal2Paths 0 The total number of Aal2PathVccT p MOs configured on this Aal2 Ap. Aal2Ap nrOfUnavailableAal2Paths 0 The total number of unav ailable Aal2PathVccTp instances on this Aal2Ap MO, that is the number of Aal2Pat

    hVccTp MOs connectected to this Aal2Ap MO, where administrativeState is LOCKED a nd operatonalState is DISABLED. Aal2Ap nrOfRemotelyBlockedAal2Paths Number of Aal2PathVccTp instances that are connected to this Aal2Ap MO and where remoteBlockingState is REMOTELY_BLOCKED. Aal2Ap allocationMode MANUAL(0) This attribute indicates if the RPU allocation for the AAL2 AP and its Path Distribution Units is manual or auto matic. The manual allocation mode is supported for all types of AAL2 APs, but th e automatic allocation mode is only supported for AAL2 APs usin Aal2Ap Aal2ApId The value component of the RDN. Aal2Ap userLabel Label for free use. Aal2Ap reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Aal2Ap operationalState The operational state. Aal2Ap availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Aal2Ap timerErq 5000 Timer for Q.2630 establishment requests. Unit: 1 ms Aal2Ap timerRel 2000 Timer for Q.2630 release requests. Unit: 1 ms Aal2Ap sigLinkId Reference to a UniSaalTp MO or to an Mtp 3bAp MO that provides a signalling link for the Aal2Ap MO. Aal2Ap secondarySigLinkId Reference to a UniSaalTp MO that is used as a secondary signalling link. This attribute can be set only when sig LinkId is of type UniSaalTp. The reference to the secondary signalling link can be removed by setting this attribute to NULL. Aal2Ap rpuId The location of an AAL2 AP program represented b y a reference to a ReliableProgramUniter MO. When setting the rpuId, the attribu te reliableProgramLabel for the new rpuId must be the same as for the previous r puId. The rpuId must be specified when the MO i Aal2Ap aal2QoSCodePointProfileId The identity of the QoSC odePointProfile used by this MO. If this attribute is not specified, no QoS info rmation is sent in outgoing signalling messages from this AAL2 AP. If this attri bute is not specified, QoS Class A is assumed for incoming signalling m Aal2Ap nrOfConfiguredAal2Paths 0 The total number of Aal2PathVccT p MOs configured on this Aal2 Ap. Aal2Ap nrOfUnavailableAal2Paths 0 The total number of unav ailable Aal2PathVccTp instances on this Aal2Ap MO, that is the number of Aal2Pat hVccTp MOs connectected to this Aal2Ap MO, where administrativeState is LOCKED a nd operatonalState is DISABLED. Aal2Ap nrOfRemotelyBlockedAal2Paths Number of Aal2PathVccTp instances that are connected to this Aal2Ap MO and where remoteBlockingState is REMOTELY_BLOCKED. Aal2Ap allocationMode Iu, Iur: MANUAL(0) Iub: AUTOMATIC(1) This att ribute indicates if the RPU allocation for the AAL2 AP and its Path Distribution Units is manual or automatic. The manual allocation mode is supported for all t ypes of AAL2 APs, but the automatic allocation mode is only supported for AAL2 A Ps usin Aal2Ap Aal2ApId The value component of the RDN. Aal2Ap userLabel Label for free use. Aal2Ap reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Aal2Ap operationalState The operational state. Aal2Ap availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Aal2Ap timerErq 5000 Timer for Q.2630 establishment requests. Unit: 1 ms Aal2Ap timerRel 2000 Timer for Q.2630 release requests. Unit: 1 ms Aal2Ap sigLinkId Reference to a UniSaalTp MO or to an Mtp

    3bAp MO that provides a signalling link for the Aal2Ap MO. Aal2Ap secondarySigLinkId Reference to a UniSaalTp MO that is used as a secondary signalling link. This attribute can be set only when sig LinkId is of type UniSaalTp. The reference to the secondary signalling link can be removed by setting this attribute to NULL. Aal2Ap rpuId The location of an AAL2 AP program represented b y a reference to a ReliableProgramUniter MO. When setting the rpuId, the attribu te reliableProgramLabel for the new rpuId must be the same as for the previous r puId. The rpuId must be specified when the MO i Aal2Ap aal2QoSCodePointProfileId The identity of the QoSC odePointProfile used by this MO. If this attribute is not specified, no QoS info rmation is sent in outgoing signalling messages from this AAL2 AP. If this attri bute is not specified, QoS Class A is assumed for incoming signalling m Aal2Ap nrOfConfiguredAal2Paths 0 The total number of Aal2PathVccT p MOs configured on this Aal2 Ap. Aal2Ap nrOfUnavailableAal2Paths 0 The total number of unav ailable Aal2PathVccTp instances on this Aal2Ap MO, that is the number of Aal2Pat hVccTp MOs connectected to this Aal2Ap MO, where administrativeState is LOCKED a nd operatonalState is DISABLED. Aal2Ap nrOfRemotelyBlockedAal2Paths Number of Aal2PathVccTp instances that are connected to this Aal2Ap MO and where remoteBlockingState is REMOTELY_BLOCKED. Aal2Ap allocationMode MANUAL(0) This attribute indicates if the RPU allocation for the AAL2 AP and its Path Distribution Units is manual or auto matic. The manual allocation mode is supported for all types of AAL2 APs, but th e automatic allocation mode is only supported for AAL2 APs usin Aal2PathDistributionUnit Aal2PathDistributionUnitId The value component of the RDN. Aal2PathDistributionUnit userLabel Label for free u se. Aal2PathDistributionUnit rpuId The location of an AAL2 Path Resource Control Program represented by a reference to a ReliableProgramUni ter MO. When setting the rpuId, the reliableProgramLabel for the new rpuId must be the same as for the previous rpuId. This attribute must be s Aal2PathDistributionUnit aal2PathVccTpList List of references to Aal2PathVccTp MOs. Setting of this attribute removes the current l ist of Aal2PathVccTp MOs. The value of aal2PathId must be unique amongst all pat hs within all Aal2PathDistributionUnit MOs that belong to the same Aal2Ap MO. If the Aal2PathDistributionUnit Aal2PathDistributionUnitId The value component of the RDN. Aal2PathDistributionUnit userLabel Label for free u se. Aal2PathDistributionUnit rpuId The location of an AAL2 Path Resource Control Program represented by a reference to a ReliableProgramUni ter MO. When setting the rpuId, the reliableProgramLabel for the new rpuId must be the same as for the previous rpuId. This attribute must be s Aal2PathDistributionUnit aal2PathVccTpList List of references to Aal2PathVccTp MOs. Setting of this attribute removes the current l ist of Aal2PathVccTp MOs. The value of aal2PathId must be unique amongst all pat hs within all Aal2PathDistributionUnit MOs that belong to the same Aal2Ap MO. If the Aal2PathDistributionUnit Aal2PathDistributionUnitId The value component of the RDN. Aal2PathDistributionUnit userLabel Label for free u se. Aal2PathDistributionUnit rpuId The location of an AAL2 Path Resource Control Program represented by a reference to a ReliableProgramUni ter MO. When setting the rpuId, the reliableProgramLabel for the new rpuId must be the same as for the previous rpuId. This attribute must be s

    Aal2PathDistributionUnit aal2PathVccTpList List of references to Aal2PathVccTp MOs. Setting of this attribute removes the current l ist of Aal2PathVccTp MOs. The value of aal2PathId must be unique amongst all pat hs within all Aal2PathDistributionUnit MOs that belong to the same Aal2Ap MO. If the Aal2PathVccTp Aal2PathVccTpId The value component of the RDN. Aal2PathVccTp userLabel Label for free use. Aal2PathVccTp vclTpId Reference to an instance of VclTp MO. In order to set this attribute, the administrativeState or therelated physical por t must be LOCKED. Aal2PathVccTp administrativeState 0 The administrative state . When setting the admininstrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, 1800 seconds (30 minut es) will elapse before the MO goes into state LOCKED. Aal2PathVccTp operationalState The operational state. Aal2PathVccTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. Aal2PathVccTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Aal2PathVccTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VC end-to-end continuity check is active. Continuity checking means that a cell is sent downst ream when no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second. Continu ity check both enables generation of continuity check cells as Aal2PathVccTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the t ype of the performance monitoring mode used for the F5 PM OAM flow. Aal2PathVccTp nomPmBlocksize 0 Nominal block size for PM. The m inimum number of ATM cells that is sent before sending a Forward Performance Mon itoring (FPM) cell. Unit: Number of cells Aal2PathVccTp timerCu 10 Timer that assures that CPS packets with one or more octets already packed in the ATM cell, wait at most the duration of timerCu before being scheduled for transmission. Unit: 0.1 ms, that is 100 micr oseconds Aal2PathVccTp aal2PathId Identifies the path in the Q.263 0 protocol. The value must be unique within all Aal2PathDistributionUnit MOs und er the same Aal2Ap MO. The aal2PathId is used by the AAL2 connection control fun ction in two AAL2 nodes to uniquely identify an AAL2 path betwe Aal2PathVccTp aal2PathOwner Indicates whether this AAL2 Path VCC Termination Point is considered to be the owner of the AAL2 Path in order t o decide the channel selection procedure in the Q.2630 protocol. In order to set this attribute, the Aal2PathVccTp MO must not be reserved and Aal2PathVccTp alarmReport 0 Specifies which type of alarms a re reported. Aal2PathVccTp aal2QoSProfileId Reference to an instance of Aal2QosProfile MO. Aal2PathVccTp aal2QoSAvailableProfiles Specifies which QoS class can be supported by this MO. Aal2PathVccTp remoteBlockingState 0 Represents whether this AAL2 Path VCC Termination Point is locked or unlocked from the remote end. Aal2PathVccTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM cou nters are activated for this MO instance, when MO class activation is used in th e Performance Management Service (PMS) interface. If true, this attribute activa tes all PM counters for this MO instance. This attribute setting is ign Aal2PathVccTp Aal2PathVccTpId The value component of the RDN. Aal2PathVccTp userLabel Label for free use. Aal2PathVccTp vclTpId Reference to an instance of VclTp MO. In order to set this attribute, the administrativeState or therelated physical por t must be LOCKED. Aal2PathVccTp administrativeState 0 The administrative state . When setting the admininstrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, 1800 seconds (30 minut es) will elapse before the MO goes into state LOCKED. Aal2PathVccTp operationalState The operational state.

    Aal2PathVccTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. Aal2PathVccTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Aal2PathVccTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VC end-to-end continuity check is active. Continuity checking means that a cell is sent downst ream when no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second. Continu ity check both enables generation of continuity check cells as Aal2PathVccTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the t ype of the performance monitoring mode used for the F5 PM OAM flow. Aal2PathVccTp nomPmBlocksize 0 Nominal block size for PM. The m inimum number of ATM cells that is sent before sending a Forward Performance Mon itoring (FPM) cell. Unit: Number of cells Aal2PathVccTp timerCu Normally: 10If core network use 0.3 ms: 3 Timer that assures that CPS packets with one or more octets already packed in th e ATM cell, wait at most the duration of timerCu before being scheduled for tran smission. Unit: 0.1 ms, that is 100 microseconds Aal2PathVccTp aal2PathId Identifies the path in the Q.263 0 protocol. The value must be unique within all Aal2PathDistributionUnit MOs und er the same Aal2Ap MO. The aal2PathId is used by the AAL2 connection control fun ction in two AAL2 nodes to uniquely identify an AAL2 path betwe Aal2PathVccTp aal2PathOwner Indicates whether this AAL2 Path VCC Termination Point is considered to be the owner of the AAL2 Path in order t o decide the channel selection procedure in the Q.2630 protocol. In order to set this attribute, the Aal2PathVccTp MO must not be reserved and Aal2PathVccTp alarmReport 0 Specifies which type of alarms a re reported. Aal2PathVccTp aal2QoSProfileId Reference to an instance of Aal2QosProfile MO. Aal2PathVccTp aal2QoSAvailableProfiles Specifies which QoS class can be supported by this MO. Aal2PathVccTp remoteBlockingState 0 Represents whether this AAL2 Path VCC Termination Point is locked or unlocked from the remote end. Aal2PathVccTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM cou nters are activated for this MO instance, when MO class activation is used in th e Performance Management Service (PMS) interface. If true, this attribute activa tes all PM counters for this MO instance. This attribute setting is ign Aal2PathVccTp Aal2PathVccTpId The value component of the RDN. Aal2PathVccTp userLabel Label for free use. Aal2PathVccTp vclTpId Reference to an instance of VclTp MO. In order to set this attribute, the administrativeState or therelated physical por t must be LOCKED. Aal2PathVccTp administrativeState 0 The administrative state . When setting the admininstrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, 1800 seconds (30 minut es) will elapse before the MO goes into state LOCKED. Aal2PathVccTp operationalState The operational state. Aal2PathVccTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. Aal2PathVccTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Aal2PathVccTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VC end-to-end continuity check is active. Continuity checking means that a cell is sent downst ream when no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second. Continu ity check both enables generation of continuity check cells as Aal2PathVccTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the t ype of the performance monitoring mode used for the F5 PM OAM flow. Aal2PathVccTp nomPmBlocksize 0 Nominal block size for PM. The m inimum number of ATM cells that is sent before sending a Forward Performance Mon itoring (FPM) cell. Unit: Number of cells Aal2PathVccTp timerCu 10 Timer that assures that CPS packets with

    one or more octets already packed in the ATM cell, wait at most the duration of timerCu before being scheduled for transmission. Unit: 0.1 ms, that is 100 micr oseconds Aal2PathVccTp aal2PathId Identifies the path in the Q.263 0 protocol. The value must be unique within all Aal2PathDistributionUnit MOs und er the same Aal2Ap MO. The aal2PathId is used by the AAL2 connection control fun ction in two AAL2 nodes to uniquely identify an AAL2 path betwe Aal2PathVccTp aal2PathOwner Indicates whether this AAL2 Path VCC Termination Point is considered to be the owner of the AAL2 Path in order t o decide the channel selection procedure in the Q.2630 protocol. In order to set this attribute, the Aal2PathVccTp MO must not be reserved and Aal2PathVccTp alarmReport 0 Specifies which type of alarms a re reported. Aal2PathVccTp aal2QoSProfileId Reference to an instance of Aal2QosProfile MO. Aal2PathVccTp aal2QoSAvailableProfiles Specifies which QoS class can be supported by this MO. Aal2PathVccTp remoteBlockingState 0 Represents whether this AAL2 Path VCC Termination Point is locked or unlocked from the remote end. Aal2PathVccTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM cou nters are activated for this MO instance, when MO class activation is used in th e Performance Management Service (PMS) interface. If true, this attribute activa tes all PM counters for this MO instance. This attribute setting is ign Aal2QosCodePointProfile Aal2QosCodePointProfileId The valu e component of the RDN. Aal2QosCodePointProfile userLabel Label for free use. Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointA 128 The Code Point for Class A. Recommended value for Class A, 128. Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointB 129 The Code Point for Class B. Recommended value for Class B, 129. Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointC 130 The Code Point for Class C. Recommended value for Class C, 130. Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointD 131 The Code Point for Class D. Recommended value for Class D, 131. Aal2QosCodePointProfile reservedBy Contains a list of Aal2A p MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Aal2QosCodePointProfile Aal2QosCodePointProfileId The valu e component of the RDN. Aal2QosCodePointProfile userLabel Label for free use. Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointA 128 The Code Point for Class A. Recommended value for Class A, 128. Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointB 129 The Code Point for Class B. Recommended value for Class B, 129. Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointC 130 The Code Point for Class C. Recommended value for Class C, 130. Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointD 131 The Code Point for Class D. Recommended value for Class D, 131. Aal2QosCodePointProfile reservedBy Contains a list of Aal2A p MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Aal2QosCodePointProfile Aal2QosCodePointProfileId The valu e component of the RDN. Aal2QosCodePointProfile userLabel Label for free use. Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointA 128 The Code Point for Class A. Recommended value for Class A, 128. Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointB 129 The Code Point for Class B. Recommended value for Class B, 129. Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointC 130 The Code Point for Class C. Recommended value for Class C, 130. Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointD 131 The Code Point for Class D. Recommended value for Class D, 131.

    Aal2QosCodePointProfile reservedBy Contains a list of Aal2A p MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Aal2QosProfile Aal2QosProfileId The value component of t he RDN. Aal2QosProfile userLabel Label for free use. Aal2QosProfile profileClassA This attribute holds the values applicable for QoS Class A. Aal2QosProfile profileClassB This attribute holds the values applicable for QoS Class B. Aal2QosProfile profileClassC This attribute holds the values applicable for QoS Class C. Aal2QosProfile profileClassD This attribute holds the values applicable for QoS Class D. Aal2QosProfile reservedBy Contains a list of Aal2PathVccTp MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Aal2QosProfile profileClassA.boundOnNodeDelay 10000 The upper bound on the delay (delay=queueing and serving of Aal2 packets in an Aal2 mux + delay on ATM layer) through the current node. Unit: 1 microseconds. Aal2QosProfile profileClassA.boundOnProbOfDelay 500000 Represen ts the upper bound on the probability that the delay in the node exceeds the del ay limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassA.boundOnProbOfLoss 500000 Represents the u pper bound of the cell loss probability in the current node. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassB.boundOnNodeDelay 20000 The upper bound on the delay (delay=queueing and serving of Aal2 packets in an Aal2 mux + delay on ATM layer) through the current node. Unit: 1 microseconds. Aal2QosProfile profileClassB.boundOnProbOfDelay 500000 Represen ts the upper bound on the probability that the delay in the node exceeds the del ay limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassB.boundOnProbOfLoss 500000 Represents the u pper bound of the cell loss probability in the current node. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassC.boundOnNodeDelay 25000 The upper bound on the delay (delay=queueing and serving of Aal2 packets in an Aal2 mux + delay on ATM layer) through the current node. Unit: 1 microseconds. Aal2QosProfile profileClassC.boundOnProbOfDelay 1000000000 Represents the upper bound on the probability that the delay in the node exceeds the delay limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassC.boundOnProbOfLoss 1000000000 Represen ts the upper bound of the cell loss probability in the current node. Unit: 1/100 0000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassD.boundOnNodeDelay 50000 The upper bound on the delay (delay=queueing and serving of Aal2 packets in an Aal2 mux + delay on ATM layer) through the current node. Unit: 1 microseconds. Aal2QosProfile profileClassD.boundOnProbOfDelay 1000000000 Represents the upper bound on the probability that the delay in the node exceeds the delay limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000 s Aal2QosProfile profileClassD.boundOnProbOfLoss 1000000000 Represen ts the upper bound of the cell loss probability in the current node. Unit: 1/100 0000000 Aal2QosProfile Aal2QosProfileId The value component of t he RDN. Aal2QosProfile userLabel Label for free use. Aal2QosProfile profileClassA This attribute holds the values applicable for QoS Class A. Aal2QosProfile profileClassB This attribute holds the values applicable for QoS Class B. Aal2QosProfile profileClassC This attribute holds the values applicable for QoS Class C. Aal2QosProfile profileClassD This attribute holds the values applicable for QoS Class D.

    Aal2QosProfile reservedBy Contains a list of Aal2PathVccTp MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Aal2QosProfile profileClassA.boundOnNodeDelay 10000 The upper bound on the delay (delay=queueing and serving of Aal2 packets in an Aal2 mux + delay on ATM layer) through the current node. Unit: 1 microseconds. Aal2QosProfile profileClassA.boundOnProbOfDelay 500000 Represen ts the upper bound on the probability that the delay in the node exceeds the del ay limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassA.boundOnProbOfLoss 500000 Represents the u pper bound of the cell loss probability in the current node. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassB.boundOnNodeDelay 20000 The upper bound on the delay (delay=queueing and serving of Aal2 packets in an Aal2 mux + delay on ATM layer) through the current node. Unit: 1 microseconds. Aal2QosProfile profileClassB.boundOnProbOfDelay 500000 Represen ts the upper bound on the probability that the delay in the node exceeds the del ay limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassB.boundOnProbOfLoss 500000 Represents the u pper bound of the cell loss probability in the current node. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassC.boundOnNodeDelay 25000 The upper bound on the delay (delay=queueing and serving of Aal2 packets in an Aal2 mux + delay on ATM layer) through the current node. Unit: 1 microseconds. Aal2QosProfile profileClassC.boundOnProbOfDelay 1000000000 Represents the upper bound on the probability that the delay in the node exceeds the delay limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassC.boundOnProbOfLoss 1000000000 Represen ts the upper bound of the cell loss probability in the current node. Unit: 1/100 0000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassD.boundOnNodeDelay 50000 The upper bound on the delay (delay=queueing and serving of Aal2 packets in an Aal2 mux + delay on ATM layer) through the current node. Unit: 1 microseconds. Aal2QosProfile profileClassD.boundOnProbOfDelay 1000000000 Represents the upper bound on the probability that the delay in the node exceeds the delay limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000 s Aal2QosProfile profileClassD.boundOnProbOfLoss 1000000000 Represen ts the upper bound of the cell loss probability in the current node. Unit: 1/100 0000000 Aal2QosProfile Aal2QosProfileId The value component of t he RDN. Aal2QosProfile userLabel Label for free use. Aal2QosProfile profileClassA This attribute holds the values applicable for QoS Class A. Aal2QosProfile profileClassB This attribute holds the values applicable for QoS Class B. Aal2QosProfile profileClassC This attribute holds the values applicable for QoS Class C. Aal2QosProfile profileClassD This attribute holds the values applicable for QoS Class D. Aal2QosProfile reservedBy Contains a list of Aal2PathVccTp MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Aal2QosProfile profileClassA.boundOnNodeDelay 10000 The upper bound on the delay (delay=queueing and serving of Aal2 packets in an Aal2 mux + delay on ATM layer) through the current node. Unit: 1 microseconds. Aal2QosProfile profileClassA.boundOnProbOfDelay 500000 Represen ts the upper bound on the probability that the delay in the node exceeds the del ay limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassA.boundOnProbOfLoss 500000 Represents the u pper bound of the cell loss probability in the current node. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassB.boundOnNodeDelay 20000 The upper bound on the delay (delay=queueing and serving of Aal2 packets in an Aal2 mux + delay on ATM layer) through the current node. Unit: 1 microseconds.

    Aal2QosProfile profileClassB.boundOnProbOfDelay 500000 Represen ts the upper bound on the probability that the delay in the node exceeds the del ay limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassB.boundOnProbOfLoss 500000 Represents the u pper bound of the cell loss probability in the current node. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassC.boundOnNodeDelay 25000 The upper bound on the delay (delay=queueing and serving of Aal2 packets in an Aal2 mux + delay on ATM layer) through the current node. Unit: 1 microseconds. Aal2QosProfile profileClassC.boundOnProbOfDelay 1000000000 Represents the upper bound on the probability that the delay in the node exceeds the delay limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassC.boundOnProbOfLoss 1000000000 Represen ts the upper bound of the cell loss probability in the current node. Unit: 1/100 0000000 Aal2QosProfile profileClassD.boundOnNodeDelay 50000 The upper bound on the delay (delay=queueing and serving of Aal2 packets in an Aal2 mux + delay on ATM layer) through the current node. Unit: 1 microseconds. Aal2QosProfile profileClassD.boundOnProbOfDelay 1000000000 Represents the upper bound on the probability that the delay in the node exceeds the delay limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000 s Aal2QosProfile profileClassD.boundOnProbOfLoss 1000000000 Represen ts the upper bound of the cell loss probability in the current node. Unit: 1/100 0000000 Aal2RoutingCase Aal2RoutingCaseId The value component of t he RDN. Aal2RoutingCase userLabel Label for free use. Aal2RoutingCase routeList An array of alternative routes i dentified by the concerned Aal2Ap MOs. A routeList can have 0 to 5 Aal2Ap MOs. T he Aal2Ap must be unique. If this attribute is set, the routePriorityList must a lso be set with the same number of values (that is, if the rout Aal2RoutingCase routePriorityList A list of all the Aal2Ap priorities. The priority values can be in the range 1 to 5, one being the highe st priority. The Aal2Aps can have the same priorities. Aal2RoutingCase numberDirection Defines the possible set of AAL type 2 Service Endpoint Addresses (A2EA) that match the routing case. The number direction of a routing case is interpreted as all AAL type 2 Service Endpoint A ddresses starting with the string of numbers defined in the num Aal2RoutingCase Aal2RoutingCaseId The value component of t he RDN. Aal2RoutingCase userLabel Label for free use. Aal2RoutingCase routeList An array of alternative routes i dentified by the concerned Aal2Ap MOs. A routeList can have 0 to 5 Aal2Ap MOs. T he Aal2Ap must be unique. If this attribute is set, the routePriorityList must a lso be set with the same number of values (that is, if the rout Aal2RoutingCase routePriorityList A list of all the Aal2Ap priorities. The priority values can be in the range 1 to 5, one being the highe st priority. The Aal2Aps can have the same priorities. Aal2RoutingCase numberDirection Defines the possible set of AAL type 2 Service Endpoint Addresses (A2EA) that match the routing case. The number direction of a routing case is interpreted as all AAL type 2 Service Endpoint A ddresses starting with the string of numbers defined in the num Aal2RoutingCase Aal2RoutingCaseId The value component of t he RDN. Aal2RoutingCase userLabel Label for free use. Aal2RoutingCase routeList An array of alternative routes i dentified by the concerned Aal2Ap MOs. A routeList can have 0 to 5 Aal2Ap MOs. T he Aal2Ap must be unique. If this attribute is set, the routePriorityList must a lso be set with the same number of values (that is, if the rout Aal2RoutingCase routePriorityList A list of all the Aal2Ap priorities. The priority values can be in the range 1 to 5, one being the highe

    st priority. The Aal2Aps can have the same priorities. Aal2RoutingCase numberDirection Defines the possible set of AAL type 2 Service Endpoint Addresses (A2EA) that match the routing case. The number direction of a routing case is interpreted as all AAL type 2 Service Endpoint A ddresses starting with the string of numbers defined in the num Aal2Sp Aal2SpId The value component of the RDN. Aal2Sp userLabel Label for free use. Aal2Sp a2ea An E.164 format number that specifies the AAL ty pe 2 Service Endpoint Address of the node. Length Range: 1..15 Alphabet: 0123456 789 It is not allowed to use leading zeros when configuring this attribute. Aal2Sp Aal2SpId The value component of the RDN. Aal2Sp userLabel Label for free use. Aal2Sp a2ea An E.164 format number that specifies the AAL ty pe 2 Service Endpoint Address of the node. Length Range: 1..15 Alphabet: 0123456 789 It is not allowed to use leading zeros when configuring this attribute. Aal2Sp Aal2SpId The value component of the RDN. Aal2Sp userLabel Label for free use. Aal2Sp a2ea An E.164 format number that specifies the AAL ty pe 2 Service Endpoint Address of the node. Length Range: 1..15 Alphabet: 0123456 789 It is not allowed to use leading zeros when configuring this attribute. Aal5TpVccTp Aal5TpVccTpId The value component of the RDN. Aal5TpVccTp userLabel Label for free use. Aal5TpVccTp processorId Specifies on what processor the termination point resides. The processor can either be a board processor or a ma in processor (PlugInUnit MO) or an SP processor (Spm MO). The operationalState o f this MO is DISABLED, until this attribute is set. This attrib Aal5TpVccTp vclTpId Reference to an instance of VclTp MO. Aal5TpVccTp operationalState The operational state. Aal5TpVccTp fromUserMaxSduSize The maximum SDU size in number of octets received from the user. The allowed range for the atribute maxS duSize in UniSaalTp MO and NniSaalTp MO, is dependent on the processor type: SP: lowest maxSduSize =1, highest maxSduSize=1600 BP: lowest maxSduSize =1 Aal5TpVccTp toUserMaxSduSize The maximum SDU size in number of octets sent to the user. The allowed range for the atribute maxSduSize in UniSaalTp MO and NniSaalTp MO, is dependent on the processor type: SP: lowes t maxSduSize =1, highest maxSduSize=1600 BP: lowest maxSduSize =1, high Aal5TpVccTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. Aal5TpVccTp alarmReport 0 Specifies which type of alarms a re reported. Aal5TpVccTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VC end-to-end continuity check is active. Continuity checking means that a cell is sent downst ream when no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second. Continu ity check both enables generation of continuity check cells as Aal5TpVccTp nomPmBlkSize 0 Nominal block size for PM. The m inimum number of ATM cells that is sent before sending a Forward Performance Mon itoring (FPM) cell. Unit: Number of cells Aal5TpVccTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the t ype of the performance monitoring mode used for the F5 PM OAM flow. Aal5TpVccTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM cou nters are activated for this MO instance, when MO class activation is used in th e Performance Management Service (PMS) interface. If true, this attribute activa tes all PM counters for this MO instance. This attribute setting is ign Aal5TpVccTp Aal5TpVccTpId The value component of the RDN. Aal5TpVccTp userLabel Label for free use. Aal5TpVccTp processorId Specifies on what processor the termination point resides. The processor can either be a board processor or a ma in processor (PlugInUnit MO) or an SP processor (Spm MO). The operationalState o f this MO is DISABLED, until this attribute is set. This attrib Aal5TpVccTp vclTpId Reference to an instance of VclTp MO.

    Aal5TpVccTp operationalState The operational state. Aal5TpVccTp fromUserMaxSduSize The maximum SDU size in number of octets received from the user. The allowed range for the atribute maxS duSize in UniSaalTp MO and NniSaalTp MO, is dependent on the processor type: SP: lowest maxSduSize =1, highest maxSduSize=1600 BP: lowest maxSduSize =1 Aal5TpVccTp toUserMaxSduSize The maximum SDU size in number of octets sent to the user. The allowed range for the atribute maxSduSize in UniSaalTp MO and NniSaalTp MO, is dependent on the processor type: SP: lowes t maxSduSize =1, highest maxSduSize=1600 BP: lowest maxSduSize =1, high Aal5TpVccTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. Aal5TpVccTp alarmReport 0 Specifies which type of alarms a re reported. Aal5TpVccTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VC end-to-end continuity check is active. Continuity checking means that a cell is sent downst ream when no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second. Continu ity check both enables generation of continuity check cells as Aal5TpVccTp nomPmBlkSize 0 Nominal block size for PM. The m inimum number of ATM cells that is sent before sending a Forward Performance Mon itoring (FPM) cell. Unit: Number of cells Aal5TpVccTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the t ype of the performance monitoring mode used for the F5 PM OAM flow. Aal5TpVccTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM cou nters are activated for this MO instance, when MO class activation is used in th e Performance Management Service (PMS) interface. If true, this attribute activa tes all PM counters for this MO instance. This attribute setting is ign Aal5TpVccTp Aal5TpVccTpId The value component of the RDN. Aal5TpVccTp userLabel Label for free use. Aal5TpVccTp processorId Specifies on what processor the termination point resides. The processor can either be a board processor or a ma in processor (PlugInUnit MO) or an SP processor (Spm MO). The operationalState o f this MO is DISABLED, until this attribute is set. This attrib Aal5TpVccTp vclTpId Reference to an instance of VclTp MO. Aal5TpVccTp operationalState The operational state. Aal5TpVccTp fromUserMaxSduSize The maximum SDU size in number of octets received from the user. The allowed range for the atribute maxS duSize in UniSaalTp MO and NniSaalTp MO, is dependent on the processor type: SP: lowest maxSduSize =1, highest maxSduSize=1600 BP: lowest maxSduSize =1 Aal5TpVccTp toUserMaxSduSize The maximum SDU size in number of octets sent to the user. The allowed range for the atribute maxSduSize in UniSaalTp MO and NniSaalTp MO, is dependent on the processor type: SP: lowes t maxSduSize =1, highest maxSduSize=1600 BP: lowest maxSduSize =1, high Aal5TpVccTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. Aal5TpVccTp alarmReport 0 Specifies which type of alarms a re reported. Aal5TpVccTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VC end-to-end continuity check is active. Continuity checking means that a cell is sent downst ream when no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second. Continu ity check both enables generation of continuity check cells as Aal5TpVccTp nomPmBlkSize 0 Nominal block size for PM. The m inimum number of ATM cells that is sent before sending a Forward Performance Mon itoring (FPM) cell. Unit: Number of cells Aal5TpVccTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the t ype of the performance monitoring mode used for the F5 PM OAM flow. Aal5TpVccTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM cou nters are activated for this MO instance, when MO class activation is used in th e Performance Management Service (PMS) interface. If true, this attribute activa tes all PM counters for this MO instance. This attribute setting is ign Accu AccuId

    Accu deviceRef Reference to the AC device that supervis es this unit. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: PCU created. Ref. [CB _ECF] Accu alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the non-processing u nit. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_ REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when b it 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstandi Accu greenLed Indicates the operational status of the non-processing unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not support ed. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = Power no t present, but since the LED state is not readable in t Accu productionDate 0 Date the unit was produced (part of PID) . Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondi tion: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Accu productName Product name of the unit (part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Preconditi on: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Accu productNumber Product number of the unit (part of PID) . Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondi tion: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Accu productRevision Product revision of the unit (part of PI D). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precon dition: Hardware must be installed Ref. [FS_PIY] Accu productType 0 Product type (PID) is used by product in ventory to select products. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precon dition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Accu redLed Indicates the fault status of the non-processing unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not supported. ? NOT_AVAI LABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = No fault. ? STEADY_LIG HT = Fault. Use cases: MEC_310 Ref. [FS_MEC] Accu serialNumber Unique number that identifies the unit ( part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_F U:3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Accu yellowLed Indicates the information status of the non-processing unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not support ed. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = Board un locked. ? STEADY_LIGHT = Board locked. ? SLOW_BLINK = S AccuSubrack AccuSubrackId AccuSubrack cabinetPosition Free text, that denotes the cabi net position on-site. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL_RBS_FU :12 Ref. [CB_ECF] AccuSubrack subrackPosition The subrack position. The value consist of (<X><Y><Z>): X = Cabinet position within the node starting from the l eft, one digit (1 - 9). Y = Subrack vertical position within the cabinet startin g from the ground, one letter (A - Z). Z = Subrack horizontal p AcDevice AcDeviceId AcDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: AUC_310 Ref. [FS_AUC] AcDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I AcDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] AcDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_310 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.7 31Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] AcDeviceSet AcDeviceSetId AcDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status

    of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_309 Specificatio AcDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_309 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] ActiveOtherLMs ActiveOtherLMsId The value component of t he RDN. ActiveOtherLMs reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. ActiveOtherLMs otherLoaderNameContents References to instances of the LoadModule MO, with loaderType set to OTHER and otherLoaderName set. ActiveOtherLMs activeLMs References to active instances o f the LoadModule MO, with loaderType set to OTHER. ActiveOtherLMs ActiveOtherLMsId The value component of t he RDN. ActiveOtherLMs reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. ActiveOtherLMs otherLoaderNameContents References to instances of the LoadModule MO, with loaderType set to OTHER and otherLoaderName set. ActiveOtherLMs activeLMs References to active instances o f the LoadModule MO, with loaderType set to OTHER. ActiveOtherLMs ActiveOtherLMsId The value component of t he RDN. ActiveOtherLMs reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. ActiveOtherLMs otherLoaderNameContents References to instances of the LoadModule MO, with loaderType set to OTHER and otherLoaderName set. ActiveOtherLMs activeLMs References to active instances o f the LoadModule MO, with loaderType set to OTHER. AgpsPositioning AgpsPositioningId Naming attribute.Contain s the value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. AgpsPositioning altitudeDirection HEIGHT(0) Altitude directi on of the UE reference position, independent of whether the pre-estimate is succ essful or the RNC instead uses a fall-back position. The direction refers to hei ght above or depth below the WGS84 ellipsoid surface.Before starting the GPS me AgpsPositioning altitude Altitude of the UE reference pos ition, independent of whether the pre-estimate is successful or the RNC instead uses a fall-back position. Altitudes larger than 32767 meters are represented as 32767 meters. Before starting the GPS measurements in the UE, AgpsPositioning uncertaintyAltitude Uncertainty in altitude for the UE reference position, independent of whether the pre-estimate is succes sful or the RNC instead uses a fall-back position. Before starting the GPS measu rements in the UE, the RNC makes a pre-estimate of the UE position. If AgpsPositioning confidence Confidence of the UE reference p osition. This value is only used when the pre-estimate is successful, that is, i s used as the UE reference position. Before starting the GPS measurements in the UE, the RNC makes a pre-estimate of the UE position. If the pr AgpsPositioning polygonRadiusFactor Scale factor that is mul tiplied with the uncertainty estimateThis value is only used when the pre-estima te is successful, that is, used as the UE reference position. Before starting th e GPS measurements in the UE, the RNC makes a pre-estimate of the UE po AgpsPositioning utranRnsPosition Fall-back position used when the pre-estimate fails. Before starting the GPS measurements in the UE, the RNC makes a pre-estimate of the UE position. If the pre-estimate is successful, it is used as the UE reference position. If the pre-estimate fails, a AgpsPositioning utranRnsUncertaintyRadius Uncertainty semi -major and semi-minor axes for the fall-back position, used when the pre-estimat e fails. Both axes are assigned the same value. Before starting the GPS measurem ents in the UE, the RNC makes a pre-estimate of the UE position. If the pre-est

    AgpsPositioning utranRnsConfidence 0 Confidence of the fall-b ack position, used when the pre-estimate fails. Before starting the GPS measurem ents in the UE, the RNC makes a pre-estimate of the UE position. If the pre-esti mate is successful, it is used as the UE reference position. If the pre AgpsPositioning elevationThreshold 5 Threshold for satellite elevation.The satellites that are below the elevation threshold will not be used . Unit: degrees Change takes effect: Ongoing connections AgpsPositioning posQualities Typical QoS parameters for the A -GPS positioning method. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next position ing transaction) AgpsPositioning utranRnsPosition.latitude 0 Latitude value ( N), derived by the formula: N <= (2^23) * (X / 90) < (N + 1) where X is the lati tude in degrees (0??..90??). Unit: latitude unit AgpsPositioning utranRnsPosition.latitudeSign 0 The direction (n orth or south) of the latitude value. AgpsPositioning utranRnsPosition.longitude 0 Longitude value (N), derived by the formula: N <= (2^24) * (X / 360) < (N + 1) where X is the lo ngitude in degrees (-180??..+180??). Unit: longitude unit Resolution: 1 AgpsPositioning posQualities.accuracyCodeTypical 0 Expected accuracy code of the positioning method, to be used in the selection of the pos itioning method for the first positioning attempt.The uncertainty radius of a ci rcular uncertainty measure (in meters) is related to the accuracy code by: Radiu s = 10 AgpsPositioning posQualities.confidenceEstimate 38 Expected confide nce of the positioning method to be used for shape Conversion.Unit: % AgpsPositioning posQualities.responseTimeTypical 0 Expected response time of the positioning method to be used in the selection of the posi tioning method for the first positioning attempt. Unit: msResolution: 100 AgpsPositioning posQualities.verticalAccuracyCodeTypical 0 Expected vertical accuracy code of the positioning method, to be used in the sel ection of the positioning method for the first positioning attempt.The uncertain ty (in meters) is related to the vertical accuracy code by: Uncertainty = 45 x ( 1.025^verticalA Aich AichId Aich availabilityStatus The availability status of the c ommon channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Aich dbchDeviceSetRef Reference to MO DbchDeviceSet. R ef. [CB_MOP] Aich operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP] AiDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the device. Possible values: ? LOCKED ? UNLOCKED Use cases: MBD_UC_DEV_LOCK, MBD_UC_DEV_UNLOCK, MBD_READ_ADM. Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731 Requirement: L OCK_UNLOCK_RBS_FU: 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 21, 24, 25 Disturbances: Changing thi AiDevice AiDeviceId AiDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: DBC_UC906 Ref. [FS_DBC] AiDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: AiDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] AiDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: ITU-T rec. X .731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] AiDeviceSet AiDeviceSetId

    AiDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_905 Specificatio AiDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC905 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] AiDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC905 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] AiuDeviceGroup AiuDeviceGroupId AiuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_904Specificati AiuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Hardware uni ts not supporting hardware test will always return the default value UNDETERMINE D. Use cases: HWT_UC1 Requirement: Test_UTRAN_FU3 Ref. [FS_HWT] AiuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_904Specification: IT U-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] AiuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC904 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] AlarmIRP AlarmIRPId AlarmIRP irpVersion One or more Alarm IRP version en tries Note: For CORBA users, CommonIRPConstDefs::VersionNumberSet, AlarmPort operationalState Defines the operational state of the alarm port. AlarmPort AlarmPortId The identity of the Alarm Port t hat matches the number on the physical port and provides the value component of the RDN. AlarmPort alarmSlogan Specifies the alarm. Used in add itional text in the alarm ExternalAlarm. AlarmPort activeExternalAlarm Indicates that an active alarm has been sent and there is an external alarm on the port. AlarmPort normallyOpen 0 Defines the active state of the alarm port. True = Closing the circuit will generate an alarm. False = Opening t he circuit will generate an alarm. AlarmPort perceivedSeverity 0 Specifies the severity l evel code of the alarm ExternalAlarm. Specification: See 3GPP TS 32.111-2 for us age of severity. Takes effect: At next generated alarm. AlarmPort probableCause 0 Specifies the probable cause cod e of the alarm ExternalAlarm. The default value is code 550 for EXTERNAL EQUIPME NT FAILURE. Specification: The 3GPP standard 3G TS 32.111 indicates valid cause codes. Takes effect: At next generated alarm. AlarmPort availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. AlarmPort userLabel Label for free use. AlarmPort administrativeState 0 The administrative state . Takes effect: Immediatley. AlmDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the device. Possible values: ? LOCKED ? UNLOCKED Use cases: EAC_UC100,EAC_UC 110, EAC_UC120,EAC_UC130 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Ref. [FS_EAC] AlmDevice alarmSlogan Specifies the external alarm. Us e cases: EAC_UC110, EAC_UC100 Requirement: AlarmH_RBS_FU_49 Ref. [FS_EAC] AlmDevice AlmDeviceId AlmDevice almDeviceStatus The current external alarm statu s of the device. Shows if the device has detected an alarm signal from external

    equipment. Possible values: ? 0 = No alarm. ? 1 = Alarm present. Use cases: EAC_ UC110 Requirement: AlarmH_RBS_FU_42 Ref. [FS_EAC] AlmDevice normallyOpen 0 Defines the normal (non-active) state of the alarm port. If true the connected external equipment issues an alar m by closing the circuit between the external equipment and the External Alarm a nd Control Unit. If false the connected external equipment issu AlmDevice perceivedSeverity 0 Specifies the severity l evel of the external alarm. Possible values: ? CRITICAL ? MAJOR ? MINOR ? WARNIN G Specification: 3GPP TS 32.111-2 Use cases: EAC_UC110, EAC_UC100 Requirement: A larmH_RBS_FU_49 Ref. [FS_EAC] AlmDevice probableCause 0 Specifies the probable cause of the external alarm. The probable cause is mapped to a corresponding event type a ccording to the specification 3GPP TS 32.111-2, so the event type for the alarm does not have to be explicitly specified. Specification: 3GPP T AlmDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I AlmDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] AlmDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_310 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.7 31Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] AlmDevice userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM ] AlmDeviceSet AlmDeviceSetId AlmDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_309 Specificatio AlmDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_309 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] AntennaBranch AntennaBranchId AntennaBranch antennaSupervisionThreshold 0 Threshold for su pervision of antenna branch. Supervision is done by ASC if part of the configura tion, otherwise by AIU or FU. There are two types of supervision, DC resistance supervision, and VSWR supervision. Selection of supervision type is controlled AntennaBranch branchName A, B, C and D indicates the name of an antenna branch within sector. Dependencies: The name of an antenna branch must be unique within a sector, that is, two antenna branches must not have the same name. Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Eq AntennaBranch fqBandHighEdge Denotes the downlink frequency b and high edge. Unit: 0.1 MHz Dependencies: fqBandHighEdge > fqBandLowEdge. Must belong to band defined in action initSector (see MO Sector). Use cases: Configur e RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment, Increase Coverage Requ AntennaBranch fqBandLowEdge Denotes the downlink frequency b and low edge. Unit: 0.1 MHz Dependencies: fqBandLowEdge < fqBandHighEdge. Must b elong to band defined in action initSector (see MO Sector). Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment, Increase Coverage Requi AntennaBranch mechanicalAntennaTilt 0 The antenna tilt relativ e the vertical plane for this antenna. Positive values signify tilting of the an tenna forwards from the vertical plane (lowering the antenna beam below the hori zontal plane for this antenna). Negative values signify tilting of the AntennaBranch reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Ref. [CB_MOP] AntennaBranch verticalAntennaTilt 0 The total antenna tilt r elative to the vertical plane for this antenna. Vertical antenna tilt = Electric al antenna tilt + Mechanical antenna tilt. Negative values signify tilting the a

    ntenna backwards from the vertical plane, that is, raising the antenna AntennaBranch alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the antenna branch. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UND ER_REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 whe n bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding al AntennaBranch lowCurrentSupervision 0 Turns low current superv ision on or off, on the related antenna feeder cable. Ref. [CB_MOP] AntFeederCable antennaBranchRef Reference to the antenna branch to which this cable must be connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Pr econdition: The referred to MO must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF] AntFeederCable AntFeederCableId AntFeederCable connectedToObjectARef Reference to the hardwar e unit (for example, RRU) to which this cable must be connected. Use cases: Scra tch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Precondition: The referred to MO must exist, and if a plug-in unit MO also the corresponding device group MO. AntFeederCable dlAttenuation Cable attenuation, downlink. The sequence contains 15 entries and each entry represents one 5 MHz interval. The first entry represents the attenuation value of the lowest frequency interval in the frequency band, and so on. The number of intervals depends AntFeederCable electricalDlDelay Cable delay, downlink. T he sequence contains 15 entries and each entry represents one 5 MHz interval. Th e first entry represents the delay value of the lowest frequency interval in the frequency band, and so on. The number of intervals depends on the freq AntFeederCable electricalUlDelay Cable delay, uplink. The sequence contains 15 entries and each entry represents one 5 MHz interval. The first entry represents the delay value of the lowest frequency interval in the f requency band, and so on. The number of intervals depends on the freque AntFeederCable objectAConnector Value representing the c onnector on the hardware unit, to which this cable is connected. Note that the v alue NOT_CONNECTED shall only be used temporarily during certain reconfiguration activities. Leaving the cable in this state will result in an alarm at AntFeederCable ulAttenuation Cable attenuation, uplink. The s equence contains 15 entries and each entry represents one 5 MHz interval. The fi rst entry represents the attenuation value of the lowest frequency interval in t he frequency band, and so on. The number of intervals depends o Areas AreasId Relative Distinguished Name ArpMap ArpMapId Naming attribute. Contains the value par t of the RDN. ArpMap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. ArpMap systemDefaultArpQosEo System default ARP values used w hen the ARP mapping feature is not activated through its RncFeature MO instance. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Dependencies: The valu es in this attribute are displayed in the read-only attribute s ArpMap systemDefaultArpQos System default ARP values used w hen the ARP mapping feature is not activated through its RncFeature MO instance. ArpMap defaultArpQos Default ARP values to be used when no Ex ternal ARP value is received over RANAP, or when 'no priority' (= 15) is receive d. ArpMap externalArpMapping List of internal priority values to which External ARP values are mapped. The index of the sequence element (its position) corresponds to the external ARP value, and the value at that index sp ecifies the internal priority to be used. ArpMap defaultArpQos.intPrio ARP priority level to be used. ArpMap defaultArpQos.pci Pre-emption capability. ArpMap defaultArpQos.pvi Pre-emption vulnerability. ArpMap systemDefaultArpQos.intPrio ARP priority level to be used. ArpMap systemDefaultArpQos.pci Pre-emption capability.

    ArpMap systemDefaultArpQos.pvi Pre-emption vulnerability. ArpMap systemDefaultArpQosEo.intPrio ARP priority level to be used. ArpMap systemDefaultArpQosEo.pci Pre-emption capability. ArpMap systemDefaultArpQosEo.pvi Pre-emption vulnerabilit y. ArpQosClassProfile ArpQosClassProfileId Naming attribute . Contains the value part of the RDN. ArpQosClassProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RN C. ArpSpiMap ArpSpiMapId Naming attribute. Contains the v alue part of the RDN. ArpSpiMap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. ArpSpiMap reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to this MO. ArpSpiMap externalArpMapping 0 List of SPI values to wh ich External ARP priority values are mapped. The index of the sequence element ( its position) corresponds to the external ARP value, and the value at that index points to the SpiQosClass instance to be used. A value of -1 indicates AscDeviceGroup AscDeviceGroupId AscDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specific ation: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] AscDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat AscDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] AscDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] AtmCrossConnection AtmCrossConnectionId The value compon ent of the RDN. AtmCrossConnection userLabel Label for free use. AtmCrossConnection operationalState The operational state. AtmCrossConnection vclTpAId Identifies the VclTp MO involved in the A side of the cross connection (which consists of an A and B sid e). Must not be the same as vclTpBId. AtmCrossConnection vclTpBId Identifies the VclTp MO involved in the B side of the cross connection (which consists of an A and B sid e). Must not be the same as vclTpAId. AtmCrossConnection AtmCrossConnectionId The value compon ent of the RDN. AtmCrossConnection userLabel Label for free use. AtmCrossConnection operationalState The operational state. AtmCrossConnection vclTpAId Identifies the VclTp MO involved in the A side of the cross connection (which consists of an A and B sid e). Must not be the same as vclTpBId. AtmCrossConnection vclTpBId Identifies the VclTp MO involved in the B side of the cross connection (which consists of an A and B sid e). Must not be the same as vclTpAId. AtmCrossConnection AtmCrossConnectionId The value compon ent of the RDN.

    AtmCrossConnection userLabel Label for free use. AtmCrossConnection operationalState The operational state. AtmCrossConnection vclTpAId Identifies the VclTp MO involved in the A side of the cross connection (which consists of an A and B sid e). Must not be the same as vclTpBId. AtmCrossConnection vclTpBId Identifies the VclTp MO involved in the B side of the cross connection (which consists of an A and B sid e). Must not be the same as vclTpAId. AtmPort AtmPortId The value component of the RDN. AtmPort userLabel Label for free use. AtmPort operationalState The operational state. AtmPort availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp This attribute returns t he ATM header (VPI, VCI and PTI) of the last received unexpected cell. AtmPort uses Reference to the physical port, IMA Group or Ds0 Bundle used by the ATM port. The possible MOs are: E1PhysPathTerm, J1PhysPathTer m, T1PhysPathTerm, E3PhysPathTerm, T3PhysPathTerm, Sts3CspeTtp, Sts1SpeTtp, Vc4T tp, E1Ttp, T1Ttp, Ds0Bundle and ImaGroup. If th AtmPort hecCorrectionMode TRUE(1) Header Error Correction. Specifi es if the ATM Port detects and corrects single bit errors or detects multiple bi t errors in the ATM header. AtmPort loopbackDetection 0 Enables or disables the detectio n of loopback on the physical path(s) used by AtmPort. If loopback is detected t he corresponding physical path is disabled, and an alarm is issued. AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp.pti 0 The ATM header pti. AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp.vci 0 The ATM header vci. AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp.vpi 0 The ATM header vpi. AtmPort AtmPortId The value component of the RDN. AtmPort userLabel Label for free use. AtmPort operationalState The operational state. AtmPort availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp This attribute returns t he ATM header (VPI, VCI and PTI) of the last received unexpected cell. AtmPort uses Reference to the physical port, IMA Group or Ds0 Bundle used by the ATM port. The possible MOs are: E1PhysPathTerm, J1PhysPathTer m, T1PhysPathTerm, E3PhysPathTerm, T3PhysPathTerm, Sts3CspeTtp, Sts1SpeTtp, Vc4T tp, E1Ttp, T1Ttp, Ds0Bundle and ImaGroup. If th AtmPort hecCorrectionMode TRUE(1) Header Error Correction. Specifi es if the ATM Port detects and corrects single bit errors or detects multiple bi t errors in the ATM header. AtmPort loopbackDetection 0 Enables or disables the detectio n of loopback on the physical path(s) used by AtmPort. If loopback is detected t he corresponding physical path is disabled, and an alarm is issued. AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp.pti 0 The ATM header pti. AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp.vci 0 The ATM header vci. AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp.vpi 0 The ATM header vpi. AtmPort AtmPortId The value component of the RDN. AtmPort userLabel Label for free use. AtmPort operationalState The operational state. AtmPort availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp This attribute returns t he ATM header (VPI, VCI and PTI) of the last received unexpected cell. AtmPort uses Reference to the physical port, IMA Group or Ds0 Bundle used by the ATM port. The possible MOs are: E1PhysPathTerm, J1PhysPathTer m, T1PhysPathTerm, E3PhysPathTerm, T3PhysPathTerm, Sts3CspeTtp, Sts1SpeTtp, Vc4T tp, E1Ttp, T1Ttp, Ds0Bundle and ImaGroup. If th

    AtmPort hecCorrectionMode TRUE(1) Header Error Correction. Specifi es if the ATM Port detects and corrects single bit errors or detects multiple bi t errors in the ATM header. AtmPort loopbackDetection 0 Enables or disables the detectio n of loopback on the physical path(s) used by AtmPort. If loopback is detected t he corresponding physical path is disabled, and an alarm is issued. AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp.pti 0 The ATM header pti. AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp.vci 0 The ATM header vci. AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp.vpi 0 The ATM header vpi. AtmTrafficDescriptor AtmTrafficDescriptorId The value compon ent of the RDN. AtmTrafficDescriptor userLabel Label for free use. AtmTrafficDescriptor ingressAtmPcr 0 Ingress ATM Peak cell ra te (cells/s). Only non-negative values are allowed. The attribute is only mandat ory when serviceCategory is CBR. AtmTrafficDescriptor ingressAtmQos Ingress ATM quality of s ervice. This attribute can be set to Class 1 and 2 if attribute serviceCategory is set to CBR. This attribute can be set to Class 3 if attribute serviceCategory is set to UBR+. This attribute can be set to Class 4 if attribute serv AtmTrafficDescriptor egressAtmPcr 0 Egress ATM Peak cell rat e (cells/s). Only non-negative values are allowed. This attribute is only mandat ory when serviceCategory is CBR. When serviceCategory is set to UBR+, egressAtmP cr < egressAtmMcr disables shaping. egressAtmPcr >= egressAtmMcr enable AtmTrafficDescriptor egressAtmQos Egress ATM quality of se rvice. This attribute can be set to Class 1 and 2 if attribute serviceCategory i s set to CBR. This attribute can be set to Class 3 if attribute serviceCategory is set to UBR+. This attribute can be set to Class 4 if attribute servi AtmTrafficDescriptor reservedBy Contains a list of MO in stances that reserve this MO instance. AtmTrafficDescriptor egressAtmMcr 0 Egress ATM minimum desir ed cell rate. Only non-negative values are allowed. The attribute is only mandat ory when serviceCategory is UBR+. AtmTrafficDescriptor ingressAtmMcr 0 Ingress minimum desired cell rate (cells/s). Only non-negative values are allowed. This attribute is man datory only when serviceCategory is UBR+. AtmTrafficDescriptor serviceCategory The service category. AtmTrafficDescriptor packetDiscard 0 Controls the functions E arly Packet Discard (EPD) and Partial Packet Discard (PPD) used in AAL5 for traf fic classes UBR and UBR+. N.B. should never be enabled for non-AAL5 traffic. AtmTrafficDescriptor AtmTrafficDescriptorId The value compon ent of the RDN. AtmTrafficDescriptor userLabel Label for free use. AtmTrafficDescriptor ingressAtmPcr 0 Ingress ATM Peak cell ra te (cells/s). Only non-negative values are allowed. The attribute is only mandat ory when serviceCategory is CBR. AtmTrafficDescriptor ingressAtmQos Ingress ATM quality of s ervice. This attribute can be set to Class 1 and 2 if attribute serviceCategory is set to CBR. This attribute can be set to Class 3 if attribute serviceCategory is set to UBR+. This attribute can be set to Class 4 if attribute serv AtmTrafficDescriptor egressAtmPcr 0 Egress ATM Peak cell rat e (cells/s). Only non-negative values are allowed. This attribute is only mandat ory when serviceCategory is CBR. When serviceCategory is set to UBR+, egressAtmP cr < egressAtmMcr disables shaping. egressAtmPcr >= egressAtmMcr enable AtmTrafficDescriptor egressAtmQos Egress ATM quality of se rvice. This attribute can be set to Class 1 and 2 if attribute serviceCategory i s set to CBR. This attribute can be set to Class 3 if attribute serviceCategory is set to UBR+. This attribute can be set to Class 4 if attribute servi AtmTrafficDescriptor reservedBy Contains a list of MO in stances that reserve this MO instance. AtmTrafficDescriptor egressAtmMcr 0 Egress ATM minimum desir

    ed cell rate. Only non-negative values are allowed. The attribute is only mandat ory when serviceCategory is UBR+. AtmTrafficDescriptor ingressAtmMcr 0 Ingress minimum desired cell rate (cells/s). Only non-negative values are allowed. This attribute is man datory only when serviceCategory is UBR+. AtmTrafficDescriptor serviceCategory The service category. AtmTrafficDescriptor packetDiscard 0 Controls the functions E arly Packet Discard (EPD) and Partial Packet Discard (PPD) used in AAL5 for traf fic classes UBR and UBR+. N.B. should never be enabled for non-AAL5 traffic. AtmTrafficDescriptor AtmTrafficDescriptorId The value compon ent of the RDN. AtmTrafficDescriptor userLabel Label for free use. AtmTrafficDescriptor ingressAtmPcr 0 Ingress ATM Peak cell ra te (cells/s). Only non-negative values are allowed. The attribute is only mandat ory when serviceCategory is CBR. AtmTrafficDescriptor ingressAtmQos Ingress ATM quality of s ervice. This attribute can be set to Class 1 and 2 if attribute serviceCategory is set to CBR. This attribute can be set to Class 3 if attribute serviceCategory is set to UBR+. This attribute can be set to Class 4 if attribute serv AtmTrafficDescriptor egressAtmPcr 0 Egress ATM Peak cell rat e (cells/s). Only non-negative values are allowed. This attribute is only mandat ory when serviceCategory is CBR. When serviceCategory is set to UBR+, egressAtmP cr < egressAtmMcr disables shaping. egressAtmPcr >= egressAtmMcr enable AtmTrafficDescriptor egressAtmQos Egress ATM quality of se rvice. This attribute can be set to Class 1 and 2 if attribute serviceCategory i s set to CBR. This attribute can be set to Class 3 if attribute serviceCategory is set to UBR+. This attribute can be set to Class 4 if attribute servi AtmTrafficDescriptor reservedBy Contains a list of MO in stances that reserve this MO instance. AtmTrafficDescriptor egressAtmMcr 0 Egress ATM minimum desir ed cell rate. Only non-negative values are allowed. The attribute is only mandat ory when serviceCategory is UBR+. AtmTrafficDescriptor ingressAtmMcr 0 Ingress minimum desired cell rate (cells/s). Only non-negative values are allowed. This attribute is man datory only when serviceCategory is UBR+. AtmTrafficDescriptor serviceCategory The service category. AtmTrafficDescriptor packetDiscard 0 Controls the functions E arly Packet Discard (EPD) and Partial Packet Discard (PPD) used in AAL5 for traf fic classes UBR and UBR+. N.B. should never be enabled for non-AAL5 traffic. AuxPlugInUnit administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the auxiliary plug-in unit. Possible values: ? LOCKED ? SHUTTING_DOWN ? UNLO CKED Use cases: MBD_UC_AUX_LOCK, MBD_UC_AUX_UNLOCK, MBD_READ_ADM. Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731 Requirement: LOCK_UNLOCK_RBS_FU:21, 24, 25 Disturbanc AuxPlugInUnit auType Type of auxiliary unit. Possible values: ? ARETU ? ASC ? ATMAU ? BFU ? CLU ? CU ? FAN ? FCU ? FU ? MCPA ? PAU ? PCU ? PS U ? RETU ? RRU? RRUW ? RU ? RUW ? SAIU ? XALM ? XCU Use cases: AUC_300, AUC_307 Ref. [FS_AUC] AuxPlugInUnit AuxPlugInUnitId AuxPlugInUnit availabilityStatus The availability status of the auxiliary plug-in unit. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN _TEST ? DEPENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? O FF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_307 AuxPlugInUnit greenLed Indicates the operational status of the auxiliary plug-in unit as shown by the green operation LED. Possible val ues: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = The LED is not supported. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED stat e is currently not available. ? STEADY_LIGHT = Power present. ? AuxPlugInUnit operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_307 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] AuxPlugInUnit piuType Reference to corresponding PiuType MO. I

    ndirectly used to control the loading of software on the auxiliary unit and the auto-configuration of contained MOs. Note! For historical reasons the reference may be NULL for certain non-loadable auxiliary units. U AuxPlugInUnit plugInUnitRef1 Reference to the plug-in unit, t hrough which the MP communicates with the auxiliary unit. Use cases: AUC_300, AU C_307 Precondition: The PlugInUnit or AuxPlugInUnit MO must exist. Ref. [FS_AUC] AuxPlugInUnit plugInUnitRef2 Reference to the redundant plugin unit, through which the MP communicates with the auxiliary unit. Note that it is not possible to remove a reference to a redundant PIU by setting the attribu te to null. This is only possible by deleting the MO and recrea AuxPlugInUnit productionDate 0 Date the unit was produced (part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] AuxPlugInUnit productName Product name of the unit (part o f PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Pr econdition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] AuxPlugInUnit productNumber Product number of the unit (part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] AuxPlugInUnit productRevision Product revision of the unit (pa rt of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU: 3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed Ref. [FS_PIY] AuxPlugInUnit productType 0 Product type (PID) is used by pr oduct inventory to select products. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU: 3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] AuxPlugInUnit redLed Indicates the fault status of the auxili ary plug-in unit as shown by the red fault LED. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABL E= The LED is not supported. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is currently not av ailable. ? OUT = No HW fault. ? STEADY_LIGHT = HW fault AuxPlugInUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: AUC_307 Ref. [FS_SUE] AuxPlugInUnit serialNumber Unique number that identifies th e unit (part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: P ID_RBS_FU:3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] AuxPlugInUnit yellowLed Indicates the information status of the auxiliary plug-in unit as shown by the yellow information LED. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = The LED is not supported. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED s tate is currently not available. ? OUT = Board unlocked. ? STEA AuxPlugInUnit hubPosition 0 The auxiliary plug-in unit conne ction in the AU hub, used for HDLC addressing purposes.Mandatory for AU types BF U, PSU, CLU and FCU. Not applicable to other AU types.Possible values: ? A-J = H ub positions valid for hub type 1. ? A1-A8, B1-B8 = Hub positio AuxPlugInUnit unitType Type of unit. Displays the same value as the struct member productName of the productData attribute on the corre sponding PiuType MO. Ref. [FS_AUC] AuxPlugInUnit uniqueHwId An ID intended only for ARETU an d used to uniquely identify an ARET among others cascaded ARETs in one sector. T he ID is a concatenation of the vendor code and the ARET serial number and shoul d contain just enough number of significant characters/digits t AuxPlugInUnit position 0 Specifies the absolute position of the auxiliary plug-in unit in a shelf. Positions start from left or ground wi th the first position numbered 1. A plug-in unit can occupy more than one positi on, depending on its width. When a plug-in unit occupies more t AuxPlugInUnit positionInformation The position of an auxil iary plug-in unit can be ? in a shelf, ? not in a shelf but inside or outside th e cabinet, or ? at a remote site. If the plug-in unit is contained in a shelf, t he attribute position is used. Otherwise this attribute can be used, fo AuxPlugInUnit positionRef Reference to the cabinet or shel f which the auxiliary plug-in unit is placed in or belongs to. Use cases: Manufa cture RBS, Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF]

    Battery batteryCapacityDefaultValue 0 Nominal battery capacity . Unit: 1 Ah Dependencies: If =< 30 then PowerSupplySystem: batteryTestEnable ma y not be set to true (battery test is not allowed for low capacity batteries). U se cases: PSC_UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery BatteryId Battery batteryTestEndLimit 0 Voltage limit at which battery t est is terminated. Example: -480 = -48 V Unit: 0.1 V Scope: Battery test Use cas es: PSC_UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery batteryVoltageDefaultValue 0 Nominal battery voltage. Example: -480 = -48 V Unit: 0.1 V Use cases: PSC_UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref . [FS_PSC] Battery chargeLimit 0 After an AC failure or a battery test, t he battery is recharged. This parameter denotes the battery capacity, which has to be recharged within the time limit chargeTimeLimit. The parameter is given as a percentage of discharged capacity. Unit: 1% Scope: B Battery chargeOffset 0 Voltage offset used during boost chargin g. Example: 12 = 1.2 V Unit: 0.1 V Scope: Battery charging Use cases: PSC_UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery chargeTimeLimit 0 Limit for the recharging time of the bat tery, after a battery test or AC failure. Unit: 1 h Scope: Battery test Use case s: PSC_UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery compFactor 0 Compensation factor, shows how much the voltage changes with temperature. Example: 2500 = 2.5 V per 1 degree Celsius Uni t: 0.001 V/?C Scope: Float charging Use cases: PSC_UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 R ef. [FS_PSC] Battery cyclicChargeInterval 0 Indicates number of days between cyclic charging. Unit: 1 d Scope: Battery charging Use cases: PSC_UC221, PSC_UC 223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery dischargeLimit 0 During an AC failure or a battery test, the battery is discharged. This parameter denotes the battery capacity, that can be discharged before the battery voltage has dropped to the level set by batter yTestEndVoltage. The parameter is given as a percentage Battery freeDate2 Date field, user defined. Use cases: PSC _UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery freeDate3 Date field, user defined. Use cases: PSC _UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery freeText1 Text field, user defined. Use cases: PSC _UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery freeText2 Text field, user defined. Use cases: PSC _UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery freeText3 Text field, user defined. Use cases: PSC _UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery freeText4 Text field, user defined. Use cases: PSC _UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery initialBatteryTestStartTime 0 Start time of the initia l battery test after the battery test function has been enabled. The value 0 mea ns 'initial test disabled'. Unit: 1 h Scope: Battery test Use cases: PSC_UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery minDaysBeforeCyclicCharge 0 Indicates minimum number of days before next cyclic charging is allowed. Unit: 1 d Takes effect: At comm it or at next charging if charging is active. Scope: Battery charging Use cases: PSC_UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery remainingBackupTime 0 Estimated remaining time in minu tes until the battery is empty. The remainingBackupTime is based on the present current load and nominal battery capacity (see attribute batteryCapacityDefaultV alue). The battery capacity is continuously calculated as the b Battery tempCharging 0 Nominal temperature for float charging. Example: 25 = 2.5 degrees Celsius Unit: 0.1?C Scope: Float charging Use cases: P SC_UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] Battery freeDate1 Date field, user defined. Use cases: PSC

    _UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC] BatteryBackup BatteryBackupId The value component of the RDN. BatteryBackup userLabel Label for free use. BatteryBackup batteryCurrent The measured battery current. Th e current is positive when the battery is being charged and negative when it is being discharged. Undefined value: -9999 (no contact with BFU). Undefined value: -9999 (no contact with BFU) Unit: 1 A Resolution: 1 BatteryBackup batteryDisconnectTemp 0 Specifies the battery te mperature at which the battery is disconnected. Applies to both main and priorit y loads. The battery is disconnected when batteryTemperature > batteryDisconnect Temp. Note! Only specified batteries should be set to values > 60, and BatteryBackup batteryDisconnectTempCeaseOffset 0 Specifie s the offset for the disconnected temperature below which the battery will be re connected. Applies to both main and priority loads. The battery is reconnected w hen batteryTemperature < batteryDisconnectedTemp-batteryDisconnectTempCeaseOffse t. Unit BatteryBackup batteryTemperature Current temperature valu e as reported by the battery temperature sensor, mounted on the battery. Undefin ed value: 999 (no contact with BFU) Unit: 1?C Resolution: 1 BatteryBackup batteryType 0 Indicates the type of battery to which the installed battery conforms. The type is related to the capabilities o f the battery.Dependencies: batteryType = UNKNOWN is valid only when chargingMod e = USER_DEFINED. Takes effect: Immediately. BatteryBackup batteryVoltage The measured battery voltage. 0 means the battery is disconnected. It is equal to the attribute systemVoltage, P owerSupply MO, when the battery is connected. Undefined value: -1 (no contact wi th BFU) Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 BatteryBackup boostChargeTime 0 The time in boost charge. Value zero (0) means that boost charging is disabled. Unit: 1 h Resolution: 1 Takes ef fect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only relevant if attribute char gingMode in MO BatteryBackup has the value USER_DEFINED. BatteryBackup boostChargeTriggerVoltage 0 Defines the trig ger voltage for boost charge. When the trigger voltage is surpassed during disch arge, the consecutive charging is boost charging. Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 Take s effect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only relevant if attribute BatteryBackup chargingMode 0 Defines the type of battery char ging used. If User Defined - the user must specify the charging algorithm to use and indicate the parameters. Dependencies: If the charging mode is Automatic, t he system charges according to defined behavior determined by a BatteryBackup chargeMaxCurrent 0 Maximum allowed battery current during charging. Unit: 1 A Resolution: 1Takes effect: Immediately. BatteryBackup chargingVoltage 0 The desired battery voltage for charging at 25 degree Celsius. Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediate ly. Dependency: This attribute is only relevant if attribute chargingMode in MO BatteryBackup has the value USER_DEFINED. BatteryBackup equalizeChargeCyclicInterval 0 Indicates the nu mber of days between equalize charging. The cycle is reset at restart. Unit: 1 d ay Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only r elevant if attribute chargingMode in MO BatteryBackup has the value USER_DEFINE BatteryBackup equalizeChargeTime 0 The time in equalize cha rge. Value zero (0) means that equalize charging is disabled. To enable equalize charging the value shall differ from zero (0). Unit: 1 h Resolution: 1 Takes ef fect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only relevant if attri BatteryBackup increasedChargeVoltage 0 The charge voltage used at boost charging and equalize charging. Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only relevant if attribute chargingM ode in MO BatteryBackup has the value USER_DEFINED. BatteryBackup intermittentChargeConnectTime 0 Defines the peri od following disconnection after which the battery is reconnected. Used in inter mittent charging. Unit: 1 h Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately. Dependency:

    This attribute is only relevant if attribute chargingMode in MO BatteryBackup BatteryBackup intermittentChargeConnectVoltage 0 Defines the minimum battery voltage level allowed for a disconnected battery. When minim um level is reached, the battery is reconnected. Used in intermittent charging. Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only BatteryBackup intermittentChargeDisconnectTime 0 Defines the time until the batteries are disconnected (during this time the batteries ar e connected). Value zero (0) means that intermittent charging is not enabled. Un it: 1 h Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is o nly rel BatteryBackup nominalTemp 0 Nominal temperature for temperat ure compensated float charging. Unit: 0.1?C Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediat ely. Dependency: This attribute is only relevant if attribute chargingMode in MO BatteryBackup has the value USER_DEFINED. BatteryBackup tempCompMaxVoltage 0 The maximum voltage allo wed for float charging. Used in temperature compensated float charging. Unit: 0. 1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only relevant if attribute chargingMode in MO BatteryBackup has the value US BatteryBackup tempCompMinVoltage 0 The minimum voltage allo wed for float charging. Used in temperature compensated float charging. Unit: 0. 1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only relevant if attribute chargingMode in MO BatteryBackup has the value US BatteryBackup tempCompVoltageSlope 0 A compensation factor th at expresses the amount of voltage changes caused by temperature. Used in temper ature compensated float charging. Fixed battery charging is achieved by assignin g this attribute the value zero. Example: -2500 = -2.5 V per 1 degree C BatteryBackup sharedBattery 0 Defines if this RBS shares batte ry with another RBS or other power consumer on the site. The setting of this att ributes has large impact on the system behaviour. Dependencies: If sharedBattery is set to True a backup time test will be used as battery test BatteryBackup batteryInstallationDate 0 Specifies the date when the batteries in the battery backup of the RBS were installed and taken into ser vice. Format: YYYYMMDD. Dependencies: The date must not be a future date. Changi ng this attribute will cause the system to restart battery capacity t BatteryBackup testMode 0 Specifies the mode of the batter y test. Dependencies: The following attributes are only relevant if testMode is set to CONFIGURED: testStartDay, testStartTime and testStartMonths. Takes effect : Immediately. BatteryBackup testStartDay 0 Specifies the day of month for p eriodic battery tests. Dependencies: The attribute is only relevant if testMode has the value CONFIGURED. Combination of testStartDay and testStartMonths must b e a valid date. Takes effect: Immediately. BatteryBackup testStartTime 0 Specifies the time of day the pe riodic battery tests will be started. Format: HH:MM, 24 h format. Dependencies: The attriute is only relevant if testMode has the value CONFIGURED. Takes effect : Immediately. BatteryBackup testStartMonths 0 Specifies the months in which pe riodic battery tests will be executed. A battery test will be executed in the mo nths listed in this parameter. One month may only be listed once in the paramete r. Default value = MARCH, SEPTEMBER. Dependencies: The attrib BatteryBackup minimumStateOfHealth 0 Specifies the minimum re quirement for the State-of-Health of a battery when conducting a battery capacit y test. An alarm will be raised if State-Of-Health is lower than minimumStateOfH ealth. State-of-Health is defined as estimated battery capacity divided BatteryBackup referenceBatteryCapacity The calculated r eference battery capacity. This value is calculated at the first battery capacit y test (manual or periodic) or when a significantly higher capacity is detected. The attribute is used in battery capacity tests. Undefined value: -1 Dependenc BatteryBackup minimumBackupTime 0 Specifies the minimum re

    quirement for backup time for the installed batteries when conducting a battery backup time test. An alarm will be raised if measured backup time is shorter tha n minimumBackupTime. Dependencies: This attribute is only relevant if s BatteryBackup nextScheduledTestDate 0 Date of next scheduled p eriodic battery test. Format: YYYYMMDD. Undefined value: 00000000. Dependencies: The value is undefined if testMode has the value DISABLED. BbifBoard alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the BBIF boa rd. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_R EPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when bi t 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alarm. BbifBoard BbifBoardId BbifBoard dlClockDelay 61 BBIF internal downlink clock del ay.Unit: 0.1 ns Recommended value: 61 Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site User catego ry: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] BbifBoard dlTrafficDelay 15 BBIF internal downlink traffic d elay.Unit: 0.1 ns Recommended value: 15 Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site User cate gory: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] BbifBoard productionDate 0 Date the unit was produced (part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] BbifBoard productName Product name of the unit (part o f PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Pr econdition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] BbifBoard productNumber Product number of the unit (part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] BbifBoard productRevision Product revision of the unit (pa rt of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU: 3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed Ref. [FS_PIY] BbifBoard productType 0 Product type (PID) is used by pr oduct inventory to select products. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU: 3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] BbifBoard reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF] BbifBoard rfifPlugInUnitRef Reference to the RFIF de vice board, through which MP communication is done. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Si te Precondition: The PlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MO must ex ist for the RFIF board. Ref. [CB_ECF] BbifBoard serialNumber Unique number, which identifies the unit (part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] BbifBoard ulClockDelay 61 BBIF internal uplink clock delay .Unit: 0.1 ns Recommended value: 61 Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site User category : Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] BbifBoard ulTrafficDelay 32 BBIF internal uplink traffic del ay.Unit: 0.1 ns Recommended value: 32 Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site User catego ry: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] Bch availabilityStatus The availability status of the c ommon channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Bch BchId Bch operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP] BfDevice BfDeviceId BfDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: AUC_310 Ref. [FS_AUC] BfDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU

    LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I BfDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] BfDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_310 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.7 31Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] BfDeviceSet BfDeviceSetId BfDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_309 Specificatio BfDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_309 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] BfSubrack BfSubrackId BfSubrack cabinetPosition Free text, that denotes the cabi net position on-site Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL_RBS_FU: 12 Ref. [CB_ECF] BfSubrack subrackPosition The subrack position. The value consist of (<X><Y><Z>): X = Cabinet position within the node starting from the l eft, one digit (1 - 9). Y = Subrack vertical position within the cabinet startin g from the ground, one letter (A - Z). Z = Subrack horizontal p Bfu BfuId Bfu deviceRef Reference to the BF device that depends on (uses) this unit. It is set by the system at creation of the NPU. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: PCU created. Ref. [CB_ECF] Bfu alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the non-processing u nit. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_ REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when b it 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstandi Bfu greenLed Indicates the operational status of the non-processing unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not support ed. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = Power no t present, but since the LED state is not readable in t Bfu productionDate 0 Date the unit was produced (part of PID) . Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondi tion: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Bfu productName Product name of the unit (part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Preconditi on: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Bfu productNumber Product number of the unit (part of PID) . Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondi tion: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Bfu productRevision Product revision of the unit (part of PI D). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precon dition: Hardware must be installed Ref. [FS_PIY] Bfu productType 0 Product type (PID) is used by product in ventory to select products. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precon dition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Bfu redLed Indicates the fault status of the non-processing unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not supported. ? NOT_AVAI LABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = No fault. ? STEADY_LIG HT = Fault. Use cases: MEC_310 Ref. [FS_MEC] Bfu serialNumber Unique number that identifies the unit ( part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_F U:3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Bfu yellowLed Indicates the information status of the non-processing unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not support ed. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = Board un

    locked. ? STEADY_LIGHT = Board locked. ? SLOW_BLINK = S BfuDeviceGroup BfuDeviceGroupId BfuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specific ation: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] BfuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat BfuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] BfuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] BreakPoint BreakPointId BreakPoint reached 0 Indicates whether the breakpoint is vali d or not. Once a breakpoint has been reached the value is set to TRUE.Initial va lue is FALSE.Sub: PCA, RNR BreakPoint timestamp The timestamp information (with nanosecond precision) in the breakpoint. It is used by PCA activation to fetch a nd execute planned actions less than or equal to the timestamp of the breakpoint . On reaching a breakpoint the plan activation will stop. Sub: BreakPoint breakPointName Name of the breakpoint. Sub: PCA , RNR BreakPoint description Description of the breakpoint. S ub: PCA, RNR BulkCmIRP BulkCmIRPId BulkCmIRP irpVersion One or more Bulk CM IRP version entries. Note: For CORBA users, CommonIRPConstDefs::VersionNumberSet,. [21] Cabinet cabinetIdentifier Unique identifier for the cabine t. Undefined value: , i.e. empty string (no contact with SCU, SUP or support sys tem controlling node) Dependencies: Reflects the value of attribute productData; productNumber and serialNumber on the HwUnit MO with attribu Cabinet productData Enclosure product information data (PID) . In order to guarantee that the data survives a MP replacement, the data is sto red persistently in both the data base and in the corresponding support control unit (SCU/SUP). Any mismatches between the stored data Cabinet cabinetParameters 0 Cabinet specific parameters for fan control and cabinet configuration. Parameter value modification is only inte nded for Node Verification to determine good values of the cabinet parameter pro files. Dependencies: Typically reflects the value of cabinetPar Cabinet cabinetParametersProfileStandard 0 Cabinet paramete rs profile for a standard climate system. The specification of each parameter wi th unit and valid range is pre-defined in document Support System Configuration Data, 1/15502-HRB 105 602. User category: Ericsson personnel. Cabinet cabinetParametersProfileExtended 0 Cabinet paramete rs profile for an extended climate system. The specification of each parameter w ith unit and valid range is pre-defined in document Support System Configuration Data, 1/15502-HRB 105 602. User category: Ericsson personnel. Cabinet climateSystem 0 Defines which type of climate system tha t is used, (indirectly how many fan groups there are in the cabinet). Dependenci es: Only valid in the node where the attribute supportSystemControl in MO Equipm entSupportFunction is set to true. Takes effect: Immedi Cabinet CabinetId The value component of the RDN. Cabinet productData.productName The name of the product. The pro duct name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadMo dule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. Cabinet productData.productNumber The product number of th e product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For Upg

    radePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document.The product num Cabinet productData.productRevision The revision state of th e product. Examples: R1, R1A, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for t he MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and S ubrackProdType. Cabinet productData.productionDate The production date is r epresented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight characters.Ex ample: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for the Cabinet productData.serialNumber The serial number consis ts of 13 alphanumerical characters grouped as 6 plus 7 characters. The first 6 c haracters are to be used for factory codes and the last 7 characters are used fo r an individual number or batch number. Carrier aiDeviceRef Reference to the AI device(s) of the car rier. The attribute value is updated at commit of initSector, or at commit of cr eate Carrier (for initiated sector). Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00849 Rev:A Re f. [CB_MOP] Carrier availabilityStatus The availability status of the c arrier. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDENCY_LOCK ED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier averagePowLimSwitchOn Shows if the Average Power Limit er is on or not, on the DPCL device (controlled by the actions turnAveragePowLim On and turnAveragePowLimOff). Set by the system to true, if the DPCL device is r eleased for some reason. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. Carrier CarrierId Carrier cqiAdjustmentOn FALSE(0) Turns the CQI adjustment of the UE reported CQI on or off per cell. Requirement: HSUP_AD_RBS_5001:01068 Rev:B Re f. [CB_MOP] Carrier cqiErrors 10 Denotes the repetition factor for trigge ring consecutive erroneous CQI reports.Value 0 -> the RBS triggered updates are turned off. Resolution: 1 in range 0..15 and 5 in range 15..100 Dependencies: Tu ning of cqiErrors is made together with cqiErrorsAbsent Carrier cqiErrorsAbsent 10 Denotes the repetition factor for trigge ring consecutive correct CQI reports. Value 0 -> the RBS triggered updates are t urned off. Resolution: 1 in range 0..15 and 5 in range 15..100 Dependencies: Tun ing of cqiErrorsAbsent is made together with cqiErrors. Carrier dbccDeviceRef Reference to the DBCC device(s) of the c arrier. The attribute value is updated at commit of initSector, or at commit of create Carrier (for initiated sector). Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00851 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier dlTestModelTransmissionHsOn Shows whether the DL tes t model transmission is started for HS-SCCH and HS-PDSCH (controlled by the acti ons startHsDlTestModelTran and stopHsDlTestModelTran). User category: Ericsson p ersonnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Carrier dpclDevicesRef Reference to the DPCL device(s) of the c arrier. The attribute value is updated at commit of initSector, or at commit of create Carrier (for initiated sector). Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00850 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier frequencyPlane Denotes the frequency plane of the carri er. Carriers with the same frequency plane are allocated to cells with the same frequency. If frequencyPlane is not given at create of the Carrier MO, the RBS s ystem generates a value; the first free frequency plane Carrier hsPowerMargin 2 Power margin the HSDPA scheduler is usin g when allocating remaining power of cell carrier. It is relative the maximum av ailable power of the cell. Example: 2 = 0.2 dB Unit: 0.1 dB Requirement: HSCAP_A D_RBS_5001:00912 Rev:B Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier hsScchMaxCodePower -20 HS-SCCH maximum code power relat ive PCPICH power. This parameter also determines the fixed power level for HS-SC

    CH. Example: 15 = 1.5 dB Unit: 0.1 dB Resolution: 5 Requirement: HSCP_AD_RBS_500 1:01833 Rev:B Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier nonModCarrierIsActive Indicates whether or not the car rier is modulated (controlled through the actions startNonModulated and stopNonM odulated). Possible values: ? 0 = False (carrier is modulated). ? 1 = True (carr ier is non-moulated). User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [C Carrier nonModCarrierPower The transmission power of the no n-modulated carrier. Unit: 0.1 dBm User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UT S] Carrier operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Requirement: CELL_RBS_FU:9 Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier queueSelectAlgorithm 0 Specifies the scheduling algorit hm used in the cell. Possible values: ? EQUAL_RATE ? MAXIMUM_CQI ? PROPORTIONAL_ FAIR_HIGH ? PROPORTIONAL_FAIR_LOW ? PROPORTIONAL_FAIR_MEDIUM ? ROUND_ROBIN Depen dencies: Can only be set to other values than PROPOTIONAL_FAIR_ Carrier reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier tpaDeviceRef Reference to the TPA device(s) of the ca rrier. The attribute value is updated at commit of initSector, or at commit of c reate Carrier (for initiated sector). Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00810 Rev:A R ef. [CB_MOP] Carrier trDeviceRef Reference to the TR device(s) of the car rier. The attribute value is updated at commit of initSector, or at commit of cr eate Carrier (for initiated sector). Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00809 Rev:A Re f. [CB_MOP] Carrier txGainCalType 0 Defines whether manual or automatic TX G ain Calibration is used. The attribute has no effect if Digital Predistortion is used. Possible values: ? AUTOMATIC ? MANUAL User category: Ericsson personnel R ef. [CB_MOP] Carrier txGainCalValue 0 Gain value used if manually TX Gain sett ing is used. The attribute has no effect if Digital Predistortion is used. Unit: 0.1 dB User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier hsScchMinCodePower -150 HS-SCCH minimum transmit code po wer relative P-CPICH reference power. Example: 15 = 1.5 dB Unit: 0.1 dB Resoluti on: 5 Requirement: HSCM_AD_RBS_5302:03171 Rev:B Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier qualityCheckPower 0 Feedback from the HS-SCCH receiv ed quality. Unit: 1 dB Requirement: HSCM_AD_RBS_5302:03172 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier airRateTypeSelector TRANSMITTED(1) Scheduling index to weig ht the factor (air rate) in the queue selection procedure. Possible values: ? AC KNOWLEDGED ? TRANSMITTED Requirement: HSCM_AD_RBS_5302:03435 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier txGainAdjustHidden Last calculated TX Gain adjustme nt. Unit: 0.01 dB User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Carrier cpichIsActive Indicates whether CPICH is turned on or off (controlled by the actions turnCpichOff and resumeCpich). Possible values: ? 0 = False (CPICH is turned off). ? 1 = True (CPICH is turned on). User category : Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Carrier schIsActive Indicates whether SCH is turned on or of f (controlled by the actions turnSchBchOff and resumeSchBch). Possible values: ? 0 = False (SCH is turned off). ? 1 = True (SCH is turned on). User category: Er icsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Carrier bchIsActive Indicates whether BCH is turned on or of f (controlled by the actions turnSchBchOff and resumeSchBch). Possible values: ? 0 = False (BCH is turned off). ? 1 = True (BCH is turned on). User category: Er icsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Carrier schPrioForAbsResSharing 15 Parameter to decide the priority class(es) where absolute resource sharing will be applied. Requirement: HSCH_AD _RBS-OSS_6011:02255 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier schCongThreshGbr 5 Threshold to detect the congesti on situation of the guaranteed service. Example: 5 = 10ms Unit: 2 ms Requirement : HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02256 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP]

    Carrier schCongPeriodGbr 50 Minimum time period to define th e congestion situation of the guaranteed service. Example: 5 = 10ms Unit: 2 ms R equirement: HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02257 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier schNoCongThreshGbr 15 Threshold to detect the time tha t congestion situation of the guaranteed service ends. Example: 15 = 30 ms Unit: 2 ms Requirement: HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02258 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier schNoCongPeriodGbr 25 Minimum time period to define th e time that congestion situation of the guaranteed service ends. Example: 5 = 10 ms Unit: 2 ms Requirement: HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02259 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier schCongThreshNonGbr 2 Threshold to detect the congesti on situation of the non-guaranteed service.Requirement: HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:022 60 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier schPowerDeltaCongGbr 15 Parameter to define the minimum necessary power for the guaranteed service in congestion situation. The value is defined as a percentage of maximum transmission power.Unit: 1% Requirement: HSC H_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02261 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier schMinPowerNonGbrHsUsers Parameter to define the minimum reserved power for the non-guaranteed service in congestion situation. T he value is defined as a percentage of maximum transmission power.Unit: 1% Requi rement: HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02262 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier schMaxDelay 0 Parameter to define the maximum scheduli ng delay for scheduling priority class 0 to 15 (the first value in the sequence is for scheduling priority class 0). Example: 10 = 100 msUnit: 10 msUndefined va lue: -1 Requirement: HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02263 Rev:A R Carrier schWeight 0 Parameter to define the scheduling weigh t for scheduling priority class 0 to 15 (the first value in the sequence is for scheduling priority class 0). Requirement: HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02264 Rev:D Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier numberOfTxBranches 0 Parameter for configuration of n umber of TX (transmit) branches. Precondition: Sector to which the carrier belon gs is not initialized (Sector::proceduralStatus = INITIALIZATION_REQUIRED). Depe ndencies: At initSector, all carriers of a sector must have the Carrier numberOfRxBranches 0 Parameter for configuration of n umber of RX (receiver) branches. Precondition: Sector to which the carrier belon gs is not initialized (Sector::proceduralStatus = INITIALIZATION_REQUIRED). Depe ndencies: It is only possible to set to 4 if there are 2 Sector Carrier ulBandwidth 0 Denotes the carrier bandwidth in uplink. Example: 50 = 5.0 MHz Unit: 0.1 MHz Precondition: Cell must not be setup by the RNC. If corresponding sector is initialized the TR devices used by the carrier must be capable of setting UL bandwidth. Dependencies: Carrier dlBandwidth 0 Denotes the carrier bandwidth in downlin k. Example: 50 = 5.0 MHz Unit: 0.1 MHz Precondition: Cell must not be setup by t he RNC. If corresponding sector is initialized the TR devices used by the carrie r must be capable of setting DL bandwidth. Dependencies Carrier ulFilterProfile 0 Denotes the filter profile that will be used for the carrier bandwidth in uplink. Possible values: ? STANDARD ? ACA800_1 Precondition: Cell must not be setup by the RNC. If corresponding sector is ini tialized the TR devices used by the carrier must be cap Carrier dlFilterProfile 0 Denotes the filter profile that will be used for the carrier bandwidth in downlink. Possible values: ? STANDARD ? ACA800 _1 Precondition: Cell must not be setup by the RNC. If corresponding sector is i nitialized the TR devices used by the carrier must be c Carrier hsdpaMcActivityBufferThreshold 2 Parameter determining th e required amount of data in the multi carrier (MC) priority queue (PQ) data buf fer in order to re-activate the secondary serving HS-DSCH cell for a UE in MC mo de for which the secondary serving HS-DSCH cell is currently deactivate Carrier hsdpaMcInactivityTimer 2 Parameter determining the requir ed time of empty multi carrier (MC) priority queue (PQ) data buffer in order to deactivating the secondary serving HS-DSCH cell for a UE in MC mode. In the case of multiple MC-PQs belonging to the same UE all data buffers s

    Carrier extraHsScchPowerForSrbOnHsdpa 20 Extra power used for HSSCCH for a user with SRB on HS. Relative to the output from the HS-SCCH power co ntrol. Unit: 0.1 dBRequirement: SRBFRA_OBS_RBS-OSS_8811:00388 Ref. [CB_MOP] Carrier extraPowerForSrbOnHsdpa 20 Extra power used for sending the data during a HSDPA TTI which includes SRB data. Relative to the output from th e HS scheduler. Unit: 0.1 dBRequirement: SRBFRA_OBS_RBS-OSS_8811:00387 Ref. [CB_ MOP] Carrier minBitRate 0 Parameter to define the target minimum b it rate of HS priority queues for scheduling priority class 0 to 15 (the first v alue in the sequence is for scheduling priority class 0). Value -1 disables func tion. Unit: 1 kbpsUndefined value: -1 Requirement: MINB Carrier minBitRateMinCqi 8 The minimum CQI adjust value tha t allows performing minimum bit rate scheduling. Unit: 1 dBRequirement: MINBR_AD _RBS-OSS_8811:01290 Ref. [CB_MOP] Cbu CbuId The value component of the RDN. Cbu operationalState The operational state. Cbu availabilityStatusEt The availability status for the Exchange Terminal part of the Cbu board. It contains details about operationalSt ate. Cbu availabilityStatusTu The availability status for the Timing Unit part of the Cbu board. It contains details about operationalState. CcDevice CcDeviceId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system. CcDevice userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. CcDevice deviceIndId Device individual identity. Set by the system to CCD-<#>, where #=a number greater that zero. CcDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the Common channel device. CcDevice operationalState The operational state of the Common channel device. CcDevice usageState The usage state of the Common Ch annel device. CcDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the Common Channel device.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bi t 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 whe CcDevice spmReference Reference to an instance of Spm or PiuDevice MO. CchFrameSynch CchFrameSynchId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. CchFrameSynch tProcRncDl 1 Buffering/processing time in the RNC for a FACH/PCH data frame on the downlink.Part of the Downlink Offset (DO). Should be set to the upper limit of the delay within the RNC in the transmission of each frame. The actual buffering/processing time is affecte CchFrameSynch tProcRbsDl 5 Buffering/processing time in the RBS for a FACH/PCH data frame on the downlink.Part of the Downlink Offset (DO). Should be set to the upper limit of the delay within the RBS in the transmission of each frame. The actual buffering/processing time is affecte CchFrameSynch dto 10 Downlink Transport delay Offset.Part of the Downlink Offset (DO). Represents the maximum transport delay between the RNC and the RBS, including transport network associated delays in each node. Used a s a compensation to secure that a traffic frame will ha CchFrameSynch doStep 1 Downlink offset step size. Unit: ms CchFrameSynch toAWS 30 Time of arrival window starting point. U nit: ms CchFrameSynch toAWE 2 Time of arrival window end point. Unit: ms CchFrameSynch toAE 195 Time of arrival early point. Unit: ms CellUpdate CellUpdateId Naming attribute.Contains the va

    lue part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. CellUpdate rrcTcuc 10 Timer for supervision of the response to CELL UPDATE CONFIRM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Unit: 0.1 s ChannelSwitching ChannelSwitchingId Naming attribute .Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. ChannelSwitching dlRlcBufUpswitch 500 Downlink RLC buf fer threshold for upswitching from FACH/RACH to dedicated channel. When the RLC buffer load in the downlink exceeds this threshold, an upswitch request is issue d. Unit: bytes Resolution: 100 bytes Change takes effect: New connections ChannelSwitching ulRlcBufUpswitch 256 Uplink RLC buffe r threshold for upswitching from FACH/RACH to dedicated channel. When the RLC bu ffer load in the uplink exceeds this threshold, a measurement report is sent fro m the UE. An upswitch request is issued upon reception of the measurement repor ChannelSwitching pendingTimeAfterTrigger 1 Time after a cha nnel switch is requested, after which the next measurement report may be sent fr om either the UE or RNC internal buffer load measurements. Used to limit the UE and RNC buffer load reporting intensity. This attribute may only be changed by ChannelSwitching downswitchThreshold 0 Throughput thres hold for downswitching from dedicated channel to FACH/RACH. Once the throughput on both the uplink and downlink has fallen below this threshold, a downswitch to FACH/RACH is normaly requested after the length of time set in downswitchTimer ChannelSwitching downswitchTimerThreshold 0 Throughp ut threshold used to achieve hysteresis for downswitching from dedicated channel to FACH/RACH.Once the throughput on both the uplink and downlink has fallen bel ow the value of downswitchThreshold, a downswitch to FACH/RACH is normally reque sted af ChannelSwitching downswitchTimer 10 Time after which a conne ction with low throughput is downswitched from dedicated channel to FACH/RACH.On ce the throughput on both the uplink and downlink has fallen below the value of downswitchThreshold, a downswitch to FACH/RACH is normally requested af ChannelSwitching thpReportInterval 5 Averaging period of the UL and/or DL throughput measurement. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: 0.1 s Change takes effect: New connections ChannelSwitching inactivityTimer 30 Time after which an inac tive connection in CELL_FACH state is downswitched to URA_PCH state.When both th e downlink and uplink throughput have been 0 kbps (no data has been transmitted) for this length of time, a downswitch from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH state ChannelSwitching bandwidthMargin 90 Throughput threshold for triggering an upswitch of a downlink radio bearer on DCH to a higher DCH rate. Expressed relative to the maximum allowed rate for the currently allocated radio bearer. When the downlink throughput has been above this threshold for ChannelSwitching coverageTimer 10 Time after which a downl ink radio bearer on DCH is downswitched to a lower DCH rate due to high transmit ted code power. When the difference between the downlink transmitted code power and the maximum allowed code power has been less than the value of down ChannelSwitching dlRlcBufUpswitchMrab 0 Downlink RLC buf fer threshold for upswitching from the multi-RAB SP0 (Speech + PS 0/0) to a mult i-RAB at the preferred rate (Speech + ulPrefRate/dlPrefRate or Speech + ulPrefRa te/HS). When the RLC buffer load in the downlink exceeds this threshold, an ups ChannelSwitching downswitchPwrMargin 2 Margin on transm itted code power in the downlink, for triggering a downswitch to a lower DCH rat e when the transmitted power is too high.Expressed relative to the maximum allow ed code power. When the difference between the downlink transmitted code power ChannelSwitching downswitchTimerSp 2 Time after which the packet part of the multi-RAB Speech 12.2 kbps + Packet 64/64 kbps will be s witched down to multi-RAB SP0 (Speech 12.2 kbps + Packet 0/0 kbps), if no PS dat a has been transmitted. If the SP0 feature is not active, the packet part o ChannelSwitching filteringCoefficient 6 Filtering coeffi cient of the code power measurements. This attribute may only be changed by Eric

    sson personnel.Change takes effect: New connections ChannelSwitching repeatTimer 4 Time between repeated re quests to downswitch a downlink radio bearer on DCH with bad coverage to a lower DCH rate. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special valu es. 0: the repeat timer not in use, meaning that a downswitch request w ChannelSwitching ulRlcBufUpswitchMrab 8 Uplink RLC buffe r threshold for upswitching from the multi-RAB SP0 (Speech + PS 0/0) to a multiRAB at the preferred rate (Speech + ulPrefRate/dlPrefRate or Speech + ulPrefRate /HS). When the RLC buffer load in the uplink exceeds this threshold, a measurem ChannelSwitching upswitchPwrMargin 6 Margin on transm itted code power in the downlink, used to prohibit upswitches when the transmitt ed power is too high.Expressed relative to the maximum allowed code power. Befor e an upswitch from DCH to a higher DCH rate is requested, an estimate of the po ChannelSwitching upswitchTimer 5 Time after which a downl ink radio bearer on DCH with high throughput is upswitched to a higher DCH rate. When the downlink throughput has been above the percentage defined by bandwidth Margin for this length of time, an upswitch from DCH to a higher DCH ra ChannelSwitching allowSwitchToCommon 1 Controls whether it is allowed to switch the radio connection from a dedicated transport channel to a common transport channel (RACH/FACH) during channel switching in case of r adio bearer inactivity. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personne ChannelSwitching inactivityTimerDch 30 Time after which an IU RELEASE REQUEST message is sent to the core network, for UEs that only us e one or two signaling connections and no RABs in state CELL_DCH. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0: do not release (n ChannelSwitching downswitchTimerUp 60 Time after which the packet part of the multi-RAB UDI + 8/8 (CS Data 64 kbps + Packet 8kbps) wil l be released, if no PS data has been transmitted. The default setting is based on packet performance criteria.However, the actual setting may need to deviat ChannelSwitching hsdschInactivityTimer 2 Time after which a connection with low throughput is downswitched from HS-DSCH to CELL_FACH.Once the throughput on both the uplink and downlink has fallen below the value of do wnswitchThreshold, a downswitch to FACH/RACH is normally requested after this l ChannelSwitching upswitchTimerUl 5 Time after which an upli nk radio bearer on DCH with high throughput is upswitched to a higher DCH rate. When the uplink throughput has been above the percentage defined by bandwidthMar ginUl for this length of time, an upswitch from DCH to a higher DCH rat ChannelSwitching bandwidthMarginUl 90 Throughput thres hold for triggering an upswitch of an uplink radio bearer on DCH to a higher DCH rate. Expressed relative to the maximum allowed rate for the currently allocate d radio bearer. When the uplink throughput has been above this threshold for th ChannelSwitching ulThroughputDownswitchTimer 20 Time aft er which an uplink radio bearer on DCH with low throughput is downswitched to a lower DCH rate. When the uplink throughput has been below the percentage defined by ulDownswitchBandwidthMargin for this length of time, a downswitch from DCH t o a low ChannelSwitching ulDownswitchBandwidthMargin 80 Throughp ut threshold for triggering a downswitch of an uplink radio bearer on DCH to a l ower DCH rate. Expressed relative to the maximum allowed rate for the radio bear er to which the UE will been downswitched (the next lower rate). When the uplink throug ChannelSwitching ulThroughputAllowUpswitchThreshold 0 Throughput threshold for allowing an upswitch in the uplink after a throughput-b ased downswitch. Expressed relative to the maximum allowed rate for the currentl y allocated radio bearer (the rate to which the UE has been downswitched). After a throughput-b ChannelSwitching dlThroughputDownswitchTimer 20 Time aft er which a downlink radio bearer on DCH with low throughput is downswitched to a lower DCH rate. When the downlink throughput has been below the percentage defi ned by dlDownswitchBandwidthMargin for this length of time, a downswitch from DC

    H to a ChannelSwitching dlDownswitchBandwidthMargin 80 Throughp ut threshold for triggering a downswitch of a downlink radio bearer on DCH to a lower DCH rate. Expressed relative to the maximum allowed rate for the radio bea rer to which the UE will been downswitched (the next lower rate). When the downl ink thr ChannelSwitching dlThroughputAllowUpswitchThreshold 0 Throughput threshold for allowing an upswitch in the downlink after a throughput -based downswitch. Expressed relative to the maximum allowed rate for the curren tly allocated radio bearer (the rate to which the UE has been downswitched). Aft er a throughput ChannelSwitching inactivityTimerPch 30 Time after which a connection in URA_PCH state is switched down to IDLE state, if no upswitches have been subsequently requested.Unit: min Change takes effect: New connections ChannelSwitching inactivityTimeMultiPsInteractive 50 Time after which an inactive RB in a RAB combination containing PS Interactive i s released. When both the downlink and uplink throughput for an RB in the combin ation have been 0 kbps (no data has been transmitted) for this length of time, a release of tha ChannelSwitching fachToHsDisabled FALSE(0) Controls whether direct transitions from FACH to HS-DSCH are allowed for HS category 12 UEs. When set to TRUE, cat 12 UEs are forced to upswitch to HS via DCH. Direct t ransitions to HS are disabled by removing all HS states from the DCCS when the c at 12 U ChannelSwitching hsdschInactivityTimerCpc 50 Time aft er which a CPC activated connection with low throughput is downswitched from CEL L_DCH to CELL_FACH. This parameter is used instead of hsdschInactivityTimer for CPC activated connections. Resolution: 5Unit: 0.1 s Change takes effect: New con nection ClDevice ClDeviceId ClDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: AUC_310 Ref. [FS_AUC] ClDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I ClDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] ClDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_310 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.7 31Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] ClDeviceSet ClDeviceSetId ClDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_309 Specificatio ClDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_309 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] Clu CluId Clu deviceRef Reference to the CL device that depends on (uses) this unit. It is set by the system at creation of the NPU. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: PCU created. Ref. [CB_ECF] Clu alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the non-processing u nit. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_ REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when b it 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstandi Clu greenLed Indicates the operational status of the non-processing unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not support

    ed. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = Power no t present, but since the LED state is not readable in t Clu productionDate 0 Date the unit was produced (part of PID) . Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondi tion: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Clu productName Product name of the unit (part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Preconditi on: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Clu productNumber Product number of the unit (part of PID) . Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondi tion: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Clu productRevision Product revision of the unit (part of PI D). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precon dition: Hardware must be installed Ref. [FS_PIY] Clu productType 0 Product type (PID) is used by product in ventory to select products. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precon dition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Clu redLed Indicates the fault status of the non-processing unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not supported. ? NOT_AVAI LABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = No fault. ? STEADY_LIG HT = Fault. Use cases: MEC_310 Ref. [FS_MEC] Clu serialNumber Unique number that identifies the unit ( part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_F U:3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Clu yellowLed Indicates the information status of the non-processing unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not support ed. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = Board un locked. ? STEADY_LIGHT = Board locked. ? SLOW_BLINK = S CluDeviceGroup CluDeviceGroupId CluDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specific ation: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] CluDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat CluDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] CluDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] CnOperator CnOperatorId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. CnOperator plmnIdentity The PLMN identity of this core n etwork operator.When the NRI MOCN feature is active, this attribute, together wi th equivalentPlmnIdGroupRef, is used to identify to which CN Node a Ue should be connected, when the routing procedure is based on IMSI. When t CnOperator iphoNetworkRefsUtran Defines the UTRAN networ ks to which a UE registered in this core network is allowed to perform an interor intra-PLMN handover. Used by the NRI MOCN feature to filter the ExternalUtra nCells allowed for handover.See the class description of UtranRelation CnOperator iphoNetworkRefsGsm Defines the external GSM networks to which a UE registered in this core network is allowed to perform an inter-PLMN handover. Used by the NRI MOCN feature to filter the ExternalGsmCell s allowed for handover.See the class description of GsmRelation for mor CnOperator reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to this MO.See references in RncFunction and MocnCellProfile. CnOperator userLabel Provides the possibility to put

    a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. CnOperator equivalentPlmnIdentityGroupRef List of groups o f PLMN identities. Taken together, these groups identify the external CN operato rs that have roaming agreements with this sharing CN operator. CnOperator plmnIdentity.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN i dentity used in the radio network. CnOperator plmnIdentity.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN i dentity used in the radio network. CnOperator plmnIdentity.mncLength 0 The length of the MNC pa rt of a PLMN identity used in the radio network Unit: digit CommContexts CommContextsId CommContexts noOfCommContexts Total number of Communic ation Contexts allocated in the RBS. Ref. [CB_DCC] CommContexts ccIdHiMonitoringStarted Shows the ccId's that ha ve HI monitoring active. Maximum one ccId per TX board can have HI Monitoring ac tive, that is, in total 2 ccId can have HI Monitoring active. Ref. [CB_UTS] ConfigurationVersion ConfigurationVersionId The value compon ent of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions Lists th e stored configuration versions in the node. These CVs are stored in, and read f rom the file system. The CV list is formatted as a sequence of ConfigurationVers ionAttributes. Each structure contains one CV with the following fields: - name - ident ConfigurationVersion currentLoadedConfigurationVersion Specifies the name of the currently loaded configuration version. This is stored in, and read from the file system. This is the configuration version that the s ystem started with, that is, the configuration version that was able to start at the last node ConfigurationVersion startableConfigurationVersion Specifie s the name of the configuration version to use at the next node restart. This is stored in, and read from the file system. This attribute is set by the action, setStartable. It is also set at rollback by the system. The first CV in the roll back li ConfigurationVersion rollbackList Specifies a list of conf iguration versions to rollback to (configuration version name). The first CV on the list is used at the next rollback. This entry is then automatically removed from the rollback list. This attribute is modified by the actions, setF ConfigurationVersion currentUpgradePackage This is a refere nce to the upgrade package that is executing currently. ConfigurationVersion autoCreatedCVIsTurnedOn 0 This flag indica tes that a configuration version is created automatically once a day, if it is s et to true. The value of this attribute must be set to false, if the node has li mited disk space. ConfigurationVersion timeForAutoCreatedCV 0 Specifies the ti me (HH:MM) when the configuration versions are automatically created (once a day ). See also the attribute, autoCreatedCVIsTurnedOn. If the clock on the node is changed, this attribute must be set or else the JVM MP must be restarted. ConfigurationVersion rollbackOn 0 This flag indicates if r ollback is enabled or not. If true, the system automatically sets the rollback c ounter. If cyclic restarts, a rollback is issued after x restarts (x is defined by the rollbackInitCounterValue). ConfigurationVersion rollbackInitTimerValue 0 Specifies the ti me used by the system when rollback is switched on (rollbackOn = true). After th e given time, the node is not in a cyclic restart mode. The rollback counter, ro llbackInitCounterValue, is then reset to its initial value. Unit: 1 min ConfigurationVersion rollbackInitCounterValue 0 Specifie s the initial value of the rollback counter. This is used when rollback is switc hed on (rollbackOn = true). ConfigurationVersion executingCv Specifies the name of th e executing Configuration Version. This is the same as the attribute, currentLoa

    dedConfigurationVersion, after a node restart, where this is changed to the valu e of the lastCreatedCv, when a CV is created. ConfigurationVersion lastCreatedCv Specifies the name of th e last created Configuration Version. A CV of type downloaded is not considered as last created. ConfigurationVersion actionResult Contains the result from the latest invoked action. Additional information is stored in the attribute ad ditionalActionResultData. This attribute is only valid for the non-blocking acti ons: - putToFtpServer - getFromFtpServer - verifyRestore - restore - fo ConfigurationVersion additionalActionResultData Contains additional action result information. ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages Specifie s the upgrade packages which contain load modules that are corrupted. To correct this problem, a forced installation of these upgrade packages is done. This att ribute is set at the execution of the actions verifyRestore, restore and forcedR estore. ConfigurationVersion currentDetailedActivity Specifies the cu rrent detailed activity (within the main activity) at the execution of a non-blo cking action. Example: RETREIVING_BACKUP_FROM_REMOTE_SERVER. ConfigurationVersion currentMainActivity Specifies the cu rrent main activity at the execution of CV related actions (not the actions that handle the command log). Example: CREATING_CV. ConfigurationVersion listOfHtmlResultFiles Specifies the ab solute file paths to the verify restore html result files. ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages Specifies the up grade packages that are included in the downloaded CV, but do not exist in the n ode. This attribute is set at the execution of the actions verifyRestore, restor e and forcedRestore. ConfigurationVersion restoreConfirmationDeadline Specifie s the deadline, date and time for an operator confirmation of a restore action. If the deadline is not met, then an automatic rollback to a previous configurati on is issued by the system. The date and time is in UTC format. Unit: 1 min ConfigurationVersion configAdmCountdown 0 Specifies the nu mber of seconds until node restart, that is until a confirmation of the latest c hange must be made. If the countdown mechanism is already activated (if the attr ibute configCountdownActivated is set to true), changing this attribute will no ConfigurationVersion configOpCountdown Displays the num ber of seconds until node restart, that is until a confirmation of the latest ch ange must have been made. When the value of this attribute has reached 0, the no de restarts. If configCountdownActivated is false, the value of this attribute ConfigurationVersion configCountdownActivated 0 Activate s or deactivates the robust rollback function, that is a countdown mechanism for confirmation of a configuration change. If set to true, the countdown mechanism is activated. If set to false, the latest configuration change is regarded as c onfirme ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.date ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.identity ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.name ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.operatorComment ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.operatorName ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.status ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.type ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.upgradePackageId ConfigurationVersion actionResult.actionId 0 This ID is used to link more than one result to one action. ConfigurationVersion actionResult.configurationVersionName Specifies the name of the CV in which a particular action has been executed. Not ice that this CV name is the name that the CV has in the node (that is, it has n othing to do with the name that a copy of the CV might have in a FTP server). ConfigurationVersion actionResult.invokedAction 0

    ConfigurationVersion actionResult.mainResult 0 ConfigurationVersion actionResult.pathToDetailedInformation Absolute file path to a HTML file containing detailed information logged at the execution of the action. This parameter is populated only for actions verifyRest ore, restore and forcedRestore. ConfigurationVersion actionResult.time A timestamp. For mat: Date: 2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182 ConfigurationVersion additionalActionResultData.additionalInformation Additional detailed information. ConfigurationVersion additionalActionResultData.information ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productInfo Information about the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the ran ge is 0.. (unlimited). ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: Configuratio nVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productNumber The product number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 45 6, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productRevision The revision state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product rev ision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule , PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productionDate The production date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-d igits for the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a tota l of eight characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by tw o digits for th ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productInfo Information about the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the ran ge is 0.. (unlimited). ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: Configuratio nVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productNumber The product number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 45 6, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productRevision The revision state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product rev ision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule , PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productionDate The production date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-d igits for the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a tota l of eight characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by tw o digits for th ConfigurationVersion ConfigurationVersionId The value compon ent of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. ConfigurationVersion userLabel Label for free use. ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions Lists th e stored configuration versions in the node. These CVs are stored in, and read f rom the file system. The CV list is formatted as a sequence of ConfigurationVers ionAttributes. Each structure contains one CV with the following fields: - name - ident ConfigurationVersion currentLoadedConfigurationVersion Specifies the name of the currently loaded configuration version. This is stored

    in, and read from the file system. This is the configuration version that the s ystem started with, that is, the configuration version that was able to start at the last node ConfigurationVersion startableConfigurationVersion Specifie s the name of the configuration version to use at the next node restart. This is stored in, and read from the file system. This attribute is set by the action, setStartable. It is also set at rollback by the system. The first CV in the roll back li ConfigurationVersion rollbackList Specifies a list of conf iguration versions to rollback to (configuration version name). The first CV on the list is used at the next rollback. This entry is then automatically removed from the rollback list. This attribute is modified by the actions, setF ConfigurationVersion currentUpgradePackage This is a refere nce to the upgrade package that is executing currently. ConfigurationVersion autoCreatedCVIsTurnedOn 0 This flag indica tes that a configuration version is created automatically once a day, if it is s et to true. The value of this attribute must be set to false, if the node has li mited disk space. ConfigurationVersion timeForAutoCreatedCV 0 Specifies the ti me (HH:MM) when the configuration versions are automatically created (once a day ). See also the attribute, autoCreatedCVIsTurnedOn. If the clock on the node is changed, this attribute must be set or else the JVM MP must be restarted. ConfigurationVersion rollbackOn 0 This flag indicates if r ollback is enabled or not. If true, the system automatically sets the rollback c ounter. If cyclic restarts, a rollback is issued after x restarts (x is defined by the rollbackInitCounterValue). ConfigurationVersion rollbackInitTimerValue 2880 Specifies the ti me used by the system when rollback is switched on (rollbackOn = true). After th e given time, the node is not in a cyclic restart mode. The rollback counter, ro llbackInitCounterValue, is then reset to its initial value. Unit: 1 min ConfigurationVersion rollbackInitCounterValue 2 Specifie s the initial value of the rollback counter. This is used when rollback is switc hed on (rollbackOn = true). ConfigurationVersion executingCv Specifies the name of th e executing Configuration Version. This is the same as the attribute, currentLoa dedConfigurationVersion, after a node restart, where this is changed to the valu e of the lastCreatedCv, when a CV is created. ConfigurationVersion lastCreatedCv Specifies the name of th e last created Configuration Version. A CV of type downloaded is not considered as last created. ConfigurationVersion actionResult Contains the result from the latest invoked action. Additional information is stored in the attribute ad ditionalActionResultData. This attribute is only valid for the non-blocking acti ons: - putToFtpServer - getFromFtpServer - verifyRestore - restore - fo ConfigurationVersion additionalActionResultData Contains additional action result information. ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages Specifie s the upgrade packages which contain load modules that are corrupted. To correct this problem, a forced installation of these upgrade packages is done. This att ribute is set at the execution of the actions verifyRestore, restore and forcedR estore. ConfigurationVersion currentDetailedActivity Specifies the cu rrent detailed activity (within the main activity) at the execution of a non-blo cking action. Example: RETREIVING_BACKUP_FROM_REMOTE_SERVER. ConfigurationVersion currentMainActivity Specifies the cu rrent main activity at the execution of CV related actions (not the actions that handle the command log). Example: CREATING_CV. ConfigurationVersion listOfHtmlResultFiles Specifies the ab solute file paths to the verify restore html result files. ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages Specifies the up

    grade packages that are included in the downloaded CV, but do not exist in the n ode. This attribute is set at the execution of the actions verifyRestore, restor e and forcedRestore. ConfigurationVersion restoreConfirmationDeadline Specifie s the deadline, date and time for an operator confirmation of a restore action. If the deadline is not met, then an automatic rollback to a previous configurati on is issued by the system. The date and time is in UTC format. Unit: 1 min ConfigurationVersion configAdmCountdown 0 Specifies the nu mber of seconds until node restart, that is until a confirmation of the latest c hange must be made. If the countdown mechanism is already activated (if the attr ibute configCountdownActivated is set to true), changing this attribute will no ConfigurationVersion configOpCountdown Displays the num ber of seconds until node restart, that is until a confirmation of the latest ch ange must have been made. When the value of this attribute has reached 0, the no de restarts. If configCountdownActivated is false, the value of this attribute ConfigurationVersion configCountdownActivated 0 Activate s or deactivates the robust rollback function, that is a countdown mechanism for confirmation of a configuration change. If set to true, the countdown mechanism is activated. If set to false, the latest configuration change is regarded as c onfirme ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.date ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.identity ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.name ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.operatorComment ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.operatorName ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.status ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.type ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.upgradePackageId ConfigurationVersion actionResult.actionId 0 This ID is used to link more than one result to one action. ConfigurationVersion actionResult.configurationVersionName Specifies the name of the CV in which a particular action has been executed. Not ice that this CV name is the name that the CV has in the node (that is, it has n othing to do with the name that a copy of the CV might have in a FTP server). ConfigurationVersion actionResult.invokedAction 0 ConfigurationVersion actionResult.mainResult 0 ConfigurationVersion actionResult.pathToDetailedInformation Absolute file path to a HTML file containing detailed information logged at the execution of the action. This parameter is populated only for actions verifyRest ore, restore and forcedRestore. ConfigurationVersion actionResult.time A timestamp. For mat: Date: 2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182 ConfigurationVersion additionalActionResultData.additionalInformation Additional detailed information. ConfigurationVersion additionalActionResultData.information ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productInfo Information about the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the ran ge is 0.. (unlimited). ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: Configuratio nVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productNumber The product number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 45 6, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productRevision The revision state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product rev ision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule , PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType.

    ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productionDate The production date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-d igits for the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a tota l of eight characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by tw o digits for th ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productInfo Information about the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the ran ge is 0.. (unlimited). ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: Configuratio nVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productNumber The product number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 45 6, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productRevision The revision state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product rev ision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule , PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productionDate The production date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-d igits for the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a tota l of eight characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by tw o digits for th ConfigurationVersion ConfigurationVersionId The value compon ent of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions Lists th e stored configuration versions in the node. These CVs are stored in, and read f rom the file system. The CV list is formatted as a sequence of ConfigurationVers ionAttributes. Each structure contains one CV with the following fields: - name - ident ConfigurationVersion currentLoadedConfigurationVersion Specifies the name of the currently loaded configuration version. This is stored in, and read from the file system. This is the configuration version that the s ystem started with, that is, the configuration version that was able to start at the last node ConfigurationVersion startableConfigurationVersion Specifie s the name of the configuration version to use at the next node restart. This is stored in, and read from the file system. This attribute is set by the action, setStartable. It is also set at rollback by the system. The first CV in the roll back li ConfigurationVersion rollbackList Specifies a list of conf iguration versions to rollback to (configuration version name). The first CV on the list is used at the next rollback. This entry is then automatically removed from the rollback list. This attribute is modified by the actions, setF ConfigurationVersion currentUpgradePackage This is a refere nce to the upgrade package that is executing currently. ConfigurationVersion autoCreatedCVIsTurnedOn 0 This flag indica tes that a configuration version is created automatically once a day, if it is s et to true. The value of this attribute must be set to false, if the node has li mited disk space. ConfigurationVersion timeForAutoCreatedCV 0 Specifies the ti me (HH:MM) when the configuration versions are automatically created (once a day ). See also the attribute, autoCreatedCVIsTurnedOn. If the clock on the node is changed, this attribute must be set or else the JVM MP must be restarted. ConfigurationVersion rollbackOn 0 This flag indicates if r ollback is enabled or not. If true, the system automatically sets the rollback c ounter. If cyclic restarts, a rollback is issued after x restarts (x is defined by the rollbackInitCounterValue).

    ConfigurationVersion rollbackInitTimerValue 0 Specifies the ti me used by the system when rollback is switched on (rollbackOn = true). After th e given time, the node is not in a cyclic restart mode. The rollback counter, ro llbackInitCounterValue, is then reset to its initial value. Unit: 1 min ConfigurationVersion rollbackInitCounterValue 0 Specifie s the initial value of the rollback counter. This is used when rollback is switc hed on (rollbackOn = true). ConfigurationVersion executingCv Specifies the name of th e executing Configuration Version. This is the same as the attribute, currentLoa dedConfigurationVersion, after a node restart, where this is changed to the valu e of the lastCreatedCv, when a CV is created. ConfigurationVersion lastCreatedCv Specifies the name of th e last created Configuration Version. A CV of type downloaded is not considered as last created. ConfigurationVersion actionResult Contains the result from the latest invoked action. Additional information is stored in the attribute ad ditionalActionResultData. This attribute is only valid for the non-blocking acti ons: - putToFtpServer - getFromFtpServer - verifyRestore - restore - fo ConfigurationVersion additionalActionResultData Contains additional action result information. ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages Specifie s the upgrade packages which contain load modules that are corrupted. To correct this problem, a forced installation of these upgrade packages is done. This att ribute is set at the execution of the actions verifyRestore, restore and forcedR estore. ConfigurationVersion currentDetailedActivity Specifies the cu rrent detailed activity (within the main activity) at the execution of a non-blo cking action. Example: RETREIVING_BACKUP_FROM_REMOTE_SERVER. ConfigurationVersion currentMainActivity Specifies the cu rrent main activity at the execution of CV related actions (not the actions that handle the command log). Example: CREATING_CV. ConfigurationVersion listOfHtmlResultFiles Specifies the ab solute file paths to the verify restore html result files. ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages Specifies the up grade packages that are included in the downloaded CV, but do not exist in the n ode. This attribute is set at the execution of the actions verifyRestore, restor e and forcedRestore. ConfigurationVersion restoreConfirmationDeadline Specifie s the deadline, date and time for an operator confirmation of a restore action. If the deadline is not met, then an automatic rollback to a previous configurati on is issued by the system. The date and time is in UTC format. Unit: 1 min ConfigurationVersion configAdmCountdown 0 Specifies the nu mber of seconds until node restart, that is until a confirmation of the latest c hange must be made. If the countdown mechanism is already activated (if the attr ibute configCountdownActivated is set to true), changing this attribute will no ConfigurationVersion configOpCountdown Displays the num ber of seconds until node restart, that is until a confirmation of the latest ch ange must have been made. When the value of this attribute has reached 0, the no de restarts. If configCountdownActivated is false, the value of this attribute ConfigurationVersion configCountdownActivated 0 Activate s or deactivates the robust rollback function, that is a countdown mechanism for confirmation of a configuration change. If set to true, the countdown mechanism is activated. If set to false, the latest configuration change is regarded as c onfirme ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.date ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.identity ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.name ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.operatorComment ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.operatorName ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.status

    ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.type ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.upgradePackageId ConfigurationVersion actionResult.actionId 0 This ID is used to link more than one result to one action. ConfigurationVersion actionResult.configurationVersionName Specifies the name of the CV in which a particular action has been executed. Not ice that this CV name is the name that the CV has in the node (that is, it has n othing to do with the name that a copy of the CV might have in a FTP server). ConfigurationVersion actionResult.invokedAction 0 ConfigurationVersion actionResult.mainResult 0 ConfigurationVersion actionResult.pathToDetailedInformation Absolute file path to a HTML file containing detailed information logged at the execution of the action. This parameter is populated only for actions verifyRest ore, restore and forcedRestore. ConfigurationVersion actionResult.time A timestamp. For mat: Date: 2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182 ConfigurationVersion additionalActionResultData.additionalInformation Additional detailed information. ConfigurationVersion additionalActionResultData.information ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productInfo Information about the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the ran ge is 0.. (unlimited). ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: Configuratio nVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productNumber The product number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 45 6, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productRevision The revision state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product rev ision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule , PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productionDate The production date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-d igits for the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a tota l of eight characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by tw o digits for th ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productInfo Information about the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the ran ge is 0.. (unlimited). ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: Configuratio nVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productNumber The product number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 45 6, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productRevision The revision state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product rev ision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule , PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productionDate The production date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-d igits for the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a tota l of eight characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by tw o digits for th ConnectionField cabPosition A string that defines in which c

    abinet the connection field is located. Does not affect operation of the system. String with cabinet position as defined by Mub user' for positioning of cabinet. Used by system in alarms, but does not affect operation of t ConnectionField ConnectionFieldId ConnectionField reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: CEC_400 Ref. [FS_CEC] ControlPort operationalState Defines the operational state of the ControlPort. ControlPort ControlPortId The identity of the ControlPort. It matches the number of the physical port and is the value component of the RD N. ControlPort equipmentName Specifies the external device be ing controlled. Takes effect: Immediately. ControlPort normallyOpen 0 Defines the active state of the control port. True = Setting portStatus=On will close the circuit. False = Setti ng portStatus=On will open the circuit. Takes effect: Immediately. ControlPort portStatus 0 Controls the current status of t he external device connected to the port. Takes effect: Immediately. ControlPort availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. ControlPort userLabel Label for free use. ControlPort administrativeState 0 The administrative state . Takes effect: Immediatley. CoverageRelation CoverageRelationId Naming attribute .Contains the value part of the RDN. CoverageRelation utranCellRef Reference to the target cell in the relation. CoverageRelation coverageIndicator 0 Defines whether the coverage area of the source cell and the target cell are indicated to overla p (has approximately the same coverage area), or whether the coverage area of th e target cell is indicated to cover the source cell or it is contained in the s CoverageRelation relationCapability Specifies which features use this relation. CoverageRelation relationCapability.dchLoadSharing 0 Specifies if DCH interfrequency load sharing can be used between the source and target cells defined by this relation. Dependencies: Not used if the license Dch Loadsharing is not active. CoverageRelation relationCapability.hsCellSelection 0 Specifies if HS cell selection can be used between the source and target cells d efined by this relation. Change takes effect: Immediately CoverageRelation relationCapability.hsLoadSharing 0 Specifies if HS interfrequency load sharing can be used between the source and t arget cells defined by this relation. This can also result in selecting a cell b ased only on capability.Dependencies: Not used if the license HspaLoadsharing is not active. Cpc CpcId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. Cpc ueDtxCycle1 20 Number of subframes in the uplink DPCCH pattern in DTX cycle 1. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel . Change takes effect: New connection Cpc ueDtxCycle2 20 Number of subframes in the uplink DPCCH pattern in DTX cycle 2. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel . Change takes effect: New connection Cpc macDtxCycle 5 Length of the MAC DTX cycle. This attrib ute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect: New connecti on Cpc ueDpcchBurst1Tti2 2 Number of subframes in the uplin k DPCCH burst in DTX cycle 1 for EUL 2ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect: New connection Cpc ueDpcchBurst2Tti2 2 Number of subframes in the uplin

    k DPCCH burst in DTX cycle 2 for EUL 2ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect: New connection Cpc ueDpcchBurst1Tti10 5 Number of subframes in the uplin k DPCCH burst in DTX cycle 1 for EUL 10ms TTI. This attribute may only be change d by Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect: New connection Cpc ueDpcchBurst2Tti10 5 Number of subframes in the uplin k DPCCH burst in DTX cycle 2 for EUL 10ms TTI. This attribute may only be change d by Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect: New connection Cpc inactivityThreshUeDtxCycle2Tti2 1 Number of consecutive EDCH TTIs without an E-DCH transmission, after which the UE shall immediately mov e from DTX cycle 1 to DTX cycle 2, for EUL 2ms TTI . This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect: New connection Cpc inactivityThreshUeDtxCycle2Tti10 1 Number of consec utive E-DCH TTIs without an E-DCH transmission, after which the UE shall immedia tely move from DTX cycle 1 to DTX cycle 2, for EUL 10ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect: New connection Cpc ueDtxLongPreambleLength 4 Number of slots in the long prea mble associated with DTX cycle 2Note, when this parameter is set to 2, RNC exclu des the IE UE DTX long preamble length from the RRC message containing the IE DT X-DRX information. This attribute may only be changed by Eric Cpc macInactivityThresh 2 Number of consecutive E-DCH TTIs without an E-DCH transmission, after which the UE E-DCH transmissions are restr icted to the MAC DTX pattern.The UE E-DCH transmissions are never restricted to the MAC DTX pattern when it is set to 0 (=infinity). This attri Cpc cqiDtxTimer 2 Number of subframes after an HS-DSCH rec eption during which the CQI reports have higher priority than the DTX patternThe CQI reports always have higher priority than the DTX pattern when it is set to -1 (=infinity).This attribute may only be changed by Er Cpc ueDrxCycle 5 Length of the HS-SCCH reception pattern in subframes. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change t akes effect: New connection Cpc inactivityThreshUeDrxCycle 2 Number of subframes afte r an HS-SCCH reception or after the first slot of an HS-PDSCH reception during w hich the UE shall monitor the HS-SCCHs in the UE's HS-SCCH set continuously. Thi s attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes eff Cpc inactivityThreshUeGrantMonTti2 16 Number of TTIs after an E-DCH transmission during which the UE shall monitor the E-AGCH transmissions fr om the serving E-DCH cell and the E-RGCH from cells in the serving E-DCH radio l ink set, for EUL 2ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsso Cpc inactivityThreshUeGrantMonTti10 4 Number of TTIs after an E-DCH transmission during which the UE shall monitor the E-AGCH transmissions fr om the serving E-DCH cell and the E-RGCH from cells in the serving E-DCH radio l ink set, for EUL 10ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by Ericss Cpc ueDrxGrantMonitoring FALSE(0) Determines whether the U E is required to monitor the E-AGCH and the E-RGCH when the subframe (2msTTI) or frame (10ms TTI) overlaps with the start of the DRX reception pattern. This att ribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect: Cpc ueDtxDrxOffsetTti2 2 Offset of the DTX and DRX cycles compared to the CFN for E-DCH 2ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by Er icsson personnel. Change takes effect: New connection Cpc ueDtxDrxOffsetTti10 0 Offset of the DTX and DRX cycles compared to the CFN for E-DCH 10ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by E ricsson personnel. Change takes effect: New connection Cpc enablingDelay 128 Number of radio frames during which the UE shall send DPCCH continuously after (re)configuration with CPC activated. Thi s attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect: New connection Cpc cpcProfileOverride OFF(0) Parameter to determine whether t he pre-defined hardcoded parameter set(profile) is used or not to configure the CPC connections.If it is set to OFF, the CPC connections are configured with a p

    re-defined hardcoded parameter set(CPC profile). If ON, the s CpmTransGapPattSeq CpmTransGapPattSeqId Naming attribute .Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system. CpmTransGapPattSeq userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RN C. CpmTransGapPattSeq tGSN 4 Transmission gap starting slot n umber. A transmission gap pattern begins in a radio frame, containing at least o ne transmission gap slot. TGSN is the slot number of the first transmission gap slot within the first radio frame of the transmission gap patte CpmTransGapPattSeq tGL1 7 Transmission gap length 1. Numbe r of slots in the first transmission gap within the transmission gap pattern.Thi s attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: Possible va lues for GSM carrier RSSI Measurement are 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 14. P CpmTransGapPattSeq tGL2 7 Transmission gap length 2. Numbe r of slots in the second transmission gap within the transmission gap pattern.Th is attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Dependencies: If this par ameter is not explicitly set by higher layers, then tGL2 = tGL1 CpmTransGapPattSeq tGPL1 Transmission gap pattern length 1. Number of frames in transmission gap pattern 1. This attribute may only be ch anged by Ericsson personnel.Special values: Initial value (set by system) for GS M carrier RSSI Measurement (CpmTransGapPattSeq=1) is 8. Initi CpmTransGapPattSeq tGPL2 Transmission gap pattern length 2. Numer of frames in transmission gap pattern 2. This attribute may only be cha nged by Ericsson personnel.Special values: Initial value (set by system) for GSM carrier RSSI Measurement (CpmTransGapPattSeq=1) is 8. Initia CpmTransGapPattSeq tGPRC 0 Transmission gap pattern repetit ion count. Number of transmission gap patterns within the transmission gap patte rn sequence.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special val ues: 0 means infinity.Change takes effect: Next configuration o CpmTransGapPattSeq tGD 0 Transmission gap start distance. Number of slots between the starting slots of two consecutive transmission gaps within a transmission gap pattern.If this parameter is not set by higher layers , then there is only one transmission gap in the transmission g CpmTransGapPattSeq downLinkFrameType 0 Frame structure type used in downlink compressed mode control.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0 = 'A' 1 = 'B' Change takes effect: Next configuration of the transmission gap pattern sequence in UE, DRNC or RBS. CpmTransGapPattSeq nIdentifyAbort 66 Maximum number of patter n repeats that the UE shall use to attempt to decode the unknown BSIC of a GSM c ell in the initial BSIC identification procedure. This attribute may only be cha nged by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: Next configuration of t CpmTransGapPattSeq tReconfirmAbort 11 Maximum time allowed for the re-confirmation of the BSIC of a GSM cell in the BSIC re-confirmation proce dure. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 1: 0.5 s 2: 1.0 s 3: 1.5 s ... 11: 5.5 s ... 20: 10.0 s Unit: 0.5 s Chang CpmTransGapPattSeq tgcfnOffset Offset to the transmissi on gap connection frame number, for the pattern sequence when starting CPM. TGCF N = running CFN + startCFNoffset + TGCFNoffset This attribute may only be change d by Ericsson personnel.Special values: Initial value (set by system) f CuDeviceGroup CuDeviceGroupId CuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specific ation: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] CuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat CuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT

    ] CuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] CuSubrack cabinetPosition String with cabinet position as defined by 'Mub user' for positioning of cabinet. It is used to distinguish subr acks in different cabinets, thus allowing a unique subrack position to be built. Example: 9. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL CuSubrack CuSubrackId CuSubrack subrackPosition The subrack position. The value consist of (<X><Y><Z>): X = Cabinet position within the node starting from the l eft, one digit (1 - 9). Y = Subrack vertical position within the cabinet startin g from the ground, one letter (A - Z). Z = Subrack horizontal p DbccDevice DbccDeviceId DbccDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: DBC_UC906 Ref. [FS_DBC] DbccDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: DbccDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] DbccDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: ITU-T rec. X .731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] DbccDeviceSet DbccDeviceSetId DbccDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_905 Specificatio DbccDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC905 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] DbccDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC905 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] DbchDeviceSet DbchDeviceSetId DbchDeviceSet reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: DBC_UC905 Ref. [FS_DBC] DbchDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_905 Specificatio DbchDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC905 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] DbchDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC905 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] DcDevice DcDeviceId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system. DcDevice userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. DcDevice deviceIndId Device individual identity. Set by the system to DCD-<#>, where #=a number greater that zero. DcDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the DC device. DcDevice operationalState The operational state of the DC device.

    DcDevice usageState The usage state of the DC device . DcDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the DcDevice.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFL INE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9, 10 o DcDevice spmReference Reference to an instance of Spm or PiuDevice MO. DchFrameSynch DchFrameSynchId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. DchFrameSynch userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. DchFrameSynch tProcRncDl 1 Buffering/processing time for a downlink DCH data frame in RNC. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson p ersonnel.Unit: ms DchFrameSynch tProcRbsDl 5 Buffering/processing time for a downlink DCH data frame in RBS. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson p ersonnel.Unit: ms DchFrameSynch tProcRncUl 1 Buffering/processing time for an uplink DCH data frame in RNC. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson pe rsonnel.Dependencies: It is recommended to set tProcRncUl + toAWEUl + toAEUl <= 640 [ms]It is recommended to set toAWSUl <= toAEUl Unit: ms DchFrameSynch tProcRbsUl 10 Buffering/processing time for an uplink DCH data frame in RBS. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson pe rsonnel.Unit: ms DchFrameSynch dto Downlink transport delay offset. Unit: m s DchFrameSynch doStep Downlink offset step size. Unit: ms DchFrameSynch toAWS Downlink, time of arrival window startin g point. Unit: ms DchFrameSynch toAWE 2 Time of arrival window end point in the downlink. Unit: ms DchFrameSynch toAE 195 Downlink, time of arrival early point. U nit: ms DchFrameSynch uto Uplink transport delay offset. Unit: ms DchFrameSynch uoStep Uplink offset step size. Unit: ms DchFrameSynch toAWSUl Uplink, time of arrival window startpoin t. Dependencies: It is recommended to set toAWEUl + toAEUl <= 639 [ms]It is reco mmended to set toAWSUl <= toAEUl Unit: ms DchFrameSynch toAWEUl Uplink, time of arrival window endpoint. Dependencies: It is recommended to set toAWEUl + toAEUl <= 639 [ms]It is recomm ended to set toAWSUl <= toAEUl Unit: ms DchFrameSynch toAEUl Uplink, time of arrival early point. Dep endencies: It is recommended to set toAWEUl + toAEUl <= 639 [ms]It is recommende d to set toAWSUl <= toAEUl Unit: ms DchFrameSynch reservedBy Reference back to the UeRrcType and/or UeRabType MO(s) that uses this DchFrameSynch instance. The system will se t this attribute when the dchFrameSynchRef attribute of the UeRrcType MO and/or UeRabType MO is set to this instance, and then in the same tran DchMap DchMapId Naming attribute. Contains the value par t of the RDN. DchMap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. DchMap gbrDlRangeStart Starting point for the GBR range in the downlink.Dependencies:gbrDlRangeStart < gbrDlRangeEnd when dchDirectrion =DL_DCH _UL_DCH This parameter is ignored if dchDirection = DL_DCH_ONLY or UL_DCH_ONLY. For further restrictions please see DchMap class descri DchMap gbrDlRangeEnd End point for the GBR range in the downl ink.Dependencies:gbrDlRangeEnd > gbrDlRangeStart when dchDirectrion =DL_DCH_UL_D CH This parameter is ignored if dchDirection = DL_DCH_ONLY or UL_DCH_ONLY. For f

    urther restrictions please see DchMap class description DchMap dchDirection Unidirectional DCH Indicator. Dependenci es:gbrDlRangeStart < gbrDlRangeEnd when dchDirectrion =DL_DCH_UL_DCH. For furthe r restrictions please see DchMap class description.Change takes effect: New conn ections DchMap internalArp Subset of ARP values applicable for this instance of DchMap.If the sequence length is zero, the complete ARP range is us ed. Dependencies:For further restrictions please see DchMap class description.Ch ange takes effect: New connections DchMap qosRef Reference to a TnlQosClass instance containing t he QoS settings.Dependencies:This reference must point at an instance of TnlQosC lass that is contained under the same profile as this instance. Change takes eff ect: New connections DeviceGroup alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the device g roup. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER _REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alar DeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_904Specificati DeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Hardware uni ts not supporting hardware test will always return the default value UNDETERMINE D. Use cases: HWT_UC1 Requirement: Test_UTRAN_FU3 Ref. [FS_HWT] DeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_904Specification: IT U-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] DeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC904 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] DeviceGroup DeviceGroupId Instance name, part of the relat ive distinguished name (RDN). Indicates the device group type. Possible values: ? ATMAU ? DUI ? RUW ? XCU Dhcp DhcpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. Dhcp userLabel Label for free use. Dhcp dhcpServerAddresses IP addresses to the DHCP server, used by the DHCP Relay Agent. Default is an empty array. Adding and removing ad dresses are done using the actions, addDhcpServerAddress() and removeDhcpServerA ddress(). Dhcp DhcpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. Dhcp userLabel Label for free use. Dhcp dhcpServerAddresses IP addresses to the DHCP server, used by the DHCP Relay Agent. Default is an empty array. Adding and removing ad dresses are done using the actions, addDhcpServerAddress() and removeDhcpServerA ddress(). Dhcp DhcpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. Dhcp userLabel Label for free use. Dhcp dhcpServerAddresses IP addresses to the DHCP server, used by the DHCP Relay Agent. Default is an empty array. Adding and removing ad dresses are done using the actions, addDhcpServerAddress() and removeDhcpServerA ddress(). DigitalCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the cable. O nly bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alarm. Use DigitalCable connectedToObjectARef Reference to the hardwar

    e unit (for example, RUIFB) to which this cable must be connected. The informati on sent through the cable is sent from Object A to Object B. If the cable is use d both for DL and UL, the DL direction must be Object A to Object B. Pr DigitalCable connectedToObjectBRef Reference to the hardwar e unit (for example, RU) to which this cable must be connected. The information sent through the cable is sent from Object A to Object B. If the cable is used b oth for DL and UL, the DL direction must be Object A to Object B. Preco DigitalCable electricalDelay Electricaldelay of the cable. Th e value -1 indicates that the electrical delay for the cable is measured by the RBS. Example: 100 = 10 nanoseconds Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell s etup for the affected cell. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Mod DigitalCable objectAConnector Value representing the c onnector on the hardware unit represented by object A (RUIFB, DUW, XCU, RUW or R RUW) to which this cable must be connected. Possible values: ? DATA_A = Valid co nnector for RUIFB and XCU. ? DATA_B = Valid connector for RUIFB and XCU DigitalCable objectBConnector Value representing the c onnector on the hardware unit represented by object B (DUW, XCU, RU, RRU, RUW an d RRUW) to which this cable must be connected. Possible values: ? DATA_1 = Valid connector for XCU, RU, RRU, RUW and RRUW. ? DATA_2 = Valid connector f DigitalCable DigitalCableId DownlinkBaseBandPool DownlinkBaseBandPoolId DownlinkBaseBandPool radioInterfaceBoardRef Refers to the ra dio interface board connected to the DL baseband pool. Use cases: MEC_300, DBC_U C157, DBC_UC161, DBC_UC165 Ref. [CB_PMG] DownlinkBaseBandPool maxNumADchReservation 0 The maximum numb er of A-DCH resources that may be configured in a baseband pool. Takes effect: T akes effect immediately if possible. Otherwise it will take effect gracefully (s tarving out resources). Ref. [CB_MOP] DpclDevice DpclDeviceId DpclDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: DBC_UC906 Ref. [FS_DBC] DpclDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: DpclDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] DpclDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: ITU-T rec. X .731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] DpclDeviceSet DpclDeviceSetId DpclDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_905 Specificatio DpclDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC905 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] DpclDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC905 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] DpProgram DpProgramId DpProgram loadModule Reference to the corresponding L oadModule MO. It contains information for loading: product data, load module fil e path and file size. Use cases: SUE_UC_U2, SUE_UC_H2 Precondition: The LoadModu le MO must exist. Ref. [FS_SUE] DpProgram startState 0 Shows whether the DpProgram is a llowed to be used after a device board restart (allowed if enabled). Possible va lues: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC139, DBC_UC119, DBC_UC140 Dependenci

    es: Only 1 program is allowed to have the state ENABLED at the Ds0Bundle Ds0BundleId The value component of the RDN. Ds0Bundle userLabel Label for free use. Ds0Bundle availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Ds0Bundle operationalState The operational state. Ds0Bundle listOfTimeSlots The list gives the time slots (w ithin ATM traffic fraction) that are to be allocated to the DS0 Bundle. When a D S0 Bundle is contained by an E1PhysPathTerm, the slots that can be placed in thi s list are 1 to 31. When a DS0 Bundle is contained by a J1PhysP Ds0Bundle tdmMode The state of tdmMode. true - enabled. fa lse - disabled. Ds0Bundle reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. Ds0Bundle Ds0BundleId The value component of the RDN. Ds0Bundle userLabel Label for free use. Ds0Bundle availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Ds0Bundle operationalState The operational state. Ds0Bundle listOfTimeSlots The list gives the time slots (w ithin ATM traffic fraction) that are to be allocated to the DS0 Bundle. When a D S0 Bundle is contained by an E1PhysPathTerm, the slots that can be placed in thi s list are 1 to 31. When a DS0 Bundle is contained by a J1PhysP Ds0Bundle tdmMode The state of tdmMode. true - enabled. fa lse - disabled. Ds0Bundle reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. Ds0Bundle Ds0BundleId The value component of the RDN. Ds0Bundle userLabel Label for free use. Ds0Bundle availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Ds0Bundle operationalState The operational state. Ds0Bundle listOfTimeSlots The list gives the time slots (w ithin ATM traffic fraction) that are to be allocated to the DS0 Bundle. When a D S0 Bundle is contained by an E1PhysPathTerm, the slots that can be placed in thi s list are 1 to 31. When a DS0 Bundle is contained by a J1PhysP Ds0Bundle tdmMode The state of tdmMode. true - enabled. fa lse - disabled. Ds0Bundle reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. E1PhysPathTerm E1PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. E1PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. E1PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. E1PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. E1PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. E1PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. E1PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state . E1PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. E1PhysPathTerm crc4Mode ON(1) Indicates whether the E1 uses Cy clical Redundancy Check (CRC) 4 framing. E1PhysPathTerm idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a t imeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both

    E1PhysPathTerm degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the receiv ed blocks are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. I f the threshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% E1PhysPathTerm degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. E1PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. E1PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false reporting disabled. E1PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s E1PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. E1PhysPathTerm reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaL ink MO that reserves this MO instance. E1PhysPathTerm E1PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. E1PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. E1PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. E1PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. E1PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. E1PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. E1PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state . E1PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. E1PhysPathTerm crc4Mode ON(1) Indicates whether the E1 uses Cy clical Redundancy Check (CRC) 4 framing. E1PhysPathTerm idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a t imeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both E1PhysPathTerm degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the receiv ed blocks are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. I f the threshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% E1PhysPathTerm degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. E1PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. E1PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false reporting disabled. E1PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s E1PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. E1PhysPathTerm reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaL ink MO that reserves this MO instance. E1PhysPathTerm E1PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. E1PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. E1PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state.

    E1PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. E1PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. E1PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. E1PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state . E1PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. E1PhysPathTerm crc4Mode ON(1) Indicates whether the E1 uses Cy clical Redundancy Check (CRC) 4 framing. E1PhysPathTerm idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a t imeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both E1PhysPathTerm degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the receiv ed blocks are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. I f the threshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% E1PhysPathTerm degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. E1PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. E1PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false reporting disabled. E1PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s E1PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. E1PhysPathTerm reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaL ink MO that reserves this MO instance. E1Ttp E1TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. E1Ttp userLabel Label for free use. E1Ttp degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% E1Ttp degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. E1Ttp aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm In dication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporti ng disabled. E1Ttp rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote D efect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - report ing disabled. E1Ttp crc4Mode ON(1) Indicates whether the E1 uses Cyclical R edundancy Check (CRC) 4 framing. E1Ttp idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a timeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both E1Ttp operationalState The operational state. E1Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. E1Ttp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. E1Ttp reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaLink MO t

    hat reserves this MO instance. E1Ttp E1TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. E1Ttp userLabel Label for free use. E1Ttp degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% E1Ttp degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. E1Ttp aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm In dication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporti ng disabled. E1Ttp rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote D efect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - report ing disabled. E1Ttp crc4Mode ON(1) Indicates whether the E1 uses Cyclical R edundancy Check (CRC) 4 framing. E1Ttp idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a timeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both E1Ttp operationalState The operational state. E1Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. E1Ttp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. E1Ttp reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaLink MO t hat reserves this MO instance. E1Ttp E1TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. E1Ttp userLabel Label for free use. E1Ttp degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% E1Ttp degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. E1Ttp aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm In dication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporti ng disabled. E1Ttp rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote D efect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - report ing disabled. E1Ttp crc4Mode ON(1) Indicates whether the E1 uses Cyclical R edundancy Check (CRC) 4 framing. E1Ttp idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a timeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both E1Ttp operationalState The operational state. E1Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. E1Ttp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. E1Ttp reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaLink MO t hat reserves this MO instance. E3PhysPathTerm E3PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. E3PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. E3PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state .

    E3PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s E3PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. E3PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. E3PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. E3PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. E3PhysPathTerm degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the receiv ed blocks are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. I f the threshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% E3PhysPathTerm degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. E3PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false reporting disabled. E3PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. E3PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. E3PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. E3PhysPathTerm E3PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. E3PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. E3PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state . E3PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s E3PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. E3PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. E3PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. E3PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. E3PhysPathTerm degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the receiv ed blocks are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. I f the threshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% E3PhysPathTerm degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. E3PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false reporting disabled. E3PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. E3PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. E3PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. E3PhysPathTerm E3PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. E3PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. E3PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state .

    E3PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s E3PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. E3PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. E3PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. E3PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. E3PhysPathTerm degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the receiv ed blocks are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. I f the threshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% E3PhysPathTerm degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. E3PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false reporting disabled. E3PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. E3PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. E3PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. EcPort EcPortId The value component of the RDN. EcPort hubPosition The hub port that the external node or H W unit is connected to, used for addressing purposes. EDbchDeviceSet EDbchDeviceSetId EDbchDeviceSet reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: DBC_UC905Ref. [FS_DBC] EDbchDeviceSet activeRdbtMeasurements Array with all activeEUL RDBT Measurements on this MO. Measurement types for this attribute are 105 and 1 06. Up to 2 measurements can be active.Undefined value: 0 User category: Ericsso n personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] EDbchDeviceSet alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the device s et. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_R EPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when bi t 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alarm. EDbchDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_905 Specificatio EDbchDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC905 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] EDbchDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC905 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] EDchResources EDchResourcesId EDchResources eDbchDeviceSetRef Reference to an E-DBCH d evice set. Ref. [CB_MOP] EDchResources eScDeviceSetRef Reference to an E-SC device set. Ref. [CB_MOP] EDchResources operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP] EDchResources availabilityStatus The availability status of the resources. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPEN DENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG _FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP]

    Equipment EquipmentId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Equipment EquipmentId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Equipment EquipmentId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. EquipmentSupportFunction supportSystemControl 0 Defines if the node is controlling and supervising the climate, power and external alarm HW in the cabinet.Only one node in the cabinet can control and supervise climat e and power.Takes effect: Immediately. EquipmentSupportFunction EquipmentSupportFunctionId The value component of the RDN. EScDeviceSet EScDeviceSetId EScDeviceSet reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: DBC_UC905Ref. [FS_DBC] EScDeviceSet activeRdbtMeasurements Array with all active EU L local measurements on this MO. Measurement types for this attribute are 100..1 04,108,109. Up to 7 measurements can be active.Undefined value: 0 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] EScDeviceSet alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the device s et. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_R EPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when bi t 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alarm. EScDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_905 Specificatio EScDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC905 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] EScDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC905 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] EthernetLink EthernetLinkId The value component of the RDN. EthernetLink interfaceName The interface name. Dependencies : If the IP address of the EthernetLink MO is the OAM IP Address for the node, t he attribute nodeInterfaceName in the Ip MO must be set to the value of this att ribute. EthernetLink userLabel Label for free use. EthernetLink ipAddress Specifies the IP address of the Ethernet link. The input format is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Ea ch field consists of one to three digits. The address must not be a broadcast or multicast address. Dependencies: The value of this attribute m EthernetLink subnetMask States the subnet mask of the Et hernet link. The input format is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field consists of one to three digits. The subnet mask must be contiguous. Exam ple: 255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet masks: 11111111.11111111.1 EthernetLink broadcastAddress The input format is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field consists of one to three digit s. EthernetLink mtuSize 0 The IP layer expects the Ethernet link t o have an MTU size (maximum Ethernet frame size without fragmentization) of 1500 bytes. The value must be the default value. EthernetLink metric 1 Specifies the metric of the Ethernet lin k. The metric value is calculated as 10^8 divided by the link bit speed. For exa mple: Metric for 10 Mbps Ethernet = 10^8/10^7 = 10 Metric for 100 Mbps or faster Ethernet = 10^8/10^8 = 1 EthernetLink operationalState The operational state. T his attribute is dependent of the operational states of the underlying MAUs that represent the Ethernet transceiver function. If there is at least one operation

    al MAU, the operationalState of EthernetLink is set to ENABLED. EthernetLink macAddress The MAC address is persistently stored in the flash PROM on the MP where the IP stack resides. It is stored ther e when the board is manufactured. EthernetLink reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. EthernetLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. EthernetLink activeMau Reference to the active Medium A ccess Unit (MAU). EthernetLink availableMaus Contains a list of references to all available Medium Access Units (MAUs). EthernetLink EthernetLinkId The value component of the RDN. EthernetLink interfaceName The interface name. Dependencies : If the IP address of the EthernetLink MO is the OAM IP Address for the node, t he attribute nodeInterfaceName in the Ip MO must be set to the value of this att ribute. EthernetLink userLabel Label for free use. EthernetLink ipAddress Specifies the IP address of the Ethernet link. The input format is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Ea ch field consists of one to three digits. The address must not be a broadcast or multicast address. Dependencies: The value of this attribute m EthernetLink subnetMask States the subnet mask of the Et hernet link. The input format is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field consists of one to three digits. The subnet mask must be contiguous. Exam ple: 255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet masks: 11111111.11111111.1 EthernetLink broadcastAddress The input format is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field consists of one to three digit s. EthernetLink mtuSize 0 The IP layer expects the Ethernet link t o have an MTU size (maximum Ethernet frame size without fragmentization) of 1500 bytes. The value must be the default value. EthernetLink metric 1 Specifies the metric of the Ethernet lin k. The metric value is calculated as 10^8 divided by the link bit speed. For exa mple: Metric for 10 Mbps Ethernet = 10^8/10^7 = 10 Metric for 100 Mbps or faster Ethernet = 10^8/10^8 = 1 EthernetLink operationalState The operational state. T his attribute is dependent of the operational states of the underlying MAUs that represent the Ethernet transceiver function. If there is at least one operation al MAU, the operationalState of EthernetLink is set to ENABLED. EthernetLink macAddress The MAC address is persistently stored in the flash PROM on the MP where the IP stack resides. It is stored ther e when the board is manufactured. EthernetLink reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. EthernetLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. EthernetLink activeMau Reference to the active Medium A ccess Unit (MAU). EthernetLink availableMaus Contains a list of references to all available Medium Access Units (MAUs). EthernetLink EthernetLinkId The value component of the RDN. EthernetLink interfaceName The interface name. Dependencies : If the IP address of the EthernetLink MO is the OAM IP Address for the node, t he attribute nodeInterfaceName in the Ip MO must be set to the value of this att ribute. EthernetLink userLabel Label for free use. EthernetLink ipAddress Specifies the IP address of the Ethernet link. The input format is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Ea ch field consists of one to three digits. The address must not be a broadcast or

    multicast address. Dependencies: The value of this attribute m EthernetLink subnetMask States the subnet mask of the Et hernet link. The input format is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field consists of one to three digits. The subnet mask must be contiguous. Exam ple: 255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet masks: 11111111.11111111.1 EthernetLink broadcastAddress The input format is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field consists of one to three digit s. EthernetLink mtuSize 0 The IP layer expects the Ethernet link t o have an MTU size (maximum Ethernet frame size without fragmentization) of 1500 bytes. The value must be the default value. EthernetLink metric 1 Specifies the metric of the Ethernet lin k. The metric value is calculated as 10^8 divided by the link bit speed. For exa mple: Metric for 10 Mbps Ethernet = 10^8/10^7 = 10 Metric for 100 Mbps or faster Ethernet = 10^8/10^8 = 1 EthernetLink operationalState The operational state. T his attribute is dependent of the operational states of the underlying MAUs that represent the Ethernet transceiver function. If there is at least one operation al MAU, the operationalState of EthernetLink is set to ENABLED. EthernetLink macAddress The MAC address is persistently stored in the flash PROM on the MP where the IP stack resides. It is stored ther e when the board is manufactured. EthernetLink reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. EthernetLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. EthernetLink activeMau Reference to the active Medium A ccess Unit (MAU). EthernetLink availableMaus Contains a list of references to all available Medium Access Units (MAUs). EthernetSwitch reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. EthernetSwitch pbitQueueMap Maps the 802.1p values to switch queues for the port. Queue 0 has the lowest priority and queue 3 has the highes t priority. EthernetSwitch untaggedIngressPriority 0 All packets that are unt agged, when they ingress the internal port, have a VLAN tag inserted with this p riority into the 802.1p value field of the VLAN tag. If enableVlan is set to fal se, this attribute is ignored. EthernetSwitch untaggedIngressVid 0 All packets that are unt agged, when they ingress the internal port, have a VLAN tag inserted with the sp ecified VLAN id.If this attribute is set to 1, the default VLAN id is used. If a nother value is specified, the port must be a member of the specified V EthernetSwitch vlanMembership The VLAN identities supported by the internal port, and the egress untag behavior for the VLAN on the internal p ort. If the vid is set to 0, it means that no VLAN id is specified for the port and the value specified for egressUntag will be ignored.Ifvid i EthernetSwitch enableVlan 0 Specifies whether the switch use s VLAN. If disabled, all VLAN settings for the EthernetSwitchPort MO are ignored . EthernetSwitch availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. EthernetSwitch operationalState The operational state. EthernetSwitch EthernetSwitchId The value component of t he RDN. EthernetSwitch macAddress 0 Media Access Control address. It is used for the switch management. If the board is not available, the attribute has the value 00:00:00:00:00:00. EthernetSwitch userLabel Label for free use. EthernetSwitch vlanMembership.egressUntag 0

    EthernetSwitch vlanMembership.vid 0 EthernetSwitch pbitQueueMap.pbit The priority bit of the IP packet. EthernetSwitch pbitQueueMap.queue The switch queue. EthernetSwitch reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. EthernetSwitch pbitQueueMap Maps the 802.1p values to switch queues for the port. Queue 0 has the lowest priority and queue 3 has the highes t priority. EthernetSwitch untaggedIngressPriority 0 All packets that are unt agged, when they ingress the internal port, have a VLAN tag inserted with this p riority into the 802.1p value field of the VLAN tag. If enableVlan is set to fal se, this attribute is ignored. EthernetSwitch untaggedIngressVid 0 All packets that are unt agged, when they ingress the internal port, have a VLAN tag inserted with the sp ecified VLAN id.If this attribute is set to 1, the default VLAN id is used. If a nother value is specified, the port must be a member of the specified V EthernetSwitch vlanMembership The VLAN identities supported by the internal port, and the egress untag behavior for the VLAN on the internal p ort. If the vid is set to 0, it means that no VLAN id is specified for the port and the value specified for egressUntag will be ignored.Ifvid i EthernetSwitch enableVlan 0 Specifies whether the switch use s VLAN. If disabled, all VLAN settings for the EthernetSwitchPort MO are ignored . EthernetSwitch availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. EthernetSwitch operationalState The operational state. EthernetSwitch EthernetSwitchId The value component of t he RDN. EthernetSwitch macAddress 0 Media Access Control address. It is used for the switch management. If the board is not available, the attribute has the value 00:00:00:00:00:00. EthernetSwitch userLabel Label for free use. EthernetSwitch vlanMembership.egressUntag 0 EthernetSwitch vlanMembership.vid 0 EthernetSwitch pbitQueueMap.pbit The priority bit of the IP packet. EthernetSwitch pbitQueueMap.queue The switch queue. EthernetSwitch reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. EthernetSwitch pbitQueueMap Maps the 802.1p values to switch queues for the port. Queue 0 has the lowest priority and queue 3 has the highes t priority. EthernetSwitch untaggedIngressPriority 0 All packets that are unt agged, when they ingress the internal port, have a VLAN tag inserted with this p riority into the 802.1p value field of the VLAN tag. If enableVlan is set to fal se, this attribute is ignored. EthernetSwitch untaggedIngressVid 0 All packets that are unt agged, when they ingress the internal port, have a VLAN tag inserted with the sp ecified VLAN id.If this attribute is set to 1, the default VLAN id is used. If a nother value is specified, the port must be a member of the specified V EthernetSwitch vlanMembership The VLAN identities supported by the internal port, and the egress untag behavior for the VLAN on the internal p ort. If the vid is set to 0, it means that no VLAN id is specified for the port and the value specified for egressUntag will be ignored.Ifvid i EthernetSwitch enableVlan 0 Specifies whether the switch use s VLAN. If disabled, all VLAN settings for the EthernetSwitchPort MO are ignored . EthernetSwitch availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState.

    EthernetSwitch operationalState The operational state. EthernetSwitch EthernetSwitchId The value component of t he RDN. EthernetSwitch macAddress 0 Media Access Control address. It is used for the switch management. If the board is not available, the attribute has the value 00:00:00:00:00:00. EthernetSwitch userLabel Label for free use. EthernetSwitch vlanMembership.egressUntag 0 EthernetSwitch vlanMembership.vid 0 EthernetSwitch pbitQueueMap.pbit The priority bit of the IP packet. EthernetSwitch pbitQueueMap.queue The switch queue. EthernetSwitchFabric EthernetSwitchFabricId The value compon ent of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. EthernetSwitchFabric userLabel Label for free use. EthernetSwitchModule reservedBy Contains a list of MO in stances that reserve this MO instance. EthernetSwitchModule availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. EthernetSwitchModule operationalState The operational state. EthernetSwitchModule userLabel Label for free use. EthernetSwitchModule EthernetSwitchModuleId The value compon ent of the RDN. EthernetSwitchModule macAddress 0 The Media Access Control address. It is the mac address used to address the switch for switch management and by switch control protocols such as RSTP. If the board is not available, th e attribute has the value 00:00:00:00:00:00. EthernetSwitchModule backPlanePortState The state of the ethernet back plane. EthernetSwitchModulePort portNo Physical Port number ass ociated with this MO instance. Each EthernetSwitchPort instance belonging to the same EthernetSwitch must have a unique portNo, which maps the MO instance to ex actly one physical port. EthernetSwitchModulePort untaggedIngressPriority 0 All pack ets that ingress the port untagged, will have a VLAN tag inserted with this prio rity in the 802.1p value field of the VLAN tag. EthernetSwitchModulePort actualSpeedDuplex The mode , in which the port is actually operating. The value NO_LINK means that the link is disabled. See the attribute operatingMode for values of configured speed. EthernetSwitchModulePort availabilityStatus The avai lability status. It contains details about operationalState. EthernetSwitchModulePort operationalState The oper ational state. EthernetSwitchModulePort administrativeState 0 The admi nistrative state. Setting this attribute to LOCKED will suppress port alarms. Ho wever, it does not stop traffic or impact RSTP. EthernetSwitchModulePort EthernetSwitchModulePortId The value component of the RDN. EthernetSwitchModulePort pbitQueueMap Maps the 802.1p values to switch queues for this port. Queue 0 has the lowest priority and queue 7 has the highest priority. EthernetSwitchModulePort operatingMode Contains the con figured speed duplex for the port. Autonegotiation is not supported. EthernetSwitchModulePort externalPort 0 Specifies if the port is external. If set to false, the port is defined to be connected to an ES L. If set to true, the port is defined to be connected to an external equipment. If there is a link failure on an external port where RSTP is deactivated (by s EthernetSwitchModulePort egressUntagVlanRef Referenc e to a list of Vlan MOs. If a packet contains a vid with the same value as one o

    f the referenced Vlan MOs, the packet will be untagged at egress. If this attrib ute is set to null, the default value 1 is used for the vid. The maximum number of Vlan EthernetSwitchModulePort vlanRef Reference to a list of V lan MOs. The referenced instances represent the VLANs that are opened on this po rt. The maximum number of Vlan MO references is 256. EthernetSwitchModulePort untaggedIngressVlanRef Referenc e to a of Vlan MO. In all packets that ingress the ethernet port untagged, a VLA N tag is inserted, with the vid of the referenced Vlan MO. If this attribute is set to null, the default value 1 is used for the vid. Dependency: The port must be a me EthernetSwitchModulePort userLabel Label for free u se. EthernetSwitchModulePort operatingMode.autoNegotiation FALSE(0) Autonegotiation is currently not supported and is reserved for future use. Chang ing this value has no operational impact. EthernetSwitchModulePort operatingMode.configuredSpeedDuplex ETH_10_GB_FULL(2) Specifies the fixed operating speed for this port. EthernetSwitchModulePort pbitQueueMap.pbit The prio rity bit of the IP packet. EthernetSwitchModulePort pbitQueueMap.queue The swit ch queue. EthernetSwitchPort actualSpeedDuplex The mode, in whi ch the port is actually operating. The value NO_LINK means that the link is disa bled or that autonegotiation is in progress. See attribute operatingMode for val ues of autonegotiation and configured speed. EthernetSwitchPort administrativeState 0 The administrati ve state. Setting this attribute to LOCKED will suppress port alarms. However, i t does not stop traffic or impact RSTP. EthernetSwitchPort availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. EthernetSwitchPort EthernetSwitchPortId The value compon ent of the RDN. EthernetSwitchPort ingressPeakBitrate 1000 The maximum allo wed incoming bit rate on this port. Unit: 1 Mbps EthernetSwitchPort operatingMode A struct that contains t he configured speed duplex for the port, and an indication of whether autonegoti ation is performed.If autonegotiation is set to true, it must be set to true for both ports in the Ethernet link. If autonegotiation is set to false, t EthernetSwitchPort operationalState The operational state. EthernetSwitchPort pbitQueueMap Maps the 802.1p values t o switch queues for this port. Queue 0 has the lowest priority and queue 3 has t he highest priority. EthernetSwitchPort portNo Physical Port number associated with this MO instance. Each EthernetSwitchPort instance belonging to the same Et hernetSwitch must have a unique portNo, which maps the MO instance to exactly on e physical port. EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation Information about the SF P port. Valid only if the attribute sfpPort is set to true. EthernetSwitchPort sfpPort Specifies whether the switch por t is an SFP port. Autonegotiation must be configured to true for an SFP port. Ot herwise, the port may be disabled. EthernetSwitchPort systemPort FALSE(0) Specifies whethe r the switch port is a system (backhaul) port, which carries traffic to/from the IP interfaces on the board. The IP interfaces on the board are automatically di sabled, any time all ports designated as system ports on the switch are down. I EthernetSwitchPort untaggedIngressPriority 0 All packets that ingress the port untagged, will have a VLAN tag inserted with this priority in the 802.1p value field of the VLAN tag. If the attribute enableVlan of the relat

    ed EthernetSwitch MO is set to false, this attribute is ignored. EthernetSwitchPort untaggedIngressVid 0 All packets that ingress the ethernet port untagged, will have a VLAN tag inserted with the spec ified VLAN id. If this attribute is set to 1, the default VLAN id is used. If an other value is specified, the port must be a member of the specified VLAN as de EthernetSwitchPort userLabel Label for free use. EthernetSwitchPort vlanMembership The VLAN identities supp orted by this port, and the egress untag behavior for the VLAN on this port. If the vid is set to 0, it means that no VLAN id is specified for the port and the value specified for egressUntag will be ignored. If vid is set to any n EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation.sfpProductNumber The prod uct number of an SFP module. EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation.sfpState The state of the SFP port. EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation.sfpType The type of SFP. Example: GE_1000_BASE_Tor GE_1000_BASE_CX. EthernetSwitchPort operatingMode.autoNegotiation TRUE(1) Specifie s if autonegotiation is enabled or disabled on this port. Autonegotiation must b e enabled for SFP ports and when port speed and duplex settings are configured a s ETH_1000_MB_FULL or ETH_1000_MB_HALF. Changing autonegotiation to OFF (manual mode), EthernetSwitchPort operatingMode.configuredSpeedDuplex ETH_10_M B_HALF(1) If autoNegotiation is false, this attribute specifies the fixed operating mode for the port. If autoNegotiation is true, it specifies the minimu m acceptable operating mode for the port. If the minimum mode is not achieved, a link failure alarm is raised o EthernetSwitchPort vlanMembership.egressUntag 0 EthernetSwitchPort vlanMembership.vid 0 EthernetSwitchPort pbitQueueMap.pbit The priority bit of the IP packet. EthernetSwitchPort pbitQueueMap.queue The switch queue . EthernetSwitchPort actualSpeedDuplex The mode, in whi ch the port is actually operating. The value NO_LINK means that the link is disa bled or that autonegotiation is in progress. See attribute operatingMode for val ues of autonegotiation and configured speed. EthernetSwitchPort administrativeState 0 The administrati ve state. Setting this attribute to LOCKED will suppress port alarms. However, i t does not stop traffic or impact RSTP. EthernetSwitchPort availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. EthernetSwitchPort EthernetSwitchPortId The value compon ent of the RDN. EthernetSwitchPort ingressPeakBitrate 1000 The maximum allo wed incoming bit rate on this port. Unit: 1 Mbps EthernetSwitchPort operatingMode A struct that contains t he configured speed duplex for the port, and an indication of whether autonegoti ation is performed.If autonegotiation is set to true, it must be set to true for both ports in the Ethernet link. If autonegotiation is set to false, t EthernetSwitchPort operationalState The operational state. EthernetSwitchPort pbitQueueMap Maps the 802.1p values t o switch queues for this port. Queue 0 has the lowest priority and queue 3 has t he highest priority. EthernetSwitchPort portNo Physical Port number associated with this MO instance. Each EthernetSwitchPort instance belonging to the same Et hernetSwitch must have a unique portNo, which maps the MO instance to exactly on e physical port. EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation Information about the SF P port. Valid only if the attribute sfpPort is set to true.

    EthernetSwitchPort sfpPort Specifies whether the switch por t is an SFP port. Autonegotiation must be configured to true for an SFP port. Ot herwise, the port may be disabled. EthernetSwitchPort systemPort 0 Specifies whether the sw itch port is a system (backhaul) port, which carries traffic to/from the IP inte rfaces on the board. The IP interfaces on the board are automatically disabled, any time all ports designated as system ports on the switch are down. I EthernetSwitchPort untaggedIngressPriority 0 All packets that ingress the port untagged, will have a VLAN tag inserted with this priority in the 802.1p value field of the VLAN tag. If the attribute enableVlan of the relat ed EthernetSwitch MO is set to false, this attribute is ignored. EthernetSwitchPort untaggedIngressVid 0 All packets that ingress the ethernet port untagged, will have a VLAN tag inserted with the spec ified VLAN id. If this attribute is set to 1, the default VLAN id is used. If an other value is specified, the port must be a member of the specified VLAN as de EthernetSwitchPort userLabel Label for free use. EthernetSwitchPort vlanMembership The VLAN identities supp orted by this port, and the egress untag behavior for the VLAN on this port. If the vid is set to 0, it means that no VLAN id is specified for the port and the value specified for egressUntag will be ignored. If vid is set to any n EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation.sfpProductNumber The prod uct number of an SFP module. EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation.sfpState The state of the SFP port. EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation.sfpType The type of SFP. Example: GE_1000_BASE_Tor GE_1000_BASE_CX. EthernetSwitchPort operatingMode.autoNegotiation TRUE(1) Specifie s if autonegotiation is enabled or disabled on this port. Autonegotiation must b e enabled for SFP ports and when port speed and duplex settings are configured a s ETH_1000_MB_FULL or ETH_1000_MB_HALF. Changing autonegotiation to OFF (manual mode), EthernetSwitchPort operatingMode.configuredSpeedDuplex ETH_10_M B_HALF(1) If autoNegotiation is false, this attribute specifies the fixed operating mode for the port. If autoNegotiation is true, it specifies the minimu m acceptable operating mode for the port. If the minimum mode is not achieved, a link failure alarm is raised o EthernetSwitchPort vlanMembership.egressUntag 0 EthernetSwitchPort vlanMembership.vid 0 EthernetSwitchPort pbitQueueMap.pbit The priority bit of the IP packet. EthernetSwitchPort pbitQueueMap.queue The switch queue . EthernetSwitchPort actualSpeedDuplex The mode, in whi ch the port is actually operating. The value NO_LINK means that the link is disa bled or that autonegotiation is in progress. See attribute operatingMode for val ues of autonegotiation and configured speed. EthernetSwitchPort administrativeState 0 The administrati ve state. Setting this attribute to LOCKED will suppress port alarms. However, i t does not stop traffic or impact RSTP. EthernetSwitchPort availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. EthernetSwitchPort EthernetSwitchPortId The value compon ent of the RDN. EthernetSwitchPort ingressPeakBitrate 1000 The maximum allo wed incoming bit rate on this port. Unit: 1 Mbps EthernetSwitchPort operatingMode A struct that contains t he configured speed duplex for the port, and an indication of whether autonegoti ation is performed.If autonegotiation is set to true, it must be set to true for both ports in the Ethernet link. If autonegotiation is set to false, t EthernetSwitchPort operationalState The operational

    state. EthernetSwitchPort pbitQueueMap Maps the 802.1p values t o switch queues for this port. Queue 0 has the lowest priority and queue 3 has t he highest priority. EthernetSwitchPort portNo Physical Port number associated with this MO instance. Each EthernetSwitchPort instance belonging to the same Et hernetSwitch must have a unique portNo, which maps the MO instance to exactly on e physical port. EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation Information about the SF P port. Valid only if the attribute sfpPort is set to true. EthernetSwitchPort sfpPort Specifies whether the switch por t is an SFP port. Autonegotiation must be configured to true for an SFP port. Ot herwise, the port may be disabled. EthernetSwitchPort systemPort 0 Specifies whether the sw itch port is a system (backhaul) port, which carries traffic to/from the IP inte rfaces on the board. The IP interfaces on the board are automatically disabled, any time all ports designated as system ports on the switch are down. I EthernetSwitchPort untaggedIngressPriority 0 All packets that ingress the port untagged, will have a VLAN tag inserted with this priority in the 802.1p value field of the VLAN tag. If the attribute enableVlan of the relat ed EthernetSwitch MO is set to false, this attribute is ignored. EthernetSwitchPort untaggedIngressVid 0 All packets that ingress the ethernet port untagged, will have a VLAN tag inserted with the spec ified VLAN id. If this attribute is set to 1, the default VLAN id is used. If an other value is specified, the port must be a member of the specified VLAN as de EthernetSwitchPort userLabel Label for free use. EthernetSwitchPort vlanMembership The VLAN identities supp orted by this port, and the egress untag behavior for the VLAN on this port. If the vid is set to 0, it means that no VLAN id is specified for the port and the value specified for egressUntag will be ignored. If vid is set to any n EthernetSwitchPort operatingMode.autoNegotiation TRUE(1) Specifie s if autonegotiation is enabled or disabled on this port. Autonegotiation must b e enabled for SFP ports and when port speed and duplex settings are configured a s ETH_1000_MB_FULL or ETH_1000_MB_HALF. Changing autonegotiation to OFF (manual mode), EthernetSwitchPort operatingMode.configuredSpeedDuplex ETH_10_M B_HALF(1) If autoNegotiation is false, this attribute specifies the fixed operating mode for the port. If autoNegotiation is true, it specifies the minimu m acceptable operating mode for the port. If the minimum mode is not achieved, a link failure alarm is raised o EthernetSwitchPort vlanMembership.egressUntag 0 EthernetSwitchPort vlanMembership.vid 0 EthernetSwitchPort pbitQueueMap.pbit The priority bit of the IP packet. EthernetSwitchPort pbitQueueMap.queue The switch queue . EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation.sfpProductNumber The prod uct number of an SFP module. EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation.sfpState The state of the SFP port. EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation.sfpType The type of SFP. Example: GE_1000_BASE_Tor GE_1000_BASE_CX. Eul EulId Naming attribute. Contains the value part of the RDN. Eul administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the Eul resources in the cell. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongo ing traffic. When set to LOCKED, all E-DCH radio links are released in the cell and the Eul service is deactivated in the cell. When set to UNL Eul operationalState The operational state of the Eul resources in the cell.

    Eul availabilityStatus The availability status of the E ul resources in the cell. More than one of the following conditions can apply fo r the same object. Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to Eul userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. Eul numEhichErgchCodes 2 Number of codes used for the E-H ICH/E-RGCH. Dependencies: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Wh en the number of codes is increased, all traffic is released from the cell. When the number is decreased, only Eul traffic is released. Eul numEagchCodes 1 Number of codes used for the E-AGCH. Dep endencies: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. When the number o f codes is increased, all traffic is released from the cell. When the number is decreased, only Eul traffic is released. Eul eulMaxTargetRtwp -499 Maximum allowed Received Total W ideband Power (RTWP) for the RBS scheduler for EUL. Unit: 0.1 dB Eul edchTti2Support Indicates whether 2 ms TTI is supported in the RBS or not. ExchangeTerminal ExchangeTerminalId The value compon ent of the RDN. ExchangeTerminal userLabel Label for free use. ExchangeTerminal operationalState The operational state. ExchangeTerminal availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. ExchangeTerminal description This attribute contains information on what can be configured on the board, as well as restrictions and specifications. Refer to the description of the relevant board for details on fu nctions and characteristics of this board. ExchangeTerminal description.aal2LayerDescription This attribute contains information on the characteristics and restrictions for the AAL2 layer. ExchangeTerminal description.atmLayerDescription This att ribute contains information on the characteristics and restrictions for the ATM layer. ExchangeTerminal description.etType The type of Exch ange Terminal. ExchangeTerminal description.physicalLayerDescription This attribute contains information on the characteristics and restrictions for the Physical layer. ExchangeTerminal description.tdmSupport This attribute c ontains information on the characteristics and restrictions for TDM. ExchangeTerminal ExchangeTerminalId The value compon ent of the RDN. ExchangeTerminal userLabel Label for free use. ExchangeTerminal operationalState The operational state. ExchangeTerminal availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. ExchangeTerminal description This attribute contains information on what can be configured on the board, as well as restrictions and specifications. Refer to the description of the relevant board for details on fu nctions and characteristics of this board. ExchangeTerminal description.aal2LayerDescription This attribute contains information on the characteristics and restrictions for the AAL2 layer. ExchangeTerminal description.atmLayerDescription This att ribute contains information on the characteristics and restrictions for the ATM layer. ExchangeTerminal description.etType The type of Exch

    ange Terminal. ExchangeTerminal description.physicalLayerDescription This attribute contains information on the characteristics and restrictions for the Physical layer. ExchangeTerminal description.tdmSupport This attribute c ontains information on the characteristics and restrictions for TDM. ExchangeTerminal ExchangeTerminalId The value compon ent of the RDN. ExchangeTerminal userLabel Label for free use. ExchangeTerminal operationalState The operational state. ExchangeTerminal availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. ExchangeTerminal description This attribute contains information on what can be configured on the board, as well as restrictions and specifications. Refer to the description of the relevant board for details on fu nctions and characteristics of this board. ExchangeTerminal description.aal2LayerDescription This attribute contains information on the characteristics and restrictions for the AAL2 layer. ExchangeTerminal description.atmLayerDescription This att ribute contains information on the characteristics and restrictions for the ATM layer. ExchangeTerminal description.etType The type of Exch ange Terminal. ExchangeTerminal description.physicalLayerDescription This attribute contains information on the characteristics and restrictions for the Physical layer. ExchangeTerminal description.tdmSupport This attribute c ontains information on the characteristics and restrictions for TDM. ExchangeTerminalIp ExchangeTerminalIpId The value compon ent of the RDN. ExchangeTerminalIp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. ExchangeTerminalIp operationalState The operational state. ExchangeTerminalIp userLabel Label for free use. ExchangeTerminalIp ExchangeTerminalIpId The value compon ent of the RDN. ExchangeTerminalIp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. ExchangeTerminalIp operationalState The operational state. ExchangeTerminalIp userLabel Label for free use. ExchangeTerminalIp ExchangeTerminalIpId The value compon ent of the RDN. ExchangeTerminalIp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. ExchangeTerminalIp operationalState The operational state. ExchangeTerminalIp userLabel Label for free use. ExternalAntenna antennaType 0 Type of antenna. Possible values : ? 0..50 = Reserved for predefined antenna types supported by Ericsson. ? 51..1 00 = Available for customer specific antenna types. Precondition: Corresponding sector not initiated. Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Modify ExternalAntenna sectorRef Reference to the Sector MO in wh ich this external antenna is used. Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Modify Ante nna Equipment, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_SIC] ExternalAntenna userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM ]

    ExternalAntenna ExternalAntennaId ExternalGsmCell ExternalGsmCellId ExternalGsmCell cellIdentity Cell Identity Note1: For CORBA u sers, Integer, ExternalGsmCell userLabel a user friendly (and user assign ed) name of the association object ExternalGsmCell bcchFrequency Absolute radio frequency channel number of the BCCH channel of the GSM cell. Note: Integer, for CORBA users, ExternalGsmCell ncc Network Color Code Note: Integer, for CO RBA users, ExternalGsmCell bcc Base Station Color Code Note: Integer, f or CORBA users, ExternalGsmCell lac Location Area Code Note1: For CORBA user s, Integer, ExternalGsmCell maxTxPowerUl 0 Maximun allowed UL transmitted p ower in the GSM cell. ExternalGsmCell qRxLevMin 0 Minimum received GSM level in th e GSM cell. ExternalGsmCell individualOffset 0 Offset that is used to d eal with differences between minimum received GSM level in the cell and the comm on value. ExternalGsmCell parentSystem Reference to ExternalGsmPlmn ins tance ExternalGsmCell mcc The MCC part of the PLMN identity used i n Gsm radio network. ExternalGsmCell mnc The MNC part of the PLMN identity used i n the radio network ExternalGsmCell mncLength Length of the MNC part of the PL MN identity used in Gsm radio network ExternalGsmCell bandIndicator 0 This parameter is used to indica te the frequency of the external GSM cell. The ARFCN is unique for all GSM bands except the two GSM bands DCS1800 and PCS1900, so the band indicator is needed t o disciminate between the two. ExternalGsmCell ExternalGsmCellId Naming attribute.Contain s the value part of the RDN. ExternalGsmCell userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. ExternalGsmCell cellIdentity The external GSM cell identity. This is the identity of the GSM cell. It is unique within a location area. The C I along with the LAI (Location area identity) makes up the CGI (cell global iden tification). ExternalGsmCell ncc This is part of the BSIC. ExternalGsmCell bcc This is part of the BSIC. ExternalGsmCell bcchFrequency BCCH frequency code in the GSM c ell.Contains the absolute radio frequency channel number of the BCCH channel for the GSM cell. It uniquely identifies the BCCH.NOTE: Setting a value outside of the ranges supported in the GSM network will cause IRAT handove ExternalGsmCell lac The Location Area Code of the external G SM cell.Special values: The values 0000 and FFFE are reserved for special cases where no valid LAI exists in the MS. ExternalGsmCell maxTxPowerUl 0 Maximum UE transmission power on the RACH when accessing the system. Used in UE functions for cell selection/res election in idle mode and connected mode.Also used to control the maximum TX pow er level that a UE may use. If the current UE uplink transmit p ExternalGsmCell qRxLevMin -107 Minimum required (acceptable) RX level in the cell.Used in UE functions for cell selection/reselection in idle m ode and connected mode. Value launched by System information (SIB11) for each in tra-frequency measurement object corresponding to adjacent cell ExternalGsmCell individualOffset 0 This offset is added to the measured quantity before the UE evaluates if an event has occurred. Used in

    UE function event-reporting.The parameter is used both for signaling over RRC an d RNSAP. Unit: dB ExternalGsmCell reservedBy Reference back to the GsmRelatio n and/or UtranCell MO(s) that refers to this ExternalGsmCell. When a new GsmRela tion MO is created with its externalGsmCellRef attribute set to refer to this Ex ternalGsmCell, the system automatically adds to this sequence a ExternalGsmCell bandIndicator 0 Indicates the frequency band of the external GSM cell.The BCCH frequency is unique for all GSM bands except the two GSM bands DCS1800 and PCS1900, so the band indicator is needed to discrimina te between the two.When the ExternalGsmCell has a BCCH frequenc ExternalGsmFreq ExternalGsmFreqId ExternalGsmFreq userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance. ExternalGsmFreq arfcnValueGeranDl The IE GERAN-ARFCN-Value is used to specify a GERAN BCCH carrier frequency. ExternalGsmFreq bandIndicator 0 GERAN-BandIndicator is used as a n indication of how to interpret an associated GERAN carrier ARFCN. More specifi cally, the attribute indicates the GERAN frequency band in case the ARFCN value can concern either a DCS 1800 or a PCS 1900 carrier frequency. ExternalGsmFreq externalGsmFreqGroupId Identifies the ExternalG smFreqGroup in which this frequency is part of. It equates to the frequencyGroup Id in ExternalGsmFreqGroup. ExternalGsmFreqGroup ExternalGsmFreqGroupId ExternalGsmFreqGroup userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance. ExternalGsmFreqGroup frequencyGroupId This ID identifi es the ExternalGsmFreqGroup in the network. ExternalGsmFreqGroup reservedBy Contains a list of MO in stances that reserve this MO instance. ExternalGsmNetwork ExternalGsmNetworkId Naming attribute .Contains the value part of the RDN. ExternalGsmNetwork userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RN C. ExternalGsmNetwork mcc The MCC part of the PLMN identit y used in the GSM radio network.The PLMN identity consists of the Mobile Country Code, 3 digits, and the Mobile Network Code, 2 or 3 digits.(Example: If MCC=125 and MNC=46 then plmnId=12546.) Dependencies: Changing this att ExternalGsmNetwork mnc The MNC part of the PLMN identit y used in the GSM radio network.The PLMN identity consists of the Mobile Country Code, 3 digits, and the Mobile Network Code, 2 or 3 digits.(Example: If MCC=125 and MNC=46 then plmnId=12546.) Dependencies: Changing this att ExternalGsmNetwork mncLength The length of the MNC pa rt of the PLMN identity used in the GSM radio network.The PLMN identity consists of the Mobile Country Code, 3 digits, and the Mobile Network Code, 2 or 3 digit s.(Example: If MCC=125 and MNC=46 then plmnId=12546.) Dependencies: Cha ExternalGsmNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities List of alias PL MN identities for the Selective Handover feature. See the class description of G smRelation for more details. Dependencies:Only used if Handover::selHoSup = TRUE and MOCN is not used. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections ExternalGsmNetwork reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have re ferences to this MO.See reference in CnOperator. ExternalGsmNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN identity used in the radio network. ExternalGsmNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN identity used in the radio network. ExternalGsmNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities.mncLength 0 The leng th of the MNC part of a PLMN identity used in the radio network Unit: digit ExternalGsmPlmn ExternalGsmPlmnId

    ExternalGsmPlmn userLabel Provides support for putting a l abel on the MO instance. ExternalGsmPlmn mcc The MCC part of the PLMN identity used i n Gsm radio network. ExternalGsmPlmn mnc The MNC part of the PLMN identity used i n the radio network ExternalGsmPlmn mncLength Length of the MNC part of the PL MN identity used in Gsm radio network ExternalGsmPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities Sequence of max 30 PlmnI dentities. ExternalGsmPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mcc ExternalGsmPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mnc ExternalGsmPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mncLength ExternalNode ExternalNodeId The value component of the RDN. ExternalNode logicalName The attribute reflects the value of attribute logicalName on MO ManagedElement in the external node. This value is used as additional information in alarms for resources used by this node. ExternalTma dlAttenuation Internal attenuation, downlink. Example: 50 = 5.0 dB Unit: 0.1 dB Use cases: Modify Antenna Equipment Takes effe ct: At next cell setup for the affected cells. Ref. [CB_ECF] ExternalTma dlTrafficDelayA 300 Internal downlink traffic delay for branch A. Example: 312 = 31.2 ns Unit: 0.1 ns Recommended value: 300 Use cas es: Modify Antenna Equipment Takes effect: At next cell setup for the affected c ells. Ref. [CB_ECF] ExternalTma dlTrafficDelayB 300 Internal downlink traffic delay for branch B. Example: 312 = 31.2 ns Unit: 0.1 ns Recommended value: 300 Use cas es: Modify Antenna Equipment Takes effect: At next cell setup for the affected c ells. Ref. [CB_ECF] ExternalTma ExternalTmaId ExternalTma internalPower Indicates how power is supplied to the external TMA. Possible values: ? NO = Not supplied through RBS. ? YES = R BS internal power is supplied through RF cable (AntFeederCable) to the external TMA. Dependencies: In case an ATMA is configured below the Sect ExternalTma ulGain Internal uplink gain. Example: 120 = 12. 0 dB Unit: 0.1 dB Use cases: Modify Antenna Equipment Takes effect: At next cell setup for the affected cells. Ref. [CB_ECF] ExternalTma ulTrafficDelayA 300 Internal uplink traffic delay fo r branch A. Example: 312 = 31.2 ns Unit: 0.1 ns Recommended value: 300 Use cases : Modify Antenna Equipment Takes effect:At next cell setup for the affected cell s. Ref. [CB_ECF] ExternalTma ulTrafficDelayB 300 Internal uplink traffic delay fo r branch B. Example: 312 = 31.2 ns Unit: 0.1 ns Recommended value: 300 Use cases : Modify Antenna Equipment Takes effect:At next cell setup for the affected cell s. Ref. [CB_ECF] ExternalTma currentLowLimA 0 Indicates the lower current limi t when LNA failure shall be reported for branch A. This attribute is only valid for configurations with FU/RUW/RRUW for all frequency bands but 2100. When calcu lating the current limits to be used, the actual antenna config ExternalTma currentLowLimB 0 Indicates the lower current limi t when LNA failure shall be reported for branch B. This attribute is only valid for configurations with FU/RUW/RRUW for all frequency bands but 2100.When calcul ating the current limits to be used, the actual antenna configu ExternalTma currentHighLimA 0 Indicates the higher current lim it when LNA failure shall be reported for branch A. This attribute is only valid for configurations with FU/RUW/RRUW for all frequency bands but 2100. When calc ulating the current limits to be used, the actual antenna confi ExternalTma currentHighLimB 0 Indicates the higher current lim it when LNA failure shall be reported for branch B. This attribute is only valid for configurations with FU/RUW/RRUW for all frequency bands but 2100. When calc ulating the current limits to be used, the actual antenna confi

    ExternalTma tmaDegradedSupported 0 Indicates whether the TM A support reporting of degraded functionality. This attribute is only valid for configurations with FU/RUW/RRUW for all frequency bands but 2100. Possible value s: ? NO = The TMA does not support reporting of degraded functionality ExternalTransportNetwork ExternalTransportNetworkId ExternalTransportNetwork userLabel Provides support for putting a label on the MO instance. Sub: TNH, ExternalUtranCell ExternalUtranCellId ExternalUtranCell userLabel A user-friendly (and use r assigned) name of the associated object ExternalUtranCell cId Cid is the identifier of a cell in one RNC Note: Integer, for CORBA users, ExternalUtranCell mcc Mobile Contry Code Note: Integer , for CORBA users,The set operation will be rejected if there exists UtranRelati on instances ExternalUtranCell mnc Mobile Network Code Note: Intege r, for CORBA users,The set operation will be rejected if there exists UtranRelat ion instances ExternalUtranCell rncId Unique RNC ID for the drift RNC Note: Integer, for CORBA users,The set operation will be rejected if there exist s UtranRelation instances ExternalUtranCell uarfcnUl The UL UTRA absolute Rad io Frequency Radio Channel number, UARFCN Note1: For CORBA users, Integer, ExternalUtranCell uarfcnDl The DL UTRA absolute Rad io Frequency Radio Channel number, UARFCN Note1: For CORBA users, Integer, ExternalUtranCell primaryScramblingCode The primary DL s crambling code used by the cell Note: Integer, for CORBA users, ExternalUtranCell primaryCpichPower 0 The power of the primary CPICH channel in the cell Note: Integer, for CORBA users, ExternalUtranCell lac Location Area Code Note: Integer , for CORBA users, ExternalUtranCell rac Routing Area Code Note: Integer, for CORBA users, ExternalUtranCell mncLength The length of the attrib ute mnc The set operation will be rejected if there exists UtranRelation instanc es ExternalUtranCell parentSystem Reference to ExternalUtr anPlmn instance. ExternalUtranCell individualOffset 0 Used in UE funct ion event-reporting. This offset is added to the measured quantity before the UE evaluates if an event has occured. -100: -10,0 dB - 95: - 9,5 dB ... 100: 10,0 dB Resolution: 5 (=0,5 dB) ExternalUtranCell maxTxPowerUl 0 Used in UE functions for cell selection/reselection in idle mode and connected mode. Also used by UTRAN to control the maximum TX power level an UE may use. If the current UE uplink tr ansmit power is above the indicated power value, the UE shall decrease ExternalUtranCell qQualMin 0 Used in UE functions for cell selection/reselection in idle mode and connected mode. Minimum required (a cceptable) quality level in the cell (dB). 100: Default value. The value for the parameter is unspecified by the operator when this value is set.The pa ExternalUtranCell qRxLevMin 0 Used in UE functions for cell selection/reselection in idle mode and connected mode. Minimum required (a cceptable) RX level in the cell. (dBm). Value launched by System information (SI B11) for each intra-frequency measurement object corresponding to adjac ExternalUtranCell agpsEnabled 0 Indicates if A-GPS is en abled or not for a cell. FALSE = 0 TRUE = 1 Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A ExternalUtranCell cellCapability Indicates the capabiliti es of the inter-RNS cell. Note that if OSS-RC is used, configured value will be subject to consistency check and may be overridden if inconsistent. In case of E ricsson only system not using OSS-RC, or multi-vendor system not using

    ExternalUtranCell transmissionScheme 0 Transmission tec hnique for an external UTRAN cell. Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.cpcSupport 0 Capabili ty information indicating if CPC is supported in the cell. Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.edchSupport 0 Capabili ty information indicating if EUL is supported in the cell Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.edchTti2Support 0 Capabili ty information indicating if 2 ms TTI EUL is supported in the cellUnit: N/A Reso lution: N/A ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.enhancedL2Support 0 Indicates whether Enhanced Layer 2 is supported or not. Unit: N/A Resolution: N/ A ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.fdpchSupport 0 Capabili ty information indicating if F-DPCH is supported in the external utran cell or t he DRNC. Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.hsdschSupport 0 Capabili ty information indicating if HS is supported in the cell. Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.multiCarrierSupport 0 Capability information indicating if the cell can act as a serving HS-DSCH cell for Multi Carrier connections. Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A ExternalUtranCell ExternalUtranCellId Naming attribute .Contains the value part of the RDN. ExternalUtranCell userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RN C. ExternalUtranCell cId Cell identity. Unique in an exte rnal RNC. cId is the identifier of a cell in an external RNC and is used togethe r with the attribute rncId on MO IurLink as cell id in system information broadc ast. ExternalUtranCell lac The Location Area Code of the ex ternal RNC cell, used by UTRAN to page mobiles on request from the CS CN. ExternalUtranCell rac Routing Area Code of a routing a rea. An RA is used by UTRAN to page mobiles on request from the PS CN. When the parameter is changed, UTRAN updatea system information and notifies the UEs. ExternalUtranCell individualOffset 0 Used in UE funct ion event-reporting. This offset is added to the measured quantity before the UE evaluates if an event has occurred.Dependencies: If CN Hard Handover is support ed, individualOffset should be set to less than the attributes intraFreqCnhhoPe ExternalUtranCell primaryScramblingCode The primary down link scrambling code to be used in the external cell. ExternalUtranCell primaryCpichPower 0 Power to be used for transmitting the PCPICH. Disturbances: Changing this parameter may affect e xisting traffic. It is recommended to increase/decrease the value in steps not g reater than 3dBm (preferably in 1dBm steps). Unit: 0.1 dBm ExternalUtranCell maxTxPowerUl 0 Maximum UE transmission power on the RACH when accessing the system. Used in UE functions for cell selec tion/reselection in idle mode and connected mode.Also used to control the maximu m TX power level that a UE may use. If the current UE uplink transmit p ExternalUtranCell qQualMin 100 Minimum required (accept able) quality level in the cell (dB). Used to set cell border between two cells. Used in UE functions for cell selection/reselection in idle mode and connected m ode. Special values: 100: Indicates that the minimum quality level has ExternalUtranCell qRxLevMin 0 Minimum required (accept able) RX level in the cell. (dBm).Used in UE functions for cell selection/resele ction in idle mode and connected mode. Value launched by System information (SIB 11) for each intra-frequency measurement object corresponding to adjace ExternalUtranCell uarfcnDl Downlink UTRA Absolute R

    adio Frequency Channel Number. Specifies the channel number for the central down link frequency. The mapping from channel number to physical frequency is describ ed in 3GPP specification TS 25.104. Dependencies: An intra-frequency re ExternalUtranCell uarfcnUl Uplink UTRA Absolute Rad io Frequency Channel Number. Specifies the channel number for the central uplink frequency. The mapping from channel number to physical frequency is described i n 3GPP specification TS 25.104. Dependencies: An intra-frequency relati ExternalUtranCell reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have re ferences to this MO.See reference in UtranRelation and ExternalUtranCell. ExternalUtranCell agpsEnabled 0 Indicates that this cell is considered to be A-GPS capable for emergency calls. For an emergency call, i f any of the cells in the active set has agpsEnabled==TRUE, then a positioning a ttempt will be made within UTRAN rather than handling the call over to ExternalUtranCell cellCapability Indicates the capabiliti es of this inter-RNS cell. Note that if OSS-RC is used, any manually configured value will be subject to consistency check and may be overridden if inconsistent . However, if OSS-RC is not used, the cell capability of external borde ExternalUtranCell transmissionScheme 0 Transmission tec hnique for an external UTRAN cell Change takes effect: Object disabled/enabled ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.cpcSupport 0 Capabili ty information indicating if CPC is supported in the cell. Change takes effect: New connection ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.edchSupport 0 Capabili ty information indicating if EUL is supported in the cell ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.edchTti2Support 0 Capabili ty information indicating if 2 ms TTI EUL is supported in the cell ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.enhancedL2Support 0 Indicates whether Enhanced Layer 2 is supported or not. ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.fdpchSupport 0 Capabili ty information indicating if F-DPCH is supported in the external utran cell or t he DRNC. ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.hsdschSupport 0 Capabili ty information indicating if HS is supported in the cell. ExternalUtranFreq ExternalUtranFreqId ExternalUtranFreq userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance. ExternalUtranFreq arfcnValueUtranDl The arfcnValueUt ran is used to indicate the ARFCN applicable for a downlink UTRA carrier frequen cy, as defined in TS 25.331. ExternalUtranPlmn ExternalUtranPlmnId ExternalUtranPlmn userLabel Provides support for put ting a label on the MO instance ExternalUtranPlmn mcc Mobile Contry Code Note: Integer , for CORBA users,The set operation will be rejected if there exists UtranRelati on instances ExternalUtranPlmn mnc Mobile Network Code Note: Intege r, for CORBA users,The set operation will be rejected if there exists UtranRelat ion instances ExternalUtranPlmn mncLength The length of the attrib ute mnc The set operation will be rejected if there exists UtranRelation instanc es ExternalUtranPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities Sequence of max 30 PlmnIdentites. ExternalUtranPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mcc ExternalUtranPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mnc ExternalUtranPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mncLength ExternalViewableNode ExternalViewableNodeId ExternalViewableNode userLabel Provides support for put ting a label on the MO instance. Sub: TNH,

    ExternalVplTp ExternalVplTpId ExternalVplTp userLabel Provides support for putting a l abel on the MO instance. Sub: TNH, ExternalVplTp vplTpId Fach FachId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system. Fach administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the channel. Fach operationalState The operational state of the FAC H channel. Fach availabilityStatus The availability status of the F ACH channel.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same obj ect: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9, Fach userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. Fach maxFach1Power 18 Maximum power used for the first FACH ch annel, relative to the value of primaryCpichPower. The first FACH is used for lo gical channels BCCH, CCCH and DCCH, for control signaling. Unit: 0.1 dB Fach maxFach2Power 15 Maximum power used for the second FACH c hannel, relative to the value of primaryCpichPower. The second FACH is used for logical channel DTCH, for traffic signaling. Unit: 0.1 dB Fach sccpchOffset 0 Radio timing offset inside a radio frame . (SCCPCH parameter) Disturbances:Changing this attribute may affect ongoing tra ffic. Whenever its value is set, the FACH is disabled automatically and then reenabled. Value mapping: 0: 0 chip 1: 256 chip .. 149: 3 Fach fach1RateMatchingAttrDl 220 Rate matching attribute in downl ink for Fach1.The Fach1 is used for logical channels BCCH, CCCH and DCCH, contro l signaling. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Disturbanc es: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Fach fach2RateMatchingAttrDl 130 Rate matching attribute in downl ink for Fach2.The Fach2 is used for logical channel DTCH, traffic signaling. Thi s attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Disturbances: Changing thi s attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Fach pOffset1Fach 0 Power offset for the TFCI. This paramete r is applied to both FACH and PCH. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may aff ect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set, the FACH is disabled automatical ly and then re-enabled. Value mapping: 0 : 0.0dB 1 : 0. Fach pOffset3Fach 0 Power offset for the pilot. This paramet er is applied to both FACH and PCH. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may af fect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set, the FACH is disabled automatica lly and then re-enabled. Value mapping: 0 : 0.0dB 1 : 0 Fach availabilityStatus The availability status of the c ommon channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Fach FachId Fach operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP] Fach pnIsActive Identifies if a PN transmission is start ed on FACH. Possible values: ? 0 = FALSE ? 1 = TRUE User category: Ericsson pers onnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Fach pnTfi Defines the transport format that are used in an active PN sending. Precondition: A PN transmission is started. User category: E ricsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Fan activeSwAllocation The SwAllocation instance, among the predefined instances, which is active. The SwAllocation instance which is a ctive is the one currently used by the Fan MO. If no matching SwAllocation, cont aining the specific PiuType, is found, the value of this attrib Fan FanId The value component of the RDN.

    Fan userLabel Label for free use. Fan administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Fan connectedToScu Specifies the SCU that the fan is connec ted to. A fan must always be connected to a SCU that mediates the communication with a main processor. Fan operationalState The operational state. Fan piuType Reference to an instance of PiuType. Fan operationalProductData Describes the product data of th e fan that is installed. Fan reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Fan criticalAirTempAlarmLimit 0 Specifies the threshold value for the critical air temperature alarm. This attribute must be greater tha n highAirTempAlarmLimit + 3, but it is recommended to set it to highAirTempAlarm Limit + 10. Dependencies: This attribute is set only if alarmLimitsSupp Fan yellowLed 0 Indicates the information status of the fan. The following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_AVAILABLE = The L ED state is not available at the moment OUT = Fan unlocked SLOW_BLINK = Minor al arm issued FLICKERING = Major alarm issued. Fan alarmLimitsSupported Indicates whether the air temper ature alarm threshold is supported or not. It is used by criticalAirTempAlarmLim it and highAirTempAlarmLimit. Fan fanNumber 0 Specifies the fan used in the subrack. U se the default fan number if there is only one fan in the subrack. If external f an devices are used, this specifies the fan position in the Denib-chain counting from the right-most SCB. Fan fanPosition Indicates the position of the fan on the subrack.Possible values: - ABOVE - BELOW - the fanNumber, that is, digit 1 to 1 0, if external fan devices are used. Fan highAirTempAlarmLimit 0 Specifies the threshold value fo r the warning air temperature alarm. See the recommended limit for criticalAirTe mpAlarmLimit. Dependencies: This attribute is set only if alarmLimitsSupported i s true. If alarmLimitsSupported is set to false, this attribute Fan operationalProductData.productName A user-friendly name of the product. Fan operationalProductData.productNumber Unique identity for each product, which is constituted by the Ericsson product number (ABC numbe r). The maximum number of characters for a product number is 24 including 2 slas hes, 2 spaces and 2 characters for origination notation. Example of product num Fan operationalProductData.productRevision Indicates the re vision state of the product. It consists of a letter R or P, one or two digits a nd/or one or two letters. The maximum number of characters is four inclusive R o r P. Example: R1A, R1A02, P7B A suffix may be added to the revision state. The Fan operationalProductData.productionDate The production d ate can be represented in two ways. 1) The preferable syntax is a four-digit rep resentation of the year, and a two-digit representation of the month and a two-d igit representation of the day. The numbers of characters in this case, is eigh Fan operationalProductData.serialNumber The serial numbe r consists of 13 alphanumerical characters grouped as 6 plus 7 characters. The f irst 6 characters are to be used for factory codes and the last 7 characters are used for an individual number or batch number. Fan activeSwAllocation The SwAllocation instance, among the predefined instances, which is active. The SwAllocation instance which is a ctive is the one currently used by the Fan MO. If no matching SwAllocation, cont aining the specific PiuType, is found, the value of this attrib Fan FanId The value component of the RDN. Fan userLabel Label for free use. Fan administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Fan connectedToScu Specifies the SCU that the fan is connec ted to. A fan must always be connected to a SCU that mediates the communication

    with a main processor. Fan operationalState The operational state. Fan piuType Reference to an instance of PiuType. Fan operationalProductData Describes the product data of th e fan that is installed. Fan reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Fan criticalAirTempAlarmLimit 0 Specifies the threshold value for the critical air temperature alarm. This attribute must be greater tha n highAirTempAlarmLimit + 3, but it is recommended to set it to highAirTempAlarm Limit + 10. Dependencies: This attribute is set only if alarmLimitsSupp Fan yellowLed 0 Indicates the information status of the fan. The following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_AVAILABLE = The L ED state is not available at the moment OUT = Fan unlocked SLOW_BLINK = Minor al arm issued FLICKERING = Major alarm issued. Fan alarmLimitsSupported Indicates whether the air temper ature alarm threshold is supported or not. It is used by criticalAirTempAlarmLim it and highAirTempAlarmLimit. Fan fanNumber 0 Specifies the fan used in the subrack. U se the default fan number if there is only one fan in the subrack. If external f an devices are used, this specifies the fan position in the Denib-chain counting from the right-most SCB. Fan fanPosition Indicates the position of the fan on the subrack.Possible values: - ABOVE - BELOW - the fanNumber, that is, digit 1 to 1 0, if external fan devices are used. Fan highAirTempAlarmLimit 0 Specifies the threshold value fo r the warning air temperature alarm. See the recommended limit for criticalAirTe mpAlarmLimit. Dependencies: This attribute is set only if alarmLimitsSupported i s true. If alarmLimitsSupported is set to false, this attribute Fan operationalProductData.productName A user-friendly name of the product. Fan operationalProductData.productNumber Unique identity for each product, which is constituted by the Ericsson product number (ABC numbe r). The maximum number of characters for a product number is 24 including 2 slas hes, 2 spaces and 2 characters for origination notation. Example of product num Fan operationalProductData.productRevision Indicates the re vision state of the product. It consists of a letter R or P, one or two digits a nd/or one or two letters. The maximum number of characters is four inclusive R o r P. Example: R1A, R1A02, P7B A suffix may be added to the revision state. The Fan operationalProductData.productionDate The production d ate can be represented in two ways. 1) The preferable syntax is a four-digit rep resentation of the year, and a two-digit representation of the month and a two-d igit representation of the day. The numbers of characters in this case, is eigh Fan operationalProductData.serialNumber The serial numbe r consists of 13 alphanumerical characters grouped as 6 plus 7 characters. The f irst 6 characters are to be used for factory codes and the last 7 characters are used for an individual number or batch number. FanDeviceGroup FanDeviceGroupId FanDeviceGroup supplyAirTemperature Current suppy air temper ature value as reported by the supply air temperature sensor, mounted at the air inlet to the fan unit. Note! The value is not adjusted to compensate for system atic reading errors resulting from the placement of the sensor. Use cas FanDeviceGroup fanUnitSpeedSetting Current fan speed (revol utions per minute) as ordered by the fan unit control algorithm.If different fan elements are set at different speeds (owing to fault recovery or similar) then the value for the fan element set at the highest speed is reported. Und FanDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat

    FanDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] FanDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] FanGroup FanGroupId Identity of the fan group. It ma tches the number on the physical unit and it is the value component of the RDN. FanGroup yellowLed Indicates the current fault LED status of the fan group. The LED is physically located on the corresponding SCU. FastEthernet FastEthernetId The value componenet of the RDN. FastEthernet userLabel Label for free use. FastEthernet operationalState The operational state. FastEthernet availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. FastEthernet administrativeState 0 The administrative state . Traffic is not stopped if administrativeState is set to LOCKED. FastEthernet reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. FastEthernet macAddress 0 The MAC address of the ethernet link. If the board is not available, the attribute has the value 00:00:00:00:00: 00. FastEthernet subnet This attribute contains the subnet addre ss of the FastEthernet MO. FastEthernet defaultRouter The IP address of the default ro uter. FastEthernet mtu 1500 The maximum transfer unit. FastEthernet networkPrefixLength The subnet mask. Example : networkPrefixLength = 24, subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 Example: networkPrefixL ength = 28, subnet mask is 255.255.255.240 Unit: 1 bit FcuDeviceGroup FcuDeviceGroupId FcuDeviceGroup cabinetParameters 0 Cabinet specific paramet ers for fan control (for excelusive use by Node Production Center). The specific ation of each parameter with unit and valid range is located in [FS_CGC]. Use ca ses: CGC_UC_1 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_CGC] FcuDeviceGroup numberOfFanGroups Specifies the number of fan groups. A fan group is one or or more fans which are supervised and controll ed as a group. Undefined value: 0 Use cases: CGC_UC402 Ref. [FS_CGC] FcuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat FcuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] FcuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] FuDeviceGroup FuDeviceGroupId FuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specific ation: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] FuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat FuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] FuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational

    state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] GammaCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the gamma ca ble. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_ REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when b it 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alarm GammaCable bbifBoardRef Reference to the BBIF board wher e the gamma cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The BbifBoard MO must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF] GammaCable bbifConnector Value represents the connector t hat connects the cable to the BBIF board. Possible values: ? A ? B Use cases: Sc ratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF] GammaCable electricalDelay Electrical delay of the gamma ca ble. Example: 107 = 10.7 nanoseconds Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Ante nna EquipmentUnit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cells. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] GammaCable GammaCableId GammaCable rfifConnector Value represents the connector t hat connects the cable to the RFIF board. Possible values: ? A ? B Use cases: Sc ratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF] GammaCable rfifPlugInUnitRef Reference to the RFIF pl ug-in unit, to which the cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Prec ondition: The PlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MOs must exist. R ef. [CB_ECF] GanC GanCId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. GanC userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. GanC ncc Network Colour Code.This is part of the BSIC, wh ich (in combination with bcchFrequency) is used in RRC messages towards the UE. It is configured by the operator in the UTRAN system and needs to correspond to that used by the GAN controller towards the UE GanC bcc Base Station Colour Code.This is part of the BSI C, which (in combination with bcchFrequency) is used in RRC messages towards the UE. It is configured by the operator in the UTRAN system and needs to correspon d to that used by the GAN controller towards th GanC bandIndicator Used to differentiate between the GSM ba nds DCS1800 and PCS1900 if bcchFrequency is set to a value inside the normal GSM bands. For GAN measurements it is recommended to set bcchFrequency to a value o utside the normal GSM bands and set this parameter to O GanC bcchFrequency BCCH frequency code in the GAN cell, whi ch is the absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN) of the BCCH channel fo r the GAN cell. It uniquely identifies the BCCH and is signaled in the RRC Measu rement Control message in the UTRAN system. Corresponds GanC ganCIdentity GAN cell identity.Used as the CI field t owards the core network in RANAP messages. The CI along with the LAI (Location a rea identity) makes up the CGI (cell global identification).Specification: 3GPP TS 45.005Dependencies: Not used if the license ganMobil GanC lac Location Area Code.Used together with plmnIdenti ty in RANAP messages towards the Core Network to form the LAI (Location Area Ide ntity). The LAI along with the CI (Cell Identity) makes up the CGI (cell global identification). Dependencies: Not used if the GanC plmnIdentity PLMN identity.Used together with lac in RANAP messages towards the core network to form the LAI (Location Area Identity) . The LAI along with the CI (Cell Identity) makes up the CGI (cell global identi fication). Dependencies: Not used if the license ganMob GanC plmnIdentity.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN identity used in the radio network. GanC plmnIdentity.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN identity used in the radio network.

    GanC plmnIdentity.mncLength 0 The length of the MNC part of a PLMN identity used in the radio network Unit: digit GeneralProcessorUnit GeneralProcessorUnitId The value compon ent of the RDN. GeneralProcessorUnit userLabel Label for free use. GeneralProcessorUnit operationalState The operational state. The value for operationalState is retrived from the parent of this MO, th at is PlugInUnit MO. GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumeDSize The total size of the D volume. Unit: 1 B GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumeDFreespace The amount of fr eespace available on the D volume. Unit: 1 B GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumePSize The total size of the P volume. Unit: 1 B GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumePFreespace The amount of fr eespace available on the P volume. Unit: 1 B GeneralProcessorUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO in stances that reserve this MO instance. GeneralProcessorUnit minimumHdVolumeDFreespace 0 Minimum number of megabytes of free space on D volume before an alarm is issued. 0 means that no alarm will be sent. It is used as a threshold that triggers alarms when the D volume of any board is about to be full, that is, when the attribute hdVo lumeDFr GeneralProcessorUnit GeneralProcessorUnitId The value compon ent of the RDN. GeneralProcessorUnit userLabel Label for free use. GeneralProcessorUnit operationalState The operational state. The value for operationalState is retrived from the parent of this MO, th at is PlugInUnit MO. GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumeDSize The total size of the D volume. Unit: 1 B GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumeDFreespace The amount of fr eespace available on the D volume. Unit: 1 B GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumePSize The total size of the P volume. Unit: 1 B GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumePFreespace The amount of fr eespace available on the P volume. Unit: 1 B GeneralProcessorUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO in stances that reserve this MO instance. GeneralProcessorUnit minimumHdVolumeDFreespace 0 Minimum number of megabytes of free space on D volume before an alarm is issued. 0 means that no alarm will be sent. It is used as a threshold that triggers alarms when the D volume of any board is about to be full, that is, when the attribute hdVo lumeDFr GeneralProcessorUnit GeneralProcessorUnitId The value compon ent of the RDN. GeneralProcessorUnit operationalState The operational state. The value for operationalState is retrived from the parent of this MO, th at is PlugInUnit MO. GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumeDSize The total size of the D volume. Unit: 1 B GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumeDFreespace The amount of fr eespace available on the D volume. Unit: 1 B GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumePSize The total size of the P volume. Unit: 1 B GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumePFreespace The amount of fr eespace available on the P volume. Unit: 1 B GeneralProcessorUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO in stances that reserve this MO instance. GeneralProcessorUnit minimumHdVolumeDFreespace 0 Minimum

    number of megabytes of free space on D volume before an alarm is issued. 0 means that no alarm will be sent. It is used as a threshold that triggers alarms when the D volume of any board is about to be full, that is, when the attribute hdVo lumeDFr GigaBitEthernet GigaBitEthernetId The value componenet of the RDN. GigaBitEthernet userLabel Label for free use. GigaBitEthernet operationalState The operational state. GigaBitEthernet availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. GigaBitEthernet administrativeState 0 The administrative state . Traffic is not stopped if administrativeState is set to LOCKED. GigaBitEthernet link1State Operational state of the link 1 (lower). GigaBitEthernet link2State Operational state of the link 2 (upper). GigaBitEthernet dscpPbitMap Specifies the value of the DSCP and corresponding pbit (priority). The number of members in this sequence is 64. All the 64 possible DscpPbit structs must be defined when setting this attribut e. If no values are submitted, the default values from struct D GigaBitEthernet macAddressLink1 0 The MAC address of link 1. If th e board is not available, the attribute has the value 00:00:00:00:00:00. GigaBitEthernet macAddressLink2 0 The MAC address of link 2. If th e board is not available, the attribute has the value 00:00:00:00:00:00. GigaBitEthernet frameFormat ETHERNET_2_DIX(0) Ethernet outgoin g frame format. Before changing the value from ETHERNET_2_DIX to IEEE_802_3_LLC_ SNAP, ensure first that the attribute mtu of the children MOs (IpInterface) is n ot higher than 1492. If this is the case, reduce the mtu to 1492 before changin GigaBitEthernet primaryLink LINK_ONE_PRIMARY_LINK_TWO_SECONDARY(0) Specifies which link is primary and which is secondary. Link 1 is identical to p ortNo 1 and link 2 to portNo 2. For details regarding port numbering, see the de scription of the relevant board. Disturbances: Setting of this attribute may cau se traffic dist GigaBitEthernet activeLink 0 Specifies the active link. GigaBitEthernet autoNegotiation TRUE(1) Indicates whether Ethernet autonegotiation is performed when starting the link(s). In normal traffic situations this attribute is set to true. The value false, is meant for test situations on ly. GigaBitEthernet protectiveMode TRUE(1) Indicates whether a switchover t o the secondary link is allowed. If link redundancy is not supported for the boa rd, this attribute has no meaning and it is ignored. If link redundancy is suppo rted and this attribute is set to false, it means that a board GigaBitEthernet switchBackTimer 30 The switch-back timer, after the primary link has returned to state ENABLED (working). The value 0 (zero) means that the system does not switch back from the secondary link to the primary link . Traffic continues to run on the secondary link until - a manu GigaBitEthernet shutDownTimeout 0 The shutting-down timer. It is u sed when administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. This value must be positiv e. Unit: 1 s GigaBitEthernet statePropagationDelay 25 This attribute is used t o delay the propagation of fault on both links. Unit: 1 ds (1 decisecond) GigaBitEthernet linkType 0 Indicates if the GigaBitEthernet link for external traffic is using the front ports or the backplane ports. If t he backplane ports are used, the link is a 10G link. This attribute is only vali d on ETs, that have Ethernet backplane connections. Other ETs u GigaBitEthernet sfpInformation Information about the SFP port. Valid only if the attribute sfpPort is set to true. GigaBitEthernet sfpPort 0 Specifies if the port is an SFP port. Au tonegotiation must be configured to true for an SFP port. Otherwise, the port ma y be disabled.

    GigaBitEthernet portNo 1 Physical port number associated with thi s MO instance. This attribute is applicable only on boards where link redundancy is not supported. For details regarding port numbering, see the description of the relevant board. GigaBitEthernet actualSpeedDuplex The mode, in which the p ort is actually operating. The value NO_LINK means that the link is disabled or that autonegotiation is in progress. The following values are possible for this attribute, for electrical interfaces: - ETH_100_MB_FULL - ETH_1000_MB_F GigaBitEthernet sfpInformation.sfpProductNumber The product numb er of an SFP module. GigaBitEthernet sfpInformation.sfpState The state of the SFP por t. GigaBitEthernet sfpInformation.sfpType The type of SFP. Example : GE_1000_BASE_Tor GE_1000_BASE_CX. GigaBitEthernet dscpPbitMap.dscp DSCP - differentiated se rvices code point. The number of members in this sequence is 64. GigaBitEthernet dscpPbitMap.pbit 802.1p priorities accord ing to IEEE 8021D: 0 - Best effort 1 - Background 2 - Spare 3 - Excellent effort 4 - Controlled load 5 - Voice, less than 100 ms delay 6 - Voice, less than 10 m s delay 7 - Network control The number of members in this sequence is 6 GpsReceiver GpsReceiverId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system. GpsReceiver administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the GPS receiver. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections GpsReceiver operationalState The operational state of the GPS receiver. GsmRelation adjacentCell Reference to ExternalGsmCell MO which contains the specification of the adjacent cell. Even though this is not a restricted attribute it can only be set by an operator upon MO creation and can not be modified to point to a new ExternalGsmCell. FDN accordin GsmRelation GsmRelationId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. GsmRelation qOffset1sn 7 Signal strength offset between s ource and target cells.Dependencies: Used when the IE cell_selection_and_reselec tion_quality_measure in SIB 11/12 is set to CPICH RSCP.This is configured throug h UtranCell::qualMeasQuantity. Unit: dB GsmRelation externalGsmCellRef Reference to the Externa lGsmCell MO, containing the specification of this adjacent cell. GsmRelation mobilityRelationType 0 Type of the mobility rel ation.Dependencies: Note that the total number of GsmRelations with mobilityRela tionType = HO_AND_CELL_RESEL (Both Handover and Cell selection/Reselection) for a UtranCell may not exceed 32. GsmRelation selectionPriority 0 Selection priority among neighbour GSM relations for a UTRAN source cell. The neighbor cell priority is used when building the monitored set, so that neighbor cells with higher priorit y are included before low priority neighbors, for each cell in the acti Handover HandoverId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. Handover maxActiveSet 0 Maximum number of cells in activ e set. The reporting deactivation threshold, used to control intra-frequency mea surements (event 1a), is set to maxActiveSet - 1. The replacement activation thr eshold, used to control intra-frequency measurements (event 1c) Handover releaseConnOffset 120 The threshold (offset) f or a cell to be included in the active set, when the connection is released at i nclusion rejection.Value mapping: -30 : -3.0 dB -25 : -2.5 dB ... 250: +25.0 dB Unit: 0.1dB Resolution: 5 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (nex Handover maxBufferTime 10 Maximum time in buffer for a buf fered report.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapp ing: 0: 0 s 1: 0.2 s 2: 0.4 s 3: 0.6 s 4: 0.8 s 5: 1.0 s ... 50: 10 s Unit: 0.2 s Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL

    Handover gsmPropRepeatInterval 5 Minimum time interval be tween proposals of the same GSM cell for handover based on the same measurement report.Value mapping: 0: 0.0 s 1: 0.2 s 2: 0.4 s 3: 0.6 s 4: 0.8 s 5: 1.0 s ... 25: 5.0 s Unit: 0.2 s Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next sw Handover gsmAmountPropRepeat 4 Max number of repeated p roposals (not including the first proposal) of GSM cell(s) for handover based on the same measurement report. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next swi tch to CELL_DCH) Handover timeRelocprep 10 Maximum time for resource alloca tion in the target system. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson person nel.Unit: s Change takes effect: New connections Handover timeRelocoverall 5 Maximum time to complete a handover. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: s Ch ange takes effect: New connections Handover timeRelocsup 15 Maximum time for relocation in t he target RNC.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: s C hange takes effect: New connections Handover timeReleaseIuPs 10 Guard timer, in case the PS CN d oes not release the Iu connection after an IRATHO (inter radio access technology handover) to GSM.Special values: 0: infinity (this means that this timer should not be used) Unit: s Handover fddGsmHOSupp 0 Indicates if the RNC supports in ter-RAT HO (Inter Radio Access Technology Handover).Change takes effect: Ongoing connections Handover tCellChange 20 Time for supervising the move fr om UTRAN to GSM. Once the cell change order from UTRAN has been sent, the system expects to receive an Iu release command or Cell change failure from UTRAN with in this amount of time. This attribute may only be changed by Handover initialCellListDelay 0 When the connection is s et up for the first time, Measurement handler function will wait this predetermi ned time before it sends the first cell list to the UE. This extra delay will de crease the risk for the UE not to get the initial cell list , since ini Handover comprModeRetryInterv 5 Time interval between tr ials to initiate compressed mode.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0 means no retry.Value mapping: 0: 0.0 s 1: 0.2 s 2: 0 .4 s 3: 0.6 s 4: 0.8 s 5: 1.0 s ... 50: 10 s Unit: 0.2 s Change takes e Handover maxSohoListSubset 32 Maximum number of intrafrequency cells that the UE shall measure on.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections Handover maxGsmMonSubset 32 Maximum number of GSM cells that the UE shall measure on.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections Handover tsHoInIratHo 2 Maximum time for soft or softer handover to execute during the IRATHO execution. This attribute may only be chan ged by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 1: 0.5 s 2: 1.0 s ... 10: 5.0 s Unit: 0 .5 s Change takes effect: New connections Handover selHoSup 0 Selects whether the Selective Ha ndover feature is activated. Specifies if cell filtering to support selective ha ndover is performed in the system at creation of any of the intra-frequency, int er-frequency or inter-RAT monitored sets. Selective Handover is Handover maxIefMonSubset 32 Maximum number of inter-frequenc y cells that the UE shall measure on. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections Handover ifhoPropRepeatInterval 5 Minimum time interval be tween proposals of the same non-used frequency cell for handover based on the sa me measurement report. Unit: 0.2 s Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (nex t switch to CELL_DCH) Handover ifhoAmountPropRepeat 4 Maximum number of repeat ed proposals of non-used frequency cell(s) for handover based on the same measur ement report. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH) Handover fddIfhoSupp 0 Indicates if the RNC supports IF HO. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections

    Handover cnhhoSupp 0 Defines if the feature CN Hard H andover is activated in the RNC. Change takes effect: New connections Handover intraFreqCnhhoPenalty 30 Defines how much penalty shall be given to a non-Iur external UTRAN cell compared to a normal intra-freq uency cell.Dependencies: The value to chose depends on the setting of the parame ter measQuantity1 (which indicate if there are Ec/No or RSCP measuremen Handover intraFreqCnhhoWeight 0 Defines the weight of th e radio links in the active set, when comparing them to an intra-frequency CN Ha rd Handover candidate. intraFreqCnhhoWeight=0 means that only the best cell in A S is considered,intraFreqCnhhoWeight>0 means that all radio links in th Handover interFreqCnhhoPenaltyEcno 30 Defines how much penalty shall be given to a non-Iur external UTRAN cell compared to a normal in ter-frequency cell during Ec/No evaluation. Dependencies:It is recommended to se t ExternalUtranCell.individualOffset to less than interFreqCnhhoPenaltyEcno.Thi Handover interFreqCnhhoPenaltyRscp 30 Defines how much penalty shall be given to a non-Iur external UTRAN cell compared to a normal in ter-frequency cell during RSCP evaluation. Dependencies:It is recommended to set ExternalUtranCell.individualOffset to less than interFreqCnhhoPenaltyRscp.This Handover tmStopGsmMeas 20 Maximum time for Service/Load Ba sed GSM Handover measurements. Special values: 60: Measurements are never stoppe d. Unit: s Change takes effect: New connections Handover lbhoMinSpeechUsers 0 Minimum number of speech users connected in this cell before LBHO may be triggered. When more than this number of speech users are connected in the cell, and the total load in the cell for all types of users is considered high, then LBHO for one or more s Handover lbhoMaxTriggeredUsers 1 Maximum number of speech users that can be triggeredto performLBHO.Change takes effect: Next soft conges tion trigger Handover lbhoMinTriggerTime 5 Minimum allowed time bet ween triggered LBHO attempts in this cell. As LBHO can potentially trigger for e very admission request, there is a risk that it may be triggered too often for t he same cell, for example due to many quick repeated upswitch attempts Handover tmStopIfMeas 20 Time for Supervision for measure ments started due to Inter-frequency Load based handover. Unit: Seconds Change t akes effect: Next soft congestion This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Handover ifLbhoMode 0 Defines how the inter-frequency monitored set shall be filtered and what inter-frequency target cells are allowe d.ifLbhoMode = 1 Include all defined inter-frequency neighbor cells, both non-Iu r external cells used for CNHHO and normal inter-frequency neig Handover iflsHyst 20 Hysteresis load between the targ et and source cell that must be fulfilled before triggering a load sharing redir ection to the target cell, relative to the current load in the source cell. Unit : % Change takes effect: Immediately HgTtp hgAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm HG Alarm Ind ication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reportin g disabled. HgTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. (DEGRADED qualifies the operational state E NABLED.) HgTtp HgTtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. HgTtp operationalState The operational state. HgTtp hgBaisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm HG Backward Alarm Indication Signal (BAIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. HgTtp userLabel Label for free use. HgTtp hgAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm HG Alarm Ind ication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reportin g disabled.

    HgTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. (DEGRADED qualifies the operational state E NABLED.) HgTtp HgTtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. HgTtp operationalState The operational state. HgTtp hgBaisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm HG Backward Alarm Indication Signal (BAIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. HgTtp userLabel Label for free use. HgTtp hgAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm HG Alarm Ind ication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reportin g disabled. HgTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. (DEGRADED qualifies the operational state E NABLED.) HgTtp HgTtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. HgTtp operationalState The operational state. HgTtp hgBaisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm HG Backward Alarm Indication Signal (BAIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. HgTtp userLabel Label for free use. HiPowTxCable aiuConnector Value denoting the connector at the AIU. Possible values: ? HL_IN_A1 ? HL_IN_A2 ? TX_IN_A ? TX_IN_B Use cases: S cratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF] HiPowTxCable aiuPlugInUnitRef Reference to the AIU. Us e cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The PlugInUnit MO and the correspondi ng device group MOs must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF] HiPowTxCable dlAttenuation Electrical attenuation of the ca ble, downlink. Example: 36 = 3.6 dB Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Anten na Equipment Unit: 0.1 dB Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] HiPowTxCable electricalDlDelay Electrical downlink dela y of the cable. Example: 103 = 10.3 nanoseconds Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell setup for t he affected cell. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] HiPowTxCable HiPowTxCableId HiPowTxCable mcpaAuxPlugInUnitRef Reference to the auxilia ry plug-in unit of MCPA. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The AuxPlu gInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MOs must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF] HiPowTxCable mcpaConnector Value representing the connector at the auxiliary plug-in unit of MCPA. Possible values: ? TX_OUT Use cases: Scr atch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF] HsDbchDeviceSet HsDbchDeviceSetId HsDbchDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_905 Specificatio HsDbchDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC905 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] HsDbchDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC905 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] Hsdsch HsdschId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Hsdsch userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. Hsdsch administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the

    HSDPA resources in the cell. Data for the HSDPA physical channels HS-SCCH and HS -PDSCH will be configured in the RBS. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. When set to LOCKED, Hsdsch support for Hsdsch operationalState The operational state of the HSD PA resources in the cell. Hsdsch availabilityStatus The availability status of the H SDPA resources in the cell. More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set t Hsdsch deltaAck1 5 The power offset for acknowledgement mes sages on HS-DPCCH for UE Connections using one RLS. Hsdsch deltaNack1 5 The power offset for non-acknowledgement messages on HS-DPCCH for UE Connections using one RLS. Hsdsch deltaAck2 7 The power offset for acknowledgement mes sages on HS-DPCCH for UE Connections using two or more RLSs. Hsdsch deltaNack2 7 The power offset for non-acknowledgement messages on HS-DPCCH for UE Connections using two or more RLSs. Hsdsch deltaCqi1 4 The power offset for CQI report messages on HS-DPCCH for UE Connections using one RLS. Hsdsch deltaCqi2 6 The power offset for CQI report messages on HS-DPCCH for UE Connections using two or more RLSs. Hsdsch initialCqiRepetitionFactor 1 The initial number of re petitions for CQI report messages on HS-DPCCH. Dependencies: Must be set less th an or equal to cqiFeedbackCycle / 2 ms. Hsdsch initialAckNackRepetitionFactor 1 The initial number of re petitions for ACK/NACK feedback transmissions on HS-DPCCH. Hsdsch cqiFeedbackCycle 8 The duration of the CQI feedback cycle on HS-DPCCH. Dependencies: Must be set equal to or greater than 2 ms * in itialCqiRepetitionFactor. Unit: ms Hsdsch hsMeasurementPowerOffset 80 The Measurement power of fset, also called gamma, sent to the UE and RBS via RRC and NBAP. Used to offset the CQI in order to utilize the whole CQI range. Unit: 0.1 dB Resolution: 5 Hsdsch numHsPdschCodes 5 Number of codes of SF=16 used for the HS -PDSCH. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. When t he number of codes is incremented, all traffic is released from the cell. When t he number is decreased, traffic is not released in the Hsdsch numHsScchCodes 1 Number of codes of SF=128 used for the H S-SCCH. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. When t he number of codes is incremented or decreased, all traffic within the cell is r eleased. Hsdsch codeThresholdPdu656 6 Threshold for determining when t o use the RLC PDU size = 656 bits for UEs with HS-DSCH physical layer category 7 to 10, 13 or higher. Special values: 0: always used 15: never used any other va lue: - 656 bits are used if codeThresholdPdu656 < numHsPdschCod Hsdsch enhancedL2Support Indicates whether Enhanced Layer 2 is supported in the cell or not, as reported by the RBS in RSI or audit respo nse. Hsdsch qam64Support Indicates whether 64QAM is supported in the cell or not, as reported by the RBS in RSI or audit response. Dependencies:T he operator must have valid licenses for EL2, 16QAM and 64QAM in order for this parameter to take effect. Change takes effect: New conn HsDschResources availabilityStatus The availability status of the resources. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPEN DENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG _FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] HsDschResources HsDschResourcesId HsDschResources operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP] HsDschResources pnOnScchDschIsActive Shows if PN transmission on HS-SCCH and HS-DSCH is active. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UT

    S] HsDschResources activeRdbtCellMeasurements Active HSDPA Loc al Measurements on this MO. Measurement type for this attribute is 16. One measu rement can be active. Undefined value: 0 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] HsDschResources fixedBuffersIsActive Shows whether fixed buff er have been set or not (done through the action setFixedBuffersCellHidden). Use r category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] HwUnit piuType Reference to corresponding PiuType MO. Indirectl y used to control the auto-configuration of HwUnit contained MOs. HwUnit productData HwUnit product data.Will match the produ ct data on the HW Unit label. HwUnit HwUnitId The value component of the RDN. HwUnit userLabel Label for free use. HwUnit unitType This attribute mirrors the attribute Piu Type::productData(productName). HwUnit administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Takes effect: Immediatley. HwUnit availabilityStatus The availability status containi ng details about operationalState. HwUnit operationalState Defines the operational state. HwUnit greenLed Indicates the operational status of the HW Unit. HwUnit redLed Indicates the fault status of the HW unit. HwUnit position 0 Specifies the absolute position of the H W unit within a shelf starting from left or ground with first position 1. Depend ing on the width of the board it may occupy more than one position. If a board o ccupies more than one position its position is the left HwUnit positionInformation The position of a HW unit can ei ther be ? in a shelf? not contained in a shelf but placed inside or outside a If the HW is contained in a shelf the attribute position shall be used. Otherwi se this attribu HwUnit positionRef Reference to the cabinet or shelf which the HW unit is placed in or belongs to. Takes effect: Immediatley. HwUnit productData.productName The name of the product. The pro duct name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadMo dule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. HwUnit productData.productNumber The product number of th e product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For Upg radePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document.The product num HwUnit productData.productRevision The revision state of th e product. Examples: R1, R1A, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for t he MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and S ubrackProdType. HwUnit productData.productionDate The production date is r epresented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight characters.Ex ample: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for the HwUnit productData.serialNumber The serial number consis ts of 13 alphanumerical characters grouped as 6 plus 7 characters. The first 6 c haracters are to be used for factory codes and the last 7 characters are used fo r an individual number or batch number. ImaGroup ImaGroupId The value component of the RDN. ImaGroup userLabel Label for free use. ImaGroup physicalPortList Contains a list of physi cal port MOs connected to this ImaGroup MO. The physical port MOs can be of type : - E1PhysPathTerm, - J1PhysPathTerm, - T1PhysPathTerm, - E1Ttp, - T1Ttp. Add or remove physical port MOs in one set-operation, not both in the same se ImaGroup requiredNumberOfLinks 0 Specifies the number of

    ImaLinks that needs to be operational in order for the complete group to be oper ational. The bandwidth available for the AtmPort (and thus for the creation of V P/VC connections) is defined by this number. Setting the requiredNumber ImaGroup activeLinks 0 Number of active links. ImaGroup operationalState The operational state. ImaGroup availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. ImaGroup reservedBy Contains an AtmPort MO instance that reserves this MO instance. ImaGroup ImaGroupId The value component of the RDN. ImaGroup userLabel Label for free use. ImaGroup physicalPortList Contains a list of physi cal port MOs connected to this ImaGroup MO. The physical port MOs can be of type : - E1PhysPathTerm, - J1PhysPathTerm, - T1PhysPathTerm, - E1Ttp, - T1Ttp. Add or remove physical port MOs in one set-operation, not both in the same se ImaGroup requiredNumberOfLinks 0 Specifies the number of ImaLinks that needs to be operational in order for the complete group to be oper ational. The bandwidth available for the AtmPort (and thus for the creation of V P/VC connections) is defined by this number. Setting the requiredNumber ImaGroup activeLinks 0 Number of active links. ImaGroup operationalState The operational state. ImaGroup availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. ImaGroup reservedBy Contains an AtmPort MO instance that reserves this MO instance. ImaGroup ImaGroupId The value component of the RDN. ImaGroup userLabel Label for free use. ImaGroup physicalPortList Contains a list of physi cal port MOs connected to this ImaGroup MO. The physical port MOs can be of type : - E1PhysPathTerm, - J1PhysPathTerm, - T1PhysPathTerm, - E1Ttp, - T1Ttp. Add or remove physical port MOs in one set-operation, not both in the same se ImaGroup requiredNumberOfLinks 0 Specifies the number of ImaLinks that needs to be operational in order for the complete group to be oper ational. The bandwidth available for the AtmPort (and thus for the creation of V P/VC connections) is defined by this number. Setting the requiredNumber ImaGroup activeLinks 0 Number of active links. ImaGroup operationalState The operational state. ImaGroup availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. ImaGroup reservedBy Contains an AtmPort MO instance that reserves this MO instance. ImaLink ImaLinkId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. ImaLink userLabel Label for free use. ImaLink operationalState The operational state. If the op erationalState is DISABLED, the ImaLink is blocked for traffic. ImaLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. ImaLink uses Reference to the physical port represented by th is MO. Can be of types: - E1PhysPathTerm, - J1PhysPathTerm, - T1PhysPathTerm, E1Ttp or - T1Ttp. ImaLink ImaLinkId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. ImaLink userLabel Label for free use. ImaLink operationalState The operational state. If the op erationalState is DISABLED, the ImaLink is blocked for traffic. ImaLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. ImaLink uses Reference to the physical port represented by th is MO. Can be of types: - E1PhysPathTerm, - J1PhysPathTerm, - T1PhysPathTerm, -

    E1Ttp or - T1Ttp. ImaLink ImaLinkId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. ImaLink userLabel Label for free use. ImaLink operationalState The operational state. If the op erationalState is DISABLED, the ImaLink is blocked for traffic. ImaLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. ImaLink uses Reference to the physical port represented by th is MO. Can be of types: - E1PhysPathTerm, - J1PhysPathTerm, - T1PhysPathTerm, E1Ttp or - T1Ttp. InternalEthernetPort ethernetSwitchRef Reference to an instance of EthernetSwitch MO. InternalEthernetPort dscpPbitMap The value of the DSCP an d the corresponding pbit (priority). The number of members in this sequence is 6 4. All 64 possible dscpPbit structs must be defined when setting this attribute. If no values are set, the default values specified in the table in the InternalEthernetPort frameFormat ETHERNET_2_DIX(0) Ethernet outgoing frame format. Before changing the value from ETHERNET_2_DIX to IEEE_80 2_3_LLC_SNAP, ensure first that the attribute mtu of the IpInterface is not grea ter than 1492. If mtu > 1492, reduce it to 1492 before changing this attribute. Disturb InternalEthernetPort userLabel Label for free use. InternalEthernetPort InternalEthernetPortId The value compon ent of the RDN. InternalEthernetPort macAddress 0 Media Access Control add ress If the board is not available, the attribute has the value 00:00:00:00:00:0 0. InternalEthernetPort dscpPbitMap.dscp DSCP - different iated services code point. The number of members in this sequence is 64. InternalEthernetPort dscpPbitMap.pbit 802.1p prioritie s according to IEEE 8021D: 0 - Best effort 1 - Background 2 - Spare 3 - Excellen t effort 4 - Controlled load 5 - Voice, less than 100 ms delay 6 - Voice, less t han 10 ms delay 7 - Network control The number of members in this sequence is 6 InternalEthernetPort ethernetSwitchRef Reference to an instance of EthernetSwitch MO. InternalEthernetPort dscpPbitMap The value of the DSCP an d the corresponding pbit (priority). The number of members in this sequence is 6 4. All 64 possible dscpPbit structs must be defined when setting this attribute. If no values are set, the default values specified in the table in the InternalEthernetPort frameFormat ETHERNET_2_DIX(0) Ethernet outgoing frame format. Before changing the value from ETHERNET_2_DIX to IEEE_80 2_3_LLC_SNAP, ensure first that the attribute mtu of the IpInterface is not grea ter than 1492. If mtu > 1492, reduce it to 1492 before changing this attribute. Disturb InternalEthernetPort userLabel Label for free use. InternalEthernetPort InternalEthernetPortId The value compon ent of the RDN. InternalEthernetPort macAddress 0 Media Access Control add ress If the board is not available, the attribute has the value 00:00:00:00:00:0 0. InternalEthernetPort dscpPbitMap.dscp DSCP - different iated services code point. The number of members in this sequence is 64. InternalEthernetPort dscpPbitMap.pbit 802.1p prioritie s according to IEEE 8021D: 0 - Best effort 1 - Background 2 - Spare 3 - Excellen t effort 4 - Controlled load 5 - Voice, less than 100 ms delay 6 - Voice, less t han 10 ms delay 7 - Network control The number of members in this sequence is 6 InternalEthernetPort ethernetSwitchRef Reference to an instance of EthernetSwitch MO. InternalEthernetPort dscpPbitMap The value of the DSCP an

    d the corresponding pbit (priority). The number of members in this sequence is 6 4. All 64 possible dscpPbit structs must be defined when setting this attribute. If no values are set, the default values specified in the table in the InternalEthernetPort frameFormat ETHERNET_2_DIX(0) Ethernet outgoing frame format. Before changing the value from ETHERNET_2_DIX to IEEE_80 2_3_LLC_SNAP, ensure first that the attribute mtu of the IpInterface is not grea ter than 1492. If mtu > 1492, reduce it to 1492 before changing this attribute. Disturb InternalEthernetPort userLabel Label for free use. InternalEthernetPort InternalEthernetPortId The value compon ent of the RDN. InternalEthernetPort macAddress 0 Media Access Control add ress If the board is not available, the attribute has the value 00:00:00:00:00:0 0. InternalEthernetPort dscpPbitMap.dscp DSCP - different iated services code point. The number of members in this sequence is 64. InternalEthernetPort dscpPbitMap.pbit 802.1p prioritie s according to IEEE 8021D: 0 - Best effort 1 - Background 2 - Spare 3 - Excellen t effort 4 - Controlled load 5 - Voice, less than 100 ms delay 6 - Voice, less t han 10 ms delay 7 - Network control The number of members in this sequence is 6 InternalLinkGroup InternalLinkGroupId The value compon ent of the RDN. InternalLinkGroup userLabel Label for free use. InternalLinkGroup switchModuleNumber1 Contains a refer ence to the SwitchModule MO that is interconnected by the link in the InternalLi nkGroup. InternalLinkGroup switchModuleNumber2 Contains a refer ence to the SwitchModule MO that is interconnected by the link in the InternalLi nkGroup. InternalLinkGroup administrativeState 0 The administrati ve state. InternalLinkGroup operationalState The operational status. InternalLinkGroup availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. InternalLinkGroup InternalLinkGroupId The value compon ent of the RDN. InternalLinkGroup switchModuleNumber1 Contains a refer ence to the SwitchModule MO that is interconnected by the link in the InternalLi nkGroup. InternalLinkGroup switchModuleNumber2 Contains a refer ence to the SwitchModule MO that is interconnected by the link in the InternalLi nkGroup. InternalLinkGroup administrativeState 0 The administrati ve state. InternalLinkGroup operationalState The operational status. InternalLinkGroup availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. InterPiuLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. InterPiuLink InterPiuLinkId The value component of the RDN. InterPiuLink operationalState The operational state. InterPiuLink primaryPiuSlot The slot where the primary PIU i s placed. InterPiuLink secondaryPiuSlot The slot where the secon dary PIU is placed. InterPiuLink userLabel Label for free use. InterPiuLink administrativeState 0 The administrative state .

    InterPiuLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. InterPiuLink InterPiuLinkId The value component of the RDN. InterPiuLink operationalState The operational state. InterPiuLink primaryPiuSlot The slot where the primary PIU i s placed. InterPiuLink secondaryPiuSlot The slot where the secon dary PIU is placed. InterPiuLink userLabel Label for free use. InterPiuLink administrativeState 0 The administrative state . InterPiuLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. InterPiuLink InterPiuLinkId The value component of the RDN. InterPiuLink operationalState The operational state. InterPiuLink primaryPiuSlot The slot where the primary PIU i s placed. InterPiuLink secondaryPiuSlot The slot where the secon dary PIU is placed. InterPiuLink userLabel Label for free use. InterPiuLink administrativeState 0 The administrative state . InterSubTimingCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the inter sub timing cable. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDI NG (set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outsta InterSubTimingCable bbifBoardRef Reference to the BBIF bo ard to which the cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition : The BbifBoard MO must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF] InterSubTimingCable bbifConnector Value denoting the conne ctor that connects the cable to the BBIF board. Possible values: ? D Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF] InterSubTimingCable electricalDlDelay Electrical delay of the cable. Specified in 0.1 ns (nanoseconds), for example, 107 = 10.7 nanose conds. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 ns Tak es effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell. User category: Ericsso InterSubTimingCable InterSubTimingCableId InterSubTimingCable rfifConnector Value denoting the conne ctor that connects the cable to the RFIF board. Possible values: ? C Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF] InterSubTimingCable rfifPlugInUnitRef Reference to the RFIF PIU to which the cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precon dition: The PlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MOs must exist. Ref . [CB_ECF] IntJumperCable aiuConnector Parameter denoting the connector at the AIU. Possible values: ? ANT_A ? ANT_B Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref . [CB_ECF] IntJumperCable aiuPlugInUnitRef Reference to the AIU. Us e cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The PlugInUnit MO and the correspondi ng device group MOs must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF] IntJumperCable connectionFieldRef Reference to the connect ion field. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The ConnectionField MO m ust exist. Ref. [CB_ECF] IntJumperCable connFieldConnector Parameter denoting the c onnector at the connection field to which the jumper cable is connected. Use cas es: Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF] IntJumperCable dlAttenuation Cable attenuation, downlink. Exa mple: 36 = 3.6 dB Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 dB Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell. Ref. [CB_ECF ]

    IntJumperCable electricalDlDelay Electrical delay of the cable.Example: 103 = 10.3 ns Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equi pment Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell. U ser category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] IntJumperCable electricalUlDelay Electrical delay of the cable. Example: 103 = 10.3 nanoseconds Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify An tenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affect ed cell. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] IntJumperCable IntJumperCableId IntJumperCable ulAttenuation Cable attenuation, uplink. Examp le: 36 = 3.6 dB Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0 .1 dB Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell. Ref. [CB_ECF] IntraCabTimingCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the inter cab timing cable. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDI NG (set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outsta IntraCabTimingCable bbifBoardRef Reference to the BBIF bo ard. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The MO BbifBoard must exist Re f. [CB_ECF] IntraCabTimingCable bbifConnector Value representing the c onnector towards the BBIF board. Possible values: ? C Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF] IntraCabTimingCable electricalUlDelay Electrical delay of the cable.Example: 107 = 10.7 nanoseconds Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Mo dify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] IntraCabTimingCable IntraCabTimingCableId IntraCabTimingCable rfifConnector Value representing the c onnector towards the RFIF plug-in unit. Possible values: ? D Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF] IntraCabTimingCable rfifPlugInUnitRef Reference to the RFIF plug-in unit to which the cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Si te Precondition: The PlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MOs must e xist. Ref. [CB_ECF] Ip dnsServerAddresses A list of IP addresses to Domain Name Servers. A maximum of 3 DNS servers is possible. Ip IpId The value component of the RDN. Ip userLabel Label for free use. Ip workingMode ROUTER_MODE(1) Specifies if the IP stack in the node works as a combined host/router (ROUTER_MODE) or only as a host (HOST_MODE ). Dependencies: If the IpHostLink MO is used, do not set this attribute to ROUT ER_MODE, since routing on incoming OAM traffic is not supported Ip retransInterval 4 The retransmission interval. Unit: 1 s Ip noOfRetrans 5 The number of retransmissions. Ip isRecursiveSearch 0 Specifies how the DNS client wan ts the DNS server do the search for the IP address in the network . true - recur sive search false - non-recursive search Ip isSubDomainName 0 Specifies whether to use subsets of the fully qualified domain name to reach the simple domain name. true - use subsets of domain name false - do not use subsets of domain name Ip isDefDomainName 0 Specifies whether the default domain nam e is present. true - present false - not present Ip defDomainName Contains default domain name. If isDefDo mainName is set to true, the domain name found in this attribute is used by the DNS resolver and there is no need to submit the complete domain name. If the dom ain name is for example 'ws5741.uab.ericsson.se', then Ip operationalState The operational state. This attr ibute is set to ENABLED if at least one link is operational. Ip numberOfLinks Represents the number of interfaces (cor responding to the MOs: EthernetLink, IpAtmLink and IpHostLink) which have regist

    ered to the Ip MO. Ip availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Ip reservedBy Contains an Ospf MO instance that reserv es this MO instance. Ip useHostFile TRUE(1) Specifies if the host file is used. The hostFile is used by the resolver and chosen as a source of information before qu erying a DNS server. true - use the host file false - do not use the host file Ip dscp 0 The DiffServ CodePoint. The code point values ar e used by DiffServ enabled hosts and router to identify different service levels . When set, the DSCPs are mapped to Per Hop Behaviours (PHB) by forwarding devic es along the path between the source and destin Ip icmpRedirect TRUE(1) Indicates if ICMP redirects is sent out or not. Ip udpChecksumState 1 Enables or disables generation o f UDP checksum. 0 = disabled 1 = enabled The UDP checksum is used to verify that the UDP header has not been damaged during transmission. Ip nodeInterfaceName 0 The interface name of the link o bject that determines the OAM IP Address for the node. Dependencies: The value o f this attribute is set to the value of the attribute interfaceName in the Ether netLink MO or in the IpHostLink MO. Ip nodeIpAddress The OAM IP Address for the node. Ip dnsServerAddresses A list of IP addresses to Domain Name Servers. A maximum of 3 DNS servers is possible. Ip IpId The value component of the RDN. Ip userLabel Label for free use. Ip workingMode ROUTER_MODE(1) Specifies if the IP stack in the node works as a combined host/router (ROUTER_MODE) or only as a host (HOST_MODE ). Dependencies: If the IpHostLink MO is used, do not set this attribute to ROUT ER_MODE, since routing on incoming OAM traffic is not supported Ip retransInterval 4 The retransmission interval. Unit: 1 s Ip noOfRetrans 5 The number of retransmissions. Ip isRecursiveSearch 0 Specifies how the DNS client wan ts the DNS server do the search for the IP address in the network . true - recur sive search false - non-recursive search Ip isSubDomainName 0 Specifies whether to use subsets of the fully qualified domain name to reach the simple domain name. true - use subsets of domain name false - do not use subsets of domain name Ip isDefDomainName 0 Specifies whether the default domain nam e is present. true - present false - not present Ip defDomainName Contains default domain name. If isDefDo mainName is set to true, the domain name found in this attribute is used by the DNS resolver and there is no need to submit the complete domain name. If the dom ain name is for example 'ws5741.uab.ericsson.se', then Ip operationalState The operational state. This attr ibute is set to ENABLED if at least one link is operational. Ip numberOfLinks Represents the number of interfaces (cor responding to the MOs: EthernetLink, IpAtmLink and IpHostLink) which have regist ered to the Ip MO. Ip availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Ip reservedBy Contains an Ospf MO instance that reserv es this MO instance. Ip useHostFile TRUE(1) Specifies if the host file is used. The hostFile is used by the resolver and chosen as a source of information before qu erying a DNS server. true - use the host file false - do not use the host file Ip dscp 0 The DiffServ CodePoint. The code point values ar e used by DiffServ enabled hosts and router to identify different service levels . When set, the DSCPs are mapped to Per Hop Behaviours (PHB) by forwarding devic es along the path between the source and destin

    Ip icmpRedirect TRUE(1) Indicates if ICMP redirects is sent out or not. Ip udpChecksumState 1 Enables or disables generation o f UDP checksum. 0 = disabled 1 = enabled The UDP checksum is used to verify that the UDP header has not been damaged during transmission. Ip nodeInterfaceName 0 The interface name of the link o bject that determines the OAM IP Address for the node. Dependencies: The value o f this attribute is set to the value of the attribute interfaceName in the Ether netLink MO or in the IpHostLink MO. Ip nodeIpAddress The OAM IP Address for the node. Ip dnsServerAddresses A list of IP addresses to Domain Name Servers. A maximum of 3 DNS servers is possible. Ip IpId The value component of the RDN. Ip userLabel Label for free use. Ip workingMode Specifies if the IP stack in the node wo rks as a combined host/router (ROUTER_MODE) or only as a host (HOST_MODE). Depen dencies: If the IpHostLink MO is used, do not set this attribute to ROUTER_MODE, since routing on incoming OAM traffic is not supported Ip retransInterval 4 The retransmission interval. Unit: 1 s Ip noOfRetrans 5 The number of retransmissions. Ip isRecursiveSearch 0 Specifies how the DNS client wan ts the DNS server do the search for the IP address in the network . true - recur sive search false - non-recursive search Ip isSubDomainName 0 Specifies whether to use subsets of the fully qualified domain name to reach the simple domain name. true - use subsets of domain name false - do not use subsets of domain name Ip isDefDomainName 0 Specifies whether the default domain nam e is present. true - present false - not present Ip defDomainName Contains default domain name. If isDefDo mainName is set to true, the domain name found in this attribute is used by the DNS resolver and there is no need to submit the complete domain name. If the dom ain name is for example 'ws5741.uab.ericsson.se', then Ip operationalState The operational state. This attr ibute is set to ENABLED if at least one link is operational. Ip numberOfLinks Represents the number of interfaces (cor responding to the MOs: EthernetLink, IpAtmLink and IpHostLink) which have regist ered to the Ip MO. Ip availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Ip reservedBy Contains an Ospf MO instance that reserv es this MO instance. Ip useHostFile TRUE(1) Specifies if the host file is used. The hostFile is used by the resolver and chosen as a source of information before qu erying a DNS server. true - use the host file false - do not use the host file Ip dscp 0 The DiffServ CodePoint. The code point values ar e used by DiffServ enabled hosts and router to identify different service levels . When set, the DSCPs are mapped to Per Hop Behaviours (PHB) by forwarding devic es along the path between the source and destin Ip icmpRedirect TRUE(1) Indicates if ICMP redirects is sent out or not. Ip udpChecksumState 1 Enables or disables generation o f UDP checksum. 0 = disabled 1 = enabled The UDP checksum is used to verify that the UDP header has not been damaged during transmission. Ip nodeInterfaceName 0 The interface name of the link o bject that determines the OAM IP Address for the node. Dependencies: The value o f this attribute is set to the value of the attribute interfaceName in the Ether netLink MO or in the IpHostLink MO. Ip nodeIpAddress The OAM IP Address for the node. IpAccessAutoConfig IpAccessAutoConfigId The value compon ent of the RDN.

    IpAccessAutoConfig userLabel Label for free use. IpAccessAutoConfig reservedBy Contains a list of MO in stances that reserve IP access hosts. IpAccessAutoConfig nrOfUnusedAdresses 0 Number of unused addresses The number of addresses in the range that are not used. IpAccessAutoConfig totalNrOfAddresses 0 Total number of addresses in the range. The first address in the range is the same one as the on e for networkAddress. IpAccessAutoConfig minIpAddress Minimum IP address The l owest value that can be used as host IP address. If autoConfig=ON for an IP acce ss host, it is not necessary to assign explicitly an IP address and prefix lengt h to the host. The IP address is assigned by the Control Plane, based o IpAccessAutoConfig maxIpAddress Maximum IP address The h ighest value that can be used as host IP address. If autoConfig=ON for an IP acc ess host, it is not necessary to assign explicitly an IP address and prefix leng th to the host. The IP address is assigned by the Control Plane, based IpAccessHostEt IpAccessHostEtId The value component of t he RDN. IpAccessHostEt administrativeState 0 The administrative state . IpAccessHostEt availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpAccessHostEt ipAddress The IP address of the host. This IP address must be unique with respect to other hosts in the node. To set this attribute, administrativeState must be LOCKED. This IP address must belong to th e subnet which is indicated in the MO referenced by ipInterface IpAccessHostEt ipDefaultTtl 64 The default value of the Time-To -Live (TTL) field of the IP header. The value is inserted into datagrams origina ting at this host, whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer p rotocol. IpAccessHostEt ipInterfaceMoRef Reference to an IpInterf ace MO or VpnInterface MO. IpAccessHostEt operationalState The operational state. IpAccessHostEt reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. IpAccessHostEt userLabel Label for free use. IpAccessHostEt ntpServerMode 0 Specifies whether a host is acti ng as an NTP server. This attribute cannot be set to ENABLED, if there are any I pSyncRef MOs in the node. IpAccessHostEt ntpDscp 0 The DSCP value to be used for outgoing N TP packets. IpAccessHostEt IpAccessHostEtId The value component of t he RDN. IpAccessHostEt administrativeState 0 The administrative state . IpAccessHostEt availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpAccessHostEt ipAddress The IP address of the host. This IP address must be unique with respect to other hosts in the node. To set this attribute, administrativeState must be LOCKED. This IP address must belong to th e subnet which is indicated in the MO referenced by ipInterface IpAccessHostEt ipDefaultTtl 64 The default value of the Time-To -Live (TTL) field of the IP header. The value is inserted into datagrams origina ting at this host, whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer p rotocol. IpAccessHostEt ipInterfaceMoRef Reference to an IpInterf ace MO or VpnInterface MO. IpAccessHostEt operationalState The operational state. IpAccessHostEt reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance.

    IpAccessHostEt userLabel Label for free use. IpAccessHostEt ntpServerMode 0 Specifies whether a host is acti ng as an NTP server. This attribute cannot be set to ENABLED, if there are any I pSyncRef MOs in the node. IpAccessHostEt ntpDscp 0 The DSCP value to be used for outgoing N TP packets. IpAccessHostEt IpAccessHostEtId The value component of t he RDN. IpAccessHostEt administrativeState 0 The administrative state . IpAccessHostEt availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpAccessHostEt ipAddress The IP address of the host. This IP address must be unique with respect to other hosts in the node. To set this attribute, administrativeState must be LOCKED. This IP address must belong to th e subnet which is indicated in the MO referenced by ipInterface IpAccessHostEt ipDefaultTtl 64 The default value of the Time-To -Live (TTL) field of the IP header. The value is inserted into datagrams origina ting at this host, whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer p rotocol. IpAccessHostEt ipInterfaceMoRef Reference to an IpInterf ace MO or VpnInterface MO. IpAccessHostEt operationalState The operational state. IpAccessHostEt reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. IpAccessHostEt userLabel Label for free use. IpAccessHostEt ntpServerMode 0 Specifies whether a host is acti ng as an NTP server. This attribute cannot be set to ENABLED, if there are any I pSyncRef MOs in the node. IpAccessHostEt ntpDscp 0 The DSCP value to be used for outgoing N TP packets. IpAccessHostGpb IpAccessHostGpbId The value component of t he RDN. IpAccessHostGpb userLabel Label for free use. IpAccessHostGpb reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. IpAccessHostGpb operationalState The operational state. IpAccessHostGpb availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpAccessHostGpb administrativeState 0 The administrative state . IpAccessHostGpb generalProcessorUnitId Reference to an instance of GeneralProcessorUnit MO. Default location of the IP host after a node restar t. The location can be overriden by the value of the attribute activeGpuId. IpAccessHostGpb autoConfig 0 This attribute specifies whether autoconfiguration for the IP Access Host is used. IpAccessHostGpb autoConfigIdentity The identity of the IpAc cessAutoConfig MO used by this host. This attribute is mandatory if autoConfig i s set to ON. IpAccessHostGpb autoConfigIdentity2 The identity of the IpAc cessAutoConfig MO used by this host. This attribute must be set, if autoConfig i s set to ON and if the host has two IP addresses assigned automatically. IpAccessHostGpb ipAddress1 0 The first IP address of the host . This IP address must be unique with respect to other hosts in the node. To set this attribute, administrativeState must be LOCKED. This attribute must be set, only if autoConfig is set to OFF. This IP address must belong IpAccessHostGpb ipAddress2 0 The second IP address of the hos t. This IP address must be unique with respect to other hosts in the node. To se t this attribute, administrativeState must be LOCKED. This attribute must be set , only if autoConfig is set to OFF. This IP address must belong

    IpAccessHostGpb ipDefaultTtl 64 The default value of the Time-To -Live (TTL) field of the IP header. The value is inserted into datagrams origina ting at this host, whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer p rotocol. IpAccessHostGpb ipReasmTimeout 60 The maximum number of seconds, d uring which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at th is host. The value for this attribute must be greater than zero. Recommended val ues, according to RFC 1122, are between 60 and 120. IpAccessHostGpb interface1 Reference to an IpInterface MO o r to a FastEthernet MO. If two IP addresses are used, and thus two interfaces, t his interface is for IP address 1. The attributes interface1 and interface2 have their own instances of the IpInterface MO. When the IpAccessHo IpAccessHostGpb interface2 Reference to an IpInterface MO o r to a FastEthernet MO. This attribute must refer to an MO of the same type as i nterface1. This attribute must be set, if ipAddress2 or autoConfigIdentity2 is s et. The attributes interface1 and interface2 have their own ins IpAccessHostGpb activeGpuId Reference to the active GeneralP rocessorUnit MO. After restart, the reference is the same as generalProcessorUni tId. The reference can be set only by the user of the IpAccessHostGpb MO. IpAccessHostGpb IpAccessHostGpbId The value component of t he RDN. IpAccessHostGpb userLabel Label for free use. IpAccessHostGpb reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. IpAccessHostGpb operationalState The operational state. IpAccessHostGpb availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpAccessHostGpb administrativeState 0 The administrative state . IpAccessHostGpb generalProcessorUnitId Reference to an instance of GeneralProcessorUnit MO. Default location of the IP host after a node restar t. The location can be overriden by the value of the attribute activeGpuId. IpAccessHostGpb autoConfig 0 This attribute specifies whether autoconfiguration for the IP Access Host is used. IpAccessHostGpb autoConfigIdentity The identity of the IpAc cessAutoConfig MO used by this host. This attribute is mandatory if autoConfig i s set to ON. IpAccessHostGpb autoConfigIdentity2 The identity of the IpAc cessAutoConfig MO used by this host. This attribute must be set, if autoConfig i s set to ON and if the host has two IP addresses assigned automatically. IpAccessHostGpb ipAddress1 0 The first IP address of the host . This IP address must be unique with respect to other hosts in the node. To set this attribute, administrativeState must be LOCKED. This attribute must be set, only if autoConfig is set to OFF. This IP address must belong IpAccessHostGpb ipAddress2 0 The second IP address of the hos t. This IP address must be unique with respect to other hosts in the node. To se t this attribute, administrativeState must be LOCKED. This attribute must be set , only if autoConfig is set to OFF. This IP address must belong IpAccessHostGpb ipDefaultTtl 64 The default value of the Time-To -Live (TTL) field of the IP header. The value is inserted into datagrams origina ting at this host, whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer p rotocol. IpAccessHostGpb ipReasmTimeout 60 The maximum number of seconds, d uring which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at th is host. The value for this attribute must be greater than zero. Recommended val ues, according to RFC 1122, are between 60 and 120. IpAccessHostGpb interface1 Reference to an IpInterface MO o r to a FastEthernet MO. If two IP addresses are used, and thus two interfaces, t his interface is for IP address 1. The attributes interface1 and interface2 have their own instances of the IpInterface MO. When the IpAccessHo

    IpAccessHostGpb interface2 Reference to an IpInterface MO o r to a FastEthernet MO. This attribute must refer to an MO of the same type as i nterface1. This attribute must be set, if ipAddress2 or autoConfigIdentity2 is s et. The attributes interface1 and interface2 have their own ins IpAccessHostGpb activeGpuId Reference to the active GeneralP rocessorUnit MO. After restart, the reference is the same as generalProcessorUni tId. The reference can be set only by the user of the IpAccessHostGpb MO. IpAccessHostPool IpAccessHostPoolId Naming attribute .Contains the value part of the RDN. IpAccessHostPool administrativeState 0 The administrati ve state of the IpAccessHostPool. Change takes effect: New connections IpAccessHostPool availabilityStatus The availability status of the IpAccessHostPool.More than one of the following conditions can ap ply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit IpAccessHostPool operationalState The operational state of the IpAccessHostPool. IpAccessHostPool ipAccessHostRef List of IP Access Hosts that belong to the pool IpAccessHostPool reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have re ferences to this MO.See references in IuLink, IubLink and IurLink. IpAccessHostPool userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance. The value is not used by the R NC. IpAccessHostSpb IpAccessHostSpbId The value component of t he RDN. IpAccessHostSpb userLabel Label for free use. IpAccessHostSpb operationalState The operational state. IpAccessHostSpb availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpAccessHostSpb administrativeState 0 The administrative state . IpAccessHostSpb autoConfig 0 This attribute specifies whether autoconfiguration for the IP Access Host is used. IpAccessHostSpb autoConfigIdentity The identity of the IpAc cessAutoConfig MO used by this host. This attribute is mandatory if autoConfig i s set to ON. IpAccessHostSpb spmId Reference to an instance of Spm MO. Defa ult location of the IP host after a node restart. The location can be overridden by the value of the attribute activeSpmId. IpAccessHostSpb ipAddress 0 The first IP address of the host . This IP address must be unique with respect to other hosts in the node. To set this attribute, administrativeState must be LOCKED. This attribute must be set, only if autoConfig is set to OFF. Disturbances: Changing this IpAccessHostSpb ipDefaultTtl 64 The default value of the Time-To -Live (TTL) field of the IP header. The value is inserted into datagrams origina ting at this host, whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer p rotocol. IpAccessHostSpb ipReasmTimeout 60 The maximum number of seconds, d uring which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at th is host. The value for this attribute must be greater than zero. Recommended val ues, according to RFC 1122, are between 60 and 120. IpAccessHostSpb activeSpmId Reference to the active Spm MO. After restart, the reference is the same as the spmId. The reference can be set only by the user of the IpAccessHostSpb MO. IpAccessHostSpb autoConfigIdentity2 The identity of the IpAc cessAutoConfig MO used by this host. This attribute must be set, if autoConfig i s set to ON and if the host has two IP addresses assigned automatically. IpAccessHostSpb interface2 Reference to an IpInterface MO.

    The attributes ipInterface and interface2 have their own instances of the IpInte rface MO. When the IpAccessHostSpb MO is configured as multihomed, do not config ure these IpInterface MOs on the same ET IP board. The interfac IpAccessHostSpb ipAddress2 0 The second IP address of the hos t at multihoming. This IP address must be unique with respect to other hosts in the node. To set this attribute, administrativeState must be LOCKED. This attrib ute must be set, only if autoConfig is set to OFF. This IP addr IpAccessHostSpb reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. IpAccessHostSpb ipInterface Reference to an IpInterface MO. The attributes ipInterface and interface2 have their own instances of the IpInte rface MO. When the IpAccessHostSpb MO is configured as multihomed, do not config ure these IpInterface MOs on the same ET IP board. The interfac IpAccessSctp IpAccessSctpId The value component of the RDN. IpAccessSctp userLabel Label for free use. IpAccessSctp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserves this MO instance. IpAccessSctp ipAccessHostEtRef1 The identity of a primar y ipAccessHostEt referred to by this MO. The attributes, ipAccessHostEtRef1 and ipAccessHostEtRef2, must not refer to the same IpAccessHostEt MO instance. This attribute must always contain a valid MO reference. IpAccessSctp ipAccessHostEtRef2 The identity of a second ary ipAccessHostEt referred to by this MO. The attributes, ipAccessHostEtRef1 an d ipAccessHostEtRef2, must not refer to the same IpAccessHostEt MO instance. IpAccessSctp operationalState The operational state. IpAccessSctp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpAccessSctp IpAccessSctpId The value component of the RDN. IpAccessSctp userLabel Label for free use. IpAccessSctp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserves this MO instance. IpAccessSctp ipAccessHostEtRef1 The identity of a primar y ipAccessHostEt referred to by this MO. The attributes, ipAccessHostEtRef1 and ipAccessHostEtRef2, must not refer to the same IpAccessHostEt MO instance. This attribute must always contain a valid MO reference. IpAccessSctp ipAccessHostEtRef2 The identity of a second ary ipAccessHostEt referred to by this MO. The attributes, ipAccessHostEtRef1 an d ipAccessHostEtRef2, must not refer to the same IpAccessHostEt MO instance. IpAccessSctp operationalState The operational state. IpAccessSctp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpAtmLink IpAtmLinkId The value component of the RDN. IpAtmLink userLabel Label for free use. IpAtmLink operationalState The operational state. T his attribute is dependent of the supervision of the link or, if it is closed, o f the operational states of the underlying AAL5 termination points (Aal5TpVccTp MO) that are used to transport IP datagrams. IpAtmLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpAtmLink reservedBy Contains an OspfInterface MO ins tance that reserves this MO instance. IpAtmLink ipAddress The input format used by the ope rator is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field consists of three digits. IpAtmLink subnetMask The attribute subnetMask states the subnet mask of the IP over ATM link (point-to-point link). The input format used by the operator is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field co nsists of three digits. For a point-to-point link, the subnet m IpAtmLink mtuSize 1500 Specifies the maximum IP datagram size t hat may be sent on the IP over ATM link in bytes, without fragmentation. Recomme

    nded MTU size is 1500 bytes to prevent IP fragmentation. Note that the size of t he IP datagram does not include the 8 Bytes added for t IpAtmLink metric 0 The attribute metric states the metric c ost of the IP over ATM link. The metric value is calculated as 10^8 /link bit sp eed. For example: Metric for 10 Mbps Ethernet = 10^8/10^7 = 10 Metric for 100 Mb ps Ethernet = 10^8/10^8 = 1 IpAtmLink monitor TRUE(1) Specifies whether InvATMARP monitor is t urned on or off. IpAtmLink monitorInterval 10 The interval between sending mon itor packets. Unit: 1 s IpAtmLink monitorRetries 10 The number of retries when sendi ng monitor packets. IpAtmLink interfaceName The interface name. IpAtmLink aal5TpVccTpId Reference to an Aal5TpVccTp MO i nstance that represents the underlying AAL5 termination point (of an AAL5 PVC:s) for the IP over ATM link. The operator gives the name of the Aal5TpVccTp MO to be used by the IP over ATM link. Only Aal5TpVccTp MOs that term IpAtmLink IpAtmLinkId The value component of the RDN. IpAtmLink userLabel Label for free use. IpAtmLink operationalState The operational state. T his attribute is dependent of the supervision of the link or, if it is closed, o f the operational states of the underlying AAL5 termination points (Aal5TpVccTp MO) that are used to transport IP datagrams. IpAtmLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpAtmLink reservedBy Contains an OspfInterface MO ins tance that reserves this MO instance. IpAtmLink ipAddress The input format used by the ope rator is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field consists of three digits. IpAtmLink subnetMask The attribute subnetMask states the subnet mask of the IP over ATM link (point-to-point link). The input format used by the operator is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field co nsists of three digits. For a point-to-point link, the subnet m IpAtmLink mtuSize 1500 Specifies the maximum IP datagram size t hat may be sent on the IP over ATM link in bytes, without fragmentation. Recomme nded MTU size is 1500 bytes to prevent IP fragmentation. Note that the size of t he IP datagram does not include the 8 Bytes added for t IpAtmLink metric 0 The attribute metric states the metric c ost of the IP over ATM link. The metric value is calculated as 10^8 /link bit sp eed. For example: Metric for 10 Mbps Ethernet = 10^8/10^7 = 10 Metric for 100 Mb ps Ethernet = 10^8/10^8 = 1 IpAtmLink monitor TRUE(1) Specifies whether InvATMARP monitor is t urned on or off. IpAtmLink monitorInterval 60 The interval between sending mon itor packets. Unit: 1 s IpAtmLink monitorRetries 10 The number of retries when sendi ng monitor packets. IpAtmLink interfaceName The interface name. IpAtmLink aal5TpVccTpId Reference to an Aal5TpVccTp MO i nstance that represents the underlying AAL5 termination point (of an AAL5 PVC:s) for the IP over ATM link. The operator gives the name of the Aal5TpVccTp MO to be used by the IP over ATM link. Only Aal5TpVccTp MOs that term IpAtmLink IpAtmLinkId The value component of the RDN. IpAtmLink userLabel Label for free use. IpAtmLink operationalState The operational state. T his attribute is dependent of the supervision of the link or, if it is closed, o f the operational states of the underlying AAL5 termination points (Aal5TpVccTp MO) that are used to transport IP datagrams. IpAtmLink availabilityStatus The availability status.

    It contains details about operationalState. IpAtmLink reservedBy Contains an OspfInterface MO ins tance that reserves this MO instance. IpAtmLink ipAddress The input format used by the ope rator is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field consists of three digits. IpAtmLink subnetMask The attribute subnetMask states the subnet mask of the IP over ATM link (point-to-point link). The input format used by the operator is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field co nsists of three digits. For a point-to-point link, the subnet m IpAtmLink mtuSize 1500 Specifies the maximum IP datagram size t hat may be sent on the IP over ATM link in bytes, without fragmentation. Recomme nded MTU size is 1500 bytes to prevent IP fragmentation. Note that the size of t he IP datagram does not include the 8 Bytes added for t IpAtmLink metric 0 The attribute metric states the metric c ost of the IP over ATM link. The metric value is calculated as 10^8 /link bit sp eed. For example: Metric for 10 Mbps Ethernet = 10^8/10^7 = 10 Metric for 100 Mb ps Ethernet = 10^8/10^8 = 1 IpAtmLink monitor TRUE(1) Specifies whether InvATMARP monitor is t urned on or off. IpAtmLink monitorInterval 10 The interval between sending mon itor packets. Unit: 1 s IpAtmLink monitorRetries 10 The number of retries when sendi ng monitor packets. IpAtmLink interfaceName The interface name. IpAtmLink aal5TpVccTpId Reference to an Aal5TpVccTp MO i nstance that represents the underlying AAL5 termination point (of an AAL5 PVC:s) for the IP over ATM link. The operator gives the name of the Aal5TpVccTp MO to be used by the IP over ATM link. Only Aal5TpVccTp MOs that term IpEthPacketDataRouter IpEthPacketDataRouterId IpEthPacketDataRouter administrativeState 0 The administrati ve state of the IpEthPacketDataRouter IpEthPacketDataRouter operationalState The operational state of the IpEthPacketDataRouter IpEthPacketDataRouter availabilityStatus The availability status of the IpEthPacketDataRouter More than one of the following conditions c an apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POW EROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 whe IpEthPacketDataRouter userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance. The value is not used by the R NC. IpEthPacketDataRouter reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have re ferences to this MO. IpEthPacketDataRouter ipAccessHostSpbRef Reference to IpA ccessHostSpb MO. IpEthPacketDataRouter ipAddressSelection 0 RNC Iu link IP a ddress specification. Dependencies: Instances of this MO that refer to the same IpAccessHostSpb (attribute ipAccessHostSpbRef) must have different values for th is parameter. IpHostLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpHostLink interfaceName The interface name. Dependencies : If the IP address of the IpHostLink MO is the OAM IP Address for the node , th e attribute nodeInterfaceName in the Ip MO must be set to the value of this attr ibute. IpHostLink ipAddress The IP address of the IP host li nk. This IP address must belong to the subnet defined in the referenced IpInterf ace MO. Dependencies: The value of this attribute must not be identical to the v alue of the attribute ipAddress in the MO EthernetLink.

    IpHostLink IpHostLinkId The value component of the RDN. IpHostLink ipInterfaceMoRef Reference to an instance of IpInterface MO. IpHostLink operationalState The operational state. IpHostLink userLabel Label for free use. IpInterface IpInterfaceId The value component of the RDN. IpInterface userLabel Label for free use. IpInterface operationalState The operational state. IpInterface availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpInterface vid 0 The Virtual LAN (VLAN) identifier. This attribute is applicable only when: - vLan is set to true - front ports are confi gured, that is the attribute linkType of the GigaBitEthernet MO is set to FRONT_ PORTS. vid 0 = priority tag only vid 1 - 4094 = with pr IpInterface vLan 0 Specifies whether VLAN tagging is used o n this interface. This attribute is applicable only when front ports are configu red, that is, when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: - This instance is related to a GigaBitEthernet MO, which has the attr IpInterface rps 0 Router Path Supervision Router Path Supe rvision is done on the links defined by ownIpAddressActive and ownIpAddressPassi ve, if they have valid IP addresses defined when they are created. It is possibl e to enable Router Path Supervision after the creation IpInterface mtu 1500 The maximum transfer unit, that is the m aximum number of Ethernet payload octets in an Ethernet frame that is sent from the node.Dependencies: The maximum value for mtu depends on attributes, frameFor mat and linkType in the parent MO GigabitEthernet or fr IpInterface networkPrefixLength The subnet mask. Example : networkPrefixLength = 24, subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 Example: networkPrefixL ength = 28, subnet mask is 255.255.255.240 Dependencies: This attribute can be c hanged using the action assignIpAddress on the IpHostLink MO. If the su IpInterface defaultRouter0 The IP address of the default ro uter 0. It is not allowed to set the value of this attribute to 0.0.0.0. The att ributes defaultRouter0, defaultRouter1 and defaultRouter2 must not indicate the same IP address. If rps is set to false, the egress traffic is IpInterface defaultRouter1 0 The IP address of the default ro uter 1. The attributes defaultRouter0, defaultRouter1 and defaultRouter2 must no t indicate the same IP address. If the address of the defaultRouter1 is changed, it has to belong to the subnet defined by the networkPrefixLen IpInterface defaultRouter2 0 The IP address of the default ro uter 2. The attributes defaultRouter0, defaultRouter1 and defaultRouter2 must no t indicate the same IP address. If the address of the defaultRouter2 is changed, it has to belong to the subnet defined by the networkPrefixLen IpInterface defaultRouter0State Indicates whether ping s upervision is successful toward default router 0. If router path supervision is turned off (rps = false) the value of this attribute is ENABLED. IpInterface defaultRouter1State Indicates whether ping s upervision is successful toward default router 1. If no default router 1 is conf igured, the value of this attribute is DISABLED. If router path supervision is t urned off (rps = false) the value of this attribute is ENABLED. IpInterface defaultRouter2State Indicates whether ping s upervision is successful toward default router 2. If no default router 2 is conf igured, the value of this attribute is DISABLED. If router path supervision is t urned off (rps = false) the value of this attribute is ENABLED. IpInterface defaultRouterTraffic 0 Indicates which of the d efault routers is selected for egress traffic. IpInterface defaultRouterPingInterval 0 The interval at which the default router is ping-ed. Must be larger than or equal to maxWaitForP ingReply. The value of this attribute is irrelevant, if rps = false. Unit: 100ms IpInterface maxWaitForPingReply 3 If echo reply is not rec eived within this time, ping supervision is considered to be failed. This value

    is irrelevant, if rps = false. Unit: 100ms IpInterface maxNoOfFailedPings 2 Maximum number of consec utive failed pings before the contact with the default router is considered to b e lost. This value is irrelevant, if rps = false. IpInterface noOfPingsBeforeOk 2 Minimum number of consec utive successful pings before a default router is considered to be reachable, af ter having been considered unreachable. This value is irrelevant, if rps = false . IpInterface switchBackTimer 180 Switchback timer When a higher-p riority router has become reachable, the traffic switches back to default router 0 or default router 1, after expiry of the switchback timer. This value is irre levant, if rps = false. Unit: 1s IpInterface ownIpAddressActive 0 The IP address of Router Path Supervision on the active link. The active link is the one where traffic i s handled. This IP address must be set, if rps = true. This IP address can be sh ared with a host that is connected to the IP interface, but apart from IpInterface ownIpAddressPassive 0 The IP address of Router Path Supervision on the passive link. This IP address must be unique in the nod e if the attribute rps is set to true. The attribute is not valid if the IpInter face belongs to an InternalEthernetPort MO. IpInterface subnet 0 This attribute contains the subnet addre ss of the IpInterface MO. The subnet address is constructed from the address in defaultRouter0 and the attribute networkPrefixLength. IpInterface reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. A maximum of 96 users can reserve the IpInterface MOs configured on the same logical network. IpInterface trafficType 0 The type of traffic on this inte rface. This attribute is only for information, setting it does not affect traffi c or system behaviour. IpInterface IpInterfaceId The value component of the RDN. IpInterface userLabel Label for free use. IpInterface operationalState The operational state. IpInterface availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpInterface vid 0 The Virtual LAN (VLAN) identifier. This attribute is applicable only when: - vLan is set to true - front ports are confi gured, that is the attribute linkType of the GigaBitEthernet MO is set to FRONT_ PORTS. vid 0 = priority tag only vid 1 - 4094 = with pr IpInterface vLan 0 Specifies whether VLAN tagging is used o n this interface. This attribute is applicable only when front ports are configu red, that is, when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: - This instance is related to a GigaBitEthernet MO, which has the attr IpInterface rps 0 Router Path Supervision Router Path Supe rvision is done on the links defined by ownIpAddressActive and ownIpAddressPassi ve, if they have valid IP addresses defined when they are created. It is possibl e to enable Router Path Supervision after the creation IpInterface mtu 1500 The maximum transfer unit, that is the m aximum number of Ethernet payload octets in an Ethernet frame that is sent from the node.Dependencies: The maximum value for mtu depends on attributes, frameFor mat and linkType in the parent MO GigabitEthernet or fr IpInterface networkPrefixLength The subnet mask. Example : networkPrefixLength = 24, subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 Example: networkPrefixL ength = 28, subnet mask is 255.255.255.240 Dependencies: This attribute can be c hanged using the action assignIpAddress on the IpHostLink MO. If the su IpInterface defaultRouter0 The IP address of the default ro uter 0. It is not allowed to set the value of this attribute to 0.0.0.0. The att ributes defaultRouter0, defaultRouter1 and defaultRouter2 must not indicate the same IP address. If rps is set to false, the egress traffic is IpInterface defaultRouter1 0 The IP address of the default ro uter 1. The attributes defaultRouter0, defaultRouter1 and defaultRouter2 must no

    t indicate the same IP address. If the address of the defaultRouter1 is changed, it has to belong to the subnet defined by the networkPrefixLen IpInterface defaultRouter2 0 The IP address of the default ro uter 2. The attributes defaultRouter0, defaultRouter1 and defaultRouter2 must no t indicate the same IP address. If the address of the defaultRouter2 is changed, it has to belong to the subnet defined by the networkPrefixLen IpInterface defaultRouter0State Indicates whether ping s upervision is successful toward default router 0. If router path supervision is turned off (rps = false) the value of this attribute is ENABLED. IpInterface defaultRouter1State Indicates whether ping s upervision is successful toward default router 1. If no default router 1 is conf igured, the value of this attribute is DISABLED. If router path supervision is t urned off (rps = false) the value of this attribute is ENABLED. IpInterface defaultRouter2State Indicates whether ping s upervision is successful toward default router 2. If no default router 2 is conf igured, the value of this attribute is DISABLED. If router path supervision is t urned off (rps = false) the value of this attribute is ENABLED. IpInterface defaultRouterTraffic 0 Indicates which of the d efault routers is selected for egress traffic. IpInterface defaultRouterPingInterval 0 The interval at which the default router is ping-ed. Must be larger than or equal to maxWaitForP ingReply. The value of this attribute is irrelevant, if rps = false. Unit: 100ms IpInterface maxWaitForPingReply 3 If echo reply is not rec eived within this time, ping supervision is considered to be failed. This value is irrelevant, if rps = false. Unit: 100ms IpInterface maxNoOfFailedPings 2 Maximum number of consec utive failed pings before the contact with the default router is considered to b e lost. This value is irrelevant, if rps = false. IpInterface noOfPingsBeforeOk 2 Minimum number of consec utive successful pings before a default router is considered to be reachable, af ter having been considered unreachable. This value is irrelevant, if rps = false . IpInterface switchBackTimer 180 Switchback timer When a higher-p riority router has become reachable, the traffic switches back to default router 0 or default router 1, after expiry of the switchback timer. This value is irre levant, if rps = false. Unit: 1s IpInterface ownIpAddressActive 0 The IP address of Router Path Supervision on the active link. The active link is the one where traffic i s handled. This IP address must be set, if rps = true. This IP address can be sh ared with a host that is connected to the IP interface, but apart from IpInterface ownIpAddressPassive 0 The IP address of Router Path Supervision on the passive link. This IP address must be unique in the nod e if the attribute rps is set to true. The attribute is not valid if the IpInter face belongs to an InternalEthernetPort MO. IpInterface subnet 0 This attribute contains the subnet addre ss of the IpInterface MO. The subnet address is constructed from the address in defaultRouter0 and the attribute networkPrefixLength. IpInterface reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. A maximum of 96 users can reserve the IpInterface MOs configured on the same logical network. IpInterface trafficType 0 The type of traffic on this inte rface. This attribute is only for information, setting it does not affect traffi c or system behaviour. IpInterface vlanRef Reference to an instance of a Vlan MO. T he referenced instance represents an external VLAN that is opened on this port. This attribute is applicable only when this instance is related to a GigaBitEthe rnet MO. When configuring backplane ports, that is if t IpInterface IpInterfaceId The value component of the RDN. IpInterface userLabel Label for free use. IpInterface operationalState The operational state.

    IpInterface availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpInterface vid 0 The Virtual LAN (VLAN) identifier. This attribute is applicable only when: - vLan is set to true - front ports are confi gured, that is the attribute linkType of the GigaBitEthernet MO is set to FRONT_ PORTS. vid 0 = priority tag only vid 1 - 4094 = with pr IpInterface vLan 0 Specifies whether VLAN tagging is used o n this interface. This attribute is applicable only when front ports are configu red, that is, when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: - This instance is related to a GigaBitEthernet MO, which has the attr IpInterface rps 0 Router Path Supervision Router Path Supe rvision is done on the links defined by ownIpAddressActive and ownIpAddressPassi ve, if they have valid IP addresses defined when they are created. It is possibl e to enable Router Path Supervision after the creation IpInterface mtu 1500 The maximum transfer unit, that is the m aximum number of Ethernet payload octets in an Ethernet frame that is sent from the node.Dependencies: The maximum value for mtu depends on attributes, frameFor mat and linkType in the parent MO GigabitEthernet or fr IpInterface networkPrefixLength The subnet mask. Example : networkPrefixLength = 24, subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 Example: networkPrefixL ength = 28, subnet mask is 255.255.255.240 Dependencies: This attribute can be c hanged using the action assignIpAddress on the IpHostLink MO. If the su IpInterface defaultRouter0 The IP address of the default ro uter 0. It is not allowed to set the value of this attribute to 0.0.0.0. The att ributes defaultRouter0, defaultRouter1 and defaultRouter2 must not indicate the same IP address. If rps is set to false, the egress traffic is IpInterface defaultRouter1 0 The IP address of the default ro uter 1. The attributes defaultRouter0, defaultRouter1 and defaultRouter2 must no t indicate the same IP address. If the address of the defaultRouter1 is changed, it has to belong to the subnet defined by the networkPrefixLen IpInterface defaultRouter2 0 The IP address of the default ro uter 2. The attributes defaultRouter0, defaultRouter1 and defaultRouter2 must no t indicate the same IP address. If the address of the defaultRouter2 is changed, it has to belong to the subnet defined by the networkPrefixLen IpInterface defaultRouter0State Indicates whether ping s upervision is successful toward default router 0. If router path supervision is turned off (rps = false) the value of this attribute is ENABLED. IpInterface defaultRouter1State Indicates whether ping s upervision is successful toward default router 1. If no default router 1 is conf igured, the value of this attribute is DISABLED. If router path supervision is t urned off (rps = false) the value of this attribute is ENABLED. IpInterface defaultRouter2State Indicates whether ping s upervision is successful toward default router 2. If no default router 2 is conf igured, the value of this attribute is DISABLED. If router path supervision is t urned off (rps = false) the value of this attribute is ENABLED. IpInterface defaultRouterTraffic 0 Indicates which of the d efault routers is selected for egress traffic. IpInterface defaultRouterPingInterval 0 The interval at which the default router is ping-ed. Must be larger than or equal to maxWaitForP ingReply. The value of this attribute is irrelevant, if rps = false. Unit: 100ms IpInterface maxWaitForPingReply 3 If echo reply is not rec eived within this time, ping supervision is considered to be failed. This value is irrelevant, if rps = false. Unit: 100ms IpInterface maxNoOfFailedPings 2 Maximum number of consec utive failed pings before the contact with the default router is considered to b e lost. This value is irrelevant, if rps = false. IpInterface noOfPingsBeforeOk 2 Minimum number of consec utive successful pings before a default router is considered to be reachable, af ter having been considered unreachable. This value is irrelevant, if rps = false .

    IpInterface switchBackTimer 180 Switchback timer When a higher-p riority router has become reachable, the traffic switches back to default router 0 or default router 1, after expiry of the switchback timer. This value is irre levant, if rps = false. Unit: 1s IpInterface ownIpAddressActive 0 The IP address of Router Path Supervision on the active link. The active link is the one where traffic i s handled. This IP address must be set, if rps = true. This IP address can be sh ared with a host that is connected to the IP interface, but apart from IpInterface ownIpAddressPassive 0 The IP address of Router Path Supervision on the passive link. This IP address must be unique in the nod e if the attribute rps is set to true. The attribute is not valid if the IpInter face belongs to an InternalEthernetPort MO. IpInterface subnet 0 This attribute contains the subnet addre ss of the IpInterface MO. The subnet address is constructed from the address in defaultRouter0 and the attribute networkPrefixLength. IpInterface reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. A maximum of 96 users can reserve the IpInterface MOs configured on the same logical network. IpInterface trafficType 0 The type of traffic on this inte rface. This attribute is only for information, setting it does not affect traffi c or system behaviour. IpOam userLabel Label for free use. IpOam IpOamId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. IpOam userLabel Label for free use. IpOam IpOamId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. IpOam userLabel Label for free use. IpOam IpOamId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. IpRoutingTable IpRoutingTableId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. IpRoutingTable userLabel Label for free use. IpRoutingTable indexOfDeletableStaticRoutes 0 This attribute g ives the indexes for the static routes that are possible to delete by the operat or. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes List of static routes. When this attribute is set, all the static routes in the node configuration are either ad ded, removed, modified or unchanged. The actions, addStaticRoute and deleteStati cRoute, can be used to add or remove one single static route. D IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.indexOfStaticRoute The index of the static route. It can differ from the index of the route in the routing table. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.ipAddress The destination IP addre ss. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.networkMask The destination IP network mask. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.nextHopIpAddr The next hop IP address. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.redistribute Indicates if the route should be redistributed. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.routeMetric The route metric . IpRoutingTable IpRoutingTableId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. IpRoutingTable userLabel Label for free use. IpRoutingTable indexOfDeletableStaticRoutes 0 This attribute g ives the indexes for the static routes that are possible to delete by the operat or. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes List of static routes. When this attribute is set, all the static routes in the node configuration are either ad

    ded, removed, modified or unchanged. The actions, addStaticRoute and deleteStati cRoute, can be used to add or remove one single static route. D IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.indexOfStaticRoute The index of the static route. It can differ from the index of the route in the routing table. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.ipAddress The destination IP addre ss. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.networkMask The destination IP network mask. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.nextHopIpAddr The next hop IP address. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.redistribute Indicates if the route should be redistributed. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.routeMetric The route metric . IpRoutingTable IpRoutingTableId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. IpRoutingTable userLabel Label for free use. IpRoutingTable indexOfDeletableStaticRoutes 0 This attribute g ives the indexes for the static routes that are possible to delete by the operat or. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes List of static routes. When this attribute is set, all the static routes in the node configuration are either ad ded, removed, modified or unchanged. The actions, addStaticRoute and deleteStati cRoute, can be used to add or remove one single static route. D IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.indexOfStaticRoute The index of the static route. It can differ from the index of the route in the routing table. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.ipAddress The destination IP addre ss. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.networkMask The destination IP network mask. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.nextHopIpAddr The next hop IP address. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.redistribute Indicates if the route should be redistributed. IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.routeMetric The route metric . IpSyncRef administrativeState 0 The administrative state . IpSyncRef availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. IpSyncRef IpSyncRefId The value component of the RDN. IpSyncRef ntpServerIpAddress This attribute contains the domain name or the IP address of the NTP server to be used. It must be a val id IP address or a valid domain name. A valid IP address is four eight-bit numbe rs separated by dots. The eight-bit numbers are represented in decimal IpSyncRef operationalState The operational state. IpSyncRef reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. IpSyncRef cachedIpAddress This attribute contains the late st IP address received from the DNS server with the specified domain name. If do main name is not valid or no value yet received from the DNS server this will be a null string. IpSyncRef userLabel Label for free use. IpSystem IpSystemId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. IpSystem userLabel Label for free use. IpSystem IpSystemId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. IpSystem userLabel Label for free use. IpSystem IpSystemId The value component of the RDN.

    It is set automatically IpSystem IRATHOMUTRAN IRATHOMUTRAN

    when the MO instance is created. userLabel Label for free use. IRATHOMUTRANId interfaceVersion Version of the interface

    IRATHOMUTRAN versionInformation List of the supported MI M's and their versions. Due to UML2XML does not support sequence of sequences, t he class MimInfo is introduced. The MimInfo is a class that has two attributes: mimName that is the name of the supported MIM and mimVersion that is a IRPAgent IRPAgentId Relative Distinguished Name Note : irpAgentId according to IRPAgent systemDN The Distinguished Name of IRPAge nt Iub IubId Iub rbsId Used by OSS-RC to identify an RBS and the corres ponding Iub in RNC. The attribute is not used by RBS itself, it only serves as s torage for OSS-RC. Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Ref. [CB_ICC] Iub userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM] Iub userPlaneTransportOption Transport option for the user plane on the Iub interface. One or both of the flags must be set to true. Setting of both to false is not allowed. Both flags (that is, both struct member s) must be supplied at create of the MO, and at setting of the attribut Iub controlPlaneTransportOption Transport option for the NBAP signalling bearers on the Iub interface. One and only one of the flags mus t be set to true (that is, setting of both to true, or both to false, is not all owed). Both flags (that is, both struct members) must be supplied at cr Iub userPlaneIpResourceRef Local user plane IP resource ava ilable for the Iub. Dependencies: Required if userPlaneTransportOption is set to IPv4. Takes effect: At next establishment of a transport bearer. Use cases: Int egrate RBS in the Radio Network Requirement: CommonUPIP_AD_RBSIub alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the Iub interface. O nly bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding ala Iub controlPlaneTransportOption.atm ATM used as transport be arer. Iub controlPlaneTransportOption.ipV4 IP version 4 use d as transport bearer. Iub userPlaneTransportOption.atm ATM used as transport be arer. Iub userPlaneTransportOption.ipV4 IP version 4 used as tra nsport bearer. IuBcLink IuBcLinkId IuBcLink administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the resource modeling the Iu-BC interface between RNC and the CBC.Disturbanc es:- When set to LOCKED:Ongoing or scheduled Cell Broadcast Service messages are stopped and cleared in all cells. All open TCP connections towards CBC IuBcLink operationalState The operational state of the resource modeling the Iu-BC interface between RNC and the CBC. IuBcLink availabilityStatus The availability status of the resource modeling the Iu-Bc interface between RNC and CBC.More than one o f the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTESTBit 1 = 1: FAILEDBit 2 = 1: POWEROFFBit 3 = 1: OFFLINEBit 4 = 1: OFFDUTYBit IuBcLink userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. IuBcLink cbcIpAddress IP address of the CBC.The input format used by the operator is four fields of digits, separated by dots. Each fi eld may consist of three digits. The value of each field shall be in the range 0 ..255. Change takes effect: New connections IuBcLink sourceIpAddressValidation TRUE(1) Indicates if the

    source IP address shall be validated when the CBC establishes a connection.When set to TRUE, only a source IP address equal to cbcIpAddress is accepted. Change takes effect: New connections IubDataStreams IubDataStreamsId IubDataStreams maxHsRate 15 Maximum HSDPA bit rate over Iub. Unit: 0.1 Mbps Requirement: DFCA3_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:03989 Rev. A Ref. [CB_MOP] IubDataStreams noOfCommonStreams The total number of comm on data streams and HS-DSCH data streams allocated in the RBS. Ref. [CB_DCC] IubDataStreams noOfDedicatedStreams Total number of DCH data streams allocated in the RBS. Ref. [CB_DCC] IubDataStreams activeRdbtRbsMeasurements Array with all a ctive HSDPA RDBT Measurements on this MO. Measurement types for this attribute a re 35, 36, 38..42, 45, 46, 55 and 56. Up to 11 measurements can be active. Undef ined value: 0 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] IubDataStreams hsDataFrameDelayThreshold 60 Defines the maxi mum transport network buffer build-up delay, the dynamic delay. A measured dynam ic delay above this limit is interpreted as an Iub congestion detection occuranc e. Unit: 1 ms Requirement: DFCA3_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:03988 rev A Ref. [CB_MOP] IubDataStreams schHsFlowControlOnOff 0 Flow control status; act ivated (ON) or deactivated (OFF) for each scheduling priority class (first value in the sequence is for scheduling priority class 0). Requirement: HSCH_AD_RBS-O SS_6011:02265 Rev. A Ref. [CB_MOP] IubEdch IubEdchId IubEdch userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance. The value is not used by the RNC. IubEdch edchDataFrameDelayThreshold 60 Maximum dynamic delay (b uffer build-ups over Iub, including the node's ET boards) that the E-DCH data fr ames can have without being detected as a dynamic delay Iub congestion.Unit: ms IubLink iubLinkNodeBFunction Reference to related NodeBFuncti on instance FDN according to [9] and [20]. For CORBA users, GenericNRIRPSystem:: AttributeTypes::MOReference, IubLink IubLinkId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. IubLink operationalState The operational state of the Iub . IubLink availabilityStatus The availability status of the I ub. More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9, bit 10 o IubLink userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. IubLink rbsId Iub connection identity.The value of this attrib ute should be unique within the RNC. This value is not used by the RNC. It is us ed in OSS-RC for correlation between RNC and RBS. IubLink tpcPattern01CountDl 8 Downlink TPC pattern transmitted for the first RLS, until uplink initial synchronization is achieved. This param eter is used for the NBAP cell setup message. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Dependencies:Changing this attribute may IubLink rncModuleRef Reference to the RncModule that it belon gs to. IubLink reservedBy Sequence of UtranCell MO references.Indi cates all of the UTRAN cells that are associated with the RBS represented by thi s IubLink. When a new UtranCell MO is created with its iubLinkRef attribute set to refer to this IubLink, the system will automatically IubLink dlHwAdm 100 Admission limit on RBS downlink hardware resourc e utilization, applicable to all admission requests. Special values: Setting dlH wAdm to 100 % will disable the downlink hardware admission policy. Unit: % Chang e takes effect: Immediately IubLink ulHwAdm Admission limit on RBS uplink hardware resource utilization, applicable to all admission requests. Special values: Setting ulHwA

    dm to 100 % will disable the uplink hardware admission policy. Unit: % Change ta kes effect: Immediately IubLink atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef Reference to the Subrack MO that represents the subrack where the ATM user plane termination of the Iub link is located, and from which the Iub link should preferably be controlled. Th e Iub link control location should be selected to minimize inter-subrac IubLink switchModuleNumber Number of the switch module refe rred to by IubLink::atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef.This attribute may only be used b y Ericsson personnel. Special values: -1: indicates that IubLink::atmUserPlaneTe rmSubrackRef is empty. Dependencies:This attribute is not used IubLink userPlaneTransportOption User plane transport opt ion for the Iub interface.At least one of the flags must be set to TRUE. If both flags are set to TRUE (meaning dual stack is configured), but the dual stack fe ature has not been activated, then ATM will be used as the transport op IubLink userPlaneIpResourceRef Local user plane IP resource(s) available for the Iub interface. Dependencies:This attribute must contain a vali d reference if userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 = TRUE. IubLink administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the Iub link. IubLink controlPlaneTransportOption Transport option for the NBAP signaling bearers for this IubLink instance.One and only one of the flags must be set to TRUE. Dependencies:This attribute should not be changed in the sa me transaction as atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef. This IubLink must be lock IubLink remoteCpIpAddress1 Primary identifier for the contr ol plane IP host of the RBS. Contains either the domain name or the IP address o f the control plane IP host. For a domain name, the input format is a series of alphanumeric characters, hyphens and periods. Hyphens and perio IubLink remoteCpIpAddress2 Secondary identifier for the con trol plane IP host of the RBS. Contains either the domain name or the IP address of the control plane IP host. Only used if the RBS is multi-homed. For a domain name, the input format is a series of alphanumeric characters, IubLink sctpRef Reference to the Sctp instance used.Dependencies : Only used if controlPlaneTransportOption.ipv4=TRUE. IubLink remoteSctpPortNbapC 0 Remote port SCTP port number use d for establishing the SCTP association with the RBS for NBAP Common. Dependenci es: Only used if controlPlaneTransportOption.ipv4=TRUE. IubLink remoteSctpPortNbapD 0 Remote port SCTP port number use d for establishing the SCTP association with the RBS for NBAP Dedicated. Depende ncies: Only used if controlPlaneTransportOption.ipv4=TRUE. IubLink l2EstReqRetryTimeNbapC 5 Time between successive attempts to establish layer 2 signaling bearers for NBAP Common. Unit: s Change takes ef fect: Immediately IubLink l2EstReqRetryTimeNbapD 5 Time between successive attempts to establish layer 2 signaling bearers for NBAP Dedicated. Unit: s Change takes effect: Immediately IubLink cachedRemoteCpIpAddress1 Latest IP address receiv ed from the DNS, when remoteCpIpaddress1 is set to a domain name. Before a value is received from the DNS, the value of this attribute is (empty string). Depen dencies: Set to an empty string when remoteCpIpaddress1 is changed, e IubLink cachedRemoteCpIpAddress2 Latest IP address receiv ed from the DNS, when remoteCpIpaddress2 is set to a domain name. Before a value is received from the DNS, the value of this attribute is (empty string). Depen dencies: Set to an empty string when remoteCpIpaddress2 is changed, e IubLink spare 0 Spare attribute. It is intended for temporary so lutions and its usage may vary depending on RNC release. IubLink userPlaneGbrAdmEnabled 0 Activates the Iub GBR admission control feature for GBR transport bearers. The GBR transport bearers affected by this feature are: - Conversational transport bearers - Streaming transport bear ers - Transport bearers for RRC connection setup - All Common ( IubLink userPlaneGbrAdmBandwidthDl 0 Amount of downlink trans

    mission bandwidth on this IubLink that is reserved for GBR transport bearers, wh en the Iub GBR admission control feature is active. The bandwith for IP transpor t includes UDP/IP/Ethernet overhead; likewise, the bandwidth for ATM tr IubLink userPlaneGbrAdmBandwidthUl 0 Amount of uplink transmi ssion bandwidth on this IubLink that is reserved for GBR transport bearers, when the Iub GBR admission control feature is active. The bandwith for IP transport includes UDP/IP/Ethernet overhead; likewise, the bandwidth for ATM tran IubLink userPlaneGbrAdmMarginDl 0 Margin to which this Iub link is over- or underbooked in the downlink, when the Iub GBR admission control featur e is active. Expressed relative to the value of userPlaneGbrAdmBandwidthDl. This value is used by TN Connection Admission Control to calculate IubLink userPlaneGbrAdmMarginUl 0 Margin to which this Iub link is over- or underbooked in the uplink, when the Iub GBR admission control feature is active. Expressed relative to the value of userPlaneGbrAdmBandwidthUl. This v alue is used by TN Connection Admission Control to calculate th IubLink softCongThreshGbrBwUl 0 Uplink soft congestion threshold in percent of the configured Iub bandwidth (userPlaneGbrAdmBandwidthUl includin g userPlaneGbrAdmMarginUl).Unit: % Change takes effect: New connections IubLink softCongThreshGbrBwDl 0 Downlink soft congestion thresho ld in percent of the configured Iub bandwidth (userPlaneGbrAdmBandwidthDl includ ing userPlaneGbrAdmMarginDl). Unit: % Change takes effect: New connections IubLink controlPlaneTransportOption.atm Controls if ATM is enabl ed in the transport layer. IubLink controlPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 Controls if IPv4 is enabled in the transport layer. IubLink userPlaneTransportOption.atm Controls if ATM is enabl ed in the transport layer. IubLink userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 Controls if IPv4is enabl ed in the transport layer. IuLink IuLinkId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. IuLink userPlaneTransportOption User plane transport opt ion for this IuLink.At least one of the flags must be set to TRUE. Dependencies: If Ranap::cnDomainId = CIRCUIT_SWITCHED and userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 = TRUE , userPlaneIpResourceRef must contain a valid reference. Otherwise, use IuLink userPlaneIpResourceRef Local user plane IP resource(s) available for this IuLink. Dependencies: If Ranap::cnDomainId = CIRCUIT_SWITCHED and userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 = TRUE, userPlaneIpResourceRef must contain a valid reference. Otherwise, userPlaneIpResourceRef is not used IuLink packetDataRouterRef List of references to the instan ces of MO PacketDataRouter or MO IpEthPacketDataRouter that may be selected when establishing a PS connection to the CN node represented by this IuLink. Used to control which PDR devices can be used for PS traffic towards t IuLink userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance. The value is not used by the RNC. IuLink atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef Reference to the Subrack MO that represents the subrack where the ATM user plane termination of the IuLi nk is located. Dependencies:If userPlaneTransportOption.atm = FALSE or RncFuncti on::intraNodeIpResourceRef is empty, this attribute is not used. IuLink switchModuleNumber Number of the switch module refe rred to by IuLink::atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef. This attribute may only be used b y Ericsson personnel. Special values: -1: indicates that IubLink::atmUserPlaneTe rmSubrackRef is empty. Dependencies:This attribute is not used IuLink spare 0 Spare attribute. It is intended for temporary so lutions and its usage may vary depending on RNC release. IuLink userPlaneTransportOption.atm Controls if ATM is enabl ed in the transport layer. IuLink userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 Controls if IPv4is enabl ed in the transport layer. IurLink IurLinkId Naming attribute.Contains the value part

    of the RDN. IurLink userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. IurLink mnc 0 Note: This attribute is currently not used as MN C (Mobile Network Code) by the RNC. It is used to control whether the RNSAP IE U nidirectional DCH Indicator is supported or not. The attribute will be completel y removed in a later MOM release. When this att IurLink rncId RNC identity used in the external RNC which the IurLink instance is connected to. The RNC identity is a part of the RNTI.The val ue of this attribute should be unique within the RNC. IurLink synchTimeout 2 DL/UL Synchronization control frame time out value. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: 100 ms IurLink synchRetransmissions 2 Number of re-transmissions when sending a DL/UL Synchronization control frame. This attribute may only be change d by Ericsson personnel. IurLink utranNetworkRef Reference to the UTRAN network to which this Iur link belongs. IurLink userPlaneTransportOption User plane transport opt ion for the Iur interface. One and only one of the flags have to be set to TRUE. Dependencies:If userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 is TRUE then userPlaneIpResourceRe f is mandatory.Change takes effect: Connection on a new transport beare IurLink userPlaneIpResourceRef Local user plane IP resource(s) available for the Iur interface. Setting reference to local user plane IP resour ces is mandatory if userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 is TRUE. IurLink cellCapabilityControl Controls the cell capabilities u sed when the external RNC represented by this IurLink acts as DRNC. These flags override the value of cellCapability for the ExternalUtranCells under this IurLi nk. IurLink hspaPathlossThreshold 170 Maximum pathloss threshold allow ed for inter-RNS EUL&HS Serving cell selection to validate coverage related, tar get cell, for selection. Unit: dB IurLink srncPmReporting OFF(0) Used to turn Iur Observability on/off on a per Iur link basis. Controls if pm information for drifting UEs is reported f rom SRNC to DRNC or not IurLink iurArpGuaranteed 3 ARP priority level to be used fo r guaranteed rate services originating over Iur when 'no priority' is received i n the RNSAP message. Change takes effect: New connections IurLink iurArpNonguaranteed 8 ARP priority level to be used fo r non-guaranteed rate services originating over Iur when 'no priority' is receiv ed in the RNSAP message. Change takes effect: New connections IurLink edchDataFrameDelayThreshold 60 Maximum dynamic delay th at E-DCH MAC-es flows sent from RBS (over Iub) to RNC via Iur can have, without being detected as an Iur hard congestion.Soft congestion detections use the same threshold, but with a hardcoded factor, which gives a threshold that i IurLink maxMacdPduSizeExtended 1504 Maximum size of flexible MAC-d P DUs used by the Enhanced Layer 2 feature. Dependencies: The MAC-d PDU will have the maximum length defined by the minimum of the parameter and the system value for the RAB. Setting this parameter to a value smaller than the IurLink atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef Reference to the Subrack Managed Object that represents the subrack where the ATM user plane termination of the IurLink is located.Dependencies: If userPlaneTransportOption.atm = FALSE or RncFunction::intraNodeIpResourceRef is empty, this attribute is not IurLink switchModuleNumber Number of the switch module refe rred to by IurLink::atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef. The value of -1 corresponds to t hat the IurLink::atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef is empty. This attribute may only be used by Ericsson personnel. IurLink spare 0 Spare attribute. It is intended for temporary so lutions and its usage may vary depending on RNC release. IurLink ganHoEnabled 0 Indicates if GAN Handover is enabled ove

    r this Iur link.Dependencies: Not used if the license ganMobility is not active. Change takes effect: At next evaluation of conditions for allowing a GAN measur ement IurLink cellCapabilityControl.cpcSupport OFF(0) Capability infor mation indicating if CPC is supported in the cell. Change takes effect: New conn ection IurLink cellCapabilityControl.edchSupport 0 Capability infor mation indicating if EUL is supported in the cell IurLink cellCapabilityControl.edchTti2Support 0 Capability infor mation indicating if 2 ms TTI EUL is supported in the cell IurLink cellCapabilityControl.enhancedL2Support 0 Indicates whethe r Enhanced Layer 2 is supported or not. IurLink cellCapabilityControl.fdpchSupport OFF(0) Capability infor mation indicating if F-DPCH is supported in the external utran cell or the DRNC. IurLink cellCapabilityControl.hsdschSupport 0 Capability infor mation indicating if HS is supported in the cell. IurLink userPlaneTransportOption.atm Controls if ATM is enabl ed in the transport layer. IurLink userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 Controls if IPv4is enabl ed in the transport layer. J1PhysPathTerm J1PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. J1PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. J1PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. J1PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. J1PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. J1PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state . J1PhysPathTerm physicalLineType 0 Indicates the supported physical line interface. J1PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. J1PhysPathTerm degThreshold 0 Specifies the Bit Error Rate (BE R) threshold for the Degraded Signal (DEG) alarm. The value of this attribute gi ves a BER of 10 raised to the power of -X, where X is the value of degThreshold. If the threshold is exceeded, a Degraded Signal (DEG) alarm is J1PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. J1PhysPathTerm idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a t imeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both J1PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. J1PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false reporting disabled. J1PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s J1PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. J1PhysPathTerm reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaL ink MO that reserves this MO instance. J1PhysPathTerm J1PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN.

    J1PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. J1PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. J1PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. J1PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. J1PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state . J1PhysPathTerm physicalLineType 0 Indicates the supported physical line interface. J1PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. J1PhysPathTerm degThreshold 0 Specifies the Bit Error Rate (BE R) threshold for the Degraded Signal (DEG) alarm. The value of this attribute gi ves a BER of 10 raised to the power of -X, where X is the value of degThreshold. If the threshold is exceeded, a Degraded Signal (DEG) alarm is J1PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. J1PhysPathTerm idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a t imeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both J1PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. J1PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false reporting disabled. J1PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s J1PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. J1PhysPathTerm reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaL ink MO that reserves this MO instance. J1PhysPathTerm J1PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. J1PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. J1PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. J1PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. J1PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. J1PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state . J1PhysPathTerm physicalLineType 0 Indicates the supported physical line interface. J1PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. J1PhysPathTerm degThreshold 0 Specifies the Bit Error Rate (BE R) threshold for the Degraded Signal (DEG) alarm. The value of this attribute gi ves a BER of 10 raised to the power of -X, where X is the value of degThreshold. If the threshold is exceeded, a Degraded Signal (DEG) alarm is J1PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. J1PhysPathTerm idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a t imeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both J1PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH

    Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. J1PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false reporting disabled. J1PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s J1PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. J1PhysPathTerm reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaL ink MO that reserves this MO instance. Jvm JvmId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. Jvm userLabel Label for free use. Jvm classpath The current classpath that the JVM is us ing. Jvm admClasspath New classpath that is activated at next restart of JVM. The classpath has a directory, which contains the load module, t hat is the classpath references the load module. Jvm freeMemory 0 The free memory in the java machine. Bef ore this value is read from the system, the action garbageCollect is invoked. Un it: 1 B Jvm totalMemory 0 The total amount of memory allocated to the java machine. Unit: 1 B Jvm mopplets Contains all classes that are to be init ialized and started when the JVM restarts. Technical note: The specified classes must implement the se.ericsson.cello.moframework.Mopplet interface and be found in a jar/zip-file pointed out by the classpath. Jvm main Specifies the start class name. For example: se. ericsson.cello.oms.Oms. Jvm options Current options: -D<property>=<value>Set a syste m property value. Commonly java.class.path -Xms<size>Specify the size, in bytes, of the memory allocation pool. -Xss<size> Set thread stack size in bytes. -Xver ify:[all | remote | none]Verify classes accordi Jvm properties Specifies the current system properties. Jvm reliableProgramUniter Contains a reference to the Reli ableProgramUniter MO that refers to the programs where the JVM executes. Jvm admMain New start class that is activated at next restar t of the JVM. For example: se.ericsson.cello.oms.Oms. Jvm admOptions This attribute is used when setting one or more administrative options. A set option is operational after the next Java Machine restart. One or more options can be set, one option in each string of th e sequence according to description in the attribute op Jvm reservedBySwAllocation Contains the SwAllocation instan ce that reserves this MO instance. Restriction: This MO instance can be reserved by only one instance of SwAllocation. Jvm JvmId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. Jvm userLabel Label for free use. Jvm classpath The current classpath that the JVM is us ing. Jvm admClasspath New classpath that is activated at next restart of JVM. The classpath has a directory, which contains the load module, t hat is the classpath references the load module. Jvm freeMemory 0 The free memory in the java machine. Bef ore this value is read from the system, the action garbageCollect is invoked. Un it: 1 B Jvm totalMemory 0 The total amount of memory allocated to the java machine. Unit: 1 B

    Jvm mopplets Contains all classes that are to be init ialized and started when the JVM restarts. Technical note: The specified classes must implement the se.ericsson.cello.moframework.Mopplet interface and be found in a jar/zip-file pointed out by the classpath. Jvm main Specifies the start class name. For example: se. ericsson.cello.oms.Oms. Jvm options Current options: -D<property>=<value>Set a syste m property value. Commonly java.class.path -Xms<size>Specify the size, in bytes, of the memory allocation pool. -Xss<size> Set thread stack size in bytes. -Xver ify:[all | remote | none]Verify classes accordi Jvm properties Specifies the current system properties. Jvm reliableProgramUniter Contains a reference to the Reli ableProgramUniter MO that refers to the programs where the JVM executes. Jvm admMain New start class that is activated at next restar t of the JVM. For example: se.ericsson.cello.oms.Oms. Jvm admOptions This attribute is used when setting one or more administrative options. A set option is operational after the next Java Machine restart. One or more options can be set, one option in each string of th e sequence according to description in the attribute op Jvm reservedBySwAllocation Contains the SwAllocation instan ce that reserves this MO instance. Restriction: This MO instance can be reserved by only one instance of SwAllocation. Jvm JvmId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. Jvm classpath The current classpath that the JVM is us ing. Jvm admClasspath New classpath that is activated at next restart of JVM. The classpath has a directory, which contains the load module, t hat is the classpath references the load module. Jvm freeMemory 0 The free memory in the java machine. Bef ore this value is read from the system, the action garbageCollect is invoked. Un it: 1 B Jvm totalMemory 0 The total amount of memory allocated to the java machine. Unit: 1 B Jvm mopplets Contains all classes that are to be init ialized and started when the JVM restarts. Technical note: The specified classes must implement the se.ericsson.cello.moframework.Mopplet interface and be found in a jar/zip-file pointed out by the classpath. Jvm main Specifies the start class name. For example: se. ericsson.cello.oms.Oms. Jvm options Current options: -D<property>=<value>Set a syste m property value. Commonly java.class.path -Xms<size>Specify the size, in bytes, of the memory allocation pool. -Xss<size> Set thread stack size in bytes. -Xver ify:[all | remote | none]Verify classes accordi Jvm properties Specifies the current system properties. Jvm reliableProgramUniter Contains a reference to the Reli ableProgramUniter MO that refers to the programs where the JVM executes. Jvm admMain New start class that is activated at next restar t of the JVM. For example: se.ericsson.cello.oms.Oms. Jvm admOptions This attribute is used when setting one or more administrative options. A set option is operational after the next Java Machine restart. One or more options can be set, one option in each string of th e sequence according to description in the attribute op Jvm reservedBySwAllocation Contains the SwAllocation instan ce that reserves this MO instance. Restriction: This MO instance can be reserved by only one instance of SwAllocation. Licensing LicensingId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Licensing userLabel Label for free use. Licensing emergencyStateInfo Specifies information ab

    out the emergency status and the time remaining in the current state. If the nod e is in emergency state USE_DEGRADED or USE_DISABLED, the the value of the struc t attribute time is insignificant. Licensing licenseFileUrl This attribute returns the URL t o the License Key File so it can be viewed with an XML capable web browser in ca se this is a licensed node. In case the node is not licensed, an empty string is returned. Licensing fingerprint The fingerprint of the node. Licensing emergencyStateInfo.state 0 The current emer gency state of the license server. Licensing emergencyStateInfo.time 0 Indicates the remaining time in state ACTIVE or ACTIVE_AGAIN. The time out values for the states ACTIVE and ACTIVE_AGAIN is 7 days. The time out value is 0 when the state is NEVER_USED , USE_DEGRADED and USE_DISABLED. 1 day = 86400 s 7 days = 604800 s Unit Licensing LicensingId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Licensing userLabel Label for free use. Licensing emergencyStateInfo Specifies information ab out the emergency status and the time remaining in the current state. If the nod e is in emergency state USE_DEGRADED or USE_DISABLED, the the value of the struc t attribute time is insignificant. Licensing licenseFileUrl This attribute returns the URL t o the License Key File so it can be viewed with an XML capable web browser in ca se this is a licensed node. In case the node is not licensed, an empty string is returned. Licensing fingerprint The fingerprint of the node. Licensing emergencyStateInfo.state 0 The current emer gency state of the license server. Licensing emergencyStateInfo.time 0 Indicates the remaining time in state ACTIVE or ACTIVE_AGAIN. The time out values for the states ACTIVE and ACTIVE_AGAIN is 7 days. The time out value is 0 when the state is NEVER_USED , USE_DEGRADED and USE_DISABLED. 1 day = 86400 s 7 days = 604800 s Unit Licensing LicensingId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Licensing userLabel Label for free use. Licensing emergencyStateInfo Specifies information ab out the emergency status and the time remaining in the current state. If the nod e is in emergency state USE_DEGRADED or USE_DISABLED, the the value of the struc t attribute time is insignificant. Licensing licenseFileUrl This attribute returns the URL t o the License Key File so it can be viewed with an XML capable web browser in ca se this is a licensed node. In case the node is not licensed, an empty string is returned. Licensing fingerprint The fingerprint of the node. Licensing emergencyStateInfo.state 0 The current emer gency state of the license server. Licensing emergencyStateInfo.time 0 Indicates the remaining time in state ACTIVE or ACTIVE_AGAIN. The time out values for the states ACTIVE and ACTIVE_AGAIN is 7 days. The time out value is 0 when the state is NEVER_USED , USE_DEGRADED and USE_DISABLED. 1 day = 86400 s 7 days = 604800 s Unit Link LinkId Link userLabel Link linkType LoadControl LoadControlId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. LoadModule LoadModuleId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. LoadModule productData Product information data. LoadModule loadModuleFilePath Specifies the path to th is load module in the file system, including the file name. Example: /c/load_mod

    ules/CXC112874R1A01, where /c/load_modules/ is the directory, and CXC112874R1A01 is the file name. LoadModule loaderType 0 Specifies the type of the progra m loader. This is the LoaderName in the UCF. LoadModule otherLoaderName The name of the load module, wit h loaderType = OTHER. LoadModule preLoad 0 Enables faster loading at restart of pro grams referring to this load module if preLoad = MUST. Recommended: Cache this l oad module close to where its program(s) execute(s), for example, in a flash fil e system. LoadModule fileFormat The file format. Example: RPDOUT , html, java, fpga LoadModule oseProgramLoadClass 0 Specifies in which load phase, programs of this load module is started. If the LoadModule MO is a Java a rchive file (.jar), it will be loaded in the load phase of the Java machine rath er than according to its own oseProgramLoadClass. LoadModule reliableProgramLabel Reliable program identit y. Compare this label to the reliableProgramLabel in ReliableProgramUniter MO. LoadModule isDirectory 0 Specifies if the load module is a file or a directory. LoadModule oseProgramPoolSize 0 Specifies the Program po ol size. The LoadModule MO has a default size defined at compile time. This valu e is used if no other value is submitted when the LoadModule MO is created. This value is fetched by the Program MO and used if no other value is submi LoadModule oseProgramHeapSize 0 Sets the Program heap si ze. The LoadModule MO has a default size defined at compile time. This value is used if no other value is submitted when the LoadModule MO is created. This valu e is fetched by the Program MO and used if no other value is submitted, LoadModule programMustBeSingleton 0 Indicates if the (OSE) p rogram must be a Singleton, or not. LoadModule moppletEntries Contains all classes that are to be initialized and started when the JVM restarts. The class name must specify t he full package and class name in standard Java syntax. Example: se.ericsson.cel lo.X The interface, se.ericsson.cello.moframework.Mopplet, must LoadModule reservedByUpgradePackage 0 Indicates if thi s MO is reserved by the UpgradePackage MO or not. LoadModule fileState Specifies if the load module fil e(s) is installed or not. LoadModule deviceLoaderInformation If loaderType is set to DEVICE_LOADER, this attribute can have a value. It is transferred to the device loader. LoadModule deviceLoaderName If loaderType is set to DEVICE_LOADER, this attribute must have a value. LoadModule funcId Specifies the functionality identity giv en in the UCF file. For use by Ericsson staff only. LoadModule productData.productInfo Information about the pr oduct. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlimited). LoadModule productData.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage , LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. LoadModule productData.productNumber The product numb er of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu LoadModule productData.productRevision The revision sta te of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandato ry for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subra ck and SubrackProdType. LoadModule productData.productionDate The production d ate is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the ye

    ar, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight chara cters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th LoadModule LoadModuleId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. LoadModule productData Product information data. LoadModule loadModuleFilePath Specifies the path to th is load module in the file system, including the file name. Example: /c/load_mod ules/CXC112874R1A01, where /c/load_modules/ is the directory, and CXC112874R1A01 is the file name. LoadModule loaderType 0 Specifies the type of the progra m loader. This is the LoaderName in the UCF. LoadModule otherLoaderName The name of the load module, wit h loaderType = OTHER. LoadModule preLoad 0 Enables faster loading at restart of pro grams referring to this load module if preLoad = MUST. Recommended: Cache this l oad module close to where its program(s) execute(s), for example, in a flash fil e system. LoadModule fileFormat The file format. Example: RPDOUT , html, java, fpga LoadModule oseProgramLoadClass 0 Specifies in which load phase, programs of this load module is started. If the LoadModule MO is a Java a rchive file (.jar), it will be loaded in the load phase of the Java machine rath er than according to its own oseProgramLoadClass. LoadModule reliableProgramLabel Reliable program identit y. Compare this label to the reliableProgramLabel in ReliableProgramUniter MO. LoadModule isDirectory 0 Specifies if the load module is a file or a directory. LoadModule oseProgramPoolSize 0 Specifies the Program po ol size. The LoadModule MO has a default size defined at compile time. This valu e is used if no other value is submitted when the LoadModule MO is created. This value is fetched by the Program MO and used if no other value is submi LoadModule oseProgramHeapSize 0 Sets the Program heap si ze. The LoadModule MO has a default size defined at compile time. This value is used if no other value is submitted when the LoadModule MO is created. This valu e is fetched by the Program MO and used if no other value is submitted, LoadModule programMustBeSingleton 0 Indicates if the (OSE) p rogram must be a Singleton, or not. LoadModule moppletEntries Contains all classes that are to be initialized and started when the JVM restarts. The class name must specify t he full package and class name in standard Java syntax. Example: se.ericsson.cel lo.X The interface, se.ericsson.cello.moframework.Mopplet, must LoadModule reservedByUpgradePackage 0 Indicates if thi s MO is reserved by the UpgradePackage MO or not. LoadModule fileState Specifies if the load module fil e(s) is installed or not. LoadModule deviceLoaderInformation If loaderType is set to DEVICE_LOADER, this attribute can have a value. It is transferred to the device loader. LoadModule deviceLoaderName If loaderType is set to DEVICE_LOADER, this attribute must have a value. LoadModule funcId Specifies the functionality identity giv en in the UCF file. For use by Ericsson staff only. LoadModule productData.productInfo Information about the pr oduct. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlimited). LoadModule productData.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage , LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. LoadModule productData.productNumber The product numb er of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum

    length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu LoadModule productData.productRevision The revision sta te of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandato ry for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subra ck and SubrackProdType. LoadModule productData.productionDate The production d ate is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the ye ar, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight chara cters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th LoadModule LoadModuleId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. LoadModule productData Product information data. LoadModule loadModuleFilePath Specifies the path to th is load module in the file system, including the file name. Example: /c/load_mod ules/CXC112874R1A01, where /c/load_modules/ is the directory, and CXC112874R1A01 is the file name. LoadModule loaderType 0 Specifies the type of the progra m loader. This is the LoaderName in the UCF. LoadModule otherLoaderName The name of the load module, wit h loaderType = OTHER. LoadModule preLoad 0 Enables faster loading at restart of pro grams referring to this load module if preLoad = MUST. Recommended: Cache this l oad module close to where its program(s) execute(s), for example, in a flash fil e system. LoadModule fileFormat The file format. Example: RPDOUT , html, java, fpga LoadModule oseProgramLoadClass 0 Specifies in which load phase, programs of this load module is started. If the LoadModule MO is a Java a rchive file (.jar), it will be loaded in the load phase of the Java machine rath er than according to its own oseProgramLoadClass. LoadModule reliableProgramLabel Reliable program identit y. Compare this label to the reliableProgramLabel in ReliableProgramUniter MO. LoadModule isDirectory 0 Specifies if the load module is a file or a directory. LoadModule oseProgramPoolSize 0 Specifies the Program po ol size. The LoadModule MO has a default size defined at compile time. This valu e is used if no other value is submitted when the LoadModule MO is created. This value is fetched by the Program MO and used if no other value is submi LoadModule oseProgramHeapSize 0 Sets the Program heap si ze. The LoadModule MO has a default size defined at compile time. This value is used if no other value is submitted when the LoadModule MO is created. This valu e is fetched by the Program MO and used if no other value is submitted, LoadModule programMustBeSingleton 0 Indicates if the (OSE) p rogram must be a Singleton, or not. LoadModule moppletEntries Contains all classes that are to be initialized and started when the JVM restarts. The class name must specify t he full package and class name in standard Java syntax. Example: se.ericsson.cel lo.X The interface, se.ericsson.cello.moframework.Mopplet, must LoadModule reservedByUpgradePackage 0 Indicates if thi s MO is reserved by the UpgradePackage MO or not. LoadModule fileState Specifies if the load module fil e(s) is installed or not. LoadModule deviceLoaderInformation If loaderType is set to DEVICE_LOADER, this attribute can have a value. It is transferred to the device loader. LoadModule deviceLoaderName If loaderType is set to DEVICE_LOADER, this attribute must have a value. LoadModule funcId Specifies the functionality identity giv en in the UCF file. For use by Ericsson staff only. LoadModule productData.productInfo Information about the pr

    oduct. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlimited). LoadModule productData.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage , LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. LoadModule productData.productNumber The product numb er of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu LoadModule productData.productRevision The revision sta te of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandato ry for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subra ck and SubrackProdType. LoadModule productData.productionDate The production d ate is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the ye ar, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight chara cters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th LocationArea LocationAreaId LocationArea userLabel Location Area name CMS Ref. LocationArea lac Location Area code LocationArea t3212 0 Periodic time for LA update 0..255 CMS R ef. LocationArea att 0 ATT is a flag for attach/detach allowed or not. Some IMSI's are not allowed in some LA's. FALSE = 0 (IMSI attach not all owed) TRUE = 1 LocationArea LocationAreaId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system. LocationArea userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. LocationArea lac Location Area Code. This value must be u nique in the RNC, meaning that each Location Area Code value can be assigned to only one instance of the MO Class LocationArea. Changing this parameter can caus e a mismatch between CN configuration and UTRAN configu LocationArea t3212 10 Periodic update timer for LA update. Spe cial values: 0 means infinite time (not active). Unit: 0.1 h (6 min) LocationArea att TRUE(1) Indicates to the UE whether IMSI attach/ detach is allowed.(Some IMSIs are not allowed in some LAs.) This helps to facili tate the avoidance of unnecessary paging attempts. The value is sent on the BCCH . Value mapping: FALSE: IMSI attach not allowed TRUE: I LocationArea reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to this MO.See reference in UtranCell. Log logSize The maximum size of the log file. Unit: 1B Log logFilePath Destination file path on the log file se rver. Log logName The name of the log. It must be included in the attribute logs, in the MO LogService. Log accountInfo Account Information Information for the server connection. Log transferData Information about the last file transfer . Log LogId The value component of the RDN. Log userLabel Label for free use. Log transferData.lastSent Date and time when the last file was transferred. The attribute is updated even if the transfer is unsuccessful. Log transferData.transferInformation Information abou t the last file transfer, including information about whether it was successful. Log accountInfo.password Password used for logging in to the remote host (file server). Log accountInfo.remoteHost IP address of the remote host (f ile server). The IP address is specified in dotted notation, for example, 192.16

    8.25.33. Log accountInfo.userID User ID for logging in to the re mote host (file server). Log logSize The maximum size of the log file. Unit: 1B Log logFilePath Destination file path on the log file se rver. Log logName The name of the log. It must be included in the attribute logs, in the MO LogService. Log accountInfo Account Information Information for the server connection. Log transferData Information about the last file transfer . Log LogId The value component of the RDN. Log userLabel Label for free use. Log transferData.lastSent Date and time when the last file was transferred. The attribute is updated even if the transfer is unsuccessful. Log transferData.transferInformation Information abou t the last file transfer, including information about whether it was successful. Log accountInfo.password Password used for logging in to the remote host (file server). Log accountInfo.remoteHost IP address of the remote host (f ile server). The IP address is specified in dotted notation, for example, 192.16 8.25.33. Log accountInfo.userID User ID for logging in to the re mote host (file server). Log logSize The maximum size of the log file. Unit: 1B Log logFilePath Destination file path on the log file se rver. Log logName The name of the log. It must be included in the attribute logs, in the MO LogService. Log accountInfo Account Information Information for the server connection. Log transferData Information about the last file transfer . Log LogId The value component of the RDN. Log userLabel Label for free use. Log transferData.lastSent Date and time when the last file was transferred. The attribute is updated even if the transfer is unsuccessful. Log transferData.transferInformation Information abou t the last file transfer, including information about whether it was successful. Log accountInfo.password Password used for logging in to the remote host (file server). Log accountInfo.remoteHost IP address of the remote host (f ile server). The IP address is specified in dotted notation, for example, 192.16 8.25.33. Log accountInfo.userID User ID for logging in to the re mote host (file server). LogFilter LogFilterId LogFilter userLabel Provides support for a user defi ned label or name upon an object instance level. LogFilter filterParam Configurable parameter types and values. LogFilter filterParam.paramType LogFilter filterParam.paramValue LogService logs List of logs included in this service. LogService LogServiceId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. LogService userLabel Label for free use. LogService logs List of logs included in this service. LogService LogServiceId The value component of the RDN.

    It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. LogService userLabel Label for free use. LogService logs List of logs included in this service. LogService LogServiceId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. LogService userLabel Label for free use. LoPowTxCable aiuConnector Value denoting the connector at the AIU. Possible values: ? LL_OUT_A ? LL_OUT_B Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site R ef. [CB_ECF] LoPowTxCable aiuPlugInUnitRef Reference to the PIU to which the low power TX cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precon dition: The PlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MOs must exist. Ref . [CB_ECF] LoPowTxCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the cable. O nly bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alarm. Spec LoPowTxCable dlAttenuation Electrical attenuation of the ca ble. Specified as 0.1 dB, that is, 10 = 1.0 dB, 36 = 3.6 dB and so on. Use cases : Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 dB Takes effect: At th e next cell setup for the affected cell. User category: Ericsso LoPowTxCable electricalDlDelay Electrical delay of the cable. Example: 103 = 10.3 nanoseconds Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify An tenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affect ed cell. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] LoPowTxCable LoPowTxCableId LoPowTxCable mcpaAuxPlugInUnitRef Reference to the auxilia ry plug-in unit of MCPA. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The AuxPlu gInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MO must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF] LoPowTxCable mcpaConnector Value representing the connector at the Auxiliary plug-in unit of MCPA. Possible values: ? TX_IN Use cases: Scra tch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF] M3uAssociation userLabel Label for free use. M3uAssociation reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. M3uAssociation associationState 0 The state of the M3UA as sociation. Possible values: Bit 1 = 1 indicates INACTIVE Bit 2 = 1 indicates ACT IVE Bit 3 = 1 indicates ESTABLISHED Bit 4 = 1 indicates DOWN These values are mu tually exclusive. M3uAssociation autoStartAssociation TRUE(1) Specifies if the M3UA as sociation is started automatically. Applicable only if the attribute role is set to CLIENT. That is, the M3UA association is never started if its role is SERVER . M3uAssociation dscp 0 The DSCP, Differentiated Services Code P oint, for the internal M3UA user, to use for signaling traffic in the IP network . The DSCP value must be the same for all M3UA associations sharing the same SCT P host and local port number. This means that if dscp=1 M3uAssociation localIpMask 0 The homing state of the local SC TP endpoint of the M3UA association. Specifies whether single- or multi-homing i s used. If set to SINGLE_HOMED_1, the attributes ipAddress1 or autoConfigIdentit y in the IpAccessHostGpb MO must be defined. If set to SINGLE_H M3uAssociation localPortNumber 0 The port number of the local SCT P endpoint of the M3UA association. The SCTP and TCP Registered User Port Number Assignment for M3UA is 2905 according to the standard specification. Specificat ion: RFC 4666 M3uAssociation operationalState The operational state. T he operational state is ENABLED, if the signalling process represented by this M O is in state ASP-ACTIVE. That is, the attribute associationState is ACTIVE. M3uAssociation M3uAssociationId The value component of t he RDN.

    M3uAssociation mtp3bSrsId Reference to an instance of Mtp3 bSrs, specifying the adjacent node of the M3UA association. M3uAssociation remoteIpAddress1 The remote IP address 1. This address is considered as the primary IP address. In case the association e stablishment attempt fails when using this IP address, the remote IP address 2 w ill be used for the next attempt. The range is 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.25 M3uAssociation remoteIpAddress2 The remote IP address 2. In case the association establishment attempt fails when using this IP address, the remote IP address 1 will be used for the next attempt. The range is 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255. If set to , it means that the IP address is not s M3uAssociation remotePortNumber 0 The port number of the r emote SCTP endpoint of the M3UA association. If the role of the M3UA association is set to SERVER, association establishment requests are accepted from any remo te port number. In this case, this attribute is not used and can be set M3uAssociation role CLIENT(0) Indicates if the association is to operate as CLIENT or SERVER. The ASP messaging will be set to ON for a CLIENT and to OFF for a SERVER. If the role is set to CLIENT, the association operates as CLIENT-PEER. That is, it acts as CLIENT, but accepts if the M3uAssociation sctpId Reference to an instance of Sctp MO, whi ch represents the SCTP host. To set this attribute, the attribute ipAccessHostGp bId in the Sctp MO must contain a value. M3uAssociation congestionAlarmThreshold 50 Specifies the ac cumulated time limit the M3UA association is allowed to be congested before an a larm is issued. If set to 0, the alarm is issued immediately. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second) ManagedElement dnPrefix DN prefix information. Specified only if the instance of the ManagedElement MO is a local root instance of the M IB, otherwise it is set to NULL, ManagedElement managedElementType Type of ManagedElement i .e RNC, NodeB seeand RANAG (Ericsson specific). Note: For CORBA users, GenericNR IRPSystem::AttributeTypes::StringSet, ManagedElement vendorName 0 Name of the ManagedElement vendo r i.e. Ericsson. ManagedElement locationName The physical location of this en tity (e.g. an address) This attribute is mapped to ManagedElement.site in Cello MIB. ManagedElement userDefinedState Operator defined state f or operator specific use. ManagedElement swVersion The software version of the Mana ged Node. Retrieved from ConfigurationVersion.currentUpgradePackage(UpgradePacka ge.administrativeData) in Cello MO_s. Concatenation of productNumber and product Revision in AdminProductData MO. ManagedElement managedBy The management node that manages this NE. Full Distinguished Name of the ManagementNode according to [9] and [20 ]. Note: For CORBA users, GenericNRIRPSystem::AttributeTypes::MOReferenceSet, ManagedElement sourceType 0 Information about on what platfo rm the network element is running on, i.e. Cello, AXE ManagedElement release 0 Denotes the latest release which this ma naged element supports, e.g. W10.1 ManagedElement siteRef FDN of the Site MO instance this Managed Element belongs to ManagedElement dnPrefix DN prefix information. Specified only if the instance of the ManagedElement MO is a local root instance of the M IB, otherwise it is set to NULL, ManagedElement managedElementType Type of ManagedElement i .e RNC, NodeB seeand RANAG (Ericsson specific). Note: For CORBA users, GenericNR IRPSystem::AttributeTypes::StringSet, ManagedElement vendorName 0 Name of the ManagedElement vendo r i.e. Ericsson. ManagedElement locationName The physical location of this en

    tity (e.g. an address) This attribute is mapped to ManagedElement.site in Cello MIB. ManagedElement userDefinedState Operator defined state f or operator specific use. ManagedElement swVersion The software version of the Mana ged Node. Retrieved from ConfigurationVersion.currentUpgradePackage(UpgradePacka ge.administrativeData) in Cello MO_s. Concatenation of productNumber and product Revision in AdminProductData MO. ManagedElement managedBy The management node that manages this NE. Full Distinguished Name of the ManagementNode according to [9] and [20 ]. Note: For CORBA users, GenericNRIRPSystem::AttributeTypes::MOReferenceSet, ManagedElement sourceType 0 Information about on what platfo rm the network element is running on, i.e. Cello, AXE ManagedElement release 0 Denotes the latest release which this ma naged element supports, e.g. W10.1 ManagedElement siteRef FDN of the Site MO instance this Managed Element belongs to ManagedElement dnPrefix DN prefix information. Specified only if the instance of the ManagedElement MO is a local root instance of the M IB, otherwise it is set to NULL, ManagedElement managedElementType Type of ManagedElement i .e RNC, NodeB seeand RANAG (Ericsson specific). Note: For CORBA users, GenericNR IRPSystem::AttributeTypes::StringSet, ManagedElement vendorName 0 Name of the ManagedElement vendo r i.e. Ericsson. ManagedElement locationName The physical location of this en tity (e.g. an address) This attribute is mapped to ManagedElement.site in Cello MIB. ManagedElement userDefinedState Operator defined state f or operator specific use. ManagedElement swVersion The software version of the Mana ged Node. Retrieved from ConfigurationVersion.currentUpgradePackage(UpgradePacka ge.administrativeData) in Cello MO_s. Concatenation of productNumber and product Revision in AdminProductData MO. ManagedElement managedBy The management node that manages this NE. Full Distinguished Name of the ManagementNode according to [9] and [20 ]. Note: For CORBA users, GenericNRIRPSystem::AttributeTypes::MOReferenceSet, ManagedElement sourceType 0 Information about on what platfo rm the network element is running on, i.e. Cello, AXE ManagedElement release 0 Denotes the latest release which this ma naged element supports, e.g. W10.1 ManagedElement siteRef FDN of the Site MO instance this Managed Element belongs to ManagedElement ManagedElementId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. ManagedElement userLabel Label for free use. ManagedElement site This attribute gives information about g eographical location, for example place name. ManagedElement logicalName Specifies the logical name of a node. ManagedElement productType 0 This attribute describes the pro duct type and is always set to the value Node. ManagedElement productName This attribute describes the imp lemented functionality. ManagedElement productNumber This attribute uniquely identifi es the product, for example ROF123. ManagedElement productRevision This attribute identifies the ve rsion of the product, for example R2A. ManagedElement mimName Deprecated: Replaced by mimInfo The name and version of the MIM on the node.

    ManagedElement faultTolerantCoreStates Retrieves information of PIUs (maximum 2 PIUs) that are running Fault Tolerant Core (FTC). This attribut e contains an array of strings, for example: ManagedElement=1,Equipment=1,Subrac k=1,Slot=1,PlugInUnit=1;ftcState=Active ManagedElement=1,Equipment=1,Su ManagedElement applicationConfiguration Specifies config uration data critical for an application. ManagedElement mimInfo The name, version and release of the MIM . ManagedElement healthCheckSchedule The scheduled time and w eekday, when the health check starts. Stop the health check by clearing the valu e of this attribute. ManagedElement healthCheckResult The result of the latest health check. ManagedElement applicationConfiguration.name The name of the attribute. ManagedElement applicationConfiguration.value The value of the attribute. ManagedElement mimInfo.mimName ManagedElement mimInfo.mimRelease ManagedElement mimInfo.mimVersion ManagedElement healthCheckResult.healthCheckResultCode The resu lt of the health check. ManagedElement healthCheckResult.message Provides additio nal results. The initial value is an emtpy string (). ManagedElement healthCheckResult.startTime The time the hea lth check starts. Format:yyyy:MM:dd HH:mm The initial value is an empty string ( ). ManagedElement healthCheckSchedule.time The time of the day, when the action startHealthCheck starts. Format: hh:mm hh - hour mm - minut es ManagedElement healthCheckSchedule.weekday The weekday, whe n the action startHealthCheck starts. ManagedElement ManagedElementId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. ManagedElement userLabel Label for free use. ManagedElement site This attribute gives information about g eographical location, for example place name. ManagedElement logicalName Specifies the logical name of a node. ManagedElement productType 0 This attribute describes the pro duct type and is always set to the value Node. ManagedElement productName This attribute describes the imp lemented functionality. ManagedElement productNumber This attribute uniquely identifi es the product, for example ROF123. ManagedElement productRevision This attribute identifies the ve rsion of the product, for example R2A. ManagedElement faultTolerantCoreStates Retrieves information of PIUs (maximum 2 PIUs) that are running Fault Tolerant Core (FTC). This attribut e contains an array of strings, for example: ManagedElement=1,Equipment=1,Subrac k=1,Slot=1,PlugInUnit=1;ftcState=Active ManagedElement=1,Equipment=1,Su ManagedElement applicationConfiguration Specifies config uration data critical for an application. ManagedElement mimInfo The name, version and release of the MIM . ManagedElement healthCheckSchedule The scheduled time and w eekday, when the health check starts. Stop the health check by clearing the valu e of this attribute. ManagedElement healthCheckResult The result of the latest health check.

    ManagedElement applicationConfiguration.name The name of the attribute. ManagedElement applicationConfiguration.value The value of the attribute. ManagedElement mimInfo.mimName ManagedElement mimInfo.mimRelease ManagedElement mimInfo.mimVersion ManagedElement healthCheckResult.healthCheckResultCode The resu lt of the health check. ManagedElement healthCheckResult.message Provides additio nal results. The initial value is an emtpy string (). ManagedElement healthCheckResult.startTime The time the hea lth check starts. Format:yyyy:MM:dd HH:mm The initial value is an empty string ( ). ManagedElement healthCheckSchedule.time The time of the day, when the action startHealthCheck starts. Format: hh:mm hh - hour mm - minut es ManagedElement healthCheckSchedule.weekday The weekday, whe n the action startHealthCheck starts. ManagedElement ManagedElementId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. ManagedElement userLabel Label for free use. ManagedElement site This attribute gives information about g eographical location, for example place name. ManagedElement logicalName Specifies the logical name of a node. ManagedElement productType 0 This attribute describes the pro duct type and is always set to the value Node. ManagedElement productName This attribute describes the imp lemented functionality. ManagedElement productNumber This attribute uniquely identifi es the product, for example ROF123. ManagedElement productRevision This attribute identifies the ve rsion of the product, for example R2A. ManagedElement faultTolerantCoreStates Retrieves information of PIUs (maximum 2 PIUs) that are running Fault Tolerant Core (FTC). This attribut e contains an array of strings, for example: ManagedElement=1,Equipment=1,Subrac k=1,Slot=1,PlugInUnit=1;ftcState=Active ManagedElement=1,Equipment=1,Su ManagedElement applicationConfiguration Specifies config uration data critical for an application. ManagedElement mimInfo The name, version and release of the MIM . ManagedElement healthCheckSchedule The scheduled time and w eekday, when the health check starts. Stop the health check by clearing the valu e of this attribute. ManagedElement healthCheckResult The result of the latest health check. ManagedElement applicationConfiguration.name The name of the attribute. ManagedElement applicationConfiguration.value The value of the attribute. ManagedElement mimInfo.mimName ManagedElement mimInfo.mimRelease ManagedElement mimInfo.mimVersion ManagedElement healthCheckResult.healthCheckResultCode The resu lt of the health check. ManagedElement healthCheckResult.message Provides additio nal results. The initial value is an emtpy string (). ManagedElement healthCheckResult.startTime The time the hea lth check starts. Format:yyyy:MM:dd HH:mm The initial value is an empty string (

    ). ManagedElement healthCheckSchedule.time The time of the day, when the action startHealthCheck starts. Format: hh:mm hh - hour mm - minut es ManagedElement healthCheckSchedule.weekday The weekday, whe n the action startHealthCheck starts. ManagedElementData ManagedElementDataId The value compon ent of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. ManagedElementData autoConfigurationAllowed 0 This att ribute specifies if the system is allowed to automatically configure detected ob jects.Autoconfiguration is supported for upgradable hardware connected to CPP Su brack and Slot. When setting this attribute from true to false the system create s a new ManagedElementData documentServerAddress The base URL for the documentation server. The attribute is read by the Element Management appli cation to find the documentation server in the network. The URL shall contain th e document server, for example: http://cpi2.al.sw.ericsson.se/alexserv The synt ManagedElementData logonServerAddress A list of node n ames or IP addresses of the single logon servers (SLSs). The list uses commas to seperate the single logon server addresses, e.g. https://SLS1,https://SLS2,http s://SLS3, these addresses consists of the URLs to the concerned SLS servers. ManagedElementData ntpServerAddressPrimary This is the IP a ddress to the NTP server. If this NTP server is not configured, this attribute r esponds with 0.0.0.0. ManagedElementData ntpServiceActivePrimary TRUE(1) Specifies if the node should poll the primary NTP server for information. Even if this NTP serve r is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMinPollPrimary 64 This value state s the minimum interval (in seconds) for polling the primary NTP server. This val ue must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMaxPollPrimary 1024 This value state s the maximum interval (in seconds) for polling the primary NTP server. This val ue must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpBurstFlagPrimary FALSE(0) This is the burst flag used towards the primary NTP server. Even if this NTP server is n ot configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpServerAddressSecondary This is an alternative IP address to an NTP server. If this NTP server is not configured , this attribute responds with 0.0.0.0. ManagedElementData ntpServiceActiveSecondary TRUE(1) Specifie s if the node should poll the secondary NTP server for information. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default va lue. ManagedElementData ntpMinPollSecondary 64 This value state s the minimum interval (in seconds) for polling the secondary NTP server. This v alue must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute stil l responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMaxPollSecondary 1024 This value state s the maximum interval (in seconds) for polling the secondary NTP server. This v alue must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute stil l responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpBurstFlagSecondary FALSE(0) This is the burst flag used towards the secondary NTP server. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData nodeUTCTime 0 This attribute specifies the UTC time used in the node. It is the number of milliseconds elapsed since t he epoch time (January 1, 1970, 00:00:00 GMT). To set this attribute, all the th ree attributes, ntpServiceActive for Primary, Secondary and Third, must

    ManagedElementData nodeLocalTimeZone Specifies the ti me zone of the node. This attribute is needed by management application to conve rt UTC time from a log or NTP service to local time.It will not change the real time clock on the node. Choose a time zone abbreviation, three characters, in t ManagedElementData daylightSavingTime 0 This attribute s tates if daylight saving time is used on this node. It is used by the node, and will not change the real time clock on the node. ManagedElementData hdVolumeCSize The total size of the C volume on the Cello node in bytes. The C volume may be replicated on several har d disks. ManagedElementData hdVolumeCFreespace The number of by tes of free space available on the C volume. The C volume may be replicated on s everal hard disks in a Cello node. ManagedElementData nodeUniqueID This is a unique node id entity to be set only in the factory. ManagedElementData swServerUrlList A comma-separated list o f URLs, ending with the folder name containing CXC folders. Example: Entering UR L http://111.222.333.444:8080/Ericsson makes the node look for files located in http://111.222.333.444:8080/Ericsson/CXC112233/Rxxx/jarfile.jar For ManagedElementData piuGroupEscalationType 0 The type of node restart when it is a problem with the last PIU in a PIU group. ManagedElementData minimumHdVolumeCFreespace 0 Minimum number of Mbytes of free space on C volume before an alarm is issued. 0 means th at no alarm will be sent. It is used as a threshold that triggers alarms when th e C volume is about to be full (i.e. when the attribute hdVolumeCFreespace excee ds this ManagedElementData docLibSystemDefined The identity of the ALEX document library defined for this node type and version, set by the sys tem. The attribute is read by the Element Management application to find the doc umentation library. The value must contain the used library identity, without s ManagedElementData docLibUserDefined The identity of an ALEX document library that can be defined by the user. Use this attribute to set the library identity, if the attribute docLibSystemDefined is not available, or if the system-defined ALEX library is not available on the document server. ManagedElementData ntpBurstFlagThird FALSE(0) This is the burst flag used towards the third NTP server. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMaxPollThird 1024 This value states the ma ximum interval (in seconds) for polling the third NTP server. This value must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds w ith its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMinPollThird 64 This value states the mi nimum interval (in seconds) for polling the third NTP server. This value must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds w ith its default value. ManagedElementData ntpServerAddressThird This is an alter native IP address to an NTP server. If this NTP server is not configured, this a ttribute responds with 0.0.0.0. ManagedElementData ntpServiceActiveThird FALSE(0) Specifie s if the node should poll the third NTP server for information. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData autoConfigurationStatus Displays if auto configuration is in progress or not. ManagedElementData ManagedElementDataId The value compon ent of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. ManagedElementData autoConfigurationAllowed 0 This att ribute specifies if the system is allowed to automatically configure detected ob jects.Autoconfiguration is supported for upgradable hardware connected to CPP Su brack and Slot. When setting this attribute from true to false the system create s a new

    ManagedElementData documentServerAddress The base URL for the documentation server. The attribute is read by the Element Management appli cation to find the documentation server in the network. The URL shall contain th e document server, for example: http://cpi2.al.sw.ericsson.se/alexserv The synt ManagedElementData logonServerAddress A list of node n ames or IP addresses of the single logon servers (SLSs). The list uses commas to seperate the single logon server addresses, e.g. https://SLS1,https://SLS2,http s://SLS3, these addresses consists of the URLs to the concerned SLS servers. ManagedElementData ntpServerAddressPrimary This is the IP a ddress to the NTP server. If this NTP server is not configured, this attribute r esponds with 0.0.0.0. ManagedElementData ntpServiceActivePrimary TRUE(1) Specifies if the node should poll the primary NTP server for information. Even if this NTP serve r is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMinPollPrimary 64 This value state s the minimum interval (in seconds) for polling the primary NTP server. This val ue must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMaxPollPrimary 1024 This value state s the maximum interval (in seconds) for polling the primary NTP server. This val ue must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpBurstFlagPrimary FALSE(0) This is the burst flag used towards the primary NTP server. Even if this NTP server is n ot configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpServerAddressSecondary This is an alternative IP address to an NTP server. If this NTP server is not configured , this attribute responds with 0.0.0.0. ManagedElementData ntpServiceActiveSecondary TRUE(1) Specifie s if the node should poll the secondary NTP server for information. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default va lue. ManagedElementData ntpMinPollSecondary 64 This value state s the minimum interval (in seconds) for polling the secondary NTP server. This v alue must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute stil l responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMaxPollSecondary 1024 This value state s the maximum interval (in seconds) for polling the secondary NTP server. This v alue must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute stil l responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpBurstFlagSecondary FALSE(0) This is the burst flag used towards the secondary NTP server. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData nodeUTCTime 0 This attribute specifies the UTC time used in the node. It is the number of milliseconds elapsed since t he epoch time (January 1, 1970, 00:00:00 GMT). To set this attribute, all the th ree attributes, ntpServiceActive for Primary, Secondary and Third, must ManagedElementData nodeLocalTimeZone Specifies the ti me zone of the node. This attribute is needed by management application to conve rt UTC time from a log or NTP service to local time.It will not change the real time clock on the node. Choose a time zone abbreviation, three characters, in t ManagedElementData daylightSavingTime 0 This attribute s tates if daylight saving time is used on this node. It is used by the node, and will not change the real time clock on the node. ManagedElementData hdVolumeCSize The total size of the C volume on the Cello node in bytes. The C volume may be replicated on several har d disks. ManagedElementData hdVolumeCFreespace The number of by tes of free space available on the C volume. The C volume may be replicated on s everal hard disks in a Cello node.

    ManagedElementData nodeUniqueID This is a unique node id entity to be set only in the factory. ManagedElementData swServerUrlList A comma-separated list o f URLs, ending with the folder name containing CXC folders. Example: Entering UR L http://111.222.333.444:8080/Ericsson makes the node look for files located in http://111.222.333.444:8080/Ericsson/CXC112233/Rxxx/jarfile.jar For ManagedElementData piuGroupEscalationType 0 The type of node restart when it is a problem with the last PIU in a PIU group. ManagedElementData minimumHdVolumeCFreespace 0 Minimum number of Mbytes of free space on C volume before an alarm is issued. 0 means th at no alarm will be sent. It is used as a threshold that triggers alarms when th e C volume is about to be full (i.e. when the attribute hdVolumeCFreespace excee ds this ManagedElementData docLibSystemDefined The identity of the ALEX document library defined for this node type and version, set by the sys tem. The attribute is read by the Element Management application to find the doc umentation library. The value must contain the used library identity, without s ManagedElementData docLibUserDefined The identity of an ALEX document library that can be defined by the user. Use this attribute to set the library identity, if the attribute docLibSystemDefined is not available, or if the system-defined ALEX library is not available on the document server. ManagedElementData ntpBurstFlagThird FALSE(0) This is the burst flag used towards the third NTP server. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMaxPollThird 1024 This value states the ma ximum interval (in seconds) for polling the third NTP server. This value must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds w ith its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMinPollThird 64 This value states the mi nimum interval (in seconds) for polling the third NTP server. This value must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds w ith its default value. ManagedElementData ntpServerAddressThird This is an alter native IP address to an NTP server. If this NTP server is not configured, this a ttribute responds with 0.0.0.0. ManagedElementData ntpServiceActiveThird FALSE(0) Specifie s if the node should poll the third NTP server for information. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData autoConfigurationStatus Displays if auto configuration is in progress or not. ManagedElementData ManagedElementDataId The value compon ent of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. ManagedElementData autoConfigurationAllowed 0 This att ribute specifies if the system is allowed to automatically configure detected ob jects.Autoconfiguration is supported for upgradable hardware connected to CPP Su brack and Slot. When setting this attribute from true to false the system create s a new ManagedElementData documentServerAddress The base URL for the documentation server. The attribute is read by the Element Management appli cation to find the documentation server in the network. The URL shall contain th e document server, for example: http://cpi2.al.sw.ericsson.se/alexserv The synt ManagedElementData logonServerAddress A list of node n ames or IP addresses of the single logon servers (SLSs). The list uses commas to seperate the single logon server addresses, e.g. https://SLS1,https://SLS2,http s://SLS3, these addresses consists of the URLs to the concerned SLS servers. ManagedElementData ntpServerAddressPrimary This is the IP a ddress to the NTP server. If this NTP server is not configured, this attribute r esponds with 0.0.0.0. ManagedElementData ntpServiceActivePrimary TRUE(1) Specifies if the node should poll the primary NTP server for information. Even if this NTP serve

    r is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMinPollPrimary 64 This value state s the minimum interval (in seconds) for polling the primary NTP server. This val ue must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMaxPollPrimary 1024 This value state s the maximum interval (in seconds) for polling the primary NTP server. This val ue must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpBurstFlagPrimary FALSE(0) This is the burst flag used towards the primary NTP server. Even if this NTP server is n ot configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpServerAddressSecondary This is an alternative IP address to an NTP server. If this NTP server is not configured , this attribute responds with 0.0.0.0. ManagedElementData ntpServiceActiveSecondary TRUE(1) Specifie s if the node should poll the secondary NTP server for information. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default va lue. ManagedElementData ntpMinPollSecondary 64 This value state s the minimum interval (in seconds) for polling the secondary NTP server. This v alue must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute stil l responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMaxPollSecondary 1024 This value state s the maximum interval (in seconds) for polling the secondary NTP server. This v alue must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute stil l responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpBurstFlagSecondary FALSE(0) This is the burst flag used towards the secondary NTP server. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData nodeUTCTime 0 This attribute specifies the UTC time used in the node. It is the number of milliseconds elapsed since t he epoch time (January 1, 1970, 00:00:00 GMT). To set this attribute, all the th ree attributes, ntpServiceActive for Primary, Secondary and Third, must ManagedElementData nodeLocalTimeZone Specifies the ti me zone of the node. This attribute is needed by management application to conve rt UTC time from a log or NTP service to local time.It will not change the real time clock on the node. Choose a time zone abbreviation, three characters, in t ManagedElementData daylightSavingTime 0 This attribute s tates if daylight saving time is used on this node. It is used by the node, and will not change the real time clock on the node. ManagedElementData hdVolumeCSize The total size of the C volume on the Cello node in bytes. The C volume may be replicated on several har d disks. ManagedElementData hdVolumeCFreespace The number of by tes of free space available on the C volume. The C volume may be replicated on s everal hard disks in a Cello node. ManagedElementData nodeUniqueID This is a unique node id entity to be set only in the factory. ManagedElementData swServerUrlList A comma-separated list o f URLs, ending with the folder name containing CXC folders. Example: Entering UR L http://111.222.333.444:8080/Ericsson makes the node look for files located in http://111.222.333.444:8080/Ericsson/CXC112233/Rxxx/jarfile.jar For ManagedElementData piuGroupEscalationType 0 The type of node restart when it is a problem with the last PIU in a PIU group. ManagedElementData minimumHdVolumeCFreespace 0 Minimum number of Mbytes of free space on C volume before an alarm is issued. 0 means th at no alarm will be sent. It is used as a threshold that triggers alarms when th e C volume is about to be full (i.e. when the attribute hdVolumeCFreespace excee ds this

    ManagedElementData docLibSystemDefined The identity of the ALEX document library defined for this node type and version, set by the sys tem. The attribute is read by the Element Management application to find the doc umentation library. The value must contain the used library identity, without s ManagedElementData docLibUserDefined The identity of an ALEX document library that can be defined by the user. Use this attribute to set the library identity, if the attribute docLibSystemDefined is not available, or if the system-defined ALEX library is not available on the document server. ManagedElementData ntpBurstFlagThird FALSE(0) This is the burst flag used towards the third NTP server. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMaxPollThird 1024 This value states the ma ximum interval (in seconds) for polling the third NTP server. This value must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds w ith its default value. ManagedElementData ntpMinPollThird 64 This value states the mi nimum interval (in seconds) for polling the third NTP server. This value must be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds w ith its default value. ManagedElementData ntpServerAddressThird This is an alter native IP address to an NTP server. If this NTP server is not configured, this a ttribute responds with 0.0.0.0. ManagedElementData ntpServiceActiveThird FALSE(0) Specifie s if the node should poll the third NTP server for information. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value. ManagedElementData autoConfigurationStatus Displays if auto configuration is in progress or not. ManagementNode ManagementNodeId ManagementNode userLabel A user-friendly name of this obj ect ManagementNode vendorName 0 The name of the ManagementNode v endor. Defined in XML file Sub: ManagementNode userDefinedState An operator defined stat e for operator specific usage ManagementNode locationName The physical location of this en tity (e.g an address) ManagementNode swVersion Software version of the managerm ent node, e.g. R1A, R1B, etc. ManagementNode manages List of ManagedElement objects FDN accor ding to [9] and [20] Note: For CORBA users, GenericNRIRPSystem::AttributeTypes:: MOReferenceSet,, RAH Mbms MbmsId Naming attribute. Contains the value part of the RDN. Mbms mbmsModificationPeriodCoeff 9 Represents m, the modifi cation period coefficient.The actual modification period (MP), in number of fram es, equals 2^m. m >= k, where k = max[cnDrxCycleLengthPs, cnDrxCycleLengthCs, ut ranDrxCycleLength]To allow the UE to measure, when applicable, on anoth Mbms mbmsRepetitionPeriodCoeff 2 Represents r, the repeti tion period coefficient.The number of repetitions per modification period equals 2^r while the actual repetition period, in number of frames, equals [2^m DIV 2^ r], where m is the modification period coefficient. [2^m DIV 2^r] >= nr Mbms nonPlSessionsMax 20 Maximum number of simultaneous o ngoing MBMS sessions in one non-PL cell.The MCCH FACH with TTI 20 ms for S-CCPCH has maximum user data rate 7.6 kbps. The values of the mbmsModificationPeriodCo eff (m) and mbmsRepetitionPeriodCoeff (r) have dependencies to Mbms plSessionsMax 10 Maximum number of simultaneous ongoing M BMS sessions in one PL cell.The MCCH FACH with TTI 20 ms for S-CCPCH has maximum user data rate 7.6 kbps. The values of the mbmsModificationPeriodCoeff (m) and mbmsRepetitionPeriodCoeff (r) have dependencies to the Mbms neighbourCellsMax 20 Maximum number of intra-frequenc

    y neighboring cells for which information is sent on MCCH.The MCCH FACH with TTI 20 ms for S-CCPCH has maximum user data rate 7.6 kbps. The values of the mbmsMo dificationPeriodCoeff (m) and mbmsRepetitionPeriodCoeff (r) hav Mbms inactivityTimer 0 Time after which an MBMS session with do wnlink user data throughput equal to 0 kbps is considered inactive.Special value s: 0 is used to turn MBMS inactivity supervision off. Change takes effect: New M BMS sessions Unit: min MbmsCch nonPlMbmsSac List of non-preferred layer Mbms Service Area Codes. MbmsCch plMbmsSac List of preferred layer Mbms Service Are a Codes. MbmsCch MbmsCchId Naming attribute. Contains the value par t of the RDN. MbmsCch administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the MCCH and MICH control channels in the cell. When set to LOCKED: The MCCH and MIC H control channels are deactivated in the air interface. For MBMS sessions where this cell is Preferred Line (PL), all MTCH Radio Bearers (RBs) MbmsCch operationalState The operational state of the MBM S resources in the cell. MbmsCch availabilityStatus The Availability status of the M BMS resources in the cell.More than one of the following conditions can apply fo r the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTESTBit 1 = 1: FAILEDBit 2 = 1: POWEROFFBit 3 = 1: OFFLINEBit 4 = 1: OFFDUTYBit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 whe MbmsCch plMbmsSaRef List of preferred layer references to th e MbmsServiceArea Managed Object.Dependencies: At least one of the attributes pl MbmsSaRef or nonPlMbmsSaRef must be set when creating an MbmsCch MO, meaning tha t the cell must always be associated with at least one MbmsCch nonPlMbmsSaRef List of non-preferred layer references t o the MbmsServiceArea Managed Object.Dependencies: At least one of the attribute s plMbmsSaRef or nonPlMbmsSaRef must be set when creating an MbmsCch MO, meaning that the cell must always be associated with at least MbmsCch michPowerOffset -7 MICH power.The power is set relative to primaryCpichPower in the cell. If CPICH power changes the absolute power of MICH will also change. Disturbances: A consequence of changing the parameter is that all MBMS common channels in the cell are released. The MbmsCch mcchPowerOffset -20 The power of the S-CPCCH used for MCCH t ransmission.The power is set relative to primaryCpichPower in the cell. If CPICH power changes the absolute power of S-CPCCH used for MCCH will also change. The power needed depends on the number of repetitions on M MbmsCch mcchPowerOffsetTfci 0 The power of the TFCI field on t he S-CPCCH used for MCCH transmission.The power is set relative to primaryCpichP ower in the cell, thus, if CPICH power changes the absolute power of the TFCI fi eld used for MCCH will also change.Disturbances: A consequence MbmsCch mtch64PowerOffset -40 The power of the S-CPCCH used fo r MTCH 64.8 kbps transmission.The power is set relative to primaryCpichPower in the cell, thus if CPICH power changes the absolute power of S-CPCCH used for MTC H 64.8 kbps will also change.Change takes effect: New MBMS sess MbmsCch mtch64PowerOffsetTfci 200 The power of the TFCI field on t he S-CPCCH used for MTCH 64.8 kbps transmission.The power is set relative to the Secondary CCPCH data field, which in turn is set relative to primaryCpichPower in the cell, thus, if CPICH power changes the absolute power of MbmsCch mtch128PowerOffset -10 The power of the S-CPCCH used fo r MTCH 129.6 kbps transmission.The power is set relative to primaryCpichPower in the cell, thus, if CPICH power changes the absolute power of S-CPCCH used for M TCH 129.6 kbps will also change.Change takes effect: New MBMS s MbmsCch mtch128PowerOffsetTfci 200 The power of the TFCI field on t he S-CPCCH used for MTCH 129.6 kbps transmission.The power is set relative to th e Secondary CCPCH data field, which in turn is set relative to primaryCpichPower in the cell, thus, if CPICH power changes the absolute power o MbmsCch mtch256PowerOffset 20 The power of the S-CPCCH used fo

    r MTCH 259.2 kbps transmission.The power is set relative to primaryCpichPower in the cell, thus, if CPICH power changes the absolute power of S-CPCCH used for M TCH 259.2 kbps will also change.Change takes effect: New MBMS s MbmsCch mtch256PowerOffsetTfci 200 The power of the TFCI field on t he S-CPCCH used for MTCH 259.2 kbps transmission.The power is set relative to th e Secondary CCPCH data field, which in turn is set relative to primaryCpichPower in the cell, thus, if CPICH power changes the absolute power o MbmsCch numNotificationInd 18 The number of notification indic ators per MICH frame. Provided to the RBS at configuration of MCCH/MICH by inclu sion of MICH Mode in NBAP signaling. To minimize MICH power, Nn is set to a low value.Specification: 3GPP TS 25.433 and 3GPP TS 25.211.Change t MbmsCch qualityOffset -1 Additional quality offset added, if HCS is not used, by UE to the measured quality of the cells on the MBMS preferred fr equency in order to keep/move the UE to that frequency.Used to set the value of the qOffMbms parameter scheduled on MCCH.Special values MbmsCch hcsPrioOffset 7 Priority offset added, if HCS is used, b y UE to the normal HCS priority level of cells on the MBMS preferred frequency i n order to keep/move the UE to that frequency.Used to set the value of the hcsOf fMbms parameter scheduled on MCCH.Larger values indicat MbmsCch plServiceRestriction 0 When set to TRUE that the UE sha ll consider that UTRAN will not provide any non-MBMS services on the MBMS prefer red frequency and based on this the UE should perform service prioritizing, that is, select between MBMS services and non-MBMS services. Otherw MbmsServiceArea MbmsServiceAreaId MbmsServiceArea sac Service area code MbmsServiceArea userLabel Provides support for putting a l abel on the MO instance.Ref. MbmsServiceArea MbmsServiceAreaId Naming attribute. Contai ns the value part of the RDN. MbmsServiceArea userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. MbmsServiceArea sac MBMS Service Area Code. Dependencies: Th e value of this parameter must be unique within the RNC. Change takes effect: Af ter MbmsCch lock/unlock MbmsServiceArea reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to this MO.See references in MbmsCch McpaDeviceGroup McpaDeviceGroupId McpaDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specific ation: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] McpaDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat McpaDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] McpaDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] McpaSubrack cabinetPosition Free text, that denotes the cabi net position on-site. Use cases:Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL_RBS_FU: 12 Ref. [CB_ECF] McpaSubrack McpaSubrackId McpaSubrack noOfSlots 0 Number of slots in MCPA subrack, depends on the RBS type. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL_RB S_FU:12 Ref. [CB_ECF] McpaSubrack subrackPosition The subrack position. The value consist of (<X><Y><Z>): X = Cabinet position within the node starting from the l

    eft, one digit (1 - 9). Y = Subrack vertical position within the cabinet startin g from the ground, one letter (A - Z). Z = Subrack horizontal p MeContext MeContextId Relative Distinguished Name. Set equal to MeContext.userLabel MeContext neLinkRelations List of the remote NE_s associat e d with this NE. FDN of MeContext instances Used to model the RANAG-RNC link re lations. MeContext synchronisationProgress 0 Represents the percentag e progress of the node being synchronised. Has 0% when the node is not connected or unsynchronised and 100% when the node is fully synchronised. Has values in b etween when then node is synchronising. The initial value set at create MeContext dnPrefix DN Prefix information. Specified only if the instance of the MeContext MO is a local root instance of the MIB, o therwise it is set to NULL, MeContext userLabel Provides support for putting a l abel on the MO instance. It is used by RANOS application to write the attribute value into the GUI.For information about allowed characters, . MeContext ipAddress 0 The IP address of the NE.A DNS n ame according to ref. [33] MeContext segmentName The segment to which the NE belo ngs. Full Distinguished Name of the segment according to [9] and [20]. MeContext mimSwitchPolicy Defines how version upgrade for a network element and the mirrored MIB shall be handled. RANOS_FOLLOWS = 1 NO_SW ITCH = 2 NE_FOLLOWS = 3 UPGRADE_ATTEMPTED = 4 MeContext neMIMversion The branch and the version of th e NE MIM used by this MeContext,<branch>.<version>.<release>, e.g. B.1.0 (NEAD c oncatenates the branch part of the MIM name and the version). MeContext compatibilityOfMIMs 0 Indication whether or no t the NE MIM is compatible with the NE mirrored MIM version. Applications should not perform read operations towards incompatible Mirrored MIMs. MeContext connectionStatus 0 Status of the instance. NeverConnected is set at instance creation. Connected is set to indicate that R ANOS has contact with the Network Element. Disconnect is set to indicate thet RA NOS has lost contact with the Network Element. NEVER_CONNECTED = MeContext mirrorMIBsynchStatus 0 Indicates whether or not the Mirrored MIB of this RNC is currently being synchronized with the MIB in th e RNC. Initial value is unsynchronized. TOPOLOGY = 1 ATTRIBUTE = 2 SYNCHRONIZED = 3 UNSYNCHRONIZED = 4 MeContext mirrorMIBupdateStatus 0 Indicates whether or not the mirrored MIB the mirrored MIB of this RNC is currently being updated with a planned configuration. Initial value is idle. UPDATING = 1 IDLE = 2 MeContext generationCounter 0 Keeps track of notificat ions received from the RNC. The initial value set at create is -1. MeContext neMIMName The NE MIM name represented by t his MeContext. <node>_NODE_MODEL (NEAD removes the branch tag received from the node). MeContext neType The NE type this MeContext represents. R NC = 1 NODEB = 2 RANAG = 3 ENODEB = 4 MeContext neCreationComplete 0 Indicates whether or not the creation of an NE has been completed successfully. Administered by MOAD MeContext restartWarning 0 Indicates that the NE this MeCon text represesnts is about to restart due to software upgrade or restore of a bac kup. Alarms for disconected NE shall be supressed when restartWarning is TRUE. MeContext rollbackMirrorMIBname Name of the old NE mirro r MIB to be used for rollback during upgrade. MeContext neSecurityStatus Indicates whether securi ty is activated on this NE or not. Allowed string values are: ON OFF MeContext bcrLastChange 0 OSS time in ms last BCR related notification wasreceived from the node. Always reset after node synchronisation. The initial value set at create is -1.

    MeContext bctLastChange 0 OSS time in ms last BCT related notification wasreceived from the node. Always reset after node synchronisation. The initial value set at create is -1. MeContext telisLastChange 0 Number of Telis related notifica tions received from the node. Always reset after node synchronisation.The initia l value set at create is -1. MeContext lostSynchronisation The time (YYYY-MM-DD HH: MM:SS) when the OSS lost synchronisation with the node. When the node is synchro nised, the value will be SYNCHRONISED MeContext nodeStartTime The time (YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS) w hen the node last started. MeContext pendingRestart 0 Indicates whether or not a node restart is pending. MeContext configCountdownActivated 0 Activates or dea ctivates the robust rollback function, that is a countdown mechanism for confirm ation of a configuration change. When set to TRUE the countdown on the node is a ctivated and the activation function has failed to stop the count down on the n MeContext cppVersion 0 CPP version of the node. MeContext MeContextId Relative Distinguished Name. Set equal to MeContext.userLabel MeContext rbsIubId 0 The identity of the RNC IubLink MO that corresponds to the RBS this MeContext represents. rbsIubId has the same value as the attribute rbsId in IubLink MO in RNC and Iub MO in RBS. If the Iub MO presently does not exist, the value must be 0. Used only in MeContext ftpServerRef Set by ADD RBS Wizard. A referen ce to an MO describing FTP-server to use for upgrade and installation. Used only in RBS. For RNC and RANAG= NULL. MeContext rbsGroupRef Reference to the RbsGroup this M eContext belongs to. The attribute consists of the FDN of the RbsGroup according to [9] and [20]. Used only in RBS. For RNC and RANAG = NULL. NOTE: For instance s of RBS type, this attribute shall be Mandatory MeContext fdnOfRncIubLink FDN of the associated IubLink MO on the RNC. Set to empty if the IubLink MO does not exist MeContext synchronisationProgress 0 Represents the percentag e progress of the node being synchronised. Has 0% when the node is not connected or unsynchronised and 100% when the node is fully synchronised. Has values in b etween when then node is synchronising. The initial value set at create MeContext autoIntegration 0 Specifies if the RBS is to be Au to-Integrated. The initial value set at create is NO. MeContext dnPrefix DN Prefix information. Specified only if the instance of the MeContext MO is a local root instance of the MIB, o therwise it is set to NULL, MeContext userLabel Provides support for putting a l abel on the MO instance. It is used by RANOS application to write the attribute value into the GUI.For information about allowed characters, . MeContext ipAddress 0 The IP address of the NE.A DNS n ame according to ref. [33] MeContext segmentName The segment to which the NE belo ngs. Full Distinguished Name of the segment according to [9] and [20]. MeContext mimSwitchPolicy Defines how version upgrade for a network element and the mirrored MIB shall be handled. RANOS_FOLLOWS = 1 NO_SW ITCH = 2 NE_FOLLOWS = 3 UPGRADE_ATTEMPTED = 4 MeContext neMIMversion The branch and the version of th e NE MIM used by this MeContext,<branch>.<version>.<release>, e.g. B.1.0 (NEAD c oncatenates the branch part of the MIM name and the version). MeContext compatibilityOfMIMs 0 Indication whether or no t the NE MIM is compatible with the NE mirrored MIM version. Applications should not perform read operations towards incompatible Mirrored MIMs. MeContext connectionStatus 0 Status of the instance. NeverConnected is set at instance creation. Connected is set to indicate that R

    ANOS has contact with the Network Element. Disconnect is set to indicate thet RA NOS has lost contact with the Network Element. NEVER_CONNECTED = MeContext mirrorMIBsynchStatus 0 Indicates whether or not the Mirrored MIB of this RNC is currently being synchronized with the MIB in th e RNC. Initial value is unsynchronized. TOPOLOGY = 1 ATTRIBUTE = 2 SYNCHRONIZED = 3 UNSYNCHRONIZED = 4 MeContext mirrorMIBupdateStatus 0 Indicates whether or not the mirrored MIB the mirrored MIB of this RNC is currently being updated with a planned configuration. Initial value is idle. UPDATING = 1 IDLE = 2 MeContext generationCounter 0 Keeps track of notificat ions received from the RNC. The initial value set at create is -1. MeContext neMIMName The NE MIM name represented by t his MeContext. <node>_NODE_MODEL (NEAD removes the branch tag received from the node). MeContext neType The NE type this MeContext represents. R NC = 1 NODEB = 2 RANAG = 3 ENODEB = 4 TDRNC = 5 TDNODEB = 6 MeContext neCreationComplete 0 Indicates whether or not the creation of an NE has been completed successfully. Administered by MOAD MeContext restartWarning 0 Indicates that the NE this MeCon text represesnts is about to restart due to software upgrade or restore of a bac kup. Alarms for disconected NE shall be supressed when restartWarning is TRUE. MeContext rollbackMirrorMIBname Name of the old NE mirro r MIB to be used for rollback during upgrade. MeContext neSecurityStatus Indicates whether securi ty is activated on this NE or not. Allowed string values are: ON OFF MeContext bcrLastChange 0 OSS time in ms last BCR related notification wasreceived from the node. Always reset after node synchronisation. The initial value set at create is -1. MeContext bctLastChange 0 OSS time in ms last BCT related notification wasreceived from the node. Always reset after node synchronisation. The initial value set at create is -1. MeContext telisLastChange 0 Number of Telis related notifica tions received from the node. Always reset after node synchronisation.The initia l value set at create is -1. MeContext lostSynchronisation The time (YYYY-MM-DD HH: MM:SS) when the OSS lost synchronisation with the node. When the node is synchro nised, the value will be SYNCHRONISED MeContext nodeStartTime The time (YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS) w hen the node last started. MeContext pendingRestart 0 Indicates whether or not a node restart is pending. MeContext configCountdownActivated 0 Activates or dea ctivates the robust rollback function, that is a countdown mechanism for confirm ation of a configuration change. When set to TRUE the countdown on the node is a ctivated and the activation function has failed to stop the count down on the n MeContext multiStandardRbs6k 0 Indicates if the node is included in a multi-standard RBS6000 cabinet. MeContext cppVersion 0 CPP version of the node. MeContext MeContextId Relative Distinguished Name. Set equal to MeContext.userLabel MeContext neLinkRelations List of the remote NE_s associat e d with this NE. FDN of MeContext instances Used to model the RANAG-RNC link re lations. MeContext synchronisationProgress 0 Represents the percentag e progress of the node being synchronised. Has 0% when the node is not connected or unsynchronised and 100% when the node is fully synchronised. Has values in b etween when then node is synchronising. The initial value set at create MeContext dnPrefix DN Prefix information. Specified only if the instance of the MeContext MO is a local root instance of the MIB, o therwise it is set to NULL,

    MeContext userLabel Provides support for putting a l abel on the MO instance. It is used by RANOS application to write the attribute value into the GUI.For information about allowed characters, . MeContext ipAddress 0 The IP address of the NE.A DNS n ame according to ref. [33] MeContext segmentName The segment to which the NE belo ngs. Full Distinguished Name of the segment according to [9] and [20]. MeContext mimSwitchPolicy Defines how version upgrade for a network element and the mirrored MIB shall be handled. RANOS_FOLLOWS = 1 NO_SW ITCH = 2 NE_FOLLOWS = 3 UPGRADE_ATTEMPTED = 4 MeContext neMIMversion The branch and the version of th e NE MIM used by this MeContext,<branch>.<version>.<release>, e.g. B.1.0 (NEAD c oncatenates the branch part of the MIM name and the version). MeContext compatibilityOfMIMs 0 Indication whether or no t the NE MIM is compatible with the NE mirrored MIM version. Applications should not perform read operations towards incompatible Mirrored MIMs. MeContext connectionStatus 0 Status of the instance. NeverConnected is set at instance creation. Connected is set to indicate that R ANOS has contact with the Network Element. Disconnect is set to indicate thet RA NOS has lost contact with the Network Element. NEVER_CONNECTED = MeContext mirrorMIBsynchStatus 0 Indicates whether or not the Mirrored MIB of this RNC is currently being synchronized with the MIB in th e RNC. Initial value is unsynchronized. TOPOLOGY = 1 ATTRIBUTE = 2 SYNCHRONIZED = 3 UNSYNCHRONIZED = 4 MeContext mirrorMIBupdateStatus 0 Indicates whether or not the mirrored MIB the mirrored MIB of this RNC is currently being updated with a planned configuration. Initial value is idle. UPDATING = 1 IDLE = 2 MeContext generationCounter 0 Keeps track of notificat ions received from the RNC. The initial value set at create is -1. MeContext neMIMName The NE MIM name represented by t his MeContext. <node>_NODE_MODEL (NEAD removes the branch tag received from the node). MeContext neType The NE type this MeContext represents. R NC = 1 NODEB = 2 RANAG = 3 ENODEB = 4 MeContext neCreationComplete 0 Indicates whether or not the creation of an NE has been completed successfully. Administered by MOAD MeContext restartWarning 0 Indicates that the NE this MeCon text represesnts is about to restart due to software upgrade or restore of a bac kup. Alarms for disconected NE shall be supressed when restartWarning is TRUE. MeContext rollbackMirrorMIBname Name of the old NE mirro r MIB to be used for rollback during upgrade. MeContext neSecurityStatus Indicates whether securi ty is activated on this NE or not. Allowed string values are: ON OFF MeContext bcrLastChange 0 OSS time in ms last BCR related notification wasreceived from the node. Always reset after node synchronisation. The initial value set at create is -1. MeContext bctLastChange 0 OSS time in ms last BCT related notification wasreceived from the node. Always reset after node synchronisation. The initial value set at create is -1. MeContext telisLastChange 0 Number of Telis related notifica tions received from the node. Always reset after node synchronisation.The initia l value set at create is -1. MeContext lostSynchronisation The time (YYYY-MM-DD HH: MM:SS) when the OSS lost synchronisation with the node. When the node is synchro nised, the value will be SYNCHRONISED MeContext nodeStartTime The time (YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS) w hen the node last started. MeContext pendingRestart 0 Indicates whether or not a node restart is pending. MeContext configCountdownActivated 0 Activates or dea

    ctivates the robust rollback function, that is a countdown mechanism for confirm ation of a configuration change. When set to TRUE the countdown on the node is a ctivated and the activation function has failed to stop the count down on the n MeContext cppVersion 0 CPP version of the node. MediumAccessUnit MediumAccessUnitId The value compon ent of the RDN. MediumAccessUnit userLabel Label for free use. MediumAccessUnit operationalState The operational state. MediumAccessUnit availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. MediumAccessUnit connectorLabel 0 This attribute is used b y a management system to show the label on the port the connector is attached to . MediumAccessUnit linkSpeed The Link Speed. Unit: 1 Mbps MediumAccessUnit duplexMode The duplex mode used. MediumAccessUnit operationalMode The operational mode. MediumAccessUnit MediumAccessUnitId The value compon ent of the RDN. MediumAccessUnit userLabel Label for free use. MediumAccessUnit operationalState The operational state. MediumAccessUnit availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. MediumAccessUnit connectorLabel 0 This attribute is used b y a management system to show the label on the port the connector is attached to . MediumAccessUnit linkSpeed The Link Speed. Unit: 1 Mbps MediumAccessUnit duplexMode The duplex mode used. MediumAccessUnit operationalMode The operational mode. MediumAccessUnit MediumAccessUnitId The value compon ent of the RDN. MediumAccessUnit operationalState The operational state. MediumAccessUnit availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. MediumAccessUnit connectorLabel 0 This attribute is used b y a management system to show the label on the port the connector is attached to . MediumAccessUnit linkSpeed The Link Speed. Unit: 1 Mbps MediumAccessUnit duplexMode The duplex mode used. MediumAccessUnit operationalMode The operational mode. Mich availabilityStatus The availability status of the d evice. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDENCY_LOCKE D ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Mich dbchDeviceSetRef Reference to the DBCH device set carrying this channel. Ref. [CB_MOP] Mich operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP] Mich MichId MimInfo MimInfoId MimInfo mimName Name of the MIM supported by this interface MimInfo mimVersion MIMs versions supported by this interfac e MocnCellProfile MocnCellProfileId MocnCellProfile commonPlmnRef Reference to the CN operator tha

    t owns the cells that reference this profile. The PLMN of that CN operator will be broadcasted in these cells. Change takes effect: New connections MocnCellProfile reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to this MO. MocnCellProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. MscPool MscPoolId MscPool userLabel Provides support for putting a label on the MO instance. Mspg MspgId The value component of the RDN. Mspg userLabel Label for free use. Mspg os155SpiWorkingId The working OS155 physical path termination. Mspg os155SpiStandbyId The standby OS155 physical path termination. Mspg switchMode 0 The switching mode. Two values are possi ble: switchMode = LOCKED if any of the involved Os155SpiTtp MOs is locked (or is indirectly locked from the PlugInUnit MO). switchMode = AUTOMATIC in all other cases. Mspg operationalState The operational state. Mspg availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Mspg selectedPort The port currently selected by the MSPG. The selected port can change only as a result of an MSP switch or an equipment protection switch. Mspg selectedBoard The ExchangeTerminal MO that is currentl y used to process the user plane traffic. The only action that can change the se lected board is an equipment protection switch. Mspg degCauseMsp 0 Defines whether a degraded signal (DEG) defect should cause an automatic MSP switch. This attribute applies to the ETSI standard. Mspg lockout 0 If lockout is set to true, the MSP logic is froz en meaning that no MSP switch occur, regardless of what happens on the lines. Th e APS (K1KL2) signalling also continues to signal the request and/or responses t hat it did when the set operation was perfomed. Mspg primarySection The primary section indicates the Os155S piTtp that currently has the role of primary interface. As a consequence of a co mpleted MSP switch, the primary and secondary sections can be interchanged. This attribute applies to the STM-1 Channelized TTC case. Mspg rdiSecondarySf 0 Specifies if MSPG should prevent an MSP switch, if MS-RDI is present on the secondary section. This attribute applies to the STM-1 Channelized TTC case. Mspg MspgId The value component of the RDN. Mspg userLabel Label for free use. Mspg os155SpiWorkingId The working OS155 physical path termination. Mspg os155SpiStandbyId The standby OS155 physical path termination. Mspg switchMode 0 The switching mode. Two values are possi ble: switchMode = LOCKED if any of the involved Os155SpiTtp MOs is locked (or is indirectly locked from the PlugInUnit MO). switchMode = AUTOMATIC in all other cases. Mspg operationalState The operational state. Mspg availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Mspg selectedPort The port currently selected by the MSPG. The selected port can change only as a result of an MSP switch or an equipment protection switch. Mspg selectedBoard The ExchangeTerminal MO that is currentl

    y used to process the user plane traffic. The only action that can change the se lected board is an equipment protection switch. Mspg degCauseMsp 0 Defines whether a degraded signal (DEG) defect should cause an automatic MSP switch. This attribute applies to the ETSI standard. Mspg lockout 0 If lockout is set to true, the MSP logic is froz en meaning that no MSP switch occur, regardless of what happens on the lines. Th e APS (K1KL2) signalling also continues to signal the request and/or responses t hat it did when the set operation was perfomed. Mspg primarySection The primary section indicates the Os155S piTtp that currently has the role of primary interface. As a consequence of a co mpleted MSP switch, the primary and secondary sections can be interchanged. This attribute applies to the STM-1 Channelized TTC case. Mspg rdiSecondarySf 0 Specifies if MSPG should prevent an MSP switch, if MS-RDI is present on the secondary section. This attribute applies to the STM-1 Channelized TTC case. MspgExtended MspgExtendedId The value component of the RDN. MspgExtended os155SpiWorkingRef Reference to an instance of Os155SpiTtp MO. The working OS155 physical path termination. MspgExtended os155SpiProtectionRef Reference to an instance of Os155SpiTtp MO. The protection OS155 physical path termination. MspgExtended selectedBoard The ExchangeTerminal MO that is currently used to process the user plane traffic. The only action that can chang e the selected board is an equipment protection switch. MspgExtended selectedPort The port currently selected by t he MSPG. The selected port can change only as a result of an MSP switch or an eq uipment protection switch. MspgExtended userLabel Label for free use. MspgExtended availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. MspgExtended operationalState The operational state. MspgExtended bidirectional 0 Specifies the switching type of the MSP. true = bidirectional mode false = unidirectional mode MspgExtended revertive 0 Specifies whether the MSP is rev ertive or non-revertive. true = revertive false = non-revertive MspgExtended waitToRestoreTime 5 Represents the time that the working section must be fault-free before switching back from the protectio n section. Unit: 1 min MspgExtended protectionStatus Indicates the status of the protection switch. MspgExtended opBidirectionalMode Indicates the operationa l switching type of the MSP.It differs from the value of the attribute bidirecti onal if:-the standardMode of the os155SpiWorkingRef is ANSI,-bidirectional is tr ue, and -the remote side does not support bidirectional switching mode. MspgExtended MspgExtendedId The value component of the RDN. MspgExtended os155SpiWorkingRef Reference to an instance of Os155SpiTtp MO. The working OS155 physical path termination. MspgExtended os155SpiProtectionRef Reference to an instance of Os155SpiTtp MO. The protection OS155 physical path termination. MspgExtended selectedBoard The ExchangeTerminal MO that is currently used to process the user plane traffic. The only action that can chang e the selected board is an equipment protection switch. MspgExtended selectedPort The port currently selected by t he MSPG. The selected port can change only as a result of an MSP switch or an eq uipment protection switch. MspgExtended userLabel Label for free use. MspgExtended availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. MspgExtended operationalState The operational state. MspgExtended bidirectional 0 Specifies the switching type of

    the MSP. true = bidirectional mode false = unidirectional mode MspgExtended revertive 0 Specifies whether the MSP is rev ertive or non-revertive. true = revertive false = non-revertive MspgExtended waitToRestoreTime 5 Represents the time that the working section must be fault-free before switching back from the protectio n section. Unit: 1 min MspgExtended protectionStatus Indicates the status of the protection switch. MspgExtended opBidirectionalMode Indicates the operationa l switching type of the MSP.It differs from the value of the attribute bidirecti onal if:-the standardMode of the os155SpiWorkingRef is ANSI,-bidirectional is tr ue, and -the remote side does not support bidirectional switching mode. MtchFrameSynch MtchFrameSynchId Naming attribute.Contain s the value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. MtchFrameSynch iubTransportDelayMax 30 Maximum Iub delay for wh ich soft combining is supported.Special values: 0 means that no soft combining w ill be supported within the RNS. Unit: ms MtchFrameSynch iubTransportDelayOffset 2 Iub downlink transport d elay offset. The value may be increased to accommodate high transport delay vari ation, but this also increases overall delays for MTCH.Unit: ms MtchFrameSynch toaWindowEndpoint 0 Latest time of arrival m argin endpoint (3GPP parameter ToAWE).Unit: ms Dependencies: toaWindowEndpoint < toaWindowSize MtchFrameSynch toaWindowSize 190 Time of arrival window size. (3G PP parameter ToAWS).Unit: ms Dependencies: toaWindowSize > toaWindowEndpoint MtchFrameSynch phaseDriftThreshold 15 Threshold for maximum al lowed phase drift of an MTCH FACH in % of the TTI length. When this value is exc eeded, a re-synchronization is performed. Unit: % Mtp3bAp Mtp3bApId The value component of the RDN. Mtp3bAp userLabel Label for free use. Mtp3bAp routeSetId Reference to an instance of Mtp3bSrs MO. Specifies the destination for the traffic from the client. Mtp3bAp serviceInd The service indicator. Specifies the Ser vice Indicator (SI) of the client, which is used in outgoing messages and is use d by traffic handling functions to perform message distribution. Possible SI val ues are: 3 = SCCP 4 = Telephone User Part (TUP) 5 = ISD Mtp3bAp availabilityStatus The availability status. Contain s details about the operationalState. Possible values for operational state ENAB LED: - NO_STATUS: the MO is fully operable. - DEGRADED: the corresponding destin ation is congested. - OFF_DUTY: The ASP Active procedure can no Mtp3bAp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Mtp3bAp operationalState The operational state. The opera tional state is ENABLED, if the client is allowed to send traffic. Mtp3bSlAnsi Mtp3bSlAnsiId The value component of the RDN. Mtp3bSlAnsi userLabel Label for free use. Mtp3bSlAnsi operationalState The operational state. Mtp3bSlAnsi availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Mtp3bSlAnsi tpId Reference to a termination point of the lower layer protocol. The possible MOs are: Mtp2TpAnsi for narrowband. NniSaalTp for broadband. Only one link instance can reserve one termination point instanc e. Mtp3bSlAnsi linkState The link state. The link state r epresents a bitmap which contains a combination of the following hexadecimal val ues, long within parenthesis: 0x00 (0) Available 0x01 (1) Failed 0x02 (2) Remote ly blocked 0x04 (4) Locally blocked 0x08 (8) Remotely inhibited Mtp3bSlAnsi usageState The usage state of the link. Mtp3bSlAnsi signLinkCode The signalling link code, SLC, u sed for this link. The signLinkCode for a link must be unique between the nodes,

    independent on in which linkSet the link belongs. Mtp3bSlAnsi proceduralState The procedural state of the link . Mtp3bSlAnsi autoStartLink TRUE(1) Specifies if the link should be activated at creation. Mtp3bSlChina Mtp3bSlChinaId The value component of the RDN. Mtp3bSlChina userLabel Label for free use. Mtp3bSlChina operationalState The operational state. Mtp3bSlChina availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Mtp3bSlChina autoStartLink TRUE(1) Specifies if the link should be activated at creation. Mtp3bSlChina linkState The link state. The link state r epresents a bitmap which contains a combination of the following hexadecimal val ues, long within parenthesis: 0x00 (0) Available 0x01 (1) Failed 0x02 (2) Remote ly blocked 0x04 (4) Locally blocked 0x08 (8) Remotely inhibited Mtp3bSlChina prioBeforeSio FALSE(0) Specifies if the message priority shall be inserted in an octet before the Service Indicator Octet (SIO) . Mtp3bSlChina proceduralState The procedural status of the lin k. Mtp3bSlChina signLinkCode The signalling link code, SLC, u sed for this link. The signLinkCode for a link must be unique between the nodes, independent of which link set the link belongs to. Mtp3bSlChina tpId Reference to a termination point of the lower layer protocol. The possible MOs are: Mtp2TpChina for narrowband. Mtp2HslT pChina for high speed link. NniSaalTp for broadband. Only one link instance can reserve one termination point instance. Mtp3bSlChina usageState The usage state of the link. Mtp3bSlItu Mtp3bSlItuId The value component of the RDN. Mtp3bSlItu userLabel Label for free use. Mtp3bSlItu operationalState The operational state. Mtp3bSlItu availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Mtp3bSlItu tpId Reference to a termination point of the lower layer protocol. The possible MOs are: Mtp2TpItu for narrowband. Mtp2HslTpI tu for high speed link. NniSaalTp for broadband. Only one link instance can rese rve one termination point instance. Mtp3bSlItu linkState The link state. The link state r epresents a bitmap which contains a combination of the following hexadecimal val ues, long within parenthesis: 0x00 (0) Available 0x01 (1) Failed 0x02 (2) Remote ly blocked 0x04 (4) Locally blocked 0x08 (8) Remotely inhibited Mtp3bSlItu usageState The usage state of the link. Mtp3bSlItu signLinkCode The signalling link code, SLC, u sed for this link. The signLinkCode for a link must be unique between the nodes, independent of which link set the link belongs to. Mtp3bSlItu proceduralState The procedural state of the link . Mtp3bSlItu autoStartLink TRUE(1) Specifies if the link should be activated at creation. Mtp3bSlItu prioBeforeSio FALSE(0) Specifies if the message priority shall be inserted in an octet before the Service Indicator Octet (SIO) . Mtp3bSls Mtp3bSlsId The value component of the RDN. Mtp3bSls userLabel Label for free use. Mtp3bSls operationalState The operational state. Mtp3bSls availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Mtp3bSls usageState The usage state of the link set. - ACTIVE: At least one of the contained links of the SLS is ACTIVE and no link

    is BUSY. - BUSY: At least one of the contained links is BUSY. - IDLE: All links of the SLS are IDLE. Mtp3bSls mtp3bSrsId Reference to an instance of Mtp3 bSrs. Mtp3bSls reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Mtp3bSls cLinkAnsi 0 The cLinkAnsi shall be set to tr ue for a link set with C-links between STP-pairs, to prevent SLS bit rotation in an ANSI network. This attribute is only valid for an ANSI network. Mtp3bSlTtc Mtp3bSlTtcId The value component of the RDN. Mtp3bSlTtc userLabel Label for free use. Mtp3bSlTtc tpId Reference to a termination point of the lower layer protocol. The possible MOs are: Mtp2TpTtc for narrowband. NniSaalTp for broadband. Only one link instance can reserve one termination point instance . Mtp3bSlTtc operationalState The operational state. Mtp3bSlTtc availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Mtp3bSlTtc linkState The link state. The link state r epresents a bitmap which contains a combination of the following hexadecimal val ues, long within parenthesis: 0x00 (0) Available 0x01 (1) Failed 0x02 (2) Remote ly blocked 0x04 (4) Locally blocked 0x08 (8) Remotely inhibited Mtp3bSlTtc usageState The usage state of the link. Mtp3bSlTtc signLinkCode The TTC three bit signalling lin k code (SLC) and TTC one bit A/Bindicator, used for this link. The code have to be unique in this signal link set, i.e the signallingLinkCode for all the Mtp3bS l that belongs to the same Mtp3bSls must be unique (mutual excl Mtp3bSlTtc proceduralState The procedural state of the link . Mtp3bSlTtc autoStartLink TRUE(1) Specifies if the link should be activated at creation. Mtp3bSlTtc prioBeforeSio TRUE(1) Specifies if the message priorit y shall be inserted in an octet before the Service Indicator Octet (SIO). Mtp3bSpAnsi Mtp3bSpAnsiId The value component of the RDN. Mtp3bSpAnsi userLabel Label for free use. Mtp3bSpAnsi operationalState The operational state. Mtp3bSpAnsi availabilityStatus The availability status. Contains details about the operationalState. Possible values for operational st ate ENABLED: - NO_STATUS: the MO is fully operable. Possible values for operatio nal state DISABLED: - DEPENDENCY_FAILED: based on the operational state Mtp3bSpAnsi rpuId Reference to an instance of ReliableProg ramUniter MO (RPU). Specifies the SCC stack for the MO. An RPU shall be used onl y by signaling points of the same standard. A maximum of 15 instances of this MO can reference the same RPU. Mtp3bSpAnsi networkInd NATIONAL_NETWORK(2) The network indi cator (NI) discriminates messages between different networks. When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfilled: - No external MTP3b us er can have a reference to an Mtp3bAp related to this MO. - In an IPSP configur Mtp3bSpAnsi signallingPointCode The Signalling Point Cod e (SPC) . When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfi lled: - In an IPSP configuration, in case of double exchange mode, and in an SGP configuration, all related M3uaRemoteSp instances must be LOCKED. - In Mtp3bSpAnsi testPatternSltm A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5 Specifie s the test pattern in the Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM). Allowed character s are 0-9, A-F. The pattern must contain an even number of characters. Applicabl e only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpAnsi nodeBehaviour SEP(0) The type of MTP3 signalling poin t. When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfilled: In an IPSP configuration, in case of double exchange mode, and in an SGP config uration, all related M3uaRemoteSp instances must be LOCKED. - I

    Mtp3bSpAnsi maxSizeReroutBuf 2000 The maximum size of the rerouting buffer. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Unit: 1 KB Mtp3bSpAnsi maxSizeChangeBuf 2000 The maximum size of the changeover buffer. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Unit: 1 KB Mtp3bSpAnsi transFrHandler IGNORED(0) Specifies how a Transfer Restricted (TFR) message shall be treated. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRA N configurations. Mtp3bSpAnsi sioSpare PRIO(1) Specifies how the two spare bits in the Service Information Octet (SIO) are used. Applicable only for SS7 and ESIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpAnsi statusIndInterval 4 The status indication in terval. The number of messages received from the user part, before the user part is notified that the destination is congested. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SI GTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpAnsi resendTfcInterval 8 The resend TFC and SCON interval. The number of messages received from the peer side, before the Transfe r Controlled (TFC) message or Signalling Congestion (SCON) message is sent to th e originating signalling point, indicating that the destination is cong Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority The priority data for this signa lling point. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpAnsi noOfCongestLevelForNI 3 The number of congestion levels for a national NI. If set to 1, only congestion level 1 is handled. This attribute is not applicable for an international NI. Applicable only for SS7 an d E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpAnsi routeSetCongestTestFlag 1 Specifies the congestion handling procedure to be used for national networks, which have congestion prio rities. If set to 0, the congestion handling procedure described by the TTC stan dard is applied. In this case the attribute timerTc is used. If set to Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer The timer data for this signaling point. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpAnsi reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Can be of type SccpSp. Mtp3bSpAnsi modifiedSlsRotation ACTIVATED(1) Specifies the st andard behavior of Signalling Link Set (SLS) rotation. If the attribute is set t o ACTIVATED, only two Mtp3bSr MOs can be configured under an Mtb3bSrs MO. The at tribute is valid, only if nodeBehaviour is set to SEP (Signalling End Point). I Mtp3bSpAnsi useSgwMgmtMapping FALSE(0) Specifies whethe r Associated Signalling Mode in SGW function (ASM) is activated for this signall ing point. The ASM is configured using SgwMgmtMapping MOs. Applicable only for S S7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. In an IETF M3UA configuration, this attribute Mtp3bSpAnsi noOfAttempsOfAssociationEstablishment 4 The maxi mum number of attempts to establish an M3UA association. Applicable only for an E-SIGTRAN configuration. Mtp3bSpAnsi m3uaNoOfAttempsOfDauds 0 The number of attempts t o send the Destination Audit (DAUD) message. If set to 0, the DAUD message is se nt continuously until a Destination Available (DAVA) message is received. Applic able only for an E-SIGTRAN configuration. Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaPeriodicAudit 300 Timer used for a udit procedure, applicable for IPSEP and SGW. This is the time to wait before se nding or resending the DAUD messages toward the SGW to audit the state of SS7 de stinations. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT1 5 Delay to avoid mis-seque ncing of messages when an association fails. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT3 5 Delay to avoid mis-seque ncing of messages when an association becomes active. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 s econd). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT40 8 Delay to avoid message m is-sequencing when controlled or forced rerouting is initiated. Unit: 1 deciseco

    nd (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT41 8 Timer controlling the tr affic activation delay during restart. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT42 8 Timer for the interval b etween attempts to establish an association after initial attempts were unsucces sful. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT6 5 Delay to avoid mis-seque ncing when controlled rerouting is initiated. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT8 8 Delay to inhibit sending of DUNA messages using the response method. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaTack 40 Maximum time to wait for message acknowledgement. This attribute must follow the rule: timerM3uaTack > a ssociationMaxRtx * maximumRto. The latter attributes are in the Sctp MO. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaTassocack 40 Maximum time to wait for association establisment acknowledgement. This attribute must follow th e rule: timerM3uaTassocack > (maxInitialRtrAtt + 1) * maximumRto. The latter att ributes are in the Sctp MO. It should be longer than the time a message spends Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaTc 50 Timer controlling the pe riod a route set is considered congested when an SCON message has been received. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerSlta 100 Supervision timer for SL TA message. Corresponds to timer T1 in the ITU-T Q.707 standard. Unit: 1 decisec ond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerSltm 400 Timer for sending SLTM p eriodically. Corresponds to timer T2 in the ITU-T Q.707 standard. Unit: 1 decise cond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT1 10 Delay to avoid message mis-seque ncing on changeover. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT10 400 Timer for sending RST pe riodically. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT12 10 Supervision timer for Li nk uninhibit acknowledgement. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT13 10 Supervision timer for Li nk forced uninhibit. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT14 30 Supervision timer for Li nk inhibit acknowledgement. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT15 20 Supervision timer for st art signaling route set congestiontest. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Te st Selection option is set to Use Route Set Congestion test. Guiding value 20 30. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT16 14 Timer waiting for route set congestion status update. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Test Selecto n option is set to Use Route Set Congestion test. Guiding value 14 - 22. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT17 9 Delay to avoid oscillati on of initial alignment failure and link restart. The value for this timer shoul d be less than the value for timerT2. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT2 10 Timer for waiting for a COA. Uni t: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT20 1000 Timer controlling the pe riodic resending of a Local Inhibit Test message. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 secon d). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT21 1000 Timer controlling the pe riodic resend of Remote Inhibit Test Message. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT22 600 Delay on commencement of MTP Restart to allow the node to rebuild an accurate routing table based on mes sages for adjacent nodes. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT23 40 Supervision timer for ro uting updates on MTP Restart. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).

    Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT25 300 Supervision timer for re ciept of a Traffic Restart Waiting message from an adjacent SP which is restarti ng. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT26 120 Timer controlling the pe riodic resend of Traffic Restart Waiting messages during restart of the local no de. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT27 20 The minimum time period thats the links are out of service during MTP restart. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT28 30 Timer controlling the ti me to react on a restart of an adjacent node. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT29 600 Timer for waiting for a Traffic Restart message from an adjacent node. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT3 10 Delay to avoid message mis-seque ncing on a time controlled diversion change back. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 secon d). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT30 300 Timer for not sending TF Ps and TFRs messages in response to unexpected TRA and TRW. The timer is not val id if nodeBehaviour is set to SEP. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT31 100 Timer controlling the ti me for the detection of false link congestion. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT4 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, first attempt. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT5 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, secon d attempt Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT6 9 Timer for delay to avoid message mis-sequencing on controlled rerouting. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT8 8 Timer for delay to prohibit send ing of TFP messages via the response method. This is a STP specific parameter, w hich is ignored when configured as an endpoint. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second) . Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerTBsnt 10 Waiting for BSNT value f rom MTP2 or NNI-SAAL at changeover (not standard timer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/1 0 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerTRetrieval 10 Timer for waiting for co mpletion of buffer retrieval from MTP2 or NNI-SAAL at changeover (not standard t imer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerTStart 1200 Timer for the interval b etween attempts to start a link. Timing starts when timerT17 expires (not standa rd timer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerTc 50 Timer controlling the period a r oute set is considered congested when a Transfer Controlled message has been rec eived. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioCb HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Changeback-declaration (CBD) and Changeback-acknowledgement (CBA) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the t wo spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioCo HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Changeover-order (COO) and Changeover-acknowledgement (COA) or Ex tended Changeover Order (XCO) and Extended Changeover Acknowledgement (XCA) mess ages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two s Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioEc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Emergency-changeover-order (ECO) and Emergency-changeover-acknowl edgement (ECA) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message prior ity uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioLink HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for link-related messages. The messages are: Link inhibit (LIN) Link unin hibit (LUN) Link inhibit denied (LID) Link inhibit acknowledgement (LIA) Link un inhibit acknowledgement (LUA) Link forced uninhibit (LFU) Link local inhibit te Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioRst HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr

    iority for Signalling-route-set-test signal for prohibited destination (RST) mes sage. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two sp are bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioSlt HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM) and Signalling Link Test Acknowle dgement (SLTA) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message prior ity uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioTfc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Transfer-controlled (TFC), Transfer-allowed (TFA), Transfer-prohi bited (TFP) and Transfer-restricted (TFR) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioTra HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Traffic-restart-allowed (TRA) message. When a message is sent fro m the MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioUpu HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the User part unavailable (UPU) message. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpChina Mtp3bSpChinaId The value component of the RDN. Mtp3bSpChina userLabel Label for free use. Mtp3bSpChina operationalState The operational state. Mtp3bSpChina availabilityStatus The availability status. Contains details about the operationalState. Possible values for operational st ate ENABLED: - NO_STATUS: the MO is fully operable. Possible values for operatio nal state DISABLED: - DEPENDENCY_FAILED: based on the operational state Mtp3bSpChina reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Can be of type SccpSp. Mtp3bSpChina maxSizeChangeBuf 2000 The maximum size of the changeover buffer. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Unit: 1 KB Mtp3bSpChina maxSizeReroutBuf 2000 The maximum size of the rerouting buffer. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Unit: 1 KB Mtp3bSpChina networkInd NATIONAL_NETWORK(2) The network indi cator (NI) discriminates messages between different networks. When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfilled: - No external MTP3b us er can have a reference to an Mtp3bAp related to this MO. - In an IPSP configur Mtp3bSpChina signallingPointCode The Signalling Point Cod e (SPC) . When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfi lled: - In an IPSP configuration, in case of double exchange mode, and in an SGP configuration, all related M3uaRemoteSp instances must be LOCKED. - In Mtp3bSpChina nodeBehaviour SEP(0) The type of MTP3 signalling poin t. When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfilled: In an IPSP configuration, in case of double exchange mode, and in an SGP config uration, all related M3uaRemoteSp instances must be LOCKED. - I Mtp3bSpChina noOfCongestLevelForNI 3 The number of congestion levels for a national NI. If set to 1, only congestion level 1 is handled. This attribute is not applicable for an international NI. Applicable only for SS7 an d E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpChina routeSetCongestTestFlag 1 Specifies the congestion handling procedure to be used for national networks, which have congestion prio rities. If set to 0, the congestion handling procedure described by the TTC stan dard is applied. In this case the attribute timerTc is used. If set to Mtp3bSpChina resendTfcInterval 8 The resend TFC and SCON interval. The number of messages received from the peer side, before the Transfe r Controlled (TFC) message or Signalling Congestion (SCON) message is sent to th e originating signalling point, indicating that the destination is cong Mtp3bSpChina sioSpare SPARE(0) Specifies how the two sp are bits in the Service Information Octet (SIO) are used. Applicable only for SS 7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpChina spPriority The priority data for this signa

    lling point. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpChina spTimer The timer data for this signaling point. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpChina statusIndInterval 4 The status indication in terval. The number of messages received from the user part, before the user part is notified that the destination is congested. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SI GTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpChina testPatternSltm A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5 Specifie s the test pattern in the Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM). Allowed character s are 0-9, A-F. The pattern must contain an even number of characters. Applicabl e only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpChina transFrHandler IGNORED(0) Specifies how a Transfer Restricted (TFR) message shall be treated. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRA N configurations. Mtp3bSpChina rpuId Reference to an instance of ReliableProg ramUniter MO (RPU). Specifies the SCC stack for the MO. An RPU shall be used onl y by signaling points of the same standard. A maximum of 15 instances of this MO can reference the same RPU. Mtp3bSpChina restartType ITU_96_RESTART(5) This attribute s hows what MTP3b restart standard the system follows. With China, it is possible using this attribute to set which of the ITU restart standard that shall be foll owed. 5 = ITU_96_RESTART 6 = ITU_88_RESTART This attribute is applicable only w Mtp3bSpChina useSgwMgmtMapping FALSE(0) Specifies whethe r Associated Signalling Mode in SGW function (ASM) is activated for this signall ing point. The ASM is configured using SgwMgmtMapping MOs. Applicable only for S S7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. In an IETF M3UA configuration, this attribute Mtp3bSpChina noOfAttempsOfAssociationEstablishment 4 The maxi mum number of attempts to establish an M3UA association. Applicable only for an E-SIGTRAN configuration. Mtp3bSpChina m3uaNoOfAttempsOfDauds 0 The number of attempts t o send the Destination Audit (DAUD) message. If set to 0, the DAUD message is se nt continuously until a Destination Available (DAVA) message is received. Applic able only for an E-SIGTRAN configuration. Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaPeriodicAudit 300 Timer used for a udit procedure, applicable for IPSEP and SGW. This is the time to wait before se nding or resending the DAUD messages toward the SGW to audit the state of SS7 de stinations. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaT1 5 Delay to avoid mis-seque ncing of messages when an association fails. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaT3 5 Delay to avoid mis-seque ncing of messages when an association becomes active. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 s econd). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaT40 8 Delay to avoid message m is-sequencing when controlled or forced rerouting is initiated. Unit: 1 deciseco nd (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaT41 8 Timer controlling the tr affic activation delay during restart. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaT42 8 Timer for the interval b etween attempts to establish an association after initial attempts were unsucces sful. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaT6 5 Delay to avoid mis-seque ncing when controlled rerouting is initiated. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaT8 8 Delay to inhibit sending of DUNA messages using the response method. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaTack 40 Maximum time to wait for message acknowledgement. This attribute must follow the rule: timerM3uaTack > a ssociationMaxRtx * maximumRto. The latter attributes are in the Sctp MO. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaTassocack 40 Maximum time to wait for association establisment acknowledgement. This attribute must follow th

    e rule: timerM3uaTassocack > (maxInitialRtrAtt + 1) * maximumRto. The latter att ributes are in the Sctp MO. It should be longer than the time a message spends Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaTc 50 Timer controlling the pe riod a route set is considered congested when an SCON message has been received. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerSlta 100 Supervision timer for SL TA message. Corresponds to timer T1 in the ITU-T Q.707 standard. Unit: 1 decisec ond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerSltm 400 Timer for sending SLTM p eriodically. Corresponds to timer T2 in the ITU-T Q.707 standard. Unit: 1 decise cond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT1 10 Delay to avoid message mis-seque ncing on changeover. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT10 400 Timer for sending RST pe riodically. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT12 10 Supervision timer for Li nk uninhibit acknowledgement. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT13 10 Supervision timer for Li nk forced uninhibit. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT14 30 Supervision timer for Li nk inhibit acknowledgement. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT15 20 Supervision timer for st art signaling route set congestiontest. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Te st Selection option is set to Use Route Set Congestion test. Guiding value 20 30. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT16 14 Supervision timer for ro ute set congestion status update. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Test Sel ection option is set to Use Route Set Congestion test. Guiding value 14 - 22. Un it: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT17 9 Delay to avoid oscillati on of initial alignment failure and link restart. The value for this timer shoul d be less than the value for timerT2. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT18 550 Supervision timer for th e first phase of a restarting STP. This is an STP specific parameter, which is i gnored when configured as an endpoint. The value for this timer should be less t han the value for timerT20. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT19 680 Timer controlling the re sponse of the receipt of a traffic restart message from an adjacent node. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT2 10 Timer for waiting for a COA. Uni t: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT20 600 Overall MTP restart time r at the restarting MTP. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT21 640 Overall MTP restart time r at an adjacent signalling point to a restarting MTP. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT22 2500 Timer for test of local inhibit. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT23 2500 Remote inhibit test time r. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT3 10 Delay to avoid message mis-seque ncing on a time controlled diversion change back. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 secon d). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT4 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, first attempt. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT5 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, secon d attempt Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT6 9 Timer for delay to avoid message mis-sequencing on controlled rerouting. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT8 8 Timer for delay to prohibit send

    ing of TFP messages via the response method. This is a STP specific parameter, w hich is ignored when configured as an endpoint. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second) . Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerTBsnt 10 Waiting for BSNT value f rom MTP2 or NNI-SAAL at changeover (not standard timer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/1 0 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerTRetrieval 10 Timer for waiting for co mpletion of buffer retrieval from MTP2 or NNI-SAAL at changeover (not standard t imer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerTStart 1200 Timer for the interval b etween attempts to start a link. Timing starts when timerT17 expires (not standa rd timer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerTc 50 Timer controlling the period a r oute set is considered congested when a Transfer Controlled message has been rec eived. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioCb HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Changeback-declaration (CBD) and Changeback-acknowledgement (CBA) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the t wo spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioCo HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Changeover-order (COO) and Changeover-acknowledgement (COA) or Ex tended Changeover Order (XCO) and Extended Changeover Acknowledgement (XCA) mess ages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two s Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioEc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Emergency-changeover-order (ECO) and Emergency-changeover-acknowl edgement (ECA) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message prior ity uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioLink HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for link-related messages. The messages are: Link inhibit (LIN) Link unin hibit (LUN) Link inhibit denied (LID) Link inhibit acknowledgement (LIA) Link un inhibit acknowledgement (LUA) Link forced uninhibit (LFU) Link local inhibit te Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioRst HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for Signalling-route-set-test signal for prohibited destination (RST) mes sage. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two sp are bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioSlt HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM) and Signalling Link Test Acknowle dgement (SLTA) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message prior ity uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioTfc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Transfer-controlled (TFC), Transfer-allowed (TFA), Transfer-prohi bited (TFP) and Transfer-restricted (TFR) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioTra HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Traffic-restart-allowed (TRA) message. When a message is sent fro m the MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioUpu HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the User part unavailable (UPU) message. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpItu Mtp3bSpItuId The value component of the RDN. Mtp3bSpItu userLabel Label for free use. Mtp3bSpItu operationalState The operational state. Mtp3bSpItu availabilityStatus The availability status. Contains details about the operationalState. Possible values for operational st ate ENABLED: - NO_STATUS: the MO is fully operable. Possible values for operatio nal state DISABLED: - DEPENDENCY_FAILED: based on the operational state Mtp3bSpItu networkInd NATIONAL_NETWORK(2) The network indi cator (NI) discriminates messages between different networks. When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfilled: - No external MTP3b us er can have a reference to an Mtp3bAp related to this MO. - In an IPSP configur

    Mtp3bSpItu signallingPointCode The Signalling Point Cod e (SPC) . When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfi lled: - In an IPSP configuration, in case of double exchange mode, and in an SGP configuration, all related M3uaRemoteSp instances must be LOCKED. - In Mtp3bSpItu version ITU_T_07_96(2) Specifies the version of the MTP 3 ITU-T standard. Applicable only for an SS7 configuration. Mtp3bSpItu nodeBehaviour SEP(0) The type of MTP3 signalling poin t. When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfilled: In an IPSP configuration, in case of double exchange mode, and in an SGP config uration, all related M3uaRemoteSp instances must be LOCKED. - I Mtp3bSpItu noOfCongestLevelForNI 3 The number of congestion levels for a national NI. If set to 1, only congestion level 1 is handled. This attribute is not applicable for an international NI. Applicable only for SS7 an d E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpItu routeSetCongestTestFlag 1 Specifies the congestion handling procedure to be used for national networks, which have congestion prio rities. If set to 0, the congestion handling procedure described by the TTC stan dard is applied. In this case the attribute timerTc is used. If set to Mtp3bSpItu resendTfcInterval 8 The resend TFC and SCON interval. The number of messages received from the peer side, before the Transfe r Controlled (TFC) message or Signalling Congestion (SCON) message is sent to th e originating signalling point, indicating that the destination is cong Mtp3bSpItu maxSizeReroutBuf 2000 The maximum size of the rerouting buffer. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Unit: 1 KB Mtp3bSpItu maxSizeChangeBuf 2000 The maximum size of the changeover buffer. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Unit: 1 KB Mtp3bSpItu transFrHandler IGNORED(0) Specifies how a Transfer Restricted (TFR) message shall be treated. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRA N configurations. Mtp3bSpItu sioSpare PRIO(1) Specifies how the two spare bits in the Service Information Octet (SIO) are used. Applicable only for SS7 and ESIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpItu statusIndInterval 4 The status indication in terval. The number of messages received from the user part, before the user part is notified that the destination is congested. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SI GTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpItu testPatternSltm A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5 Specifie s the test pattern in the Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM). Allowed character s are 0-9, A-F. The pattern must contain an even number of characters. Applicabl e only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpItu spPriority The priority data for this signa lling point. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpItu spTimer The timer data for this signaling point. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpItu rpuId Reference to an instance of ReliableProg ramUniter MO (RPU). Specifies the SCC stack for the MO. An RPU shall be used onl y by signaling points of the same standard. A maximum of 15 instances of this MO can reference the same RPU. Mtp3bSpItu reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Can be of type SccpSp. Mtp3bSpItu useSgwMgmtMapping FALSE(0) Specifies whethe r Associated Signalling Mode in SGW function (ASM) is activated for this signall ing point. The ASM is configured using SgwMgmtMapping MOs. Applicable only for S S7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. In an IETF M3UA configuration, this attribute Mtp3bSpItu noOfAttempsOfAssociationEstablishment 4 The maxi mum number of attempts to establish an M3UA association. Applicable only for an E-SIGTRAN configuration. Mtp3bSpItu m3uaNoOfAttempsOfDauds 0 The number of attempts t

    o send the Destination Audit (DAUD) message. If set to 0, the DAUD message is se nt continuously until a Destination Available (DAVA) message is received. Applic able only for an E-SIGTRAN configuration. Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioCb HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Changeback-declaration (CBD) and Changeback-acknowledgement (CBA) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the t wo spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioCo HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Changeover-order (COO) and Changeover-acknowledgement (COA) or Ex tended Changeover Order (XCO) and Extended Changeover Acknowledgement (XCA) mess ages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two s Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioEc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Emergency-changeover-order (ECO) and Emergency-changeover-acknowl edgement (ECA) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message prior ity uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioLink HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for link-related messages. The messages are: Link inhibit (LIN) Link unin hibit (LUN) Link inhibit denied (LID) Link inhibit acknowledgement (LIA) Link un inhibit acknowledgement (LUA) Link forced uninhibit (LFU) Link local inhibit te Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioRst HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for Signalling-route-set-test signal for prohibited destination (RST) mes sage. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two sp are bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioSlt HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM) and Signalling Link Test Acknowle dgement (SLTA) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message prior ity uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioTfc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Transfer-controlled (TFC), Transfer-allowed (TFA), Transfer-prohi bited (TFP) and Transfer-restricted (TFR) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioTra HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Traffic-restart-allowed (TRA) message. When a message is sent fro m the MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioUpu HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the User part unavailable (UPU) message. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaPeriodicAudit 300 Timer used for a udit procedure, applicable for IPSEP and SGW. This is the time to wait before se nding or resending the DAUD messages toward the SGW to audit the state of SS7 de stinations. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT1 5 Delay to avoid mis-seque ncing of messages when an association fails. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT3 5 Delay to avoid mis-seque ncing of messages when an association becomes active. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 s econd). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT40 8 Delay to avoid message m is-sequencing when controlled or forced rerouting is initiated. Unit: 1 deciseco nd (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT41 8 Timer controlling the tr affic activation delay during restart. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT42 8 Timer for the interval b etween attempts to establish an association after initial attempts were unsucces sful. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT6 5 Delay to avoid mis-seque ncing when controlled rerouting is initiated. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT8 8 Delay to inhibit sending of DUNA messages using the response method. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaTack 40 Maximum time to wait for message acknowledgement. This attribute must follow the rule: timerM3uaTack > a

    ssociationMaxRtx * maximumRto. The latter attributes are in the Sctp MO. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaTassocack 40 Maximum time to wait for association establisment acknowledgement. This attribute must follow th e rule: timerM3uaTassocack > (maxInitialRtrAtt + 1) * maximumRto. The latter att ributes are in the Sctp MO. It should be longer than the time a message spends Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaTc 50 Timer controlling the pe riod a route set is considered congested when an SCON message has been received. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerSlta 100 Supervision timer for SL TA message. Corresponds to timer T1 in the ITU-T Q.707 standard. Unit: 1 decisec ond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerSltm 400 Timer for sending SLTM p eriodically. Corresponds to timer T2 in the ITU-T Q.707 standard. Unit: 1 decise cond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT1 10 Delay to avoid message mis-seque ncing on changeover. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT10 400 Timer for sending RST pe riodically. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT12 10 Supervision timer for Li nk uninhibit acknowledgement. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT13 10 Supervision timer for Li nk forced uninhibit. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT14 30 Supervision timer for Li nk inhibit acknowledgement. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT15 20 Supervision timer for st art signaling route set congestiontest. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Te st Selection option is set to Use Route Set Congestion test. Guiding value 20 30. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT16 14 Supervision timer for ro ute set congestion status update. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Test Sel ection option is set to Use Route Set Congestion test. Guiding value 14 - 22. Un it: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT17 9 Delay to avoid oscillati on of initial alignment failure and link restart. The value for this timer shoul d be less than the value for timerT2. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT18 550 Supervision timer for th e first phase of a restarting STP. This is an STP specific parameter, which is i gnored when configured as an endpoint. The value for this timer should be less t han the value for timerT20. If the attribute version is set to ITU_T_88 Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT19 680 Timer controlling the re sponse of the receipt of a traffic restart message from an adjacent node. If the attribute version is set to ITU_T_88, the recommended value is 40. Unit: 1 deci second (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT2 10 Timer for waiting for a COA. Uni t: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT20 600 Overall MTP restart time r at the restarting MTP. If the attribute version is set to ITU_T_88, the recomm ended value is 40. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT21 640 Overall MTP restart time r at an adjacent signalling point to a restarting MTP. If the attribute version is set to ITU_T_88, the recommended value is 300. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 secon d) Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT22 2500 Timer for test of local inhibit. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT23 2500 Remote inhibit test time r. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT3 10 Delay to avoid message mis-seque ncing on a time controlled diversion change back. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 secon d).

    Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT4 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, first attempt. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT5 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, first attempt. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT6 9 Timer for delay to avoid message mis-sequencing on controlled rerouting. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT8 8 Timer for delay to prohibit send ing of TFP messages via the response method. This is a STP specific parameter, w hich is ignored when configured as an endpoint. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second) . Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerTBsnt 10 Waiting for BSNT value f rom MTP2 or NNI-SAAL at changeover (not standard timer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/1 0 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerTRetrieval 10 Timer for waiting for co mpletion of buffer retrieval from MTP2 or NNI-SAAL at changeover (not standard t imer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerTStart 1200 Timer for the interval b etween attempts to start a link. Timing starts when timerT17 expires (not standa rd timer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerTc 50 Timer controlling the period a r oute set is considered congested when a Transfer Controlled message has been rec eived. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc noOfAttempsOfAssociationEstablishment 4 The maxi mum number of attempts to establish an M3UA association. Applicable only for an E-SIGTRAN configuration. Mtp3bSpTtc Mtp3bSpTtcId The value component of the RDN. Mtp3bSpTtc userLabel Label for free use. Mtp3bSpTtc operationalState The operational state. Mtp3bSpTtc availabilityStatus The availability status. Contains details about the operationalState. Possible values for operational st ate ENABLED: - NO_STATUS: the MO is fully operable. Possible values for operatio nal state DISABLED: - DEPENDENCY_FAILED: based on the operational state Mtp3bSpTtc signallingPointCode The Signalling Point Cod e (SPC) . When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfi lled: - In an IPSP configuration, in case of double exchange mode, and in an SGP configuration, all related M3uaRemoteSp instances must be LOCKED. - In Mtp3bSpTtc nodeBehaviour SEP(0) The type of MTP3 signalling poin t. When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfilled: In an IPSP configuration, in case of double exchange mode, and in an SGP config uration, all related M3uaRemoteSp instances must be LOCKED. - I Mtp3bSpTtc routeSetCongestTestFlag 0 Specifies the congestion handling procedure to be used for national networks, which have congestion prio rities. If set to 0, the congestion handling procedure described by the TTC stan dard is applied. In this case the attribute timerTc is used. If set to Mtp3bSpTtc resendTfcInterval 8 The resend TFC and SCON interval. The number of messages received from the peer side, before the Transfe r Controlled (TFC) message or Signalling Congestion (SCON) message is sent to th e originating signalling point, indicating that the destination is cong Mtp3bSpTtc maxSizeReroutBuf 2000 The maximum size of the rerouting buffer. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Unit: 1 KB Mtp3bSpTtc maxSizeChangeBuf 2000 The maximum size of the changeover buffer. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Unit: 1 KB Mtp3bSpTtc statusIndInterval 4 The status indication in terval. The number of messages received from the user part, before the user part is notified that the destination is congested. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SI GTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpTtc testPatternSltm 7711 Specifies the test pattern in th e Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM). Allowed characters are 0-9, A-F. The patt

    ern must contain an even number of characters. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIG TRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority The priority data for this signa lling point. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpTtc rpuId Reference to an instance of ReliableProg ramUniter MO (RPU). Specifies the SCC stack for the MO. An RPU shall be used onl y by signaling points of the same standard. A maximum of 15 instances of this MO can reference the same RPU. Mtp3bSpTtc reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Can be of type SccpSp. Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer The timer data for this signaling point. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpTtc noOfCongestLevelForNI 3 The number of congestion levels for a national NI. If set to 1, only congestion level 1 is handled. This attribute is not applicable for an international NI. Applicable only for SS7 an d E-SIGTRAN configurations. Mtp3bSpTtc useSgwMgmtMapping FALSE(0) Specifies whethe r Associated Signalling Mode in SGW function (ASM) is activated for this signall ing point. The ASM is configured using SgwMgmtMapping MOs. Applicable only for S S7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. In an IETF M3UA configuration, this attribute Mtp3bSpTtc m3uaNoOfAttempsOfDauds 0 The number of attempts t o send the Destination Audit (DAUD) message. If set to 0, the DAUD message is se nt continuously until a Destination Available (DAVA) message is received. Applic able only for an E-SIGTRAN configuration. Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua The M3UA timer data for this sig naling point. Applicable only for an E-SIGTRAN configuration. Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerSrt 100 Timer for waiting for Si gnalling Route Test Acknowledgement. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT1 10 Delay to avoid message mis-seque ncing on changeover. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT10 400 Timer for sending RST pe riodically. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT15 20 Supervision timer for st art signaling route set congestiontest. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Te st Selection option is set to Use Route Set Congestion test. Guiding value 20 30. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT16 14 Supervision timer for ro ute set congestion status update. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Test Sel ecton option is set to Use Route Set Congestion test. Guiding value 14 - 22. Uni t: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT17 9 Delay to avoid oscillati on of initial alignment failure and link restart. The value for this timer shoul d be less than the value for timerT2. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).. Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT2 10 Timer for waiting for a COO or a COA. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT3 10 Delay to avoid message mis-seque ncing on a time controlled diversion change back. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 secon d). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT4 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, first attempt. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT6 9 Timer for delay to avoid message mis-sequencing on controlled rerouting. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT8 8 Timer for delay to prohibit send ing of TFP messages via the response method. This is a STP specific parameter, w hich is ignored when configured as an endpoint. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second) . Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerTBsnt 10 Waiting for BSNT value f rom MTP2 or NNI-SAAL at changeover (not standard timer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/1 0 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerTRetrieval 10 Timer for waiting for co

    mpletion of buffer retrieval from MTP2 or NNI-SAAL at changeover (not standard t imer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerTStart 1200 Timer for the interval b etween attempts to start a link. Timing starts when timerT17 expires (not standa rd timer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerTc 50 Timer controlling the period a r oute set is considered congested when a Transfer Controlled message has been rec eived. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority.prioCb HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Changeback-declaration (CBD) and Changeback-acknowledgement (CBA) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the t wo spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority.prioCo HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Changeover-order (COO) and Changeover-acknowledgement (COA) or Ex tended Changeover Order (XCO) and Extended Changeover Acknowledgement (XCA) mess ages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two s Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority.prioEc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Emergency-changeover-order (ECO) and Emergency-changeover-acknowl edgement (ECA) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message prior ity uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority.prioRst HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for Signalling-route-set-test signal for prohibited destination (RST) mes sage. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two sp are bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority.prioRt HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for signalling route test (SRT/SRA) messages. Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority.prioTfc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the pr iority for the Transfer-controlled (TFC), Transfer-allowed (TFA), Transfer-prohi bited (TFP) and Transfer-restricted (TFR) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaPeriodicAudit 300 Timer us ed for audit procedure, applicable for IPSEP and SGW. This is the time to wait b efore sending or resending the DAUD messages toward the SGW to audit the state o f SS7 destinations. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT1 5 Delay to avoid mis-seque ncing of messages when an association fails. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT3 5 Delay to avoid mis-seque ncing of messages when an association becomes active. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 s econd). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT40 8 Delay to avoid m essage mis-sequencing when controlled or forced rerouting is initiated. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT41 8 Timer controllin g the traffic activation delay during restart. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT42 8 Timer for the in terval between attempts to establish an association after initial attempts were unsuccessful. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT6 5 Delay to avoid mis-seque ncing when controlled rerouting is initiated. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT8 8 Delay to inhibit sending of DUNA messages using the response method. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaTack 40 Maximum time to wait for message acknowledgement. This attribute must follow the rule: timerM3ua Tack > associationMaxRtx * maximumRto. The latter attributes are in the Sctp MO. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaTassocack 40 Maximum time to wait for association establisment acknowledgement. This attribute must follow th e rule: timerM3uaTassocack > (maxInitialRtrAtt + 1) * maximumRto. The latter att ributes are in the Sctp MO. It should be longer than the time a message spends Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaTc 50 Timer controlling the pe

    riod a route set is considered congested when an SCON message has been received. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second). Mtp3bSr Mtp3bSrId The value component of the RDN. Mtp3bSr userLabel Label for free use. Mtp3bSr linkSetM3uId Reference to an instance of MTP3bSls or M3uAssociation. Mtp3bSr operationalState The operational state. Mtp3bSr usageState The usage state of the route. For direct routes, the value of the attribute is the same as for usageState in the related Mtp3bSls. For routes via STP or SGW, usageState is determined by traffic manage ment messages: - ACTIVE: A TFA or a DAVA is received. Mtp3bSr availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Mtp3bSr priority The priority of the alternative route. T he traffic is directed to the highest priority route(s) available in the route s et. If more than one route has the same priority within a route set, loadsharing is permitted between these routes. The value 1 is the Mtp3bSr routeBlockingState 0 The blocking state of the route. Mtp3bSrs Mtp3bSrsId The value component of the RDN. Mtp3bSrs userLabel Label for free use. Mtp3bSrs operationalState The operational state. T he operational state is ENABLED, if the destination is available via SS7 and/or IP. Mtp3bSrs reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Mtp3bSrs destPointCode The destination point code (DPC) . The Destination Point Code in a Route Set has to be unique within each Signali ng Point. The format of this attribute must be aligned with the standard of the parent Mtp3bSp: ANSI, China, ITU or TTC. In an IETF M3UA config Mtp3bSrs congestedLevel In SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurati ons, this attribute indicates whether the Route Set is congested. In an IETF M3U A configuration, it indicates whether the remote destination is congested. Mtp3bSrs autoReroute 0 Deprecated: Has no functional be havior. This attribute is Obsolete and will always return false. Mtp3bSrs preferredBearer SS7(1) The preferred bearer type for ro uting outgoing messages. The specified bearer is used if available.A rerouting b etween bearers is performed automatically. Only the SS7 value is applicable for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. MultiCarrier MultiCarrierId Naming attribute. Contains the v alue part of the RDN. MultiCarrier multiCarrierSupport Indicates if all conditi ons are met for this cell to act as a serving HS-DSCH cell for Multi Carrier con nections. MultiCarrier cellRefsDl References to UtranCells that ma y act as secondary serving HS-DSCH cells, as reported by the RBS. NbapCommon NbapCommonId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. NbapCommon administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the signaling link. NbapCommon operationalState The operational state of the NBAP common signaling bearer. NbapCommon availabilityStatus The availability status of the NBAP common signaling bearer.More than one of the following conditions ca n apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWE ROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set t NbapCommon userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. NbapCommon activeUniSaalTpRef Reference to the UniSaal Tp Managed Object that represents the active UNI SAAL termination point. NbapCommon standbyUniSaalTpRef Reference to the UniSaal

    Tp Managed Object that represents the stand-by UNI SAAL termination point. NbapCommon activeBearer Specifies which UniSaalTp is act ive when ATM is transport bearer alt. that Sctp is active when IPv4 is bearer.Po ssible values: ? NONE = No active bearer. ? UNI_SAAL_TP_REF1 = Attribute uniSaal TpRef1 is used. ? UNI_SAAL_TP_REF2 = Attribute uniSaalTpRef2 is NbapCommon auditRetransmissionT 5 Time between successive audit retransmissions.Unit: 1 s Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Re f. [CB_ICC] NbapCommon availabilityStatus The availability status of the protocol termination. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_T EST ? DEPENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF _DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: Integrate NbapCommon l2EstablishReqRetryT 1 Time between successive attempts to establish layer 2 communication.Unit: 1 s Use cases: Integrate RBS i n the Radio Network Ref. [CB_ICC] NbapCommon l2EstablishSupervisionT 30 Maximum allowed time to establish layer 2 communication.Unit: 1 s Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Ref. [CB_ICC] NbapCommon l3EstablishSupervisionT 30 Maximum allowed time to establish NBAP communication: Successfull establishment of layer 2 followed by a successful audit procedure. Unit: 1 s Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Net work Ref. [CB_ICC] NbapCommon NbapCommonId NbapCommon operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Rad io Network Ref. [CB_ICC] NbapCommon uniSaalTpRef1 Reference to the UniSaalTp insta nce used for the primary signalling bearer. The reference is only used if the co ntrolPlaneTransportOption is set to ATM. Dependencies: Must not be set to the sa me value as uniSaalTpRef2 on this MO, and not to the same value NbapCommon uniSaalTpRef2 Reference to the UniSaalTp insta nce used for the secondary signalling bearer. The reference is only used if the controlPlaneTransportOption is set to ATM. Dependencies: Must not be set to the same value as uniSaalTpRef1 on this MO, and not to the same val NbapCommon userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM ] NbapCommon sctpRef Reference to the Sctp instance used. The reference is only used if the controlPlaneTransportOption is set to IPv4. Use c ases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Requirement: IUBCPIP_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:01 219 Rev:A Ref. [CB_ICC] NbapDedicated NbapDedicatedId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. NbapDedicated administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the signaling link. NbapDedicated operationalState The operational state of the NBAP dedicated signaling bearer. NbapDedicated availabilityStatus The availability status of the NBAP dedicated signaling bearer. More than one of the following condition s can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (s NbapDedicated userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. NbapDedicated activeUniSaalTpRef Reference to the UniSaal Tp Managed Object that represents the active UNI SAAL termination point. NbapDedicated standbyUniSaalTpRef Reference to the UniSaal Tp Managed Object that represents the stand-by UNI SAAL termination point. NbapDedicated activeBearer Specifies which UniSaalTp is act ive when ATM is transport bearer alt. that Sctp is active when IPv4 is bearer.Po ssible values: ? NONE = No active bearer. ? UNI_SAAL_TP_REF1 = Attribute uniSaal TpRef1 is used. ? UNI_SAAL_TP_REF2 = Attribute uniSaalTpRef2 is

    NbapDedicated availabilityStatus The availability status of the protocol termination. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_T EST ? DEPENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF _DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: Integrate NbapDedicated l2EstablishReqRetryT 1 Time between successive attempts to establish layer 2 communication. Unit: 1 s Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Ref. [CB_ICC] NbapDedicated l2EstablishSupervisionT 30 Maximum allowed time to establish layer 2 communication. Unit: 1 s Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Ref. [CB_ICC] NbapDedicated NbapDedicatedId NbapDedicated operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Rad io Network Ref. [CB_ICC] NbapDedicated uniSaalTpRef1 Reference to the UniSaalTp insta nce used for the primary signalling bearer. The reference is only used if the co ntrolPlaneTransportOption is set to ATM. Dependencies: Must not be set to the sa me value as uniSaalTpRef2 on this MO, and not to the same value NbapDedicated uniSaalTpRef2 Reference to the UniSaalTp insta nce used for the secondary signalling bearer. The reference is only used if the controlPlaneTransportOption is set to ATM. Dependencies: Must not be set to the same value as uniSaalTpRef1 on this MO, and not to the same val NbapDedicated userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM ] NbapDedicated sctpRef Reference to the Sctp instance used. The reference is only used if the controlPlaneTransportOption is set to IPv4. Use c ases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Requirement: IUBCPIP_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:01 221 Rev:A Ref. [CB_ICC] Ncli administrativeState 0 The administrative state. The NC LI Server is stopped by setting the administrativeState to LOCKED. This will clo se down all ongoing NCLI sessions immediately. When setting the administrativeSt ate to SHUTTING_DOWN, 1800 seconds (30 minutes) will elapse bef Ncli NcliId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. Ncli operationalState The operational state. Ncli administrativeState 0 The administrative state. The NC LI Server is stopped by setting the administrativeState to LOCKED. This will clo se down all ongoing NCLI sessions immediately. When setting the administrativeSt ate to SHUTTING_DOWN, 1800 seconds (30 minutes) will elapse bef Ncli NcliId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. Ncli operationalState The operational state. Ncli administrativeState 0 The administrative state. The NC LI Server is stopped by setting the administrativeState to LOCKED. This will clo se down all ongoing NCLI sessions immediately. When setting the administrativeSt ate to SHUTTING_DOWN, 1800 seconds (30 minutes) will elapse bef Ncli NcliId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. Ncli operationalState The operational state. NniSaalProfile NniSaalProfileId The value component of t he RDN. NniSaalProfile userLabel Label for free use. NniSaalProfile reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. NniSaalProfile profileData Struct containing profile data. NniSaalProfile profileData.congestionLevel1Abatement 60 When the current send buffer occupancy decreases below congestionLevel1Abatement, the MT P3b congestion status of the internal signalling link changes from 1 to 0. This attribute must follow the rule, 0 <= congestionLevel1Abatement < congestionLevel 1OnSet.

    NniSaalProfile profileData.congestionLevel1OnSet 70 When the current send buffer occupancy increases above the congestionLevel1Onset, a cong estion indication is sent to MTP3b and the MTP3b congestion status of the intern al signalling link changes from 0 to 1. NniSaalProfile profileData.congestionLevel2Abatement 71 When the current send buffer occupancy decreases below congestionLevel2Abatement, but is not below congestionLevel1Abatement, the MTP3b congestion status of the interna l signalling link changes from 2 to 1. This attribute shall follow the rule, con gestion NniSaalProfile profileData.congestionLevel2OnSet 80 When the current send buffer occupancy increases above the congestionLevel2Onset, a cong estion indication is sent to MTP3b and the MTP3b congestion status of the intern al signalling link changes from 1 to 2. NniSaalProfile profileData.congestionLevel3Abatement 81 When the current send buffer occupancy decreases below congestionLevel3Abatement, but is not below congestionLevel2Abatement, the MTP3b congestion status of the interna l signalling link changes from 3 to 2. This attribute must follow the rule, cong estionL NniSaalProfile profileData.congestionLevel3OnSet 90 When the current send buffer occupancy increases above the congestionLevel3Onset, a cong estion indication is sent to MTP3b and the MTP3b congestion status of the intern al signalling link changes from 2 to 3. NniSaalProfile profileData.discardMessagesLevel1 80 When the current send buffer occupancy exceeds discardMessagesLevel1, but does not excee d discardMessagesLevel2, the MTP3b will discard messages with priority 0. This a ttribute must follow the rule, congestionLevel1OnSet < discardMessagesLevel1 <= congest NniSaalProfile profileData.discardMessagesLevel2 90 When the current send buffer occupancy exceeds discardMessagesLevel2, but does not excee d discardMessagesLevel3, the MTP3b will discard messages with priority 0 and 1. This attribute must follow the rule, congestionLevel2OnSet < discardMessagesLeve l2 <= c NniSaalProfile profileData.discardMessagesLevel3 100 When the current send buffer occupancy exceeds discardMessagesLevel3, the MTP3b will dis card messages with priority 0, 1 and 2. This attribute must follow the rule, con gestionLevel3OnSet < discardMessagesLevel3 <= 100. NniSaalProfile profileData.initialCredit The initial numb er of credits. For 64 kbit/s, use 30. This attribute must follow the rule, initi alCredit > maxPD. Unit: number of transmitted PDUs. NniSaalProfile profileData.maxCC 4 The maximum number of re transmissions of Protocol Data Units (PDU): BGN, END, ER, RS. Unit: number of tr ansmitted PDUs. NniSaalProfile profileData.maxNRP 0 The maximum number of re transmissions of PDUs during proving to consider proving successful. Unit: numbe r of transmitted PDUs. NniSaalProfile profileData.maxPD The maximum number of SD PDUs before a poll is sent. This attribute must follow the rule, maxPD < initia lCredit. Unit: number of transmitted PDUs. NniSaalProfile profileData.maxStat 67 The maximum number, odd integer value, of list elements placed in a STAT PDU. The maxStat attribute is c ontrolled by the AAL5 maximum SDU size defined in the Aal5TpVccTp MO. The maxSta t times 4 (octets) plus additional 12 octets (for header) must not exce NniSaalProfile profileData.mps 2 The Management Proving Status (M PS) which is used to determine whether for proving is done during setup of the S AAL connection. mps = 0 (NORMAL) If set to 0, normal proving is done regardless of the incoming SSCOP-UU or the local User Part Proving Status NniSaalProfile profileData.nrOfPDUsDuringProving 1000 The leng th of proving in terms of number of transmitted PDUs (n1). This attribute must f ollow the rule, timerT2 > 2 * nrOfPDUsDuringProving * timerT3 * t3Factor. The t3 Factor describes (approximately) the relationship between the configured value a

    nd the NniSaalProfile profileData.timerCC 200 The timer determining th e time between retransmission of PDUs: BGN, END, ER, RS. It should be more than the roundtrip delay. Unit: 1ms NniSaalProfile profileData.timerIdle The timer running when t here are no PDUs to transmit and there are no outstanding acknowledgements or da ta pending for credit. When this timer is running, no POLL PDUs are sent. This t imer should be significantly greater than the value of timerKeepAlive. NniSaalProfile profileData.timerKeepAlive The timer to be used during a period of no outstanding acknowledgements or new data pending rece ipt of credit. At timeout, the peer is polled to see if it is alive. The timer d etermines the interval between polls in the transient phase. This timer should NniSaalProfile profileData.timerNoCredit 1500 The maximum time of no credit. If the timer expires, the assured data transfer mode is released. Unit: 1ms NniSaalProfile profileData.timerNoResponse The timer to det ermine the maximum time interval, during which reception of at least one STAT PD U is expected as a response to a poll. This attribute must follow the rule, time rNoResponse >= timerKeepAlive + one roundtrip delay Unit: 1ms NniSaalProfile profileData.timerPoll The timer that specifies the maximum time between sending of POLL PDUs to the peer receiver during other traffic (active phase). Unit: 1ms NniSaalProfile profileData.timerRepeatSrec 3600000 The timer which is set whenever a report of SSCOP recovery is received from the SSCF. If the tim er is running when another report of recovery is received, the assured data tran sfer mode is released. If the timer expires, nothing is done. Unit: 1ms NniSaalProfile profileData.timerT1 5000 The timer between the li nk release action and the next link re-establish action during the alignment. Wh entimer T1 expires, a new attempt is made to set up assured data transfer mode t o the peer. Unit: 1ms NniSaalProfile profileData.timerT2 30000 The total time that SSCF attempts alignment. When timer T2expires, the alignment procedure is interrupte d. Unit: 1ms NniSaalProfile profileData.timerT3 5 The time between proving PDUs. The timer is set so that loading of the signalling link is approximately 50% of it's nominal rate. This attribute must follow the rule, timerT2 > 2 * nrO fPDUsDuringProving * timerT3 * t3Factor. The t3Factor describes (approx NniSaalTp NniSaalTpId The value component of the RDN. NniSaalTp userLabel Label for free use. NniSaalTp operationalState The operational state. NniSaalTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. NniSaalTp nniSaalProfileId The Reference to an inst ance of a NniSaalProfile MO. The maxStat attribute defined in the NniSaalProfile MO is controlled by the AAL5 SDU size defined in the Aal5TpVccTp MO. See the de scription of the maxStat attribute in the NniSaalProfile MO. The consis NniSaalTp aal5TpVccTpId The reference to an instance of an Aal5TpVccTp MO. The AAL5 termination point must terminate on a main processor . NniSaalTp maxSduSize 276 The maximum SAAL SDU size. The a ttribute is dependent on the maximum SDU size forAAL5, defined in Aal5TpVccTp. T he attribute, maxSduSize must be 4 bytes less than the maximum SDU size forAAL5 (the lower of the two attributes, fromUserMaxSduSize and toUser NodeBFunction nodeBFunctionIubLink Reference to related Iub Link instance. (Iub instance in RBS) FDN according to [9] and [20]. For CORBA us ers, GenericNRIRPSystem::AttributeTypes::MOReference, NodeBFunction analogUlAlignIsActive 0 Indicates whether or not the analog uplink delay alignment function is activated. 0=NOT ACTIVATED 1=ACTI VATED Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00852 Rev:A Ref. [FS_RSY] NodeBFunction berAllowed 35 Pilot BER threshold value. Defin

    es the Pilot BER threshold value (percentage of erroneous pilot bits per radio f rames) to be used for UL synchronisation detection and supervision. Unit: 1% Tak es effect: Only for new radio link sets. User category: Ericsso NodeBFunction branchDiffAbsTime 0 Branch Difference Absolu te Time which defines at what time of the day each measurement must start. Ref. [FS_RSY] NodeBFunction branchDiffMeasTime 0 Branch Difference Measur ement Time, which defines the period of each measurement. Ref. [FS_RSY] NodeBFunction gpehOverloadProtEv With the attribute gpehO verloadProtEv the RBS registers occuring measures taken due to an overload event . Measures in this case are reject a job, to overcome an impending overload situ ation. TX board, RAX board and Main Processor (MP) can initiate the eve NodeBFunction gpehRlsSupFailSyncEv With the attribute gpehR lsSupFailSyncEv the RBS registers when RLS supervision have dectected that the s ynchronization process failed during the sync state WAIT. The out of sync event is identified with the Event ID = 261. Note! This attribute is only t NodeBFunction gpehRlsSupFoundSyncEv With the attribute gpehR lsSupFoundSyncEv the RBS registers when RLS supervison have detected that synchr onization has been acheived. The In-Sync event is identified with the Event ID = 260. Note! This attribute is only to be used by the Performance Manage NodeBFunction gpehRlsSupLostSyncEv With the attribute gpehR lsSupLostSyncEv the RBS registers when the RLS supervision have detected that th at the RBS has lost synchronization.. The lost sync event is identified with the Event ID = 259. Note! This attribute is only to be used by the Perform NodeBFunction gpehRlsSupStartedEv With the gpehRlsSupStart edEv the RBS registers when the RLS supervision started the synchronization proc ess. The sync started event is identified with Event ID = 257. Note! This attrib ute is only to be used by the Performance Management Service. It must N NodeBFunction gpehRlsSupSyncEv With the attribute gpehR lsSupSyncEv the RBS registers when RLS suspervision have detected that synchroni zation is achieved. The in-sync event is identified with Event ID = 258. Note! T his attribute is only to be used by the Performance Management Service. NodeBFunction gpehUlSyncReachedEv With the attribute gpehU lSyncReachedEv the RBS registers when UL synchronization is initiated. As an act ion on this event the UL inner loop power control algorithm is started. The UL s ynchronization event is identified with the Event ID = 256. Note! This NodeBFunction mpOverloadProtectionIsActive TRUE(1) Status of the MP overload protection mechanism. Use cases: OLP_UC02&03 User category: Ericsson p ersonnel Ref. [FS_OLP] NodeBFunction mpOverloadProtSupInterval 1000 Interval for che cking high load. Use cases: OLP_UC02&03 Dependencies: mpOverloadProtSupInterval > mpOverloadProtSupTime Unit: 1 ms User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_OL P] NodeBFunction mpOverloadProtSupTime 500 Maximum time the RBS tra ffic application and jobs on higher priority are allowed to execute before it is considered high load. Use cases: OLP_UC02&03 Unit: 1 ms Dependencies: mpOverloa dProtSupInterval > mpOverloadProtSupTime User category: Ericsson person NodeBFunction NodeBFunctionId NodeBFunction noOfSteps1stStage 0 Number of steps for firs t power ramping stage during DL initial power control. Use cases: DPC-UC1-2 Requ irement: PCDCH-RBS_OM:100 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_DPC] NodeBFunction noOfSteps2ndStage 0 Number of steps for seco nd power ramping stage during DL initial power control. Use cases: DPC-UC1-2 Req uirement: PCDCH-RBS_OM:100 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_DPC] NodeBFunction nrOfCallsThresh 10 Defines the minimum number of ca lls required from the branch difference measurement report from UBP in order to take the measurements into account for delay difference calculation. User catego ry: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_RSY] NodeBFunction nrOfSamplesThresh 1000 Defines the minimum numb er of samples required from the branch difference measurement report from UBP in

    order to take the measurements into account for delay difference calculation. U ser category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_RSY] NodeBFunction orthLossComp 4 Offset added to the power level. Will be used when configuring Compressed Mode SF/2 with an alternative scrambli ng code. Unit: 0.25 dB User category: Ericsson personnel Use cases: DRL_UC27, DR L_UC28 Requirement: PCDCH-RBS_OM:100 Ref. [FS_DPC] NodeBFunction rbsActivationClockStatus LOCKED_MODE(3) Sets the clock status when the RBS is activated after a restart. Activated means that NB AP is started and cell setup is allowed. The RBS system controls the actual cloc k status, which is not impacted by this attribute and the RBS system does not ch ange th NodeBFunction stepDuration1stStage 2 Step duration for first power ramping stage during DL initial power control. Use cases: DPC-UC1-2 Requir ement: PCDCH-RBS_OM:100 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_DPC] NodeBFunction backplanePid The identity of the backplane, u sed to identify the capabilities of the backplane. Use cases: DBC_201 User categ ory: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_DBC] NodeBFunction stepDuration2ndStage 10 Step duration for second power ramping stage during DL initial power control. Use cases: DPC-UC1-2 Requi rement: PCDCH-RBS_OM:100 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_DPC] NodeBFunction stepSize1stStage 4 Power step size for firs t power ramping stage during DL initial power control. Unit: 0.25 dB Use cases: DPC-UC1-2 Requirement: PCDCH-RBS_OM:100 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [ FS_DPC] NodeBFunction stepSize2ndStage 4 Power step size for seco nd power ramping stage during DL initial power control. Unit: 0.25 dB Use cases: DPC-UC1-2 Requirement: PCDCH-RBS_OM:100 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_DPC] NodeBFunction toaeCch 195 Time of arrival early point for common c hannels. Unit: 1 ms Scope: All common channels being setup or reconfigured after value of this attribute has been updated. Dependencies: ToAWS =< toaeCch =< (20 0 ms - ToAWE) Takes effect: At next Common Transport Ch NodeBFunction toaeDch 170 Time of arrival early point for dedicate d channels. Unit: 1 ms Scope: All dedicated channels being setup or reconfigured after value of this attribute has been updated. Dependencies: ToAWS =< toaeDch =< (200 ms - ToAWE) Takes effect: At next Common Transp NodeBFunction userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM ] NodeBFunction wideSearchTimer 150 Defines the time allowed for ach ieving UL synchronisation. If the timer expires the wide-search procedure is ini tiated. Attribute value 0 means infinit time. Unit: frames Takes effect: Only fo r new radio link sets. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [ NodeBFunction steeredHsAllocation 0 Governs if the use of hs CodeResourceId setting (in MO RbsLocalCell) must be used or not. If set to true, the hsCodeResourceId values must be followed and the HS-DSCH Resources of the c ells must be mapped to the specified code resources (HS module on TX bo NodeBFunction eulNoReschUsers 5 The number of simultaneous users per cell that are allowed to perform rescheduling. Requirement: EULSCH_AD_RBS_5 302:06152 Rev. A Ref. [CB_MOP] NodeBFunction eulTargetRate 128 The target scheduled grant for a user. Unit: 1 kbps Resolution: 32 Requirement: EU2SCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:00710 Rev . A Ref. [CB_MOP] NodeBFunction eulMaxShoRate 5760 Defines the maximum rate that ma y be allocated in the serving cell for scheduled data to an E-DCH user during a soft handover.Unit: 1 kbps Resolution: 32 Requirement: EU2SCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:00 711 Rev A Ref. [CB_MOP] NodeBFunction sharedEquipmentController Used by OSS-RC f or fault management coordination between the WCDMA RBS and another node, for exa mple, a GSM RBS, that controls equipment used by the WCDMA RBS. Use cases: EQF_U C_930, EQF_UC_931 Ref. [FS_EQF]

    NodeBFunction ulGraceTimeLeft Defines the time left, the grace period, before the UL capacity is limited to licensed capacity. Precondition: T he feature 'Delayed Activation of Capacity Control' is installed by license. Use cases: CC_UC9 Undefined value:-1 Unit: 1 d Ref. [FS_CC] NodeBFunction ulLimitedByLicenseLevel Indicates if the uplink capacity is limited to licensed level after ended grace period. Precondition: Th e feature 'Delayed Activation of Capacity Control' is installed by license. Use cases: CC_UC9 Ref. [FS_CC] NodeBFunction dlLimitedByLicenseLevel Indicates if the downlin k capacity is limited to licensed level after ended grace period. Precondition: The feature 'Delayed Activation of Capacity Control' is installed by license. Us e cases: CC_UC8 Ref. [FS_CC] NodeBFunction dlGraceTimeLeft Defines the time left, the grace period, before the DL capacity is limited to licensed capacity. Precondition: T he feature 'Delayed Activation of Capacity Control' is installed by license. Use cases: CC_UC8 Undefined value:-1 Unit: 1 d Ref. [FS_CC] NodeBFunction dlLicFractBbPool2 0 Defines the DL capacity of the second baseband pool in percentage oflicensed DL capacity. Unit: 1% Takes effect: Not valid unless there are two baseband pools and an installed DL capac ity license. Use cases: CC_UC5, CC_UC8 Ref. [FS_CC] NodeBFunction ulLicFractBbPool2 0 Defines the UL capacity of the second baseband pool in percentage of licensed UL capacity. Unit: 1% Take s effect: Not valid unless there are two baseband pools and an installed UL capa city license. Use cases: CC_UC5, CC_UC9 Ref. [FS_CC] NodeBFunction nbapDscp 0 Differentiated Services Code Poi nt (DSCP) value for NBAP-C and NBAP-D. Takes effect: At next restart. Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Requirement: IUBCPIP_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:01217 R ev:A Ref. [CB_ICC] NodeBFunction alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of NodeBFunctio n. Only bit0 is settable via Mub operations. Other bits have only get access. bi t0 - UNDER_REPAIR bit1 - CRITICALbit2 - MAJORbit3 - MINOR bit4 - ALARM_OUTSTANDI NG (set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means n NodeBFunction eulSchedulingWeight This is a sequence of 16 weight factors associated with the 16 Scheduling Priority Indicators (SPIs). Th e weight factors represent the relative bandwidth between users assigned to the different scheduling priorities. The special value 0xFFFE (65534) is us NodeBFunction eulNonServHwRate 128 The amount of hardware r esources (in terms of a bit rate) that dynamicallymay be allocated to a non-serv ing E-DCH radio link for processing scheduled data. Unit: 1 kbps Resolution: 32 Requirement: EU2SCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:00712 Rev A Ref. [CB_MOP] NodeBFunction eulLowRate 32 Defines an EUL scheduling grant below eulTargetRate. A user's grant will at most be reduced to this level in a s ingle step during overload situations. Unit: 1 kbps Resolution: 32 Requirement: EulSch2_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:04488 Rev. A Ref. [CB_MOP] NodeBFunction collectTraceStatus Status of trace collecti on, initiated with operation collectTraces.Possible values:? UNDETERMINED = Init ial value. ? COLLECTING = Trace collection ongoing. ? FINISHED = Trace collectio n has finished OK. ? FAILED = Trace collection failed. Undefined value: NodeBFunction featureStateStandardizedTma 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature 'TMA with AISG/3GPP interface', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies : Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the NodeBFunction featureStateStandardizedRet 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature 'RET with AISG/3GPP interface', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies : Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the NodeBFunction licenseStateStandardizedRet License state fo r licensed feature 'RET with AISG/3GPP interface', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature , is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of L

    NodeBFunction licenseStateStandardizedTma License state fo r licensed feature 'TMA with AISG/3GPP interface', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature , is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of L NodeBFunction featureStateEul2msTti 0 Feature state for licens ed feature 'EUL 2 ms TTI', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED . Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be set to ACT IVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the feature, that i NodeBFunction licenseStateEul2msTti License state for licens ed feature 'EUL 2 ms TTI', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. Tha t is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of Licensing Emergen NodeBFunction featureStateDualStackIub 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature 'Dual Stack Iub', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or D EACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: If the value is set to ACTIVATED while NodeBFunction::licenseStateDualStackIub = DISABLED, NodeBFunction licenseStateDualStackIub License state fo r licensed feature 'Dual Stack Iub', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DIS ABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installed . Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of Licensing Emerg NodeBFunction licenseStateEnhancedLayer2 License state fo r licensed feature 'Enhanced Layer 2', indicating if the license is ENABLED or D ISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is install ed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of Licensing Eme NodeBFunction licenseStateSpecialHwSupport License state fo r licensed feature 'Special HW Support', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is insta lled. Note that for this feature there is no feature state attribute since the NodeBFunction licenseStateGrake License state for licens ed feature 'Advanced Receiver, GRAKE in RBS', indicating if the license is ENABL ED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case o NodeBFunction featureStateGrake 0 Feature state for licens ed feature 'Advanced Receiver, GRAKE in RBS', indicating if the feature is ACTIV ATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for NodeBFunction licenseStateNumEulUsers License state for capaci ty license 'Number of EUL Users per Cell', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the capacity, is in stalled. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of NodeBFunction licenseStateNumHsdpaUsers License state fo r capacity license 'Number of HSDPA Users per Cell', indicating if the license i s ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the capac ity, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case o NodeBFunction licenseStateNumHsPdschCodes License state fo r capacity license 'Number of HS-PDSCH Codes per Cell', indicating if the licens e is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the ca pacity, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In cas NodeBFunction licenseCapacityNumEulUsers Indicates the li censed capacity limit for 'Number of EUL Users per Cell'. The value reflects the capacity value in the license key. The value 2147483647 represents 'no limit'. Unit: 1 EUL user Dependencies: The value is not affected by Licensing Emergency NodeBFunction licenseCapacityNumHsdpaUsers Indicates the li censed capacity limit for 'Number of HSDPA Users per Cell'. The value reflects t he capacity value in the license key. The value 2147483647 represents 'no limit' . Unit: 1 HSDPA user Dependencies: The value is not affected by Licensing Emerg NodeBFunction licenseCapacityNumHsPdschCodes Indicates the li censed capacity limit for 'Number of HS-PDSCH Codes per Cell'. The value reflect s the capacity value in the license key. The value 2147483647 represents 'no lim it'. Unit: 1 HS-PDSCH code Dependencies: The value is not affected by Licensing

    NodeBFunction licenseStateMimo License state for licens ed feature 'MIMO', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, wh ether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLED Dependencies: In case of Licensing Emergency Unlo NodeBFunction featureState64Qam 0 Feature state for licens ed feature '64 QAM', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Poss ible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the feature, that is, if NodeBFunction licenseState64Qam License state for licens ed feature '64 QAM', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installed. Possible value s: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of Licensing Emergency Unl NodeBFunction licenseStateNum40WPowerAmplifiers License state for the capacity license 'Number of 40 W Power Amplifiers on RUW/RRUW base d RBS', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED, that is, whether or no t a valid license key for the capacity is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISAB NodeBFunction licenseStateNum60WPowerAmplifiers License state for the capacity license 'Number of 60 W Power Amplifiers on RUW/RRUW base d RBS', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED, that is, whether or no t a valid license key for the capacity is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISAB NodeBFunction licenseCapacityNum40WPowerAmplifiers Indicate s the licensed capacity limit for 'Number of 40 W Power Amplifiers on RUW/RRUW b ased RBS'. The value reflects the capacity value in the license key. The value 2 147483647 represents 'no limit'. Unit: 1 Power Amplifier Dependencies: The value is not NodeBFunction licenseCapacityNum60WPowerAmplifiers Indicate s the licensed capacity limit for 'Number of 60 W Power Amplifiers on RUW/RRUW b ased RBS'. The value reflects the capacity value in the license key. The value 2 147483647 represents 'no limit'. Unit: 1 Power Amplifier Dependencies: The value is not NodeBFunction licenseCapacityNumCarriers Indicates the li censed capacity limit for 'Number of Carriers on RUW/RRUW based RBS'. The value reflects the capacity value in the license key. The value 2147483647 represents 'no limit'. Unit: 1 carrier Dependencies: The value is not affected by Licensin NodeBFunction licenseStateNumCarriers License state for the ca pacity license 'Number of Carriers on RUW/RRUW based RBS', indicating if the lic ense is ENABLED or DISABLED, that is, whether or not a valid license key for the capacity is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependenci NodeBFunction licenseStateDlPowerControlEul License state fo r licensed feature 'Down Link Power Control for Enhanced Uplink', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencie NodeBFunction featureStateDlPowerControlEul 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature 'Down Link Power Control for Enhanced Uplink', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVA TEDDependencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is in NodeBFunction licenseStateMbmsIubEfficiency License state fo r licensed feature 'MBMS Iub Efficiency Improvements', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the fea ture, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case NodeBFunction featureStateMbmsIubEfficiency 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature 'MBMS Iub Efficiency Improvements', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependen cies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for NodeBFunction licenseState16Qam License state for licens ed feature '16 QAM Modulation', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED . That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installed. Pos sible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of Licensing Em

    NodeBFunction featureState16Qam 0 Feature state for licens ed feature '16 QAM Modulation', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTI VATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be set t o ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the feature, t NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaDynamicCodeAllocation License state for capacity license 'HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation', indicating if the li cense is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for th e capacity, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaFlexibleScheduler License state for licensed feature 'HSDPA Flexible Scheduler', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the fea ture, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case o f Licen NodeBFunction featureStateHsdpaFlexibleScheduler 0 Feature state for licensed feature 'HSDPA Flexible Scheduler', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependen cies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the fea NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaIncrementalRedundancy License state for licensed feature 'HSDPA Incremental Redundancy', indicating if the lic ense is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In ca se of L NodeBFunction licenseStateEnhancedUplinkIntroduction License state for licensed feature 'Enhanced Uplink Introduction', indicating if the lic ense is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In ca se of L NodeBFunction availableRbsChannelElementsDownlink Indicate s the available RBS Channel Elements in downlink for R99 traffic. Available RBS Channel Elements Downlink is equal to enabled downlink hardware capacity minus d ownlink hardware resources needed for A-DCH channels. Unit: 1 CEUndefined value: 0 Use NodeBFunction availableRbsChannelElementsUplink Indicate s the available RBS Channel Elements in uplink for R99 and uplink EUL traffic. U nit: 1 CEUndefined value: 0 Use cases: Manage Licensing Requirement: LIC_AD_RBSOSS_6502:03495 Rev. A Ref. [CB_LMT] NodeBFunction licenseCapacityRbsChannelElementsDownlink Indicates the licensed capacity limit for 'RBS Channel Elements Downlink'. The v alue reflects the downlink capacity value in the license key. The value 21474836 47 represents 'no limit'. Unit: 1 CE Dependencies: The value is not affected by Licensing Emerg NodeBFunction licenseCapacityRbsChannelElementsUplink Indicate s the licensed capacity limit for 'RBS Channel Elements Uplink'. The value refle cts the uplink capacity value in the license key. The value 2147483647 represent s 'no limit'. Unit: 1 CEDependencies: The value is not affected by Licensing Eme rgency NodeBFunction licenseStateRbsChannelElementsDownlink License state for capacity license 'RBS Channel Elements Downlink', indicating if the li cense is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for th e capacity, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of NodeBFunction licenseStateRbsChannelElementsUplink License state for capacity license 'RBS Channel Elements Uplink', indicating if the lice nse is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the capacity, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In ca se of L NodeBFunction eulMaxAllowedSchRate With GRAKE: 4480 Without GRAKE: 3968 The maximum allowed scheduled data rate per user. Unit: 1 kbpsResolution

    : 32 Requirement: EU2GRK_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:03501 Rev A Ref. [CB_MOP] NodeBFunction licenseState4wayRxDiversity License state fo r licensed feature '4-way RX Diversity', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is whether or not a valid license key, for the feature, is insta lled. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLED Dependencies: In case of Licensing NodeBFunction featureStateHsdpaImprovedLinkAdaptation 0 Feature state for licensed feature 'Improved HSDPA Link Adaptation', indicating if the f eature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDe pendencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installe d for t NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaImprovedLinkAdaptation License state for licensed feature 'Improved HSDPA Link Adaptation', indicating if the l icense is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for t he feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of NodeBFunction licenseStateConfigurableCarrierBandwidth License state for licensed feature 'Configurable Carrier Bandwidth', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license k ey for the feature, is installed. Note that for this feature there is no feature state attribut NodeBFunction licenseStateRttPositioning License state fo r licensed feature 'RTT Positioning', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DI SABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installe d. Note that for this feature there is no feature state attribute since the fea NodeBFunction licenseStateFDpchSrbOnHsdpa License state fo r licensed feature 'SRB on HSDPA' (F-DPCH + SRB on HSDPA), indicating if the lic ense is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In c NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaMc License state for licens ed feature 'Multi-Carrier', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. Th at is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installed. Possibl e values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of Licensing Emerge NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaMcInactCtrl License state fo r licensed feature 'Multi-Carrier Inactivity Control', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the fea ture, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case NodeBFunction licenseStateRetCascading License state fo r licensed feature 'Support for Cascading of AISG RET Antennas', indicating if t he license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key f or the feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies NodeBFunction featureStateRetCascading 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature 'Support for Cascading of AISG RET Antennas', indicating if t he feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVAT EDDependencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is ins NodeBFunction supportSystemAvailable 0 Indicates whether or not the Support System application is installed in the system and shall be used. Us er category: Ericsson personnel Use cases: Manufacture RBS, Configure RBS at Sit e, Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_SIC] NodeBFunction featureStatePerHarqProcessGrant 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature 'EUL Single HARQ Process Scheduling' (Per HARQ Process Grant) , indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED.Possible values: ? ACTIV ATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid li NodeBFunction eul2msFirstSchedStep 160 Specifies if initial ram p-up step from zero rate stops at the 20 kbps step introduced by the feature 'EU L Single HARQ Process Scheduling' (Per HARQ Process Grant). Unit: 1 kbps Depende ncies: The attribute is ignored if the feature 'EUL Single HARQ Process NodeBFunction licenseStatePerHarqProcessGrant License state fo r licensed feature 'EUL Single HARQ Process Scheduling' (Per HARQ Process Grant) , indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a va lid license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DIS

    NodeBFunction featureStateDualTmaSupport 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature 'Dual TMA Support', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only b e set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the feature, th NodeBFunction featureStateHsdpaMinBitRate 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature 'Minimum Bit Rate HSDPA scheduling', indicating if the featur e is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDepende ncies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed fo NodeBFunction licenseStateCpc License state for licensed featu re 'CPC' (Enhanced uplink transmission, CPC + Enhanced downlink reception, CPC), indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a val id license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values: NodeBFunction licenseStateDualTmaSupport License state fo r licensed feature 'Dual TMA Support', indicating if the license is ENABLED or D ISABLED. That is, wheater or not a valid license key for the feature, is install ed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of Licensing Eme NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaMinBitRate License state fo r licensed feature 'Minimum Bit Rate HSDPA scheduling', indicating if the licens e is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the fe ature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case NodeBFunction featureStateIncrNumHsCodes 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature 'Increased HSDPA code capacity on HS-TX', indicating if the f eature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDe pendencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is install NodeBFunction licenseStateIncrNumHsCodes License state fo r licensed feature 'Increased HSDPA code capacity on HS-TX', indicating if the l icense is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for t he feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In NodeBFunction featureStateEulForLargeRbsConfig 0 Feature state for licensed feature 'EUL for large RBS configurations', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATED Dependencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is instal led for NodeBFunction licenseStateEulForLargeRbsConfig License state for licensed feature 'EUL for large RBS configurations', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: I n case NodeBFunction eulDchMaxAllowedSchRate Awaiting STN test The maxi mum allowed scheduled data rate per user when a user has both DCH and E-DCH 2 ms TTI configured. Unit: 1 kbpsResolution: 32 Ref. [CB_MOP] NodeSynch NodeSynchId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. NodeSynch userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. NodeSynch phaseDiffThreshold 50 Threshold for detection of too large phase drift between RNC and RBS. Unit: 10 parts per billion (ppb) R esolution: 10 NodeSynch phaseMeasurement Latest calculated RFN to BFN phase difference value. Special values: 40960000 indicates no value availab le Unit: microsecond Resolution: 125 NodeSynch timeStamp Time stamp for the last reported value of the phase measurement and associated accuracy. Format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:m m:ss.Special values: Empty string: no measurement done. NodeSynch sampleIntervalInit 100 Time interval between sa mples for the Node synchronization algorithm operating in the initialization sta te. The value should be higher than the measured round trip time for the parent Iub link.Unit: ms Resolution: 50 NodeSynch fixedWindowSizeInit 12 Number of samples to be taken for the fixed window of the Node synchronization algorithm operating in th

    e initialization state NodeSynch sampleIntervalSup 10 Time interval between sa mples for the Node synchronization algorithm operating in the supervision state. Unit: s NodeSynch fixedWindowSizeSup 10 Number of samples to be taken for the fixed window of the Node synchronization algorithm operating in th e supervision state. NodeSynch slidingWindowSize 100 Number of fixed windows to be kept within the sliding window of the Node synchronization algorithm. NodeSynch maxTransportDelay Latest calculated Maximu m dynamic transport delay including the measurement inaccuracy. Special values: 40960000 indicates no value available Unit: microseconds Resolution: 125 NodeSynch staticDelay Latest calculated one way static delay. Special values: 40960000 indicates no value available Unit: microsecond Resolution: 125 NodeSynch operationalState The operational state of the Node Synchronization signaling. NodeSynch availabilityStatus The availability status of the Node Synchronization signaling. More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: P OWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (se NodeSynch maxAllowedIubRtt 500 Maximum allowed Round Tr ip Time for node synch with the parent Iub Link. Resolution: 50Unit: ms Change T akes Effect: Immediately NotificationIRP NotificationIRPId Relative Distinguished N ame NotificationIRP irpVersion One or more Notification IRP ver sion entries. Note: For CORBA users, CommonIRPConstDefs::VersionNumberSet,Sub: F MS Ref [21] ObifDeviceGroup ObifDeviceGroupId ObifDeviceGroup configurationGroup 0 Indicates the RU configu ration group for a Main Remote RBS. The configuration group specifies the topolo gy of the RUs. Possible values: ? ALL1 = Max one RU per BU-port. All ports can b e used. ? ALL1_CPRI2 = CPRI2 mode. Max one RU per BU-port. All ports ca ObifDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_904Specificati ObifDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Hardware uni ts not supporting hardware test will always return the default value UNDETERMINE D. Use cases: HWT_UC1 Requirement: Test_UTRAN_FU3 Ref. [FS_HWT] ObifDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_904Specification: IT U-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] ObifDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC904 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] OpticalInterfaceLink connectedToObjectARef Reference to the plug-in unit of OBIF board or auxiliary plug-in unit of RRU or RRUW to which th is cable must be connected. The information sent through the cable is sent from Object A to Object B. Use cases: Add Capacity, Configure RBS at Site, Increase OpticalInterfaceLink connectedToObjectBRef Reference to the plug-in unit of OBIF board or auxiliary plug-in unit of RRU or RRUW to which th is cable must be connected. The information sent through the cable is sent from Object A to Object B. Use cases: Add Capacity, Configure RBS at Site, Increase OpticalInterfaceLink objectAConnector Value representi ng the connector on the hardware unit to which this cable must be connected.? TX _A, TX_B up to TX_F are valid connectors for OBIFB.? A_RX_OPT is a valid connect ors for the slave port on RRU or RRUW. ? B_TX_OPT is valid connector for the ma

    OpticalInterfaceLink objectBConnector Value representi ng the connector on the hardware unit to which this cable must be connected.? RX _A, RX_B up to RX_F are valid connectors for OBIFB.? A_TX_OPT is a valid connect or for the slave port on RRU or RRUW. ? B_RX_OPT is valid connector for the mas OpticalInterfaceLink OpticalInterfaceLinkId OptoCommCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the opto com munication cable. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get acces s.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (se t to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outs OptoCommCable OptoCommCableId Os155SpiTtp Os155SpiTtpId The value component of the RDN. Os155SpiTtp userLabel Label for free use. Os155SpiTtp lineNo The line number. The maximum range of th is attribute can vary between the boards. See the description of the relevant bo ard for details. Os155SpiTtp standardMode The standard that this MO compli es to. Os155SpiTtp shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s Os155SpiTtp muxMode The level at which the STM-1 or OC3 sign al is demultiplexed. Os155SpiTtp msDegThreshold 0 Specifies the number of received blocks that are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is taken every seco nd. If the threshold is exceeded, that second is considered as a bad second. Dep endencies: This attribute is applicable only if the supervision Os155SpiTtp msDegM 0 Specifies the number of bad seconds in a continuous measurement period that causes a MS Degraded Signal alarm. See the e xplanation of bad seconds in attribute msDegThreshold. Dependencies: This attrib ute is applicable only if the supervisionMode has value Os155SpiTtp msRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Mult iplexer Section (MS) Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - enab le reporting. false - disable reporting. Os155SpiTtp msAisReporting FALSE(0) Indicates whether the al arm Multiplexer Section (MS) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable reporting. false - disable reporting. Os155SpiTtp loopBack NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopBack. Os155SpiTtp administrativeState 0 The administrative state . Os155SpiTtp operationalState The operational state. Os155SpiTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Os155SpiTtp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Os155SpiTtp reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. Os155SpiTtp poissonDegThreshold 6 Specifies the maximum Bi t Error Rate (BER) for the MS Degraded Signal (MS-DEG) alarm. BER is the ratio o f the erroneous bits detected to the number of bits transmitted.The attribute gi ves a maximum BER of 10e-poissonDegThreshold. If the threshold is excee Os155SpiTtp supervisionMode BURSTY(1) Controls if the detectio n of the MS-DEG alarm should assumePoisson or Bursty distribution of errors. Os155SpiTtp Os155SpiTtpId The value component of the RDN. Os155SpiTtp userLabel Label for free use. Os155SpiTtp lineNo The line number. The maximum range of th is attribute can vary between the boards. See the description of the relevant bo ard for details. Os155SpiTtp standardMode The standard that this MO compli

    es to. Os155SpiTtp shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s Os155SpiTtp muxMode The level at which the STM-1 or OC3 sign al is demultiplexed. Os155SpiTtp msDegThreshold 0 Specifies the number of received blocks that are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is taken every seco nd. If the threshold is exceeded, that second is considered as a bad second. Dep endencies: This attribute is applicable only if the supervision Os155SpiTtp msDegM 0 Specifies the number of bad seconds in a continuous measurement period that causes a MS Degraded Signal alarm. See the e xplanation of bad seconds in attribute msDegThreshold. Dependencies: This attrib ute is applicable only if the supervisionMode has value Os155SpiTtp msRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Mult iplexer Section (MS) Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - enab le reporting. false - disable reporting. Os155SpiTtp msAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Mult iplexer Section (MS) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enabl e reporting. false - disable reporting. Os155SpiTtp loopBack NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopBack. Os155SpiTtp administrativeState 0 The administrative state . Os155SpiTtp operationalState The operational state. Os155SpiTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Os155SpiTtp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Os155SpiTtp reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. Os155SpiTtp poissonDegThreshold 6 Specifies the maximum Bi t Error Rate (BER) for the MS Degraded Signal (MS-DEG) alarm. BER is the ratio o f the erroneous bits detected to the number of bits transmitted.The attribute gi ves a maximum BER of 10e-poissonDegThreshold. If the threshold is excee Os155SpiTtp supervisionMode BURSTY(1) Controls if the detectio n of the MS-DEG alarm should assumePoisson or Bursty distribution of errors. Os155SpiTtp Os155SpiTtpId The value component of the RDN. Os155SpiTtp userLabel Label for free use. Os155SpiTtp lineNo The line number. The maximum range of th is attribute can vary between the boards. See the description of the relevant bo ard for details. Os155SpiTtp standardMode The standard that this MO compli es to. Os155SpiTtp shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s Os155SpiTtp muxMode The level at which the STM-1 or OC3 sign al is demultiplexed. Os155SpiTtp msDegThreshold 0 Specifies the number of received blocks that are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is taken every seco nd. If the threshold is exceeded, that second is considered as a bad second. Dep endencies: This attribute is applicable only if the supervision Os155SpiTtp msDegM 0 Specifies the number of bad seconds in a continuous measurement period that causes a MS Degraded Signal alarm. See the e xplanation of bad seconds in attribute msDegThreshold. Dependencies: This attrib ute is applicable only if the supervisionMode has value Os155SpiTtp msRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Mult iplexer Section (MS) Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - enab

    le reporting. false - disable reporting. Os155SpiTtp msAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Mult iplexer Section (MS) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enabl e reporting. false - disable reporting. Os155SpiTtp loopBack NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopBack. Os155SpiTtp administrativeState 0 The administrative state . Os155SpiTtp operationalState The operational state. Os155SpiTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Os155SpiTtp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Os155SpiTtp reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. Os155SpiTtp poissonDegThreshold 6 Specifies the maximum Bi t Error Rate (BER) for the MS Degraded Signal (MS-DEG) alarm. BER is the ratio o f the erroneous bits detected to the number of bits transmitted.The attribute gi ves a maximum BER of 10e-poissonDegThreshold. If the threshold is excee Os155SpiTtp supervisionMode BURSTY(1) Controls if the detectio n of the MS-DEG alarm should assumePoisson or Bursty distribution of errors. Ospf OspfId The value component of the RDN. Ospf userLabel Label for free use. Ospf ospfRouterId This attribute has the format of an IP a ddress. To set this attribute, administrativeState has to be set to LOCKED. The ospfRouterId is uniquely identifying the router in the Autonomous System. By con vention to ensure uniqueness, this is configured to the Ospf ospfASBdrRtrStatus 0 Specifies whether this router is configured as an Autonomous System border router. This attribute must be set to true if the user wants to configure static routes, which are distributed to oth er OSPF routes as external routes. Configuration of static rout Ospf operationalState The operational state. This attr ibute can only be set to ENABLED when the attribute, workingMode in Ip MO is set to ROUTER_MODE. Ospf availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Ospf administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Ospf ospfAreaBdrRtrStatus 0 Area border router flag. Indicat es whether the router is acting as an area border router or not. Ospf ipMo Contains a reference to an Ip MO instance that r eserves this MO. Ospf recoverTopoDb 0 Indicates whether the topology database is to be recovered from the database at restart. Ospf topoDbStoreInterv 0 The interval with which the topo logy database is stored. Unit: 1 s Ospf OspfId The value component of the RDN. Ospf userLabel Label for free use. Ospf ospfRouterId This attribute has the format of an IP a ddress. To set this attribute, administrativeState has to be set to LOCKED. The ospfRouterId is uniquely identifying the router in the Autonomous System. By con vention to ensure uniqueness, this is configured to the Ospf ospfASBdrRtrStatus 0 Specifies whether this router is configured as an Autonomous System border router. This attribute must be set to true if the user wants to configure static routes, which are distributed to oth er OSPF routes as external routes. Configuration of static rout Ospf operationalState The operational state. This attr ibute can only be set to ENABLED when the attribute, workingMode in Ip MO is set to ROUTER_MODE. Ospf availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont

    ains details about operationalState. Ospf administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Ospf ospfAreaBdrRtrStatus 0 Area border router flag. Indicat es whether the router is acting as an area border router or not. Ospf ipMo Contains a reference to an Ip MO instance that r eserves this MO. Ospf recoverTopoDb 0 Indicates whether the topology database is to be recovered from the database at restart. Ospf topoDbStoreInterv 0 The interval with which the topo logy database is stored. Unit: 1 s Ospf OspfId The value component of the RDN. Ospf userLabel Label for free use. Ospf ospfRouterId This attribute has the format of an IP a ddress. To set this attribute, administrativeState has to be set to LOCKED. The ospfRouterId is uniquely identifying the router in the Autonomous System. By con vention to ensure uniqueness, this is configured to the Ospf ospfASBdrRtrStatus 0 Specifies whether this router is configured as an Autonomous System border router. This attribute must be set to true if the user wants to configure static routes, which are distributed to oth er OSPF routes as external routes. Configuration of static rout Ospf operationalState The operational state. This attr ibute can only be set to ENABLED when the attribute, workingMode in Ip MO is set to ROUTER_MODE. Ospf availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Ospf administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Ospf ospfAreaBdrRtrStatus 0 Area border router flag. Indicat es whether the router is acting as an area border router or not. Ospf ipMo Contains a reference to an Ip MO instance that r eserves this MO. Ospf recoverTopoDb 0 Indicates whether the topology database is to be recovered from the database at restart. Ospf topoDbStoreInterv 0 The interval with which the topo logy database is stored. Unit: 1 s OspfArea OspfAreaId The value component of the RDN. OspfArea userLabel Label for free use. OspfArea stubArea 0 Specifies whether the OSPF area is a stub area or not. OspfArea importExternalLsa 0 Specifies whether import ing Autonomous System external LSAs is supported. OspfArea sendAreaSummary 0 Specifies whether the router ori ginates and propagates summary LSAs into a stub-area. OspfArea stubAreaMetric 0 Cost for default router when the router advertises into a stub area and the router is an area border router. Thi s attribute is set by default to the least metric among the interfaces to other areas. OspfArea stubAreaMetricType 0 Stub area metric type. R FC 1850 (OSPF V2 MIB): comparableCost (external type 1) nonComparable (external type 2) OspfArea areaLsaChecksum 0 Represents 32-bit unsigned sum o f the link-state advertisements LS check-sums contained in this area's link-stat e database. OspfArea areaId The OSPF area identity in form of an IP address. This areId uniquely identifies the area. AreaId 0.0.0.0 is used for the OSPF backbone. Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255. OspfArea range0 OspfArea IP address range zero (0). OspfArea range1 OspfArea IP address range one (1). OspfArea range2 OspfArea IP address range two (2). OspfArea reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance.

    OspfArea range0.advertise Indicates whether the ar ea range should be advertised into OSPF. OspfArea range0.ipAddress The subnet address of th e range. OspfArea range0.subnetMask IP subnet mask of the ra nge to be added. The subnet mask must be contigouos. That is, has the LSB set to 0 (zero). Example: 255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet mask: 11111111.11111111.1111 1111.11111110 (X = 254) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N OspfArea range1.advertise Indicates whether the ar ea range should be advertised into OSPF. OspfArea range1.ipAddress The subnet address of th e range. OspfArea range1.subnetMask IP subnet mask of the ra nge to be added. The subnet mask must be contigouos. That is, has the LSB set to 0 (zero). Example: 255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet mask: 11111111.11111111.1111 1111.11111110 (X = 254) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N OspfArea range2.advertise Indicates whether the ar ea range should be advertised into OSPF. OspfArea range2.ipAddress The subnet address of th e range. OspfArea range2.subnetMask IP subnet mask of the ra nge to be added. The subnet mask must be contigouos. That is, has the LSB set to 0 (zero). Example: 255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet mask: 11111111.11111111.1111 1111.11111110 (X = 254) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N OspfArea OspfAreaId The value component of the RDN. OspfArea userLabel Label for free use. OspfArea stubArea 0 Specifies whether the OSPF area is a stub area or not. OspfArea importExternalLsa 0 Specifies whether import ing Autonomous System external LSAs is supported. OspfArea sendAreaSummary 0 Specifies whether the router ori ginates and propagates summary LSAs into a stub-area. OspfArea stubAreaMetric 0 Cost for default router when the router advertises into a stub area and the router is an area border router. Thi s attribute is set by default to the least metric among the interfaces to other areas. OspfArea stubAreaMetricType 0 Stub area metric type. R FC 1850 (OSPF V2 MIB): comparableCost (external type 1) nonComparable (external type 2) OspfArea areaLsaChecksum 0 Represents 32-bit unsigned sum o f the link-state advertisements LS check-sums contained in this area's link-stat e database. OspfArea areaId The OSPF area identity in form of an IP address. This areId uniquely identifies the area. AreaId 0.0.0.0 is used for the OSPF backbone. Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255. OspfArea range0 OspfArea IP address range zero (0). OspfArea range1 OspfArea IP address range one (1). OspfArea range2 OspfArea IP address range two (2). OspfArea reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. OspfArea range0.advertise Indicates whether the ar ea range should be advertised into OSPF. OspfArea range0.ipAddress The subnet address of th e range. OspfArea range0.subnetMask IP subnet mask of the ra nge to be added. The subnet mask must be contigouos. That is, has the LSB set to 0 (zero). Example: 255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet mask: 11111111.11111111.1111 1111.11111110 (X = 254) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N OspfArea range1.advertise Indicates whether the ar ea range should be advertised into OSPF.

    OspfArea range1.ipAddress The subnet address of th e range. OspfArea range1.subnetMask IP subnet mask of the ra nge to be added. The subnet mask must be contigouos. That is, has the LSB set to 0 (zero). Example: 255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet mask: 11111111.11111111.1111 1111.11111110 (X = 254) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N OspfArea range2.advertise Indicates whether the ar ea range should be advertised into OSPF. OspfArea range2.ipAddress The subnet address of th e range. OspfArea range2.subnetMask IP subnet mask of the ra nge to be added. The subnet mask must be contigouos. That is, has the LSB set to 0 (zero). Example: 255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet mask: 11111111.11111111.1111 1111.11111110 (X = 254) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N OspfArea OspfAreaId The value component of the RDN. OspfArea userLabel Label for free use. OspfArea stubArea 0 Specifies whether the OSPF area is a stub area or not. OspfArea importExternalLsa 0 Specifies whether import ing Autonomous System external LSAs is supported. OspfArea sendAreaSummary 0 Specifies whether the router ori ginates and propagates summary LSAs into a stub-area. OspfArea stubAreaMetric 0 Cost for default router when the router advertises into a stub area and the router is an area border router. Thi s attribute is set by default to the least metric among the interfaces to other areas. OspfArea stubAreaMetricType 0 Stub area metric type. R FC 1850 (OSPF V2 MIB): comparableCost (external type 1) nonComparable (external type 2) OspfArea areaLsaChecksum 0 Represents 32-bit unsigned sum o f the link-state advertisements LS check-sums contained in this area's link-stat e database. OspfArea areaId The OSPF area identity in form of an IP address. This areId uniquely identifies the area. AreaId 0.0.0.0 is used for the OSPF backbone. Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255. OspfArea range0 OspfArea IP address range zero (0). OspfArea range1 OspfArea IP address range one (1). OspfArea range2 OspfArea IP address range two (2). OspfArea reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. OspfArea range0.advertise Indicates whether the ar ea range should be advertised into OSPF. OspfArea range0.ipAddress The subnet address of th e range. OspfArea range0.subnetMask IP subnet mask of the ra nge to be added. The subnet mask must be contigouos. That is, has the LSB set to 0 (zero). Example: 255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet mask: 11111111.11111111.1111 1111.11111110 (X = 254) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N OspfArea range1.advertise Indicates whether the ar ea range should be advertised into OSPF. OspfArea range1.ipAddress The subnet address of th e range. OspfArea range1.subnetMask IP subnet mask of the ra nge to be added. The subnet mask must be contigouos. That is, has the LSB set to 0 (zero). Example: 255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet mask: 11111111.11111111.1111 1111.11111110 (X = 254) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N OspfArea range2.advertise Indicates whether the ar ea range should be advertised into OSPF. OspfArea range2.ipAddress The subnet address of th e range.

    OspfArea range2.subnetMask IP subnet mask of the ra nge to be added. The subnet mask must be contigouos. That is, has the LSB set to 0 (zero). Example: 255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet mask: 11111111.11111111.1111 1111.11111110 (X = 254) 11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N OspfInterface OspfInterfaceId The value component of the RDN. OspfInterface userLabel Label for free use. OspfInterface ospfAreaRelated The identity of the OspfArea con nected to this OspfInterface. The default value is the default OspfArea MO. OspfInterface lsaTransmissionInterval 0 The time between LSA retransmissions over the interface. Unit: 1 s OspfInterface helloInterval 0 The time between sending OSPF He llo-packets over the interface. This attribute must have a positive value. Unit: 1 s OspfInterface routerDeadInterval 0 The time after which a n eighbor router is declared dead when not heard from. Unit: 1 s OspfInterface interfaceTransitDelay 0 Estimated delay for the transmission of a link state update package over the interface. Unit: 1 s OspfInterface interfacePriority 0 The interface priority.E ach router is configured with a priority configured from 0 - 255 where 0 is the lowest priority and 255 the highest. This attribute must have a positive value. OspfInterface relatedLink Each OSPF interface is connected to one IP link. The relatedLink can be either an IpAtmLink or an EthernetLink M O reference. OspfInterface OspfInterfaceId The value component of the RDN. OspfInterface userLabel Label for free use. OspfInterface ospfAreaRelated The identity of the OspfArea con nected to this OspfInterface. The default value is the default OspfArea MO. OspfInterface lsaTransmissionInterval 0 The time between LSA retransmissions over the interface. Unit: 1 s OspfInterface helloInterval 0 The time between sending OSPF He llo-packets over the interface. This attribute must have a positive value. Unit: 1 s OspfInterface routerDeadInterval 0 The time after which a n eighbor router is declared dead when not heard from. Unit: 1 s OspfInterface interfaceTransitDelay 0 Estimated delay for the transmission of a link state update package over the interface. Unit: 1 s OspfInterface interfacePriority 0 The interface priority.E ach router is configured with a priority configured from 0 - 255 where 0 is the lowest priority and 255 the highest. This attribute must have a positive value. OspfInterface relatedLink Each OSPF interface is connected to one IP link. The relatedLink can be either an IpAtmLink or an EthernetLink M O reference. OspfInterface OspfInterfaceId The value component of the RDN. OspfInterface userLabel Label for free use. OspfInterface ospfAreaRelated The identity of the OspfArea con nected to this OspfInterface. The default value is the default OspfArea MO. OspfInterface lsaTransmissionInterval 0 The time between LSA retransmissions over the interface. Unit: 1 s OspfInterface helloInterval 0 The time between sending OSPF He llo-packets over the interface. This attribute must have a positive value. Unit: 1 s OspfInterface routerDeadInterval 0 The time after which a n eighbor router is declared dead when not heard from. Unit: 1 s OspfInterface interfaceTransitDelay 0 Estimated delay for the transmission of a link state update package over the interface. Unit: 1 s OspfInterface interfacePriority 0 The interface priority.E ach router is configured with a priority configured from 0 - 255 where 0 is the lowest priority and 255 the highest. This attribute must have a positive value. OspfInterface relatedLink Each OSPF interface is connected to one IP link. The relatedLink can be either an IpAtmLink or an EthernetLink M

    O reference. OutDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the device. Possible values: ? LOCKED ? UNLOCKED Use cases: EAC_UC210,EAC_UC 220,EAC_UC230 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Ref. [FS_EAC] OutDevice equipmentName Specifies the external device be ing controlled. Use cases: EAC_UC210, EAC_UC200 Ref. [FS_EAC] OutDevice normallyOpen 0 Defines the normal (non-active) state of the control port. If true the external equipment is turned on by closin g the circuit between the External Alarm and Control Unit and the external equip ment. If false the external equipment is turned on by opening t OutDevice OutDeviceId OutDevice outDeviceStatus 0 The current status of the extern al device. Possible values: ? 0 = Off ? 1 = On Use cases: EAC_UC240, EAC_UC250 R ef. [FS_EAC] OutDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I OutDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] OutDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_310 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.7 31Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] OutDevice userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM ] OutDeviceSet OutDeviceSetId OutDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_309 Specificatio OutDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_309 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] PacketDataRouter PacketDataRouterId Naming attribute .Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system. PacketDataRouter administrativeState 0 The administrati ve state of the Packet Data Router. PacketDataRouter operationalState The operational state of the Packet Data Router. PacketDataRouter availabilityStatus The availability status of the Packet Data Router.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWERO FF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when b PacketDataRouter userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RN C. PacketDataRouter rncIpAddress The IP address of the AA L5 TP terminated in the router processor. The input format used by the operator is four fields of digits, separated by dots. Each field may consist of three dig its.The value of each digit shall be in the range 0..255 PacketDataRouter cnIuLinkIpAddress IP address at th e CN side of the IuLink, e.g. in ATM VC terminating router or one of the IP addr esses in SGSN, used for IP level ping link or network supervision. The input for mat used by the operator is four fields of digits, separated by dots. Each fiel PacketDataRouter timeToLive 20 Time-to-live value assig ned to uplink traffic IP header. PacketDataRouter aal5TpRef Reference to the Aal5TpV ccTp Managed Object that represents the Core Network AAL5 connection endpoint. D ependencies: The Aal5TpVccTp MO has a reference to a Spm MO.The PdrDevice that i

    s parent to this PacketDataRouter should refer to the same Spm MO. PacketDataRouter reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have re ferences to this MO. Paging PagingId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. Paging cnDrxCycleLengthCs 6 Core Network DRX cycle length co efficient (k) for UEs in idle mode, circuit switched.The cycle length is calcula ted as the k'th potential of 2, where k = 6..9.For example, 6 corresponds to cyc le length 640 ms, 7 corresponds to cycle length 1280 ms, etc. C Paging cnDrxCycleLengthPs 7 Core Network DRX cycle length co efficient (k) for UEs in idle mode, packet switched.The cycle length is calculat ed as the k'th potential of 2, where k = 6..9.For example, 6 corresponds to cycl e length 640 ms, 7 corresponds to cycle length 1280 ms, etc. Ch Paging bcchModCycleLength 9 BCCH modification cycle length c oefficient (k). The cycle length is calculated as the k'th potential of 2, where k = 6,..,9. The BCCH modification information element should be transmitted in every frame within a defined interval. This interval will be wi Paging noOfPagingRecordTransm 2 Number of preconfigured subseque nt transmissions of the same Paging Record. Paging utranDrxCycleLength 5 The DRX cycle length coefficient (k) for UEs in URA_PCH. The DRX cycle length is the frequency with which the UE listens on the paging channel. The parameter is applicable for both UTRAN and C N initiated paging in URA_PCH. Value mapping: The cycle length PauDeviceGroup PauDeviceGroupId PauDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specific ation: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] PauDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat PauDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] PauDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] Pcap PcapId Pcap operationalState The operational state of the PCA P signaling bearer. Pcap availabilityStatus The availability status of the P CAP More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object.Valu e mapping: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OF FLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when b Pcap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. Pcap sccpDisabledT 100 Timer for supervising the propagated ope rational state change of the local PCAP The alarm Local Failure is issued on tim er expiry. Unit: s Pcap userOutOfServiceT 100 Timer for supervising the N-STAT E-indication for the remote SCCP (SSN=1) or the remote PCAP (SSN=249). Timer exp iry for remote SCCP (SSN=1) issues the alarm Local Failure and the remote PCAP ( SSN=249) issues the alarm Remote Failure. Unit: s Pcap localSccpApRef Reference to the SccpApLocal MO that rep resents the local SCCP Access point. Pcap remoteSccpApRef Reference to the SccpApRemote MO that re presents the remote SCCP Access point. Pccpch availabilityStatus The availability status of the c ommon channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN

    CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Pccpch dbchDeviceSetRef Reference to the DBCH device set carrying this channel. Ref. [CB_MOP] Pccpch operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP] Pccpch PccpchId Pccpch pnIsActive Identifies if a PN transmission is start ed on PCCPCH. Possible values: ? 0 = FALSE ? 1 = TRUE User category: Ericsson pe rsonnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Pch PchId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system. Pch administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the channel. Pch operationalState The operational state of the cha nnel. Pch availabilityStatus The availability status of the c hannel. More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9, bit Pch userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. Pch pchPower -4 Maximum power to be used for transmittin g the PCH, relative to the primaryCpichPower value. Unit: 0.1 dB Pch pichPower -7 PICH power is the power to be used for t ransmitting on the physical channel carrying the paging indicators, relative to the primaryCpichPower value. Unit: dB Pch pichMode 18 Number of paging indications per frame i n the PICH. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Disturbance s: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Pch sccpchOffset 20 Radio timing offset inside a radio frame . (SCCPCH parameter) Value mapping: 0: 0 chips 1: 256 chips ... 149: 38144 chips Disturbances:Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its v alue is set, the PCH is disabled automatically and then Pch availabilityStatus The availability status of the c ommon channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Pch operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP] Pch PchId Pch pnIsActive Identifies if a PN transmission is start ed on PCH. Possible values: ? 0 = FALSE ? 1 = TRUE User category: Ericsson perso nnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Pch pnTfi Defines the transport format that are used in an active PN sending.Precondition: PN transmission is started. User category: Eric sson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Pcpich availabilityStatus The availability status of the c ommon channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Pcpich operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Requirement: CELL_RBS_FU:9 Ref. [CB_MOP] Pcpich PcpichId PcuDeviceGroup PcuDeviceGroupId PcuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_302, AUC_301 , AUC_308 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] PcuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE

    PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat PcuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] PcuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] PdDevice PdDeviceId PdDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: AUC_310 Ref. [FS_AUC] PdDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I PdDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] PdDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_310 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.7 31Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] PdDeviceSet PdDeviceSetId PdDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_309 Specificatio PdDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_309 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] PdrDevice PdrDeviceId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system. PdrDevice userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. PdrDevice deviceIndId Device individual identity. Set by the system to PDRD-<#>, where #=a number greater that zero. PdrDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the Packet Data Router device. PdrDevice operationalState The operational state of the Packet Data Router device. PdrDevice usageState The usage state of the Packet Da ta Router device. PdrDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the Packet Data Router device. More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWERO FF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to PdrDevice spmReference Reference to an instance of Spm or PiuDevice MO. Pich availabilityStatus The availability status of the c ommon channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Pich dbchDeviceSetRef Reference to the DBCH device set carrying this channel. Ref. [CB_MOP] Pich operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP] Pich PichId Pich piTestPtrnIsActive Identifies if a paging indicator test pattern is transmitted on PICH 0=false, 1=true User category: Ericsson per sonnel Ref. [CB_UTS] PiuDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state

    . If this attribute is set to SHUTTING_DOWN, it will immediately go into the sta te LOCKED. PiuDevice availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Possible values when operationalSta te is set to DISABLED: - FAILED - DEPENDENCY_LOCKED - DEPENDENCY_FAILED PiuDevice operationalState The operational state. PiuDevice userLabel Label for free use. PiuDevice PiuDeviceId The value component of the RDN. PiuDevice deviceId The local identity of the device within the PIU. Dependencies: If the attribute loaderType in LoadModule MO is s et to OSE_LOADER, the value of deviceId is the same as for the attributes instan ceId and restartGroup from Program MO, struct ProgramInstance. PiuDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. PiuDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state . If this attribute is set to SHUTTING_DOWN, it will immediately go into the sta te LOCKED. PiuDevice availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Possible values when operationalSta te is set to DISABLED: - FAILED - DEPENDENCY_LOCKED - DEPENDENCY_FAILED PiuDevice operationalState The operational state. PiuDevice userLabel Label for free use. PiuDevice PiuDeviceId The value component of the RDN. PiuDevice deviceId The local identity of the device within the PIU. Dependencies: If the attribute loaderType in LoadModule MO is s et to OSE_LOADER, the value of deviceId is the same as for the attributes instan ceId and restartGroup from Program MO, struct ProgramInstance. PiuDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. PiuDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state . If this attribute is set to SHUTTING_DOWN, it will immediately go into the sta te LOCKED. PiuDevice availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Possible values when operationalSta te is set to DISABLED: - FAILED - DEPENDENCY_LOCKED - DEPENDENCY_FAILED PiuDevice operationalState The operational state. PiuDevice userLabel Label for free use. PiuDevice PiuDeviceId The value component of the RDN. PiuDevice deviceId The local identity of the device within the PIU. Dependencies: If the attribute loaderType in LoadModule MO is s et to OSE_LOADER, the value of deviceId is the same as for the attributes instan ceId and restartGroup from Program MO, struct ProgramInstance. PiuDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. PiuType PiuTypeId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically during system upgrade. PiuType productData Specifies the product number, short prod uct revision, product name and product information of the plug-in-unit. The prod uction date is not used. Recommended: Exclude the trailing letters in the revisi on of the PiuType. Example: - R2B = R2 without trailing PiuType boardWidth The width of the plug-in-unit board in s teps of 5 mm. A plug-in-unit can use more space than the slot that it occupies. Example: boardWidth=3 corresponds to 3*5 = 15 mm. Unit: 5 mm PiuType role This value is: - MP if a board has the role of a Main processor - BP if a board has the role of a device board, or - CMXB if a b oard has the role of a CMXB board, or - OTHERS, otherwise. PiuType reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. PiuType defAllowedSeqRestarts Default value for the PlugInUnit attribute, allowedSeqRestarts.

    PiuType lmFilesInstallState 0 Specifies the sum of the file st ates for all load modules required for this PiuType. Example: If all required lo ad modules are installed, then this attribute = INSTALLED. If no required load m odules are installed, then this attribute = NOT_INSTALLED. Ot PiuType productData.productInfo Information about the product. I f AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlimited). PiuType productData.productName The name of the product. The pro duct name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadMo dule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. PiuType productData.productNumber The product number of th e product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For Upg radePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu PiuType productData.productRevision The revision state of th e product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for t he MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and S ubrackProdType. PiuType productData.productionDate The production date is r epresented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight characters. E xample: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th PiuType PiuTypeId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically during system upgrade. PiuType productData Specifies the product number, short prod uct revision, product name and product information of the plug-in-unit. The prod uction date is not used. Recommended: Exclude the trailing letters in the revisi on of the PiuType. Example: - R2B = R2 without trailing PiuType boardWidth The width of the plug-in-unit board in s teps of 5 mm. A plug-in-unit can use more space than the slot that it occupies. Example: boardWidth=3 corresponds to 3*5 = 15 mm. Unit: 5 mm PiuType role This value is: - MP if a board has the role of a Main processor - BP if a board has the role of a device board, or - CMXB if a b oard has the role of a CMXB board, or - OTHERS, otherwise. PiuType reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. PiuType defAllowedSeqRestarts Default value for the PlugInUnit attribute, allowedSeqRestarts. PiuType lmFilesInstallState 0 Specifies the sum of the file st ates for all load modules required for this PiuType. Example: If all required lo ad modules are installed, then this attribute = INSTALLED. If no required load m odules are installed, then this attribute = NOT_INSTALLED. Ot PiuType productData.productInfo Information about the product. I f AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlimited). PiuType productData.productName The name of the product. The pro duct name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadMo dule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. PiuType productData.productNumber The product number of th e product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For Upg radePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu PiuType productData.productRevision The revision state of th e product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for t he MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and S ubrackProdType. PiuType productData.productionDate The production date is r epresented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight characters. E xample: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th PiuType PiuTypeId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically during system upgrade.

    PiuType productData Specifies the product number, short prod uct revision, product name and product information of the plug-in-unit. The prod uction date is not used. Recommended: Exclude the trailing letters in the revisi on of the PiuType. Example: - R2B = R2 without trailing PiuType boardWidth The width of the plug-in-unit board in s teps of 5 mm. A plug-in-unit can use more space than the slot that it occupies. Example: boardWidth=3 corresponds to 3*5 = 15 mm. Unit: 5 mm PiuType role This value is: - MP if a board has the role of a Main processor - BP if a board has the role of a device board, or - CMXB if a b oard has the role of a CMXB board, or - OTHERS, otherwise. PiuType reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. PiuType defAllowedSeqRestarts Default value for the PlugInUnit attribute, allowedSeqRestarts. PiuType lmFilesInstallState 0 Specifies the sum of the file st ates for all load modules required for this PiuType. Example: If all required lo ad modules are installed, then this attribute = INSTALLED. If no required load m odules are installed, then this attribute = NOT_INSTALLED. Ot PiuType productData.productInfo Information about the product. I f AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlimited). PiuType productData.productName The name of the product. The pro duct name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadMo dule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. PiuType productData.productNumber The product number of th e product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For Upg radePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu PiuType productData.productRevision The revision state of th e product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for t he MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and S ubrackProdType. PiuType productData.productionDate The production date is r epresented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight characters. E xample: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th PlannedAreaProperties PlannedAreaPropertiesId PlannedAreaProperties plannedConfigurationName Planned Configuration name.Sub: PCA PlannedAreaProperties activationScheme 0 Indicates the Ac tivation scheme attached to the plan. Initial value is DEFAULT. DEFAULT= 0 INTRA _MIB_ORDERING = 1 INTER_MIB_ORDERING = 2 Sub: PCA PlannedAreaProperties partlyActivated 0 Indicates if the activat ion is realised partly for the plan. Initial value is FALSE.Sub: PCA PlannedAreaProperties activationLastCommitRecord Record o f last commit time (in ns) of activation elements set and used by the activation algorithms. Sub: PCA PlannedAreaProperties activationInformationRecord A record of activation related information items. Sub: PCA PlannedAreaProperties overallActivationStatus 0 Activation statu s of the planned configuration. Initial value is NOT_STARTED. NOT_STARTED = 0 IN _PROGRESS = 1 PARTLY_REALIZED = 2, FAILED = 3, COMPLETE = 4, TERMINATING= 5, TER MINATED= 6, SCHEDULED= 7, TIMED_OUT= 8 Sub: PCA PlannedAreaProperties activationDate Start date and time for the activation. Format: YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS Sub: PCA PlannedAreaProperties jobID CIF AM job id Sub: PCA PlannedAreaProperties nodeActivationStateRecord A record containing planned node name and its activation status. Sub: PCA PlannedAreaProperties abortAtPreCheckFailure 0 Indicates that t he activation will not being if there any pre-check failures in the plan.This at tribute will be used only activations that are scheduled. Initial value is FALSE

    .Sub: PCA PlannedAreaProperties useRobustReconfig 0 Indicates if the robust reconfiguration using rollback feature will be used during planned area activation. Initial value is FALSE.Sub: PCA PlannedAreaProperties configAdmCountdown 0 Specifies the nu mber of seconds until node restart, that is until a confirmation of the latest c hange must be made. Sub: PCA PlannedAreaProperties activationInformationRecord.activationInfoKey Activation information item key. PlannedAreaProperties activationInformationRecord.activationInfoValue Activation information item value. PlannedAreaProperties activationLastCommitRecord.commitElement Activation element (Plan or MIB) for which last commit time is recorded. PlannedAreaProperties activationLastCommitRecord.commitTime Last commit time (in ns) set and used by the activation algorithms. PlannedAreaProperties nodeActivationStateRecord.activationState 0 Current activation state of MIB. Initial value is NOT_STARTED. NOT_START ED = 0 QUEUED = 1 IN_PROGRESS = 2 COMPLETE = 3, FAILED = 4, PARTLY_COMPLETED = 5 , TERMINATED= 6, NEVER_CONNECTED = 7, TIMED_OUT= 8 FAILED_PRECHECK=9 PlannedAreaProperties nodeActivationStateRecord.mibRootFDN FDN of MIB root. PlannedConfigurationApp PlannedConfigurationAppId Plmn PlmnId Plmn userLabel Provides support for putting a label on the MO instance. Plmn mcc Mobile Contry Code Note: Integer, for CORBA user s,The set operation will be rejected if there exists UtranRelation instances Plmn mnc Mobile Network Code Note: Integer, for CORBA use rs,The set operation will be rejected if there exists UtranRelation instances Plmn mncLength The length of the attribute mnc The set operation will be rejected if there exists UtranRelation instances Plmn aliasPlmnIdentities Sequence of max 30 PlmnIdentites . Plmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mcc Plmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mnc Plmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mncLength PlmnIdentityGroup plmn List of PLMN identities used to identify the external CN operators that have roaming agreements with a sharing C N operator. PlmnIdentityGroup reservedBy Reference, updated autom atically by the system, that points back toward the MO that has a reference to t his MO.See reference in CnOperator. PlmnIdentityGroup userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RN C. PlmnIdentityGroup PlmnIdentityGroupId Naming attribute .Contains the value part of the RDN. PlmnIdentityGroup plmn.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN i dentity used in the radio network. PlmnIdentityGroup plmn.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN i dentity used in the radio network. PlmnIdentityGroup plmn.mncLength 0 The length of the MNC pa rt of a PLMN identity used in the radio network Unit: digit PlugInUnit PlugInUnitId The value component of the RDN. PlugInUnit userLabel Label for free use. PlugInUnit administrativeState 0 The administrative state . PlugInUnit operationalState The operational state. I t is set to ENABLED when the basic OS is started, all other programs on the MP/B P are loaded/started, and all hardware tests during start-up are performed.

    PlugInUnit productType 0 Describes the product type. PlugInUnit piuType Reference to an instance of PiuType. PlugInUnit piuGroupNumber 0 Indicates which restart group th e plug-in unit belongs to. A restart group consists of a number of plug-in units , where at least one must be enabled (working) or performing recovery. When no p lug-in unit in a group is working, the node is restarted automa PlugInUnit availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. PlugInUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. PlugInUnit allowedSeqRestarts 0 The number of automatic sequential restarts that are allowed for a PIU. When this number of automatic re starts has been exceeded, the automatic restarting halts and the PIU is fault-ma rked. The time limit between two restarts is 5 minutes. This means that PlugInUnit hwTestResult Contains text information from l atest performed hardware tests. PlugInUnit hwTestStatus 0 Indicates the status of hardware tests. PlugInUnit greenLed Indicates the operational status of the plug-in unit. The following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_ AVAILABLE = The LED state is not readable at the moment STEADY_LIGHT = Power pre sent SLOW_BLINK = Missing resource FAST_BLINK = Load or test in PlugInUnit redLed Indicates the fault status of the plug-i n unit. The following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_AVAILABLE = Th e LED state is not available at the moment OUT = No fault STEADY_LIGHT = PIU fau lt PlugInUnit yellowLed Indicates the information status of the plug-in unit. The following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_ AVAILABLE = The LED state is not available at the moment OUT = PIU unlocked STEA DY_LIGHT = PIU locked SLOW_BLINK = Shutting-down in progress FL PlugInUnit unitType Displays the same value as the a ttribute productName from the struct AdminProductData in MO PiuType. PlugInUnit PlugInUnitId The value component of the RDN. PlugInUnit userLabel Label for free use. PlugInUnit administrativeState 0 The administrative state . PlugInUnit operationalState The operational state. I t is set to ENABLED when the basic OS is started, all other programs on the MP/B P are loaded/started, and all hardware tests during start-up are performed. PlugInUnit productType 0 Describes the product type. PlugInUnit piuType Reference to an instance of PiuType. PlugInUnit piuGroupNumber 0 Indicates which restart group th e plug-in unit belongs to. A restart group consists of a number of plug-in units , where at least one must be enabled (working) or performing recovery. When no p lug-in unit in a group is working, the node is restarted automa PlugInUnit availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. PlugInUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. PlugInUnit allowedSeqRestarts 0 The number of automatic sequential restarts that are allowed for a PIU. When this number of automatic re starts has been exceeded, the automatic restarting halts and the PIU is fault-ma rked. The time limit between two restarts is 5 minutes. This means that PlugInUnit hwTestResult Contains text information from l atest performed hardware tests. PlugInUnit hwTestStatus 0 Indicates the status of hardware tests. PlugInUnit greenLed Indicates the operational status of the plug-in unit. The following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_ AVAILABLE = The LED state is not readable at the moment STEADY_LIGHT = Power pre

    sent SLOW_BLINK = Missing resource FAST_BLINK = Load or test in PlugInUnit redLed Indicates the fault status of the plug-i n unit. The following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_AVAILABLE = Th e LED state is not available at the moment OUT = No fault STEADY_LIGHT = PIU fau lt PlugInUnit yellowLed Indicates the information status of the plug-in unit. The following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_ AVAILABLE = The LED state is not available at the moment OUT = PIU unlocked STEA DY_LIGHT = PIU locked SLOW_BLINK = Shutting-down in progress FL PlugInUnit unitType Displays the same value as the a ttribute productName from the struct AdminProductData in MO PiuType. PlugInUnit PlugInUnitId The value component of the RDN. PlugInUnit administrativeState 0 The administrative state . PlugInUnit operationalState The operational state. I t is set to ENABLED when the basic OS is started, all other programs on the MP/B P are loaded/started, and all hardware tests during start-up are performed. PlugInUnit productType 0 Describes the product type. PlugInUnit piuType Reference to an instance of PiuType. PlugInUnit piuGroupNumber 0 Indicates which restart group th e plug-in unit belongs to. A restart group consists of a number of plug-in units , where at least one must be enabled (working) or performing recovery. When no p lug-in unit in a group is working, the node is restarted automa PlugInUnit availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. PlugInUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. PlugInUnit allowedSeqRestarts 0 The number of automatic sequential restarts that are allowed for a PIU. When this number of automatic re starts has been exceeded, the automatic restarting halts and the PIU is fault-ma rked. The time limit between two restarts is 5 minutes. This means that PlugInUnit hwTestResult Contains text information from l atest performed hardware tests. PlugInUnit hwTestStatus 0 Indicates the status of hardware tests. PlugInUnit greenLed Indicates the operational status of the plug-in unit. The following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_ AVAILABLE = The LED state is not readable at the moment STEADY_LIGHT = Power pre sent SLOW_BLINK = Missing resource FAST_BLINK = Load or test in PlugInUnit redLed Indicates the fault status of the plug-i n unit. The following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_AVAILABLE = Th e LED state is not available at the moment OUT = No fault STEADY_LIGHT = PIU fau lt PlugInUnit yellowLed Indicates the information status of the plug-in unit. The following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_ AVAILABLE = The LED state is not available at the moment OUT = PIU unlocked STEA DY_LIGHT = PIU locked SLOW_BLINK = Shutting-down in progress FL PlugInUnit unitType Displays the same value as the a ttribute productName from the struct AdminProductData in MO PiuType. PmIRP irpVersion One or more PM IRP version entries Sub: PMS PmService minorAlarmCeasingDelta 5 The percentage of the at tribute maxNoOfCounters used to calculate the minor alarm ceasing limit. Minor a larm ceasing limit = maxNoOfCounters * (100 - minorAlarmCeasingDelta) / 100 A mi nor alarm is ceased when the total number of active counters becomes lo PmService maxNoOfMonitors 30 The maximum number of simultaneo usly active performance monitorings. If this limit is exceeded, when a performan ce monitoring is created or resumed, the create or resume operation is rejected. To keep the number of active performance monitorings below the PmService maxNoOfPmFiles 200 The maximum number of Result Out

    put Period(ROP) files that are maintained in the node. If a new file is created and the limit is exceeded,the oldest file is deleted. If the value is set to a l ower value than before, files can be deleted to keep the number PmService performanceDataPath The name of the path to where the ROP files are stored. PmService performanceDataVolume 0 The volume (c or any p-v olume) where the ROP files are stored. The format for this attribute is : /c/ or /pxxx/ where each x is a digit (0..9). PmService userLabel Label for free use. PmService warningAlarmLimitPercent 80 The percentage o f the attribute maxNoOfCounters used to calculate the warning alarm limit. Warni ng alarm limit = maxNoOfCounters * warningAlarmLimitPercent/100 A warning alarm is raised if the total number of active counters exceeeds the warning alarm lim PmService warningAlarmCeasingDelta 5 The percentage o fmaxNoOfCounters used to calculate the warning alarm ceasing limit. Warning alar m ceasing limit = maxNoOfCounters * (warningAlarmLimitPercent - warningAlarmCeas ingDelta)/100. A warning alarm is ceased when the total number of active counte PmService maxNoOfCounters 65000 The maximum number of simultaneo usly active counters. If this limit is exceeded, when a performance monitoring i s created or resumed, the create or resume operation is rejected. If the total n umber of simultaneously active counters becomes higher than a p PmService transactionTimeOut 60 The time for the transac tion timeout that is applied for all transactions created internally by the Perf ormance Management Service, for example when creating a performance monitoring. Unit: 1 s PmService minorAlarmCeasingDelta 5 The percentage of the at tribute maxNoOfCounters used to calculate the minor alarm ceasing limit. Minor a larm ceasing limit = maxNoOfCounters * (100 - minorAlarmCeasingDelta) / 100 A mi nor alarm is ceased when the total number of active counters becomes lo PmService maxNoOfMonitors 30 The maximum number of simultaneo usly active performance monitorings. If this limit is exceeded, when a performan ce monitoring is created or resumed, the create or resume operation is rejected. To keep the number of active performance monitorings below the PmService maxNoOfPmFiles 100 The maximum number of Result Out put Period(ROP) files that are maintained in the node. If a new file is created and the limit is exceeded,the oldest file is deleted. If the value is set to a l ower value than before, files can be deleted to keep the number PmService performanceDataPath The name of the path to where the ROP files are stored. PmService performanceDataVolume /p001200/ The volume (c or any p-volume) where the ROP files are stored. The format for this attribute is : /c/ or /pxxx/ where each x is a digit (0..9). PmService userLabel Label for free use. PmService warningAlarmLimitPercent 80 The percentage o f the attribute maxNoOfCounters used to calculate the warning alarm limit. Warni ng alarm limit = maxNoOfCounters * warningAlarmLimitPercent/100 A warning alarm is raised if the total number of active counters exceeeds the warning alarm lim PmService warningAlarmCeasingDelta 5 The percentage o fmaxNoOfCounters used to calculate the warning alarm ceasing limit. Warning alar m ceasing limit = maxNoOfCounters * (warningAlarmLimitPercent - warningAlarmCeas ingDelta)/100. A warning alarm is ceased when the total number of active counte PmService maxNoOfCounters 1700000 The maximum number of simultaneo usly active counters. If this limit is exceeded, when a performance monitoring i s created or resumed, the create or resume operation is rejected. If the total n umber of simultaneously active counters becomes higher than a p PmService transactionTimeOut 60 The time for the transac tion timeout that is applied for all transactions created internally by the Perf ormance Management Service, for example when creating a performance monitoring. Unit: 1 s PmService minorAlarmCeasingDelta 5 The percentage of the at

    tribute maxNoOfCounters used to calculate the minor alarm ceasing limit. Minor a larm ceasing limit = maxNoOfCounters * (100 - minorAlarmCeasingDelta) / 100 A mi nor alarm is ceased when the total number of active counters becomes lo PmService maxNoOfMonitors 30 The maximum number of simultaneo usly active performance monitorings. If this limit is exceeded, when a performan ce monitoring is created or resumed, the create or resume operation is rejected. To keep the number of active performance monitorings below the PmService maxNoOfPmFiles 200 The maximum number of Result Out put Period(ROP) files that are maintained in the node. If a new file is created and the limit is exceeded,the oldest file is deleted. If the value is set to a l ower value than before, files can be deleted to keep the number PmService performanceDataPath The name of the path to where the ROP files are stored. PmService performanceDataVolume 0 The volume (c or any p-v olume) where the ROP files are stored. The format for this attribute is : /c/ or /pxxx/ where each x is a digit (0..9). PmService userLabel Label for free use. PmService warningAlarmLimitPercent 80 The percentage o f the attribute maxNoOfCounters used to calculate the warning alarm limit. Warni ng alarm limit = maxNoOfCounters * warningAlarmLimitPercent/100 A warning alarm is raised if the total number of active counters exceeeds the warning alarm lim PmService warningAlarmCeasingDelta 5 The percentage o fmaxNoOfCounters used to calculate the warning alarm ceasing limit. Warning alar m ceasing limit = maxNoOfCounters * (warningAlarmLimitPercent - warningAlarmCeas ingDelta)/100. A warning alarm is ceased when the total number of active counte PmService maxNoOfCounters 22000 The maximum number of simultaneo usly active counters. If this limit is exceeded, when a performance monitoring i s created or resumed, the create or resume operation is rejected. If the total n umber of simultaneously active counters becomes higher than a p PmService transactionTimeOut 60 The time for the transac tion timeout that is applied for all transactions created internally by the Perf ormance Management Service, for example when creating a performance monitoring. Unit: 1 s PoolArea PoolAreaId PoolArea userLabel Provides support for putting a l abel on the MO instance. PositioningServiceClass PositioningServiceClassId PositioningServiceClass positioningServiceClassInstId ID of th e service class. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. PositioningServiceClass userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RN C. PositioningServiceClass firstAttemptResultQosCheck Controls whether the QoS of the result of the first positioning attempt shall be perform ed.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction) PositioningServiceClass secondAttemptResultQosCheck Controls whether the QoS of the result of the second positioning attempt shall be perfor med.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction) PositioningServiceClass firstAttemptCandidate Ordered list con taining three Positioning methods that the RNC selects between, when determining the positioning method for the first positioning attempt. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction) PositioningServiceClass secondAttemptMethod Positioning meth od for the second positioning attempt. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction) PositioningServiceClass thirdAttemptMethod Positioning meth od for the third positioning attempt. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections ( next positioning transaction) PositioningServiceClass agpsMeasTimeMax Maximum measurement time , signaled to the UE in the A-GPS MEASUREMENT CONTROL message.Unit: 1 ms Change

    takes effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction) PositioningServiceClass fixedRespTimeMax Fixed maximum re sponse time for a positioning request using the RANAP message LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL. Special values: When this attribute has value -1, the RANAP IE Respons e Time, received in the LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message, is used to set th PositioningServiceClass lowDelayRespTimeMax Maximum response time for a positioning request using the RANAP message LOCATION REPORTING CONTR OL, when the RANAP IE Response Time is set to 'Low Delay' and fixedRespTimeMax = -1. Dependencies: Only used when fixedRespTimeMax = -1 Unit: ms Resolution: PositioningServiceClass delayTolerantRespTimeMax Maximum response time for a positioning request using the RANAP message LOCATION REPORTI NG CONTROL, when the RANAP IE Response Time is set to 'Delay Tolerant' and fixed RespTimeMax is set to -1. Dependencies: Only used when fixedRespTimeMax = -1 Uni t: ms PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionP Report format wh en the measured format is 'Polygon'. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (n ext positioning transaction) PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionEa Report format wh en the measured format is 'Ellipsoid Arc'. Change takes effect: Ongoing connecti ons (next positioning transaction) PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionEp Report format wh en the measured format is 'Ellipsoid Point'. Change takes effect: Ongoing connec tions (next positioning transaction) PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionEpuc Report format wh en the measured format is 'Ellipsoid Point With Uncertainty Circle'. Change take s effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction) PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionEpue Report format wh en the measured format is 'Ellipsoid Point With Uncertainty Ellipse'. Change tak es effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction) PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionEpa Report format wh en the measured format is 'Ellipsoid Point With Altitude'. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction) PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionEpaue Report format wh en the measured format is 'Ellipsoid Point With Altitude and Uncertainty Ellipso id'. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction) PositioningServiceClass reportedConfidenceLevel Confidence value for the reported position sent by the LOCATION REPORT message. Unit: % Change t akes effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction) PowerControl PowerControlId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. PowerControl betaPrachControlTf0 11 Beta value (gainFactor) for RACH control part, TFC 0. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson per sonnel.Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl betaPrachControlTf1 10 Beta value (gainFactor) for RACH control part, TFC 1. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson per sonnel.Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl betaPrachDataTf0 15 Beta value (gainFactor) for RACH data part, TFC 0. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson person nel.Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Change tak es effect: New connections PowerControl betaPrachDataTf1 15 Beta value (gainFactor) for RACH data part, TFC 1. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson person nel.Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Change tak es effect: New connections PowerControl reportPeriodicity 1000 Report periodicity (RTWP period) for RBS common measurements. This attribute may only be changed by Eric sson personnel.Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Unit: 10 ms Change takes effect: New connections

    PowerControl hysteresisSiUpdate 30 If the difference betwee n reported power measurement and the power value transmitted in System Informati on is larger than this hysteresis in one cell, an update of system information i s initiated in that cell. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsso PowerControl pO1 0 Power offset for the TFCI.Value mapping: 0: 0.00 dB 1: 0.25 dB ... 24: 6.00 dB Unit: 0.25 dB PowerControl pO2 12 Power offset for the TPC bits.Value mapp ing: 0: 0.00 dB 1: 0.25 dB ... 24: 6.00 dB Unit: 0.25 dB PowerControl pO3 12 Power offset for the pilot bits.Value ma pping: 0: 0.00 dB 1: 0.25 dB ... 24: 6.00 dB Unit: 0.25 dB PowerControl cBackOff 0 Used to back off the open loop p ower control estimate to a conservative starting point. Value mapping: -60: -15, 00 dB -59: -14,75 dB ...60:15,00 dB Unit: 0.25 dB PowerControl ecNoPcpichDefault -16 The default value to be used in power calculations for Ec divided by No. PowerControl maxAdjustmentStep 1 Maximum adjustment step for downlink power balancing. This parameter is signaled over NBAP with the valu es [1..10] slots, where 1 corresponds to an allowed change of the downlink power (due to downlink power balancing) of at most 1 dB every 1 slot. 10 cor PowerControl adjustmentPeriod 8 Adjustment period for do wnlink power balancing. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel .Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl adjustmentRatio 0 Adjustment ratio for downlink po wer balancing. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change t akes effect: New connections PowerControl codePowerPeriod 200 Measurement period for downlink power balancing. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: 10 ms Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl dlPcMethod BALANCING(3) Selects the downlink pow er control method to be used at establishment of the radio connection.Change tak es effect: New connections PowerControl ulSirGuard 2 Defines the range used when dete rmine when a SIR error measurement report shall be sent from the RBS to RNC. Thi s attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: dB Change takes effe ct: New connections PowerControl ulSirStep 10 Size of upstep of SIR target for 10 ms TTI users. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl ulOuterLoopRegulator JUMP(1) Regulation type for upli nk outer loop power control algorithm. Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl sirErrorReportHyst 60 Defines the hysteresis u sed to determine when a SIR error measurement report shall be sent from the RBS to RNC. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Resolution: 10 Unit: ms Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl sirEstFilter 0 Measurement filtering coefficien t used to determine when a SIR error measurement report shall be sent from the R BS to RNC. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl sirMin -82 Minimum allowed SIR target. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl sirMax EUL is activated: 120 EUL is not activated: 100 Maximum allowed SIR target for 10 ms TTI users. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect : New connections PowerControl sirIncreaseMask 4 Time that subsequent SIR target up commands are ignored after a successful SIR target up command, for 10 ms TTI users. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: radio fram e (10 ms) Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl blerCorrectionFactor 8 The jump algorithm typic ally gives a result that is slightly biased towards increased BLER. This paramet er is used to compensate for this bias. This attribute may only be changed by Er icsson personnel.Value mapping: 1: 0,1 2: 0,2 ... 10: 1,0 Change takes

    PowerControl initShoPowerParam -2 Correction of initial do wnlink power at soft handover RL setup.Unit: dB Change takes effect: New connect ions PowerControl transmittedCodePowerFilter 4 Measurement Filt er Coefficient for Transmitted Code Power measurement used for downlink power ba lancing. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Dependencies:C hanging this attribute may affect traffic. Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl rtwpFilter 9 Filter coefficient for received total wideband power measurement.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl deltaSir1 10 Delta in UL SIR target value dur ing the frame containing the start of the first transmission gap in the transmis sion gap pattern.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl deltaSirAfter1 5 Delta in UL SIR target value dur ing the frame after the frame containing the start of the first transmission gap in the transmission gap pattern. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl deltaSir2 10 Delta in UL SIR target value dur ing the frame containing the start of the second transmission gap in the transmi ssion gap pattern.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl deltaSirAfter2 5 Delta in UL SIR target value dur ing the frame after the frame containing the start of the second transmission ga p in the transmission gap pattern. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsso n personnel.Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl itp 0 Mode of transmission power of the uplink DPCCH at the first slot after transmission gap.This attribute may only be chang ed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl rpp 1 Mode of step size during recovery period .This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: N ew connections PowerControl pcpichPowerDefault 33 Default primary CPICH po wer.If the primary CPICH power is not provided from DRNC, DPCCH_Power_Offset is calculated using this parameter. Unit: dBm PowerControl fixedPowerDl 65 Fixed downlink power used in the fixed-balancing downlink power control method, expressed relative to the PCPICH power.Value mapping: 1: -35.0 dB 2: -34.5 dB 3: -34.0 dB ... 70: -0.5 dB 71: 0. 0 dB 72: 0.5 dB ... 101: 15.0 dB Unit: 0.5 dB Change takes effe PowerControl fixedRefPower 65 Fixed downlink reference power u sed in the fixed-balancing downlink power control method, expressed relative to the PCPICH power.Value mapping: 1: -35.0 dB 2: -34.5 dB 3: -34.0 dB ... 70: -0.5 dB 71: 0.0 dB 72: 0.5 dB ... 101: 15.0 dB Unit: 0.5 dB Change PowerControl cPO 0 Used to set the uplink DPCCH power offse t to a conservative level. Value mapping: -30: -15.0 dB -29: -14.5 dB ... 0:0.0 dB ...30: 15.0 dB Unit: 0.5 dB PowerControl sirErrorMode 2 Used to determine which SIR erro r measurements shall be initiated. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsso n personnel.Value mapping: 0: None 1: Event E 2: Event F 3: Both (1&2) PowerControl cCM 4 Used to adjust the reference power for u sers in compressed mode during DL power balancing This attribute may only be cha nged by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 0.0 dB ... 4: 2.0 dB ... 20: 10.0 d B Unit: 0.5 dB PowerControl gainFactorCLow 11 Reference gain factor (generic b eta value) for the uplink DPCCH part of RABs (or SRB) with a minimum spreading f actor >= 32. 'Low' refers to low data transmission capability due to high spread ing factor. Used by Power Control. This attribute may only be c PowerControl gainFactorDLow 15 Reference gain factor (generic b eta value) for the uplink DPDCH part of RABs (or SRB) with a minimum spreading f actor >= 32. 'Low' refers to low data transmission capability due to high spread

    ing factor. Used by Power Control. This attribute may only be c PowerControl gainFactorCHigh 8 Reference gain factor (generic b eta value) for the uplink DPCCH part of RABs (or SRB) with a minimum spreading f actor in the range 8 < SF <= 16. 'High' refers to high data transmission capabil ity due to low spreading factor. Used by Power Control. This at PowerControl gainFactorDHigh 15 Reference gain factor (generic b eta value) for the uplink DPDCH part of RABs (or SRB) with a minimum spreading f actor in the range 8 < SF <= 16. 'High' refers to high data transmission capabil ity due to low spreading factor. Used by Power Control. This at PowerControl ulInitSirTargetSrb 40 Initial SIR target in th e uplink for stand alone SRB. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl ulInitSirTargetLow 40 Initial SIR target in th e uplink for RABs that have a minimum spreading factor >= 32. Unit: 0.1 dB Chang e takes effect: New connections PowerControl ulInitSirTargetHigh 70 Initial SIR target in th e uplink for RABs that have a minimum spreading factor <= 16 (but > 4). Dependen cies: RABs that have a minimum spreading factor <=4 use ulInitSirTargetExtraHigh as the initial SIR target instead. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: N PowerControl dlInitSirTarget 41 Initial SIR target for the downl ink DPDCH part of all RABs. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl cNbifho 10 Factor used to take into account the non -blind inter-frequency handover margin. Unit: 0.1 dB Resolution: 5 PowerControl gainFactorCExtraHigh 5 Reference gain factor (g eneric beta value) for the uplink DPCCH part of RABs (or SRB) with a minimum spr eading factor <= 8. 'Extra high' refers to extra high data transmission capabili ty due to very low spreading factor.Used by Power Control. This attribu PowerControl gainFactorDExtraHigh 15 Reference gain factor (g eneric beta value) for the uplink DPDCH part of RABs (or SRB) with a minimum spr eading factor <= 8. 'Extra high' refers to extra high data transmission capabili ty due to very low spreading factor.Used by Power Control. This attribu PowerControl ulInitSirTargetExtraHigh 70 Initial SIR targ et in the uplink for RABs that have a minimum spreading factor <= 4. Unit: 0.1 d B Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl ulInitSirTargetEdch 30 Initial SIR target in th e uplink for RABs in state EUL/HS (that is, using the E-DCH) and using 10 ms TTI . Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl transmissionTargetError 10 Wanted percentage of E-D CH frames for which the number of harq transmissions is greater than the target, for 10 ms TTI users. Unit: 0.1 % Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl transmissionTargetErrorTti2 20 Wanted percentag e of E-DCH frames for which the number of harq transmissions is greater than the target, for 2 ms TTI users. Unit: 0.1 % Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl sirIncreaseMaskTti2 4 Time that subsequent SIR target up commands are ignored after a successful SIR target up command, for 2 ms TTI users. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: rad io frame (10 ms) PowerControl ulSirStepTti2 5 Size of upstep of SIR target for 2 ms TTI users. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl ulInitSirTargetEdchTti2 70 Initial SIR target in th e uplink for RABs in state EUL/HS (that is, using the E-DCH) and using 2 ms TTI. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl sirMaxTti2 173 Maximum allowed SIR target for 2 ms TTI users. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections PowerControl fdpchErrorRateTarget 1 Error Rate Target signal ed to the UE to be used to control the power of TPC (Transmit Power Control) com mands sent on F-DPCH.Unit: % Change takes effect: Next reconfiguration PowerControl ulInitSirTargetEdchSrb 50 Initial uplink SIR Targe t signalled to the RBS to be used to control the power of standalone SRB on E-DC H.Unit: 0.1 dBChange takes effect: Next reconfiguration PowerDistribution PowerDistributionId The value compon

    ent of the RDN. PowerDistribution userLabel Label for free use. PowerDistribution mainLoadUndervoltageDisconnect 0 Specifie s the voltage at which the BFU must disconnect the main load. The main load is d isconnected when systemVoltage > mainLoadUndervoltageDisconnect.Dependencies: pr iorityLoadUndervoltageDisconnect -mainLoadUndervoltageDisconnect >= 0.2 V.If mai nLoadUn PowerDistribution priorityLoadUndervoltageDisconnect 0 Specifies the voltage at which the BFU must disconnect the Priority Load. The pr imary load is disconnected when systemVoltage > priorityLoadUndervoltageDisconne ct. Dependencies: priorityLoadUndervoltageDisconnect -mainLoadUndervoltageDiscon nect >= 0.2 V U PowerDistribution undervoltageDisconnectCeaseOffset 0 Specifies the offset for the disconnected voltage above which the BFU reconnects the load. Applicable both for main and priority load. The default value will gi ve an undervoltage reconnection at mainLoadUnderVoltageDisconnect - undervoltage DisconnectCease PowerDistrSystem availabilityStatus The availability status of the power distribution system. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POW ER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? D EGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: PSC_U PowerDistrSystem currentLoad The measured power distr ibution current load.Use cases: PSC_UC103 Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerDistrSystem currentOverloadAlarmCeaseOffset 0 Alarm ce ase offset for power distribution current load. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC_UC104 Unit: 1 A Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerDistrSystem currentOverloadAlarmLevel 0 Alarm le vel for power distribution current load. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC_UC 104 Unit: 1 A Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerDistrSystem inputOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 Alarm cease offset for power distribution input voltage.Example: 25 = 2.5 V. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC_UC104 Unit: 0.1 V Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerDistrSystem inputOvervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm le vel for power distribution input voltage.Example: -580 = -58 V. Use cases: PSC_U C101, PSC_UC103, PSC_UC104 Unit: 0.1 V Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerDistrSystem inputUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 Alarm cease offset for power distribution input voltage.Example: 10 = 1 V Cease condition is true if power distribution input voltage < inputUndervoltageAlarmLe vel - inputUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC_UC 104 Unit: 0.1 V PowerDistrSystem inputUndervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm le vel for power distribution input voltage.Example: -480 = -48 V Fault condition i s true if power distribution input voltage > inputUndervoltageAlarmLevel. Use ca ses: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC_UC104 Unit: 0.1 V Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerDistrSystem inputVoltage The measured power distr ibution input voltage.Example: -480 = -48 V Undefined value: -1 Use cases: PSC_U C103 Unit: 0.1 V Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerDistrSystem operationalState Defines the oper ational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: PSC_UC103 Requir ement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerDistrSystem pdDeviceRef Reference to MO PdDevice . Use cases: PSC_UC101 Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerDistrSystem PowerDistrSystemId PowerDistrSystem systemOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 Alarm cease offset for power distribution system voltage.Example: 10 = 1 V Cease condition is true if power distribution system voltage > systemOvervoltageAlarm Level + systemOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC_ UC104 Unit: 0.1 PowerDistrSystem systemOvervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm le vel for power distribution system voltage.Example: -580 = -58 V Fault condition

    is true if power distribution system voltage < systemOvervoltageAlarmLevel. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC_UC104 Unit: 0.1 V Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerDistrSystem systemUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 Alarm cease offset for power distribution system voltage.Example: 10 = 1 VCease condition is true if power distribution system voltage < systemUndervoltageAlarm Level - systemUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC _UC104 Unit: 0. PowerDistrSystem systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm le vel for power distribution system voltage.Example:-480 = -48 V Fault condition i s true if power distribution system voltage > systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC_UC104 Unit: 0.1 V Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerDistrSystem systemVoltage The measured power distr ibution system voltage.Example: -480 = -48 V Undefined value: -1 Use cases: PSC_ UC103 Unit: 0.1 V Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupply PowerSupplyId The value component of the RDN. PowerSupply userLabel Label for free use. PowerSupply nominalVoltage 0 The desired system voltage.Depen dencies: Superseded by chargingVoltage when MO BatteryBackup is created Unit: 0. 1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately. PowerSupply systemOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 The offs et for the system over voltage level below which the system over voltage alarm i s ceased. The alarm cease condition is true when systemVoltage > SystemOvervolta geAlarmLevel + SystemOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset. Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 Take s effec PowerSupply systemOvervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm level for system over voltage.The alarm active condition is true when systemVoltage > Syst emOvervoltageAlarmLevel Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately. Use r category: Ericsson personnel. PowerSupply systemUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 The offs et for the system under voltage level above which the system undervoltage alarm ceases. The alarm cease condition is true when systemVoltage < SystemUndervoltag eAlarmLevel - SystemUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset. Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 Take s effec PowerSupply systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm level for system undervoltage. The alarm raise condition is true when systemVoltage is low er than SystemUndervoltageAlarmLevel. Dependencies: systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel shall be higher than the mainLoadUnderVoltageDisconnectLevel. Unit: 0.1 V Reso PowerSupply systemVoltage The measured system voltage. It is equal to the attribute batteryVoltage, MO BatteryBackup, when the battery is connected. Undefined value: -1 (no connection with neither PDU, BFU nor PSU) Uni t: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 PowerSupplySubrack cabinetPosition String with cabinet posi tion as defined by 'Mub user' for positioning of cabinet. It is used to distingu ish subracks in different cabinets, thus allowing a unique subrack position to b e built.Example: 9. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL PowerSupplySubrack noOfSlots 0 Number of slots in power supply subrack, depends on the RBS type. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Require ment: EQHANDL_RBS_FU:12 Ref. [CB_ECF] PowerSupplySubrack PowerSupplySubrackId PowerSupplySubrack subrackPosition The subrack position. Th e value consist of (<X><Y><Z>): X = Cabinet position within the node starting fr om the left, one digit (1 - 9). Y = Subrack vertical position within the cabinet starting from the ground, one letter (A - Z). Z = Subrack horizontal p PowerSupplySystem acDeviceRef Reference to AcDevice MO . Use cases: PSC_UC201 Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem availabilityStatus The availability status of the power supply system. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADE D ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: PSC_UC203_M PowerSupplySystem batteryCurrent The measured battery cur

    rent. It is positive when the battery is charged and negative when discharging. Undefined value: -9999 Use cases: PSC_UC203Unit: 1 A Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem batteryOvertempAlarmCeaseOffset 0 The leve l at which the power supply system battery temperature alarm ceases. Cease condi tion is true when battery temperature < batteryOvertempAlarmLevel - batteryOvert empAlarmCeaseOffset. Unit: 1?C Scope: Battery supervision Use cases: PSC_UC201, PSC_UC2 PowerSupplySystem batteryOvertempAlarmLevel 0 The alar m level for power supply system battery temperature. Fault condition is true whe n battery temperature > batteryOvertempAlarmLevel. Unit: 1?C Scope: Battery supe rvision Use cases: PSC_UC201, PSC_UC203, PSC_UC204 Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem batteryTestEnable 0 Indicates if it is allowed to start battery test. It does not prevent using the batteries in cas e of AC failure. Dependencies: May not be set to true if attribute Battery::batt eryCapacityDefaultValue =< 30 (battery test is not allowed for low capacity bat PowerSupplySystem batteryVoltage The measured battery vol tage. It is measured over the battery, hence 0 means the battery is disconnected . It is equal to the system voltage when the battery is connected. Use cases: PS C_UC203 Unit: 0.1 V Undefined value: -1 Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem bfDeviceRef Reference to BfDevice MO . Use cases: PSC_UC201 Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem cyclicBattTestStartTime 0 Indicates at wha t time during a day the cyclic battery test is started.Expressed as hh:mm hh = h ours (00..23) mm = minutes (00..59) Scope: Battery test Takes effect: At commit or at next test if battery test is active. Use cases: PSC_UC201, PSC_UC203, PSC PowerSupplySystem mainLoadUndervoltageDisconnect 0 Indicate s at what voltage the battery fuse unit must disconnect the main load. Note that this is not for disconnection of the battery. Disconnection of the battery is d one at 39 V. Disconnected when systemVoltage > mainLoadUndervoltageDisconnect. s ystemVo PowerSupplySystem mainPrioCurrentLoad The measured sys tem current load. It is the sum of the current load delivered from each rectifie r minus the battery current. Use cases: PSC_UC203 Undefined value: -1 Unit: 1 A Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem monthBatteryTest 0 Gives the months during which battery test is executed. Example: 2340 = 100100100100 = March, Ju ne, September and December bit0=JANUARY bit1=FEBRUARY bit2=MARCH bit3=APRIL bit4 =MAY bit5=JUNE bit6=JULY bit7=AUGUST bit8=SEPTEMBER bit9=OCTOBER bit10=NOVEMBER PowerSupplySystem operationalState Defines the oper ational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: PSC_UC203_MSS Re quirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem PowerSupplySystemId PowerSupplySystem priorityLoadUndervoltageDisconnect 0 Indicates at what voltage the battery fuse unit must disconnect the priority loa d. Note that this is not for disconnection of the battery. Disconnection of the battery is done at 39 V. Disconnected if systemVoltage >priorityLoadUndervoltage Disconnect. sys PowerSupplySystem psDeviceRef Reference to PsDevice. U se cases: PSC_UC201 Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem secureTransmBatteryBackupTimeLimit 0 Battery backup time limit, indicating when it is time to order a shut down of ra dio resources during low battery time level. Use cases: PSC_UC201, PSC_UC203, PS C_UC204, PSC_UC227_MSS Unit: 1 min Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem secureTransmEnable 0 Indicates if rad io resources must be shut down during low battery time level. Use cases: PSC_UC2 01, PSC_UC203, PSC_UC204,PSC_UC227_MSS Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem systemOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 The alarm ceased level for system voltage. Cease condition is true when systemVo ltage > systemOvervoltageAlarmLevel + systemOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset. Unit: 0 .1 V Scope: Battery supervision Use cases: PSC_UC201, PSC_UC203, PSC_UC204 Ref.

    [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem systemOvervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm le vel for system voltage.Fault condition is true when systemVoltage < systemOvervo ltageAlarmLevel. Unit: 0.1 V Scope: Battery supervision Use cases: PSC_UC201, PS C_UC203, PSC_UC204 Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem systemPowerLoad The measured system powe r load. It is represented in percent of available capacity. It is the mean value of the power load delivered from each rectifier. Undefined value: -1 Use cases: PSC_UC203 Unit: 1% Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem systemUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 The level at which the system undervoltage alarm ceases. Cease condition is true when systemVoltage < systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel - systemUndervoltageAlarmCeas eOffset. Unit: 0.1 V Scope: Battery supervision Use cases: PSC_UC201, PSC_UC203, PSC_UC204 Ref. PowerSupplySystem systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm le vel for system undervoltage. Fault condition is true when systemVoltage > system UndervoltageAlarmLevel. Unit: 0.1 V Scope: Battery supervision Use cases: PSC_UC 201, PSC_UC203, PSC_UC204 Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem systemVoltage The measured system volt age. It is equal to the Battery Voltage when the battery is connected, otherwise it is the highest voltage delivered from one PS. Example: -480 = -48 V Undefine d value: -1 Use cases: PSC_UC203 Unit: 0.1 V Ref. [FS_PSC] PowerSupplySystem temperatureDisconnect 0 Indicates the te mperature at which the battery fuse unit disconnects the battery. Applies to bot h main and priority loads. Disconnected when battery temperature > temperatureDi sconnect. Note! Shall only for certain special batteries be set to values > 60, PowerSupplySystem temperatureDisconnectCeaseOffset 0 Indicates the temperature at which the battery fuse unit reconnects the battery. Applies to both main and priority loads. Reconnected when battery temperature < temperatureDisconnect -temperatureDisconnectCeaseOffset. Unit: 1?C Scope: Batte ry fuse supervi PowerSupplySystem undervoltageDisconnectCeaseOffset 0 Indicates the voltage at which the battery fuse unit reconnects the load. Applic able both for main and priority load. Reconnected when systemVoltage < mainLoadU ndervoltageDisconect - undervoltageDisconnectCeaseOffset. The default values of mainLoadUnderVo Prach availabilityStatus The availability status of the c ommon channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Prach operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP] Prach PrachId Prach ubchDeviceSetRef Reference to MO UbchDeviceSet. R ef. [CB_MOP] PredefRbsScannerGpeh fileLocation Indicates the location ( absolute path) on the hard disk for the GPEH ROP files. Hard coded in system to ?/c/pm_data/. Use cases: Collect and Administrate Performance Measurement Data Re quirement: PERFEVENT_RBS_RE:140 Ref. [CB_PMG] PredefRbsScannerGpeh maxFileSize 0 The maximum size allowed for the current GPEH ROP file, not yet compressed with the gzip algorithm. When maxFileSize is reached, writing to the current ROP file is stopped. Writing is resumed again at the beginning of the next ROP (in the next ROP file). PredefRbsScannerGpeh maxStorageSize 270 Maximum disk usage allow ed for GPEH files compressed with the gzip algorithm in the node. The size of an compressed GPEH ROP file is approximately 1/5 of the uncompressed GPEH ROP file size. When maxStorageSize is reached, the oldest compressed GPEH ROP f PredefRbsScannerGpeh PredefRbsScannerGpehId PredefRbsScannerGpeh scanState The state of the GPEH sc anner. The value is set by the system, according to the suspend/resume operation

    from the Mub user, over the PMCI interface. Possible values: ? ACTIVE ? SUSPEND ED Use cases: Collect and Administrate Performance Measurement Data Req Program ProgramId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically during system upgrade. If the Program MO is manually created, th en set the value for this attribute. Program userLabel Label for free use. Program loadModule Specifies which load module the Program is instantiated from. Program operationalState The operational state. Program startState 0 Indicates if the program is permitted to enter the operational state enabled or not after a PIU restart. The default sta te is DISABLED, to avoid that an operating program and a new version of the same program have its startState enabled at the same time. Program heapSize 0 Specifies the program heap size. The val ue in the referenced LoadModule is fetched by Program and used if no value is su bmitted at the creation of the Program MO. The referenced load module has a defa ult size defined at compile time. This value is used if Program poolSize 0 Specifies the program pool size. It is p ossible to set this value at the creation of the Program MO. It is only valid fo r MP programs. The value in the referenced LoadModule is fetched by Program and used if no value is submitted at the creation of the Pr Program restartTimer 0 Specifies the time that a program has to execute without faults, until the restart counter is reset. The time value is i n seconds. restartTimer= -1 Forever, implies that the restart counter is only re set when the PIU is restarted. This attribute is only r Program restartCounterLimit 0 Specifies the number of times th at a program can restart, without escalation to a PIU restart. The possible valu es are: - restartCounterLimit = -1 Unlimited, do not restart PIU, regardless of the number of times the specific program restarts. - restartCou Program programInstances A list of program instances. The default value of this attribute is an empty list. This attribute is only releva nt if the parent of this MO is the PlugInUnit MO. Program loaderType 0 Specifies the type of the program loader . For use by Ericsson staff only.This is the LoaderName in the UCF. Possible val ues are: - OSE_LOADER - DEVICE_LOADER Program deviceLoaderInformation If loaderType is set to DEVICE_L OADER, this attribute can have a value. It is transferred to the device loader.F or use by Ericsson staff only. Program deviceLoaderName If loaderType is set to DEVICE_L OADER, this attribute must have a value.For use by Ericsson staff only. Program programInstances.distribution 0 Specifies the processor and/or processor core, where the program instance executes. In case of a single CPU or a single core, this value must be set to 0. The instances can be distribu ted within only one PlugInUnit MO. Program programInstances.instanceId 0 The instance ID of the p rogram at the resource layer. The value 0 means that it is not instatiated. Program programInstances.restartGroup 0 The restart group this p rogram instance belongs to. It controls the error escalation. The value 0 means that this program instance does not belong to any restart group. Program ProgramId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically during system upgrade. If the Program MO is manually created, th en set the value for this attribute. Program userLabel Label for free use. Program loadModule Specifies which load module the Program is instantiated from. Program operationalState The operational state. Program startState 0 Indicates if the program is permitted to enter the operational state enabled or not after a PIU restart. The default sta te is DISABLED, to avoid that an operating program and a new version of the same program have its startState enabled at the same time.

    Program heapSize 0 Specifies the program heap size. The val ue in the referenced LoadModule is fetched by Program and used if no value is su bmitted at the creation of the Program MO. The referenced load module has a defa ult size defined at compile time. This value is used if Program poolSize 0 Specifies the program pool size. It is p ossible to set this value at the creation of the Program MO. It is only valid fo r MP programs. The value in the referenced LoadModule is fetched by Program and used if no value is submitted at the creation of the Pr Program restartTimer 0 Specifies the time that a program has to execute without faults, until the restart counter is reset. The time value is i n seconds. restartTimer= -1 Forever, implies that the restart counter is only re set when the PIU is restarted. This attribute is only r Program restartCounterLimit 0 Specifies the number of times th at a program can restart, without escalation to a PIU restart. The possible valu es are: - restartCounterLimit = -1 Unlimited, do not restart PIU, regardless of the number of times the specific program restarts. - restartCou Program programInstances A list of program instances. The default value of this attribute is an empty list. This attribute is only releva nt if the parent of this MO is the PlugInUnit MO. Program loaderType 0 Specifies the type of the program loader . For use by Ericsson staff only.This is the LoaderName in the UCF. Possible val ues are: - OSE_LOADER - DEVICE_LOADER Program deviceLoaderInformation If loaderType is set to DEVICE_L OADER, this attribute can have a value. It is transferred to the device loader.F or use by Ericsson staff only. Program deviceLoaderName If loaderType is set to DEVICE_L OADER, this attribute must have a value.For use by Ericsson staff only. Program programInstances.distribution 0 Specifies the processor and/or processor core, where the program instance executes. In case of a single CPU or a single core, this value must be set to 0. The instances can be distribu ted within only one PlugInUnit MO. Program programInstances.instanceId 0 The instance ID of the p rogram at the resource layer. The value 0 means that it is not instatiated. Program programInstances.restartGroup 0 The restart group this p rogram instance belongs to. It controls the error escalation. The value 0 means that this program instance does not belong to any restart group. Program ProgramId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically during system upgrade. If the Program MO is manually created, th en set the value for this attribute. Program loadModule Specifies which load module the Program is instantiated from. Program operationalState The operational state. Program startState 0 Indicates if the program is permitted to enter the operational state enabled or not after a PIU restart. The default sta te is DISABLED, to avoid that an operating program and a new version of the same program have its startState enabled at the same time. Program heapSize 0 Specifies the program heap size. The val ue in the referenced LoadModule is fetched by Program and used if no value is su bmitted at the creation of the Program MO. The referenced load module has a defa ult size defined at compile time. This value is used if Program poolSize 0 Specifies the program pool size. It is p ossible to set this value at the creation of the Program MO. It is only valid fo r MP programs. The value in the referenced LoadModule is fetched by Program and used if no value is submitted at the creation of the Pr Program restartTimer 0 Specifies the time that a program has to execute without faults, until the restart counter is reset. The time value is i n seconds. restartTimer= -1 Forever, implies that the restart counter is only re set when the PIU is restarted. This attribute is only r Program restartCounterLimit 0 Specifies the number of times th at a program can restart, without escalation to a PIU restart. The possible valu

    es are: - restartCounterLimit = -1 Unlimited, do not restart PIU, regardless of the number of times the specific program restarts. - restartCou Program programInstances A list of program instances. The default value of this attribute is an empty list. This attribute is only releva nt if the parent of this MO is the PlugInUnit MO. Program loaderType 0 Specifies the type of the program loader . For use by Ericsson staff only.This is the LoaderName in the UCF. Possible val ues are: - OSE_LOADER - DEVICE_LOADER Program deviceLoaderInformation If loaderType is set to DEVICE_L OADER, this attribute can have a value. It is transferred to the device loader.F or use by Ericsson staff only. Program deviceLoaderName If loaderType is set to DEVICE_L OADER, this attribute must have a value.For use by Ericsson staff only. Program programInstances.distribution 0 Specifies the processor and/or processor core, where the program instance executes. In case of a single CPU or a single core, this value must be set to 0. The instances can be distribu ted within only one PlugInUnit MO. Program programInstances.instanceId 0 The instance ID of the p rogram at the resource layer. The value 0 means that it is not instatiated. Program programInstances.restartGroup 0 The restart group this p rogram instance belongs to. It controls the error escalation. The value 0 means that this program instance does not belong to any restart group. Psch availabilityStatus The availability status of the c ommon channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Psch operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Requirement: CELL_RBS_FU:9 Ref. [CB_MOP] Psch PschId PsDevice PsDeviceId PsDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: AUC_310 Ref. [FS_AUC] PsDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I PsDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] PsDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_310 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.7 31Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] PsDeviceSet PsDeviceSetId PsDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_309 Specificatio PsDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_309 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] Psu deviceRef Reference to the PS device that supervis es this unit.Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: PCU created. Ref. [CB_ ECF] Psu PsuId Psu alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the non-processing u nit. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_ REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when b it 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstandi Psu greenLed Indicates the operational status of the non-processing unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not support

    ed. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = Power no t present, but since the LED state is not readable in t Psu productionDate 0 Date the unit was produced (part of PID) . Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondi tion: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Psu productName Product name of the unit (part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Preconditi on: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Psu productNumber Product number of the unit (part of PID) . Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondi tion: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Psu productRevision Product revision of the unit (part of PI D). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precon dition: Hardware must be installed Ref. [FS_PIY] Psu productType 0 Product type (PID) is used by product in ventory to select products. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precon dition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Psu redLed Indicates the fault status of the non-processing unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not supported. ? NOT_AVAI LABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = No fault. ? STEADY_LIG HT = Fault. Use cases: MEC_310 Ref. [FS_MEC] Psu serialNumber Unique number that identifies the unit ( part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_F U:3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY] Psu yellowLed Indicates the information status of the non-processing unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not support ed. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = Board un locked. ? STEADY_LIGHT = Board locked. ? SLOW_BLINK = S PsuDeviceGroup PsuDeviceGroupId PsuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specific ation: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] PsuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat PsuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] PsuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] RabHandling RabHandlingId RabHandling psStreamingInactivityTimer 30 Time after which an inactive PS Streaming RAB is released. When both the downlink and uplink thr oughput for a PS Streaming RAB have been 0 kbps (no data has been transmitted) f or this length of time, a release of the PS Streaming RAB is requested from the RabHandling activeQueueMgmt 0 Determines if active queue manag ement (early congestion detection and selective dropping of packets) is turned o n or off for all PS Interactive RABs. Change takes effect: New connections RabHandling eulMinHwSchRate 32 The pre-allocated hardware rate for scheduled data for E-DCH users in the RBS. Needed for RBS hardware consumpti on calculations in RNC.The calculation is performed in the same way for 2 ms and 10 ms TTI, with this constant as input, but the values shall t RabHandling amrNbMmUeRelease R99(0) UE 3GPP-release control for AMR-NB MM. Defines from which 3GPP release of a UE, AMR-NB multimode is allo wed. UEs older than this release are limited to AMR-NB Single-mode 12.2 configur ations. Change takes effect: New connections Rach RachId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system.

    Rach administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the channel. Rach operationalState The operational state of the cha nnel. Rach availabilityStatus The availability status of the c hannel. More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9, bit Rach userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. Rach scramblingCodeWordNo 0 Scrambling Code for preamble and message part.PRACH parameter. The value range covers both the RRC and NBAP spec . Disturbances:Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set, the RACH is disabled automatically and then re-en Rach preambleSignatures 65535 Preamble signatures for PRACH. B it 0: P0 Bit 1: P1 ... Bit 15: P15 One or more preamble signatures can be active . The rightmost bit (bit 0) in the Corba data type long corresponds to P0, bit 1 corresponds to P1 and so on. However not that bit 0 is the lef Rach preambleThreshold 34 The threshold for preamble detec tion, relative to the interference level.This attribute may only be changed by E ricsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: -36.0 dB 1: -35.5 dB ... 34:-19.0 dB ... 72: 0.0 dB Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoin Rach subChannelNo 4095 Sub channel numbers. Bit 0: sub channel no 0 Bit 1: sub channel no 1 ... Bit 11: sub channel no 11 One or more sub chann el numbers can be active. The rightmost bit (bit 0) in the Corba data type long corresponds to sub channel no 0, bit 1 corresponds to s Rach aichTransmissionTiming 4 AICH timing delay parameter. Dis turbances:Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic.Whenever its value is set, the RACH is disabled automatically and then re-enabled. Unit: chips Rach aichPower -6 AICH power, to be used for transmitting on AICH, relative to the primaryCpichPower value. The value range is set to cove r both the RRC and NBAP spec. Unit: dB Rach powerOffsetP0 1 Power step when no acquisition indicator is received. Unit: dB Rach powerOffsetPpm -4 Power step between preamble and the mess age part. Unit: dB Rach preambleRetransMax 32 Maximum number of preambles in o ne preamble ramping cycle. Rach maxPreambleCycle 32 Maximum number of preamble rampi ng cycle. Rach constantValueCprach -19 Constant value used by the UE to calculate the initial power on PRACH according to the Open loop power control p rocedure. Unit: dB Rach spreadingFactor 64 Minimum spreading factor to use for PRAC H. Value mapping: 32: TTI = 10 ms. 64: TTI = 20 ms. Disturbances:Changing this a ttribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set, the RACH is disa bled automatically and then re-enabled. Rach increasedRachCoverageEnabled 0 Enables or disables the feature Increased RACH Coverage in this cell. When the feature Increased RACH Co verage is active, the available preamble signatures and the preamble scrambling code number are calculated internally by the RNC. When the feature Incr Rach availabilityStatus The availability status of the c ommon channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Rach blerIsActive Indicates whether BLER is measured on RA CH. Possible values: ? 0 = FALSE ? 1 = TRUE User category: Ericsson personnel Re f. [CB_UTS] Rach blerL3ReportPeriod Time period for updates of blerL atestValue, expressed in multipes of measPeriod. Only valid when a BLER measurem

    ent is started. Unit: Unit: 1..5999: 10 ms radio frames, 6001..6060: x - 6000 mi nutes Examples: 1 = 10 ms, 6001 = 1 minute User category: Erics Rach blerMeasPeriod Defines the BLER measurement period. Onl y valid when a BLER measurement is started.Unit: 10 ms radio frames User categor y:Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Rach blerMeasTime Time within blerMeasPeriod, in which BLE R measurements are being performed. Only valid when a BLER measurement is starte d. Unit: 10 ms radio frames User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Rach fileName The file in which the measurements will be logged. Only valid when a BLER measurement is started. User category: Ericsso n personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Rach operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP] Rach RachId RadioLinks noOfRadioLinks Total number of radio links on t he corresponding cell carrier. Ref. [CB_DCC] RadioLinks RadioLinksId Ranap RanapId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Ranap operationalState The operational state of the RAN AP signaling bearer. Ranap availabilityStatus The availability status of the R ANAP.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bi t 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9 or bit 1 Ranap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. Ranap cnDomainInd Core network domain indicator, as define d in the Ranap specification. Specifies whether this instance of Ranap belongs t o the CS or PS domain. Dependencies: It is not possible to create a Ranap instan ce if cnDomainId = CIRCUIT_SWITCHED, userPlaneTransport Ranap noOfResetSendings 5 Number of consecutive retries of sending RESET message to the CN.An alarm is issued only once and will occur aft er the last unsuccessful RESET message, that is, after last timeout of resetRese ndT. Ranap resetResendT 40 Time between successive sendings of RESE T message to the CN.Unit: s Ranap resetAckGuardT 25 Guard period before sending a RESET ACKN OWLEDGE message to the CN.Unit: s Ranap preferredAddressing 0 Deprecated:This attribute is cur rently not used by the system.Changing it has no effect. Ranap sccpDisabledT 100 Timer for supervising the propagated ope rational state change of the local SCCP.The alarm Local Failure is issued on tim er expiry. Unit: s Ranap userOutOfServiceT 100 Timer for supervising the N-STAT E-indication for the remote SCCP (SSN=1) or the remote RANAP (SSN=142).Timer exp iry for remote SCCP (SSN=1) issues the alarm Local Failure and for remote RANAP (SSN=142) issues the alarm Remote Failure.Unit: s Ranap localSccpApRef Reference to the SccpApLocal MO that rep resents the local SCCP Access point. Ranap remoteSccpApRef Reference to the SccpApRemote MO that re presents the remote SCCP Access point. Ranap cnId Identity of the Core Network node that this MO i nstance represents. This identity must be unique within the CnOperator in which this instance is contained.When NRI MOCN is active, this identity should be uniq ue within the RNC. Dependencies:If Iu Flex is a Ranap networkResourceIdentifier 0 List of NRI values used by Iu Flex to select a CN node when the routing procedure is based on (P)TMSI . The attribute must have all elements set.Dependencies:The first 8 elements are a lways used by the system. If the license SupHighCapMscPool is active, t

    Ranap relativeCapacity 0 Relative capacity of this Ranap instance (CN node) compared to other nodes in the domain. Only used when Iu Flex is active. The capacity weights for all selected Ranap instances (CN nodes) for the current domain type are added together, to give the sum of Ranap maxResetResourceMessageSize 250 Maximum number of IuSigC onn IDs to be sent in each RESET RESOURCE message to the CN. Ranap ranapResetResourceMonitorThresh 200 (when activated) Threshol d value for the number of received Connection-Id's in Ranap reset-resource messa ges.When the number of Connection-ID's received in RANAP reset-resource messages from this core network node exceeds the value of this threshold within the time in Ranap ranapResetResourceMonitorPeriod 60 Monitoring period for th e number of received Connection-Id's in Ranap reset-resource messages.When the n umber of Connection-ID's received in RANAP reset-resource messages from this cor e network node exceeds the value of ranapResetResourceMonitorThresh RaxDeviceGroup RaxDeviceGroupId RaxDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_904Specificati RaxDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Hardware uni ts not supporting hardware test will always return the default value UNDETERMINE D. Use cases: HWT_UC1 Requirement: Test_UTRAN_FU3 Ref. [FS_HWT] RaxDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_904Specification: IT U-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] RaxDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC904 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] RbsConfiguration unlockRbsAfterIntegration 0 Indicate s if the RBS should be unlocked after activation of Planned Area. RbsConfiguration integrationSequence Indicates the Pl anned Area to be activated as part of the Auto-Integration. RbsConfiguration createCVAfterIntegration 0 Indicate d if a CV should be created for the NodeB after the OSS integration is complete. RbsConfiguration integrationDetails The date and tim e of integration. Format: YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS RbsConfiguration licenseHandling 0 Indicates if a license s hould be installed as part of the Auto-integration procedure. RbsConfiguration softwareUpgrade Indicates if a software upgrade should be performed as part of the Auto-integration procedure. If a soft ware upgrade should be performed it stores the Upgrade Package name; if a softwa re upgrade should not be performed it stores an empty string. RbsConfiguration integrationSequence.plannedAreaName The Planned Area Name. RbsConfiguration integrationSequence.userId The id o f the user who specified this Plan to be auto activated. RbsConfiguration rbsLogicalName The logical name of the RBS. The attribute is set by the site installer. Use cases: Configure RBS at Sit e Ref. [CB_IBC] RbsConfiguration ethernetIpAddress The IP address o f the Ethernet link used for O&M access. The attribute value is fetched from the DHCP server. User category: Ericsson personnel Undefined value: Specification: RFC 2131, RFC 2132, RFC 3442 DHCP result parameter yourIpAddress Use cases: RbsConfiguration ethernetSubnetMask The subnet mask of the Ethernet link used for O&M access. The attribute value is fetched from th e DHCP server. User category: Ericsson personnel Undefined value: Specification : RFC 2131, RFC 2132, RFC 3442 DHCP result parameter dhcpOptions, option code RbsConfiguration smrsIpAddress The IP address to the SM

    RS server containing the Autointegration RBS Summary File. The attribute value i s fetched from the DHCP server. User category: Ericsson personnel Undefined valu e: Specification: RFC 2131, RFC 2132, RFC 3442 DHCP result parameter RbsConfiguration summaryFileFilePath The file name (i ncluding path) of the Autointegration RBS Summary File. The attribute value is f etched from the DHCP server. User category: Ericsson personnel Undefined value: Specification: RFC 2131, RFC 2132, RFC 3442 DHCP result parameter dhcpOption RbsConfiguration dhcpIpAddress The IP address to the DH CP server. The attribute value is fetched from the DHCP server. User category: E ricsson personnel Undefined value: Specification: RFC 2131, RFC 2132, RFC 3442 DHCP result parameter dhcpOptions, option code 54 Use cases: Configur RbsConfiguration dnsIpAddress The IP address to the DN S. The attribute value is fetched from the DHCP server. User category: Ericsson personnel Undefined value: Specification: RFC 2131, RFC 2132, RFC 3442 DHCP res ult parameter dhcpOptions, option code 6 Use cases: Configure RBS at RbsConfiguration defaultGateway The IP address to the de fault gateway. The attribute value is fetched from the DHCP server. If the DHCP server provides a list of IP addresses, the address with highest preference is u sed by the RBS. Undefined value: Specification: RFC 2131, RFC 2132, RbsConfiguration oamConfigFile The O&M access (site bas ic) configuration file stored as a string. The value is set by the system based on a file which is either fetched from the SMRS server by operation fetchRbsConf igurationFiles or inserted via the RBS Element Manager. User category: RbsConfiguration siteConfigFile The site equipment (site external hardware) configuration file stored as a string. The value is set by t he system based on a file which is either fetched from the SMRS server by operat ion fetchRbsConfigurationFiles or inserted via the RBS Element Manager. RbsConfiguration summaryFile The Autointegration RBS Summary file stored as a string. The value is set by the system based on a file which is fetched from the SMRS server by operation fetchRbsConfigurationFiles.Us er category: Ericsson personnel Undefined value: Use cases: Configur RbsConfiguration configurationReport The configuratio n report stored as a string. User category: Ericsson personnel Undefined value: Use cases: Configure RBS at Site Ref. [CB_IBC] RbsConfiguration RbsConfigurationId RbsConfiguration configFaultReason The reason why t he OSS-RC configuration failed. The attribute is set by OSS-RC. Undefined value: Use cases: Configure RBS at Site Ref. [CB_IBC] RbsConfiguration rbsConfigLevel The configuration level of the RBS. Only used for synchronization/interaction with OSS-RC during auto-in tegration of an IP based RBS (that is, the attribute is not applicable to any ot her configuration method, and the value of the attribute is irrelevent RbsConfiguration progressLevel The progress of the conf iguration. Unit: 1% Undefined value: 0 User category: Ericsson personnel Use cas es: Configure RBS at Site Ref. [CB_IBC] RbsConfiguration progressInformation The configuratio n operation performed. User category: Ericsson personnel Undefined value: Use c ases: Configure RBS at Site Ref. [CB_IBC] RbsGroup RbsGroupId RbsGroup userLabel Provides support for putting a l abel on the MO instance. It is used by RANOS application to write the attribute value into the GUI. RbsGroup listOfRbs References to RBSs that are incl uded in the group. The attribute consists of a sequence of the full Distinguishe d Names of the MeContext's that represent the associated RBS's according to [9] and [20]. RbsLocalCell availabilityStatus The availability status of the cell. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDENCY _LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP]

    RbsLocalCell carrierRef Reference to the Carrier MO used by the cell. Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Add Capacity, Increase Coverage Requirement: CELL_RBS_OM:2, CELL_RBS_FU:11 Ref. [CB_SIC] RbsLocalCell cellRange 0 Defines the maximum range (in me ters) for random access detection (random access distance). For soft handover th e RBS adds a soft handover margin internally. Note that the actual cell range re solution is 3 chips, that is, around 234 m. Unit: 1 m Precondit RbsLocalCell hsdpaCapability The HSDPA capability of the cell . Possible values: ? HSDPA_CAPABLE ? HSDPA_NON_CAPABLE Specification: 3GPP TS 25 .433, NBAP, UTRAN Iub interface NBAP signalling Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:008 53 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] RbsLocalCell localCellId The identity of the RBS local ce ll. Precondition: Cell not setup by the RNC (availabilityStatus=OFF_LINE). Depen dencies: Value must be the same as in the corresponding RNC MO UtranCell. Specif ication: 3GPP TS 25.433, NBAP, UTRAN Iub interface NBAP signall RbsLocalCell maxDlPowerCapability The maximum downlink pow er capability for the cell. The attribute is calculated and reported to the RNC. Unit: 0.1 dBm Undefined value: -1 Specification: 3GPP TS 25.433, NBAP, UTRAN Iu b interface NBAP signalling Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00854 Rev:A Re RbsLocalCell minDlPowerCapability The minimum downlink pow er capability for the cell. The attribute is calculated and reported to the RNC. Unit: 0.1 dBm Undefined value: -301 Specification: 3GPP TS 25.433, NBAP, UTRAN Iub interface NBAP signalling Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00855 Rev:A RbsLocalCell minSpreadingFactor Indicates the minimum sp reading factor supported by the cell. Specification: 3GPP TS 25.433, NBAP, UTRAN Iub interface NBAP signalling Ref. [CB_MOP] RbsLocalCell ocnsContinuousTransmissionOn 0 OCNS continuous transmission on/off for all users.Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User categ ory: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsInteractiveAvgPow 0 OCNS average power per i nteractive user. One value per user. Attribute ocnsInteractiveNumOfUsers gives t he number of valid values. Unit: 0.1 dBm Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 Use r category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsInteractiveAvgRequestInterArrivalTime 0 OCNS average interactive arrival time. Unit: 0.1 s Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001 :04884 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsInteractiveAvgRequestSize 0 OCNS average int eractive request size. Unit: 1 kB Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User categ ory: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsInteractiveNumOfUsers 0 Number of intera ctive users for OCNS. Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsso n personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsInteractiveRandomizationOn 0 OCNS randomizati on on/off for interactive users. Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User catego ry: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsIsActive 0 Shows whether OCNS is active on the cell. Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsIsConfigured 0 Shows whether OCNS is co nfigured on the cell. Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsPowerVariation 0 OCNS power variation for all users.Possible values: ? OFF ? RA50 ? TU3 Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:048 84 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsSpeechAvgPow 0 OCNS average power per s peech user. One value per user. Attribute ocnsSpeechNumOfUsers gives the number of valid values. Unit: 0.1 dBm Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category : Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsSpeechNumOfUsers 0 Number of speech users f or OCNS.Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson personnel Re f. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsSpeechRandomizationOn 0 OCNS randomizati

    on on/off for speech users. Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: E ricsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsVideoAvgPow 0 OCNS average power per video use r. One value per user. Attribute ocnsVideoNumOfUsers gives the number of valid v alues. Unit: 0.1 dBm Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsVideoNumOfUsers 0 Number of video users fo r OCNS.Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref . [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Requirement: CELL_RBS_FU:9 Ref. [CB _MOP] RbsLocalCell RbsLocalCellId RbsLocalCell rbsSynchronizationRef Reference to the RbsSync hronization MO. Requirement: CELL_RBS_OM:2 Ref. [CB_MOP] RbsLocalCell userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM ] RbsLocalCell ocnsStandardDeviation 0 OCNS power variation sta ndard deviation. Unit: 0.1 dB Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsCorrelationTime 0 OCNS correlation time.Un it: 1 s Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson personnel Re f. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsHsdpaNumOfUsers 0 Number of HSDPA users fo r OCNS. Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson personnel Re f. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsHsdpaTransmissionProbability 0 OCNS HSD PA transmission probability. Unit: 0.01 Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell ocnsSpeechActivityFactor 0 OCNS activity fa ctor for speech users. Unit: 1% Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User categor y: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] RbsLocalCell hsCodeResourceId 0 Specifies the mapping of HS-DSCH Resources of the cell to an HSDPA processing resource on the TX board. Effect of this parameter is only considered if the steeredHsAllocation is set to true. Using the value 0 means that the cell will not support HS-DSCH. RbsLocalCell maxNumHsPdschCodes 5 The maximum number of HS -PDSCH codes allowed per cell. Dependencies: If license key 'Number of HS-PDSCH Codes per Cell' is enabled (see NodeBFunction::licenseStateNumHsPdschCodes) and Licensing Emergency Unlock is not activated, maxNumHsPdschCodes can not RbsLocalCell maxNumHsdpaUsers 16 The maximum number of HS DPA users allowed per cell. Dependencies: If license key 'Number of HSDPA Users per Cell' is enabled (see NodeBFunction::licenseStateNumHsdpaUsers), and Licensi ng Emergency Unlock is not activated, a higher value of maxNumHsdpaUser RbsLocalCell maxEAgchPowerDl -140 Maximum downlink power for an in dividual E-AGCH channel in the cell. Unit: 0.1 dB Requirement: EULCP_AD_RBS_5302 :04791 Rev.:A Ref. [CB_MOP] RbsLocalCell maxUserEHichERgchPowerDl -140 E-HICH for servi ng and non serving/E-RGCH have fixed power relative CPICH power. But if feature 'DL Power Control EUL' is active, then the parameter defines the maximum power f or E-HICH relative to CPICH for serving E-DCH RL. The parameter value is still RbsLocalCell eulMaxRotCoverage 0 Maximum RoT (Rise over T hermal) level allowed to preserve coverage. Unit: 0.1 dB Requirement: EULCP_AD_R BS_5302:04791 Rev. A Ref. [CB_MOP] RbsLocalCell eulNoERgchGroups 16 Number of E-RGCH groups per channelization code and cell. Recommended value: 16 Takes effect: At next se tup of E-DCH Resources for this cell. Requirement: EULSCH_AD_RBS_5302_06791 Rev. A Ref. [CB_MOP] RbsLocalCell eulThermalLevelPrior -1040 The anticipated uplink n oise floor of the unloaded RBS, including feeder and TMA contributions. Unit: 0.

    1 dBm Takes effect: If the noise floor is locked, at commit. If the noise floor is not locked, at next noise floor lock or at next setup of E-DCH Resou RbsLocalCell eulSlidingWindowTime 72000 The length of the slidin g window during which a thermal noise level is found. Unit: 1 s Resolution: 10 T akes effect: If the noise floor is locked, at commit. If the noise floor is not locked, at next noise floor lock or at next setup of E-DCH resources. R RbsLocalCell eulMaxNoSchEDch 100 The maximum number of simultaneo us scheduled E-DCH users. Requirement: EULSCH_AD_RBS_5302:06154 Rev. B Ref. [CB_ MOP] RbsLocalCell eulMaxOwnUuLoad 80 The maximum allowed contribution to uplink interference rise from traffic generated in the own cell. The schedul er limits the E-DCH power based on this parameter. Unit is rise of interference (noise rise) in dB. Unit: 0.1 dB Requirement: EULCP_AD_RBS_5302 RbsLocalCell eulMinMarginCoverage 10 The uplink interference contribution from other cells is estimated in the load estimator, but is never a llowed to go below the value of this parameter. The unit is load factor, that is , interference power from other cells divided by total interference pow RbsLocalCell eDchCapability The E-DCH capability of the cell . Possible values: ? EDCH_CAPABLE ? EDCH_NON_CAPABLE Specification: 3GPP TS 25.4 33, NBAP, UTRAN Iub interface NBAP signalling Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00856 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] RbsLocalCell alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the RbsLocal Cell. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER _REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alar RbsLocalCell eulLockedOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate The purp ose with this parameter is to provide the operator with the noise floor level us ed when the noise floor is locked. This parameter is used in conjunction with th e parameters eulOptimalNoiseFloorLock and eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate according to tab RbsLocalCell eulOptimalNoiseFloorLock The struct attri butes eulNoiseFloorLock and eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate are set and get togethe r. eulNoiseFloorLock is used together with eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate to be ab le to lock the noise floor level (eulNoiseFloorLock set to true) to either the RbsLocalCell coherenceMode 2 Specifies how large part of the preamble that is accumulated coherently.When coherenceMode is 4, the parameter R ach::preambleThreshold (RNC MOM) is recommended to be reduced 3 steps (1.5 dB) f rom 35 to 32. Possible values: ? 2 = Accumulate ? of the preamb RbsLocalCell eDch2msTtiCapability Shows whether the cell i s E-DCH 2 ms TTI capable or not. Possible values: ? EDCH_2MS_TTI_CAPABLE ? EDCH_ 2MS_TTI_NON_CAPABLE Specification: 3GPP TS 25.433, NBAP, UTRAN Iub interface NBA P signalling Requirement: EU2MIA_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:00646 Rev:A Ref. [CB_M RbsLocalCell maxEAgchPowerDlTti2 -80 Maximum downlink power f or an individual E-AGCH channel in the cell. Applicable to 2 ms TTI. Unit 0.1 dB Resolution: 1 Requirement: EU2PC_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:00724 Rev A Ref. [CB_MOP] RbsLocalCell maxUserEHichPowerDlTti2 -80 E-HICH (for serving and non serving) have fixed power relative CPICH power. But if feature 'DL Power Con trol EUL' is active, then the parameter defines the maximum power for E-HICH rel ative to CPICH for serving E-DCH RL. The parameter value is still fixed RbsLocalCell maxNumEulUsers 0 The maximum number of Serving EU L users allowed per cell. Dependencies: If license key 'Number of EUL Users per Cell' is enabled (see NodeBFunction::licenseStateNumEulUsers), and Licensing Eme rgency Unlock is not activated, maxNumEulUsers can not be set t RbsLocalCell featureStateEnhancedLayer2 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature 'Enhanced Layer 2', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only b e set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the feature, th RbsLocalCell featureStateMimo 0 Feature state for licens ed feature 'MIMO', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possib le values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED i

    n case a valid license key is installed for the feature, that is, if No RbsLocalCell eHichMinCodePower -220 Minimum downlink power i n a cell to be used for an individual E-HICH channel on 10 ms TTI. Note that the minimum power for 2 ms TTI users is 6 dB higher than the value given by this pa rameter.Dependencies: Only used when NodeBFunction::licenseStateDlPower RbsLocalCell qualityCheckPowerEHich 0 Offset to be used in E-H ICH power. Unit: 0.1 dB Dependencies: Only used when NodeBFunction::licenseState DlPowerControlEul is ENABLED and NodeBFunction::featureStateDlPowerControlEul is ACTIVATED. Requirement: EU2PC_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:03251 Rev.A Ref. [CB_MOP RbsLocalCell featureStateHsdpaDynamicCodeAllocation 0 Feature state for licensed feature 'HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation', indicating if the fe ature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDep endencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for th RbsLocalCell featureStateHsdpaIncrementalRedundancy 0 Feature state for licensed feature 'HSDPA Incremental Redundancy', indicating if the fea ture is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDepe ndencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the RbsLocalCell featureState4wayRxDiversity 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature '4-way RX Diversity', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. The attribute is used to activate and deactivate the feature in the cell. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be s RbsLocalCell featureStateFDpchSrbOnHsdpa 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature 'SRB on HSDPA' (F-DPCH + SRB on HSDPA), indicating if the fea ture is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDepe ndencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed RbsLocalCell fDpchCapability Shows whether the cell is F-DPCH capable or not. Possible values: ? FDPCH_CAPABLE ? FDPCH_NON_CAPABLE Ref. [CB_R OC] RbsLocalCell featureStateHsdpaMc 0 Feature state for licens ed feature 'Multi-Carrier', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATE D. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be set to AC TIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the feature, that RbsLocalCell featureStateHsdpaMcInactCtrl 0 Feature state fo r licensed feature 'Multi-Carrier Inactivity Control', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependen cies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for RbsLocalCell hsdpaMcCapability The HSDPA Multi-Carrier capability of the cell. Possible values: ? HSDPA_MC_CAPABLE ? HSDPA_MC_NON_CAPAB LE Ref. [CB_ROC] RbsLocalCell cpcCapability Shows whether the cell is CPC (E nhanced uplink transmission, CPC + Enhanced downlink reception, CPC) capable or not. Possible values: ? CPC_CAPABLE ? CPC_NON_CAPABLE Specification: 3GPP TS 25. 433, NBAP, UTRAN Iub interface NBAP signalling Requirement: CPC RbsLocalCell featureStateCpc 0 Feature state for licensed featu re 'CPC' (Enhanced uplink transmission, CPC + Enhanced downlink reception, CPC), indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED per cell. Possible values : ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be set to ACT RbsLocalCell eulOptimalNoiseFloorLock.eulNoiseFloorLock 0 When set to true, locks the noise floor level. Used in conjunction with eulOptim alNoiseFloorEstimate to be able to lock the noise floor level to either the curr ent level, when eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate is set to -1 (= undefined) or to a value defined i RbsLocalCell eulOptimalNoiseFloorLock.eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate -1040 Used in conjunction with eullNoiseFloorLock to be able to lock the noise floor level to either the current level, when eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate is s et to -1 (=undefined value), or to a value defined in eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstima te. Unit: 0.1 dBm Undef RbsSlot RbsSlotId

    RbsSlot slotPosition 0 Slot position within the subrack, starti ng from left. Use cases: MEC_200, MEC_220 Requirement: EQHANDL_RBS_FU:15 Depende ncies: Maximum value =< noOfSlots in the corresponding subrack MO. Ref. [FS_MEC] RbsSlot slotState 0 The state of the slot. ? FREE = the slot is free to be configured with a new PIU ? USED = a PIU is inserted in the slot, or the slot is reconfigured with a PIU Use cases: MEC_200, MEC_220 Requirement: EQHANDL_RBS_FU:15&16 Ref. [FS_MEC] RbsSubrack cabinetPosition String with cabinet position as defined by 'Mub user' for positioning of cabinet. It is used to distinguish subr acks in different cabinets, thus allowing a unique subrack position to be built. Example: 9. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL RbsSubrack noOfSlots 0 Number of slots in the subrack. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL_RBS_FU:12 Ref. [CB_ECF] RbsSubrack RbsSubrackId RbsSubrack subrackPosition The subrack position. The value consist of (<X><Y><Z>): X = Cabinet position within the node starting from the l eft, one digit (0 - 9). Y = Subrack vertical position within the cabinet startin g from the ground, one letter (A - Z). Z = Subrack horizontal p RbsSynchronization masterTu Indicates which TIM devi ce owning plug-in unit is master. Possible values: ? NO_ACTIVE ? PLUG_IN_UNIT_RE F1 ? PLUG_IN_UNIT_REF2 Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00857 Rev:A Use cases: NSD_U C14 Dependencies: timDeviceRef1&2 Ref. [FS_NSD] RbsSynchronization nodeIsStable Stability status of the node. TRUE if at least one TIM device is stable.Use cases: NSD_UC14 Dependencies : timDeviceRef1&2 Ref. [FS_NSD] RbsSynchronization nodeIsSynchronized Synchronization status of the node. TRUE if at least one TIM device is synchronized. Use cases: NSD_UC14 Dependencies: timDeviceRef1&2 Ref. [FS_NSD] RbsSynchronization RbsSynchronizationId RbsSynchronization timDeviceRef1 Reference to the TimDevi ce MO on the plug-in unit pointed out by plugInUnitRef1. Use cases: NSD_UC3, NSD _UC4 Ref. [FS_NSD] RbsSynchronization timDeviceRef2 Reference to the TimDevi ce MO on the plug-in unit pointed out by the plugInUnitRef2. Use cases: NSD_UC3, NSD_UC4 Ref. [FS_NSD] RbsSynchronization plugInUnitRef1 Reference to first timin g unit owning plug-in unit MO. Precondition: PlugInUnit MO must exist. Use cases : NSD_UC3, NSD_UC4 Ref. [FS_NSD] RbsSynchronization plugInUnitRef2 Reference to second timi ng unit owning plug-in unit MO. Precondition: PlugInUnit MO must exist. Use case s: NSD_UC3, NSD_UC4 Ref. [FS_NSD] Rcs RcsId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. Rcs dchRcLostT 50 Timer that is started when all radio lin ks for a connection are lost. At time-out, the radio connection is considered lo st. Special values: The value 18000 deci seconds = 1800 s = 30 minutes is used f or testing purposes to disable the Radio Connection S Rcs cchWaitCuT 9 Waiting timer for cell update.Special va lues: 0 is used to indicate infinity (timer not used). Unit: 5 minutes Rcs hsDschRcLostT 50 Controls the RCS timer for supervision o f uplink synch of RLS containing the serving HS-DSCH radio link. Special values: 18000 indicates that the RCS function is switched off. Used for test purposes. Unit: 0.1 s Resolution: 5 RdbtAal5TpVccTp plugInUnitRef Reference to the TXB plug-in uni t where the AAL5 connection terminates. Precondition: The TXB PlugInUnit MO must exist. Ref. [CB_UTS] RdbtAal5TpVccTp txmId The ID of the TXM where the RDBT AAL5 co nnection terminates. Ref. [CB_UTS] RdbtAal5TpVccTp vclTpRef Reference to the the VCL termina tion point the RDBT AAL5 VCC is associated with. Precondition: The VclTp MO must

    exist. Ref. [CB_UTS] RdbtAal5TpVccTp logicalLineNumber 0 Identifiies the logical connection to the RDBTH PC. Only applicable to ET boards with channelization (th at is, with STM1). For other ET boards it shall be set to 0. Ref. [CB_UTS] RdbtAal5TpVccTp RdbtAal5TpVccTpId RdbtTestPort piuDeviceRef Reference to the logical TX boar d (TXL) where the RDBT connection orginates. Precondition: The DUW TXL PiuDevice MO must exist. Ref. [CB_UTS] RdbtTestPort txmId The ID of the TXM where the RDBT UDP con nection terminates. Ref. [CB_UTS] RdbtTestPort RdbtTestPortId RdbtTestPort internalMac When the test conenctor is used then internal MAC address must be provided as the destination for the RDBT data. The data is sent out on the sRIO test connector. The MAC address must be a vali d address to an RDBT receiver connected to the sRIO test connec RdbtUdpTp piuDeviceRef Reference to the logical TX boar d (TXL) where the RDBT connection orginates. Precondition: The DUW TXL PiuDevice MO must exist. Ref. [CB_UTS] RdbtUdpTp txmId The ID of the TXM where the RDBT UDP con nection terminates. Ref. [CB_UTS] RdbtUdpTp ipAccessHostEtRef Reference to the the IP host that the RDBT data is sent on. Precondition: The IpAccessHostEt MO must exi st. Ref. [CB_UTS] RdbtUdpTp remoteUdpPort Identifies the remote UDP port o n the RDBTH PC. Ref. [CB_UTS] RdbtUdpTp RdbtUdpTpId RdbtUdpTp remoteIpAddress The IP address of the RDBTH PC w here the RDBT data is sent. Ref. [CB_UTS] ReliableProgramUniter ReliableProgramUniterId The value compon ent of the RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. ReliableProgramUniter userLabel Label for free use. ReliableProgramUniter reliableProgramLabel Compare this lab el to the reliableProgramLabel in the LoadModule MO. ReliableProgramUniter admActiveSlot Reference to a Slot, con tains the running Normal relation to a slot. If the reference is set to the pass ive slot, the passive slot is cleared and only one relation is set. ReliableProgramUniter admPassiveSlot Reference to a Slot, con tains the running Stand-by relation to a slot. If the reference is set to the ac tive slot or a NULL value, the passive slot will be cleared. ReliableProgramUniter switchOver 0 Controls when to switch the RPU if a certain error occurs. ReliableProgramUniter normalisation 0 Controls when to switch back the RPU after error recovery has been done. Normalisation at PIU unlock is always done, regardless of the value of this attribute. ReliableProgramUniter replication 0 Specifies the level of d ata replication that is associated with the RPU. ReliableProgramUniter operationalMode Specifies if the RSH exe cution mode (active/passive) in the two Reliable Programs, matches the normal/st and-by relations set on the corresponding RPU. ReliableProgramUniter reservedBy Contains a list of MO in stances that reserve this MO instance. ReliableProgramUniter rpuId The ReilableProgramUniter identi ty on the resource layer. ReliableProgramUniter ReliableProgramUniterId The value compon ent of the RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. ReliableProgramUniter userLabel Label for free use. ReliableProgramUniter reliableProgramLabel Compare this lab el to the reliableProgramLabel in the LoadModule MO. ReliableProgramUniter admActiveSlot Reference to a Slot, con tains the running Normal relation to a slot. If the reference is set to the pass

    ive slot, the passive slot is cleared and only one relation is set. ReliableProgramUniter admPassiveSlot Reference to a Slot, con tains the running Stand-by relation to a slot. If the reference is set to the ac tive slot or a NULL value, the passive slot will be cleared. ReliableProgramUniter switchOver 0 Controls when to switch the RPU if a certain error occurs. ReliableProgramUniter normalisation 0 Controls when to switch back the RPU after error recovery has been done. Normalisation at PIU unlock is always done, regardless of the value of this attribute. ReliableProgramUniter replication 0 Specifies the level of d ata replication that is associated with the RPU. ReliableProgramUniter operationalMode Specifies if the RSH exe cution mode (active/passive) in the two Reliable Programs, matches the normal/st and-by relations set on the corresponding RPU. ReliableProgramUniter reservedBy Contains a list of MO in stances that reserve this MO instance. ReliableProgramUniter rpuId The ReilableProgramUniter identi ty on the resource layer. ReliableProgramUniter ReliableProgramUniterId The value compon ent of the RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. ReliableProgramUniter reliableProgramLabel Compare this lab el to the reliableProgramLabel in the LoadModule MO. ReliableProgramUniter admActiveSlot Reference to a Slot, con tains the running Normal relation to a slot. If the reference is set to the pass ive slot, the passive slot is cleared and only one relation is set. ReliableProgramUniter admPassiveSlot Reference to a Slot, con tains the running Stand-by relation to a slot. If the reference is set to the ac tive slot or a NULL value, the passive slot will be cleared. ReliableProgramUniter switchOver 0 Controls when to switch the RPU if a certain error occurs. ReliableProgramUniter normalisation 0 Controls when to switch back the RPU after error recovery has been done. Normalisation at PIU unlock is always done, regardless of the value of this attribute. ReliableProgramUniter replication 0 Specifies the level of d ata replication that is associated with the RPU. ReliableProgramUniter operationalMode Specifies if the RSH exe cution mode (active/passive) in the two Reliable Programs, matches the normal/st and-by relations set on the corresponding RPU. ReliableProgramUniter reservedBy Contains a list of MO in stances that reserve this MO instance. ReliableProgramUniter rpuId The ReilableProgramUniter identi ty on the resource layer. Repertoire RepertoireId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. If this MO is manually created (n ot reccomended) the value for this attribute has to be set. Repertoire userLabel Label for free use. Repertoire name A function friendly name associated to t he repertoire. The value must be unique with respect to all repertoires with the same install state. Repertoire info Information regarding the function. Repertoire piuTypeList A list containing all PiuType re ferences that has been added to this repertoire. Repertoire reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Repertoire RepertoireId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. If this MO is manually created (n ot reccomended) the value for this attribute has to be set. Repertoire userLabel Label for free use. Repertoire name A function friendly name associated to t he repertoire. The value must be unique with respect to all repertoires with the

    same install state. Repertoire info Information regarding the function. Repertoire piuTypeList A list containing all PiuType re ferences that has been added to this repertoire. Repertoire reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Repertoire RepertoireId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. If this MO is manually created (n ot reccomended) the value for this attribute has to be set. Repertoire name A function friendly name associated to t he repertoire. The value must be unique with respect to all repertoires with the same install state. Repertoire info Information regarding the function. Repertoire piuTypeList A list containing all PiuType re ferences that has been added to this repertoire. Repertoire reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. ResMeasControl ResMeasControlId ResMeasControl resMeasure1 RES measurement 1. Defines the R ES service and RES rmq for this measurement. ResMeasControl resMeasure2 RES measurement 2. Defines the R ES service and RES rmq for this measurement. ResMeasControl resMeasure3 RES measurement 3. Defines the R ES service and RES rmq for this measurement. ResMeasControl resMeasure4 RES measurement 4. Defines the R ES service and RES rmq for this measurement. ResMeasControl resMeasure5 RES measurement 5. Defines the R ES service and RES rmq for this measurement. ResMeasControl resMeasure6 RES measurement 6. Defines the R ES service and RES rmq for this measurement. ResMeasControl resMeasPeriodSpeech 16 RES measurement period f or the RES services containing Speech: - SPEECH12200 - SPEECH12200_ALL - AMR7950 - AMR5900 - AMR4750 - AMRWB - AMRWB_ALL - AMRNBMM - PSCONVSPEECHEULHS - PSCONVS PEECHEULHS_ALL Unit: s Change takes effect: RES scanner activated. The ResMeasControl resMeasPeriodStreaming 16 RES measurement period f or the RES services containing Streaming: - PSSTRDCHHS - PSSTRDCHHS_ALL - PSSTRD CHDCH - CSSTREAMING Unit: s Change takes effect: When the RES scanner is activat edThe value will not take effect if the scanner is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasPeriodVideo 16 RES measurement period f or the RES services containing Video: - VIDEO - PSCONVUNKNOWNEULHS Change takes effect: RES scanner activated. The change will not take effect if the scanner is already active. Unit: s ResMeasControl resMeasPeriodInteractive 16 RES Measurement period for the RES services containing Interactive: - PSINTDCHDCH - PSINTDCHHS PSINTEULHS Unit: s Change takes effect: RES scanner activated. The change will not take effect if the scanner is already active. ResMeasControl resUeFraction 0 Defines a subset of UEs during a RES recording. Measurements shall be started for 1/resUeFraction of the UE's th at shall have performed the measurements. If this parameter is set to 1, then th e measurement should be done for all UEs. Change takes effect: ResMeasControl resMeasure7 RES measurement 7. Defines the R ES service and RES rmq for this measurement. ResMeasControl resMeasure8 RES measurement 8. Defines the R ES service and RES rmq for this measurement. ResMeasControl resMeasure9 RES measurement 9. Defines the R ES service and RES rmq for this measurement. ResMeasControl resMeasure10 RES measurement 10. Defines the RES service and RES rmq for this measurement. ResMeasControl resMeasure11 RES measurement 11. Defines the RES service and RES rmq for this measurement.

    ResMeasControl resMeasure12 RES measurement 12. Defines the RES service and RES rmq for this measurement. ResMeasControl resMeasure1.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be m easured. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is alr eady active. ResMeasControl resMeasure1.service 0 RES service to be measur ed. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure10.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be measured. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanne r is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure10.service 0 RES service to be measur ed. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure11.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be measured. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanne r is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure11.service 0 RES service to be measur ed. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure12.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be measured. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanne r is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure12.service 0 RES service to be measur ed. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure2.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be m easured. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is alr eady active. ResMeasControl resMeasure2.service 0 RES service to be measur ed. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure3.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be m easured. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is alr eady active. ResMeasControl resMeasure3.service 0 RES service to be measur ed. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure4.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be m easured. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is alr eady active. ResMeasControl resMeasure4.service 0 RES service to be measur ed. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure5.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be m easured. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is alr eady active. ResMeasControl resMeasure5.service 0 RES service to be measur ed. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure6.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be m easured. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is alr eady active. ResMeasControl resMeasure6.service 0 RES service to be measur ed. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure7.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be m easured. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is alr eady active. ResMeasControl resMeasure7.service 0 RES service to be measur

    ed. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure8.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be m easured. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is alr eady active. ResMeasControl resMeasure8.service 0 RES service to be measur ed. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is already active. ResMeasControl resMeasure9.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be m easured. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is alr eady active. ResMeasControl resMeasure9.service 0 RES service to be measur ed. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is already active. RetDevice electricalAntennaTilt 0 The antenna tilt induced by the RETU. Unit: 0.1? Dependencies: The total antenna tilt relative the verti cal plane is electricalAntennaTilt + AntennaBranch::mechanicalAntennaTilt for th is antenna. A positive value for the total tilt gives that the antenna RetDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: AUC_310 Ref. [FS_AUC] RetDevice RetDeviceId RetDevice aretDeviceData ARET device data. Valid only for ARET.The device data is read from the ARET unit and can not be changed. Precond ition: The ARET must be installed and operational. Ref. [CB_MOP] RetDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I RetDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] RetDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_310 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.7 31Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] RetDevice aretDeviceData.antennaBearing See 3GPP TS25.46 6 Annex B (Field No. 0x25). RetDevice aretDeviceData.antennaModelNumber See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex B (Field No. 0x01). RetDevice aretDeviceData.antennaOperatingBand See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex B (Field No. 0x03). RetDevice aretDeviceData.antennaSerialNumber See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex B (Field No. 0x02). RetDevice aretDeviceData.baseStationId See 3GPP TS25.46 6 Annex B (Field No. 0x23). RetDevice aretDeviceData.beamwidthForBands See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex B (Field No. 0x04). RetDevice aretDeviceData.gainForBands See 3GPP TS25.46 6 Annex B (Field No. 0x05). RetDevice aretDeviceData.installationDate See 3GPP TS25.46 6 Annex B (Field No. 0x21). RetDevice aretDeviceData.installedMechTilt See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex B (Field No. 0x26). RetDevice aretDeviceData.installersId See 3GPP TS25.46 6 Annex B (Field No. 0x22). RetDevice aretDeviceData.maxSupportedElectricalTilt See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex B (Field No. 0x06). RetDevice aretDeviceData.minSupportedElectricalTilt See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex B (Field No. 0x07). RetDevice aretDeviceData.sectorId See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex B (Field No. 0x24).

    RetDeviceSet productNumber Vendor specific software product number of the RETU. Use cases: AUC_321 Ref. [FS_AUC] RetDeviceSet RetDeviceSetId RetDeviceSet retType Type of RETU. Defines (together with ant ennaType on the corresponding SectorAntenna MO) which configuration data (MO Ret Profile) that is used. Use cases: AUC_321 Ref. [FS_AUC] RetDeviceSet revState Revision state of the software r unning on the RETU.Use cases: AUC_321 Ref. [FS_AUC] RetDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_309 Specificatio RetDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_309 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] RetProfile antennaType Type of antenna. Corresponds to the same attribute on the MO SectorAntenna. Possible values: ? 0..50 = Reserved for predefined antenna types supported by Ericsson. ? 51..100 = Available for cu stomer specific antenna types. For the reserved antenna types, RetProfile checkSum Checksum of minTilt, maxTilt and the RET configuration parameters. CRC16 with initial value 0xFFFF is used to ca lculate the checksum. Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage, Modif y Antenna Equipment Ref. [CB_MOP] RetProfile maxTilt Maximum electrical antenna tilt value. U nit: 0.1? Dependencies: minTilt =< maxTilt Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Inc rease Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref. [CB_MOP] RetProfile minTilt Minimum electrical antenna tilt value. U nit: 0.1? Dependencies: minTilt =< maxTilt Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Inc rease Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref. [CB_MOP] RetProfile retParam1 RET configuration parameter 1. U se cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref . [CB_MOP] RetProfile retParam2 RET configuration parameter 2. U se cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref . [CB_MOP] RetProfile retParam3 RET configuration parameter 3. U se cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref . [CB_MOP] RetProfile retParam4 RET configuration parameter 4. U se cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref . [CB_MOP] RetProfile retParam5 RET configuration parameter 5. U se cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref . [CB_MOP] RetProfile retParam6 RET configuration parameter 6. U se cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref . [CB_MOP] RetProfile retParam7 RET configuration parameter 7. U se cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref . [CB_MOP] RetProfile retParam8 RET configuration parameter 8. U se cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref . [CB_MOP] RetProfile RetProfileId RetProfile retType Type of RETU. Corresponds to the same at tribute on the MO RetDeviceSet. 0=Katrein vendor RETU 1=RETU product number 1 2= RETU product number 2 : 100=RETU product number 100 Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref. RetuDeviceGroup RetuDeviceGroupId RetuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon

    ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specific ation: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] RetuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat RetuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] RetuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] RfCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the opto communicati on cable. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=U NDER_REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 w hen bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outs RfCable connectedToObjectARef Reference to the hardware unit ( for example, PIU of sTRX, auxiliary plug-in unit of PAU/sAIU/RU/FU/RUW/RRUW) to which this cable must be connected. The information sent through the cable is se nt from Object A to Object B. If the cable is used both for DL RfCable connectedToObjectBRef Reference to the hardware unit ( for example, PIU of sTRX, auxiliary plug-in unit of PAU/sAIU/FU/RU/RUW/RRUW, Con nectionField or PIU of sTRX) to which this cable must be connected. The informat ion sent through the cable is sent from Object A to Object B. I RfCable dlAttenuation 0 Cable attenuation, downlink. Example: 36 = 3.6 dB Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 dB Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell. Undefined value: -1 Ref. [CB_ECF] RfCable electricalDlDelay 0 Electrical downlink delay of the cable.Example: 103 = 10.3 nanoseconds Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify An tenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affect ed cell. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] RfCable electricalUlDelay 0 Electrical uplink delay of the c able. Example: 103 = 10.3 nanoseconds Undefined value: -1 Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell s etup for the affected cell. User category: Ericsson personnel R RfCable objectAConnector Value representing the connector on the hardware unit to which this cable must be connected. Note that the value NOT_CONNECTED shall only be used temporarily during certain reconfiguration act ivities. Leaving the cable in this state will result in an alar RfCable objectBConnector Value representing the connector on the hardware unit to which this cable must be connected. Possible values: ? FB_IN = Valid connector for sTRX.? H1-H3 = Valid connectors for Connection Field . ? J1-J3 = Valid connectors for Connection Field. ? RX_A and R RfCable RfCableId RfCable ulAttenuation 0 Cable attenuation, uplink. Example: 36 = 3.6 dB Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 dB Ta kes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell. Undefined value: -1 Re f. [CB_ECF] RfifDeviceGroup crossConnActive Identifies if RFIF cross-connect ion is active or not. This depends on the node configuration. Ref. [CB_ECF] RfifDeviceGroup RfifDeviceGroupId RfifDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_904Specificati RfifDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Hardware uni ts not supporting hardware test will always return the default value UNDETERMINE D. Use cases: HWT_UC1 Requirement: Test_UTRAN_FU3 Ref. [FS_HWT]

    RfifDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_904Specification: IT U-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] RfifDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC904 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] Riu RiuId Riu userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM] RncCapacity RncCapacityId RncCapacity licensedCapacityLimit Defines the node license d capacity as defined in the License Key File.noLimit is used to define if the v alue is valid or not. RncCapacity keyId The product identity of the key for the capacity feature under license control. RncCapacity isLicensedControlled Indicates if the capacit y feature is under license control. RncCapacity operatorCapacityLimit Wanted node capacity lim it. Normally set to the same limit as licensedCapacitylimit.The operator can set this to a lower value than licensedCapacityLimit for test reasons, known proble ms in the node etc. noLimit is used to define if the value is valid or RncCapacity currentCapacityLimit Indicates the current ca pacity limit applied in the node. This value is the lower of licensedCapacityLim it and operatorCapacityLimit and is used as the 100% limit for the counter pmCap acityUtilization.If the value of the attribute is changed during the RO RncCapacity capacityUnit Defines the unit (bps/ number of users, number of connected IP RBS etc.) for the licensed capacity. RncCapacity currentCapacityLimit.noLimit 0 RncCapacity currentCapacityLimit.value 0 RncCapacity licensedCapacityLimit.noLimit 0 RncCapacity licensedCapacityLimit.value 0 RncCapacity operatorCapacityLimit.noLimit TRUE(1) RncCapacity operatorCapacityLimit.value 0 RncConfigLimits RncConfigLimitsId Naming attribute. Contai ns the value part of the RDN. Set by the system. RncConfigLimits externalGsmCellsLimit Maximum number of Extern alGsmCell MO instances that can be configured in the RNC. RncConfigLimits externalUtranCellsLimit Maximum number of Extern alUtranCell MO instances that can be configured in the RNC. RncConfigLimits locationAreasLimit Maximum number of Locati onArea MO instances that can be configured in the RNC. RncConfigLimits serviceAreasLimit Maximum number of Servic eArea MO instances that can be configured in the RNC. RncConfigLimits iubLinksLimit Maximum number of IubLink MO ins tances that can be configured in the RNC. RncConfigLimits routingAreasLimit Maximum number of Routin gArea MO instances that can be configured in the RNC. RncConfigLimits cellRelationsLimit Maximum number of cell r elation MO instances that can be configured in the RNC (the sum of UtranRelation , GsmRelation and CoverageRelation instances). RncConfigLimits packetDataRoutersLimit Maximum number of Packet DataRouter MO instances that can be configured in the RNC. RncConfigLimits mbmsServiceAreasLimit Maximum number of MbmsSe rviceArea MO instances that can be configured in the RNC. RncConfigLimits urasLimit Maximum number of Ura MO instanc es that can be configured in the RNC. RncConfigLimits utranCellsLimit Maximum number of UtranCell MO i nstances that can be configured in the RNC. RncConfigLimits pdrDevicesLimit Maximum number of PdrDevice MO i nstances that can be configured in the RNC. RncConfigLimits dcDevicesLimit Maximum number of DcDevice MO in

    stances that can be configured in the RNC. RncConfigLimits ccDevicesLimit Maximum number of CcDevice MO in stances that can be configured in the RNC. RncConfigLimits rncModulesLimit Maximum number of RncModule MO i nstances that can be configured in the RNC. RncDeployment RncDeploymentId RncFeature RncFeatureId RncFeature featureState 0 Used to activate or deactivate a feature. A prerequisite for activating a feature under license control is that a valid license key has been installed in the CPP License Manager (licenseState = ENABLED). Change takes effect: Feature-dependent RncFeature licenseState Indicates whether a valid key is installed or not in the License Manager. Value mapping: ENABLED: Set when there is a valid key, or if the feature is not under license control (isLicenseContro lled = FALSE). DISABLED: Indicates that a valid key is not inst RncFeature serviceState Indicates whether the feature is operable or inoperable (whether the feature is providing service or not). RncFeature keyId Product identity of the key for the feat ure under license control. RncFeature isLicenseControlled Defines whether the feat ure is under license control or not. RncFunction RncFunctionId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. RncFunction userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. RncFunction mcc 0 The MCC part of the PLMN identity for th is RNC.The PLMN identity consists of the Mobile Country Code, 3 digits, and the Mobile Network Code, 2 or 3 digits. (Example: If MCC=125 and MNC=46 then plmnId= 12546.) The PLMN identity is broadcast in all UTRAN cel RncFunction mnc 0 The MNC part of the PLMN identity for th is RNC.The PLMN identity consists of the Mobile Country Code, 3 digits, and the Mobile Network Code, 2 or 3 digits. (Example: If MCC=125 and MNC=46 then plmnId= 12546.) The PLMN identity is broadcast in all UTRAN cel RncFunction mncLength 0 The length of the MNC part of th e PLMN identity for this RNC.The PLMN identity consists of the Mobile Country Co de, 3 digits, and the Mobile Network Code, 2 or 3 digits. (Example: If MCC=125 a nd MNC=46 then plmnId=12546.) The PLMN identity is broadcast in RncFunction rncId 0 RNC identity used in the radio network. The RNC identity is a part of the RNTI.The initial value of this attribute has n o relevance. This attribute must be configured by the operator. Disturbances:Cha nging this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. All ce RncFunction gpehStorageSize 100000 Total GPEH storage size availabl e on the O&M MP and each Module MP. When gpehStorageSize is exceeded, the GPEH f unction will remove the oldest GPEH file(s) from the persistent storage to make space for a new file, and GPEH recording will continue. This at RncFunction gpehFileSize 15000 Specifies the size of each GPEH file. The file size is valid for the uncompressed file. If the gpehFileSize is r eached within a specific ROP, the GPEH will stop the recording until the next RO P begins. Unit: kB (1000 bytes) RncFunction uetrFileSize 275 Size of each UETR recording file . The file size is valid for the uncompressed file. The default value will give a storage time of 1 hour for each file, for 2 simultaneous CTR recordings and 16 simultaneous UETR recordings, and given that ctrFileSize is al RncFunction ctrFileSize 5000 Size of each CTR recording file. The file size is valid for the uncompressed file. The default value will give a storage time of 1 hour for each file, for 2 simultaneous CTR recordings and 16 simultaneous UETR recordings, and given that uetrFileSize is al RncFunction recordingStorageSize 60000 Total size of the storag e space available for PM Recording ROP files on the O&M MP. When recordingStorag eSize is reached, the PM Recording function will remove the oldest recording fil

    e and continue. If the recordingStorageSize is completely used by a sin RncFunction loadSharingRrcEnabled 0 Indicates whether the In ter-Frequency Load Sharing function has been enabled in the RNC.Change takes eff ect: Immediately RncFunction loadSharingThreshold 20 Threshold below which RR C redirections for inter-frequency load sharing will be inhibited.Defined in ter ms of the difference in available resources between the source cell and the targ et cell.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: RncFunction aliasPlmnIdentities List of alias PLMN ident ities for this RNC. Defines PLMNs with roaming restrictions for the Selective Ha ndover feature. See the class description of UtranRelation for more details. RncFunction emergencyCallRedirect 0 Turns on/off the redirec tion of all emergency calls to GSM, in order to provide more accurate positionin g information.If this parameter is ON and a UE requests to establish an RRC conn ection and indicates 'Emergency call' as establishment code, the WCDMA RncFunction loadSharingDirRetryEnabled FALSE(0) Indicate s whether the Load Sharing via Directed Retry to GSM function has been enabled i n the RNC. RncFunction gpehDataLevel HEADER_DATA_ONLY(0) Determines wheth er the entire protocol message of the selected GPEH external events should be re corded, or only the header data of the selected external events.When recording e xternal events, the GPEH user may select to record header data only or the enti RncFunction hsOnlyBestCell 0 RNC wide switch for selecting on ly the best cell for HS. RncFunction hsCellChangeAllowed 0 Overall On/Off switch fo r serving HS-DSCH cell change RncFunction hsCellChangeCfnOffset 50 Offset in number of fram es calculated from the activation time at serving HS-DSCH Cell Change. This attr ibute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Dependencies: hsCellChangeCfnOff set >= hsMacdSwitchTimeOffset RncFunction hsMacdSwitchTimeOffset 5 Used when calculating th e time for the switch-over of the HS MAC-D flow from Source Cell to Target Cell, at Serving HS-DSCH Cell Change. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Dependencies: hsMacdSwitchTimeOffset <= hsCellChangeCfnOffset RncFunction networkResourceIdentifierLengthCs 0 Bitmask length of the NRI for CS/MSC.Value mapping;: networkResourceIdentifierLengthCs = = 0 indicates that Iu Flex is not active for the CS domain.networkResourceIdenti fierLengthCs > 0 activates Iu Flex for the CS domain. Dependencies:Before activa ting or RncFunction networkResourceIdentifierLengthPs 0 Bitmask length of the NRI for PS/SGSN. Value mapping;: networkResourceIdentifierLengthPs == 0 indicates that Iu Flex is not active for the PS domain.networkResourceIden tifierLengthPs > 0 activates IuFlex for the PS domain. Dependencies:Before activ ating o RncFunction highPrioScanReserve 0 Specifies the percentage of the GPEH file size that is reserved for high-priority scanners. This means t hat no events from low-priority scanners shall be written into the file when the following limit is reached: gpehFileSize - (highPrioScanReserve / 100) RncFunction nbapAuditInterval 0 Time interval for period ic NBAP audit procedure. Special values: 0 means that the periodic NBAP audit is deactivated.If the periodic NBAP audit is activated by changing the value from zero (deactivated) to non zero (activated), the NBAP audit will start i RncFunction hsToDchTrigger Indicates whether triggers leadi ng to a transition from HS-DSCH to a DCH connection are acted upon or not. For i nformation about the cases, see struct definitions for HsToDchTrigger RncFunction eulBufferEmptyTimeThreshold 50 The UE shall sen d an unhappy bit if it takes the UE more than this time to empty its buffer with the current serving grant. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson perso nnel. Unit: ms RncFunction ecLocationAttemptUmts 0 Determines whether an at

    tempt to determine the location of the UE should be made in the UMTS system for emergency calls. Dependencies: Not used if ecCnSbhoRequestIgnore = FALSE. RncFunction ecCnPriorityLevel 7 Priority level received from the Core Network that RNC interprets as the identifier for CS Speech Emerge ncy Calls. Change takes effect: Immediately RncFunction ecSbhoTimer 6 Time within which a service-base d handover must be completed for an emergency call. A service-based handover for emergency call can be initiated when ecCnSbhoRequestIgnore = FALSE, or when ecC nSbhoRequestIgnore = TRUE but it is not possible to perform UMT RncFunction ecCnSbhoRequestIgnore 0 Determines if a request from the Core Network for Service based handover should be ignored for an Emerge ncy Call, if positioning using A-GPS is possible. RncFunction primaryCnOperatorRef Reference to the primary CnOperator in this RNC. Used to select which CN Operator to use when there is m ore than one CnOperator instance defined and neither NRI MOCN nor Cell MOCN is a ctive. RncFunction edchTciIntervalMin 250 Defines the minimum inte rval between two consecutive TNL CONGESTION INDICATION control frames, belonging to one flow controlled EUL flow, which are sent towards RBS. The interval is va lid per flow controlled flow, regardless of which type of TCI that are RncFunction hsIubDrtExtensionInterval 100 Minimum time int erval between two HS-DSCH Data Frames with a DRT Extension. The purpose is to no t send DRT Extensions too often. When the parameter is set to zero, no DRT Exten sions are sent (the feature is turned OFF).This attribute may only be changed b RncFunction maxPowerOverloadHystTime 10 Hysteresis time for detection and resolution of HS-DSCH overload. Unit: s Change takes effect: I mmediately RncFunction nbapDscp 0 DiffServ code point value sent b y RNC for NBAP-C and NBAP-D. Change takes effect: For all Iub links at cold RNC node restart.It will not be affected by warm or refresh restart. RncFunction hsMissingCaSupervisionTime 33 Time without a r eceived CAPACITY ALLOCATION (CA) control frame, for this PQF, that results in a reduced HSDPA bit rate.The reason for checking the presence of these CAPACITY AL LOCATION control frames in RNC is that a CA shall be received at least every on RncFunction hsMissingCaReduction 50 Defines the degree of bi t rate reduction due to missing CAPACITY ALLOCATION control frames. Example: New bit rate = Old bit rate * (1- hsMissingCaReduction/100).This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: % Change takes effect: New conn RncFunction edchSoftCongThreshold 66 Starting point for the s oft congestion detection.This point is the shortest dynamic delay that can be de tected as soft congestion, expressed as percentage of edchDataFrameDelayThreshol d This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: % RncFunction maxAllowedGbrDlPsStream 256 Maximum allowed GBR in t he downlink for PS Streaming RABs. Unit: kbps (1000 bits per second) Change take s effect: New connections RncFunction mocnExternalNriMatching 0 Determines whether a (P) TMSI allocated in an external RAN is handled as if it is allocated in the shared RAN to which the RNC belongs, during selection of Core Network. Value mapping: FALSE: external (P)TMSIs will be handled as external (P)TMSIs TRUE: ext RncFunction pcapPositioningMode 0 Selects either the SAS-c entric mode of positioning, or the RNC-centric mode (with no SAS involved). Chan ge takes effect: New connections RncFunction iuSccpConRateThresh 10000 Connection setup rate th reshold for the feature Load Triggered Access Class Barring.The Iu-signaling con nection setup rate is averaged over a period configured in the attribute iuSccpC onRateMeasPeriod. If the measured average exceeds this threshold, the L RncFunction iuSccpConRateMeasPeriod 120 Averaging period for Iu signaling connection setup rate measurement used for the feature Load Triggered Access Class barring and PDF-counter pmIuSccpConRate. Unit: s Resolution: 10Chan ge takes effect: Immediately after each measurement period Dependencies

    RncFunction intraNodeIpResourceRef Node internal IP resourc es available for inter-subrack data transport. The node internal IP resources ar e used to relieve the inter-subrack links (ISL) of dedicated channel data transp ort. The IpAccessHostPool referred to by this attribute must contain at RncFunction scriptVersion Provides the possibility to reco rd script version run on the node. The value is not used by the RNC. RncFunction spare 0 Spare attribute. It is intended for temp orary solutions and its usage may vary depending on RNC release. Index [1] is cu rrently in use:When set to 0, Improved Handling of pmSum Counters is turned off for all cells in this RNC. When set to any other valu RncFunction maxBlockedPreambSignatures 4 Maximum number o f preamble signatures that can be blocked in a cell. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: Immediately RncFunction preambleThresholdIncrRachCov -190 Indicates the pr eamble threshold to be used when the feature Increased RACH Coverage is active. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: -360: -3 6.0 dB -355: -35.5 dB ...-190: -19.0 dB ...-5: -0.5 dB 0: 0 dB Unit: 0.1 dB Res RncFunction initialIuAccessRateMax 0 Maximum number of initia l Iu accesses per second, for registration towards the core network. Initial Iu accesses exceeding the maximum number are rejected.0 disables the feature. Chang e takes effect: New connections RncFunction cyclicAcbPs Settings for the feature Manuall y-triggered Cyclic Access Class Barring for the PS domain. Only access classes 0 -9 for UEs of release 6 or later are affected.The feature Manually-triggered Cyc lic Access Class Barring is active when the feature is on, and RncFunction cyclicAcbCs Settings for the feature Manuall y-triggered Cyclic Access Class Barring for the CS domain. Only access classes 0 -9 for UEs of release 6 or later are affected.The feature Manually-triggered Cyc lic Access Class Barring is active when the feature is on, and RncFunction cyclicAcb Settings for the feature Manuall y-triggered Cyclic Access Class Barring for non-domain specific barring. Only ac cess classes 0-9 are affected.The feature Manually-triggered Cyclic Access Class Barring is active when the feature is on and any of the flags RncFunction cyclicAcbRotationTime 10 Time between two consecu tive rotations of barred access classes for the feature Manually-triggered Cycli c Access Class Barring. After this time, the currently barred classes are enable d, and the next rotationGroupSize classes are barred (in the range 0 RncFunction evolvedHsUePrioEnabled If not 64QAM or MIMO is activate d: FALSE(0) If 64QAM or MIMO is activated: TRUE(1) Controls if prioritizati on of Evolved HS UEs is taken into account when allocating UEs to DC-SPs in the RNC node.When the parameter is set to TRUE, the priority of UEs with different H S capabilities is set with the parameter evolvedHsUePrioLevel.When the RncFunction evolvedHsUePrioLevel 0 Controls the priority of different HS capable UEs at DC-SP allocation in the RNC node.Each element in th e sequence represents a priority level used for allocating UEs to DC-SPs. The va lue of each element specifies the minimum UE capability that is include RncFunction evolvedHsUePrioLoadThresh 0 DC-SP load at wh ich the normal DC-SP allocation priorities may be overridden when allocating SP for lower priority UEs. If the SP that has been chosen for UE allocation has a l oad above this threshold, the SP allocation will be re-evaluated as though the RncFunction cyclicAcb.acbEnabled FALSE(0) Enables or disab les this part of the feature Manual-triggered Cyclic Access Class Barring. RncFunction cyclicAcb.rotationGroupSize 5 Number of access classes that are barred. When it is time to rotate the barred classes, the curr ently barred classes are enabled, and the next rotationGroupSize classes are bar red (in the range 0 - 9). RncFunction cyclicAcbCs.acbEnabled FALSE(0) Enables or disab les this part of the feature Manual-triggered Cyclic Access Class Barring. RncFunction cyclicAcbCs.rotationGroupSize 5 Number of access classes that are barred. When it is time to rotate the barred classes, the curr

    ently barred classes are enabled, and the next rotationGroupSize classes are bar red (in the range 0 - 9). RncFunction cyclicAcbPs.acbEnabled FALSE(0) Enables or disab les this part of the feature Manual-triggered Cyclic Access Class Barring. RncFunction cyclicAcbPs.rotationGroupSize 5 Number of access classes that are barred. When it is time to rotate the barred classes, the curr ently barred classes are enabled, and the next rotationGroupSize classes are bar red (in the range 0 - 9). RncFunction hsToDchTrigger.changeOfBestCellInterRnc 0 Indicate s whether a trigger for a HS-DSCH to DCH transition is accepted or not, when Ser ving HS-DSCH Cell Change can not be completed, when it has been triggered by a c hange of best cell (event 1d) indication and the cell is an inter-RNC UTRAN Cell . RncFunction hsToDchTrigger.changeOfBestCellIntraRnc 0 Indicate s whether a trigger for a HS-DSCH to DCH transition is accepted or not, when Ser ving HS-DSCH Cell Change can not be completed, when it has been triggered by a C hange of Best Cell. RncFunction hsToDchTrigger.poorQualityDetected 0 Indicate s whether a trigger for a HS-DSCH to DCH transition is accepted or not, when poo r radio quality has been detected. RncFunction hsToDchTrigger.servHsChangeInterRnc 0 Indicate s whether a trigger for a HS-DSCH to DCH transition is accepted or not, when the serving HS-DSCH cell is removed from the Active Set, a Serving HS-DSCH Cell Cha nge can not be completed and the best cell is an inter-RNC UTRAN Cell. RncFunction hsToDchTrigger.servHsChangeIntraRnc 0 Indicate s whether a trigger for a HS-DSCH to DCH transition is accepted or not, when the serving HS-DSCH cell is removed from the Active Set, a Serving HS-DSCH Cell Cha nge can not be completed and the best cell is an intra-RNC UTRAN Cell. RncFunction aliasPlmnIdentities.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN i dentity used in the radio network. RncFunction aliasPlmnIdentities.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN i dentity used in the radio network. RncFunction aliasPlmnIdentities.mncLength 0 The length of th e MNC part of a PLMN identity used in the radio network Unit: digit RncModule RncModuleId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system. RncModule operationalState The operational state of RncModule. RncModule availabilityStatus The availability status of the RncModule. More than one of the following conditions can apply for the sa me object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OF FLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9, bi RncModule userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. RncModule rncModuleResourceId Created by the system. U sed locally within the RNC to address the RncModule. RncModule rpuRefs Reference to the MP processor on which t he RncModule program is executing. RncModule reservedBy Sequence of IubLink MO reference s which belongs to this RncModule. The system will set the reservedBy when a new IubLink MO is created or deleted for the RncModule, and then in the same transa ction as the creation/deletion. RncModule programInstanceId 0 The instanceId of the Pr ogramInstances that are associated with this RncModule. Used when instantiating Programs to allow them to distinguish between the different RncModule instances on the same processor. The attribute value must be unique for all RncMo RncRealtimeIndicators RncRealtimeIndicatorsId Naming attribute .Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. RncRealtimeIndicators fachDchHsUsers Current number of UEs in state FACH/DCH and HS in the RNC.The value is re-calculated once every second.

    If the feature Real-time Traffic Flow Indicator is not active, -1 is reported RncRealtimeIndicators iuThroughputCs Current Iu throughput fo r CS traffic.The value is re-calculated once every second. If the feature Real-t ime Traffic Flow Indicator is not active, -1 is reported. Unit: Mbit/s RncRealtimeIndicators iuThroughputPs Current Iu throughput fo r PS traffic.The value is re-calculated once every second. If the feature Real-t ime Traffic Flow Indicator is not active, -1 is reported. Unit: Mbit/s RncSystemParameters RncSystemParametersId RncSystemParameters tRrcChSwitch1 15 Started at transmission of RRC: RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION.Stopped at reception of RRC: RADIO BEARER R ECONFIGURATION COMPLETE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. RncSystemParameters tRrcChSwitch3 5 Started at transmission of RRC: TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION or RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION.Stoppe d at reception of RRC: TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE or RADIO BEARE R RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed RncSystemParameters tNbapRnsapChSwitch4 4 Started at trans mission of DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST.Stopped at reception of DEDI CATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE. Unit: s This attribute may only be change d by Ericsson personnel. RncSystemParameters tRrcEst1 3 Started at transmission ofRRC CONNECTION SETUP to UE.Stopped at reception of RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLE TE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. RncSystemParameters tRrcRel1 1 Started at transmission of RRC CONNECTION RELEASE to UE in state CELL_DCH.Stopped at reception of RRC CO NNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by Ericsso n personnel. RncSystemParameters tRrcRel2 1 Started at transmission of RRC CONNECTION RELEASE to UE in state CELL_FACH.Stopped at reception of RRC C ONNECTION RELEASE COMPLETE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by Ericss on personnel. RncSystemParameters tNbapRlSetupIub 3 Timer used to supervise the NBAP Radio Link Setup procedure.Started at transmission of NBAP RADIO LINK S ETUP REQUEST.Stopped at reception of NBAP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE. Unit: s Thi s attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. RncSystemParameters tRnsapRlSetupIur 4 Timer used to su pervise the RNSAP Radio Link Setup procedure.Started at transmission of RNSAP RA DIO LINK SETUP REQUEST.Stopped at reception of RNSAP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. RncSystemParameters tNbapSynchRlReConfig2 3 Waiting time for RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION READY (Iub). Unit: s This attribute may only be chan ged by Ericsson personnel. RncSystemParameters tRnsapSynchRlReConfig1 4 Waiting time for RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION READY (Iur). Unit: s This attribute may only be chan ged by Ericsson personnel. RncSystemParameters tRrcRABEst 5 Waiting time for RRC RES PONSE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. RncSystemParameters tRrcRABRel 6 Started at transmission of RRC: RADIO BEARER RELEASE or RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION.Stopped at receptio n of RRC: RADIO BEARER RELEASE COMPLETE or RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE . Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. RncSystemParameters tRrcActiveSetUpdate 5 Timer used to su pervise the RRC Active Set Update procedure.Started at transmission of RRC ACTIV E SET UPDATE REQUEST.Stopped at reception of RRC ACTIVE SET UPDATE COMPLETE or R RC ACTIVE SET UPDATE FAILURE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by Eri RncSystemParameters tNbapRlAdd 3 Timer used to supervise the NBAP Radio Link Addition procedure.Started at transmission of NBAP RADIO LIN K ADDITION REQUEST.Stopped at reception of NBAP RADIO LINK ADDITION RESPONSE or NBAP RADIO LINK ADDITION FAILURE or NBAP ERROR INDICATION. Unit: s This RncSystemParameters tRnsapRlAdd 4 Timer used to supervise

    the RNSAP Radio Link Addition procedure.Started at transmission of RNSAP RADIO L INK ADDITION REQUEST.Stopped at reception of RNSAP RADIO LINK ADDITION RESPONSE or RNSAP RADIO LINK ADDITION FAILURE or RNSAP ERROR INDICATION. Unit: s RncSystemParameters hsWaitMeasRepT 750 Maximum waiting time for a Measurement Report from the UE. Unit: ms Resolution: 250 This attribute may o nly be changed by Ericsson personnel. RncSystemParameters ueRcVersion Provides the possibility to record script version run on the node. The value is not used by the RNC. Thi s attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. RnlQosClassProfile RnlQosClassProfileId Naming attribute . Contains the value part of the RDN. RnlQosClassProfile rnlQosClassProfileInsId Internal identif ier of this instance. RnlQosClassProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RN C. RnlQosClassProfile tcPsBgQosRef Reference to the QoS spe cification for PS Background. Dependencies:References a SpiQosClass under this R nlQosClassProfile instance.Change takes effect: New connections RnlQosClassProfile tcPsBgArpSpiMapRef Reference to an instance containing external ARP to SPI mappings for PS Background Dependencies: This reference must point at an instance of ArpSpiMap that is contained under t he same profile as this instance.Change takes effect: New connections Rnsap RnsapId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Rnsap operationalState The operational state of the RNS AP signaling bearer. Rnsap availabilityStatus The availability status of the R NSAP.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bi t 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9 or bit 1 Rnsap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. Rnsap sccpDisabledT 100 Timer for supervising the propagated ope rational state change of the local SCCP.The alarm Local Failure is issued on tim er expiry. Unit: s Rnsap userOutOfServiceT 100 Timer for supervising the N-STAT E-indication for the remote SCCP (SSN=1) or the remote RNSAP (SSN=143).Timer exp iry for remote SCCP (SSN=1) issues the alarm Local Failure and for remote RNSAP (SSN=143) issues the alarm Remote Failure. Rnsap localSccpApRef Reference to the SccpApLocal MO that rep resents the local SCCP Access point. Rnsap remoteSccpApRef Reference to the SccpApRemote MO that re presents the remote SCCP Access point. RoutingArea RoutingAreaId RoutingArea userLabel Location Area name CMS Ref. RoutingArea rac Routing area code CMS Ref.[22] RoutingArea nmo 0 Network operation mode that indicates wh ether the Gs interface between the SGSN and MSC/VLR is installed. MODE_I = 0 MOD E_II = 1 RoutingArea RoutingAreaId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system. RoutingArea userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. RoutingArea rac Routing Area Code of a routing area. An RA is used by UTRAN to page mobiles on request from the PS CN.When the parameter is changed, UTRAN updates system information and notifies the UEs. The rac is u nique in the LA. An LA can span over several RNCs. RoutingArea nmo 0 Network operation mode that indicates wh ether the Gs interface between the SGSN and MSC/VLR is installed.

    RoutingArea reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to this MO.See reference in UtranCell. Rrc RrcId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. Rrc t300 10 Time for supervision of RRC Connection Setup. Us ed by the UE. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value map ping: 0: 100 ms 1: 200 ms 2: 400 ms 3: 600 ms 4: 800 ms 5: 1000 ms 6: 1200 ms 7: 1400 ms 8: 1600 ms 9: 1800 ms 10: 2000 ms 11: Rrc t302 5 Maximum time between UE transmission of Cell Upd ate message and UE reception of the Cell Update Confirm message. If not received , the UE sends a new Cell Update.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.0: 100 ms 1: 200 ms 2: 400 ms 3: 600 Rrc t305 3 Time in UE between periodic cell updates. If thi s time has expired, the UE sends a new CELL UPDATE.Value mapping: 0: No updating 1: 5 min 2: 10 3: 30 4: 60 5: 120 6: 360 7: 720 min Rrc t308 40 Started at UE transmission of the RRC Connection Release Complete message.Set in SIB 1. This attribute may only be changed by Er icsson personnel.Change takes effect: New connections Rrc t317 180 Maximum time for moving from CELL_FACH to idle m ode if out of service area. Used by the UE. This attribute may only be changed b y Ericsson personnel.Unit: s Rrc n300 5 Maximum number of retransmissions of RRC Connect ion Request. Used by the UE. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson pers onnel.Change takes effect: New connections Rrc n302 6 Maximum number of retransmissions of Cell Update . Used by the UE. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Rrc n308 1 Maximum number of retransmissions of the RRC con nection release complete message. Used by the UE.This attribute may only be chan ged by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: New connections Rrc t309 6 UE timer that is controlled by UTRAN and sent to the UE in system information.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson per sonnel.Change takes effect: New connections Rrc n313 100 Number of frames to be considered for out-of-syn c detection (UE in DCH). This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personne l. Rrc n315 1 Number of frames to be considered for in-sync de tection (UE in DCH) This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Dep endencies: Must not be set longer than t313, assuming 1 frame = 10 ms. Rrc t307 30 Waiting time before moving to idle (UE in PCH or FACH) This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: s Rrc t316 30 Waiting time before starting T317 (UE in PCH) Th is attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: s Rrc t313 3 Waiting time before RL Failure (UE in DCH). This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0 indicates that the t313 is not in use. Dependencies: Must be set longer than n315, assumi ng 1 frame = 10 ms. Unit: s Rrc cfnOffsetMarginFirstRabEst 0 Additional margin in num ber of radio frames added to the system margin when the activation time (the CFN ) is set at establishing any RAB to a stand alone RRC connection by use of synch ronization procedure B. Resolution:1Change takes effect: At next synchr Rrc cfnOffsetSrbDchDl 18 The TTI Alignment (UL and 2*DL) and UE Processing delay in number of radio frames added to the activation time ( i.e. the CFN) calculated by the RNC using SRB on DCH-DL.This system constant can be calculated in the following way:cfnOffsetSrbDchDl = 2*TTI_A Rrc cfnOffsetSrbHs 8 TTI alignment and UE Processing delay in number of radio frames added to the activation time (i.e. the CFN) calculated b y the RNC using SRB on HS.This system constant can be calculated in the followin g way:cfnOffsetSrbHs = TTI_Alignment_DL+ TTI_Alignment_ Rrc cfnOffsetMarginSrbDchDl 0 Additional operator margin in nu

    mber of radio frames added to the activation time (i.e. the CFN) calculated by t he RNC when using SRB on DCH-DL.This parameter is used together with dto and toA we in calculation of CFN offset. When establishing the first RA Rrc cfnOffsetMarginSrbHs 0 Additional operator margin in nu mber of radio frames added to the activation time (i.e. the CFN) calculated by t he RNC when using SRB on HS.Unit: 10 ms Change takes effect: At next synchronize d reconfiguration of the connection. RruDeviceGroup RruDeviceGroupId RruDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specific ation: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] RruDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat RruDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] RruDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] RttPositioning RttPositioningId Naming attribute.Contain s the value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. RttPositioning posQualities Typical QoS parameters for the R TT positioning method. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next positionin g transaction) RttPositioning measTimeMaxUe 15 Specifies the maximum value of t he RNC timer controlling the Rx-Tx timing measurement in UE. The timer shall be set to this value whenever a MEASUREMENT CONTROL message that requests an UE RxT x type 1 measurement is sent. In case the timer expires before RttPositioning measTimeMaxRbs 15 Specifies the maximum value of t he RNC timer controlling the RTT measurement in RBS The timer shall be set to th is value whenever a DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message that reques ts an RTT Measurement is sent. In case the timer expires before RttPositioning propagationTimeUncertainty Expected two-way propagation time uncertainty which should reflect:i) the RTT measurement error ii) the UE RxTx type 1 Measurement erroriii) radio propagation effects.Note that the parameter does not reflect the effect of non-simultaneous measurement time RttPositioning outlierFactor 30 Factor that describes how much l arger distance than the cell size an RTT measurement may represent, before it is counted as a measurement error.Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect: Ongoing connectio ns (next positioning transaction) RttPositioning posQualities.accuracyCodeTypical 0 Expected accuracy code of the positioning method, to be used in the selection of the pos itioning method for the first positioning attempt.The uncertainty radius of a ci rcular uncertainty measure (in meters) is related to the accuracy code by: Radiu s = 10 RttPositioning posQualities.confidenceEstimate 95 Expected confide nce of the positioning method to be used for shape Conversion.Unit: % RttPositioning posQualities.responseTimeTypical 1500 Expected response time of the positioning method to be used in the selection of the posi tioning method for the first positioning attempt. Unit: msResolution: 100 RttPositioning posQualities.verticalAccuracyCodeTypical 0 Expected vertical accuracy code of the positioning method, to be used in the sel ection of the positioning method for the first positioning attempt.The uncertain ty (in meters) is related to the vertical accuracy code by: Uncertainty = 45 x ( 1.025^verticalA RuDeviceGroup RuDeviceGroupId RuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specific

    ation: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] RuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat RuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] RuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] RuifDeviceGroup RuifDeviceGroupId RuifDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_904Specificati RuifDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Hardware uni ts not supporting hardware test will always return the default value UNDETERMINE D. Use cases: HWT_UC1 Requirement: Test_UTRAN_FU3 Ref. [FS_HWT] RuifDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_904Specification: IT U-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] RuifDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC904 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] SaiuDeviceGroup SaiuDeviceGroupId SaiuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specific ation: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] SaiuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat SaiuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] SaiuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] SasPositioning SasPositioningId SasPositioning enabledSasFeatures 0 Selects the positioningmethods that will be signaled to the SAS, if the UE also supports them. Change t akes effect: New connections SasPositioning pcapSasRespTime 200 Time without SAS response after which the RNC aborts the CN positioning request. Unit: ms Resolution: 100 Change takes effect: New connections SccpApLocal SccpApLocalId The value component of the RDN. SccpApLocal userLabel Label for free use. SccpApLocal operationalState The operational state. SccpApLocal availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. SccpApLocal ssN The Subsystem number (SSN) of the SCCP A ccess Point. If the SccpAp is local, then the SSN has to be unique among all oth er SccpAp MOs under the same SccpSp MO. Disturbances: At a change of this attrib ute, the SCCP user traffic for the other SccpApLocal re SccpApLocal maxConn Specifies the maximum number of connecti ons allowed for this SCCP Access Point. It is only valid for local SCCP Access P oints. At a change of the attribute, the SCCP user traffic for the other SccpApL ocal related to the same SccpSp is affected.

    SccpApLocal reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. SccpApLocal useS1 TRUE(1) Controls adding of OPC from routing labe l to Calling Party Address if absent. false = Do not add OPC to Calling Party Ad dress. true = Add OPC to Calling Party Address. Disturbances: At a change of thi s attribute, the SCCP user traffic for the other SccpAp SccpApLocal enablePoolProxyExtension 0 Controls adding of OPC to Calling Party Address, DPC to Called Party Address from routing label and copying SSN from Called Party Address to Calling Party Address if absent. fa lse = Do not add OPC to Calling Party Address, DPC to Called Party Address and SccpApRemote SccpApRemoteId The value component of the RDN. SccpApRemote userLabel Label for free use. SccpApRemote operationalState The operational state. SccpApRemote availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. SccpApRemote reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. SccpApRemote mtp3bApId The identity of the Mtp3bAp used by this MO. SccpApRemote ssN The Subsystem Number (SSN) of the SCCP A ccess Point. The SSN must be unique among all SccpApRemote instances referring t o the same Mtp3bAp. Sccpch availabilityStatus The availability status of the c ommon channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Sccpch dbchDeviceSetRef Reference to MO DbchDeviceSet. R ef. [CB_MOP] Sccpch operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP] Sccpch pnIsActive Identifies if a PN transmission is start ed on SCCPCH. Possible values: ? 0 = FALSE ? 1 = TRUE User category: Ericsson pe rsonnel Ref. [CB_UTS] Sccpch SccpchId SccpScrc SccpScrcId The value component of the RDN. SccpScrc userLabel Label for free use. SccpSp SccpSpId The value component of the RDN. SccpSp userLabel Label for free use. SccpSp operationalState The operational state. SccpSp mtp3bSpId The identity of the L3 Signalling Point used by this MO. SccpSp prioSST 1 Sets the priority for the Subsystem Test message when issued by the SCCP itself. When a message is transferred from the SCCP the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Coding of the message prio rity: 0 Lowest priority 1 2 3 Highest priority SccpSp prioIT 1 Sets the priority for the Inactivity Test messag e when issued by the SCCP itself. When a message is transferred from the SCCP, t he message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Coding of the message pr iority: 0 Lowest priority 1 2 3 Highest priorit SccpSp prioRLSD 1 Sets the priority for the connection rel ease message when issued by the SCCP itself. When a message is transferred from the SCCP, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Coding of the message priority: 0 Lowest priority 1 2 3 Highest prio SccpSp prioGeneral 0 Sets the priority for all the other mess ages which are issued by the SCCP itself. When a message is transferred from the SCCP, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Coding of the me ssage priority: 0 Lowest priority 1 2 3 Highest priorit SccpSp upperConnThres 80 Allows the user to specify the level at which the upper connection threshold notification is triggered. The thresholds m ust be given as a percentage of the maximum number of connection resources made

    available for the entire SCCP. Unit: 1% SccpSp lowerConnThres 50 Allows the user to specify the level at which the lower connection threshold notification is triggered. The thresholds m ust be given as a percentage of the maximum number of connection resources made available for the entire SCCP. Dependencies: The value SccpSp swapUDTPointer 1 There are two ways to construct a UDTS f rom a UDT: - to only swap the pointers to Called Party Address (CdPA) and Callin g Party Address (CgPA) in a UDT message when constructing a UDTS. - to swap data How this is done in the SCCP is configurable. The XUDT SccpSp hopCounterSclc 8 The SCLC hop counter is a parameter that is decremented for each performed GT translation for SCLC messages on the way t o the end destination. If decrementing the counter results in the value of zero in a non-end destination node, the SCCP initiates the a SccpSp hopCounterScoc 8 The SCOC hop counter is a parameter that is decremented for each performed GT translation for SCOC messages on the way t o the end destination. If decrementing the counter results in the value of zero in no end destination node, the SCCP initiates the appr SccpSp tconnEst 600 Connection establishment control timer. Guiding values: Range 600 - 1200 Default 600 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s) SccpSp tIas 3000 Send inactivity control timer. Guiding values: R ange 3000-6000 Default 3000 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s) SccpSp tIar 6600 Receive inactivity control timer. Guiding values : Range 6600-12600 Default 6600 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s) SccpSp tRel 100 Connection release timer. Guiding values: Range 100-200 Default 100 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s) SccpSp tCong 300 Congestion timer. Guiding values: Range 10-2550 Default 300 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s) SccpSp tStatInfo 300 Subsystem Status Test timer. Guiding val ues: Range 10-2550 Default 300 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s) SccpSp tconnResp 150 Connection response waiting timer. Guidi ng values: Range 100-200 Default 150 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s) SccpSp tReass 150 Reassembly timer. Guiding values: Range 100-200 Default 150 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s) SccpSp smiValue 0 The Subsystem Multiplicity Indicator (SM I) is always ignored for incoming messages. This SCCP can however be configured to insert a specific SMI value in outgoing messages. The coding and interpretati on is as follows: Coding Comment 0|Affected Subsystem m SccpSp useSCMG The use of SCMG functions. SST = SCCP Subsystem Test message. SSA = SCCP Subsystem Allowed message. SSP = SCCP Subsystem Prohibi ted message. SSC = SCCP Subsystem Congested message. SccpSp maxRelayedConn 0 Connection Oriented SCCP Signaling Relay Point (SRP-CO) and Maximum number of Relayed Connections is not used in this CP P version. SccpSp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. SccpSp useSCMG.allowRemoteBroadcast 0 Controls the remote broa dcast. 0 = allow remote broadcast. 1 = do not allow remote broadcast. Set allowR emoteBroadcast=1 for the TTC standard. SccpSp useSCMG.initiateTimerTcon 0 Controls whether to init iate hardcoded congestion timer or not. 0 = start timer when SSC is received. 1 = do not start timer. Set initiateTimerTcon=1 for the TTC standard. SccpSp useSCMG.sendSSA 1 Controls when to send SSA (SCCP Subsyste m Allowed message). 0 = Do not send SSA. 1 = Send SSA immediately when client at taches. Set sendSSA=0 for the TTC standard. SccpSp useSCMG.sendSSP 3 Controls whether to send SSP (SCCP Subsy stem Prohibited message). 0 = Do not send SSP when client detaches. 1 = Send SSP immediately when client detaches. 2 = Do not send SSP when receiving MTP_TRANSF ER_ind and user is detached and do not send when user d SccpSp useSCMG.sendSST 1 Controls when to send SST (SCCP Subsyste m Test message). 0 = Wait for tStatInfo timer to expire once after MTP_RESUME be

    fore sending SST. 1 = Send SST immediately after MTP_RESUME, then start tStatInf o timer. Set sendSST=0 for the TTC standard. SccpSp useSCMG.useSST 0 Controls whether to send SST messages or not (SCCP Subsystem Test message). 0 = Send SST as indicated by sendSST. 1 = (n ot used) 2 = (not used) 3 = Do not initiate SST. Set useSST=3 for the TTC standa rd Scpich availabilityStatus The availability status of the c ommon channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Scpich operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Requirement: CELL_RBS_FU:9 Ref. [CB_MOP] Scpich ScpichId Sctp SctpId The value component of the RDN. Sctp userLabel Label for free use. Sctp operationalState The operational state. Sctp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Sctp numberOfAssociations The maximum number of associatio ns that can be handled by this SCTP MO. Sctp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Sctp ipAccessHostGpbId The identity of an IpAccessHostG pb referred to by this MO. Dependencies: Setting of this attribute is rejected i f ipAccessSctpRef is set. This attribute must contain a value if an M3uAssociati on MO refers to this MO. Sctp minimumRto 10 The minimum value for RTO. The value of this attribute has the following relation to the values of other attributes: tSa ck + expected Round Trip Time < minimumRto < maximumRto A new value of the attri bute applies to both existing and new associations. Uni Sctp maximumRto 40 The maximum value for the RTO. The value of this attribute must be greater than the value of minimumRto. A new value of the attribute applies to both existing and new associations. Unit: 1 cs (centise cond, that is 0.01 second) Sctp initialRto 20 The initial value that the Retransmissio n Timeout (RTO) takes prior to the first measurement of the Round-Trip Time (RTT ). The value of this attribute has the following relation to the values of other attributes: minimumRto <= initialRto <= maximumRto A n Sctp rtoAlphaIndex 3 The attribute rtoAlphaIndex (Retransmiss ion Timeout Alpha Index) computes the value of the Smoothed Round-Trip Time (SRT T) for a specific destination address. It weights the RTT values. The value of t his attribute is used to create a value of RTO.Alpha be Sctp rtoBetaIndex 2 The attribute rtoBetaIndex (Retransmissi on Timeout Beta Index) computes the value of RTTVar (Round Trip Time Variation) of a destination address. The value of this attribute is used to create a value of RTO.Beta between 0 and 1. A value close to 1 gives a Sctp validCookieLife 60 The attribute sets the lifespan of the S tate Cookie sent in the INIT_ACK chunk. It limits the amount of time between sen ding the INIT_ACK and the reception of a COOKIE_ECHO chunk when establishing an association. The value of this attribute has the follow Sctp allowedIncrementCookieLife 30 The attribute defines th e allowed increment of the validCookieLife parameter (in local node) when an inc rease of the parameter is requested from remote node. A new value of the attribu te does not apply to associations that are already established. Unit: 1 Sctp keyChangePeriod 4 Defines how often the secret key used fo r computing the Message Authentication Code (MAC) on the State Cookie is changed . A new value of the attribute does not change the current measurement interval. It applies only to subsequent intervals. A new value o Sctp associationMaxRtx Iu, Iur: 8 Iub: 12 The maximum numb er of consecutive retransmissions to a remote peer (on all the destination IP ad

    dresses of the peer). If the number of retransmissions becomes greater than this value, the remote peer is considered to be unreachable and the association is Sctp pathMaxRtx Iu, Iur: 4 Iub: 12 If the path selection al gorithm is SCTP_PATHS, this attribute specifies the maximum number of consecutiv e retransmissions to a remote transport address. For other path selection algori thms, this attribute specifies the maximum number of consecutive retran Sctp maxInitialRtrAtt 8 The maximum number of retransmis sions allowed for both INIT and COOKIE_ECHO chunks. If the number of retransmiss ions exceeds this value, SCTP aborts the initialization of the association and r eports the error to the SCTP user. A new value of the attribute Sctp maxShutDownRtrAtt 5 The maximum number of retransmis sions during the shutdown phase of an association. A new value of the attribute applies to both existing and new associations. Unit: 1 attempts Sctp heartbeatInterval Iu, Iur: 30 Iub: 1 The amount of ti me added to the RTO of a specific address when setting up the period of time bet ween sending heartbeats. Small values can lead to an earlier detection of unreac hable addresses than higher values. However, sending the heartbeat too often ca Sctp heartbeatStatus TRUE(1) Enables and disables heartbeats for asso ciations. true - enable heartbeats. false - disable heartbeats. A new value of t his attribute applies to both existing and new associations. Sctp maxIncomingStream 17 The allowed maximum number of in coming streams for an association. 17 is the default value for M3UA associations . A new value of the attribute does not apply to endpoints that are already esta blished. Sctp maxOutgoingStream 17 The allowed maximum number of ou tgoing streams for an association. Note that 17 is the default value for M3UA as sociations. A new value of the attribute does not apply to endpoints that are al ready established. Sctp maxUserDataSize 0 The maximum number of bytes of an IP dat agram that can be transferred in a single unit over a specific path in an IP net work. If an IP datagram exceeds the Path Maximum Transfer Unit (PMTU), it is eit her fragmented or dropped. This value does NOT include Sctp mBuffer Iu, Iur: 256 Iub: 16 The attribute sets the size of t he buffer used for storing user data pending to be sent or retransmitted in an a ssociation. That is, the attribute sets the maximum amount of user data that SCT P buffers before discarding user messages. The value may need t Sctp nThreshold Iu, Iur: 192 Iub: 12 Sets the value of the th reshold used to ask the SCTP user to stop the delivery of a data on an associati on. A congestion indication will be sent to the user when the SCTP send buffer u sage is above nTreshold. The value of this attribute has the following Sctp tSack 4 The time delay for sending the Selective Acknowl edgement (SACK), that is, the time from reception of the DATA chunk to sending o f the SACK chunk. A new value of the attribute does not change the current measu rement interval. It applies only to subsequent Sctp initialAdRecWin Iu, Iur: 32768 Iub: 16384 The initial valu e of the advertised receiver window credit. If the value of this attribute is in creased, it applies to both existing and new associations. If the value is decre ased, it does not apply to associations that are already established. Unit: 1 B Sctp intervalOobPkts 3600 The number of seconds after which the co unter for out-of-the-blue packets is reset. A new value of the attribute does no t change the current measurement interval. It applies only to subsequent interva ls. A new value of the attribute applies to both existi Sctp intervalLostUser 0 The number of seconds after whic h SCTP decides that the connection to the SCTP user is lost. After the time spec ified in this attribute has elapsed, all the endpoints and the associations rela ted to this SCTP user are terminated. A new value of the attrib Sctp maxBurst 4 The number of packages that are sent dur ing the fast retransmit phase when a SACK is processed. A new value of the attri bute applies to both existing and new associations. Sctp nPercentage 85 This attribute is set as a percentage of

    the attribute nThreshold. A congestion-ceased indication is sent to the SCTP us er when the usage of the SCTP send buffer drops below nPercentage. A new value o f the attribute applies to both existing and new associ Sctp bundlingActivated ENABLED(1) Enables and disables the use of bundling. A new value of this attribute applies to both existing and new associations. Sctp bundlingTimer 10 Specifies the maximum SCTP bundling dela y. Value=0 means that SCTP bundles only what is available and sends directly (no delay). A new value of the attribute does not change the current measurement in terval. It applies only to subsequent intervals. A new Sctp rpuId Reference to an instance of ReliableProgramUnite r MO. There is a one to one relation between SCTP MO and ReliableProgramUniter M O instances. Sctp ipAccessSctpRef The identity of an IpAccessSctp referred to by this MO. Dependencies: Setting of this attribute is rejected if ipAccessH ostGpbId is set. Sctp heartbeatMaxBurst 0 The maximum number of heartbeats , which can be sent at the same time during the path probing procedure. If the v alue is set to 0, path probing is not used. A new value of the attribute does no t apply to associations that are already established. Sctp heartbeatPathProbingInterval Iu, Iur: 500 Iub: 70 The inte rval between consecutive heartbeats during the path probing. The value of this a ttribute has the following relationship to the values of other attributes: maxim umRto <= heartbeatPathProbingInterval <= heartbeatInterval. A new value of the a ttribut Sctp pathSelection SCTP_PATHS(0) The type of path selection algor ithm. Sctp SctpId The value component of the RDN. Sctp userLabel Label for free use. Sctp operationalState The operational state. Sctp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Sctp numberOfAssociations 2 The maximum number of associatio ns that can be handled by this SCTP MO. Sctp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Sctp ipAccessHostGpbId The identity of an IpAccessHostG pb referred to by this MO. Dependencies: Setting of this attribute is rejected i f ipAccessSctpRef is set. This attribute must contain a value if an M3uAssociati on MO refers to this MO. Sctp minimumRto 10 The minimum value for RTO. The value of this attribute has the following relation to the values of other attributes: tSa ck + expected Round Trip Time < minimumRto < maximumRto A new value of the attri bute applies to both existing and new associations. Uni Sctp maximumRto 40 The maximum value for the RTO. The value of this attribute must be greater than the value of minimumRto. A new value of the attribute applies to both existing and new associations. Unit: 1 cs (centise cond, that is 0.01 second) Sctp initialRto 20 The initial value that the Retransmissio n Timeout (RTO) takes prior to the first measurement of the Round-Trip Time (RTT ). The value of this attribute has the following relation to the values of other attributes: minimumRto <= initialRto <= maximumRto A n Sctp rtoAlphaIndex 3 The attribute rtoAlphaIndex (Retransmiss ion Timeout Alpha Index) computes the value of the Smoothed Round-Trip Time (SRT T) for a specific destination address. It weights the RTT values. The value of t his attribute is used to create a value of RTO.Alpha be Sctp rtoBetaIndex 2 The attribute rtoBetaIndex (Retransmissi on Timeout Beta Index) computes the value of RTTVar (Round Trip Time Variation) of a destination address. The value of this attribute is used to create a value of RTO.Beta between 0 and 1. A value close to 1 gives a

    Sctp validCookieLife 60 The attribute sets the lifespan of the S tate Cookie sent in the INIT_ACK chunk. It limits the amount of time between sen ding the INIT_ACK and the reception of a COOKIE_ECHO chunk when establishing an association. The value of this attribute has the follow Sctp allowedIncrementCookieLife 30 The attribute defines th e allowed increment of the validCookieLife parameter (in local node) when an inc rease of the parameter is requested from remote node. A new value of the attribu te does not apply to associations that are already established. Unit: 1 Sctp keyChangePeriod 4 Defines how often the secret key used fo r computing the Message Authentication Code (MAC) on the State Cookie is changed . A new value of the attribute does not change the current measurement interval. It applies only to subsequent intervals. A new value o Sctp associationMaxRtx 12 The maximum number of consecutiv e retransmissions to a remote peer (on all the destination IP addresses of the p eer). If the number of retransmissions becomes greater than this value, the remo te peer is considered to be unreachable and the association is Sctp pathMaxRtx 6 If the path selection algorithm is SCTP_ PATHS, this attribute specifies the maximum number of consecutive retransmission s to a remote transport address. For other path selection algorithms, this attri bute specifies the maximum number of consecutive retran Sctp maxInitialRtrAtt 8 The maximum number of retransmis sions allowed for both INIT and COOKIE_ECHO chunks. If the number of retransmiss ions exceeds this value, SCTP aborts the initialization of the association and r eports the error to the SCTP user. A new value of the attribute Sctp maxShutDownRtrAtt 5 The maximum number of retransmis sions during the shutdown phase of an association. A new value of the attribute applies to both existing and new associations. Unit: 1 attempts Sctp heartbeatInterval 1 The amount of time added to the RTO of a specific address when setting up the period of time between sending hea rtbeats. Small values can lead to an earlier detection of unreachable addresses than higher values. However, sending the heartbeat too often ca Sctp heartbeatStatus TRUE(1) Enables and disables heartbeats for asso ciations. true - enable heartbeats. false - disable heartbeats. A new value of t his attribute applies to both existing and new associations. Sctp maxIncomingStream 17 The allowed maximum number of in coming streams for an association. 17 is the default value for M3UA associations . A new value of the attribute does not apply to endpoints that are already esta blished. Sctp maxOutgoingStream 17 The allowed maximum number of ou tgoing streams for an association. Note that 17 is the default value for M3UA as sociations. A new value of the attribute does not apply to endpoints that are al ready established. Sctp maxUserDataSize 0 The maximum number of bytes of an IP dat agram that can be transferred in a single unit over a specific path in an IP net work. If an IP datagram exceeds the Path Maximum Transfer Unit (PMTU), it is eit her fragmented or dropped. This value does NOT include Sctp mBuffer 16 The attribute sets the size of the buffer used f or storing user data pending to be sent or retransmitted in an association. That is, the attribute sets the maximum amount of user data that SCTP buffers before discarding user messages. The value may need t Sctp nThreshold 12 Sets the value of the threshold used to ask the SCTP user to stop the delivery of a data on an association. A congestion indication will be sent to the user when the SCTP send buffer usage is above nT reshold. The value of this attribute has the following Sctp tSack 4 The time delay for sending the Selective Acknowl edgement (SACK), that is, the time from reception of the DATA chunk to sending o f the SACK chunk. A new value of the attribute does not change the current measu rement interval. It applies only to subsequent Sctp initialAdRecWin 16384 The initial value of the advertised rece iver window credit. If the value of this attribute is increased, it applies to b

    oth existing and new associations. If the value is decreased, it does not apply to associations that are already established. Unit: 1 B Sctp intervalOobPkts 3600 The number of seconds after which the co unter for out-of-the-blue packets is reset. A new value of the attribute does no t change the current measurement interval. It applies only to subsequent interva ls. A new value of the attribute applies to both existi Sctp intervalLostUser 0 The number of seconds after whic h SCTP decides that the connection to the SCTP user is lost. After the time spec ified in this attribute has elapsed, all the endpoints and the associations rela ted to this SCTP user are terminated. A new value of the attrib Sctp maxBurst 4 The number of packages that are sent dur ing the fast retransmit phase when a SACK is processed. A new value of the attri bute applies to both existing and new associations. Sctp nPercentage 85 This attribute is set as a percentage of the attribute nThreshold. A congestion-ceased indication is sent to the SCTP us er when the usage of the SCTP send buffer drops below nPercentage. A new value o f the attribute applies to both existing and new associ Sctp bundlingActivated ENABLED(1) Enables and disables the use of bundling. A new value of this attribute applies to both existing and new associations. Sctp bundlingTimer 10 Specifies the maximum SCTP bundling dela y. Value=0 means that SCTP bundles only what is available and sends directly (no delay). A new value of the attribute does not change the current measurement in terval. It applies only to subsequent intervals. A new Sctp rpuId Reference to an instance of ReliableProgramUnite r MO. There is a one to one relation between SCTP MO and ReliableProgramUniter M O instances. Sctp ipAccessSctpRef The identity of an IpAccessSctp referred to by this MO. Dependencies: Setting of this attribute is rejected if ipAccessH ostGpbId is set. Sctp heartbeatMaxBurst 0 The maximum number of heartbeats , which can be sent at the same time during the path probing procedure. If the v alue is set to 0, path probing is not used. A new value of the attribute does no t apply to associations that are already established. Sctp heartbeatPathProbingInterval 70 The interval between con secutive heartbeats during the path probing. The value of this attribute has the following relationship to the values of other attributes: maximumRto <= heartbe atPathProbingInterval <= heartbeatInterval. A new value of the attribut Sctp pathSelection SCTP_PATHS(0) The type of path selection algor ithm. SduFormat SduFormatId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. SduFormat sduSize Subflow size (TB size). This attribute m ay only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bit SduFormat formatContext Applicable when more than one SD U Format exists per subflow and more than one subflow exists for one rabType. It is used to create a subflow combination with the correct sduSize parameters e.g . SID + an AMR rate. This attribute may only be changed by Eric Sector utranCellRef DN of the related RNC UtranCell MO. FDN according to [9] and [20] For CORBA users, GenericNRIRPSystem::AttributeTypes::M OReference, Sector availabilityStatus The availability status of the s ector. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDENCY_LOCKE D ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Sector beamDirection 0 Beam direction of the corresponding sect or antenna. Examples: ? 000 = North ? 090 = East ? 180 = South ? 270 = West Unit : 1? Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_MOP] Sector geoDatum 0 Denotes the geodetic (geographic) datum for this sector. Example: WGS84 (World Geodetic System 1984) Use cases: Configur

    e RBS at Site, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_MOP] Sector height Height above ground. Example: 1015 = 10.15 meter s Unit: 1 cm Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_SIC] Sector latHemisphere 0 Defines the latitudinal hemisphere. Poss ible values: ? NORTH ? SOUTH Example: Bromma airfield has latHemisphere = NORTH Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_SIC] Sector latitude 0 Defines the latitude of the correspondin g sector antenna, according to a certain geodetic datum (see attribute geoDatum) . Example: Bromma airfield has latitude 5532101 according to WGS84. Use cases: C onfigure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_SIC] Sector longitude 0 Defines the longitude of the correspondi ng sector antenna, according to a certain geodetic datum (see attribute geoDatum ). Example: Bromma airfield has longitude 0060157 according to WGS84. Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_SIC] Sector maxInternalUlGainOn FALSE(0) Turns maximum RBS intern al uplink gain in the sector on or off. Precondition: The cells using the sector must not be setup. TMA type for the sector must not be ATMA. Enabled AI devices used by the corresponding carriers must support setting of maximum UL Sector numberOfTxBranches 0 Number of TX branches in this se ctor. Dependencies: Value defined at initSector. If the sector is not initiated, the value is undefined. Undefined value: -1Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Ad d Capacity, Increase Coverage Requirement: CELL_RBS_OM:2, CELL_ Sector operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Requirement: CELL_RBS_FU:9 Ref. [CB_MOP] Sector proceduralStatus The procedural status of the sec tor. Possible values: ? INITIALIZED ? INITIALIZATION REQUIRED ? NOT INITIALIZED ? INITIATING ? REPORTING ? TERMINATING Requirement: CELL_RBS_OM:2, BCM_FU_RBS_60 11:00858 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Sector SectorId Sector tmaDeviceRef Reference to TmaDevice MO(s). The attrib ute value is updated at commit of initSector. Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00860 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Sector userLabel Label for free use.Ref. [DR_MOM] Sector band 0 Defines the frequency band used in the sector. V alue defined at initSector. Dependencies: Must match fqBandLowEdge and fqBandHig hEdge of AntennaBranch. Undefined value: 0 Specification: 3GPP TS 25.104, Base S tation (BS) radio transmission and reception (F Sector sectorAntennasRef Reference to the SectorAntenna M O(s) of the sector. Dependencies: Number of valid sector antenna references depe nds on the value of the attribute numberOfSectorAntennas. Ref. [CB_MOP] Sector retDevicesRef Reference to the RetDevice MO(s) of the sector. The attribute value is updated at commit of initSector. Requirement: BCM _FU_RBS_6011:00859 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP] Sector numberOfSectorAntennas 0 Number of SectorAntenna MO(s) in the sector. Precondition: Sector must be un-initiated. When changing the value from 2 to 1, the second MO SectorAntenna must not have any children.Dependencies : It is only possible to change the value from 2 to 1, if all c Sector radioBuildingBlock 0 Indicates the configured Radio B uilding Block in a DUW configuration.Possible values: ? RBB10_1A ? RBB11_1A ? RB B12_1A ? RBB22_1A ? RBB22_1B ? RBB22_1C ? RBB22_2A ? RBB24_1A ? NA = Not Applica ble Takes effect: At commit of initSector. Precondition: Sector Sector lineRate 0 Specifies the capacity on an optical or electrical link. Only valid for DUW. Possible values: ? X_2 = 1.2 Gb/s link? X_4 = 2.5 Gb/s link ? NA = Not applicable Takes effect: At commit of initSector. Pr econdition: Sector must be un-initiated. Use cases: Man Sector reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipmen t, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_SIC] SectorAntenna antennaType 0 Type of antenna. Possible values : ? 0..50 = Reserved for predefined antenna types supported by Ericsson. ? 51..1

    00 = Available for customer specific antenna types. Precondition: Corresponding sector not initiated. Ref. [CB_MOP] SectorAntenna reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Ref. [CB_MOP] SectorAntenna SectorAntennaId SectorAntenna alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the SectorAn tenna. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDE R_REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding ala Security requestedSecurityLevel Shows the security level requested. The requested security level may differ from the operational securit y level in some situations. The value of this attribute is set using the actions , setSecurityLevel3 or adaptSecurityLevel, or by using the command, sec Security operationalSecurityLevel Shows the curren t security level in the node. The operational security level may differ from the requested security level in some situations. The value of this attribute is set using the actions, setSecurityLevel3 or adaptSecurityLevel, or by using the co Security telnetAndFTPServersActive Specifies whethe r Telnet and FTP servers are activated. The value of this attribute is controlle d using the command, secmode. In Security Level 3, these servers are inactivated . Security debugPortsActive This attribute specifies whether the debug server and the UDP link handler are activated. If they are ac tivated, these services open the TCP and UDP ports. The state of this attribute is controlled using the command, secmode. In Security Level 3, these se Security fileTransferClientMode This attribute specifies whether the node uses FTP or SFTP when retrieving files from external file serv ers. The state of this attribute is controlled using the command, secmode, and c an be set on all security levels. Security authorizationCacheTimeOut 0 Timeout for auth orization data obtained from the AA server. All locally cached authorization dat a are cleared and then requested again from the AA server. Unit: 1 min Security localAuthenticationFileVersion Specifies the ve rsion of the file used for local user authentication. Security aAServerIPAddressList List of Authentication a nd Authorization Server IP addresses The list can contain up to 10 IP addresses. The IP address used by the node is selected randomly from the list. Security SecurityId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Security userLabel Label for free use. Security localAADatabaseInstallationFailure States w hether the action, installLocalAADatabase has failed to complete within the spec ified duration. This attribute must be set to false using the action, cancelInst allLocalAADatabase, before installLocalAADatabase can be executed again. The att ribute Security trustedCertificateInstallationFailure States w hether one or more of the following is true: - the action, installTrustedCertifi cate has failed to complete within the specified duration - a downloaded certifi cate is corrupted - a downloaded certificate does not match the information prov ided in Security installedTrustedCertificates A list containin g information about each installed trusted certificate. This attribute is update d when a new trusted certificate is installed or removed (uninstalled). Security targetMonitorPortActive Specifies whether the ta rget monitor is activated. If activated, it opens a TCP port for output of trace data. The value of this attribute is controlled using the command, secmode, and it can be set on all security levels. Security localAuthorizationFileVersion Specifies the ve rsion of the file used for local user authorization. Security corbaSecurityActive This attribute specifies

    whether Corba security is activated or not. The state of this attribute is cont rolled using the command, secmode. Corba security is disabled in Security Level 1 and enabled in Security Levels 2 and 3. Security certEnrollState Certification Enrollment State T his attribute shows the current state of the certificate enrollment. Security certEnrollErrorMsg Certification Enrollment Error Message If the enrollment enters the error state, this attribute contains a string that states the cause of the error. Otherwise, the value of this attri bute is not defined. Security nodeCertificate Shows information about the curr ently active node certificate to be inspected. Security certExpirWarnTime 0 Certification Expiry War ning Time This attribute specifies how far in advance an event is issued when th e node certificate is about to expire. Unit: 1 day Security installedTrustedCertificates.category Security installedTrustedCertificates.fingerprint A string in the following format: <hash-algorithm> [Fingerprint] = <bb1>:<bb2>: .. :<bbn> where:<hash-algorithm> is MD5, SHA-1 or SHA1, and the substring Finger print is optional. The equals sign is mandatory and is followed by 16 (MD5) or 2 0 (SHA-1 or SHA Security installedTrustedCertificates.issuer A string representation of the X.509 name of the authority that has issued the certifica te. Security installedTrustedCertificates.notValidAfter The time format is specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example : The valid format for UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is 19851106210627 Security installedTrustedCertificates.notValidBefore The time format is specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example : The valid format for UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is 19851106210627 Security installedTrustedCertificates.serialNumber A string representation of the certificate serial number (up to 40 digits long). Security installedTrustedCertificates.subject A string representation of the X.509 name denoting the entity for which the certificate was issued. Security nodeCertificate.fingerprint A string in the following format: <hash-algorithm> [Fingerprint] = <bb1>:<bb2>: .. :<bbn> where: <hash-algorithm> is MD5, SHA-1 or SHA1, and the substring Fingerprint is optiona l. The equals sign is mandatory and is followed by 16 (MD5) or 20 (SHA-1 or SHA Security nodeCertificate.issuer A string representation of the X.509 name of the authority that has issued the certificate. Security nodeCertificate.notValidAfter The time format is specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example: The valid form at for UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is 19851106 210627 Security nodeCertificate.notValidBefore The time format is specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example: The valid form at for UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is 19851106 210627 Security nodeCertificate.serialNumber A string represe ntation of the certificate serial number (up to 10 digits long). Security nodeCertificate.subject A string representation of the X.509 name denoting the entity for which the certificate was issued. Security requestedSecurityLevel Shows the security level requested. The requested security level may differ from the operational securit y level in some situations. The value of this attribute is set using the actions , setSecurityLevel3 or adaptSecurityLevel, or by using the command, sec Security operationalSecurityLevel Shows the curren t security level in the node. The operational security level may differ from the

    requested security level in some situations. The value of this attribute is set using the actions, setSecurityLevel3 or adaptSecurityLevel, or by using the co Security telnetAndFTPServersActive Specifies whethe r Telnet and FTP servers are activated. The value of this attribute is controlle d using the command, secmode. In Security Level 3, these servers are inactivated . Security debugPortsActive This attribute specifies whether the debug server and the UDP link handler are activated. If they are ac tivated, these services open the TCP and UDP ports. The state of this attribute is controlled using the command, secmode. In Security Level 3, these se Security fileTransferClientMode This attribute specifies whether the node uses FTP or SFTP when retrieving files from external file serv ers. The state of this attribute is controlled using the command, secmode, and c an be set on all security levels. Security authorizationCacheTimeOut 0 Timeout for auth orization data obtained from the AA server. All locally cached authorization dat a are cleared and then requested again from the AA server. Unit: 1 min Security localAuthenticationFileVersion Specifies the ve rsion of the file used for local user authentication. Security aAServerIPAddressList List of Authentication a nd Authorization Server IP addresses The list can contain up to 10 IP addresses. The IP address used by the node is selected randomly from the list. Security SecurityId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Security userLabel Label for free use. Security localAADatabaseInstallationFailure States w hether the action, installLocalAADatabase has failed to complete within the spec ified duration. This attribute must be set to false using the action, cancelInst allLocalAADatabase, before installLocalAADatabase can be executed again. The att ribute Security trustedCertificateInstallationFailure States w hether one or more of the following is true: - the action, installTrustedCertifi cate has failed to complete within the specified duration - a downloaded certifi cate is corrupted - a downloaded certificate does not match the information prov ided in Security installedTrustedCertificates A list containin g information about each installed trusted certificate. This attribute is update d when a new trusted certificate is installed or removed (uninstalled). Security targetMonitorPortActive Specifies whether the ta rget monitor is activated. If activated, it opens a TCP port for output of trace data. The value of this attribute is controlled using the command, secmode, and it can be set on all security levels. Security localAuthorizationFileVersion Specifies the ve rsion of the file used for local user authorization. Security corbaSecurityActive This attribute specifies whether Corba security is activated or not. The state of this attribute is cont rolled using the command, secmode. Corba security is disabled in Security Level 1 and enabled in Security Levels 2 and 3. Security certEnrollState Certification Enrollment State T his attribute shows the current state of the certificate enrollment. Security certEnrollErrorMsg Certification Enrollment Error Message If the enrollment enters the error state, this attribute contains a string that states the cause of the error. Otherwise, the value of this attri bute is not defined. Security nodeCertificate Shows information about the curr ently active node certificate to be inspected. Security certExpirWarnTime 0 Certification Expiry War ning Time This attribute specifies how far in advance an event is issued when th e node certificate is about to expire. Unit: 1 day Security installedTrustedCertificates.category

    Security installedTrustedCertificates.fingerprint A string in the following format: <hash-algorithm> [Fingerprint] = <bb1>:<bb2>: .. :<bbn> where:<hash-algorithm> is MD5, SHA-1 or SHA1, and the substring Finger print is optional. The equals sign is mandatory and is followed by 16 (MD5) or 2 0 (SHA-1 or SHA Security installedTrustedCertificates.issuer A string representation of the X.509 name of the authority that has issued the certifica te. Security installedTrustedCertificates.notValidAfter The time format is specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example : The valid format for UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is 19851106210627 Security installedTrustedCertificates.notValidBefore The time format is specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example : The valid format for UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is 19851106210627 Security installedTrustedCertificates.serialNumber A string representation of the certificate serial number (up to 40 digits long). Security installedTrustedCertificates.subject A string representation of the X.509 name denoting the entity for which the certificate was issued. Security nodeCertificate.fingerprint A string in the following format: <hash-algorithm> [Fingerprint] = <bb1>:<bb2>: .. :<bbn> where: <hash-algorithm> is MD5, SHA-1 or SHA1, and the substring Fingerprint is optiona l. The equals sign is mandatory and is followed by 16 (MD5) or 20 (SHA-1 or SHA Security nodeCertificate.issuer A string representation of the X.509 name of the authority that has issued the certificate. Security nodeCertificate.notValidAfter The time format is specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example: The valid form at for UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is 19851106 210627 Security nodeCertificate.notValidBefore The time format is specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example: The valid form at for UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is 19851106 210627 Security nodeCertificate.serialNumber A string represe ntation of the certificate serial number (up to 10 digits long). Security nodeCertificate.subject A string representation of the X.509 name denoting the entity for which the certificate was issued. Security requestedSecurityLevel Shows the security level requested. The requested security level may differ from the operational securit y level in some situations. The value of this attribute is set using the actions , setSecurityLevel3 or adaptSecurityLevel, or by using the command, sec Security operationalSecurityLevel Shows the curren t security level in the node. The operational security level may differ from the requested security level in some situations. The value of this attribute is set using the actions, setSecurityLevel3 or adaptSecurityLevel, or by using the co Security telnetAndFTPServersActive Specifies whethe r Telnet and FTP servers are activated. The value of this attribute is controlle d using the command, secmode. In Security Level 3, these servers are inactivated . Security debugPortsActive This attribute specifies whether the debug server and the UDP link handler are activated. If they are ac tivated, these services open the TCP and UDP ports. The state of this attribute is controlled using the command, secmode. In Security Level 3, these se Security fileTransferClientMode This attribute specifies whether the node uses FTP or SFTP when retrieving files from external file serv ers. The state of this attribute is controlled using the command, secmode, and c an be set on all security levels. Security authorizationCacheTimeOut 0 Timeout for auth

    orization data obtained from the AA server. All locally cached authorization dat a are cleared and then requested again from the AA server. Unit: 1 min Security localAuthenticationFileVersion Specifies the ve rsion of the file used for local user authentication. Security aAServerIPAddressList List of Authentication a nd Authorization Server IP addresses The list can contain up to 10 IP addresses. The IP address used by the node is selected randomly from the list. Security SecurityId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Security userLabel Label for free use. Security localAADatabaseInstallationFailure States w hether the action, installLocalAADatabase has failed to complete within the spec ified duration. This attribute must be set to false using the action, cancelInst allLocalAADatabase, before installLocalAADatabase can be executed again. The att ribute Security trustedCertificateInstallationFailure States w hether one or more of the following is true: - the action, installTrustedCertifi cate has failed to complete within the specified duration - a downloaded certifi cate is corrupted - a downloaded certificate does not match the information prov ided in Security installedTrustedCertificates A list containin g information about each installed trusted certificate. This attribute is update d when a new trusted certificate is installed or removed (uninstalled). Security targetMonitorPortActive Specifies whether the ta rget monitor is activated. If activated, it opens a TCP port for output of trace data. The value of this attribute is controlled using the command, secmode, and it can be set on all security levels. Security localAuthorizationFileVersion Specifies the ve rsion of the file used for local user authorization. Security corbaSecurityActive This attribute specifies whether Corba security is activated or not. The state of this attribute is cont rolled using the command, secmode. Corba security is disabled in Security Level 1 and enabled in Security Levels 2 and 3. Security certEnrollState Certification Enrollment State T his attribute shows the current state of the certificate enrollment. Security certEnrollErrorMsg Certification Enrollment Error Message If the enrollment enters the error state, this attribute contains a string that states the cause of the error. Otherwise, the value of this attri bute is not defined. Security nodeCertificate Shows information about the curr ently active node certificate to be inspected. Security certExpirWarnTime 0 Certification Expiry War ning Time This attribute specifies how far in advance an event is issued when th e node certificate is about to expire. Unit: 1 day Security installedTrustedCertificates.category Security installedTrustedCertificates.fingerprint A string in the following format: <hash-algorithm> [Fingerprint] = <bb1>:<bb2>: .. :<bbn> where:<hash-algorithm> is MD5, SHA-1 or SHA1, and the substring Finger print is optional. The equals sign is mandatory and is followed by 16 (MD5) or 2 0 (SHA-1 or SHA Security installedTrustedCertificates.issuer A string representation of the X.509 name of the authority that has issued the certifica te. Security installedTrustedCertificates.notValidAfter The time format is specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example : The valid format for UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is 19851106210627 Security installedTrustedCertificates.notValidBefore The time format is specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example : The valid format for UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November

    1985 is 19851106210627 Security installedTrustedCertificates.serialNumber A string representation of the certificate serial number (up to 40 digits long). Security installedTrustedCertificates.subject A string representation of the X.509 name denoting the entity for which the certificate was issued. Security nodeCertificate.fingerprint A string in the following format: <hash-algorithm> [Fingerprint] = <bb1>:<bb2>: .. :<bbn> where: <hash-algorithm> is MD5, SHA-1 or SHA1, and the substring Fingerprint is optiona l. The equals sign is mandatory and is followed by 16 (MD5) or 20 (SHA-1 or SHA Security nodeCertificate.issuer A string representation of the X.509 name of the authority that has issued the certificate. Security nodeCertificate.notValidAfter The time format is specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example: The valid form at for UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is 19851106 210627 Security nodeCertificate.notValidBefore The time format is specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example: The valid form at for UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is 19851106 210627 Security nodeCertificate.serialNumber A string represe ntation of the certificate serial number (up to 10 digits long). Security nodeCertificate.subject A string representation of the X.509 name denoting the entity for which the certificate was issued. SecurityHandling SecurityHandlingId Naming attribute .Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. SecurityHandling ciphering 1 Indicates whether cipher ing is used or not. Setting this attribute to 1 (ciphering On) means that cipher ing is preferred. If the core network does not allow ciphering or the UE does no t support ciphering, ciphering will not be used. The value of this at SecurityHandling cipheringGuardTime 80 Guard time for s tart of ciphering in RLC-TM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson pers onnel.Unit: frames Segment SegmentId Segment userLabel Provides support for a user defined labe l or name upon an object instance level. Segment ipAddress The IP address where the Segment can be reached from a management point of view. Segment rnsRefs A list of DNs of the SubNetwork MOs for all RNSs associated to the Segment. The DNs consist of the full Distinguished Names acco rding to [9] and [20]. Segment connectionStatus 0 Status of the instance. NeverCon nected is set at instance creation, after that the value is controlled by FMS. C onnected is set to indicate that the Segment is connected. If connection with th e Segment is lost, Disconnected is set. NEVER_CONNECTED = ServiceArea ServiceAreaId ServiceArea userLabel Location Area nameRef. ServiceArea sac Service area code ServiceArea ServiceAreaId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system. ServiceArea userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. ServiceArea sac Service Area Code of the service area th at a cell belongs to.A ServiceAreais used by UTRAN to indicate the location of a UE to the CN. It is also used by the CN to indicate to UTRAN in which area to b roadcast CN information.It is unique in the LA.An LA ca ServiceArea reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to this MO.See reference in UtranCell. Shelf ShelfId The value component of the RDN.

    Shelf reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserves th is MO instance. Shelf userLabel Label for free use. Shelf boardOrientation 0 Specifies the orientation of the hardware units in the shelf. Shelf content Specifies the content of the shelf. Shelf noOfPositions 0 Specifies the number of physical positio ns in the shelf. Shelf position Specifies the physical position of the s helf within the cabinet. The position is given as a combination of vertical posi tion, given in letters, and horizontal position, given in digits. Vertical posit ioning starts from the ground and horizontal positionin Shelf positionRef Reference to the cabinet, in which the s helf is placed. Shelf ShelfId The value component of the RDN. Shelf reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserves th is MO instance. Shelf userLabel Label for free use. Shelf boardOrientation 0 Specifies the orientation of the hardware units in the shelf. Shelf content Specifies the content of the shelf. Shelf noOfPositions 0 Specifies the number of physical positio ns in the shelf. Shelf position Specifies the physical position of the s helf within the cabinet. The position is given as a combination of vertical posi tion, given in letters, and horizontal position, given in digits. Vertical posit ioning starts from the ground and horizontal positionin Shelf positionRef Reference to the cabinet, in which the s helf is placed. Shelf ShelfId The value component of the RDN. Shelf reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserves th is MO instance. Shelf userLabel Label for free use. Shelf boardOrientation 0 Specifies the orientation of the hardware units in the shelf. Shelf content Specifies the content of the shelf. Shelf noOfPositions 0 Specifies the number of physical positio ns in the shelf. Shelf position Specifies the physical position of the s helf within the cabinet. The position is given as a combination of vertical posi tion, given in letters, and horizontal position, given in digits. Vertical posit ioning starts from the ground and horizontal positionin Shelf positionRef Reference to the cabinet, in which the s helf is placed. Sid SidId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. Sid updateCellReattsNo 5 Number of update reattempts when an update of system information parameters in a cell failed. Change takes effec t: Immediately Sid sib1 Structure contains the Sib1 parameters. Sid sib3 Structure contains the Sib3 parameters. Sid sib5 Structure contains the Sib5 parameters. Sid sib7 Structure contains the Sib7 parameters. Sid sib11 Structure contains the Sib11 parameters. Sid sib12 Structure contains the Sib12 parameters. Sid sib7ExpirationTimeFactor 1 SIB7 use expiration time as re-read mechanism. The expiration time is sib7RepPeriod times sib7Expiration TimeFactor. Change takes effect: Immediately Sid noOfMaxDrxCycles 1 Paging notification duration. To notify UEs in IDLE mode about a system information update, the RNC sends a pagi

    ng message on the PCH at every page occasion of a number of maximum DRX cycles. Change takes effect: Immediately Sid noOfMibValueTagRetrans 0 Number of MIB value tag retransm issions on the FACH. Change takes effect: Immediately Sid cnInformation 2 System Information should be distributed about these CNs.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: PS only1: CS only2: PS and CS Sid sib2 Structure containing the Sib2 parameters. Sid schedulingBlockEnabled Controls whether the Scheduling Block (SB1) is being broadcasted or not.Value mapping: TRUE: the Scheduling Bloc k is sent on the broadcast channel and SIB scheduling information is divided bet ween the MIB and SB1.FALSE: the Scheduling Block is not sent on Sid sb1 Contains the configuration for the Scheduling Bl ock (SB1). Sid sib18 Structure containing the Sib18 parameters. Sid sb1.sb1RepPeriod 128 Repetition period (SIB_REP) for the Scheduling Block As it must be possible to schedule and broadcast all suppor ted SIBs/SBs within their own Repetition Period, it may not be possible to use a ll the valid values within this range. For example, to increase Sid sb1.sb1StartPos 126 Start position (SIB_POS) for the Schedul ing Block.Dependencies: Only even values in the range 0 to (sb1RepPeriod - 2) ar e valid, with the exception of the following values: 0, 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, ..., 4088. Change takes effect: Immediately Unit: SFN Resolu Sid sib11.sib11RepPeriod 128 Repetition period (SIB_REP) for System Information Block (SIB) type 11.As it must be possible to schedule and br oadcast all supported SIBs within their own Repetition Period, it may not be pos sible to use all the valid values within this range. For exampl Sid sib11.sib11StartPos 20 Start Position (SIB_POS) for Sys tem Information Block (SIB) type 11.The default value is optimized for a situati on where the maximum number of Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cells (31) exist, and one Inter-Frequency and one Inter-RAT Neighboring Cell exists. Sid sib12.sib12RepPeriod 32 Repetition period (SIB_REP) for System Information Block (SIB) type 12.As it must be possible to schedule and br oadcast all supported SIBs within their own Repetition Period, it may not be pos sible to use all the valid values within this range. For exampl Sid sib12.sib12StartPos 14 Start Position (SIB_POS) for Sys tem Information Block (SIB) type 12.The default value is optimized for a situati on where the maximum number of Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cells (31) exist, and one Inter-Frequency and one Inter-RAT Neighboring Cell exists. Sid sib18.sib18RepPeriod 128 Repetition period (SIB_REP) for System Information Block (SIB) type 18.As it must be possible to schedule and br oadcast all supported SIBs within their own Repetition Period, it may not be pos sible to use all the valid values within this range. For exampl Sid sib18.sib18StartPos 122 Start position (SIB_POS) for Sys tem Information Block (SIB) type 18.Dependencies: Only even values in the range 0 to (sib18RepPeriod - 2) are valid, with the exception of the following values: 0, 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, ..., 4088.Change takes effect: Immediate Sid sib1.sib1RepPeriod 32 Repetition period (SIB_REP) for System Information Block (SIB) type 1.As it must be possible to schedule and bro adcast all supported SIBs within their own Repetition Period, it may not be poss ible to use all the valid values within this range. For example Sid sib1.sib1StartPos 4 Start Position (SIB_POS) for Sys tem Information Block (SIB) type 1.The default value is optimized for a situatio n where the maximum number of Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cells (31) exist, and one Inter-Frequency and one Inter-RAT Neighboring Cell exists. Sid sib2.sib2RepPeriod 128 Repetition period (SIB_REP) for a System Information Block (SIB) type 2. As it must be possible to schedule and broadcast all supported SIBs within their own Repetition Period, it may not be p ossible to use all the valid values within this range. For exam Sid sib2.sib2StartPos 118 Start Position (SIB_POS) for a S

    ystem Information Block (SIB) type 2.The default value is optimized for a situat ion where the maximum number of Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cells (31) exist, an d one Inter-Frequency and one Inter-RAT Neighboring Cell exists Sid sib3.sib3RepPeriod 16 Repetition period (SIB_REP) for System Information Block (SIB) type 3.As it must be possible to schedule and bro adcast all supported SIBs within their own Repetition Period, it may not be poss ible to use all the valid values within this range. For example Sid sib3.sib3StartPos 2 Start Position (SIB_POS) for Sys tem Information Block (SIB) type 3.The default value is optimized for a situatio n where the maximum number of Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cells (31) exist, and one Inter-Frequency and one Inter-RAT Neighboring Cell exists. Sid sib5.sib5RepPeriod 32 Repetition period (SIB_REP) for System Information Block (SIB) type 5.As it must be possible to schedule and bro adcast all supported SIBs within their own Repetition Period, it may not be poss ible to use all the valid values within this range. For example Sid sib5.sib5StartPos 6 Start Position (SIB_POS) for Sys tem Information Block (SIB) type 5.The default value is optimized for a situatio n where the maximum number of Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cells (31) exist, and one Inter-Frequency and one Inter-RAT Neighboring Cell exists. Sid sib7.sib7RepPeriod 16 Repetition period (SIB_REP) for System Information Block (SIB) type 7.As it must be possible to schedule and bro adcast all supported SIBs within their own Repetition Period, it may not be poss ible to use all the valid values within this range. For example Sid sib7.sib7StartPos 2 Start Position (SIB_POS) for Sys tem Information Block (SIB) type 7.The default value is optimized for a situatio n where the maximum number of Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cells (31) exist, and one Inter-Frequency and one Inter-RAT Neighboring Cell exists. Site SiteId Site userLabel Provides support for putting a label on the MO instance. Site location The postal address to a geographical loc ation Site latitude 0 The value must be given in seconds and c omposed by the formula3600*D + 60*M + S (D: degrees, M: minutes, S: seconds). Po sitive degree values (0 o - 90 o ) correspond to northlatitude values whereas ne gative degree values (-0 o - -90 o ) correspond to sout Site longitude 0 The value must be given in seconds and c omposed by the formula3600*D + 60*M + S (D: degrees, M: minutes, S: seconds). Po sitive degree values (0 o - 180 o ) correspond to east longitude values.Negative degree values (-0 o - -180 o ) correspond to west long Site altitude 0 Positive values represents meter above t he ground whereas negative represents meters below the ground. The precision is 0.1 m Site timeZone 0 The timeZone the site exists in Site freeText Operators choice of information Site listOfNe List of ManagedElement MO instances that belong this Site.FDN according [9] and [20] Site datum 0 This gives the geographical information a contex t. Slot SlotId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. Slot userLabel Label for free use. Slot slotState Indicates the state of the slot. Slot slotNumber The number of the slot position from the left hand side, starting with 1. Slot reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Slot productData Describes the plug-in-unit that is curre ntly inserted. The information is only available when slotState = USED. If the b oard inserted in the slot stops working or is pulled out of the slot, the produc

    tData attribute will not change its value. The value of Slot upgradeGroupId 0 This attribute can to group a number of PIUs, all in the group can be upgraded at the same time. If upgradeGroupTypeName is , this attribute is not used. Slot upgradeGroupTypeName The upgradeGroupTypeName, togeth er with the upgradeGroupId, defines an upgrade group. Slot activeSwAllocation The SwAllocation instance, among the predefined instances, which is active. The SwAllocation instance which is a ctive is the one currently used by the PlugInUnit, configured in this Slot. If n o PlugInUnit is configured or if no matching SwAllocation, cont Slot productData.productName A user-friendly name of the prod uct. Slot productData.productNumber Unique identity for each product, which is constituted by the Ericsson product number (ABC number). The maximum number of characters for a product number is 24 including 2 slashes, 2 s paces and 2 characters for origination notation. Example of product num Slot productData.productRevision Indicates the revision s tate of the product. It consists of a letter R or P, one or two digits and/or on e or two letters. The maximum number of characters is four inclusive R or P. Exa mple: R1A, R1A02, P7B A suffix may be added to the revision state. The Slot productData.productionDate The production date can be represented in two ways. 1) The preferable syntax is a four-digit representat ion of the year, and a two-digit representation of the month and a two-digit rep resentation of the day. The numbers of characters in this case, is eigh Slot productData.serialNumber The serial number consis ts of 13 alphanumerical characters grouped as 6 plus 7 characters. The first 6 c haracters are to be used for factory codes and the last 7 characters are used fo r an individual number or batch number. Slot SlotId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. Slot userLabel Label for free use. Slot slotState Indicates the state of the slot. Slot slotNumber The number of the slot position from the left hand side, starting with 1. Slot reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Slot productData Describes the plug-in-unit that is curre ntly inserted. The information is only available when slotState = USED. If the b oard inserted in the slot stops working or is pulled out of the slot, the produc tData attribute will not change its value. The value of Slot upgradeGroupId 0 This attribute can to group a number of PIUs, all in the group can be upgraded at the same time. If upgradeGroupTypeName is , this attribute is not used. Slot upgradeGroupTypeName The upgradeGroupTypeName, togeth er with the upgradeGroupId, defines an upgrade group. Slot activeSwAllocation The SwAllocation instance, among the predefined instances, which is active. The SwAllocation instance which is a ctive is the one currently used by the PlugInUnit, configured in this Slot. If n o PlugInUnit is configured or if no matching SwAllocation, cont Slot productData.productName A user-friendly name of the prod uct. Slot productData.productNumber Unique identity for each product, which is constituted by the Ericsson product number (ABC number). The maximum number of characters for a product number is 24 including 2 slashes, 2 s paces and 2 characters for origination notation. Example of product num Slot productData.productRevision Indicates the revision s tate of the product. It consists of a letter R or P, one or two digits and/or on e or two letters. The maximum number of characters is four inclusive R or P. Exa mple: R1A, R1A02, P7B A suffix may be added to the revision state. The Slot productData.productionDate The production date can

    be represented in two ways. 1) The preferable syntax is a four-digit representat ion of the year, and a two-digit representation of the month and a two-digit rep resentation of the day. The numbers of characters in this case, is eigh Slot productData.serialNumber The serial number consis ts of 13 alphanumerical characters grouped as 6 plus 7 characters. The first 6 c haracters are to be used for factory codes and the last 7 characters are used fo r an individual number or batch number. Slot SlotId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. Slot slotState Indicates the state of the slot. Slot slotNumber The number of the slot position from the left hand side, starting with 1. Slot reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Slot productData Describes the plug-in-unit that is curre ntly inserted. The information is only available when slotState = USED. If the b oard inserted in the slot stops working or is pulled out of the slot, the produc tData attribute will not change its value. The value of Slot upgradeGroupId 0 This attribute can to group a number of PIUs, all in the group can be upgraded at the same time. If upgradeGroupTypeName is , this attribute is not used. Slot upgradeGroupTypeName The upgradeGroupTypeName, togeth er with the upgradeGroupId, defines an upgrade group. Slot activeSwAllocation The SwAllocation instance, among the predefined instances, which is active. The SwAllocation instance which is a ctive is the one currently used by the PlugInUnit, configured in this Slot. If n o PlugInUnit is configured or if no matching SwAllocation, cont Slot productData.productName A user-friendly name of the prod uct. Slot productData.productNumber Unique identity for each product, which is constituted by the Ericsson product number (ABC number). The maximum number of characters for a product number is 24 including 2 slashes, 2 s paces and 2 characters for origination notation. Example of product num Slot productData.productRevision Indicates the revision s tate of the product. It consists of a letter R or P, one or two digits and/or on e or two letters. The maximum number of characters is four inclusive R or P. Exa mple: R1A, R1A02, P7B A suffix may be added to the revision state. The Slot productData.productionDate The production date can be represented in two ways. 1) The preferable syntax is a four-digit representat ion of the year, and a two-digit representation of the month and a two-digit rep resentation of the day. The numbers of characters in this case, is eigh Slot productData.serialNumber The serial number consis ts of 13 alphanumerical characters grouped as 6 plus 7 characters. The first 6 c haracters are to be used for factory codes and the last 7 characters are used fo r an individual number or batch number. SpDevicePool SpDevicePoolId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system. SpDevicePool noOfLockedDevices Number of locked Devices of a certain type (Cc, Dc or Pdr) in the corresponding instance of SpDevicePool SpDevicePool noOfUnlockedDevices Number of unlocked Devic es of a certain type (Cc, Dc or Pdr) in the corresponding instance of SpDevicePo ol SpDevicePool noOfEnabledDevices Number of enable Devices of a certain type (Cc, Dc or Pdr) in the corresponding instance of SpDevicePool SpDevicePool noOfDisabledDevices Number of disable Device s of a certain type (Cc, Dc or Pdr) in the corresponding instance of SpDevicePoo l SpDevicePool noOfIdleDevices Number of idle Devices of a cert ain type (Cc, Dc or Pdr) in the corresponding instance of SpDevicePool SpDevicePool noOfBusyDevices Number of busy Devices of a cert

    ain type (Cc, Dc or Pdr) in the corresponding instance of SpDevicePool SpDevicePool noOfActiveDevices Number of active Devices of a certain type (Cc, Dc or Pdr) in the corresponding instance of SpDevicePool SpDevicePool totalNoOfDevices Total number of Devices of a certain type (Cc, Dc or Pdr) in the corresponding instance of SpDevicePool SpiQosClass SpiQosClassId Naming attribute. Contains the v alue part of the RDN. SpiQosClass spiQosClassInsId Internal identifier of t his instance. SpiQosClass flowControl Specifies if Flow Control is act ivated for this SPI value.Change takes effect: New connections SpiQosClass userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. SpiQosClass reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to this MO. Spm SpmId The value component of the RDN. Spm userLabel Label for free use. Spm operationalState The operational state. Spm availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Spm switchModuleNumber 0 The switch module number. Spm asciPortNumber 0 Specifies the ATM Switch Core Interface (ASCI) port number. Spm executionResourceNumber 0 The identity of the SPM on the S pecial purpose Processor Unit (SPU). Spm runningResourceIdList Contains the list of identities of running Spm MOs. Spm installedResourceIdList Contains the list of identities of installed Spm MOs in the system. Spm spLinkName The unique name of the link between the SP and BP. Spm reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Spm SpmId The value component of the RDN. Spm userLabel Label for free use. Spm operationalState The operational state. Spm availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Spm switchModuleNumber 0 The switch module number. Spm asciPortNumber 0 Specifies the ATM Switch Core Interface (ASCI) port number. Spm executionResourceNumber 0 The identity of the SPM on the S pecial purpose Processor Unit (SPU). Spm runningResourceIdList Contains the list of identities of running Spm MOs. Spm installedResourceIdList Contains the list of identities of installed Spm MOs in the system. Spm spLinkName The unique name of the link between the SP and BP. Spm reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Spu SpuId The value component of the RDN. Spu userLabel Label for free use. Spu operationalState The operational state. Spu availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Spu spLinkName The special purpose processor link name. Spu SpuId The value component of the RDN. Spu userLabel Label for free use.

    Spu operationalState The operational state. Spu availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Spu spLinkName The special purpose processor link name. Ssch availabilityStatus The availability status of the c ommon channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP] Ssch operationalState Defines the operational state. P ossible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Requirement: CELL_RBS_FU:9 Ref. [CB_MOP] Ssch SschId StrxDeviceGroup StrxDeviceGroupId StrxDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_904Specificati StrxDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Hardware uni ts not supporting hardware test will always return the default value UNDETERMINE D. Use cases: HWT_UC1 Requirement: Test_UTRAN_FU3 Ref. [FS_HWT] StrxDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_904Specification: IT U-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] StrxDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC904 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] Sts1SpeTtp Sts1SpeTtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Sts1SpeTtp userLabel Label for free use. Sts1SpeTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Sts1SpeTtp operationalState The operational state. Sts1SpeTtp aisPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Ala rm Indication Signal - P (AIS-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. fal se - reporting disabled. Sts1SpeTtp rdiPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Rem ote Defect Indication - P (RDI-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. fa lse - reporting disabled. Sts1SpeTtp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatc h (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AI S) downstream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of th e TIM detection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Sts1SpeTtp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL ch aracters. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR an Sts1SpeTtp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path tra ce. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string ( ). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL characters. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR Sts1SpeTtp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erve this MO instance. Sts1SpeTtp Sts1SpeTtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Sts1SpeTtp userLabel Label for free use. Sts1SpeTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Sts1SpeTtp operationalState The operational state. Sts1SpeTtp aisPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Ala rm Indication Signal - P (AIS-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. fal

    se - reporting disabled. Sts1SpeTtp rdiPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Rem ote Defect Indication - P (RDI-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. fa lse - reporting disabled. Sts1SpeTtp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatc h (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AI S) downstream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of th e TIM detection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Sts1SpeTtp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL ch aracters. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR an Sts1SpeTtp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path tra ce. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string ( ). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL characters. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR Sts1SpeTtp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erve this MO instance. Sts1SpeTtp Sts1SpeTtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Sts1SpeTtp userLabel Label for free use. Sts1SpeTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Sts1SpeTtp operationalState The operational state. Sts1SpeTtp aisPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Ala rm Indication Signal - P (AIS-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. fal se - reporting disabled. Sts1SpeTtp rdiPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Rem ote Defect Indication - P (RDI-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. fa lse - reporting disabled. Sts1SpeTtp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatc h (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AI S) downstream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of th e TIM detection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Sts1SpeTtp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL ch aracters. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR an Sts1SpeTtp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path tra ce. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string ( ). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL characters. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR Sts1SpeTtp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erve this MO instance. Sts3CspeTtp Sts3CspeTtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Sts3CspeTtp userLabel Label for free use. Sts3CspeTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Sts3CspeTtp operationalState The operational state. Sts3CspeTtp aisPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Ala rm Indication Signal - P (AIS-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. fal se - reporting disabled. Sts3CspeTtp rdiPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Rem ote Defect Indication - P (RDI-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. fa lse - reporting disabled. Sts3CspeTtp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatc h (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AI S) downstream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of th e TIM detection. true - enabled. false - disabled.

    Sts3CspeTtp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL ch aracters. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR an Sts3CspeTtp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path tra ce. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string ( ). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL characters. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR Sts3CspeTtp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erve this MO instance. Identity of the AtmPort reserving this MO. Sts3CspeTtp Sts3CspeTtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Sts3CspeTtp userLabel Label for free use. Sts3CspeTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Sts3CspeTtp operationalState The operational state. Sts3CspeTtp aisPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Ala rm Indication Signal - P (AIS-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. fal se - reporting disabled. Sts3CspeTtp rdiPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Rem ote Defect Indication - P (RDI-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. fa lse - reporting disabled. Sts3CspeTtp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatc h (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AI S) downstream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of th e TIM detection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Sts3CspeTtp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL ch aracters. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR an Sts3CspeTtp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path tra ce. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string ( ). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL characters. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR Sts3CspeTtp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erve this MO instance. Identity of the AtmPort reserving this MO. Sts3CspeTtp Sts3CspeTtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Sts3CspeTtp userLabel Label for free use. Sts3CspeTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. Sts3CspeTtp operationalState The operational state. Sts3CspeTtp aisPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Ala rm Indication Signal - P (AIS-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. fal se - reporting disabled. Sts3CspeTtp rdiPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Rem ote Defect Indication - P (RDI-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. fa lse - reporting disabled. Sts3CspeTtp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatc h (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AI S) downstream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of th e TIM detection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Sts3CspeTtp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL ch aracters. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR an Sts3CspeTtp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path tra ce. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string ( ). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL characters. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR

    Sts3CspeTtp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erve this MO instance. Identity of the AtmPort reserving this MO. Subflow SubflowId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Subflow subflowNumber Identifies which subflow this MO instanc e relates to.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Subflow sduDelivery Indicates if erroneous SDUs shall be del ivered or not. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value ma pping: 0: Erroneous SDUs are delivered 1: Erroneous SDUs are not delivered 2: No check if SDUs are erroneous Subflow sduErrRatioMan Mantissa part of SDU Error Ratio. This a ttribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Subflow sduErrRatioExp Exponent part of SDU Error Ratio. This a ttribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Subflow resBitErrRatioMan Mantissa part of Residual Bit Er ror Ratio. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Subflow resBitErrRatioExp Exponent part of Residual Bit Er ror Ratio. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. SubNetwork SubNetworkId Relative Distinguished Name. SubNetwork dnPrefix DN Prefix information. Specified only if the instance of the SubNetwork MO is a local root instance of the MIB, otherwise it is set to NULL, SubNetwork userLabel Provides support for putting a l abel on the MO instance. Can be set by EQH in Sub-network and RNS level. Can be set by RAH in RNS level. , RAH SubNetwork userDefinedNetworkType 0 Type of network e.g. UTR ANFor RNS = NULL SubNetwork rncRef Reference to the MeContext that represen t the associated RNC. The attribute consists of the FDN of the MeContext accordi ng to [9] and [20]. Used only in RNS. For sub-network = NULL. Subrack SubrackId The value component of the RDN. Subrack userLabel Label for free use. Subrack switchModule Reference to a SwitchModule MO, where th e switch module number is retrieved. This number describes how the subrack is co nnected to the node, that is, how the subrack's cables are connected to the hub subrack. The hub subrack has switch module number 0. Th Subrack subrackType There can only be one hub subrack in the node. The hub subrack is used to control switching and synchronization for the complete node. Subrack productType This attribute describes the product typ e and is always set to the value HW. Subrack subrackPosition Specifies the subrack position within a cabinet. The purpose of this attribute is to help in troubleshooting as its valu e is included in the alarm information. The subrack position is also included in the product inventory. The subrack position consists o Subrack cabinetPosition Specifies the position of the cabinet, w ithin a group of other cabinets, in which this subrack is placed. The purpose of this attribute is to help in troubleshooting as its value is included in the al arm information. Subrack numberOfSlots 0 Specifies the actual number of slots con figured on the node. This attribute is set to the value of defNumberOfSlots in M O SubrackProdType at create of the subrack. Subrack operationalProductData The operational product data des cribes the backplane of the subrack that is actually installed. Subrack reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Subrack subrackProdTypeRef Reference to an instance of Subr ackProdType MO. This attribute must be specified if administrativeProductData is not used. If it is not specified, detection of a SubrackProdType MO with the ex act matching product data is done, and if successful, attribute

    Subrack subrackNumber 0 The number of the subrack. If switchModu le is set, any setting of this attribute will be ignored. It will instead displa y the value already set in the attribute switchModuleNumber, in the referred Swi tchModule MO. Subrack powerMeasurements Indicates the power measurements of the subrack. Subrack maxPowerDissipation Indicates the maximum power diss ipation of the subrack. Unit: 1 W Subrack numberOfDenibDevices 0 Specifies the total number of fa ns in the Denib-chain connected to the subrack.This attribute is set to -1 by de fault, indicating that no Denib devices are used, and the attribute fanConfigura tion then specifies the fan configuration for the subrack. If f Subrack operationalProductData.productName A user-friendly name of the product. Subrack operationalProductData.productNumber Unique identity for each product, which is constituted by the Ericsson product number (ABC numbe r). The maximum number of characters for a product number is 24 including 2 slas hes, 2 spaces and 2 characters for origination notation. Example of product num Subrack operationalProductData.productRevision Indicates the re vision state of the product. It consists of a letter R or P, one or two digits a nd/or one or two letters. The maximum number of characters is four inclusive R o r P. Example: R1A, R1A02, P7B A suffix may be added to the revision state. The Subrack operationalProductData.productionDate The production d ate can be represented in two ways. 1) The preferable syntax is a four-digit rep resentation of the year, and a two-digit representation of the month and a two-d igit representation of the day. The numbers of characters in this case, is eigh Subrack operationalProductData.serialNumber The serial numbe r consists of 13 alphanumerical characters grouped as 6 plus 7 characters. The f irst 6 characters are to be used for factory codes and the last 7 characters are used for an individual number or batch number. Subrack powerMeasurements.currentLeft Specifies the value of t he current, supplied from the leftmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 means t hat no current measurement is available. Unit: 1 mA (milliampere) Subrack powerMeasurements.currentRight Specifies the value of t he current, supplied from the rightmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 means that no current measurement is available. Unit: 1 mA (milliampere) Subrack powerMeasurements.distributedPower Specifies the to tal distribution of power in the subrack. This attribute is applicable only if a ll other measurements in this struct are available. Unit: 1 W Subrack powerMeasurements.voltageLeft Specifies the value of t he voltage, distributed from the leftmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 mean s that no voltage measurement is available. Unit: 1 mV (millivolt) Subrack powerMeasurements.voltageRight Specifies the value of t he voltage, distributed from the rightmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 mea ns that no voltage measurement is available. Unit: 1 mV (millivolt) Subrack SubrackId The value component of the RDN. Subrack userLabel Label for free use. Subrack switchModule Reference to a SwitchModule MO, where th e switch module number is retrieved. This number describes how the subrack is co nnected to the node, that is, how the subrack's cables are connected to the hub subrack. The hub subrack has switch module number 0. Th Subrack subrackType There can only be one hub subrack in the node. The hub subrack is used to control switching and synchronization for the complete node. Subrack productType This attribute describes the product typ e and is always set to the value HW. Subrack subrackPosition Specifies the subrack position within a cabinet. The purpose of this attribute is to help in troubleshooting as its valu e is included in the alarm information. The subrack position is also included in the product inventory. The subrack position consists o

    Subrack cabinetPosition Specifies the position of the cabinet, w ithin a group of other cabinets, in which this subrack is placed. The purpose of this attribute is to help in troubleshooting as its value is included in the al arm information. Subrack numberOfSlots 0 Specifies the actual number of slots con figured on the node. This attribute is set to the value of defNumberOfSlots in M O SubrackProdType at create of the subrack. Subrack operationalProductData The operational product data des cribes the backplane of the subrack that is actually installed. Subrack reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Subrack subrackProdTypeRef Reference to an instance of Subr ackProdType MO. This attribute must be specified if administrativeProductData is not used. If it is not specified, detection of a SubrackProdType MO with the ex act matching product data is done, and if successful, attribute Subrack subrackNumber 0 The number of the subrack. If switchModu le is set, any setting of this attribute will be ignored. It will instead displa y the value already set in the attribute switchModuleNumber, in the referred Swi tchModule MO. Subrack powerMeasurements Indicates the power measurements of the subrack. Subrack maxPowerDissipation Indicates the maximum power diss ipation of the subrack. Unit: 1 W Subrack numberOfDenibDevices 0 Specifies the total number of fa ns in the Denib-chain connected to the subrack.This attribute is set to -1 by de fault, indicating that no Denib devices are used, and the attribute fanConfigura tion then specifies the fan configuration for the subrack. If f Subrack operationalProductData.productName A user-friendly name of the product. Subrack operationalProductData.productNumber Unique identity for each product, which is constituted by the Ericsson product number (ABC numbe r). The maximum number of characters for a product number is 24 including 2 slas hes, 2 spaces and 2 characters for origination notation. Example of product num Subrack operationalProductData.productRevision Indicates the re vision state of the product. It consists of a letter R or P, one or two digits a nd/or one or two letters. The maximum number of characters is four inclusive R o r P. Example: R1A, R1A02, P7B A suffix may be added to the revision state. The Subrack operationalProductData.productionDate The production d ate can be represented in two ways. 1) The preferable syntax is a four-digit rep resentation of the year, and a two-digit representation of the month and a two-d igit representation of the day. The numbers of characters in this case, is eigh Subrack operationalProductData.serialNumber The serial numbe r consists of 13 alphanumerical characters grouped as 6 plus 7 characters. The f irst 6 characters are to be used for factory codes and the last 7 characters are used for an individual number or batch number. Subrack powerMeasurements.currentLeft Specifies the value of t he current, supplied from the leftmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 means t hat no current measurement is available. Unit: 1 mA (milliampere) Subrack powerMeasurements.currentRight Specifies the value of t he current, supplied from the rightmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 means that no current measurement is available. Unit: 1 mA (milliampere) Subrack powerMeasurements.distributedPower Specifies the to tal distribution of power in the subrack. This attribute is applicable only if a ll other measurements in this struct are available. Unit: 1 W Subrack powerMeasurements.voltageLeft Specifies the value of t he voltage, distributed from the leftmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 mean s that no voltage measurement is available. Unit: 1 mV (millivolt) Subrack powerMeasurements.voltageRight Specifies the value of t he voltage, distributed from the rightmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 mea ns that no voltage measurement is available. Unit: 1 mV (millivolt)

    Subrack SubrackId The value component of the RDN. Subrack userLabel Label for free use. Subrack switchModule Reference to a SwitchModule MO, where th e switch module number is retrieved. This number describes how the subrack is co nnected to the node, that is, how the subrack's cables are connected to the hub subrack. The hub subrack has switch module number 0. Th Subrack subrackType There can only be one hub subrack in the node. The hub subrack is used to control switching and synchronization for the complete node. Subrack productType This attribute describes the product typ e and is always set to the value HW. Subrack subrackPosition Specifies the subrack position within a cabinet. The purpose of this attribute is to help in troubleshooting as its valu e is included in the alarm information. The subrack position is also included in the product inventory. The subrack position consists o Subrack cabinetPosition Specifies the position of the cabinet, w ithin a group of other cabinets, in which this subrack is placed. The purpose of this attribute is to help in troubleshooting as its value is included in the al arm information. Subrack numberOfSlots 0 Specifies the actual number of slots con figured on the node. This attribute is set to the value of defNumberOfSlots in M O SubrackProdType at create of the subrack. Subrack operationalProductData The operational product data des cribes the backplane of the subrack that is actually installed. Subrack reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Subrack subrackProdTypeRef Reference to an instance of Subr ackProdType MO. This attribute must be specified if administrativeProductData is not used. If it is not specified, detection of a SubrackProdType MO with the ex act matching product data is done, and if successful, attribute Subrack subrackNumber 0 The number of the subrack. If switchModu le is set, any setting of this attribute will be ignored. It will instead displa y the value already set in the attribute switchModuleNumber, in the referred Swi tchModule MO. Subrack powerMeasurements Indicates the power measurements of the subrack. Subrack maxPowerDissipation Indicates the maximum power diss ipation of the subrack. Unit: 1 W Subrack numberOfDenibDevices 0 Specifies the total number of fa ns in the Denib-chain connected to the subrack.This attribute is set to -1 by de fault, indicating that no Denib devices are used, and the attribute fanConfigura tion then specifies the fan configuration for the subrack. If f Subrack operationalProductData.productName A user-friendly name of the product. Subrack operationalProductData.productNumber Unique identity for each product, which is constituted by the Ericsson product number (ABC numbe r). The maximum number of characters for a product number is 24 including 2 slas hes, 2 spaces and 2 characters for origination notation. Example of product num Subrack operationalProductData.productRevision Indicates the re vision state of the product. It consists of a letter R or P, one or two digits a nd/or one or two letters. The maximum number of characters is four inclusive R o r P. Example: R1A, R1A02, P7B A suffix may be added to the revision state. The Subrack operationalProductData.productionDate The production d ate can be represented in two ways. 1) The preferable syntax is a four-digit rep resentation of the year, and a two-digit representation of the month and a two-d igit representation of the day. The numbers of characters in this case, is eigh Subrack operationalProductData.serialNumber The serial numbe r consists of 13 alphanumerical characters grouped as 6 plus 7 characters. The f irst 6 characters are to be used for factory codes and the last 7 characters are used for an individual number or batch number.

    Subrack powerMeasurements.currentLeft Specifies the value of t he current, supplied from the leftmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 means t hat no current measurement is available. Unit: 1 mA (milliampere) Subrack powerMeasurements.currentRight Specifies the value of t he current, supplied from the rightmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 means that no current measurement is available. Unit: 1 mA (milliampere) Subrack powerMeasurements.distributedPower Specifies the to tal distribution of power in the subrack. This attribute is applicable only if a ll other measurements in this struct are available. Unit: 1 W Subrack powerMeasurements.voltageLeft Specifies the value of t he voltage, distributed from the leftmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 mean s that no voltage measurement is available. Unit: 1 mV (millivolt) Subrack powerMeasurements.voltageRight Specifies the value of t he voltage, distributed from the rightmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 mea ns that no voltage measurement is available. Unit: 1 mV (millivolt) SubrackProdType boardPositions Indicates the slot positions in the subrack where it is possible to insert the CMXB, SCU and TU boards. If any o f these positions are not specified, then a board type position with the value 0 is created. SubrackProdType defNumberOfSlots Defines the number of sl ots to be created in the subrack. SubrackProdType fanConfiguration Indicates the fan config uration in the subrack. It is silent ignored if the attribute numberOfDenibDevic es in MO Subrack is set to > -1.In this case the numberOfDenibDevices overrides this attribute for the fan configuration. SubrackProdType productData Specifies the product data for t he backplane of the subrack. Recommended: Exclude the trailing letters in the pr oduct revision of this MO. Examples: - R2B corresponds to R2 - R2B/3 remains as R2B/3 - R2B/A corresponds to R2 SubrackProdType reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. SubrackProdType SubrackProdTypeId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. Note that if this MO is m anually created (not recommended) the value for this attribute has to be set. SubrackProdType transmissionType Specifies the type of tr ansmission. SubrackProdType userLabel Label for free use. SubrackProdType boardPositions.cmxbPositionA 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Ethernet Switch Board, CMXB, is situated. T his value must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicate s that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.cmxbPositionB 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Ethernet Switch Board, CMXB, is situated. T his value must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicate s that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.scuPositionA 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Switch Control Unit (SCU) board is situated . This value must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indic ates that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.scuPositionB 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Switch Control Unit (SCU) board is situated . This value must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indic ates that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.tuPositionA 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Timing Unit (TU) board is situated. This va lue must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicates that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.tuPositionB 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Timing Unit (TU) board is situated. This va lue must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicates that

    this board is not supported. SubrackProdType productData.productInfo Information about the pr oduct. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlimited). SubrackProdType productData.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage , LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. SubrackProdType productData.productNumber The product numb er of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu SubrackProdType productData.productRevision The revision sta te of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandato ry for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subra ck and SubrackProdType. SubrackProdType productData.productionDate The production d ate is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the ye ar, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight chara cters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th SubrackProdType boardPositions Indicates the slot positions in the subrack where it is possible to insert the CMXB, SCU and TU boards. If any o f these positions are not specified, then a board type position with the value 0 is created. SubrackProdType defNumberOfSlots Defines the number of sl ots to be created in the subrack. SubrackProdType fanConfiguration Indicates the fan config uration in the subrack. It is silent ignored if the attribute numberOfDenibDevic es in MO Subrack is set to > -1.In this case the numberOfDenibDevices overrides this attribute for the fan configuration. SubrackProdType productData Specifies the product data for t he backplane of the subrack. Recommended: Exclude the trailing letters in the pr oduct revision of this MO. Examples: - R2B corresponds to R2 - R2B/3 remains as R2B/3 - R2B/A corresponds to R2 SubrackProdType reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. SubrackProdType SubrackProdTypeId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. Note that if this MO is m anually created (not recommended) the value for this attribute has to be set. SubrackProdType transmissionType Specifies the type of tr ansmission. SubrackProdType userLabel Label for free use. SubrackProdType boardPositions.cmxbPositionA 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Ethernet Switch Board, CMXB, is situated. T his value must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicate s that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.cmxbPositionB 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Ethernet Switch Board, CMXB, is situated. T his value must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicate s that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.scuPositionA 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Switch Control Unit (SCU) board is situated . This value must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indic ates that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.scuPositionB 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Switch Control Unit (SCU) board is situated . This value must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indic ates that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.tuPositionA 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Timing Unit (TU) board is situated. This va lue must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicates that this board is not supported.

    SubrackProdType boardPositions.tuPositionB 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Timing Unit (TU) board is situated. This va lue must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicates that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType productData.productInfo Information about the pr oduct. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlimited). SubrackProdType productData.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage , LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. SubrackProdType productData.productNumber The product numb er of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu SubrackProdType productData.productRevision The revision sta te of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandato ry for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subra ck and SubrackProdType. SubrackProdType productData.productionDate The production d ate is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the ye ar, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight chara cters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th SubrackProdType boardPositions Indicates the slot positions in the subrack where it is possible to insert the CMXB, SCU and TU boards. If any o f these positions are not specified, then a board type position with the value 0 is created. SubrackProdType defNumberOfSlots Defines the number of sl ots to be created in the subrack. SubrackProdType fanConfiguration Indicates the fan config uration in the subrack. It is silent ignored if the attribute numberOfDenibDevic es in MO Subrack is set to > -1.In this case the numberOfDenibDevices overrides this attribute for the fan configuration. SubrackProdType productData Specifies the product data for t he backplane of the subrack. Recommended: Exclude the trailing letters in the pr oduct revision of this MO. Examples: - R2B corresponds to R2 - R2B/3 remains as R2B/3 - R2B/A corresponds to R2 SubrackProdType reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. SubrackProdType SubrackProdTypeId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. Note that if this MO is m anually created (not recommended) the value for this attribute has to be set. SubrackProdType transmissionType Specifies the type of tr ansmission. SubrackProdType userLabel Label for free use. SubrackProdType boardPositions.cmxbPositionA 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Ethernet Switch Board, CMXB, is situated. T his value must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicate s that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.cmxbPositionB 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Ethernet Switch Board, CMXB, is situated. T his value must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicate s that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.scuPositionA 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Switch Control Unit (SCU) board is situated . This value must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indic ates that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.scuPositionB 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Switch Control Unit (SCU) board is situated . This value must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indic ates that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.tuPositionA 0 Indicates the sl

    ot position in the subrack where the Timing Unit (TU) board is situated. This va lue must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicates that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType boardPositions.tuPositionB 0 Indicates the sl ot position in the subrack where the Timing Unit (TU) board is situated. This va lue must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicates that this board is not supported. SubrackProdType productData.productInfo Information about the pr oduct. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlimited). SubrackProdType productData.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage , LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. SubrackProdType productData.productNumber The product numb er of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu SubrackProdType productData.productRevision The revision sta te of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandato ry for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subra ck and SubrackProdType. SubrackProdType productData.productionDate The production d ate is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the ye ar, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight chara cters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th SupportApplication SupportApplicationId Relative Disting uished NameSub: SupportApplication userLabel Provides support for put ting a label on the MO instance. , SupportSystemConfiguration SupportSystemConfigurationId The value component of the RDN. SwAllocation SwAllocationId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. If this MO is manually created (n ot recommended), the value for this attribute has to be set. SwAllocation userLabel Label for free use. SwAllocation role Specifies the role of a slot or plug-inunit. The role must be unique with respect to other SwAllocation MOs in the node . This is a preparation to introduce pre-defined SwAllocation in future upgrade packages. SwAllocation repertoireList A list of references to repertoi res. SwAllocation slotList A list of references to mainly s lots in a subrack, for example, Slot MO, Fan MO, Webserver MO, Jvm MO, ActiveOth erLMs MO. It may also refer to other objects that handle auxiliary units, for ex ample, XPIU and RBS FAN. SwAllocation SwAllocationId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. If this MO is manually created (n ot recommended), the value for this attribute has to be set. SwAllocation userLabel Label for free use. SwAllocation role Specifies the role of a slot or plug-inunit. The role must be unique with respect to other SwAllocation MOs in the node . This is a preparation to introduce pre-defined SwAllocation in future upgrade packages. SwAllocation repertoireList A list of references to repertoi res. SwAllocation slotList A list of references to mainly s lots in a subrack, for example, Slot MO, Fan MO, Webserver MO, Jvm MO, ActiveOth erLMs MO. It may also refer to other objects that handle auxiliary units, for ex ample, XPIU and RBS FAN. SwAllocation SwAllocationId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. If this MO is manually created (n

    ot recommended), the value for this attribute has to be set. SwAllocation userLabel Label for free use. SwAllocation role Specifies the role of a slot or plug-inunit. The role must be unique with respect to other SwAllocation MOs in the node . This is a preparation to introduce pre-defined SwAllocation in future upgrade packages. SwAllocation repertoireList A list of references to repertoi res. SwAllocation slotList A list of references to mainly s lots in a subrack, for example, Slot MO, Fan MO, Webserver MO, Jvm MO, ActiveOth erLMs MO. It may also refer to other objects that handle auxiliary units, for ex ample, XPIU and RBS FAN. SwitchCoreUnit SwitchCoreUnitId The value component of t he RDN. SwitchCoreUnit userLabel Label for free use. SwitchCoreUnit administrativeStateSili 0 The administrative state for the Switch Internal Link Interface (SILI) on the switch board. This attribu te refers to all ports, that is, the state LOCKED locks all ports, and UNLOCKED unlocks all ports. SwitchCoreUnit operationalStateSil The operational state. I ndicates the traffic handling capability of all ports as a group on the board, t hat is, it is enabled if one or more of the eight ports is enabled. This attribu te is only used for test. SwitchCoreUnit operationalStateSync The operational state of network synchronization distribution. SwitchCoreUnit availabilityStatusSil The availability status of the Switch Internal Link (SIL) ports. It contains details about operationalSt ate. SwitchCoreUnit availabilityStatusSync The availability status of the network synchronization distribution. It contains details about operation alState. SwitchCoreUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. SwitchCoreUnit silPorts Contains a list of port numbers. The port number is between 0-7 and is used to read the state of the switch inte rnal port. See also the actions getSilPortState, getOperState and getAvailState. SwitchCoreUnit SwitchCoreUnitId The value component of t he RDN. SwitchCoreUnit userLabel Label for free use. SwitchCoreUnit administrativeStateSili 0 The administrative state for the Switch Internal Link Interface (SILI) on the switch board. This attribu te refers to all ports, that is, the state LOCKED locks all ports, and UNLOCKED unlocks all ports. SwitchCoreUnit operationalStateSil The operational state. I ndicates the traffic handling capability of all ports as a group on the board, t hat is, it is enabled if one or more of the eight ports is enabled. This attribu te is only used for test. SwitchCoreUnit operationalStateSync The operational state of network synchronization distribution. SwitchCoreUnit availabilityStatusSil The availability status of the Switch Internal Link (SIL) ports. It contains details about operationalSt ate. SwitchCoreUnit availabilityStatusSync The availability status of the network synchronization distribution. It contains details about operation alState. SwitchCoreUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. SwitchCoreUnit silPorts Contains a list of port numbers. The port number is between 0-7 and is used to read the state of the switch inte rnal port. See also the actions getSilPortState, getOperState and getAvailState.

    SwitchCoreUnit SwitchCoreUnitId The value component of t he RDN. SwitchCoreUnit administrativeStateSili 0 The administrative state for the Switch Internal Link Interface (SILI) on the switch board. This attribu te refers to all ports, that is, the state LOCKED locks all ports, and UNLOCKED unlocks all ports. SwitchCoreUnit operationalStateSil The operational state. I ndicates the traffic handling capability of all ports as a group on the board, t hat is, it is enabled if one or more of the eight ports is enabled. This attribu te is only used for test. SwitchCoreUnit operationalStateSync The operational state of network synchronization distribution. SwitchCoreUnit availabilityStatusSil The availability status of the Switch Internal Link (SIL) ports. It contains details about operationalSt ate. SwitchCoreUnit availabilityStatusSync The availability status of the network synchronization distribution. It contains details about operation alState. SwitchCoreUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. SwitchCoreUnit silPorts Contains a list of port numbers. The port number is between 0-7 and is used to read the state of the switch inte rnal port. See also the actions getSilPortState, getOperState and getAvailState. SwitchExtensionUnit SwitchExtensionUnitId The value compon ent of the RDN. SwitchExtensionUnit userLabel Label for free use. SwitchExtensionUnit administrativeStateSil 0 The administrati ve state for the Switch Internal Link (SIL) ports on the switch board. This attr ibute refers to all ports, that is, the state LOCKED locks all ports, and UNLOCK ED unlocks all ports. SwitchExtensionUnit operationalStateSil The operational state. The operational state is enabled if one of the eight ports is enabled. SwitchExtensionUnit operationalStateSync The operational state of network synchronization distribution. SwitchExtensionUnit availabilityStatusSil The availability state of the Switch Internal Link (SIL) ports. It contains details about operat ionalState. SwitchExtensionUnit availabilityStatusSync The availability status of the network synchronization distribution. It contains details about o perationalState. SwitchExtensionUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO in stances that reserve this MO instance. SwitchExtensionUnit silPorts Contains a list of port numbers. The port number is between 0-7 and is used to read the state of the swi tch internal port. Se also the actions getSilPortState, getSilOperState and getS ilAvailState. SwitchFabric SwitchFabricId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. SwitchFabric userLabel Label for free use. SwitchFabric SwitchFabricId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. SwitchFabric userLabel Label for free use. SwitchFabric SwitchFabricId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. SwitchInternalLink SwitchInternalLinkId The value compon ent of the RDN. SwitchInternalLink userLabel Label for free use. SwitchInternalLink plugInUnit1 Contains a reference of one connection point for a SwitchCoreUnit or SwitchExtensionUnit. SwitchInternalLink plugInUnit2 Contains a reference of

    one connection point for a SwitchCoreUnit or SwitchExtensionUnit. SwitchInternalLink siliport1 Switch internal port num ber on PlugInUnit 1. On a standard SCB/SXB board, the ports are labeled from the bottom to the top. Port nr -> label: 0 ->D 1 ->C 2 ->B 3 ->A Note that this map ping can change when a board is added or removed. SwitchInternalLink siliport2 Switch internal port num ber on PlugInUnit 2. On a standard SCB/SXB board, the ports are labeled from the bottom to the top. Port nr -> label: 0 ->D 1 ->C 2 ->B 3 ->A Note that this map ping can change when a board is added or removed. SwitchInternalLink administrativeState 0 The administrati ve state. SwitchInternalLink operationalStateTraffic The operational state of switch internal link. There is no traffic if the link is set to DISABLE D. SwitchInternalLink availabilityStatusTraffic The avai lability status of the switch internal link. It contains details about operation alState. SwitchInternalLink operationalStateSync The operational state of network synchronization distribution. There is no clock distribution if the link is set to DISABLED. SwitchInternalLink availabilityStatusSync The availability status of the network synchronization distribution. It contains details about o perationalState. SwitchInternalLink SwitchInternalLinkId The value compon ent of the RDN. SwitchInternalLink plugInUnit1 Contains a reference of one connection point for a SwitchCoreUnit or SwitchExtensionUnit. SwitchInternalLink plugInUnit2 Contains a reference of one connection point for a SwitchCoreUnit or SwitchExtensionUnit. SwitchInternalLink siliport1 Switch internal port num ber on PlugInUnit 1. On a standard SCB/SXB board, the ports are labeled from the bottom to the top. Port nr -> label: 0 ->D 1 ->C 2 ->B 3 ->A Note that this map ping can change when a board is added or removed. SwitchInternalLink siliport2 Switch internal port num ber on PlugInUnit 2. On a standard SCB/SXB board, the ports are labeled from the bottom to the top. Port nr -> label: 0 ->D 1 ->C 2 ->B 3 ->A Note that this map ping can change when a board is added or removed. SwitchInternalLink administrativeState 0 The administrati ve state. SwitchInternalLink operationalStateTraffic The operational state of switch internal link. There is no traffic if the link is set to DISABLE D. SwitchInternalLink availabilityStatusTraffic The avai lability status of the switch internal link. It contains details about operation alState. SwitchInternalLink operationalStateSync The operational state of network synchronization distribution. There is no clock distribution if the link is set to DISABLED. SwitchInternalLink availabilityStatusSync The availability status of the network synchronization distribution. It contains details about o perationalState. SwitchModule SwitchModuleId The value component of the RDN. SwitchModule userLabel Label for free use. SwitchModule switchModuleNumber Specifies the number of the switch module (SMN). switchModuleNumber &gt;= 0 The main switch module, with one or two TimingUnits, is given SMN = 0. SMN for extension switch modules depe nds on the port pair that the extension switch module is connected to i SwitchModule secondSmnEvaluation Second Switch Module Num ber (SMN) Evaluation There are two cables that are relevant for SMN numbering: If the cabling is wrong, secondSmnEvaluation shows the second opinion about the

    switchModuleNumber. - Under normal conditions secondSmnEvaluation = sw SwitchModule administrativeState 0 The administrative state . When setting the administrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, a notification that the state has been changed to LOCKED is sent towards the operator. There is however no guarantee that this operation has been successful due to limitation SwitchModule administrativeStateSwitchPlaneA 0 The administrati ve state of switch plane A. It is not allowed to lock both switch plane A and B. When setting the administrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, a notification that the state has been changed to LOCKED is sent towards the operator. There is however SwitchModule administrativeStateSwitchPlaneB 0 The administrati ve state of switch plane B. It is not allowed to lock both switch plane A and B. When setting the administrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, a notification that the state has been changed to LOCKED is sent towards the operator. There is however SwitchModule operationalState The operational state. A t least one of the switch planes is set to ENABLED. SwitchModule operationalStateSwitchPlaneA The operational state of Switch Module plane A. This attribute is set to DISABLED if any of the switch ports is faulty. But the switch may still be used. SwitchModule operationalStateSwitchPlaneB The operational state of Switch Module plane B. This attribute is set to DISABLED if any of the switch ports is faulty. But the switch may still be used. SwitchModule availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. SwitchModule availabilityStatusSwitchPlaneA The availability status of the Switch Plane A. It contains details about operationalState. SwitchModule availabilityStatusSwitchPlaneB The availability status of the Switch Plane B. It contains details about operationalState. SwitchModule activeSwitchPlane Specifies the active swi tch plane: A or B. During multiple faults, both plan A and B may be used. SwitchModule reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. SwitchModule SwitchModuleId The value component of the RDN. SwitchModule userLabel Label for free use. SwitchModule switchModuleNumber Specifies the number of the switch module (SMN). switchModuleNumber &gt;= 0 The main switch module, with one or two TimingUnits, is given SMN = 0. SMN for extension switch modules depe nds on the port pair that the extension switch module is connected to i SwitchModule secondSmnEvaluation Second Switch Module Num ber (SMN) Evaluation There are two cables that are relevant for SMN numbering: If the cabling is wrong, secondSmnEvaluation shows the second opinion about the switchModuleNumber. - Under normal conditions secondSmnEvaluation = sw SwitchModule administrativeState 0 The administrative state . When setting the administrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, a notification that the state has been changed to LOCKED is sent towards the operator. There is however no guarantee that this operation has been successful due to limitation SwitchModule administrativeStateSwitchPlaneA 0 The administrati ve state of switch plane A. It is not allowed to lock both switch plane A and B. When setting the administrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, a notification that the state has been changed to LOCKED is sent towards the operator. There is however SwitchModule administrativeStateSwitchPlaneB 0 The administrati ve state of switch plane B. It is not allowed to lock both switch plane A and B. When setting the administrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, a notification that the state has been changed to LOCKED is sent towards the operator. There is however SwitchModule operationalState The operational state. A t least one of the switch planes is set to ENABLED. SwitchModule operationalStateSwitchPlaneA The operational state of Switch Module plane A. This attribute is set to DISABLED if any of the switch ports is faulty. But the switch may still be used. SwitchModule operationalStateSwitchPlaneB The operational state of Switch Module plane B. This attribute is set to DISABLED if any of the

    switch ports is faulty. But the switch may still be used. SwitchModule availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. SwitchModule availabilityStatusSwitchPlaneA The availability status of the Switch Plane A. It contains details about operationalState. SwitchModule availabilityStatusSwitchPlaneB The availability status of the Switch Plane B. It contains details about operationalState. SwitchModule activeSwitchPlane Specifies the active swi tch plane: A or B. During multiple faults, both plan A and B may be used. SwitchModule reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. SwitchModule SwitchModuleId The value component of the RDN. SwitchModule switchModuleNumber Specifies the number of the switch module (SMN). switchModuleNumber &gt;= 0 The main switch module, with one or two TimingUnits, is given SMN = 0. SMN for extension switch modules depe nds on the port pair that the extension switch module is connected to i SwitchModule secondSmnEvaluation Second Switch Module Num ber (SMN) Evaluation There are two cables that are relevant for SMN numbering: If the cabling is wrong, secondSmnEvaluation shows the second opinion about the switchModuleNumber. - Under normal conditions secondSmnEvaluation = sw SwitchModule administrativeState 0 The administrative state . When setting the administrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, a notification that the state has been changed to LOCKED is sent towards the operator. There is however no guarantee that this operation has been successful due to limitation SwitchModule administrativeStateSwitchPlaneA 0 The administrati ve state of switch plane A. It is not allowed to lock both switch plane A and B. When setting the administrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, a notification that the state has been changed to LOCKED is sent towards the operator. There is however SwitchModule administrativeStateSwitchPlaneB 0 The administrati ve state of switch plane B. It is not allowed to lock both switch plane A and B. When setting the administrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, a notification that the state has been changed to LOCKED is sent towards the operator. There is however SwitchModule operationalState The operational state. A t least one of the switch planes is set to ENABLED. SwitchModule operationalStateSwitchPlaneA The operational state of Switch Module plane A. This attribute is set to DISABLED if any of the switch ports is faulty. But the switch may still be used. SwitchModule operationalStateSwitchPlaneB The operational state of Switch Module plane B. This attribute is set to DISABLED if any of the switch ports is faulty. But the switch may still be used. SwitchModule availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. SwitchModule availabilityStatusSwitchPlaneA The availability status of the Switch Plane A. It contains details about operationalState. SwitchModule availabilityStatusSwitchPlaneB The availability status of the Switch Plane B. It contains details about operationalState. SwitchModule activeSwitchPlane Specifies the active swi tch plane: A or B. During multiple faults, both plan A and B may be used. SwitchModule reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. SwitchPortStp actualPathCost Actual path cost. SwitchPortStp configuredPathCost 20000 Configured path cost. If manualPathCost is true, the value of the attribute actualPathCost will be deter mined by this attribute. If manualPathCost is false, the value of the attribute actualPathCost may differ from the value of this attribute. SwitchPortStp edgePortBpduGuardTimeOut 600 The time before an edge port blocked with BPDU Guard goes unblocked. If this attribute is set to 0, manual interaction via the action unblockEdgePort is needed. Unit: 1 s SwitchPortStp edgePortMode ADMIN_EDGE_OFF(0) The behavior of an edge port. Setting the edgePortMode may cause a short link failure (several s

    econds).Setting the edgePortMode to ADMIN_EDGE_BPDU_GUARD or ADMIN_EDGE_BPDU_FIL TER turns on the external link redundancy feature if:- the MO SwitchPortStp is SwitchPortStp manualPathCost FALSE(0) Determines the possibili ty to manually configure the path cost. If this attribute is set to true, the pa th cost can be configured by setting the attribute configuredPathCost. If this a ttribute is set to false, the system ignores the attribute configuredPa SwitchPortStp priority 0 Port priority. The port with the lowest portPriority value will be selected as Root port in the case when more t han one port is connected to the Root bridge. If two ports have the same priorit y the one with the lowest port number gets the best priority. T SwitchPortStp protocolVersion The actual protocol version runn ing on this port as the result of negotiation with the remote switch port. SwitchPortStp remoteBridgeId The bridge id of the counterpart bridge in the spanning tree protocol messaging. This attribute is relevant only for ports with the role alternate or root. The attribute consists of priority a nd macaddress combined into a string, where the first 4 charact SwitchPortStp rootPathCost Specifies the Root Path Cost use d in Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) transmitted from this port. Specificatio n: IEEE Std 802.1D-2004 SwitchPortStp stpRole The STP role of the port. SwitchPortStp stpState The STP state of the port. SwitchPortStp SwitchPortStpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. SwitchPortStp userLabel Label for free use. SwitchPortStp settingsUsed Indicates if the settings in thi s MO instance are used. SwitchPortStp actualPathCost Actual path cost. SwitchPortStp configuredPathCost 20000 Configured path cost. If manualPathCost is true, the value of the attribute actualPathCost will be deter mined by this attribute. If manualPathCost is false, the value of the attribute actualPathCost may differ from the value of this attribute. SwitchPortStp edgePortBpduGuardTimeOut 600 The time before an edge port blocked with BPDU Guard goes unblocked. If this attribute is set to 0, manual interaction via the action unblockEdgePort is needed. Unit: 1 s SwitchPortStp edgePortMode ADMIN_EDGE_OFF(0) The behavior of an edge port. Setting the edgePortMode may cause a short link failure (several s econds).Setting the edgePortMode to ADMIN_EDGE_BPDU_GUARD or ADMIN_EDGE_BPDU_FIL TER turns on the external link redundancy feature if:- the MO SwitchPortStp is SwitchPortStp manualPathCost FALSE(0) Determines the possibili ty to manually configure the path cost. If this attribute is set to true, the pa th cost can be configured by setting the attribute configuredPathCost. If this a ttribute is set to false, the system ignores the attribute configuredPa SwitchPortStp priority 0 Port priority. The port with the lowest portPriority value will be selected as Root port in the case when more t han one port is connected to the Root bridge. If two ports have the same priorit y the one with the lowest port number gets the best priority. T SwitchPortStp protocolVersion The actual protocol version runn ing on this port as the result of negotiation with the remote switch port. SwitchPortStp remoteBridgeId The bridge id of the counterpart bridge in the spanning tree protocol messaging. This attribute is relevant only for ports with the role alternate or root. The attribute consists of priority a nd macaddress combined into a string, where the first 4 charact SwitchPortStp rootPathCost Specifies the Root Path Cost use d in Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) transmitted from this port. Specificatio n: IEEE Std 802.1D-2004 SwitchPortStp stpRole The STP role of the port. SwitchPortStp stpState The STP state of the port. SwitchPortStp SwitchPortStpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. SwitchPortStp userLabel Label for free use.

    SwitchPortStp settingsUsed Indicates if the settings in thi s MO instance are used. SwitchPortStp actualPathCost Actual path cost. SwitchPortStp configuredPathCost 20000 Configured path cost. If manualPathCost is true, the value of the attribute actualPathCost will be deter mined by this attribute. If manualPathCost is false, the value of the attribute actualPathCost may differ from the value of this attribute. SwitchPortStp edgePortBpduGuardTimeOut 600 The time before an edge port blocked with BPDU Guard goes unblocked. If this attribute is set to 0, manual interaction via the action unblockEdgePort is needed. Unit: 1 s SwitchPortStp edgePortMode ADMIN_EDGE_OFF(0) The behavior of an edge port. SwitchPortStp manualPathCost FALSE(0) Determines the possibili ty to manually configure the path cost. If this attribute is set to true, the pa th cost can be configured by setting the attribute configuredPathCost. If this a ttribute is set to false, the system ignores the attribute configuredPa SwitchPortStp priority 0 Port priority. The port with the lowest portPriority value will be selected as Root port in the case when more t han one port is connected to the Root bridge. If two ports have the same priorit y the one with the lowest port number gets the best priority. T SwitchPortStp protocolVersion The actual protocol version runn ing on this port as the result of negotiation with the remote switch port. SwitchPortStp remoteBridgeId The bridge id of the counterpart bridge in the spanning tree protocol messaging. This attribute is relevant only for ports with the role alternate or root. The attribute consists of priority a nd macaddress combined into a string, where the first 4 charact SwitchPortStp rootPathCost Specifies the Root Path Cost use d in Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) transmitted from this port. Specificatio n: IEEE Std 802.1D-2004 SwitchPortStp stpRole The STP role of the port. SwitchPortStp stpState The STP state of the port. SwitchPortStp SwitchPortStpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. SwitchPortStp userLabel Label for free use. SwitchPortStp settingsUsed Indicates if the settings in thi s MO instance are used. SwitchStp administrativeState 0 The administrative state . Turns on or off the use of the Spanning Tree Protocol. SHUTTING_DOWN is not su pported and if set the value is changed to LOCKED. In case the parent MO is an i nstance of EthernetSwitchModule, this attribute is not applicable and i SwitchStp bridgeForwardDelay 150 The delay used by the sw itch before changing to the Forwarding state, in case of a port interoperating w ith a legacy STP switch. If interoperability with legacy STP bridges is wanted, the value of bridgeForwardDelay must be set to greater than or equal to SwitchStp bridgeHelloTime 20 Interval between periodic transm issions of configuration messages by designated ports. If interoperability with legacy STP bridges is wanted, the value of bridgeHelloTime must be set to less t han or equal to (bridgeMaxAge/2 -10). Ranges and limitations ca SwitchStp bridgeId The bridge ID of the switch. The attribute consists of priority and macaddress combined into a string, where the first 4 characters repesent the priority, and the last characters represent the macaddress. A hyphen (-) separates the two. Example: 0000-00: SwitchStp bridgeMaxAge 60 The maximum time interval before a switch, not receiving any BPDUs, assumes that a network change has occurred. If interoperability with legacy STP bridges is wanted, the value of bridgeMaxAge must be set to greater than or equal to 2 x (bridgeHelloTime + SwitchStp bridgePriority 0 Switch priority used by the prot ocol. The value must be a multiple of 4096. The preferred rootswitch must have a low value and the standby rootswitch must have a value that is almost as low. T o achieve as good convergence time as possible, when the rootsw

    SwitchStp mode RSTP(0) The kind of spanning tree protocol used. The system supports Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, RSTP. SwitchStp rootBridgeId The bridge ID of the switch defi ned as the root bridge. The attribute consists of priority and macaddress combin ed into a string, where the first 4 characters repesent the priority, and the la st characters represent the macaddress. A hyphen (-) separates SwitchStp rootPortNumber The root port number. SwitchStp SwitchStpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. SwitchStp topologyChangeTime The time since the lates t topology change occurred. Unit: 1 s SwitchStp userLabel Label for free use. SwitchStp transmitHoldCount 0 The maximum number of BP DUs that may be sent on one port to a neighboring switch.When the maximum number is reached, only one more BPDU may be sent per second. A high value gives bette r convergence time. The fastest convergence is achieved with the value SwitchStp administrativeState 0 The administrative state . Turns on or off the use of the Spanning Tree Protocol. SHUTTING_DOWN is not su pported and if set the value is changed to LOCKED. In case the parent MO is an i nstance of EthernetSwitchModule, this attribute is not applicable and i SwitchStp bridgeForwardDelay 150 The delay used by the sw itch before changing to the Forwarding state, in case of a port interoperating w ith a legacy STP switch. If interoperability with legacy STP bridges is wanted, the value of bridgeForwardDelay must be set to greater than or equal to SwitchStp bridgeHelloTime 20 Interval between periodic transm issions of configuration messages by designated ports. If interoperability with legacy STP bridges is wanted, the value of bridgeHelloTime must be set to less t han or equal to (bridgeMaxAge/2 -10). Ranges and limitations ca SwitchStp bridgeId The bridge ID of the switch. The attribute consists of priority and macaddress combined into a string, where the first 4 characters repesent the priority, and the last characters represent the macaddress. A hyphen (-) separates the two. Example: 0000-00: SwitchStp bridgeMaxAge 60 The maximum time interval before a switch, not receiving any BPDUs, assumes that a network change has occurred. If interoperability with legacy STP bridges is wanted, the value of bridgeMaxAge must be set to greater than or equal to 2 x (bridgeHelloTime + SwitchStp bridgePriority 0 Switch priority used by the prot ocol. The value must be a multiple of 4096. The preferred rootswitch must have a low value and the standby rootswitch must have a value that is almost as low. T o achieve as good convergence time as possible, when the rootsw SwitchStp mode RSTP(0) The kind of spanning tree protocol used. The system supports Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, RSTP. SwitchStp rootBridgeId The bridge ID of the switch defi ned as the root bridge. The attribute consists of priority and macaddress combin ed into a string, where the first 4 characters repesent the priority, and the la st characters represent the macaddress. A hyphen (-) separates SwitchStp rootPortNumber The root port number. SwitchStp SwitchStpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. SwitchStp topologyChangeTime The time since the lates t topology change occurred. Unit: 1 s SwitchStp userLabel Label for free use. SwitchStp transmitHoldCount 0 The maximum number of BP DUs that may be sent on one port to a neighboring switch.When the maximum number is reached, only one more BPDU may be sent per second. A high value gives bette r convergence time. The fastest convergence is achieved with the value SwitchStp administrativeState 0 The administrative state . Turns on or off the use of the Spanning Tree Protocol. SHUTTING_DOWN is not su pported and if set the value is changed to LOCKED. In case the parent MO is an i nstance of EthernetSwitchModule, this attribute is not applicable and i

    SwitchStp bridgeForwardDelay 150 The delay used by the sw itch before changing to the Forwarding state, in case of a port interoperating w ith a legacy STP switch. If interoperability with legacy STP bridges is wanted, the value of bridgeForwardDelay must be set to greater than or equal to SwitchStp bridgeHelloTime 20 Interval between periodic transm issions of configuration messages by designated ports. If interoperability with legacy STP bridges is wanted, the value of bridgeHelloTime must be set to less t han or equal to (bridgeMaxAge/2 -10). Ranges and limitations ca SwitchStp bridgeId The bridge ID of the switch. The attribute consists of priority and macaddress combined into a string, where the first 4 characters repesent the priority, and the last characters represent the macaddress. A hyphen (-) separates the two. Example: 0000-00: SwitchStp bridgeMaxAge 60 The maximum time interval before a switch, not receiving any BPDUs, assumes that a network change has occurred. If interoperability with legacy STP bridges is wanted, the value of bridgeMaxAge must be set to greater than or equal to 2 x (bridgeHelloTime + SwitchStp bridgePriority 0 Switch priority used by the prot ocol. The value must be a multiple of 4096. The preferred rootswitch must have a low value and the standby rootswitch must have a value that is almost as low. T o achieve as good convergence time as possible, when the rootsw SwitchStp mode RSTP(0) The kind of spanning tree protocol used. The system supports Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, RSTP. SwitchStp rootBridgeId The bridge ID of the switch defi ned as the root bridge. The attribute consists of priority and macaddress combin ed into a string, where the first 4 characters repesent the priority, and the la st characters represent the macaddress. A hyphen (-) separates SwitchStp rootPortNumber The root port number. SwitchStp SwitchStpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. SwitchStp topologyChangeTime The time since the lates t topology change occurred. Unit: 1 s SwitchStp userLabel Label for free use. SwitchStp transmitHoldCount 0 The maximum number of BP DUs that may be sent on one port to a neighboring switch.When the maximum number is reached, only one more BPDU may be sent per second. A high value gives bette r convergence time. The fastest convergence is achieved with the value SwManagement SwManagementId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. SwManagement userLabel Label for free use. SwManagement SwManagementId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. SwManagement userLabel Label for free use. SwManagement SwManagementId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Synchronization SynchronizationId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Synchronization degradationIsFault 0 Determines whether a tra nsmission link degradation (for example, high bit-error rate) is interpreted as a synchronization reference fault or not. This attribute is applicable only for traffic carrying synchronization references. Synchronization syncReference List of resources for synchroniz ation references. Possible references are: E1PhysPathTerm, E3PhysPathTerm, J1Phy sPathTerm, T1PhysPathTerm, T3PhysPathTerm, Os155SpiTtp, TuSyncRef, IpSyncRef. Th e IpSyncRef is not supported in TUB1 nodes. A synchronization r Synchronization syncRefPriority 0 Synchronization reference priori ty. 1 represents the highest and 8 the lowest priority. Every synchronization re ference must have a unique priority value. Value 0 means not applicable, that is , no synchronization reference with this priority is defined. T Synchronization syncRefActivity List of attributes for synchroni zation references, where each attribute specifies whether the respective synchro

    nization reference is active. Zero or one reference is active. The length of thi s list is 8. Synchronization syncRefStatus List of status attributes for sy nchronization references. The length of this list is 8. Synchronization userLabel Label for free use. Synchronization nodeSystemClock State of the system clock on the node. Synchronization SynchronizationId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Synchronization degradationIsFault 0 Determines whether a tra nsmission link degradation (for example, high bit-error rate) is interpreted as a synchronization reference fault or not. This attribute is applicable only for traffic carrying synchronization references. Synchronization syncReference List of resources for synchroniz ation references. Possible references are: E1PhysPathTerm, E3PhysPathTerm, J1Phy sPathTerm, T1PhysPathTerm, T3PhysPathTerm, Os155SpiTtp, TuSyncRef, IpSyncRef. Th e IpSyncRef is not supported in TUB1 nodes. A synchronization r Synchronization syncRefPriority 0 Synchronization reference priori ty. 1 represents the highest and 8 the lowest priority. Every synchronization re ference must have a unique priority value. Value 0 means not applicable, that is , no synchronization reference with this priority is defined. T Synchronization syncRefActivity List of attributes for synchroni zation references, where each attribute specifies whether the respective synchro nization reference is active. Zero or one reference is active. The length of thi s list is 8. Synchronization syncRefStatus List of status attributes for sy nchronization references. The length of this list is 8. Synchronization userLabel Label for free use. Synchronization nodeSystemClock State of the system clock on the node. Synchronization SynchronizationId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. Synchronization degradationIsFault 0 Determines whether a tra nsmission link degradation (for example, high bit-error rate) is interpreted as a synchronization reference fault or not. This attribute is applicable only for traffic carrying synchronization references. Synchronization syncReference List of resources for synchroniz ation references. Possible references are: E1PhysPathTerm, E3PhysPathTerm, J1Phy sPathTerm, T1PhysPathTerm, T3PhysPathTerm, Os155SpiTtp, TuSyncRef, IpSyncRef. Th e IpSyncRef is not supported in TUB1 nodes. A synchronization r Synchronization syncRefPriority 0 Synchronization reference priori ty. 1 represents the highest and 8 the lowest priority. Every synchronization re ference must have a unique priority value. Value 0 means not applicable, that is , no synchronization reference with this priority is defined. T Synchronization syncRefActivity List of attributes for synchroni zation references, where each attribute specifies whether the respective synchro nization reference is active. Zero or one reference is active. The length of thi s list is 8. Synchronization syncRefStatus List of status attributes for sy nchronization references. The length of this list is 8. Synchronization userLabel Label for free use. Synchronization nodeSystemClock State of the system clock on the node. SystemConstants sysConstants A string that holds system const ants (name and value). A system constant pair consists of a name and a value. Th e name and value is separated by ':' while system constant pairs are separated b y ','. If a system constant is not included in the attribute, t SystemConstants SystemConstantsId SystemFunctions SystemFunctionsId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created.

    SystemFunctions userLabel Label for free use. SystemFunctions SystemFunctionsId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. SystemFunctions userLabel Label for free use. SystemFunctions SystemFunctionsId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. T1PhysPathTerm T1PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. T1PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. T1PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. T1PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. T1PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state . T1PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. T1PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. T1PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. T1PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. T1PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false reporting disabled. T1PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s T1PhysPathTerm idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a t imeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both T1PhysPathTerm transmissionMode 0 The type of transmission medium. T1PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. T1PhysPathTerm reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaL ink MO that reserves this MO instance. T1PhysPathTerm degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. T1PhysPathTerm degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the receiv ed blocks are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. I f the threshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% T1PhysPathTerm T1PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. T1PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. T1PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. T1PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. T1PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state . T1PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. T1PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. T1PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. T1PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false

    - reporting disabled. T1PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false reporting disabled. T1PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s T1PhysPathTerm idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a t imeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both T1PhysPathTerm transmissionMode 0 The type of transmission medium. T1PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. T1PhysPathTerm reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaL ink MO that reserves this MO instance. T1PhysPathTerm degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. T1PhysPathTerm degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the receiv ed blocks are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. I f the threshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% T1PhysPathTerm T1PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. T1PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. T1PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. T1PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. T1PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state . T1PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. T1PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. T1PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. T1PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled. T1PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false reporting disabled. T1PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s T1PhysPathTerm idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a t imeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both T1PhysPathTerm transmissionMode 0 The type of transmission medium. T1PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. T1PhysPathTerm reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaL ink MO that reserves this MO instance. T1PhysPathTerm degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. T1PhysPathTerm degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the receiv ed blocks are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. I f the threshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1%

    T1Ttp T1TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. T1Ttp userLabel Label for free use. T1Ttp aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm In dication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporti ng disabled. T1Ttp rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote D efect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - report ing disabled. T1Ttp operationalState The operational state. T1Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. T1Ttp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. T1Ttp reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaLink MO t hat reserves this MO instance. T1Ttp idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a timeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both T1Ttp degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. T1Ttp degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% T1Ttp T1TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. T1Ttp userLabel Label for free use. T1Ttp aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm In dication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporti ng disabled. T1Ttp rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote D efect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - report ing disabled. T1Ttp operationalState The operational state. T1Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. T1Ttp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. T1Ttp reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaLink MO t hat reserves this MO instance. T1Ttp idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a timeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both T1Ttp degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. T1Ttp degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% T1Ttp T1TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set automa tically when the MO instance is created. T1Ttp userLabel Label for free use. T1Ttp aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm In dication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporti ng disabled. T1Ttp rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote D efect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - report ing disabled. T1Ttp operationalState The operational state.

    T1Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. T1Ttp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. T1Ttp reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaLink MO t hat reserves this MO instance. T1Ttp idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a timeslot that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both T1Ttp degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. T1Ttp degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% T3PhysPathTerm T3PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. T3PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. T3PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. T3PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. T3PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state . T3PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s T3PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. T3PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. T3PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Alar m Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - rep orting disabled. T3PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Remo te Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - re porting disabled. T3PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. T3PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. T3PhysPathTerm T3PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. T3PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. T3PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. T3PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. T3PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state . T3PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s T3PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. T3PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. T3PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Alar m Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - rep orting disabled. T3PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Remo te Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - re

    porting disabled. T3PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. T3PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. T3PhysPathTerm T3PhysPathTermId The value component of t he RDN. T3PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use. T3PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state. T3PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. T3PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state . T3PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, ad ministrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s T3PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board. T3PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physi cal path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED wh en setting the attribute loopback. T3PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Alar m Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - rep orting disabled. T3PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Remo te Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - re porting disabled. T3PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmP ort MO that reserves this MO instance. T3PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronizat ion MO that reserves this MO instance. TcMap TcMapId Naming attribute. Contains the value part of the RDN. TcMap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. TcMap gbrRangeStart Starting point for the GBR range.Depende ncies:gbrRangeStart < gbrRangeEnd For further restrictions please see TcMap clas s description.Unit: kbps (1000 bits per second) Change takes effect: New connect ions TcMap gbrRangeEnd End point for the GBR range.Dependencies :gbrRangeEnd > gbrRangeStart For further restrictions please see TcMap class des cription.Unit: kbps (1000 bits per second) Change takes effect: New connections TcMap tdRangeStart Starting point for the Transfer Delay ra nge.Dependencies:tdRangeStart < tdRangeEnd For further restrictions please see T cMap class description.Unit: ms Change takes effect: New connections TcMap tdRangeEnd End point for the Transfer Delay range.D ependencies:tdRangeEnd > tdRangeStart For further restrictions please see TcMap class description.Unit: ms Change takes effect: New connections TcMap qosRef Reference to an instance containing the QoS sett ings.Dependencies:This reference must point at an instance of SpiQosClass or Tnl QosClass that is contained under the same profile as this instance. Change takes effect: New connections TcMap arpSpiMapRef Reference to an instance containing exte rnal ARP to SPI mappings.This attribute is not applicable under some profiles. D ependencies: This reference must point at an instance of ArpSpiMap that is conta ined under the same profile as this instance.Change tak TimDevice TimDeviceId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system. TimDevice userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. TimDevice deviceIndId Device individual identity. Set

    by the system to TIMD-<#>, where #=a number greater that zero. TimDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the Timing Unit device. TimDevice operationalState The operational state of the Timing Unit device. TimDevice usageState The usage state of the Timing Un it device. TimDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the TimDevice. More than one of the following conditions can apply for the sa me object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OF FLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9 or TimDevice standbyStatus The standby status of the TimDev ice. TimDevice isStable The clock stability status of th e TIM device. Possible values: ? NOT_STABLE = TIM device has not reached the sta bility required to transmit RF. ? STABLE = TIM device has reached and confirms t o the stability required to transmit RF. ? EMPTY = State is not TimDevice isSynchronized The synchronization status of th e TimDevice. ? NOT_SYNCHRONIZED (TIM device does not receive reference from netw ork synchronization function, or that TIM device is not capable of tracking the received ref) ? SYNCHRONIZED (TIM device receives an (external) TimDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: DBC_UC906 Ref. [FS_DBC] TimDevice TimDeviceId TimDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: TimDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] TimDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: ITU-T rec. X .731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] TimDeviceSet TimDeviceSetId TimDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_905 Specificatio TimDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC905 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] TimDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC905 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] TimingUnit TimingUnitId The value component of the RDN. TimingUnit userLabel Label for free use. TimingUnit operationalState The operational state. TimingUnit availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. TimingUnit tuSystemClock State of the system clock signal . TimingUnit TimingUnitId The value component of the RDN. TimingUnit userLabel Label for free use. TimingUnit operationalState The operational state. TimingUnit availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. TimingUnit tuSystemClock State of the system clock signal . TimingUnit TimingUnitId The value component of the RDN.

    TimingUnit operationalState The operational state. TimingUnit availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. TimingUnit tuSystemClock State of the system clock signal . TmaDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: AUC_310 Ref. [FS_AUC] TmaDevice TmaDeviceId TmaDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I TmaDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] TmaDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_310 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.7 31Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] TmaDeviceSet TmaDeviceSetId TmaDeviceSet dlTrafficDelay 0 Internal downlink traffic delay. Only applicable to AU type ATMAU. Example: 112 = 11.2 ns Unit: 0.1 ns Use cases : AUC_309, AUC_315 Takes effect: At next cell setup for the affected cells. Ref. [FS_AUC] TmaDeviceSet ulTrafficDelay 0 Internal uplink traffic delay. O nly applicable to AU type ATMAU. Example: 312 = 31.2 ns Unit: 0.1 ns Use cases: AUC_309, AUC_315 Takes effect: At next cell setup for the affected cells. Ref. [ FS_AUC] TmaDeviceSet dlAttenuation 0 Internal attenuation, downlink. Only applicable to AU type ATMAU. Example: 50 = 5.0 dB Unit: 0.1 dB Use cases: A UC_309, AUC_315 Takes effect: At next cell setup for the affected cells. Ref. [F S_AUC] TmaDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_309 Specificatio TmaDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_309 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] TmaDeviceSet userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM ] TnApplication TnApplicationId TnApplication userLabel Provides support for putting a l abel on the MO instance. , TnlCchQosClassProfile TnlCchQosClassProfileId Naming attribute . Contains the value part of the RDN. TnlCchQosClassProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RN C. TnlDchQosClassProfile TnlDchQosClassProfileId Naming attribute . Contains the value part of the RDN. TnlDchQosClassProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RN C. TnlHspaQosClassProfile TnlHspaQosClassProfileId Naming a ttribute. Contains the value part of the RDN. TnlHspaQosClassProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RN C. TnlIuQosClassProfile TnlIuQosClassProfileId Naming attribute . Contains the value part of the RDN.

    TnlIuQosClassProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RN C. TnlQosClass TnlQosClassId Naming attribute. Contains the v alue part of the RDN. TnlQosClass tnlQosClassInsId 0 Internal identifier of t his instance. Used to set the value of the spi attribute. TnlQosClass userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. TnlQosClass aal2QosClass AAL2 QoS class for the user plan e transport bearer. Change takes effect: New connections TnlQosClass dscpEgress DiffServ Code Point value for th e user plane transport bearer egress IP packets . Change takes effect: New conne ctions TnlQosClass dscpIngress DiffServ Code Point value for th e user plane transport bearer ingress IP packets. Change takes effect: New conne ctions TnlQosClass spi Scheduling Priority Indicator. TnlQosClass reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to this MO. TnlQosClass prefIubUserPlaneTransportOption Defines the pref erred Iub user plane transport option. Only used for the IubLinks for which the dual stack feature has been configured, and only when the dual stack feature has been activated. IubLinks that do not have the dual stack feature activated wil TnlQosClass prefIubUserPlaneTransportOption.atm Controls if ATM is enabled in the transport layer. TnlQosClass prefIubUserPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 Controls if IPv4is enabled in the transport layer. TpaDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: AUC_310 Ref. [FS_AUC] TpaDevice TpaDeviceId TpaDevice maxTotalOutputPower 0 The maximum total output power of the TPA device, allowed to configure for TPA devices on RUW and RRUW. When set to the undefined value, the output power is set by the RBS.Precondition : There must not be any cell setup using the TPA device. The TPA device TpaDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I TpaDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] TpaDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_310 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.7 31Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] TpaDeviceSet TpaDeviceSetId TpaDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_309 Specificatio TpaDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_309 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] TrafficClass TrafficClassId Naming attribute. Contains the v alue part of the RDN. TrafficClass trafficClassInsId Internal identifier of t his instance. TrafficClass userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC

    TrafficClass defaultQosRef Reference to the default QoS spe cification. Under some profiles, this reference is used when no match is found a mong the child instances. Once the defaultQosRef attribute has been set to a non -empty value, it cannot be set to empty again. This attribute i TrafficClass tcInd Traffic class indicator. TrafficClass cnInd Core network type indicator. TrafficClass serviceInd Service type indicator. TrafficClass ssd Source statistics descriptor. TrafficClass arpSpiMapRef Reference to an instance contain ing external ARP to SPI mappings.This attribute is not applicable under some pro files. Dependencies: This reference must point at an instance of ArpSpiMap that is contained under the same profile as this instance.Change tak TrafficClassPsInt TrafficClassPsIntId Naming attribute . Contains the value part of the RDN. TrafficClassPsInt trafficClassPsIntInsId Internal identif ier of this instance. TrafficClassPsInt thp Traffic Handling Priority used w hen calculating the QoS class. TrafficClassPsInt si Signaling Indicator used when ca lculating the QoS class. TrafficClassPsInt userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RN C. TrafficClassPsInt qosRef Reference to the QoS specificati on.Once the defaultQosRef attribute has been set to a non-empty value, it cannot be set to empty again. This attribute is not applicable under some profiles. De pendencies: Points to a TnlQosClass instance or a SpiQosClass i TrafficClassPsInt arpSpiMapRef Reference to an instance containing external ARP to SPI mappings.This attribute is not applicable under some profiles. Dependencies: This reference must point at an instance of ArpSpiM ap that is contained under the same profile as this instance.Change tak TransportNetwork TransportNetworkId The value compon ent of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. TransportNetwork userLabel Label for free use. TransportNetwork TransportNetworkId The value compon ent of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. TransportNetwork userLabel Label for free use. TransportNetwork TransportNetworkId The value compon ent of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. TransportNetwork userLabel Label for free use. TrDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: DBC_UC906 Ref. [FS_DBC] TrDevice TrDeviceId TrDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDEN CY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FU LL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: TrDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] TrDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the devic e. Possible values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: ITU-T rec. X .731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] TrDeviceSet TrDeviceSetId TrDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_905 Specificatio TrDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC905 Specification:

    ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] TrDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC905 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] TrxDeviceGroup TrxDeviceGroupId TrxDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_904Specificati TrxDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Hardware uni ts not supporting hardware test will always return the default value UNDETERMINE D. Use cases: HWT_UC1 Requirement: Test_UTRAN_FU3 Ref. [FS_HWT] TrxDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_904Specification: IT U-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] TrxDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC904 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] TrxRfCable aiuConnector Value denoting the TRX RF connec tor at the AIU. Possible values: ? HL_IN_A1 ? HL_IN_A2 ? LL_IN_A ? LL_IN_B? LL_I N_C? LL_IN_D? TX_IN_A Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF] TrxRfCable aiuPlugInUnitRef Reference to the AIU to which the TRX RF cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition : The PlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MOs must exist. Ref. [CB_ ECF] TrxRfCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the cable. O nly bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alarm. Spec TrxRfCable dlAttenuation RF attenuation of the cable, dow nlink.Example: 36 = 3.6 dB Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipm ent Unit: 0.1 dB Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell. Use r category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] TrxRfCable electricalDlDelay Electrical downlink dela y of the cable.Example: 103 = 10.3 nanoseconds Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, M odify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell setup for th e affected cell. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF] TrxRfCable trxConnector Value denoting the connector tow ards the TRX. Possible values: ? TX_A ? TX_B Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF] TrxRfCable trxPlugInUnitRef Reference to the TRX to which the TRX RF cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition : The PlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MO must exist. Ref. [CB_E CF] TrxRfCable TrxRfCableId TuDeviceGroup TuDeviceGroupId TuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_904Specificati TuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Hardware uni ts not supporting hardware test will always return the default value UNDETERMINE D. Use cases: HWT_UC1 Requirement: Test_UTRAN_FU3 Ref. [FS_HWT] TuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_904Specification: IT U-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] TuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC904 Specif

    ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] TuSyncRef TuSyncRefId The value component of the RDN. TuSyncRef userLabel Label for free use. TuSyncRef operationalState The operational state. TuSyncRef administrativeState 0 The administrative state . TuSyncRef availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. TuSyncRef reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. TuSyncRef TuSyncRefId The value component of the RDN. TuSyncRef userLabel Label for free use. TuSyncRef operationalState The operational state. TuSyncRef administrativeState 0 The administrative state . TuSyncRef availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. TuSyncRef reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. TuSyncRef TuSyncRefId The value component of the RDN. TuSyncRef userLabel Label for free use. TuSyncRef operationalState The operational state. TuSyncRef administrativeState 0 The administrative state . TuSyncRef availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains details about operationalState. TuSyncRef reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. TxDeviceGroup bbBusState Identifies the baseband (gamma) bus usage. Two TX boards located in the same subrack work in load-sharing, where one of the boards is master, controlling the bus. Data from the slave board is sent through a cross-connection and is combined with the data o TxDeviceGroup tpcMode States the mode of the test bus. Possibl e values: ? 0 = NORMAL ? 11 = MONITORUser category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ UTS] TxDeviceGroup TxDeviceGroupId TxDeviceGroup numHsCodeResources 0 Indicates how many proce ssing resources on the TXB that shall be loaded with HSDPA software. An HSDPA pr ocessing resource supports a number of HS-DPSCH codes. The number of supported H S-DPSCH codes depends on how many cells that uses the HSDPA processing TxDeviceGroup numEulResources 0 Indicates how many processing re sources on the TXB that shall be loaded with EUL software. Dependencies: If set to 1 then numHsCodeResources must be > 0 on at least one TxDeviceGroup MO within the same baseband pool. May only be set to 1 on one TxDeviceGr TxDeviceGroup l1AckMonitorIsActive Shows if L1-ACK monitori ng is active.User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS] TxDeviceGroup isHiMonitoringStarted Identifies if monitoring ofACK/NACK sent on the E-HICH channel is started. User category: Ericsson perso nnel Ref. [CB_UTS] TxDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_904Specificati TxDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Hardware uni ts not supporting hardware test will always return the default value UNDETERMINE D. Use cases: HWT_UC1 Requirement: Test_UTRAN_FU3 Ref. [FS_HWT] TxDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_904Specification: IT U-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC]

    TxDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC904 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] UbchDeviceSet reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. Use cases: DBC_UC905Ref. [FS_DBC] UbchDeviceSet UbchDeviceSetId UbchDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPE NDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LO G_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_905 Specificatio UbchDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC905 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC] UbchDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC905 Specif ication: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC] UeMeasControl UeMeasControlId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. UeMeasControl userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. UeMeasControl filterCoefficient1 2 Coefficient for layer 3 filtering before intra-frequency reporting evaluation.Change takes effect: Ongoi ng connections (next switch to CELL_DCH) UeMeasControl measQuantity1 CPICH_EC_NO(2) Used by UE functions for intra-frequency measurements (in CELL_DCH). Quantity to measure for the chosen mode. The value of this attribute will set the message data CPICH_Ec/No or CPICH _RSCP accordingly. Dependencies: If CN Hard Handover is supported and m UeMeasControl asCellSyncInfoRepInd 1 Indicates if cell synchr onization information shall be reported for cells in the active set.This attribu te may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: False 1: True Cha nge takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH) UeMeasControl dsCellSyncInfoRepInd 1 Cell synch information r eport indicator.Indicates if cell synchronization information shall be reported for cells in the detected set.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson per sonnel.Value mapping: 0: False 1: True Change takes effect: Ongoing con UeMeasControl msCellSyncInfoRepInd 1 Indicates if cell synchr onization information shall be reported for the cells in the monitored set.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: False 1: T rue Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH) UeMeasControl triggerCondTwo1a 5 Indicates which set of t he cells shall be used in event 1a reporting evaluation.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 2 : Monitored set cells 4 : Dete cted set cells 5 : Detected set cells and monitored set cells Change ta UeMeasControl reportingRange1a 6 Used by UE functions for intra-frequency measurement reporting (in CELL_DCH). Threshold used for additio n-window in evaluation criteria for event type 1a. Value mapping: 0:0.0 dB 1:0.5 dB ... 6: 3.0 db .. 29: 14.5 dB Unit: 0.5 dB Change takes effect: Ongo UeMeasControl w1a 0 Weight factor to include active set cell s other than the best in evaluation criteria for event 1a. Used by UE functions for intra-frequency measurement reporting (in CELL_DCH).Unit: 0.1 Change takes e ffect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH) UeMeasControl hysteresis1a 0 Hysteresis used in addition-wind ow in evaluation criteria for event 1a to avoid ping pong effects. Used by UE fu nctions for intra-frequency measurement reporting in CELL_DCH. Value mapping: 0 : 0.0dB (no hysteresis) 1 : 0.5dB ... 15 : 7.5dB Unit: 0.5 dB C UeMeasControl timeToTrigger1a 11 Time between detection of event 1a and sending of the measurement report. Used by UE functions for intra-frequen cy measurement reporting in CELL_DCH.Value mapping: 0 : 0 ms 1 : 10 ms 2 : 20 ms 3 : 40 ms 4 : 60 ms 5 : 80 ms 6 : 100 ms 7 : 120 ms 8 : 160 ms UeMeasControl amountOfReporting1a 7 Number of reports when U

    E has reverted to event-triggered periodical reporting due to 'cell addition fai lure', for event type 1a. Used by UE functions for intra-frequency measurement r eporting (in CELL_DCH).This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson p UeMeasControl reportingInterval1a 3 Interval of event-trigge red periodical reporting in case of 'cell addition failure' or 'cell replacement failure'. Indicates the interval in seconds of periodical reporting triggered b y event 1a. Used by UE functions for intra-frequency measurement report UeMeasControl maxNumberRepCells1a 3 Maximum number of cells included in the report for event 1a.This attribute may only be changed by Ericss on personnel.Value mapping: 1 : Virtual/Active set cells + 1 2 : Virtual/Active set cells + 2 3 : Virtual/Active set cells + 3 4 : Virtual/Active set c UeMeasControl triggerCondOne1b 1 Specify the set of cells that shall be used in event 1b reporting evaluation.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 1: Active set cells Change takes ef fect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH) UeMeasControl reportingRange1b 10 Used by UE functions for intra-frequency measurement reporting (in CELL_DCH). Threshold used for drop wi ndow in evaluation criteria for event 1b. Value mapping: 0:0.0 dB 1:0.5 dB ... 1 0: 5.0 db .. 29: 14.5 dB Unit: 0.5 db Change takes effect: Ongoing conn UeMeasControl w1b 0 Weight factor to include active set cell s other than the best in evaluation criteria for event 1b. Used by UE functions for intra-frequency measurement reporting (in CELL_DCH).Unit: 0.1 Change takes e ffect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH) UeMeasControl hysteresis1b 0 Hysteresis used in the drop wind ow in evaluation criteria for event type 1b.Used by UE functions for intra-frequ ency measurement reporting in CELL_DCH. Value mapping: 0 : 0.0 dB (no hysteresis ) 1 : 0.5 dB ... 15 : 7.5 dB Unit: 0.5 dB Change takes effect: UeMeasControl timeToTrigger1b 12 Time between detection of event 1b and sending of the measurement report. Used by UE functions for intra-frequen cy measurement reporting in CELL_DCH. Value mapping: 0 : 0 ms 1 : 10 ms 2 : 20 m s 3 : 40 ms 4 : 60 ms 5 : 80 ms 6 : 100 ms 7 : 120 ms 8 : 160 m UeMeasControl hysteresis1c 2 Used by UE functions for intra-f requency measurement reporting (in CELL_DCH). Hysteresis used in replacement thr eshold in evaluation criteria for event 1c to avoid ping pong effects. Value map ping: 0:0.0 dB (no hysteresis) 1:0.5 dB 2:1.0 dB .. 15: 7.5 dB UeMeasControl timeToTrigger1c 11 Time between detection of event 1c and sending of the measurement report. Used by UE functions for intra-frequen cy measurement reporting in CELL_DCH. Value mapping: 0: 0 ms 1: 10 ms 2: 20 ms 3 : 40 ms 4: 60 ms 5: 80 ms 6: 100 ms 7: 120 ms 8: 160 ms 9: 200 UeMeasControl amountOfReporting1c 7 Maximum number of period ic reports at event-triggered periodic reporting for event 1c.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 1 1: 2 2: 4 ... 6: 64 7 : infinity Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CEL UeMeasControl reportingInterval1c 3 Interval of event-trigge red periodical reporting in case of 'cell addition failure' or 'cell replacement failure'. Indicates the interval in seconds of periodical reporting triggered b y event 1c. Used by UE functions for intra-frequency measurement report UeMeasControl maxNumberRepCells1c 3 Maximum number of cells included in the report for event 1c.This attribute may only be changed by Ericss on personnel.Value mapping: 1 : Virtual/Active set cells + 1 2 : Virtual/Active set cells + 2 3 : Virtual/Active set cells + 3 4 : Virtual/Active set c UeMeasControl hysteresis1d 15 Hysteresis used in drop window i n evaluation criteria for event type 1d. Used by UE functions for intra-frequenc y measurement reporting (in CELL_DCH). Value mapping: 0:0.0 dB (no hysteresis) 1 :0.5 dB 2:1.0 dB ... 15: 7.5 dB Unit: 0.5 dB Change takes effec UeMeasControl timeToTrigger1d 14 Time between detection of event 1d and sending of the measurement report. Value mapping: 0: 0 ms 1: 10 ms 2: 20 ms 3: 40 ms 4: 60 ms 5: 80 ms 6: 100 ms 7: 120 ms 8: 160 ms 9: 200 ms 10: 240 ms 11: 320 ms 12: 640 ms 13: 1280 ms 14: 2560 ms 15: 5000 ms Chan UeMeasControl readSfnInd 1 Indicates if reading of SFN is r

    equired for the target cell.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson perso nnel.Value mapping: 0 : False 1 : True Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH) UeMeasControl filterCoefficient2 2 Coefficient for layer 3 filtering before inter-frequency measurement reporting evaluation.Change takes e ffect: Ongoing connections (next time that 2d/2f measurements are started or mod ified) UeMeasControl usedFreqW2d 0 Weighting factor for event 2d fo r the used frequency.Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next ti me that 2d/2f measurements are started or modified) UeMeasControl hysteresis2d 0 Hysteresis for event 2d. Value m apping: 0:0.0 dB 1:0.5 dB ... 29: 14.5 dB Unit: 0.5 db Change takes effect: Ongo ing connections (next time that 2d/2f measurements are started or modified) UeMeasControl timeToTrigger2dEcno 320 Time between detection o f event 2d and sending of the measurement report, when the measurement quantity is CPICH EC/NO. Special values: When the value 5000 is set, the Measurement Cont rol message will not be sent at all. Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongo UeMeasControl usedFreqW2f 0 Weighting factor for event 2f fo r the used frequency.Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next ti me that 2d/2f measurements are started or modified) UeMeasControl hysteresis2f 0 Hysteresis for event 2f. Value m apping: 0:0.0 dB 1:0.5 dB ... 29: 14.5 dB Unit: 0.5 db Change takes effect: Ongo ing connections (next time that 2d/2f measurements are started or modified) UeMeasControl timeToTrigger2fEcno 1280 Time between detection o f event 2f and sending of the measurement report, when the measurement quantity is CPICH EC/NO. Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time tha t 2d/2f measurements are started or modified) UeMeasControl utranFilterCoefficient3 2 Coefficient for layer 3 filtering of UTRAN quality before inter-RAT reporting evaluation.Change takes ef fect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-RAT measurements are started) UeMeasControl gsmFilterCoefficient3 1 Coefficient for layer 3 filtering of GSM quality before inter-RAT reporting evaluation.Change takes effe ct: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-RAT measurements are started) UeMeasControl gsmTimeDiffRepInd 0 Indicates whether GSM ob served time difference shall be reported for GSM cells.This attribute may only b e changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0 : False 1 : True Change takes e ffect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-RAT measurements are s UeMeasControl utranW3a 0 Weighting factor for event 3a fo r UTRAN. Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inte r-RAT measurements are started) UeMeasControl gsmThresh3a -95 Threshold for event 3a for GSM. Range is valid for GSM carrier RSSI.Unit: dBm Change takes effect: Ongoing conne ctions (next time that inter-RAT measurements are started) UeMeasControl hysteresis3a 0 Hysteresis for event 3a. Value m apping: 0:0.0 dB ... 15: 7.5 dB Unit: 0.5 dB Change takes effect: Ongoing connec tions (next time that inter-RAT measurements are started) UeMeasControl timeToTrigger3a 6 Time between detection of event 3a and sending of the measurement report. Value mapping: 0: 0 ms 1: 10 ms 2: 20 ms 3: 40 ms 4: 60 ms 5: 80 ms 6: 100 ms 7: 120 ms 8: 160 ms 9: 200 ms 10: 240 ms 11: 320 ms 12: 640 ms 13: 1280 ms 14: 2560 ms 15: 5000 ms Chan UeMeasControl maxNumberRepCells1d 1 Maximum number of cells included in the report for event 1d.This attribute may only be changed by Ericss on personnel.Value mapping: 1: Virtual/Active set cells + 1 2: Virtual/Active se t cells + 2 3: Virtual/Active set cells + 3 4: Virtual/Active set cells UeMeasControl maxNumberRepCells3a 4 Maximum number of cells included in the report for event 3a. This attribute may only be changed by Erics son personnel. UeMeasControl filterCoeff6 3 Coefficient for layer 3 filterin g before UE internal measurement reporting evaluation, for event 6a and 6b. Chan ge takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH)

    UeMeasControl measQuant6 UE_TRANSMITTED_POWER(0) Measurement quan tity for UL connection quality reporting evaluation, for event 6a and 6b. This a ttribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH) UeMeasControl ueTxPowerThresh6b 18 Threshold for event 6b. Unit: dBm Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH) UeMeasControl timeTrigg6b 1280 Time between detection of event 6b and sending of the measurement report. Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH) UeMeasControl filterCoeff4_2b 2 Coefficient for layer 3 filterin g before inter-frequency reporting evaluation, for measurement 4 event 2b. Chang e takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-frequency measurements are started) UeMeasControl cellSyncInfoRepInd4_2b FALSE(0) Indicates if cel l synchronization information shall be reported for cells in the Virtual Active Set(s), for measurement 4 event 2b. This attribute may only be changed by Ericss on personnel.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-fre UeMeasControl ueAutoUpdateMode4_2b ON_WITH_NO_REPORTING(2) Indicate s if UE autonomous update of the Virtual Active Set(s) shall be done or not, for measurement 4 event 2b. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personne l.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-frequency measu rements UeMeasControl usedFreqW4_2b 0 Weighting factor for measurement 4 event 2b for the currently used frequency. Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect: Ong oing connections (next time that inter-frequency measurements are started) UeMeasControl hyst4_2b 10 Hysteresis for measurement 4 eve nt 2b. Unit: 0.1 dB Resolution: 5 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-frequency measurements are started) UeMeasControl timeTrigg4_2b 100 Time between detection of event 2b and sending of the measurement report, for measurement 4. Unit: ms Change tak es effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-frequency measurements are started) UeMeasControl nonUsedFreqThresh4_2bEcno -10 Threshold for me asurement 4 event 2b for the non-used frequencies when the measurement quantity is Ec/No. Unit: dB Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inte r-frequency measurements are started) UeMeasControl nonUsedFreqThresh4_2bRscp -100 Threshold for me asurement 4 event 2b for the non-used frequencies when the measurement quantity is RSCP. Unit: dBm Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inte r-frequency measurements are started) UeMeasControl usedFreqThresh2dEcnoDrnc -13 Threshold for ev ent 2d for the used frequency for cells located in DRNC when the measurement qua ntity is Ec/No. Note: This parameter is also used for calculation of a threshold value for the used frequency for 2f events. The calculated value is sent to th UeMeasControl usedFreqThresh2dRscpDrnc -105 Threshold for ev ent 2d for the used frequency for cells located in the DRNC when the measurement quantity is RSCP. Note: This parameter is also used for calculation of a thresh old value for the used frequency for 2f events. The calculated value is sent to UeMeasControl usedFreqRelThresh2fEcno 2 Relative threshold for e vent 2f versus event 2d for the used frequency when the measurement quantity is Ec/No. Note: This parameter is used for calculation of a threshold value for the used frequencyfor 2f events. The calculated value is sent to the UE in UeMeasControl usedFreqRelThresh2fRscp 3 Relative threshold for e vent 2f versus event 2d for the used frequency when the measurement quantity is RSCP. Note: This parameter is used for calculation of a threshold value for the used frequencyfor 2f events. The calculated value is sent to the UE in UeMeasControl nonUsedFreqW4_2b 0 Weighting factor for mea surement 4 event 2b for the non-used frequencies. Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-frequency measurements are started) UeMeasControl maxNumbRepCells4_2b 2 Maximum number of cells

    per reported non-used frequency included in the report for measurement 4 event 2 b. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-frequency measurements are s UeMeasControl hsQualityEstimate CPICH_RSCP(1) Indicates whethe r it is CPICH Ec/N0 or CPICH RSCP that should be used for indicating best cell f or HS-DSCH cell selection and HS-DSCH cell change. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to HS-DSCH) UeMeasControl hsHysteresis1d 10 Hysteresis value for event 1D fo r HS connections. Unit: 0.1 dB Resolution: 5 Change takes effect: Ongoing connec tions (next switch to HS-DSCH) UeMeasControl hsTimeToTrigger1d 640 Sets the Event 1D Time t o Trigger value specific for HS connections Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongoin g connections (next switch to HS-DSCH) UeMeasControl utranRelThresh3aEcno 0 Relative threshold for e vent 3a versus event 2d, when the 2d measurement with measurement quantity CPICH EC/NO was started. This parameter is used to compute the absolute 3a Ec/No thre shold, by adding it to the current 2d Ec/No threshold (absolute 3a Ec/N UeMeasControl utranRelThresh3aRscp 0 Relative threshold for e vent 3a versus event 2d when the 2d measurement with measurement quantity CPICH RSCP was started. This parameter is used to compute the absolute 3a RSCP thresho ld, by adding it to the current 2d RSCP threshold (absolute 3a RSCP thr UeMeasControl usedFreqRelThresh4_2bEcno 0 Relative thresho ld for event 2b versus event 2d, when the 2d measurement with measurement quanti ty CPICH EC/NO was started. This parameter is used to compute the absolute 2b Ec /No used frequency threshold, by adding it to the current 2d Ec/No threshold (a UeMeasControl usedFreqRelThresh4_2bRscp 0 Relative thresho ld for event 2b versus event 2d when the 2d measurement with measurement quantit y CPICH RSCP was started. This parameter is used to compute the absolute 2b Rscp threshold, by adding it to the current 2d Rscp threshold (absolute 2b Rscp use UeMeasControl timeToTrigger2dRscp 320 Time between detection o f event 2d and sending of the measurement report, when the measurement quantity is CPICH RSCP. Special values: When the value 5000 is set, the Measurement Contr ol message will not be sent at all. Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongoi UeMeasControl timeToTrigger2fRscp 1280 Time between detection o f event 2f and sending of the measurement report, when the measurement quantity is CPICH RSCP. Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that 2d/2f measurements are started or modified) UeMeasControl utranRelThreshRscp 5 Relative threshold used during bad connection quality, when the measurement quantity is CPICH RSCP. This parameter is used to compute the absolute RSCP threshold for the used frequency for 3a or 2b measurements, when bad connection quality has been trigge UeMeasControl utranThresh3aForcedGsm 0 UTRAN threshold for even t 3a for Service/Load Based GSM Handover measurements using measurement quantity CPICH Ec/No. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: dB Change takes effect: New connections UeMeasControl event1dRncThreshold 2 Number of consecutive ti mes that event 1a and/or event 1c measurement reports must be received proposing to add a particular cell to the active set, where the proposed cell does not ha ve the capabilities required to provide the same level of service as th UeMeasControl event1dRncOffset 2 Offset added to the cell measurements received in event 1a and/or event 1c measurement reports, when det ermining whether to trigger event 1d-RNC.Received 1a / 1c event reports proposin g to add a cell to the active set, where the proposed cell does not hav UeMeasControl timeToTrigger6d 320 Time between detection of event 6d and sending of the measurement report Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongoing c onnections (next switch to CELL_DCH) UeMeasControl txPowerConnQualMonEnabled 0 Defines whether connection quality monitoring, using Tx Power Measurements is enabled or not. Ch ange takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH) UeMeasControl usedFreqGanThreshEcNo -13 Quality threshold for ev

    ent 3a measurements for the used frequency when there are no GSM cells in the li st. This threshold is used when only GAN measurements are active and the UE is n ot in GAN Preferred Mode. When both GSM and GAN measurements are active UePositioning UePositioningId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1. UePositioning enabledPositioningFeatures 0 Enables and disa bles the different UE positioning features, which are optional. Dependencies: It is not possible to enable A-GPS unless an instance of the MO Class GpsReceiver has been created.It is also not possible to delete that instance if A-GPS is en UePositioning clientTypeMapping Mapping between Client T ype and Service Class. Change takes effect:Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction) UePositioning cellIdPosQualities Typical QoS parameters f or the Cell Id positioning method. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (nex t positioning transaction) UePositioning clientTypeMapping.lawfulInterceptServices 0 The service class valid for the lawful intercept services client type. UePositioning clientTypeMapping.plmnOperAnonymousStatistics 0 The service class valid for the plmn operator anonymous statistics client type. UePositioning clientTypeMapping.plmnOperBroadcastServices 0 The service class valid for the plmn operator Broadcast services client type. UePositioning clientTypeMapping.plmnOperOm 0 The service clas s valid for PLMN operator O&M Client type. UePositioning clientTypeMapping.plmnOperServices 0 The serv ice class valid for the plmn operator services client type. UePositioning clientTypeMapping.plmnOperTargetMsServiceSupport 0 The service class valid for the plmn operator target MS service support client type. UePositioning clientTypeMapping.valueAddedServices 0 The serv ice class valid for the value added services client type. UePositioning cellIdPosQualities.accuracyCodeTypical 0 Expected accuracy code of the positioning method, to be used in the selection of the pos itioning method for the first positioning attempt.The uncertainty radius of a ci rcular uncertainty measure (in meters) is related to the accuracy code by: Radiu s = 10 UePositioning cellIdPosQualities.confidenceEstimate 95 Expected confidence of the positioning method to be used for shape Conversion.Unit: % UePositioning cellIdPosQualities.responseTimeTypical 700 Expected response time of the positioning method to be used in the selection of the posi tioning method for the first positioning attempt. Unit: msResolution: 100 UePositioning cellIdPosQualities.verticalAccuracyCodeTypical 0 Expected vertical accuracy code of the positioning method, to be used in the sel ection of the positioning method for the first positioning attempt.The uncertain ty (in meters) is related to the vertical accuracy code by: Uncertainty = 45 x ( 1.025^verticalA UeRabType UeRabTypeId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. UeRabType trafficClass Traffic class for the RAB type.D efines the type of an application for which the RAB is optimized. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: Conversational 1: S treaming 2: Interactive 3: Background UeRabType assymetryInd RAB asymmetry indicator. This at tribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: Symmetric Bi directional 1: Asymmetric Unidirectional DL 2: Asymmetric Unidirectional UL 3: A symmetric Bidirectional UeRabType maxBitRateDl Maximum bit rate in downlink dir ection. Use of value is based on the RAB asymmetry indicator. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bps UeRabType maxBitRateUl Maximum bit rate in uplink direc tion. Use of value is based on the RAB asymmetry indicator. This attribute may o

    nly be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bps UeRabType maxSduSize Maximum SDU size. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bit UeRabType transferDelay Transfer delay.Indicates maximum delay for 95th percentile of the distribution of delivered SDUs during the life time of a bearer service, where delay for an SDU is defined as the time from a r equest to transfer of an SDU at one SAP to its delivery to the UeRabType trafficHandlingPriority Traffic handling priorit y. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRabType sourceStatisticsDescriptor Specifies the ch aracteristics of the source of submitted SDUs. This attribute may only be change d by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: Speech 1: Unknown UeRabType ingressBitRateAverage Ingress bit rate average . Traffic descriptor parameter for the connection between the RNC and CN. This a ttribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 0 bps 1: 64 bps ... 32000: 2048000 bps (2048 kbps) Unit: 64 bps UeRabType ingressBitRatePeak Ingress bit rate peak. T raffic descriptor parameter for the connection between the RNC and CN. This attr ibute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 0 bps 1: 64 bp s ... 32000: 2048000 bps (2048 kbps) Unit: 64 bps UeRabType egressBitRateAverage Egress bit rate average. Traffic descriptor parameter for the connection between the RNC and CN. This at tribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 0 bps 1: 64 bps ... 32000: 2048000 bps (2048 kbps) Unit: 64 bps UeRabType egressBitRatePeak Egress bit rate peak. Tr affic descriptor parameter for the connection between the RNC and CN. This attri bute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 0 bps 1: 64 bps ... 32000: 2048000 bps (2048 kbps) Unit: 64 bps UeRabType ingressSscsSduSizeAverage Ingress SsCs SDU Size Average. Traffic Descriptor parameter for the connection between the RNC a nd CN. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: octet UeRabType ingressSscsSduSizePeak Ingress SsCs SDU Size Pe ak. Traffic Descriptor parameter for the connection between the RNC and CN. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: octet UeRabType egressSscsSduSizeAverage Egress SsCs SDU Size Average. Traffic Descriptor parameter for the connection between the RNC an d CN. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: octet UeRabType egressSscsSduSizePeak Egress SsCs SDU Size Pea k. Traffic Descriptor parameter for the connection between the RNC and CN. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: octet UeRabType iucInitTimer Time to wait for CN response to an Iu-c initialization procedure. After this length of time, if no response has been received, RNC repeats the initialization procedure. The maximum number of r epeated attempts is defined in noIucInitRep. This attribute may UeRabType noIucInitRep Number of repeated attempts to i nitialize the Iu user plane protocol, when it has failed. This attribute may onl y be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0 is used to indicate that no IucInitRep is not in use. Change takes effect: New connections UeRabType rabType Identifies what kind of radio access bea rer this MO instance represents. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRabType dchFrameSynchRef Reference to DchFrameSyn ch MO. UeRc UeRcId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. UeRc userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. UeRc stopCfnOffset Used to determine the value to which IE CM Configuration Change CFN (RNSAP and NBAP) and TGPS reconfiguration CFN (RRC) shall be set when stopping compressed mode. This attribute may only be changed b

    y Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 1: 100 2: 150 3: 20 UeRc gsmHoAllowed Enables/disables the possibility of HO f rom UMTS to GSM per RAB type. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson per sonnel.Value mapping: 0 : not allowed1 : allowed Change takes effect: Ongoing co nnections (next change of RC state) UeRc rcState State of the radio connection. This attribute ma y only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: See UeRc class descriptio n for list of possible values and their interpretation. Dependencies:This attrib ute has the same value as the value part of the UeRc ifhoAllowed Enables/disables the possibility of IFHO per RAB state. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next change of RC state) UeRc resService This parameter specifies the RES service which the UeRc belongs to. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson perso nnel. UeRc serviceOffset2dEcno Service-specific offset for even t 2d when the measurement quantity is Ec/No.For each cell in the Active Set, the cell parameter UtranCell::usedFreqThresh2dEcno or the RNC parameter Handover::u sedFreqThresh2dEcnoDrnc is retrieved, depending on if the cell UeRc serviceOffset2dRscp Service-specific offset for even t 2d when the measurement quantity is RSCP.For each cell in the Active Set, the cell parameter UtranCell::usedFreqThresh2dRscp or the RNC parameter Handover::us edFreqThresh2dRscpDrnc is retrieved, depending on if the cell i UeRc preferredCpmMethUl Preferred compressed mode method for the uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: Next state transition UeRc preferredCpmMethDl Preferred compressed mode method for the downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Chan ge takes effect: Next state transition UeRc spare 0 Spare attribute. It is intended for temporary so lutions and its usage may vary depending on RNC release. UeRc connectionCapability Indicates which capabilities are supported by a specific UeRc.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson per sonnel.Change takes effect: Next reconfiguration UeRc ganHoAllowed Enables/disables handover from UMTS to G AN.Dependencies: Not used if the license ganMobility is not active.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next change of RC state)This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRc connectionCapability.cpcSupport Capability information i ndicating this UeRc is CPC compatible. Change takes effect: Next reconfiguration UeRc connectionCapability.fdpchSupport Capability infor mation indicating if F-DPCH is supported by this UeRc. UeRc connectionCapability.multiCarrierSupport Capabili ty information indicating if Multi Carrier is supported by this UeRc. Change tak es effect: New connection UeRcEdchFlow UeRcEdchFlowId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. UeRcEdchFlow harqTransmUlMax For 10 ms TTI: 4 For 2 ms TTI: 8 Maximum number of HARQ transmissions for E-DCH. UeRcEdchFlow macdPowerOffset E-DCH MAC-d power offset used by the Outer loop power control function. This attribute may only be changed by Er icsson personnel.Unit: dB UeRcEdchFlow harqTransmUlTarget Targeted number of HARQ transmissions in the uplink. It is recommended that the value of this attribute should be the same for all flows under a specific UeRc instance. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcEdchFlow transmissionGrantType Indicates whether schedu led or non-scheduled grant info applies for the EUL MAC-d flow. This attribute m ay only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcEdchFlow t1eTimerUl Time that the re-ordering entity

    should wait for an outstanding MAC-es PDU. It is recommended that the value of this attribute should be the same for all flows under a specific UeRc instance. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: UeRcEdchFlow rbType Identifies what kind of radio bearer thi s MO instance represents. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personn el.Special values: Only the values RB_RRC, RB_PS_INTERACTIVE and RB_PS_INTERACTI VE_2 are applicable for this attribute and MO (even tho UeRcEdchFlow tti TTI for E-DCH Unit: ms UeRcEdchGainFactors UeRcEdchGainFactorsId Naming attribute .Contains the value part of the RDN. UeRcEdchGainFactors edpdchGainFactorUl Reference gain f actor for the UL E-DPDCH reference transport format 1. This attribute may only b e changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcEdchGainFactors referenceEtfci Reference E-TFCI for sig naled E-DPDCH gain factors. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson perso nnel.Specification: 3GPP 25.321 UeRcEdchGainFactors tfInd Transport format indicator. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcHsdsch UeRcHsdschId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. UeRcHsdsch macHsWindowSize MAC-hs/MAC-ehs window size used in the RBS and the UE for MAC-hs/MAC-ehs data transfer. The parameter value sett ing is signaled via NBAP and RRC. If MIMO or Multi-Carrier is used for a HS-DSCH connection, the value signaled is min(32, 2 * macHsWindowSize) UeRcHsdsch discardTimer Time to live for a MAC-hs SDU st arting from the instant of its arrival into an HSDPA Priority Queue. The RBS sha ll use this information to discard out-of-data MAC-hs SDUs from the HSDPA Priori ty Queues. The parameter value setting is signaled via NBAP. Th UeRcHsdsch timerT1 Time to live for MAC-hs SDU. The Re-orde ring release timer T1 controls the stall avoidance in the UE reordering buffer. The parameter value setting is signaled via NBAP and RRC. This attribute may onl y be changed by Ericsson personnel. Unit: ms UeRcHsdsch macHsReorderingBufferSize MAC-hs reorderin g buffer size. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: kB (1000 bytes) UeRcHsdsch rbType Identifies what kind of radio bearer thi s MO instance represents.Special values: Only the values RB_RRC, RB_PS_INTERACTI VE_HS, RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_HS_2, RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_HS_3, and RB_PS_STREAMING_HS ar e applicable for this attribute and MO (even though the UeRcPhyChDl UeRcPhyChDlId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. UeRcPhyChDl spreadingFactor Spreading factor. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: SF 4 1: SF 8 2: SF 16 3: SF 32 4: SF 64 5: SF 128 6: SF 256 7: SF 512 UeRcPhyChDl dpchSlotFormat Indicates which message part for mat the DPCH shall use. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel . UeRcPhyChDl tfciPresenceIndicator TFCI presence indicator. This has the same meaning as the RRC parameter TFCI existence. DPCH info. This a ttribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: No= TFCI no t present; same as TFCI existence = FALSE 1: Yes = TFCI present; sa UeRcPhyChDl noTfc Current number of TFCs. This attribute m ay only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcPhyChDl fixFlexPosition Fixed or flexible position for T rCH onDPCH. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mappi ng: 0: FIXED 1: FLEXIBLE UeRcPhyChDl noPilotBits Number of pilot bits for DPCH. T he number of pilot bits needs to be signaled to the UE in case the downlink phys ical connection uses spreading factor 128 or 256. In all other cases the UE calc ulates the number of pilot bits based on slot format informatio

    UeRcPhyChEdch UeRcPhyChEdchId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. UeRcPhyChEdch edpcchGainFactorUl Gain factor for the UL E -DPCCH. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcPhyChEdch edchMinimumSetEtfci E-DCH minimum set E-TFCI . This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Specification: 3GPP 2 5.321 UeRcPhyChEdch puncturingLimitUl Puncturing limit when in creasing the number of used channelization codes.Only applies when the number of code channels is less than the maximum allowed by the UE capability and restric tions imposed by UTRAN. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson UeRcPhyChEdch tti TTI for E-DCH. This attribute may only b e changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: ms UeRcPhyChEdch etfciTableIndex E-TFCI table index. This attribu te may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Specification: 3GPP 25.321 UeRcPhyChEdch eulHarqRv INCR_REDUND(1) Controls if Chase Combin ing or Incremental Redundancy shall be used as the Redundancy Version. The param eter controls whether the Information Element HARQ RV Configuration in RRC is se t to rv0 or rvtable. UeRcPhyChEdch edpdchGainFactorMinReduced Minimum reduced E-DPDCH gain factor.When E-DCH is configured, if the total UE transmit power (af ter applying DPCCH power adjustments and gain factors) would exceed the availabl e maximum power, the UE shall firstly reduce the E-DPDCH power with the E-DPDCH UeRcPhyChUl UeRcPhyChUlId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. UeRcPhyChUl spreadingFactor Spreading factor. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: SF 4 1: SF 8 2: SF 16 3: SF 32 4: SF 64 5: SF 128 6: SF 256 7: SF 512 UeRcPhyChUl dpcchSlotFormat Indicateswhich message part form at the DPCH shall use for DPCCH. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcPhyChUl tfciPresenceIndicator TFCI presence indicator. DPCH info. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mappi ng: 0: No= TFCI not present 1: Yes = TFCI present UeRcPhyChUl noTfc Current number of TFCs. This attribute m ay only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcPhyChUl punctureLimit The maximum amount of puncturing for DCH in uplink rate matching. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 40 % 1: 44 % 2: 48 % ... 15: 100 % Unit: % UeRcRab UeRcRabId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. UeRcRab rbType Identifies what kind of radio bearer this MO ins tance represents. Value RB_RRC is not applicable for this attribute and MO (but is nonetheless allowed to be set). This attribute may only be changed by Ericsso n personnel. UeRcRab fcState 0 Determines if the Iub Flow Control is going to b e applied for PS Interactive RAB in the current Rc state. UeRcRb UeRcRbId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. UeRcRb rbType Identifies what kind of radio bearer this MO ins tance represents. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Speci al values: Value RB_PACKET_ADCH, RB_PACKET_ADCH_2, RB_PACKET_ADCH_3and RB_STREAM ING_ADCH are not applicable for this attribute UeRcRb rlcLogChType RLC Logical Channel Type. RLC info commo n to RNC side and UE side This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personn el.Value mapping: 0: DCCH Dedicated Control Ch. Valid only on DCS side 1: DTCH D edicated Traffic Ch.Valid only on DCS side 2: BCCH Broa UeRcRb rlcMode RLC transport mode. RLC info common to RNC side and UE side. It is assumed that the same value is used for both DL and UL. 0: Ac knowledged (AM) 1: Transparent (TM) 2: Unacknowledged (UM) This attribute may on

    ly be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcRb rncTimerPoll Timer poll, started when poll is transmi tted. New poll is sent when timer expires and no STATUS is received. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by E ricsson personnel.Special values: 0: not usedUnit: ms UeRcRb rncTimerStatusProhibit Minimum time between STATUS repo rts. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0: not usedUnit: ms UeRcRb rncLastPduInTransmPoll Indicates if poll at last PDU in transmission buffer is used or not. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mo de = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: poll not used 1: poll used UeRcRb rncLastPduInReTransmPoll Indicates if poll at las t PDU in retransmission buffer is used or not. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Valu e mapping: 0: poll not used 1: poll used UeRcRb rncMissingPduIndicator Indicates if RNC should send a S TATUS report for each detected PDU missing. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value m apping: 0: RNC shall not send STATUS reports 1: RNC shall send UeRcRb rncTransmissionWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PD Us sent without getting them acknowledged. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for SRB with RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel . UeRcRb rncReceivingWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PDUs in th e receiving buffer. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for SRB with RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcRb rncInSequenceDelivery Indicates if in-sequence deliver y shall be used or not. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = UM and A M. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: th e value can be configured but in-sequence delivery will still b UeRcRb rncMaxDat Determines the number oftransmissions of a PDU before a SDU is discarded or reset procedure is initiated. The maximum nu mber of transmissions of a PDU equals MaxDat-1. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed UeRcRb rncMaxRst Determines the maximum number oftransmis sions of a reset PDU. The maximum number of transmissions of a reset PDU equals MaxRst-1. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcRb rncTimerRst Timer used for retransmission of reset P DU.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0: n ot usedUnit: ms UeRcRb rncTimerPollProhibit Minimum time between polls. Used in RNC.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0: not usedUnit: ms UeRcRb rncPollSdu Number of SDUs, interval between polling . This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0: at tribute not used UeRcRb rncPollWindow Percentage of transmission windows, thre shold for polling. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Spec ial values: 0: not used Unit: % UeRcRb rncPollPdu Number of PDUs, interval between polling s. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0: n ot used UeRcRb ueSduDiscardMode Transmission SDU discard mode. R LC info on UE side UL.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.V alue mapping: 0: Timer Based Explicit (can be configured but is not used) 1: Tim er Based No Explicit (can be configured but is not used) 2: Max UeRcRb ueMaxDat Determines the number of transmissions o f a PDU before a SDU is discarded or reset procedure is initiated. The number of

    transmissions is equal to MaxDat - 1. RLC info on UE side UL.Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Erics UeRcRb ueTransmissionWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PD Us sent without getting them acknowledged.RLC info on UE side UL.Valid only for SRB with RLC mode = AM.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Value mapping: 0:1 Max PDU sent 1:8 2:16 3:32 4:64 5:128 6:256 7:512 8: UeRcRb ueTimerRst Timer used for retransmission of reset P DU. RLC info on UE side UL.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson person nel.Value mapping: 0:50ms 1:100ms 2:150ms.. 11: 600 ms 12: 700 ms .. 15: 1000 ms Unit: ms UeRcRb ueMaxRst The maximum number of transmissions of r eset PDU equals MaxRst-1. RLC info on UE side UL.This attribute may only be chan ged by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: MaxRst =1 1:4 2:6 3:8 4: 12 5: 16 6: 24 7: MaxRst=32 UeRcRb ueTimerPollProhibit Minimum time between polls. RLC polling info on UE side UL.Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values:-1: not used10..550 ms with res olution 10 600..1000ms with resolution 50 Unit: ms UeRcRb ueTimerPoll Timer poll, started when poll is transmi tted. New poll is sent when timer expires and no STATUS is received. RLC polling info on UE side UL.Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be cha nged by Ericsson personnel.Special values: -1: not used UeRcRb ueLastTxPduPoll Last PDU in transmission poll. RLC polli ng info on UE side UL.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.V alue mapping: 0: not last PDU in Transmission Poll 1: last PDU in Transmission P oll UeRcRb ueLastReTxPduPoll Last PDU in retransmission poll. RLC polling info on UE side UL.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson p ersonnel.Value mapping: 0: not last PDU in Retransmission Poll 1: last PDU in Re transmission Poll UeRcRb ueInSequenceDelivery Indicates whether in-sequence de livery shall be used. It is assumed that the same value is used for both DL and UL. RLC info on UE side DL. Valid for RLC mode = AM and UM. This attribute may o nly be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: in-seque UeRcRb ueReceivingWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PDUs in th e receiving buffer.RLC info on UE side DL. Valid only for SRB with RLC mode = AM .This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0:1 PDU in buffer 1:8 2:16 3:32 4:64 5:128 6:256 7:512 8:768 9:1024 10 UeRcRb ueTimerStatusProhibit Minimum time between STATUS repo rts. RLC info on UE side DL. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may on ly be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values:-1: not used10..550 ms with r esolution 10 600..1000ms with resolution 50 Unit: ms UeRcRb ueMissingPduIndicator Indicates if UE should send a ST ATUS report for each detected PDU missing. This value is also used in DL RLC Sta tus Info sent on RRC. RLC info on UE side DL. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapp UeRcRb uePollSdu Number of SDUs, interval between polling s. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: -1Att ribute not used. 01 SDU interval14 SDU intervals216 SDU intervals364 SDU interva ls UeRcRb uePollPdu Number of SDUs, interval between polling . This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: -1Attr ibute not used. 01 PDU interval12 PDU interval24 PDU interval38 PDU interval416 PDU interval532 PDU interval664 PDU interval7128 PDU in UeRcRb uePollWindow Percentage of transmission windows, thre shold for polling. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Spec ial values: 0: not used Unit: % UeRcRb trChId Transport Channel Identity (DCH Id) which gives the association between RB and Transport Channel. RB Mapping Info.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.

    UeRcRb logChMux Logical Channel Multiplexing indicator i n MacD. RB Mapping Info.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel .Value mapping: 0: multiplexing is notperformed 1: multiplexing is performed UeRcRb trChTypeDl Transport Channel Type DL. RB Mapping In fo. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: D CH 1: FACH 2: DSCH 3: HS-DSCH UeRcRb trChTypeUl Transport Channel Type UL. RB Mapping In fo.Valid for RLC mode = UM, AM and TM. This attribute may only be changed by Eri csson personnel.Value mapping: -1: Not Applicable 0: DCH 1: RACH 2: CPCH 3: E-DC H UeRcRb rbUser Identifies the user of this radio bearer. This a ttribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcRbRlc UeRcRbRlcId UeRcRbRlc tti Identifies the uplink TTI of this instan ce. Possible values: -1 (Not Used), 2 (2ms), 10 (10ms) This attribute may only b e used by Ericsson personnel. UeRcRbRlc flexibleRlc Identifies whether this instance supports fixed or flexible PDU size.Possible values: -1 (Not Used), 0 (Fixed), 1 (Flexible) This attribute may only be used by Ericsson personnel. UeRcRbRlc maxMacdPduSizeExtended Maximum Flexible RLC PDU size. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Dependencies: T he value used for this RAB is the minimum of maxMacdPduSizeExtended and IurLink: :maxMacdPduSizeExtended Unit: bytes Change takes effect: New connection UeRcRbRlc rncMaxDat Determines the number oftransmis sions of a PDU before a SDU is discarded or reset procedure is initiated. The ma ximum number of transmissions of a PDU equals MaxDat-1. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcRbRlc rncMaxRst Determines the maximum number of transmissions of a reset PDU. The maximum number of transmissions of a reset PDU equals MaxRst-1. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcRbRlc rncPollWindow Percentage of transmission windo ws, threshold for polling. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson person nel.Unit: % UeRcRbRlc rncReceivingWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PD Us in the receiving buffer. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcRbRlc rncTimerPoll Timer poll, started when poll is transmitted. New poll is sent when timer expires and no STATUS is received. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be chan ged by Ericsson personnel.Unit: ms UeRcRbRlc rncTimerRst Timer used for retransmission of reset PDU.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: ms UeRcRbRlc rncTimerStatusProhibit Minimum time between STA TUS reports. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: ms UeRcRbRlc rncTransmissionWindowSize Maximum number o f RLC PDUs sent without getting them acknowledged. RLC info on RNC side. Valid o nly for RLC mode = AM.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcRbRlc ueMaxDat Determines the number of transmi ssions of a PDU before a SDU is discarded or reset procedure is initiated. The n umber of transmissions is equal to MaxDat - 1. This attribute may only be change d by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 2: MaxDat = 3 3: 4 4: 5 UeRcRbRlc ueMaxRst The maximum number of transmissi ons of reset PDU equals MaxRst-1. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: MaxRst =1 1:4 2:6 3:8 4: 12 5: 16 6: 24 7: MaxRst=3 2 UeRcRbRlc uePollWindow Percentage of transmission windo ws, threshold for polling. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson person nel.Unit: % UeRcRbRlc ueReceivingWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PD

    Us in the receiving buffer.RLC info on UE side DL. Valid only for SRB with RLC m ode = AM.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0:1 PDU in buffer 1:8 2:16 3:32 4:64 5:128 6:256 7:512 8:768 9:1024 10 UeRcRbRlc ueTimerPoll Timer poll, started when poll is transmitted. New poll is sent when timer expires and no STATUS is received. RLC polling info on UE side UL.Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may onl y be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 10.. 550 ms w UeRcRbRlc ueTimerRst Timer used for retransmission of reset PDU. RLC info on UE side UL.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsso n personnel.Value mapping: 0:50ms 1:100ms 2:150ms.. 11: 600 ms 12: 700 ms .. 15: 1000 ms Unit: ms UeRcRbRlc ueTimerStatusProhibit Minimum time between STA TUS reports. RLC info on UE side DL. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribut e may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 10..550 ms with resol ution 10 600..1000ms with resolution 50 Unit: ms UeRcRbRlc ueTransmissionWindowSize Maximum number o f RLC PDUs sent without getting them acknowledged. RLC info on UE side UL. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personne l.Value mapping: 0:1 Max PDU sent 1:8 2:16 3:32 4:64 5:128 6:256 7:512 8:768 9: UeRcTrCh UeRcTrChId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. UeRcTrCh trChId Transport Channel Identity. This attribu te may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh rbType Identifies what kind of radio bearer thi s MO instance represents. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personn el.Special values: Values RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_HS, RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_2, RB_PS_INTER ACTIVE_3, RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_HS_2, RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_HS_ UeRcTrCh dchFpId DCH Frame Protocol Identity. This is the group that a DCH belongs to. In case of coordinated DCHs, all of them shall hav e the same attribute value. Frame Handling parameter. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh frameHandlingPriority Frame Handling Priority. Frame Handling parameter. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson person nel.Value mapping: 0: Lowest priority ... 15: Highest priority UeRcTrCh payloadCrcPresenceIndicator Payload Cyclic R edundancy Check (CRC) usage indicator (to SP and NBAP/RRC). Frame Handling param eter. Note: NBAP/RRC messages use the opposite enumeration as shown below. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0:False 1:Tr UeRcTrCh ulFpMode UL Format Protocol (NBAP). Frame Handling parameter. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Va lue mapping: -1: Not Applicable 0:Normal 1:Silent UeRcTrCh blerQualityTargetDl BLER quality target in t he downlink. This attribute is valid only if CRC is used. MOM value = 10 Log10(t ransport channel highest quality (BLER)) Value mapping: -63: 0.0000005 = 0.00005 % ... -60: 0.000001 = 0.0001 % ... -25: 0.003 = 0.3 % ... -20: 0.01 = UeRcTrCh blerQualityTargetUl BLER quality target in t he uplink. This attribute is valid only if CRC is used. MOM value = 10 Log10(tra nsport channel highest quality (BLER)) Value mapping: -63: 0.0000005 = 0.00005 % ... -60: 0.000001 = 0.0001 % ... -25: 0.003 = 0.3 % ... -20: 0.01 = 1 UeRcTrCh noTfDl Current number of TFs defined in downlin k. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf0Dl Transport block size for this TF in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bit s UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf0Dl Number of transport blocks for t his TF in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf1Dl Transport block size for this TF in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bit s UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf1Dl Number of transport blocks for t

    his TF in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf2Dl Transport block size for this TF in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bit s UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf2Dl Number of transport blocks for t his TF in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf3Dl Transport block size for this TF in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bit s UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf3Dl Number of transport blocks for t his TF in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf4Dl Transport block size for this TF in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bit s UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf4Dl Number of transport blocks for t his TF in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf5Dl Transport block size for this TF in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bit s UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf5Dl Number of transport blocks for t his TF in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh ttiDl Transmission time interval in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 10 ms 1: 20 ms 2: 40 ms 3: 80 msUnit: ms UeRcTrCh chCodingTypeDl Channel coding type in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: No C oding 1: Convolutional 2: Turbo UeRcTrCh chCodingRateDl Channel coding rate in downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: Codi ng rate = 1/2 1: Coding rate = 1/3 UeRcTrCh rateMatchingAttrDl Rate matching attribute in downlink. This attribute may only be used by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh crcSizeDl CRC size in downlink. This attri bute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 0 bits 1: 8 2: 12 3: 16 4: 24 bits Unit: bits UeRcTrCh noTfUl Current number of TFs defined in uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: -1: No t Applicable UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf0Ul Transport block size for this TF in uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bits UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf0Ul Number of transport blocks for t his TF in uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf1Ul Transport block size for this TF in uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bits UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf1Ul Number of transport blocks for t his TF in uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf2Ul Transport block size for this TF in uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bits UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf2Ul Number of transport blocks for t his TF in uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf3Ul Transport block size for this TF in uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bits UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf3Ul Number of transport blocks for t his TF in uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf4Ul Transport block size for this TF in uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bits UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf4Ul Number of transport blocks for t his TF in uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf5Ul Transport block size for this TF in uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bits

    UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf5Ul Number of transport blocks for t his TF in uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. UeRcTrCh ttiUl Transmission Time Interval in uplink. Th is attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: -1: Not Ap plicable 0: 10 ms 1: 20 ms 2: 40 ms 3: 80 msUnit: ms UeRcTrCh chCodingTypeUl Channel coding type in uplink. T his attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: No Cod ing 1: Convolutional 2: Turbo UeRcTrCh chCodingRateUl Channel coding rate in uplink. T his attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: -1: Not A pplicable 0: Coding rate = 1/2 1: Coding rate = 1/3 UeRcTrCh rateMatchingAttrUl Rate matching attribute in uplink. This attribute may only be used by Ericsson personnel.Special values: -1: Not Applicable UeRcTrCh crcSizeUl CRC size in uplink. This attribu te may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: -1: Not Applicable 0 : 0 bits 1: 8 2: 12 3: 16 4: 24 bits Unit: bits UeRcTrCh maxTfSubset Array of the maximum Transport F ormats (TFIs) allowed for this TrCH. The first element in the array specifies th e maximum TFI for TFC Subset 0, the second element specifies the maximum TFI for TFC Subset 1, and so forth. The attribute must have all elemen UeRrcType UeRrcTypeId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. UeRrcType dchFrameSynchRef Reference to DchFrameSyn ch MO. UniSaalProfile UniSaalProfileId The value component of t he RDN. UniSaalProfile userLabel Label for free use. UniSaalProfile reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. UniSaalProfile profileData The profile data. UniSaalProfile profileData.congestionAbatement 30 The percentage o f the buffer for which congestion is stopped. When the current send buffer occup ancy for a Termination Point (TP) decreases below congestionAbatement, a congest ion ceased indication is sent to the user of this TP. If the congestionAbatemen UniSaalProfile profileData.congestionOnSet 90 The percentage o f the buffer that must be filled in order to cause congestion. When the current send buffer occupancy for a Termination Point (TP) increases above congestionOnS et, a congestion indication is sent to the user of this TP. The part of the buf UniSaalProfile profileData.initialCredit Initial number o f credits. For 64 kbit/s use 30. This attribute must follow the rule, initialCre dit > maxPD. Unit: number of transmitted PDUs UniSaalProfile profileData.maxCC 4 The maximum number of re transmissions of Protocol Data Units (PDU): BGN, END, ER, RS. Unit: number of tr ansmitted PDUs UniSaalProfile profileData.maxPD The maximum number of SD PDUs before a poll is sent. This attribute must follow the rule, maxPD < initia lCredit. UniSaalProfile profileData.maxStat 67 The maximum number, odd integer value, of list elements placed in a STAT PDU. The maxStat attribute is c ontrolled by the AAL5 maximum SDU size defined in the Aal5TpVccTp MO. The maxSta t times 4 (octets) plus additional 12 octets (for header) must not exce UniSaalProfile profileData.timerCC 1000 The timer determining th e time between retransmission of PDUs: BGN, END, ER, RS. It should be more than the roundtrip delay. Unit: 1 ms (milliseconds) UniSaalProfile profileData.timerIdle 2000 The timer running when t here are no PDUs to transmit and there are no outstanding acknowledgements or da ta pending for credit. When this timer is running, no POLL PDUs are sent. This t imer should be significantly greater than the value of timerKeepAlive. UniSaalProfile profileData.timerKeepAlive 500 The timer to be

    used during a period of no outstanding acknowledgements or new data pending rece ipt of credit. At timeout, the peer is polled to see if it is alive. The timer d etermines the interval between polls in the transient phase. This timer should UniSaalProfile profileData.timerNoResponse 4000 The timer to det ermine the maximum time interval, during which reception of at least one STAT PD U is expected as a response to a poll. This attribute must follow the rule, time rNoResponse >= timerKeepAlive + one roundtrip delay Unit: 1 ms (milliseconds) UniSaalProfile profileData.timerPoll 100 The timer that specifies the maximum time between sending of POLL PDUs to the peer receiver during other traffic (active phase). Unit: 1 ms (milliseconds) UniSaalProfile UniSaalProfileId The value component of t he RDN. UniSaalProfile userLabel Label for free use. UniSaalProfile reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance. UniSaalProfile profileData The profile data. UniSaalProfile profileData.congestionAbatement 30 The percentage o f the buffer for which congestion is stopped. When the current send buffer occup ancy for a Termination Point (TP) decreases below congestionAbatement, a congest ion ceased indication is sent to the user of this TP. If the congestionAbatemen UniSaalProfile profileData.congestionOnSet 90 The percentage o f the buffer that must be filled in order to cause congestion. When the current send buffer occupancy for a Termination Point (TP) increases above congestionOnS et, a congestion indication is sent to the user of this TP. The part of the buf UniSaalProfile profileData.initialCredit Initial number o f credits. For 64 kbit/s use 30. This attribute must follow the rule, initialCre dit > maxPD. Unit: number of transmitted PDUs UniSaalProfile profileData.maxCC 4 The maximum number of re transmissions of Protocol Data Units (PDU): BGN, END, ER, RS. Unit: number of tr ansmitted PDUs UniSaalProfile profileData.maxPD The maximum number of SD PDUs before a poll is sent. This attribute must follow the rule, maxPD < initia lCredit. UniSaalProfile profileData.maxStat 67 The maximum number, odd integer value, of list elements placed in a STAT PDU. The maxStat attribute is c ontrolled by the AAL5 maximum SDU size defined in the Aal5TpVccTp MO. The maxSta t times 4 (octets) plus additional 12 octets (for header) must not exce UniSaalProfile profileData.timerCC 1000 The timer determining th e time between retransmission of PDUs: BGN, END, ER, RS. It should be more than the roundtrip delay. Unit: 1 ms (milliseconds) UniSaalProfile profileData.timerIdle 2000 The timer running when t here are no PDUs to transmit and there are no outstanding acknowledgements or da ta pending for credit. When this timer is running, no POLL PDUs are sent. This t imer should be significantly greater than the value of timerKeepAlive. UniSaalProfile profileData.timerKeepAlive 500 The timer to be used during a period of no outstanding acknowledgements or new data pending rece ipt of credit. At timeout, the peer is polled to see if it is alive. The timer d etermines the interval between polls in the transient phase. This timer should UniSaalProfile profileData.timerNoResponse 4000 The timer to det ermine the maximum time interval, during which reception of at least one STAT PD U is expected as a response to a poll. This attribute must follow the rule, time rNoResponse >= timerKeepAlive + one roundtrip delay Unit: 1 ms (milliseconds) UniSaalProfile profileData.timerPoll 100 The timer that specifies the maximum time between sending of POLL PDUs to the peer receiver during other traffic (active phase). Unit: 1 ms (milliseconds) UniSaalProfile UniSaalProfileId The value component of t he RDN. UniSaalProfile userLabel Label for free use. UniSaalProfile reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO instance.

    UniSaalProfile profileData The profile data. UniSaalProfile profileData.congestionAbatement 30 The percentage o f the buffer for which congestion is stopped. When the current send buffer occup ancy for a Termination Point (TP) decreases below congestionAbatement, a congest ion ceased indication is sent to the user of this TP. If the congestionAbatemen UniSaalProfile profileData.congestionOnSet 90 The percentage o f the buffer that must be filled in order to cause congestion. When the current send buffer occupancy for a Termination Point (TP) increases above congestionOnS et, a congestion indication is sent to the user of this TP. The part of the buf UniSaalProfile profileData.initialCredit Initial number o f credits. For 64 kbit/s use 30. This attribute must follow the rule, initialCre dit > maxPD. Unit: number of transmitted PDUs UniSaalProfile profileData.maxCC 4 The maximum number of re transmissions of Protocol Data Units (PDU): BGN, END, ER, RS. Unit: number of tr ansmitted PDUs UniSaalProfile profileData.maxPD The maximum number of SD PDUs before a poll is sent. This attribute must follow the rule, maxPD < initia lCredit. UniSaalProfile profileData.maxStat 67 The maximum number, odd integer value, of list elements placed in a STAT PDU. The maxStat attribute is c ontrolled by the AAL5 maximum SDU size defined in the Aal5TpVccTp MO. The maxSta t times 4 (octets) plus additional 12 octets (for header) must not exce UniSaalProfile profileData.timerCC 1000 The timer determining th e time between retransmission of PDUs: BGN, END, ER, RS. It should be more than the roundtrip delay. Unit: 1 ms (milliseconds) UniSaalProfile profileData.timerIdle 2000 The timer running when t here are no PDUs to transmit and there are no outstanding acknowledgements or da ta pending for credit. When this timer is running, no POLL PDUs are sent. This t imer should be significantly greater than the value of timerKeepAlive. UniSaalProfile profileData.timerKeepAlive 500 The timer to be used during a period of no outstanding acknowledgements or new data pending rece ipt of credit. At timeout, the peer is polled to see if it is alive. The timer d etermines the interval between polls in the transient phase. This timer should UniSaalProfile profileData.timerNoResponse 4000 The timer to det ermine the maximum time interval, during which reception of at least one STAT PD U is expected as a response to a poll. This attribute must follow the rule, time rNoResponse >= timerKeepAlive + one roundtrip delay Unit: 1 ms (milliseconds) UniSaalProfile profileData.timerPoll 100 The timer that specifies the maximum time between sending of POLL PDUs to the peer receiver during other traffic (active phase). Unit: 1 ms (milliseconds) UniSaalTp UniSaalTpId The value component of the RDN. UniSaalTp userLabel Label for free use. UniSaalTp operationalState The operational state. UniSaalTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. UniSaalTp uniSaalProfileId Contains a reference to an UniSaalProfile MO. Dependencies: The maxStat attribute defined in the struct UniSaalProfileData of UniSaalProfile MO is dependent on the AAL5 SDU size define d in the Aal5TpVccTp MO. UniSaalTp aal5TpVccTpId Contains a reference to an Aal5T pVccTp MO instance. The AAL5 termination point must terminate on a main processo r, MP. UniSaalTp maxSduSize Q.2630: 128 Maximum SAAL SDU size. W hen setting the value of maxSduSize the 4 bytes used by the SAAL layer for the S AAL header has to be considered. Example: If fromUserMaxSduSize is set to 256 an d toUserMaxSduSize is set to 512 in the Aal5TpVccTp MO, the maxSduSize UniSaalTp UniSaalTpId The value component of the RDN. UniSaalTp userLabel Label for free use. UniSaalTp operationalState The operational state. UniSaalTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res

    erves this MO instance. UniSaalTp uniSaalProfileId Q.2630: UniSaalProfile=win30 NBA P-C: UniSaalProfile=win30 NBAP-D: UniSaalProfile=win100 Contains a reference to an UniSaalProfile MO. Dependencies: The maxStat attribute defined in the struct UniSaalProfileData of UniSaalProfile MO is dependent on the AAL5 SDU size define d in the Aal5TpVccTp MO. UniSaalTp aal5TpVccTpId Contains a reference to an Aal5T pVccTp MO instance. The AAL5 termination point must terminate on a main processo r, MP. UniSaalTp maxSduSize Q.2630: 128 NBAP-C: 2044 NBAP-D: 1024 Maximum SAAL SDU size. When setting the value of maxSduSize the 4 bytes used by the SAAL layer for the SAAL header has to be considered. Example: If fromUserMax SduSize is set to 256 and toUserMaxSduSize is set to 512 in the Aal5TpVccTp MO, the maxSduSize UniSaalTp UniSaalTpId The value component of the RDN. UniSaalTp userLabel Label for free use. UniSaalTp operationalState The operational state. UniSaalTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that res erves this MO instance. UniSaalTp uniSaalProfileId Contains a reference to an UniSaalProfile MO. Dependencies: The maxStat attribute defined in the struct UniSaalProfileData of UniSaalProfile MO is dependent on the AAL5 SDU size define d in the Aal5TpVccTp MO. UniSaalTp aal5TpVccTpId Contains a reference to an Aal5T pVccTp MO instance. The AAL5 termination point must terminate on a main processo r, MP. UniSaalTp maxSduSize Q.2630: 128 NBAP-C: 2044 NBAP-D: 1024 Maximum SAAL SDU size. When setting the value of maxSduSize the 4 bytes used by the SAAL layer for the SAAL header has to be considered. Example: If fromUserMax SduSize is set to 256 and toUserMaxSduSize is set to 512 in the Aal5TpVccTp MO, the maxSduSize UpgradePackage UpgradePackageId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. If this is empty, the att ribute, upgradePackageDocumentId is copied. UpgradePackage userLabel Label for free use. UpgradePackage loadModuleList Specifies the references to load modules that belong to this upgrade package. This list is null until a successf ul install has been performed. UpgradePackage upgradeControlFilePath Specifies the path to th e UCF on the node once it has been fetched from the FTP server. UpgradePackage state 0 Specifies the state of this upgrade pack age. This attribute is used to accept, reject or modify behavior of actions. For example, the action, upgrade, is not allowed in the state NOT_INSTALLED. The ac tion, confirmUpgrade, is called to continue and conclud UpgradePackage progressHeader 0 Specifies the current upgrade pr ogress information. Changes in the progress header do not require any particular action. UpgradePackage progressTotal 0 Specifies one of the following: - the total number of load module files to be downloaded during installation of an UpgradePackage MO - the total number of load module files to be downloaded du ring installation of an PiuType MO - the total number of steps UpgradePackage progressCount 0 Shows the progress of: - an inst allation of an UpgradePackage MO - installation of a PiuType MO or - execution o f an upgrade. This attribute specifies the current number of downloaded load mod ule files during installation of an upgrade package. A load mod UpgradePackage administrativeData Contains product data fo r this upgrade package. This information is extracted from the UCF. UpgradePackage confirmationDeadline Specifies the deadline, date and time, for an operator confirmation. If the deadline is not met, then an automatic rollback to a previous configuration is issued. The format is UTC tim

    e. UpgradePackage ftpServerIpAddress The IP address of the FT P Server. Examples: - 110.112.111.102 - wnaw107 (logical name). UpgradePackage upFilePathOnFtpServer Specifies the file path on the FTP server to the UCF. UpgradePackage user 0 The user identity to the FTP server. UpgradePackage password 0 Password to the FTP server. This attribute is only supplied when the UP MO is created, and it is not displayed. UpgradePackage upgradePackageDocumentId Specifies the do cument number and revision of the upgrade package. White spaces are removed, and an underscore is inserted between the document number and the revision. Example : 19089-CSX10901/1_A UpgradePackage deletePreventingCVs Specifies the configurat ion version(s) that prevents delete of the UP. UpgradePackage otherReferringCVs Specifies the configurat ion versions that refer to this MO, but do not affect the deletable status of th e MO UpgradePackage. The deletable status is specified in the attribute, isDelet able. UpgradePackage isDeletable 0 Specifies if the UpgradePackage MO can be deleted. UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages This attribute is only v alid for UPs of type Delta. It contains the merge history of this upgrade packag e. Examples: - Product Data for normal UP (non Delta UP) - Product Data for Delt a UP1 - Product Data for Delta UP2. UpgradePackage upCompatibilityIndex Specifies a compatibilit y index. If this is specified, it may be used when verifying that an upgrade fro m-state is valid for this UP. It is only used when the UCF element upgrade windo w contains this type of information. UpgradePackage cppUpVersion Specifies the CPP upgrade packag e version of this UP. This information is extracted from the UCF. UpgradePackage actionResult Contains the result from the lat est four invoked actions. This attribute is only valid for the actions: - instal l (all variants) - cancelInstall - verifyUpgrade - update - upgrade For the acti ons, update, upgrade, and rebootNodeUpgrade, this attribute is UpgradePackage stepLabel Contains the name of the current ly executing step in the used sequence, defined in the UCF. This value is specif ied in the attribute label in the element Step or UpdateStep in the UCF. UpgradePackage maxTimeBetweenUpgradeEvents 0 States the maxim um time allowed to elapse before the next upgrade event (FM event) is sent. Unit : 1 min UpgradePackage sendEvents 0 Defines whether upgrade events ( FM events) shall be sent or not during execution of an upgrade. The default maxi mum time between FM events is 60 seconds. This means that if no new progress ind ication is available within that time, the last FM event is sen UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs Specifies the upgrade pa ckage(s) that prevents delete of the UP. UpgradePackage typeOfUP States the type of UP specified in the UCF. UpgradePackage progressHeaderAddInfo Additional information t o the attribute, progressHeader. UpgradePackage actualTypeOfUP States the actual type of the UP . Its value is set by copying the value of the attribute, requestedTypeOfUP. Its initial value is set when the UP is created. This value is then updated in the following cases: - the UP is not active, that is, state is not UpgradePackage requestedTypeOfUP States the type of UP to be used when an install action is executed. It is not used when load modules fo r a specific MO PiuType are installed. When an upgrade action is executed, the t ype used at the last install is valid. UpgradePackage actionResult.actionId 0 This identity is used to link more than one result to one action.

    UpgradePackage actionResult.additionalInfo UpgradePackage actionResult.info 0 UpgradePackage actionResult.time A timestamp. Format exam ple: Date: 2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182 UpgradePackage actionResult.typeOfInvokedAction 0 UpgradePackage administrativeData.productInfo Information abou t the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlim ited). UpgradePackage administrativeData.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, Upgrad ePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage administrativeData.productNumber The prod uct number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The pro duct nu UpgradePackage administrativeData.productRevision The revi sion state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuTyp e, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage administrativeData.productionDate The prod uction date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits fo r the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eig ht characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productInfo Informat ion about the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0. . (unlimited). UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion , UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productNumber The prod uct number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The pro duct nu UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productRevision The revi sion state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuTyp e, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productionDate The prod uction date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits fo r the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eig ht characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productInfo Information abou t the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlim ited). UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, Upgrad ePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productNumber The product numb er of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productRevision The revision sta te of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandato ry for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subra ck and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productionDate The production d

    ate is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the ye ar, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight chara cters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productInfo Information abou t the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlim ited). UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, Upgrad ePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productNumber The prod uct number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The pro duct nu UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productRevision The revi sion state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuTyp e, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productionDate The prod uction date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits fo r the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eig ht characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th UpgradePackage UpgradePackageId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. If this is empty, the att ribute, upgradePackageDocumentId is copied. UpgradePackage userLabel Label for free use. UpgradePackage loadModuleList Specifies the references to load modules that belong to this upgrade package. This list is null until a successf ul install has been performed. UpgradePackage upgradeControlFilePath Specifies the path to th e UCF on the node once it has been fetched from the FTP server. UpgradePackage state 0 Specifies the state of this upgrade pack age. This attribute is used to accept, reject or modify behavior of actions. For example, the action, upgrade, is not allowed in the state NOT_INSTALLED. The ac tion, confirmUpgrade, is called to continue and conclud UpgradePackage progressHeader 0 Specifies the current upgrade pr ogress information. Changes in the progress header do not require any particular action. UpgradePackage progressTotal 0 Specifies one of the following: - the total number of load module files to be downloaded during installation of an UpgradePackage MO - the total number of load module files to be downloaded du ring installation of an PiuType MO - the total number of steps UpgradePackage progressCount 0 Shows the progress of: - an inst allation of an UpgradePackage MO - installation of a PiuType MO or - execution o f an upgrade. This attribute specifies the current number of downloaded load mod ule files during installation of an upgrade package. A load mod UpgradePackage administrativeData Contains product data fo r this upgrade package. This information is extracted from the UCF. UpgradePackage confirmationDeadline Specifies the deadline, date and time, for an operator confirmation. If the deadline is not met, then an automatic rollback to a previous configuration is issued. The format is UTC tim e. UpgradePackage ftpServerIpAddress The IP address of the FT P Server. Examples: - 110.112.111.102 - wnaw107 (logical name). UpgradePackage upFilePathOnFtpServer Specifies the file path on the FTP server to the UCF. UpgradePackage user 0 The user identity to the FTP server. UpgradePackage password 0 Password to the FTP server. This attribute is only supplied when the UP MO is created, and it is not displayed.

    UpgradePackage upgradePackageDocumentId Specifies the do cument number and revision of the upgrade package. White spaces are removed, and an underscore is inserted between the document number and the revision. Example : 19089-CSX10901/1_A UpgradePackage deletePreventingCVs Specifies the configurat ion version(s) that prevents delete of the UP. UpgradePackage otherReferringCVs Specifies the configurat ion versions that refer to this MO, but do not affect the deletable status of th e MO UpgradePackage. The deletable status is specified in the attribute, isDelet able. UpgradePackage isDeletable 0 Specifies if the UpgradePackage MO can be deleted. UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages This attribute is only v alid for UPs of type Delta. It contains the merge history of this upgrade packag e. Examples: - Product Data for normal UP (non Delta UP) - Product Data for Delt a UP1 - Product Data for Delta UP2. UpgradePackage upCompatibilityIndex Specifies a compatibilit y index. If this is specified, it may be used when verifying that an upgrade fro m-state is valid for this UP. It is only used when the UCF element upgrade windo w contains this type of information. UpgradePackage cppUpVersion Specifies the CPP upgrade packag e version of this UP. This information is extracted from the UCF. UpgradePackage actionResult Contains the result from the lat est four invoked actions. This attribute is only valid for the actions: - instal l (all variants) - cancelInstall - verifyUpgrade - update - upgrade For the acti ons, update, upgrade, and rebootNodeUpgrade, this attribute is UpgradePackage stepLabel Contains the name of the current ly executing step in the used sequence, defined in the UCF. This value is specif ied in the attribute label in the element Step or UpdateStep in the UCF. UpgradePackage maxTimeBetweenUpgradeEvents 0 States the maxim um time allowed to elapse before the next upgrade event (FM event) is sent. Unit : 1 min UpgradePackage sendEvents 0 Defines whether upgrade events ( FM events) shall be sent or not during execution of an upgrade. The default maxi mum time between FM events is 60 seconds. This means that if no new progress ind ication is available within that time, the last FM event is sen UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs Specifies the upgrade pa ckage(s) that prevents delete of the UP. UpgradePackage typeOfUP States the type of UP specified in the UCF. UpgradePackage progressHeaderAddInfo Additional information t o the attribute, progressHeader. UpgradePackage actualTypeOfUP States the actual type of the UP . Its value is set by copying the value of the attribute, requestedTypeOfUP. Its initial value is set when the UP is created. This value is then updated in the following cases: - the UP is not active, that is, state is not UpgradePackage requestedTypeOfUP States the type of UP to be used when an install action is executed. It is not used when load modules fo r a specific MO PiuType are installed. When an upgrade action is executed, the t ype used at the last install is valid. UpgradePackage actionResult.actionId 0 This identity is used to link more than one result to one action. UpgradePackage actionResult.additionalInfo UpgradePackage actionResult.info 0 UpgradePackage actionResult.time A timestamp. Format exam ple: Date: 2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182 UpgradePackage actionResult.typeOfInvokedAction 0 UpgradePackage administrativeData.productInfo Information abou t the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlim ited).

    UpgradePackage administrativeData.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, Upgrad ePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage administrativeData.productNumber The prod uct number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The pro duct nu UpgradePackage administrativeData.productRevision The revi sion state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuTyp e, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage administrativeData.productionDate The prod uction date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits fo r the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eig ht characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productInfo Informat ion about the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0. . (unlimited). UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion , UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productNumber The prod uct number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The pro duct nu UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productRevision The revi sion state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuTyp e, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productionDate The prod uction date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits fo r the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eig ht characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productInfo Information abou t the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlim ited). UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, Upgrad ePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productNumber The product numb er of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productRevision The revision sta te of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandato ry for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subra ck and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productionDate The production d ate is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the ye ar, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight chara cters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productInfo Information abou t the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlim ited). UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, Upgrad

    ePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productNumber The prod uct number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The pro duct nu UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productRevision The revi sion state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuTyp e, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productionDate The prod uction date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits fo r the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eig ht characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th UpgradePackage UpgradePackageId The value component of t he RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade. If this is empty, the att ribute, upgradePackageDocumentId is copied. UpgradePackage loadModuleList Specifies the references to load modules that belong to this upgrade package. This list is null until a successf ul install has been performed. UpgradePackage upgradeControlFilePath Specifies the path to th e UCF on the node once it has been fetched from the FTP server. UpgradePackage state 0 Specifies the state of this upgrade pack age. This attribute is used to accept, reject or modify behavior of actions. For example, the action, upgrade, is not allowed in the state NOT_INSTALLED. The ac tion, confirmUpgrade, is called to continue and conclud UpgradePackage progressHeader 0 Specifies the current upgrade pr ogress information. Changes in the progress header do not require any particular action. UpgradePackage progressTotal 0 Specifies one of the following: - the total number of load module files to be downloaded during installation of an UpgradePackage MO - the total number of load module files to be downloaded du ring installation of an PiuType MO - the total number of steps UpgradePackage progressCount 0 Shows the progress of: - an inst allation of an UpgradePackage MO - installation of a PiuType MO or - execution o f an upgrade. This attribute specifies the current number of downloaded load mod ule files during installation of an upgrade package. A load mod UpgradePackage administrativeData Contains product data fo r this upgrade package. This information is extracted from the UCF. UpgradePackage confirmationDeadline Specifies the deadline, date and time, for an operator confirmation. If the deadline is not met, then an automatic rollback to a previous configuration is issued. The format is UTC tim e. UpgradePackage ftpServerIpAddress The IP address of the FT P Server. Examples: - 110.112.111.102 - wnaw107 (logical name). UpgradePackage upFilePathOnFtpServer Specifies the file path on the FTP server to the UCF. UpgradePackage user 0 The user identity to the FTP server. UpgradePackage password 0 Password to the FTP server. This attribute is only supplied when the UP MO is created, and it is not displayed. UpgradePackage upgradePackageDocumentId Specifies the do cument number and revision of the upgrade package. White spaces are removed, and an underscore is inserted between the document number and the revision. Example : 19089-CSX10901/1_A UpgradePackage deletePreventingCVs Specifies the configurat ion version(s) that prevents delete of the UP. UpgradePackage otherReferringCVs Specifies the configurat ion versions that refer to this MO, but do not affect the deletable status of th e MO UpgradePackage. The deletable status is specified in the attribute, isDelet

    able. UpgradePackage isDeletable 0 Specifies if the UpgradePackage MO can be deleted. UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages This attribute is only v alid for UPs of type Delta. It contains the merge history of this upgrade packag e. Examples: - Product Data for normal UP (non Delta UP) - Product Data for Delt a UP1 - Product Data for Delta UP2. UpgradePackage upCompatibilityIndex Specifies a compatibilit y index. If this is specified, it may be used when verifying that an upgrade fro m-state is valid for this UP. It is only used when the UCF element upgrade windo w contains this type of information. UpgradePackage cppUpVersion Specifies the CPP upgrade packag e version of this UP. This information is extracted from the UCF. UpgradePackage actionResult Contains the result from the lat est four invoked actions. This attribute is only valid for the actions: - instal l (all variants) - cancelInstall - verifyUpgrade - update - upgrade For the acti ons, update, upgrade, and rebootNodeUpgrade, this attribute is UpgradePackage stepLabel Contains the name of the current ly executing step in the used sequence, defined in the UCF. This value is specif ied in the attribute label in the element Step or UpdateStep in the UCF. UpgradePackage maxTimeBetweenUpgradeEvents 0 States the maxim um time allowed to elapse before the next upgrade event (FM event) is sent. Unit : 1 min UpgradePackage sendEvents 0 Defines whether upgrade events ( FM events) shall be sent or not during execution of an upgrade. The default maxi mum time between FM events is 60 seconds. This means that if no new progress ind ication is available within that time, the last FM event is sen UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs Specifies the upgrade pa ckage(s) that prevents delete of the UP. UpgradePackage typeOfUP States the type of UP specified in the UCF. UpgradePackage progressHeaderAddInfo Additional information t o the attribute, progressHeader. UpgradePackage actualTypeOfUP States the actual type of the UP . Its value is set by copying the value of the attribute, requestedTypeOfUP. Its initial value is set when the UP is created. This value is then updated in the following cases: - the UP is not active, that is, state is not UpgradePackage requestedTypeOfUP States the type of UP to be used when an install action is executed. It is not used when load modules fo r a specific MO PiuType are installed. When an upgrade action is executed, the t ype used at the last install is valid. UpgradePackage actionResult.actionId 0 This identity is used to link more than one result to one action. UpgradePackage actionResult.additionalInfo UpgradePackage actionResult.info 0 UpgradePackage actionResult.time A timestamp. Format exam ple: Date: 2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182 UpgradePackage actionResult.typeOfInvokedAction 0 UpgradePackage administrativeData.productInfo Information abou t the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlim ited). UpgradePackage administrativeData.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, Upgrad ePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage administrativeData.productNumber The prod uct number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The pro duct nu UpgradePackage administrativeData.productRevision The revi

    sion state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuTyp e, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage administrativeData.productionDate The prod uction date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits fo r the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eig ht characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productInfo Informat ion about the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0. . (unlimited). UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion , UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productNumber The prod uct number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The pro duct nu UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productRevision The revi sion state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuTyp e, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productionDate The prod uction date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits fo r the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eig ht characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productInfo Information abou t the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlim ited). UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, Upgrad ePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productNumber The product numb er of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productRevision The revision sta te of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandato ry for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subra ck and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productionDate The production d ate is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the ye ar, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight chara cters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productInfo Information abou t the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlim ited). UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productName The name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, Upgrad ePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productNumber The prod uct number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The pro duct nu UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productRevision The revi sion state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuTyp

    e, Subrack and SubrackProdType. UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productionDate The prod uction date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits fo r the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eig ht characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th UpgradeTrace outputMode 0 Specifies where to direct traces . UpgradeTrace level 0 Specifies the trace level that is a spec ified level is also valid for all lower levels. To enable sending of detailed tr ace logs at least one class or function must be added and the level must be chan ged to a value greater than the default value. UpgradeTrace fileName 0 Specifies the name of the file w here trace logs are written. The attribute is used by the trace function only if the attribute outputMode is set to FILE. UpgradeTrace fileSize 0 Specifies the file size. The att ribute is used by the trace function only if the attribute outputMode is set to FILE. When the log file reaches the specified size the contents are moved to a b ackup file called <fileName>_old. Unit:1 kb UpgradeTrace flushInterval 0 Specifies the amount of trace lo gs that result in a flush to the active log file. The attribute is used by the t race function only if the attribute outputMode is set to FILE. UpgradeTrace activeClasses Specifies the classes that are p art of the defined trace properties. UpgradeTrace activeFunctions Specifies the functions that are part of the defined trace properties. A maximum of four functions can be activa ted at the same time. UpgradeTrace sendLogsAsNotifications 0 Specifies whether or not trace logs are sent as notifications (AVCs) for the attribute traceInformation. UpgradeTrace traceInformation Contains the trace infor mation. UpgradeTrace typeOfStorage 0 Specifies how the trace properti es are stored. UpgradeTrace UpgradeTraceId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. UpgradeTrace traceDirectoryPath The path to the director y where the trace logs are stored. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.additionalInformation Addition al information. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.className The name of the class from which the trace information originates. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.methodName The signature of the method from which the trace information originates. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.timeStamp A timestamp. For mat example: Date: 2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182 UpgradeTrace traceInformation.type Specifies the type of tr ace log. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.version Software version of the system upgrade logic. UpgradeTrace outputMode 0 Specifies where to direct traces . UpgradeTrace level 0 Specifies the trace level that is a spec ified level is also valid for all lower levels. To enable sending of detailed tr ace logs at least one class or function must be added and the level must be chan ged to a value greater than the default value. UpgradeTrace fileName 0 Specifies the name of the file w here trace logs are written. The attribute is used by the trace function only if the attribute outputMode is set to FILE. UpgradeTrace fileSize 0 Specifies the file size. The att ribute is used by the trace function only if the attribute outputMode is set to

    FILE. When the log file reaches the specified size the contents are moved to a b ackup file called <fileName>_old. Unit:1 kb UpgradeTrace flushInterval 0 Specifies the amount of trace lo gs that result in a flush to the active log file. The attribute is used by the t race function only if the attribute outputMode is set to FILE. UpgradeTrace activeClasses Specifies the classes that are p art of the defined trace properties. UpgradeTrace activeFunctions Specifies the functions that are part of the defined trace properties. A maximum of four functions can be activa ted at the same time. UpgradeTrace sendLogsAsNotifications 0 Specifies whether or not trace logs are sent as notifications (AVCs) for the attribute traceInformation. UpgradeTrace traceInformation Contains the trace infor mation. UpgradeTrace typeOfStorage 0 Specifies how the trace properti es are stored. UpgradeTrace UpgradeTraceId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. UpgradeTrace traceDirectoryPath The path to the director y where the trace logs are stored. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.additionalInformation Addition al information. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.className The name of the class from which the trace information originates. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.methodName The signature of the method from which the trace information originates. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.timeStamp A timestamp. For mat example: Date: 2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182 UpgradeTrace traceInformation.type Specifies the type of tr ace log. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.version Software version of the system upgrade logic. UpgradeTrace outputMode 0 Specifies where to direct traces . UpgradeTrace level 0 Specifies the trace level that is a spec ified level is also valid for all lower levels. To enable sending of detailed tr ace logs at least one class or function must be added and the level must be chan ged to a value greater than the default value. UpgradeTrace fileName 0 Specifies the name of the file w here trace logs are written. The attribute is used by the trace function only if the attribute outputMode is set to FILE. UpgradeTrace fileSize 0 Specifies the file size. The att ribute is used by the trace function only if the attribute outputMode is set to FILE. When the log file reaches the specified size the contents are moved to a b ackup file called <fileName>_old. Unit:1 kb UpgradeTrace flushInterval 0 Specifies the amount of trace lo gs that result in a flush to the active log file. The attribute is used by the t race function only if the attribute outputMode is set to FILE. UpgradeTrace activeClasses Specifies the classes that are p art of the defined trace properties. UpgradeTrace activeFunctions Specifies the functions that are part of the defined trace properties. A maximum of four functions can be activa ted at the same time. UpgradeTrace sendLogsAsNotifications 0 Specifies whether or not trace logs are sent as notifications (AVCs) for the attribute traceInformation. UpgradeTrace traceInformation Contains the trace infor mation. UpgradeTrace typeOfStorage 0 Specifies how the trace properti es are stored. UpgradeTrace UpgradeTraceId The value component of the RDN.

    It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. UpgradeTrace traceDirectoryPath The path to the director y where the trace logs are stored. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.additionalInformation Addition al information. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.className The name of the class from which the trace information originates. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.methodName The signature of the method from which the trace information originates. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.timeStamp A timestamp. For mat example: Date: 2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182 UpgradeTrace traceInformation.type Specifies the type of tr ace log. UpgradeTrace traceInformation.version Software version of the system upgrade logic. UplinkBaseBandPool UplinkBaseBandPoolId UplinkBaseBandPool radioInterfaceBoardRef Refers to the ra dio interface board connected to the UL baseband pool. Use cases: MEC_300, DBC_U C157, DBC_UC161, DBC_UC165 Ref. [CB_PMG] Ura UraId Ura uraIdentity Used to identify a certain URA. Specific ation: 3GPP 25.331 Ura userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-f riendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. Ura reservedBy Sequence of UtranCell MO references whic h belong to this URA. UserPreferences UserPreferencesId UserPreferences userLabel Provides support for putting a l abel on the MO instance. . UserPreferences userId Identifies the user to whom the preferen ces apply. . UserPreferences preferences Configurable preference names an d values.Sub:RAH Ref. UserPreferences preferences.prefName UserPreferences preferences.prefValue UtranCell lac Location Area Code UtranCell rac 0 Routing Area Code. Default is significan t for Radio GUIs. UtranCell sac Service Area Code UtranCell utranCellIubLink DN of the related IubLin k MO. FDN according to [9] and [20] For CORBA users, GenericNRIRPSystem::Attribu teTypes::MOReference, UtranCell snDirectedRetryTarget UtranCell sectorRef DN of the related RBS Sector MO. FDN according to [9] and [20] For CORBA users, GenericNRIRPSystem::AttributeTyp es::MOReference, UtranCell powerLocked 0 Indicates whether the cell is lo cked for power save. UtranCell useId Represents a unique id per cell. UtranCell UtranCellId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. UtranCell administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the cell. UtranCell operationalState The operational state of the cell. UtranCell availabilityStatus The availability status of the cell.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same obj ect: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9, bit 10 o UtranCell userLabel Provides the possibility to put

    a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. UtranCell localCellId Represents resources in the RBS that can be used for the configuration of a cell.The local cell ID shall have th e same value as configured in the RBS, and shall be unique within the RBS; that is, no two UtranCells under the same IubLink should have the sa UtranCell cId Cell identity.Unique in the RNC.cId is t he identifier of a cell in one RNC, and is used together with the RncFunction at tribute rncId as cell id at system information broadcast. Dependencies: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. UtranCell tCell Timing delay used for defining start of SCH, CPICH and the downlink scrambling codes. Value mapping: 0: 0 chip 1: 256 ch ip .. 9: 2304 chip Dependencies: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traf fic. UtranCell uarfcnUl Uplink UTRA Absolute Radio Frequ ency Channel Number. Specifies the channel number for the central uplink frequen cy. The mapping from channel number to physical frequency is described in 3GPP s pecification TS 25.104. Dependencies: An intra-frequency relati UtranCell uarfcnDl Downlink UTRA Absolute Radio Fre quency Channel Number. Specifies the channel number for the central downlink fre quency. The mapping from channel number to physical frequency is described in 3G PP specification TS 25.104. Dependencies: An intra-frequency re UtranCell primaryScramblingCode The primary downlink scr ambling code to be used in the cell. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may a ffect ongoing traffic. UtranCell primarySchPower -18 Primary SCH power, relative to t he primaryCpichPower value. Unit: 0.1 dB UtranCell secondarySchPower -35 Secondary SCH power, rel ative to the primaryCpichPower value. Unit: 0.1 dB UtranCell primaryCpichPower 0 Power to be used for tra nsmitting the PCPICH. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing t raffic. It is recommended to increase/decrease the value in steps not greater th an 3dBm (preferably in 1dBm steps). Unit: 0.1 dBm UtranCell maxTxPowerUl 24 Maximum UE transmission power on the RACH when accessing the system. Used in UE functions for cell selection/res election in idle mode and connected mode.Also used to control the maximum TX pow er level that a UE may use. If the current UE uplink transmit p UtranCell maximumTransmissionPower 0 Maximum transmis sion power. This is the maximum power for all downlink channels that are allowed to be used simultaneously in a cell, added together.Unit: 0.1 dBm UtranCell bchPower -31 BCH power is the power to be use d for transmitting on the BCH, relative to the primaryCpichPower value. Unit: 0. 1 dB UtranCell cellReserved NOT_RESERVED(1) Indicates if this cell s hall be reserved for operator use. If it is reserved, there will be no service t o the UEs. UtranCell treSelection 2 Control of cell selection/resele ction. Time-to-trigger for cell reselection. Also used for absolute priority bas ed cell reselection. Value launched by System Information (SIB 3).Unit: s UtranCell qualMeasQuantity 0 Used in UE functions for cell selection/reselection in idle and connected mode.Cell selection and resele ction quality measure. Value launched by System information (SIB3, SIB11 and SIB 12). UtranCell qHyst1 4 Cell reselection hysteresis used in UE f unctions in idle and connected mode.Value launched by System information (SIB3). Resolution: 2 UtranCell qHyst2 4 The hysteresis value of the serving cell .Used to perform cell ranking for the serving cell.Resolution: 2 UtranCell qQualMin -18 Used in UE functions for cell se lection/reselection in idle mode and connected mode. Minimum required (acceptabl e) quality level in the cell. Unit: dB

    UtranCell qRxLevMin -115 Used in UE functions for cell se lection/reselection in idle mode and connected mode. Minimum required (acceptabl e) RX level in the cell.Value launched by System information (SIB11) for each in tra-frequency measurement object corresponding to adjacent cell UtranCell individualOffset 0 Used in UE function even t-reporting. This offset is added to the measured quantity before the UE evaluat es if an event has occurred.Unit: 0.1 dB Resolution: 5 Change takes effect: Ongo ing connections UtranCell pwrAdm 75 Admission limit for downlink cell carrie r power. Expressed relative to the lower of maximumTransmissionPower (configured in this UtranCell instance) and maxDlPowerCapability (configured in the corresp onding instance of RbsLocalCell in the RBS). Dependenci UtranCell pwrOffset 15 Cell carrier power offset. Expre ssed relative to the lower of maximumTransmissionPower (configured in this Utran Cell instance) and maxDlPowerCapability (configured in the corresponding instanc e of RbsLocalCell in the RBS). Used by Congestion Control. Depe UtranCell pwrHyst 300 Hysteresis time for detection of congest ion in the downlink transmitted carrier power.When the measured power has been a bove the detection level (pwrAdm + pwrOffset) for this length of time, this cell is considered to be congested in the downlink.Likewise UtranCell pwrCongFilter 1 Power congestion filter. Used by Congestion Control. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Ch ange takes effect: Re-initiation of DL TX carrier power measurements UtranCell tmCongAction 2000 Interval between periodic conges tion-resolution actions targeting the guaranteed traffic class connections in th is cell.The default setting is a reference case setting.However, the actual sett ing may need to deviate from the default, depending on the requ UtranCell releaseAseDl 1 Amount of ASE in the downlink to be released with each periodic congestion-resolution action targeting the guara nteed traffic class connections in this cell.The default setting is a reference case setting. However, the actual setting may need to deviate f UtranCell txInterval 1000 Defines the periodicity of the D L cell carrier power measurement reporting. Used by CellLoad Monitor Initializat ion in Admission Control. The configured value is divided by 10 by the RNC traff ic application before it is sent on NBAP to RBS. This attribute UtranCell txFilter 5 Defines the RBS internal filteri ng. Used by CellLoad Monitor Initialization in Admission Control. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Change takes effect: Re-initiation UtranCell fPwrUp 20 Attack factor for filtering the measured /estimated power consumption. Used by Cell Load Monitor in Admission Control. Th is attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Disturbances: Changing th is attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its v UtranCell fPwrDown 10 Decay factor for filtering the m easured/estimated power consumption. Used by Cell Load Monitor in Admission Cont rol. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: % Change tak es effect: Immediately UtranCell dlCodeAdm 80 Admission limit based on downlin k channelization code tree usage. Expressed as percentage of the code tree curre ntly in use. Used by Admission Control, in Admission Request Handler. Unit: % Ch ange takes effect: Immediately UtranCell aseDlAdm 500 Admission limit on ASE in the do wnlink. Used by Admission Control, in Admission Request Handler. Unit: ASE Chang e takes effect: Immediately UtranCell aseUlAdm 500 Admission limit on ASE in the up link. Used by Admission Control, in Admission Request Handler. Unit: ASE Change takes effect: Immediately UtranCell sf8Adm 8 Admission limit for non-guaranteed traff ic class connections with DL SF = 8. Maximum number of radio links with Spreadin g Factor = 8 in the downlink (DL SF = 8) for which new admission requests for no

    n-guaranteed traffic classes will continue to be allowe UtranCell sf32Adm 32 Admission limit for non-guaranteed traff ic class connections with DL SF = 32. Maximum number of radio links with Spreadi ng Factor = 32 in the downlink (DL SF = 32) for which new admission requests for non-guaranteed traffic classes will continue to be all UtranCell tfsFlexConstant 10 Factor to take the flexibility o f the TFS for a DCH into account when calculating the ASE.This attribute may onl y be changed by Ericsson personnel.Disturbances: Changing this attribute may aff ect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set, the cell is dis UtranCell minPwrRl -150 Minimum power per radio link. Di sturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its val ue is set, the cell is disabled automatically and then re-enabled. Change takes effect: Object disabled/enabled Unit: 0.1 dBmDependencies: minP UtranCell maxRate 40690 Maximum rate for maximum power mapping.D ependencies:minimumRate <= interRate <= maxRate Disturbances: Changing this attr ibute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set, the cell is disable d automatically and then re-enabled. Change takes effec UtranCell interRate 7760 Intermediate rate for maximum po wer mapping.Dependencies:minimumRate <= interRate <= maxRate Disturbances: Chang ing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set, the ce ll is disabled automatically and then re-enabled. Change takes UtranCell minimumRate 1590 Minimum rate for maximum power m apping.Dependencies:minimumRate <= interRate <= maxRate Disturbances: Changing t his attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set, the cell is disabled automatically and then re-enabled. Change takes effec UtranCell maxPwrMax 48 Maximum relative power for maxim um power mapping. Dependencies:minPwrMax <= interPwrMax <= maxPwrMax Disturbance s: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set , the cell is disabled automatically and then re-enabled. Chang UtranCell interPwrMax 38 Intermediate relative power for maximum power mapping. Dependencies:minPwrMax <= interPwrMax <= maxPwrMax Distur bances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value i s set, the cell is disabled automatically and then re-enabled. UtranCell minPwrMax 0 Minimum relative power for maxim um power mapping. Dependencies:minPwrMax <= interPwrMax <= maxPwrMax minPwrRl <= minPwrMax Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whe never its value is set, the cell is disabled automatically and UtranCell compModeAdm 15 Admission limit on the number of radio links in compressed mode in this cell.Change takes effect: Immediately UtranCell iFHyst 6000 Hysteresis time for detection of congest ion in the uplink RTWP in this cell.When the measured RTWP has been above the de tection level (iFCong) for this length of time, this cell is considered to be co ngested in the uplink.Likewise, when the measured RTWP UtranCell iFCong 621 Threshold at which this cell is consider ed to be congested in the uplink.The default setting disables uplink congestion measurements, in order to prevent problems during upgrading. Value mapping: 0: 112 dBm 1 :-111.9 dBm ... 130 : -99 dBm ... 620 : -50 d UtranCell interFreqFddMeasIndicator 0 Inter-frequency FDD measurement indicator.Value mapping: FALSE = No TRUE = Yes UtranCell sRatSearch 4 The decision on when measurement s on GSM frequencies shall be performed is made using this parameter in relation with Squal.If S_qual>this parameter, UE need not perform measurements on GSM ce lls. If S_qual<=this parameter, UE shall perform measurements o UtranCell sIntraSearch 0 The decision on when measurement s on intra-frequencies shall be performed.Value mapping: 0 : not sent.1 : -32 dB 2 : -30 dB ... 27 : 20 dB Unit: 2 dB UtranCell sInterSearch 0 The decision on when measurement s on inter-frequencies shall be performed.Value mapping: 0 : not sent 1 : -32 dB 2 : -30 dB ... 27 : 20 dB Unit: 2 dB UtranCell fachMeasOccaCycLenCoeff 0 Fach Measurement Occasio

    n Cycle Length coefficient.A factor used when the UE performs inter-frequency an d inter-system measurements. The UE uses this parameter to calculate the interva l length in order to determine the repeating cycle of the measurement.V UtranCell accessClassNBarred FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE (0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALS E(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) Specifies which access classes are barred for th e feature Cell Level Access Class Barring. Each boolean in the sequence represen ts one access class. The access class is restricted by setting the boolean to TR UE ('barred'), otherwise the boolean is set to UtranCell utranCellPosition Models the manageable ch aracteristics for the cell polygon corners used for UE positioning. Each polygon corner is described by a latitude and longitude pair together with a latitude s ign (north or south). Each polygon corner is represented with three pos UtranCell sf16Adm 16 Admission limit for non-guaranteed traff ic class connections with DL SF = 16. Maximum number of radio links with Spreadi ng Factor = 16 in the downlink (DL SF = 16) for which new admission requests for non-guaranteed traffic classes will continue to be all UtranCell intCongFilter 1 RTWP measurement filter coeffici ent. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effec t: Re-initiation of UL RTWP measurements UtranCell sib1PlmnScopeValueTag The area identity part o f PLMN scope value tags for SIB1. Change takes effect: Immediately UtranCell locationAreaRef Reference to the LocationArea Ma naged Object. UtranCell serviceAreaRef Reference to the ServiceArea Man aged Object. This serviceAreaRef must be contained by the same instance of Locat ionArea MO as locationAreaRef. UtranCell routingAreaRef Reference to the RoutingArea Man aged Object. This routingAreaRef must be contained by the same instance of Locat ionArea MO as locationAreaRef. If there is no packet switched core network conne cted to the RNC, the routingAreaRef is set to value null. UtranCell iubLinkRef Reference to the IubLink Managed Object. UtranCell reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to this MO.See references inUtranRelation and CoverageRelation. UtranCell hoType 0 Indicates whether GSM HO, IFHO or no han dover shall be attempted when a handover from the current WCDMA frequency is tri ggered by the connection quality monitoring, indicating that the WCDMA quality i s low.Note that the decision is based not only on this UtranCell usedFreqThresh2dEcno -13 Threshold for event 2d f or the used frequency when the measurement quantity is Ec/No. Note: This paramet er is also used for calculation of a threshold value for the used frequency for 2f events. The calculated value is sent to the UE in a RRC Measurement UtranCell usedFreqThresh2dRscp -105 Threshold for event 2d f or the used frequency when the measurement quantity is RSCP. Note: This paramete r is also used for calculation of a threshold value for the used frequency for 2 f events. The calculated value is sent to the UE in a RRC Measurement C UtranCell nOutSyncInd 10 Number of frames to be considere d for out-of-sync detection. UtranCell nInSyncInd 3 Number of frames to be considere d for in-sync detection. Dependencies: (nInSyncInd * 10 ms) < rlFailureT UtranCell rlFailureT 10 Guard period before sending RL F ailure.Dependencies: rlFailureT > (nInSyncInd * 10 ms) Unit: 0.1 s UtranCell tmCongActionNg 800 Interval between periodic conges tion-resolution actions targeting the non-guaranteed traffic class connections i n this cell.The default setting is a reference case setting.However, the actual setting may need to deviate from the default, depending on the UtranCell releaseAseDlNg 3 Amount of ASE in the downlink to be released with each periodic congestion-resolution action targeting the non-g

    uaranteed traffic class connections in this cell.The default setting is a refere nce case setting. However, the actual setting may need to devia UtranCell tmInitialG 3000 Minimum time before congestion-r esolution actions are initiated on guaranteed traffic class connections in this cell, after detection of downlink cell congestion. The default setting is a refe rence case setting. However, the actual setting may need to dev UtranCell directedRetryTarget Reference to the Externa lGsmCell MO, containing the specification of this Load Sharing via Directed Retr y target cell. Special values: The default value empty indicates that no referen ce to any ExternalGsmCell is defined. UtranCell loadSharingGsmThreshold 75 Defines percentage of th e guaranteed non-handover admission limit (pwrAdm) above which Directed Retry sh ould be invoked Example: If the value of loadSharingGsmThreshold is set to 100 t hen this means that the threshold at which voice calls are directed to UtranCell loadSharingGsmFraction 100 Defines percentage of Sp eech calls that can be directed to GSM after the loadSharingGsmThreshold has bee n exceeded Example: If the value of loadSharingGsmFraction is set to 0, this mea ns no voice calls subject to Directed Retry should be directed to GSM ( UtranCell hardIfhoCorr 3 Correction factor to be used in the calculation of initial power for SRB in hard inter frequency handover situat ions. Unit: dB UtranCell hsdpaUsersAdm 10 Admission limit for the number o f users assigned to the HS-PDSCH/HS-SCCH in the cell. This limit is applicable b oth to HSDPA RAB setup and to channel switching. Change takes effect: Immediatel y UtranCell loadSharingMargin 0 Offset added to the down link power of this cell at inter-frequency load sharing evaluation. Unit: % Chan ge takes effect: Immediately UtranCell sf4AdmUl 1000 Admission limit for non-guarante ed traffic class connections with UL SF = 4. Maximum number of radio links with Spreading Factor = 4 in the uplink (UL SF = 4) for which new admission requests for non-guaranteed traffic classes with admission class handov UtranCell sf16gAdm 16 Admission limit for guaranteed t raffic class connections with DL SF = 16. Maximum number of radio links with Spr eading Factor = 16 in the downlink (DL SF = 16) for which new admission requests for guaranteed traffic classes will continue to be allowed.Rea UtranCell sHcsRat 3 RAT specific threshold in the serving ce ll used in the inter-RAT measurement rules.This parameter is used by the UE to d ecide when to start GSM measurements for cell reselection,if the serving cell is indicated to belong to a Hierarchical Cell Structure ( UtranCell sf8AdmUl 50 Admission limit for non-guarante ed traffic class connections with UL SF = 8. Maximum number of radio links with Spreading Factor = 8 in the uplink (UL SF = 8) for which new admission requests for non-guaranteed traffic classes with admission class handov UtranCell sf16AdmUl 50 Admission limit for non-guarante ed traffic class connections with UL SF = 16. Maximum number of radio links with Spreading Factor = 16 in the uplink (UL SF = 16) for which new admission reques ts for non-guaranteed traffic classes with admission class han UtranCell sf8gAdmUl 8 Admission limit for guaranteed t raffic class connections with UL SF = 8. Maximum number of radio links with Spre ading Factor = 8 in the uplink (UL SF = 8) for which new admission requests for guaranteed traffic classes with admission class handover or UtranCell uraRef Reference to the URA MO. There can be 0 or a maximum of 4 URAs per cell. UtranCell agpsEnabled 0 Indicates that this cell is cons idered to be A-GPS capable for emergency calls. For an emergency call, if any of the cells in the active set has agpsEnabled==TRUE, then a positioning attempt w ill be made within UTRAN rather than handling the call over to UtranCell eulServingCellUsersAdm 0 Admission threshold for the number of E-DCH users having this cell as serving cell.Includes both 2 ms TT

    I and 10 ms TTI users. Change takes effect: Immediately UtranCell eulNonServingCellUsersAdm 100 Admission thresh old for the number of E-DCH users having this cell as non-serving cell. Change t akes effect: Immediately UtranCell codeLoadThresholdDlSf128 100 Code load thresh old to be used in the initial AMR rate selection algorithm for selecting SF128 o r SF256 based AMR codec modes in setup of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total code load. Only applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RA UtranCell pwrLoadThresholdDlSpeech Contains downlin k power threshold values used for AMR rate selection. UtranCell aseLoadThresholdUlSpeech Contains uplink ASE threshold values used for AMR rate selection. UtranCell rateSelectionPsInteractive Configuration of preferred rate for PS Interactive RABs. This attribute is not used if either th e dynamic RAB establishment feature or the flexible initial rate selection featu re is not active for PS Interactive. Used by the Channel Switching and Connecti UtranCell accessClassesBarredCs FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE (0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALS E(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) Specifies which access classes are barred for th e CS domain for the feature Domain Specific Access Class Barring.Each boolean in the sequence represents one access class. The access class is restricted by set ting the boolean to TRUE ('barred'), otherwise UtranCell accessClassesBarredPs FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE (0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALS E(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) Specifies which access classes are barred for th e PS domain for the feature Domain Specific Access Class Barring.Each boolean in the sequence represents one access class. The access class is restricted by set ting the boolean to TRUE ('barred'), otherwise UtranCell hcsSib3Config Specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure Information Elements in System Information Block 3. UtranCell hcsUsage Specifies the Information Elemen ts Use of HCS in System Information Blocks 11 and 12. UtranCell amrWbRateUlMax 0 Maximum AMR-WB rate to be used i n the uplink for selecting the maximum rate at setup of an AMR-WB RAB.Only appli cable for requests including AMR-WB. Unit: bps UtranCell amrWbRateDlMax 0 Maximum AMR-WB rate to be used i n the downlink for selecting the maximum rate at setup of an AMR-WB RAB.Only app licable for requests including AMR-WB. Unit: bps UtranCell antennaPosition Contains the WGS84 location for the antenna position of each cell.Change takes effect: New connections UtranCell ctchOccasionPeriod 255 Period of CTCH allocatio ns on S-CCPCH.The CTCH occasions are identified by the first radio frame of the TTI that can contain CTCH data. The CTCH occasions are fixed on the system frame number cycle 0..4095 (no modulo calculation) and thus repeated cyclica UtranCell cellBroadcastSac 0 Cell Broadcast Service A rea Code within a location area.Special values: Not defined is indicated by the value -1. Change takes effect: Immediately UtranCell eulServingCellUsersAdmTti2 4 Admission thresh old for the number of 2 ms TTI E-DCH users having this cell as serving cell.Appl icable at serving cell change, at RAB establishment and at reconfiguration to EU L.Unit: E-DCH user Change takes effect: Immediately Dependencies: If the value UtranCell standAloneSrbSelector SRB136(1) Defines whether SRB DCH 3.4, SRB DCH 13.6 or SRB on HS should be used as Stand-alone SRB in the cell(s).When set to SRB34, SRB is setup on DCH(3.4)/DCH(3.4). When set to SRB136 , SRB is setup on DCH(13.6)/DCH(13.6). When set to SRBHS, SRB is setup on HS if UtranCell amrNbSelector 0 Defines whether AMR-NB single-ra te or AMR-NB multi-rate should be supported in the cell. If any of the cells in the active set is configured to SINGLE_RATE, AMR-NB single-rate will be selected . UtranCell mocnCellProfileRef Reference to a profile c

    ontaining settings for the Cell MOCN feature for this cell. This attribute must contain a valid reference when the Cell MOCN feature is active. Change takes eff ect: New connections UtranCell transmissionScheme 0 Transmission technique f or this cell. Change takes effect: Object disabled/enabled UtranCell spare 0 Spare attribute. It is intended for temp orary solutions and its usage may vary depending on RNC release. UtranCell loadBasedHoSupport 0 Enables or disables the feature Load Based Handover for Speech in this cell. Change takes effect: Ongoin g connections UtranCell loadBasedHoType 0 Determines whether GSM LBHO or I F Inter-frequency LBHO shall be used. Dependencies: Only used when loadBasedHoSu pport is set to TRUE. This attribute is license-dependant. Change takes effect: Next soft congestion trigger UtranCell fdpchSupport Capability information indicatin g if F-DPCH is supported in the cell as reported by RBS in RSI and Audit respons e. UtranCell cbsSchedulePeriodLength Number of consecutive CT CH occasions scheduled on S-CCPCH that, together with the CTCH occasion period ( configured through UtranCell::ctchOccasionPeriod), define a CBS Schedule Period. Note: Value 256 is not a valid setting according to 3GPP 25.324 and sh UtranCell ganHoEnabled 0 Indicates if GAN Handover is ena bled from this cell.Dependencies: Not used if the license ganMobility is not act ive. Change takes effect: At next evaluation of conditions for allowing a GAN me asurement UtranCell serviceRestrictions Indicates which services are restricted in this cell. UtranCell cpcSupport Indicates if CPC is supported in this cell as reported by RBS. UtranCell hsIflsThreshUsers 0 Threshold for triggering HS interfrequency load sharing in the source cell, relative to the admission li mit hsdpaUsersAdm. If more than hsIflsThreshUsers/100 * hsdpaUsersAdm HS users a re present when a RAB transition is being evaluated, load sharing is tr UtranCell hsIflsMarginUsers 0 Margin for HS interfrequ ency load sharing, relative to the admission limit hsdpaUsersAdm. When calculati ng remaining free resources in the cell during evaluation of a RAB transition, t his margin is subtracted from the result, making the cell look more loa UtranCell dchIflsThreshPower 0 Threshold for triggering DCH interfrequency load sharing for rel99 DCH, relative to maximum downlink car rier power utilization. If DL non-HS power + HS required power > dchIflsThreshPo wer/100 when a RAB transition is being evaluated, load sharing is trigg UtranCell dchIflsThreshCode 0 Threshold for triggering DCH interfrequency load sharing for rel99 DCH, relative to downlink code tree u tilization. If DL code tree utilization > dchIflsThreshCode/100 when a RAB trans ition is being evaluated, load sharing is triggered. Setting this param UtranCell dchIflsMarginPower 0 Margin for DCH interfreq uency load sharing, relative to maximum downlink carrier power utilization. When calculating remaining free resources in the cell during evaluation of a RAB tra nsition, this margin is subtracted from the result, making the cell loo UtranCell dchIflsMarginCode 0 Margin for DCH interfreq uency load sharing, relative to downlink code tree utilization. When calculating remaining free resources in the cell during evaluation of a RAB transition, thi s margin is subtracted from the result, making the cell look more loade UtranCell pathlossThreshold 0 Pathloss threshold. A pa thloss check is performed before triggering a blind IFHO to a candidate cell, wh en performing load sharing from DCH state. If the pathloss is higher than this t hreshold, the blind IFHO is not allowed. Change takes effect: Immediate UtranCell iflsMode 0 Defines the types of RAB reconfi guration that can trigger load sharing actions. Can be set to RAB Establishment, Upswitch attempts caused by channel switching, or both. Change takes effect: Im

    mediately UtranCell aseLoadThresholdUlSpeech.amr12200 100 Threshol d to be used in the initial AMR rate selection algorithm for selecting AMR12.2 s peech codec in setup of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total uplink ASE load. Only applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RAB.Unit: % Cha nge tak UtranCell aseLoadThresholdUlSpeech.amr5900 100 Threshol d to be used in the initial AMR rate selection algorithm for selecting AMR5.9 sp eech codec in setup of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total uplink A SE load. Only applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RAB.Unit: % Chan ge take UtranCell aseLoadThresholdUlSpeech.amr7950 100 Threshol d to be used in the initial AMR rate selection algorithm for selecting AMR7.95 s peech codec in setup of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total uplink ASE load. Only applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RAB.Unit: % Cha nge tak UtranCell antennaPosition.latitude 0 Latitude value ( N), derived by the formula: N <= (2^23) * (X / 90) < (N + 1) where X is the lati tude in degrees (0??..90??). Unit: latitude unit UtranCell antennaPosition.latitudeSign 0 The direction (n orth or south) of the latitude value. UtranCell antennaPosition.longitude 0 Longitude value (N), derived by the formula: N <= (2^24) * (X / 360) < (N + 1) where X is the lo ngitude in degrees (-180??..+180??). Unit: longitude unit Resolution: 1 UtranCell hcsSib3Config.hcsPrio 0 Specifies the value of t he Information Element HCS_PRIO in System information Block 3. Specification: 3G PP TS 25.331 UtranCell hcsSib3Config.qHcs 0 Specifies the value of t he Information Element Qhcs in System information Block 3. Specification: 3GPP T S 25.331 UtranCell hcsSib3Config.sSearchHcs -105 Specifies the va lue of the Information Element SsearchHCS in System information Block 3. Unit: d B Resolution: 2 Specification: 3GPP TS 25.331 UtranCell hcsUsage.connectedMode FALSE(0) Specifies the va lue of the Information Element Use of HCS in System information Block 12. Specif ication: 3GPP TS 25.331 UtranCell hcsUsage.idleMode FALSE(0) Specifies the va lue of the Information Element Use of HCS in System information Block 11.Specifi cation: 3GPP TS 25.331 UtranCell pwrLoadThresholdDlSpeech.amr12200 100 Threshol d to be used in the initial AMR rate selection algorithm for selecting AMR12.2 s peech codec in setup of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total downlin k power load. Only applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RAB.Unit: % Change UtranCell pwrLoadThresholdDlSpeech.amr5900 100 Threshol d to be used in the initial AMR rate selection algorithm for selecting AMR5.9 sp eech codec in setup of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total downlink power load. Only applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RAB.Unit: % Change UtranCell pwrLoadThresholdDlSpeech.amr7950 100 Threshol d to be used in the initial AMR rate selection algorithm for selecting AMR7.95 s peech codec in setup of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total downlin k power load. Only applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RAB. Unit: % Chang UtranCell rateSelectionPsInteractive.channelType 0 Defines whether FACH or DCH is selected for PS Interactive RABs. If the dynamic RAB esta blishment feature is not active for PS Interactive, then DCH is used for all PS Interactive RABs. Value mapping: FACH: PS Interactive RABs are established on co mmon ch UtranCell rateSelectionPsInteractive.dlPrefRate 0 Preferre

    d target rate in the downlink for upswitching. Applicable both when setting up a non-HSDPA PS Interactive RAB, and when increasing the downlink rate of a PS int eractive RAB from a rate below the preferred rate. If the flexible initial rate selecti UtranCell rateSelectionPsInteractive.ulPrefRate 0 Preferre d target rate in the uplink for upswitching. Applicable both when setting up a n on-EUL PS Interactive RAB, and when increasing the uplink rate of a PS interacti ve RAB from a rate below the preferred rate. If the flexible initial rate select ion fea UtranCell serviceRestrictions.csVideoCalls 0 Indicate s if CS Video Calls are restricted or not.Change takes effect: Cell unlocked. UtranNetwork UtranNetworkId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. UtranNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities List of alias PLMN ident ities for the Selective Handover feature. See the class description of UtranRela tion for more details. Dependencies:Only used if Handover::selHoSup = TRUE and M OCN is not used. UtranNetwork plmnIdentity The PLMN identity of this UTRAN Network. UtranNetwork reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to this MO.See references in IurLink and CnOperator. UtranNetwork userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. UtranNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN i dentity used in the radio network. UtranNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN i dentity used in the radio network. UtranNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities.mncLength 0 The length of th e MNC part of a PLMN identity used in the radio network Unit: digit UtranNetwork plmnIdentity.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN i dentity used in the radio network. UtranNetwork plmnIdentity.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN i dentity used in the radio network. UtranNetwork plmnIdentity.mncLength 0 The length of the MNC pa rt of a PLMN identity used in the radio network Unit: digit UtranRelation adjacentCell Reference to UtranCell (RNC or T DRNC mirror) or ExternalUtranCell (SubNetwork) which contains the specification of the adjacent cell. Even though this is not a restricted attribute it can only be set by an operator upon MO creation and cannot be modified UtranRelation UtranRelationId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. UtranRelation nodeRelationType Type of RNC node relatio n. UtranRelation frequencyRelationType Type of frequency relati on. An intra-frequency relation has the same channel number in the uplink for bo th cells in the relation (uarfcnUl), and the same number in the downlink for bot h cells in the relation (uarfcnDl). Otherwise it is considered an inter UtranRelation qOffset1sn 0 Signal strength offset between s ource and target cells. used when the IE cell_selection_and_reselection_quality_ measure in SIB 11/22 is set to CPICH RSCP.This is configured through UtranCell:: qualMeasQuantity. Unit: dB UtranRelation qOffset2sn 0 Signal strength offset between s ource and target cells. used when the IE cell_selection_and_reselection_quality_ measure in SIB 11/22 is set to CPICH Ec/No. UtranRelation utranCellRef Reference to the UtranCell or Ex ternalUtranCell MO that contains the specification of the adjacent cell. UtranRelation loadSharingCandidate 0 Identifies whether the t arget cell is an inter-frequency load sharing candidate of the source cell. In o rder to set the value to TRUE (and thus define the target cell as a candidate fo

    r IFLS), the target cell and the source cell must belong to the same RB UtranRelation selectionPriority 0 Selection priority among neighbour UTRAN relations for a UTRAN source cell. The neighbor cell priority i s used when building the monitored set, so that neighbor cells with higher prior ity are included before low priority neighbors, for each cell in the ac UtranRelation hcsSib11Config Specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure Information Elements in System Information Block 11. UtranRelation hcsSib11Config.hcsPrio 0 Specifies the value of t he Information Element HCS_PRIO for a neighboring cell in System information Blo ck 11. Specification: 3GPP TS 25.331 UtranRelation hcsSib11Config.penaltyTime 0 Specifies the va lue of the Information Element Penalty_time for a neighboring cell in System inf ormation Block 11. Unit: s Resolution: 10 Specification: 3GPP TS 25.331 UtranRelation hcsSib11Config.qHcs 0 Specifies the value of t he Information Element Qhcs for a neighboring cell in System information Block 1 1. Specification: 3GPP TS 25.331 UtranRelation hcsSib11Config.temporaryOffset1 0 Specifies the va lue of the Information Element Temporary_offset1 for a neighboring cell in Syste m information Block 11. The value 0 is used to represent infinity. Unit: dB Reso lution: 3 Specification: 3GPP TS 25.331 UtranRelation hcsSib11Config.temporaryOffset2 0 Specifies the va lue of the Information Element Temporary_offset2 for a neighboring cell in Syste m information Block 11. The value 0 is used to represent infinity. Unit: dB Spec ification: 3GPP TS 25.331 Vc11Ttp administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Vc11Ttp tuAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Timing Unit 11 (TU11) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable reporting . false - disable reporting. Vc11Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vc11Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vc11Ttp vcRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm VC11 Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - repor ting disabled. Vc11Ttp shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, administra tiveState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s Vc11Ttp Vc11TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vc11Ttp vcDegThreshold 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% Vc11Ttp vcDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. Vc11Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vc11Ttp hgTsAllocation DISTRIBUTED(1) The attribute can be set only if there are no DS0 bundles connected to handling groups that are carried within t his VC11 frame. Vc11Ttp administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Vc11Ttp tuAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Timing Unit 11 (TU11) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable reporting . false - disable reporting. Vc11Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vc11Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vc11Ttp vcRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm VC11 Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - repor ting disabled. Vc11Ttp shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, administra

    tiveState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s Vc11Ttp Vc11TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vc11Ttp vcDegThreshold 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% Vc11Ttp vcDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. Vc11Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vc11Ttp hgTsAllocation DISTRIBUTED(1) The attribute can be set only if there are no DS0 bundles connected to handling groups that are carried within t his VC11 frame. Vc11Ttp administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Vc11Ttp tuAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Timing Unit 11 (TU11) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable reporting . false - disable reporting. Vc11Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vc11Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vc11Ttp vcRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm VC11 Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - repor ting disabled. Vc11Ttp shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, administra tiveState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s Vc11Ttp Vc11TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vc11Ttp vcDegThreshold 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% Vc11Ttp vcDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. Vc11Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vc11Ttp hgTsAllocation DISTRIBUTED(1) The attribute can be set only if there are no DS0 bundles connected to handling groups that are carried within t his VC11 frame. Vc12Ttp Vc12TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vc12Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vc12Ttp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path trace. The string can be a maximum of 15 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non -empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL charact ers. The string consists of the characters A - Z, a - z, Vc12Ttp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The str ing can be of a maximum of 15 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non -empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL charact ers. The string can consist of the characters A - Z, a - z Vc12Ttp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) downs tream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of the TIM de tection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Vc12Ttp vcDegThreshold 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% Vc12Ttp vcDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. Vc12Ttp tuAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Timing Unit 12 (TU12) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable reporting . false - disable reporting. Vc12Ttp vcRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm VC12 Remote

    Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - repor ting disabled. Vc12Ttp administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Vc12Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vc12Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vc12Ttp shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, administra tiveState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s Vc12Ttp Vc12TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vc12Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vc12Ttp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path trace. The string can be a maximum of 15 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non -empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL charact ers. The string consists of the characters A - Z, a - z, Vc12Ttp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The str ing can be of a maximum of 15 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non -empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL charact ers. The string can consist of the characters A - Z, a - z Vc12Ttp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) downs tream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of the TIM de tection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Vc12Ttp vcDegThreshold 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% Vc12Ttp vcDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. Vc12Ttp tuAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Timing Unit 12 (TU12) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable reporting . false - disable reporting. Vc12Ttp vcRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm VC12 Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - repor ting disabled. Vc12Ttp administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Vc12Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vc12Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vc12Ttp shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, administra tiveState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s Vc12Ttp Vc12TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vc12Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vc12Ttp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path trace. The string can be a maximum of 15 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non -empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL charact ers. The string consists of the characters 0 to 9, A to Vc12Ttp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The str ing can be of a maximum of 15 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non -empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL charact ers. The string can consist of the characters 0 to 9, A Vc12Ttp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) downs tream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of the TIM de tection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Vc12Ttp vcDegThreshold 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1%

    Vc12Ttp vcDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. Vc12Ttp tuAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Timing Unit 12 (TU12) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable reporting . false - disable reporting. Vc12Ttp vcRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm VC12 Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - repor ting disabled. Vc12Ttp administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Vc12Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vc12Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vc12Ttp shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, administra tiveState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s Vc3Ttp auAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Administrati ve Unit (AU3) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable repor ting. false - disable reporting. Vc3Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vc3Ttp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The str ing can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-em pty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL characters . The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR an Vc3Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vc3Ttp pathTraceFormat 0 Indicates the format of the attributes, expectedPathtrace and transmittedPathtrace. The format may be in 16 or 64 charac ters. Usually, 16 is used for ETSI and 64 for ANSI/TTC. ITU_T_G707=16 GR_253_COR E=64 The 16-character format requires that 15 character Vc3Ttp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path trace. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non -empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL charact ers. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR Vc3Ttp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) downs tream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of the TIM de tection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Vc3Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vc3Ttp Vc3TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vc3Ttp vcDegThreshold 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% Vc3Ttp vcDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. Vc3Ttp vcRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm VC3 Remote D efect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - enable reporting. false - disable reporting. Vc3Ttp auAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Administrati ve Unit (AU3) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable repor ting. false - disable reporting. Vc3Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vc3Ttp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The str ing can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-em pty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL characters . The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR an Vc3Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vc3Ttp pathTraceFormat 0 Indicates the format of the attributes, expectedPathtrace and transmittedPathtrace. The format may be in 16 or 64 charac

    ters. Usually, 16 is used for ETSI and 64 for ANSI/TTC. ITU_T_G707=16 GR_253_COR E=64 The 16-character format requires that 15 character Vc3Ttp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path trace. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non -empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL charact ers. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR Vc3Ttp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) downs tream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of the TIM de tection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Vc3Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vc3Ttp Vc3TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vc3Ttp vcDegThreshold 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% Vc3Ttp vcDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. Vc3Ttp vcRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm VC3 Remote D efect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - enable reporting. false - disable reporting. Vc3Ttp auAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Administrati ve Unit (AU3) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable repor ting. false - disable reporting. Vc3Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vc3Ttp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The str ing can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-em pty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL characters . The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR an Vc3Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vc3Ttp pathTraceFormat 0 Indicates the format of the attributes, expectedPathtrace and transmittedPathtrace. The format may be in 16 or 64 charac ters. Usually, 16 is used for ETSI and 64 for ANSI/TTC. ITU_T_G707=16 GR_253_COR E=64 The 16-character format requires that 15 character Vc3Ttp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path trace. The string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non -empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL charact ers. The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR Vc3Ttp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) downs tream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of the TIM de tection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Vc3Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vc3Ttp Vc3TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vc3Ttp vcDegThreshold 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% Vc3Ttp vcDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. Vc3Ttp vcRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm VC3 Remote D efect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - enable reporting. false - disable reporting. Vc4Ttp Vc4TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vc4Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vc4Ttp pathTraceFormat 0 Indicates the format of the attributes, expectedPathtrace and transmittedPathtrace. The format may be in 16 or 64 charac ters. Usually, 16 is used for ETSI and 64 for ANSI/TTC. ITU_T_G707=16 GR_253_COR

    E=64 The 16-character format requires that 15 character Vc4Ttp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path trace. Can be defined in either 16-character format for ETSI or 64-character format for TTC . The string can be a maximum of 15 or 62 characters in length, or an empty stri ng (). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded Vc4Ttp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. Can be defined in either 16-character format for ETSI, or 64-character format for TTC. The string can be a maximum of 15 or 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded au Vc4Ttp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) downs tream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of the TIM de tection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Vc4Ttp vcDegThreshold 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% Vc4Ttp vcDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. Vc4Ttp auAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Administrati ve Unit (AU4) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable repor ting. false - disable reporting. Vc4Ttp vcRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm VC4 Remote D efect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - enable reporting. false - disable reporting. Vc4Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vc4Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vc4Ttp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Vc4Ttp Vc4TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vc4Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vc4Ttp pathTraceFormat 0 Indicates the format of the attributes, expectedPathtrace and transmittedPathtrace. The format may be in 16 or 64 charac ters. Usually, 16 is used for ETSI and 64 for ANSI/TTC. ITU_T_G707=16 GR_253_COR E=64 The 16-character format requires that 15 character Vc4Ttp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path trace. Can be defined in either 16-character format for ETSI or 64-character format for TTC . The string can be a maximum of 15 or 62 characters in length, or an empty stri ng (). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded Vc4Ttp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. Can be defined in either 16-character format for ETSI, or 64-character format for TTC. The string can be a maximum of 15 or 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded au Vc4Ttp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) downs tream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of the TIM de tection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Vc4Ttp vcDegThreshold 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% Vc4Ttp vcDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. Vc4Ttp auAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Administrati ve Unit (AU4) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable repor ting. false - disable reporting. Vc4Ttp vcRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm VC4 Remote D efect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - enable reporting. false - disable reporting. Vc4Ttp operationalState The operational state.

    Vc4Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vc4Ttp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Vc4Ttp Vc4TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vc4Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vc4Ttp pathTraceFormat 0 Indicates the format of the attributes, expectedPathtrace and transmittedPathtrace. The format may be in 16 or 64 charac ters. Usually, 16 is used for ETSI and 64 for ANSI/TTC. ITU_T_G707=16 GR_253_COR E=64 The 16-character format requires that 15 character Vc4Ttp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path trace. Can be defined in either 16-character format for ETSI or 64-character format for TTC . The string can be a maximum of 15 or 62 characters in length, or an empty stri ng (). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded Vc4Ttp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. Can be defined in either 16-character format for ETSI, or 64-character format for TTC. The string can be a maximum of 15 or 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-empty string not being of full length is padded au Vc4Ttp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) downs tream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of the TIM de tection. true - enabled. false - disabled. Vc4Ttp vcDegThreshold 0 Specifies how many of the received block s are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the th reshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1% Vc4Ttp vcDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a Degraded Signal alarm. Vc4Ttp auAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Administrati ve Unit (AU4) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable repor ting. false - disable reporting. Vc4Ttp vcRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm VC4 Remote D efect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - enable reporting. false - disable reporting. Vc4Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vc4Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vc4Ttp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. VclTp VclTpId The value component of the RDN. VclTp userLabel Label for free use. VclTp externalVci Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) The ide ntifier for this Virtual Channel Link (VCL). VclTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserve thi s MO instance. VclTp operationalState The operational state. VclTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. VclTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM counters ar e activated for this MO instance, when a Performance Monitoring is created from the PMS interface. If true, this attribute activates only PM counters of type PD F, for this MO instance. VclTp atmTrafficDescriptorId Reference to an instance of AtmT rafficDescriptor MO. If this reference is set to an new AtmTrafficDescriptor and the VclTp is linked to (reserved by) an Aal2PathVccTp, the Aal2PathVccTp must b e locked in order to allow other than bandwidth changes. VclTp VclTpId The value component of the RDN. VclTp userLabel Label for free use. VclTp externalVci Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) The ide ntifier for this Virtual Channel Link (VCL).

    VclTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserve thi s MO instance. VclTp operationalState The operational state. VclTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. VclTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM counters ar e activated for this MO instance, when a Performance Monitoring is created from the PMS interface. If true, this attribute activates only PM counters of type PD F, for this MO instance. VclTp atmTrafficDescriptorId Reference to an instance of AtmT rafficDescriptor MO. If this reference is set to an new AtmTrafficDescriptor and the VclTp is linked to (reserved by) an Aal2PathVccTp, the Aal2PathVccTp must b e locked in order to allow other than bandwidth changes. VclTp VclTpId The value component of the RDN. VclTp userLabel Label for free use. VclTp externalVci Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) The ide ntifier for this Virtual Channel Link (VCL). VclTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserve thi s MO instance. VclTp operationalState The operational state. VclTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. VclTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM counters ar e activated for this MO instance, when a Performance Monitoring is created from the PMS interface. If true, this attribute activates only PM counters of type PD F, for this MO instance. VclTp atmTrafficDescriptorId Reference to an instance of AtmT rafficDescriptor MO. If this reference is set to an new AtmTrafficDescriptor and the VclTp is linked to (reserved by) an Aal2PathVccTp, the Aal2PathVccTp must b e locked in order to allow other than bandwidth changes. VirtualPath VirtualPathId VirtualPath userLabel Provides support for putting a l abel on the MO instance. , VirtualPath vplTpARef The FDN of the first virtual pat h termination point (VplTp MO or ExternalVplTp MO) for this virtual path. VirtualPath vplTpBRef TThe FDN of the second virtual p ath termination point (VplTp MO or ExternalVplTp MO) for this virtual path. Vlan reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that res erve this MO instance. Vlan userLabel Label for free use. Vlan vid The VLAN Identifier. Each value within the speci fied value range can be used by only one VLAN instance. Disturbances: Changing t his attribute may cause traffic disturbances. Vlan VlanId The value component of the RDN. Vlan vlanType 0 The type of the VLAN. Only one VLAN inst ance can be configured with vlanType set to INTERNAL_IP_TRANSPORT. Only one VLAN instance can be configured with vlanType set to BOARD_INTERNAL. VpcTp VpcTpId The value component of the RDN. VpcTp userLabel Label for free use. VpcTp operationalState The operational state. VpcTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. VpcTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VP end-to-end continui ty check is active. Continuity Checking (CC) means that a cell is sent downstrea m when no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second. The contin uity check both enables generation of CC cells as well VpcTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the type of p erformance monitoring mode (that is, activation of bidirectional PM measurements ). VpcTp nomPmBlkSize 0 Nominal performance monitoring (PM) bloc

    ksize. The minimum number of ATM cells to send before sending a Forward Performa nce Monitoring (FPM) cell. VpcTp alarmReport 0 Specifies what type of alarms are report ed. VpcTp VpcTpId The value component of the RDN. VpcTp userLabel Label for free use. VpcTp operationalState The operational state. VpcTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. VpcTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VP end-to-end continui ty check is active. Continuity Checking (CC) means that a cell is sent downstrea m when no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second. The contin uity check both enables generation of CC cells as well VpcTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the type of p erformance monitoring mode (that is, activation of bidirectional PM measurements ). VpcTp nomPmBlkSize 0 Nominal performance monitoring (PM) bloc ksize. The minimum number of ATM cells to send before sending a Forward Performa nce Monitoring (FPM) cell. VpcTp alarmReport 0 Specifies what type of alarms are report ed. VpcTp VpcTpId The value component of the RDN. VpcTp userLabel Label for free use. VpcTp operationalState The operational state. VpcTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. VpcTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VP end-to-end continui ty check is active. Continuity Checking (CC) means that a cell is sent downstrea m when no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second. The contin uity check both enables generation of CC cells as well VpcTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the type of p erformance monitoring mode (that is, activation of bidirectional PM measurements ). VpcTp nomPmBlkSize 0 Nominal performance monitoring (PM) bloc ksize. The minimum number of ATM cells to send before sending a Forward Performa nce Monitoring (FPM) cell. VpcTp alarmReport 0 Specifies what type of alarms are report ed. VplTp VplTpId The value component of the RDN. VplTp userLabel Label for free use. VplTp operationalState The operational state. VplTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. VplTp externalVpi Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) The identi fier for this Virtual Path Link (VPL). VplTp atmTrafficDescriptor Reference to an instance of AtmT rafficDescriptor MO. VplTp VplTpId The value component of the RDN. VplTp userLabel Label for free use. VplTp operationalState The operational state. VplTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. VplTp externalVpi Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) The identi fier for this Virtual Path Link (VPL). VplTp atmTrafficDescriptor Reference to an instance of AtmT rafficDescriptor MO. VplTp VplTpId The value component of the RDN. VplTp userLabel Label for free use. VplTp operationalState The operational state. VplTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont

    ains details about operationalState. VplTp externalVpi Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) The identi fier for this Virtual Path Link (VPL). VplTp atmTrafficDescriptor Reference to an instance of AtmT rafficDescriptor MO. Vt15Ttp Vt15TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vt15Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vt15Ttp aisVreporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Alarm Indica tion Signal - V (AIS-V) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - repor ting disabled. Vt15Ttp rdiVreporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Remote Defec t Indication - V (RDI-V) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - repo rting disabled. Vt15Ttp shutDownTimer 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, administra tiveState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s Vt15Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vt15Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vt15Ttp administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Vt15Ttp Vt15TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vt15Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vt15Ttp aisVreporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Alarm Indica tion Signal - V (AIS-V) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - repor ting disabled. Vt15Ttp rdiVreporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Remote Defec t Indication - V (RDI-V) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - repo rting disabled. Vt15Ttp shutDownTimer 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, administra tiveState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s Vt15Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vt15Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vt15Ttp administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Vt15Ttp Vt15TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is se t automatically when the MO instance is created. Vt15Ttp userLabel Label for free use. Vt15Ttp aisVreporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Alarm Indica tion Signal - V (AIS-V) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - repor ting disabled. Vt15Ttp rdiVreporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Remote Defec t Indication - V (RDI-V) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - repo rting disabled. Vt15Ttp shutDownTimer 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires, administra tiveState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s Vt15Ttp operationalState The operational state. Vt15Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It cont ains details about operationalState. Vt15Ttp administrativeState 0 The administrative state. WcdmaCarrier WcdmaCarrierId Naming attribute.Contains the va lue part of the RDN. WcdmaCarrier uarfcnDl Downlink UTRA Absolute Radio Fre quency Channel Number. Specifies the channel number for the central downlink fre quency. The mapping from channel number to physical frequency is described in 3G PP specification TS 25.104. Dependencies: WcdmaCarrier instance WcdmaCarrier freqBand 0 Specifies the 3GPP frequency ban

    ds Value mapping: 0: unspecified 1: Band I 2: Band II 3: Band III 4: Band VI 5: Band IV 6: Band V 7: Band VII 8: Band VIII 9..22: Band IX to Band XXII Change ta kes effect: Ongoing connections WcdmaCarrier defaultHoType 0 Indicates the preferred HO type for the Active Set cell in the DRNC connected parent IurLink. Applicable when th e WcdmaCarrier instance is a child of an IurLink. Change takes effect: Ongoing c onnections WcdmaCarrier sib5bisEnabled 0 Indicates if the System Informat ion Block type 5bis will be broadcast instead of System Information Block type 5 . Applicable when the WcdmaCarrier instance is a child of RncFunction. WcdmaCarrier userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC. WebServer WebServerId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. WebServer userLabel Label for free use. WebServer reservedBySwAllocation Contains the SwAllocatio n instance that reserves this MO instance. Restriction: This MO instance can be reserved by only one instance of SwAllocation. WebServer WebServerId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. WebServer userLabel Label for free use. WebServer reservedBySwAllocation Contains the SwAllocatio n instance that reserves this MO instance. Restriction: This MO instance can be reserved by only one instance of SwAllocation. WebServer WebServerId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created. WebServer reservedBySwAllocation Contains the SwAllocatio n instance that reserves this MO instance. Restriction: This MO instance can be reserved by only one instance of SwAllocation. XalmDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of correspon ding device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specific ation: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC] XalmDeviceGroup XalmDeviceGroupId XalmDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DE PENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat XalmDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardwar e test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT ] XalmDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_308 Specification: I TU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC] XpProgram loadModule Reference to the corresponding L oadModule MO. It contains information for loading, that is, product data, load m odule file path and file size. The XpProgram MO may be created by the system and then this attribute may be set to NULL. However, when created XpProgram startState 0 Shows whether the XpProgram is a llowed to be used after an auxiliary unit restart (allowed if enabled). Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_311, AUC_312, AUC_318 Dependencies: Only 1 program is allowed to have the state ENABLED at the sam XpProgram XpProgramId

    You might also like